Final Construction Dcpl2009r0019 Specifications

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590
Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION SECTION TITLE
DOCUMENT 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00001 Project Title Page MJA
00010 Table of Contents MJA
00015 List of Drawings MJA
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING INFORMATION

Solicitation DCPL/SRS
Standard Contract Provisions Jan 2007 DCPL/SRS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100 Summary - ADDED CS/MJA/SRS
01125 Summary of Multiple Contracts CS/MJA/SRS
01210 Allowances CS/MJA/SRS
01250 Contract Modification Procedures CS/MJA/SRS
01270 Unit Prices CS/MJA/SRS
01290 Payment Procedures CS/MJA/SRS
01310 Project Management and Coordination CS/MJA/SRS
01320 Construction Progress Documentation CS/MJA/SRS
01322 Photographic Documentation CS/MJA/SRS
01330 Submittal Procedures CS/MJA/SRS
01350 Qualifications of Restoration Artisans and Craftsmen Subcontractors CS/MJA
01351 Special Procedures for Historic Treatment CS/MJA
01352 LEED Requirements CS/MJA/SRS
01400 Quality Requirements CS/MJA/SRS
01420 References CS/MJA/SRS
01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls CS/MJA/SRS
01524 Construction Waste Management CS/MJA/SRS
01600 Product Requirements CS/MJA/SRS
01635 Substitution Procedures CS/MJA/SRS
01700 Execution Requirements CS/MJA/SRS
01732 Selective Demolition CS/MJA/SRS
01770 Closeout Procedures CS/MJA/SRS
01781 Project Record Documents CS/MJA/SRS
01782 Operation and Maintenance Data CS/MJA/SRS
01810 General Commissioning Requirements SRS/Cx
01820 Demonstration and Training CS/MJA/SRS
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02080 Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods AMT
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 1/7

Italics indicates sections to be provided by DCPL’s consultants.
02230 Site Clearing AMT

02231 Tree Protection and Trimming LPA
02260 Excavation Support and Protection MJA
02300 Earthwork AMT
02361 Termite Control MJA
02371 Micro Piles RSD
02510 Water Distribution AMT
02530 Sanitary Sewerage AMT
02620 Subdrainage MJA
02630 Storm Drainage AMT
02751 Cement Concrete Pavement LPA
02764 Pavement Joint Sealants LPA
02780 Unit Pavers LPA
02781 Porous Unit Paving LPA
02826 Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates MJA
02870 Site Furnishings LPA
02920 Lawns and Grasses LPA
02930 Exterior Plants LPA
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast-in-place Concrete RSD
03541 Gypsum Underlayment MJA
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04720 Cast Stone - DELETED LPA
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies MJA/RSD
04860 Stone Masonry LPA
04901 Clay Masonry Cleaning and Restoration MJA
04902 Cast Stone Cleaning and Restoration MJA
04903 Marble Cleaning and Restoration. MJA
04904 Masonry Efflourescence Removal MJA
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 Structural Steel RSD
05310 Steel Deck RSD
05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing MJA/RSD
05500 Metal Fabrications RSD/MJA
05511 Metal Stairs MJA
05521 Pipe And Tube Railings MJA
05700 Ornamental Metal MJA
05710 Monumental Stairs and Railings MJA

05720 New Cast-Iron Railings to Match Historic MJA

05721 Ornamental Railings MJA
05811 Architectural Joint Systems MJA
05910 Ornamental Metal Cleaning MJA
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry MJA
06160 Sheathing MJA
06202 Interior Finish Carpentry MJA
06400 Interior Woodwork Refinishing MJA
06401 Exterior Architectural Woodwork MJA
06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork MJA
06410 Architectural Wood Casework HWA
06416 Stone Countertops - DELETED MJA
06614 Composite Countertops MJA
06642 GFRP (Cornice) MJA
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07123 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing (Concrete Deck & Between Slabs) MJA
07131 Self-adhering Sheet Waterproofing MJA
07140 Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing (Concrete & CMU) MJA
07162 Crystalline Waterproofing MJA
07210 Building Insulation MJA
07271 Self-adhering Sheet Air Barriers MJA
07315 Slate Shingles MJA
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim MJA
07811 Sprayed Fire-resistive Materials MJA
07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems MJA
07920 Joint Sealants MJA
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 Steel Frames - ADDED MJA
08113 Glass Firewall Window and Door System MJA
08211 Flush Wood Doors MJA
08212 Stile and Rail Wood Doors MJA
08290 Wood Door Refinishing MJA
08311 Access Doors and Frames MJA
08335 Self-Opening Coiling Grilles MJA
08352 Accordion Fire Door System MJA
08450 All-Glass Entrances MJA
08550 Wood Windows MJA

08592 Historic Treatment of Wood Windows MJA

08710 Door Hardware Hardware Consultant
08716 Automatic Door Operators for Historic Doors MJA
08800 Glazing MJA
08892 Glazing Repair MJA
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09111 Non-load-bearing Steel Framing MJA
09210 Plaster Cleaning and Repair - ADDED MJA
09215 Gypsum Veneer Plaster MJA
09250 Gypsum Board MJA
09265 Gypsum Board Shaft-wall Assemblies MJA
09280 Ornamental Plaster Replacement MJA
09310 Ceramic Tile MJA
09512 Acoustical Tile Ceilings MJA
09545 Ceiling Fabric Panels – DELETED MJA
09629 Cork Flooring MJA
09641 Bamboo Flooring - DELETED MJA
09651 Resilient Floor Tile MJA
09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories MJA
09654 Linoleum Floor Coverings & Desk Tops MJA
09680 Carpet MJA
09851 Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units - DELETED MJA
09911 Exterior Painting MJA
09912 Interior Painting MJA
09931 Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes MJA
09991 Encapsulation Coating System MJA
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10101 Visual Display Surfaces MJA
10155 Toilet Compartments MJA
10185 Unit Shower MJA
10200 Louvers and Vents MJA
10410 Directories TBD by DCPL
10431 Exterior Signage TBD by DCPL
10436 Exterior Post and Panel Signs TBD by DCPL
10449 Interior Signage TBD by DCPL
10505 Metal Lockers MJA
10522 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets MJA
10523 Fire Extinguishers MJA
10671 Metal Storage Shelving MJA

10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories MJA
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11054 Library Stack Systems HWA
11130 Audio-Visual Equipment Poly
11132 Projection Screens Poly
11451 Residential Appliances MJA
11510 Library Equipment (Book Trucks & Book Return Carts) HWA
11511 Library Book and Media Depository MJA
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12355 Institutional Casework MJA
12356 Kitchen Casework MJA
12484 Floor Mats and Frames MJA
12560 Library Furniture and Equipment MJA
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13730 Security Access DCPL’s Consultant ADT
13760 Video Surveillance DCPL’s Consultant ADT
13850 Fire Detection and Alarm DELETED AND REPLACED BY 16721 JJC
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14240 Hydraulic Elevators MJA
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials JJC
15055 Motors JJC
15075 Mechanical Identification JJC
15100 Valves JJC
15125 Pipe Expansion Joints JJC
15135 Meter and Gages JJC
15145 Hangers and Supports JJC
15181 Hydronic Piping JJC
15241 Mechanical Vibration Controls JJC
15260 Pipe Insulation JJC
15290 Duct Insulation JJC
15326 Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems JJC
15411 Water Distribution Piping JJC
15420 Drainage and Vent Piping JJC
15430 Plumbing Specialties JJC
15440 Plumbing Fixtures JJC

15452 Plumbing Pumps – ADDED JJC

15460 Water Heaters JJC
15496 Natural Gas Piping JJC
15513 Condensing Boilers JJC
15540 HVAC Pumps JJC
15545 Chemical Water Treatment JJC
15575 Breechings, Chimneys And Stacks JJC
15628 Air Cooled Packaged Chiller with Integral Pump Modules JJC
15763 Fan-Coil Units JJC
15785 Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Untis JJC
15830 Fans JJC
15835 Unit Heaters JJC
15855 Diffusers, Registers And Grilles JJC
15891 Metal Ductwork JJC
15899 Variable Frequency Drive Units JJC
15900 Direct Digital Control Systems JJC
15910 Duct Accessories JJC
15940 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls – Sequences of Operation JJC
15970 HVAC Controls JJC
15990 Testing, Adjusting And Balancing JJC
15995 Mechanical Systems Commissioning Cx
Division 16 – Electrical
16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods JJC
16051 Electrical System Protective Device Study JJC
16111 Conduit Systems JJC
16112 Busway JJC
16126 Cables, High Voltage (Above 600 Volts) JJC
16127 Cables, Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) JJC
16140 Wiring Devices JJC
16150 Motors JJC
16160 Panelboards JJC
16170 Disconnect Switches (Motor and Circuit) JJC
16430 Metering JJC
16450 Grounding JJC
16460 Transformers (General Purpose) JJC
16464 Switchgear, Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) JJC
16500 Lighting Fixtures Cutsheets and Schedule MCLA
16510 Building Lighting, Interior JJC
16511 Ornamental Lighting Cleaning and Restoration - DELETED MCLA
16520 Site Lighting JJC

16670 Lightning Protection System JJC

16721 Fire Detection and Alarm – ADDED (replacing 13850) JJC
16740 Communications and Data Poly
16995 Electrical Systems Commissioning Cx
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION POLY*/7590
SECTION 16740 - COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and any Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the installation of a structured telecommunications cabling plant (voice
and data communications cabling) as described in the attached specifications and drawings.
The contractor will be responsible for all parts, labor and other hardware directly associated
with the structured cabling system including, but not limited to:
1. Project Management, Scheduling and Quality Assurance

2. Permits, Licenses, Inspection Scheduling and Fees
3. Periodic Field Observations Reports
4. Inspections and Tests
5. Final Acceptance and Work Closeout
B. Work specified in this Section consists of all elements related to horizontal (station) and
backbone (riser) cabling for voice, data and video including, but not limited to:
1. Installation of Structured Telecommunication Cable Plant

2. Routing and Termination of all Station, Riser for Voice and Data Cabling
3. Installation of Workstation Faceplates and Jack Inserts
4. Installation of Floor Box Bezel Panels and Jack Inserts
5. Installation of Equipment Racks, Wall Racks, Patch Panels and Wiring Blocks
6. Installation of Vertical and Horizontal Wire Management
7. Installation of Cable Route Support (J-Hangers/Bridle Rings)
8. All Cable Testing, Labeling and As-Built Documentation
9. Firestop installation at all cable-related Penetrations of Fire-Rated Barriers
10. Provision of all Patch-Cords
11. Bonding of Racks and Frames to the Telecommunications Main Grounding
12. Busbar (TMGB) in the Main Equipment Room and to the TGB’s in the Telecom Closets.
C. Work specified also applies to the installation of small horizontal sleeves or firestop material
that will, from time to time, when not previously provided by others, be required when a cable
or cable bundle must penetrate a fire rated barrier while routing to a main or intermediate
wiring closet or equipment room (MDF/IDF). Coordinate the placement of all such work with
the Architect/Owner’s Representative prior to installation.
D. Related Work - Not Covered - in this Section or is “by Others”:
1. Coring, Sleeves, Stub-Ups and Poke-Through Installation

2. Plywood Backboards
3. Installation of Trench-duct or Walker Ducts
4. Electrical Circuits, Building Grounding System, Telecommunications Main Grounding
Bus (TMGB), Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) and TGB’s in the telecom
closets.
5. Equipment Room HVAC (Cooling / Heat Dissipation)
COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 1 / 16

6. Telephone and Data Equipment, Switches, Routers, Servers, Wireless Access Points,
UPS or other active electronic devices.
7. Final Cross Connection Placements (Patching) for Voice and Data systems.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This specification documents materials and installation requirements for the structured cable
plant with specified quantities for horizontal and backbone cabling, terminations and related
hardware to be included in the bid price.
B. A listing of the cable/outlet quantities by riser closet has been included in this section (below)
to facilitate gaining an overall understanding of the scope of work outlined herein. Quantities
and configurations of Cable Outlets and Cables shown on the contract documents are the
best estimates currently available. It is the responsibility of the bidder to verify the correct
final quantities from the construction drawings. A complete range of unit prices for additions
is specified in the bid form.
C. The system is based upon the installation of horizontal cable runs composed of a quantity of 1
to 6 (see contract drawings for actual cable count per outlet) four-pair Category-6 UTP
plenum-rated workstation cables at workstation outlets allowing 1 Gigabit Ethernet (1 GbE)
transmissions up to 90 Meters. Copper riser and vacant fiber optic innerduct (with pull rope)
to the Telco Entrance Demarcation is also part of this system.
D. Cable System Design Option
1. Pricing Option No.1 for Cabling will be to price (in lieu of conventional Category-6 UTP)
the use of 10-Gigabit Station Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP
shielded cable for voice and data this will include all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded
jacks, patch panels and patch cords for a complete compatible 10-GIG system.
OUTLET TYPE AND CABLE QUANTITY BY FLOOR


1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be according to Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.
B. Manufacturer's Literature: Submit three copies of the manufacturer's technical data for the
floor boxes to be used on this project.
C. Product Data: Upon contract award, submit complete list of all materials, components,
equipment, systems, and products proposed.
D. Design Drawings: In addition to the requirements of Section for “Submittal Procedures”

provide Floor plan drawings documenting working station outlet locations and jack quantities
in each building area with outlet/jack numbering identified.
E. Project Management Organization Chart:
1. Include the proposed Project Manager's (RCDD) resume. The Project Manager is to be
assigned for the duration of the project; any reassignment to be pre-approved by the
Owner. Provide a listing of any sub-contractors to be used on this project, contact
information and synopsis of background, experience particularly on Contractor's past
projects.
F. Project Documentation: As part of the installation, the Contractor shall provide detailed
documentation of the structured wiring system to facilitate system administration, system
maintenance and future system changes. This requirement includes:
1. Record drawings with all cables and cable routes identified and a cable record
document, which facilitates the cross-connection of the voice riser system to the
station, cable system and the fiber optic data riser to the network electronics.
2. All labeled infrastructure shall be shown in the documentation.
3. Provide documents electronically in AutoCAD and PDF, Spreadsheets in Excel and
Text in MS Word format as most suited to the material.
4. System test data signed and dated by the Contractor shall also be provided to establish
the baseline performance of the system.
5. All test documentation shall be printed out, bound and formally submitted for
acceptance. An electronic copy shall also be provided in Owner approved electronic
format with accompanying software used to create report.
6. All cable test documentation shall be printed out, bound and formally submitted for
acceptance. An electronic copy shall also be provided in Owner approved electronic
format with accompanying software used to create report and shall include, but limited
to run, length, jack number and actual passing test results.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: The Contractor shall have prior successful experience on a minimum
of three (3) projects preferred similar in size and scope to this offer. In terms of the Cable
Pricing Option 001 for Cat-6A F/UTP 10-GIG cabling, in lieu of the F/UTP experience,
successful Category-6 experience will be acceptable if, along with references, the Contractor
submits a statement from the Cable Manufacturer stating that the Manufacturer’s standard
warranties will apply.
B. Labeling Requirements: Raceways, boxes and fittings shall be Underwriters' Laboratories,

Inc. (UL) listed and labeled. UL listing and labeling will not be required if it can be shown that
raceways and boxes meet the requirements of another nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL).Required licenses and permits including any required bonding or insurance

requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract

documentation.
C. Project Manager/Project Designer Qualifications: A qualified individual(s) with current

certification by BICSI as a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD®).
D. All work performed on this project will be installed in accordance with the latest editions of the
following standards which are incorporated by reference:
1. The National Electric Code

2. The National Electrical Safety Code
3. The National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) - NFPA 70
4. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Standard for Installing Commercial Telecommunications Cabling
5. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-10 for Augmented Category-6 Cabling
6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard
7. ANSI/J-STD-607-A Grounding and Bonding Requirements
8. ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A Standard for Communications Pathways
9. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
10. BICSI Cabling Installation Manual
11. All local codes and ordinances.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty will be in effect at Substantial Completion.
B. All materials and workmanship hereinafter specified and furnished shall be fully warranted by
the contractor and/or manufacturer for a minimum or fifteen (15) years against any defects
which may occur as the result of faulty materials or workmanship after installation acceptance
by the Owner. Any such defects shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner. The Manufacturer’s standard warranties will remain otherwise.
1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION / STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The structured cabling system will be deemed acceptable when the Contractor delivers to the
Owner:
1. Passing Transmission test results on the Riser cabling.

2. Passing Transmission test results on the Horizontal Station Cabling.
3. Passing Transmission test results on the Fiber Optic Backbone cables (if any).
4. As-Built Documentation showing cable routing and cable numbering.
B. Acceptance will be deemed "in full" upon receipt by the Contractor of a Notice of Acceptance
issued by the Owner upon beneficial use and full implementation of the Terms and Conditions
and Technical Specifications of the Contract.
1.8 INSPECTION
A. The Owner shall, at all times, have access to the work. The Contractor shall not close up any
work until the Owner has been given an opportunity to inspect the work or waive the
opportunity to inspect. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing when the work is
ready for inspection. The Owner, or its Agent, will inspect the work as expeditiously as
possible after receipt of notification from the Contractor.
1.9 INQUIRIES

A. Any questions relating to the technical scope of work or requirements of this specification
during the bidding process shall be placed in writing and submitted through:
1. James Reigle AIA, LEED A.P.

Martinez + Johnson Architecture
jreigle@mjarchitecture.com
B. Following the Bid Award, all RFI’s will be submitted through the formal contract established
procedure inclusive of the contracting officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMUNICATION CABINETS, RACKS, AND FRAMES
A. Main Equipment Room – Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
1. Heavy-Duty, Open 4-post Free Standing Server Racks

2. Provide Two (2) in the MDF Room 309 (Final Layout to be Provided)
3. Size: 84” High, 20.6” Wide (19” Rails), 29.50” Deep
4. Color: Black
5. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics, CPI,
APC, Great Lakes or Equivalent

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER PATCH PANELS
A. MDF Room 309
1. Patch panels shall meet TIA/EIA channel requirements for Category-6 cabling systems.
2. Separate patch panels for each floor’s cable.
3. Color: Black
4. 48 Port Increments
5. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics or
equivalent
6. As noted in Section 1.3 Paragraph D, Cable Pricing Option No. 1 will be to price the
use of 10-Gigabit Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP shielded cable
for voice and data including all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded jacks, patch panels
and patch cords.
2.3 CABLE SUPPORT AND FIRESTOPPING

A. Ladder Rack (Mounted above MDF Racks in Room 309)
1. VE 1, Class 20C Ladder type tray made from formed Aluminum.

2. Provide with 12” Wide path with 6” Rung Spacing on center.
3. Color: Black or Gray
4. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide B-Line, CPI,
Homaco or equivalent
B. Vertical Wire Management
1. Color: Black
2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics MM6
Vertical Cable Mgmt. “Cage” with door (OR-MM6VMD710) or equivalent
C. Horizontal Wire Management
1. Color: Black
2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ortronics Cable
Management Panel with Cover 2U (OR-MM6HMF2RU) or equivalent.
D. Cable Support Hangers - For Routing small cable bundles to hallway cable tray.
1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Arlington Loop

Cable Hanger or Equivalent or Erico CableCat CAT64 J-Hook or Equivalent
E. Firestop
1. UL-1479 approved caulk, putty, strip or sheets that shall be specifically designed to fill
holes, spaces, and voids at communications penetrations.
2. Shall provide adhesion to substrates and maintain fire and smoke seal under normal
expected movements of substrates, conduits and cables.
3. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Nelson, 3M, Hilti or
equivalent
2.4 RACK-MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION STRIPS
A. Vertical Power Strip
1. Compatible with 4-Post Free-Standing Racks

2. Provide (1) Per Free Standing Rack
3. 125 Volt, type NEMA 5-15P
4. Maximum Output - 20 AMP rating with 20 AMP breaker
5. UL-1449 Rating
6. Cord length Minimum of 3-meter.
7. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Geist
Manufacturing VSSA104-102S20 (10 Outlets 39”) 125V/20A or equivalent
2.5 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE COPPER CABLE (MDF TO TELCO DEMARCATION IN

BASEMENT)
A. Backbone Copper Cabling (Riser)
1. Cable shall be two (2) 25-Pair Category-5, UTP 24 AWG, CMP (Plenum Rated).
2. Route From MDF (RM 309 to Basement Demarc Rm 026) in conduit down thru chase.

3. Terminate all cable ends in 110-100 type wall-mounted Connector Block with C5 wiring
chips
4. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide General, Superior or
Equivalent
2.6 COMMUNICATIONS FIBER OPTIC SPARE INNERDUCT (MDF RM 309 TO DEMARC RM

026)
A. Fiber Optic Innerduct:
1. Place for future use. 1.25”, PVC, Color – Orange with pull rope. Installed in EMT
conduit provided by others.
2.7 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLE (WORKSTATION CABLE)
A. Horizontal Copper Cabling
1. Cable shall be Category-6, 4-Pair UTP, CMP

2. All station cable will be a consistent color sheath.
3. Cabling will be Category 6 with Channel performance parameters as specified in
TIA/EIA standards.
4. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Belden, Mohawk or
Equivalent
5. As noted in Section 1.3 Paragraph D, Cable Pricing Option No. 1 will be to price the
use of 10-Gigabit Cabling (Siemon or Equivalent) Category-6A F/UTP shielded cable
for voice and data including all related 10-Gigabit rated shielded jacks, patch panels
and patch cords.
2.8 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS
A. Faceplates:
1. Provide Single-Gang Faceplates with 4 Port or 6-Port Capacities as needed. Outlets

with a less number of cables will use blank inserts to full unjacked faceplates ports.
2. Faceplates include pressure-release designation label covers for quick, tool-less
removal. Sheets of designation labels can be ordered to use with printers. Use blank
inserts as needed.
3. It is the Cabling Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate all faceplate and insert colors
prior to any materials ordering or installation.
4. For floor box, millwork or modular furniture workstations, coordinate faceplates and
connectors with Owner’s Representative. Floor boxes to be used are Resource RFB
Multi-Service Recessed Floor Boxes. Cover is Model # S38CCTCBS (Wiremold
Legrand).
B. RJ-45 Jack Inserts
1. 8-Pin T-568B pin/pair configuration.

2. UV resistant, high impact plastic to prevent color fading and provides durability.
3. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Leviton, Ortronics,
Panduit or Equivalent
4. Note: Cable Pricing Option 001 for 10GIG cabling system requires using Cat-6A F/UTP
shielded inserts.
2.9 COMMUNICATION PATCH CORDS AND X-CONNECTS
A. Modular Cords

1. Stranded Category 6 UTP RJ-45 Closet patch cord

2. All patch cords shall be the "snag free" type UL type CM.
3. Patch cords shall be used in workstation to data network patch panels and shall meet
TIA/EIA 568 B.2 1 Category 6 UTP requirements.
4. Provide one (1) patch cord for each Category 6 horizontal UTP cable installed broken
out as follows.
5. 20% will be 10 foot length (Black)
9. 100% of the total number of horizontal cables
10. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Belden, Mohawk or
Equivalent
B. RJ-45 to 110 4-Pair Cords
1. Provide (4) four.

2. 10-Foot length or sufficient to reach from IDF 110-Block on wall to rack mounted RJ-45
patch panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate all installation work with the General Contractor to minimize conflicts including:
1. Review building plans with the Owner and/or Owner’s representative to determine and
document all workstation outlet locations and jack quantities in each building area.
2. Develop and document a numbering and labeling plan for horizontal and backbone
cabling in coordination with Owner and based on ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards.
3. Participate in design review meetings with the Owner and incorporate design revisions
as directed.
4. Fully install, test, and label all horizontal and backbone cabling and terminations for the
specified voice and data structured cable plant.
5. Provide record drawings documenting all workstation outlets, jack quantities, and
numbering in each building area.
6. Provide record drawings in the form of fiber optic and copper backbone cable one-line
diagrams with cable numbering.
B. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in
which related work is specified and for other conditions affecting performance.
C. Remove and reinstall any obstacles that may be in the way of the work (i.e. ceiling tiles,
carpet, etc.). Repair and/or Report any damages to in-place materials that may occur due to
the work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D. Provide a schedule identifying when work is to commence, the expected duration of the
activities and the location of the work effort.
E. The Owner is not responsible for loss, theft or damage to any stored or in-place materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION, MANAGEMENT
A. The Contractor performing the work shall provide a supervisory work force sufficient to
efficiently and effectively execute the Contractor's responsibilities. The Contractor’s Project

Manager shall be an RCDD and will act as a single point of contact for all activities regarding
this project. The Project Manager must be on the job at any time that work is being performed
or workers are present
B. Installation personnel shall meet manufacturer's training and education requirements for
implementation of the warranty program.
C. The Contractor’s Project Manager shall provide a weekly progress report.
D. Provide all new materials that are of the best grade for each, unless otherwise specified
herein.
E. The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or repair any work found by the Owner’s
Representative not to conform to contract requirements. The Contractor shall promptly
remove rejected materials from the premises. Inspections of the work shall be performed in a
manner as to not cause delay to the work other than delays caused due to required work
repair or replacement.
F. Follow specifications for all required cable slack storage as detailed in this section. Cables
with insufficient slack will be reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense.
G. Floor Boxes
1. General: Install boxes as indicated or as necessary, complying with the manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of codes and standards, and according to
recognized industry practices. Finished installation shall have a 4 hour minimum fire
rating.
2. Room Locations: Install boxes per plans.
3. Adjustments: Under the following condition and with the approval of the Contracting
Officer, move raceways and boxes from the shown location as follows:
a. Where box locations shown would interfere or cause associated electrical

equipment to interfere with architectural, structural or mechanical features, install
the box in a location which eliminates interference but with the smallest deviation
from the location shown.
4. Knockouts: Open only knockouts which will be used for a conduit. Install tight fitting
knockout closers in holes from which conduits have been removed.
5. Box Supports: Fasten raceways and boxes securely in place, using any approved
spring clips and other fasteners, required in Section 16072 - Supporting Devices.
6. No Extension Rings: Install boxes which provide the required volume without the use
of extension rings.
7. Masonry Boxes: Install masonry boxes where boxes are recessed in wood, concrete
block or brick or wood paneling. Saw-cut the opening for the boxes so that they will fit
snugly in the opening. Install boxes with front edges flush with adjacent surfaces.
8. Cast Metal Boxes: Install cast metal boxes with weatherproof covers under any of the
following conditions:
a. Exterior locations
b. Where exposed to moisture
c. In exposed rigid steel conduit systems
9. Boxes for Receptacles: Shall be equipped with a grounding terminal screw.

10. Communication, Signal and Alarm Outlets: Install boxes for telephone, intercom, public
address and fire alarm outlets. Grounding terminal is not required for these boxes.

11. Box Covers: Install box covers appropriate for the box, type of outlet and device, and
with additional requirements as follows:
a. For boxes recessed in gypsum wallboard, install raised device covers.

b. For exposed, surface mounted boxes, install covers deep drawn 1/2 inch, with
height and width dimensions identical to the associated box.
c. Terminate and install plates specified in Section 16140 - Wiring Devices and per
plans.
d. For cast metal boxes, install gasketed, cast metal covers.
12. Care for Insulation: Replace any thermal insulation cut or damaged during installation
of boxes.
13. Floor Box Adjustment: Adjust floor boxes and covers so that cover plates are flush with
the finished floor around the entire circumference.
14. Carpet Plates: In carpeted areas, install a carpet plate at each floor box.
3.3 COMMUNICATION CABINETS, RACKS, AND FRAMES
A. Bonded to TGB with No. 6 AWG.
B. Securely fasten side by side racks to each other using manufacturer hardware.
C. Mount with 36” of clear access area at front and rear of rack (and open end of a rack row)
3.4 COMMUNICATIONS PATCH PANELS
A. Install patch panels per manufacturer’s instructions to ensure a manufacturer-certified

Category-6 solution.
B. 8-Pin T568B pin/pair configuration. All 4 pairs are to be terminated.
C. Patch panels shall mount to standard floor-mounted EIA 19” grounded equipment racks with
tops at 84” high.
D. Industry-standard, single wire, punch-down tools shall be used for terminations.
E. Cables shall be neatly dressed to their respective patch panel and within rack cable
management using Velcro ties and/or rack cable management loops.
F. Provide Identification labels for each panel and panel port.
3.5 CABLE SUPPORT and FIRESTOPPING
A. Vertical Wire Management
1. Install between racks in MDF

2. At outer end of any Rack Row install (OR-MM6VMD706).
3. Size for no more than 40% Fill.
B. Ladder Rack
1. VE 1, Class 20C Ladder type tray. Formed Aluminum, painted with gray epoxy.
Provide with 12” Wide path with 6” Rung Spacing on center.
2. Mount in MDF above four post equipment cabinets. Use Manufactured approved wall
bracket to secure to wall and J-bolt hardware to affix to top of cabinets.
3. Bond to TGB system using No. 6 AWG copper wire.

4. Provide compatible cable drop out trays from ladder rack to each equipment cabinet.
C. Cable Hangers (to route smaller bundles of horizontal cables to hallway cable tray or to IDF)
1. Obtain pre-approval for all attachment methods and routes.

2. Install cable supports above ceiling grid using a rigid support to a structural element or
by attaching directly to a structural element. Maintain at least a 3” minimum height
above ceiling grid.
3. Do not fasten to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, ceiling hangers or conduit.
4. Install on average 60” centers with irregular intervals to avoid a standing wave
induction of interference on cable.
5. Do not exceed the manufacturer’s recommend cable fill capacity for the type of cable
being installed in the support device.
6. Do not strap additional or subsequent cables to the supports using cable ties.
7. Close hooks with manufacturer provided “bars” not cable ties.
D. Sleeves
1. Small miscellaneous EMT sleeves may be needed when a cable route requires a
through-penetration in a non rated or fire rated barrier. Coordinate placement and
installation of all sleeves with the General Contractor. Seal voids between sleeve and
building construction with joint sealant. Penetrations of any fire rated partition must be
properly fire-stopped.
E. Firestop
1. Fire-stopping products may be in the form of UL 1479 approved caulk, putty, strip or
sheets that shall be specifically designed to fill holes, spaces, and voids at
communications penetrations.
2. Fire-stopping materials shall also provide adhesion to substrates and maintain fire and
smoke seal under normal expected movements of substrates, conduits and cables.
3. All telecommunications-related penetrations through fire rated partitions, including
those in floor sleeves (used and unused) and poke-thru's must be properly fire-
stopped.
3.6 RACK-MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION STRIPS
A. Coordinate type of power strip with the Owner’s Project Manager based on the anticipated
requirements.
B. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
C. Mount so that the receptacles face the rear of the rack.
D. Secure all power cords so that they do not pose any hazard and cannot be disconnected
accidentally.
3.7 COPPER BACKBONE CABLE
A. MDF to Telco Demarcation Intra-Building Riser Cabling
1. Provide (2) 25 Pair Cat-5 Cable from the MDF to Telco Demarc. CMR rated and ran in
EMT conduit provided by others.
2. Cable will be continuous without splicing.
3. Secure vertical weight of cables at MDF. Review fasteners, strain relief and routing
with Owner’s Representative.

4. Provide 10 feet of Slack at both ends.

5. In the MDF, Terminate one of the two Cat-5 copper riser cables in a rack mounted 24-
Port Patch Panel, 1 Pair per Port on Pins 4-5 with spare pair coiled. Terminate the
other in a 110-100 wall connecting block using C5 wiring chips, located within patch
cord reach of the station patch panels.
6. At the Telco Demarc, terminate both riser cables with 110-100 type block and C-5
chips.
7. Test and Label all cables. Submit testing and labeling plan within ANSI/EIA/TIA-606
standards for approval by Owners prior to cable placement.
8. Cross Connections and Patch Cord Patching will be handled by the Owner and/or the
Owner’s PBX Contractor.
9. Coordinate the placement of 110-100 Blocks and cable-support hardware in the MDF
with the Owner’s Representative and the Owner’s PBX Contractor(s).
3.8 FIBER OPTIC INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct will be placed from MDF to Telco Demarcation via an EMT conduit (by others) for
future use.
B. Innerduct will be labeled with identifying markings at both ends.
C. Install innerduct in a manner that will prevent any kinks or damage to future fiber optic cable
installed in it.
D. Cap or Cover both ends of the innerduct, also securing pull rope and pull rope slack for easy
access in the future.
3.9 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLE
A. Horizontal Copper Cabling (All cables ran from outlet location to MDF - Room 309)
1. Cable shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All work
shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electric Code. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.1
through ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B.3, NECS/BICSI 568, ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 A and
ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 shall be adhered to during all installation activities. This also
includes EIA/TIA TSB 67, ICEA S 83 596 and UL. All cable termination shall be in the
proper order and sequence.
2. Horizontal station cable runs shall not exceed a cable drop distance limitation of 292.5
feet (90 meters) from the serving wiring closet IDF to the workstation outlet.
3. The contractor will leave 4 meters of slack at the workstation outlet’s conduit stub-out in
the ceiling above the outlet and a 3 meters slack loop at the IDF. The slack loop’s
shape or securing mechanism should not degrade the cable performance in any way.
4. The contractor will secure cables and cable bundles via Velcro Strips so as not to
squeeze or deform the cable sheath shape from excessive binding pressure.
5. Manufacturer’s and TIA/EIA instructions and standards for installation, bending radius,
pulling tension, clearances and terminations will be followed as a minimum.
6. Submit a testing and labeling plan for the Owner’s approval prior to placement, using
current ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 standards.
7. Cables ran to Wi-Fi Access Point locations shall be provided with a 25-foot slack coil.
8. Cable for elevator phone will be ran to the elevator machine room. The elevator
contractor will make the connection to the traveling cable assembly serving the elevator
car.
3.10 COMMUNICATION FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS
A. Faceplates:

1. It is the Cabling Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate all faceplate and insert types
and colors with wall, floor or millwork colors or types prior to any materials ordering or
installation.
2. For Floor boxes, Millwork, or Modular Furniture installed by work of other sections
and/or by others, the Cable Contractor will supply all bezels, faceplates and jack inserts
compatible with installed in-floor hardware.
B. Jack Inserts
1. 8-pin T-568B pin/pair configuration. All pairs are terminated.

2. A 54” AFF note appearing next to a triangle indicates a wall phone type of outlet is
required and the faceplate installed should be of a type and design that is able to
support the installation of a wall phone.
C. Workstation Outlet/Cable Labeling
1. Labeling shall be in accordance to TIA/EIA 606-A standard for infrastructure (including

but not limited to all cable runs, trays, 110 blocks, firestops, patch panels, station
faceplates).
2. Numbering will consist of the Floor Number (0-1-2-3) followed by a two digit identifier
that should be sequential with no numbers skipped in the sequence. Each sequence
for each Floor will start at cable number 01 (starting over for each floor). At a
minimum, each cable shall be labeled at the junction box prior to jack termination and
at the patch panel prior to termination:
a. Example: 041 (Cable 41)
3.11 COMMUNICATION PATCH CORDS AND X-CONNECTS
A. Modular Cords
1. Patch cords shall be used in workstation to data network patch panels and shall meet
TIA/EIA 568 B.2 1 Category 6 requirements.
2. The Owner’s Network personnel and/or the Owner’s PBX Contractor shall perform the
final patching and/or cross connections tasks.
3.12 TESTING
A. Station Cable
1. Each communication outlet tested should include the Cat 6 patch panel port, a 3-foot
"factory" patch cord (Cat 6), device jack (Cat 6) and a 2-meter (Cat 6) "factory" launch
or workstation stranded connect cord. Testing shall be end to end using a tester that
meets the TIA/EIA accuracy performance requirements as specified in TIA/EIA 568-
B.2-1 (for Cat-6A Add Alternate - draft addendum #1 to TIA/EIA-B.1 for Category 6A
F/UTP cabling).
2. Test results should clearly identify the tested cable and its IDF point of origin. Links
which report a "Fail" for any of the individual tests shall result in an overall link fail. All
individual tests must result in a Pass to achieve an overall Pass.
3. Testing reports shall include testing results for wire map (continuity, shorts, crossed
pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs), total physical cable length including test equipment
cords, attenuation and near end cross talk.
4. The Contractor shall submit, prior to testing, a copy of their step by step copper cabling
test procedure for review and approval.

B. Voice Riser
1. Test each riser pair end to end. Test results shall be submitted in writing. Testing
should diagnose, at a minimum, the presence of all open loop conductors, shorts,
crossed pairs, reversed pairs, split pairs and any other problems which would preclude
pair use for telecommunications applications.
3.13 FIRESTOPPING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the fire-stopping of all telecommunications related
conduits and sleeves and/or any penetrations of fire rated walls to facilitate the installation of
communications cabling. The fire-stopping of all fire rated wall penetrations shall meet UL
1479 standards.
3.14 CHANGES
A. Any changes or modifications to the scope of work shall conform to the requirements of
Division 1 Specification Section “Product Requirements”.
3.15 PRICING – GENERAL
A. A detailed materials and labor pricing listing should be submitted as part of the RFP response
for approval.
B. All pricing submitted shall be a fully itemized material listing (showing product description
and manufacturer’s name, unit cost and quantity proposed) and also a fully itemized labor
cost listing (showing description, unit cost and quantity proposed for all labor tasks). Please
use the following sub-headings for the itemized listing:
1. MATERIALS
1.0 Station Cable

2.0 Riser Cable – Copper
3.0 Riser Cable - Fiber Optic and Innerduct
4.0 Station Cable Faceplates and Inserts
5.0 Copper Riser Termination
6.0 Fiber Optic Riser Termination
7.0 Equipment Racks, Wall Cabinets, Cable Support, Bonding
8.0 Patch Panels, Patch Cords
9.0 Miscellaneous
SUBTOTAL
INSTALLATION
1.0 Horizontal Station Cable Routing, Placement and Termination

2.0 Riser Cable - Copper Routing, Placement and Termination
3.0 Riser Cable - Fiber Optic Innerduct Placement and Termination
4.0 Equipment Room and IDF Closet Build-Out
5.0 Testing, Certification and Documentation
6.0 Miscellaneous
SUBTOTAL
1.0 Administration, Logistics, Insurance or Additional Mark-Up
SUBTOTAL

GRAND TOTAL
C. Optional pricing requested shall also be fully itemized. Also include any freight or
administrative costs and any supervisory mark-ups to the base price of the entity doing the
actual work and providing materials.
D. Any bid that is not fully itemized will be deemed to be unacceptable and will be rejected.
E. All pricing shall be signed off on by an officer of the bidding company and show any
applicable time limitations e.g. “Pricing good for 120 days”.
3.16 CABLE PRICING OPTION 001 – 10-GIGABIT STATION CABLE CAT-6A F/UTP
A. Provide a fully itemized alternate price to replace all Category-6 station cable, including all
termination hardware, shielded inserts, patch panels, patch cords and testing with a 10-
Gigabit Category-6A F/UTP shielded cabling system (SIEMON or equivalent).
3.17 CABLE PRICING – ALLOWANCES & ADDS/UNIT PRICING
A. Assume standard removable ceiling, with an average cable route distance of 175’(53.34m).
1. Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a Wall Outlet & 1 Cable

2. Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a Wall Outlet & 2 Cables
3. Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a Wall Outlet & 4 Cables
4. Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a 4-Port Floor Outlet & 2 Cables
5. Provide a turnkey unit cost to add a 4-Port Floor Outlet & 4 Cables
6. Provide a cost for a Stainless Steel Faceplate - 1, 2 and 4 Port Capacities
B. Provide the same Adds pricing for Cable Pricing Option 001- 10 GIG Cat-6A F/UTP Cable as
well.
END OF SECTION 16740

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION JJCA/7590
SECTION 16721 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the fire alarm
equipment to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to,
alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control units, fire safety control devices,
annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified.
B. Fire alarm systems shall comply with requirements of NFPA 72 unless variations to NFPA 72 are
specifically identified within these contract documents by the following notation: "variation". The design,
system layout, document submittal preparation, and supervision of installation and testing shall be provided
by a technician that is certified NICET level III or a registered fire protection engineer. The NICET certified
technician shall be on site for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the
equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide
additional technical support at the site as required by the Contracting Officer or his authorized
representative. Installers shall have a minimum of two years experience installing fire alarm systems.
C. Fire alarm signals:

1. Building shall have an automatic digitized voice fire alarm signal with emergency manual voice override
to notify occupants to evacuate. The digitized voice message shall identify the area of the building
(smoke zone) from which the alarm was initiated.
2. Building shall have a general evacuation fire alarm signal in accordance with ASA S3.41 to notify all
occupants in the respective building to evacuate.
D. Alarm signals (by device), supervisory signals (by device) and system trouble signals (by device not
reporting) shall be distinctly transmitted to the main fire alarm system control unit located in the main
electrical room.
E. The fire alarm control unit shall automatically transmit alarm signals to a listed central station using a digital
alarm communicator transmitter in accordance with NFPA 72.
1.2 SCOPE
A. A new fire alarm system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the specifications and
drawings. Device location and wiring runs shown on the drawings are for reference only unless specifically
dimensioned. Actual locations shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and this specification.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 16721- 1/15

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General electrical
requirements for items which are common to other Division 26 sections.
B. Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Conduits and boxes for
cables/wiring.
C. Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS
AND BELOW: Cables/wiring.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit 4 copies and 1 reproducible in accordance with Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS.
B. Drawings:
1. Prepare drawings and include all contractors information. Bid drawing files will be provided to the
Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all critical
dimensions shown on the drawings.
2. Floor plans: Provide locations of all devices (with device number at each addressable device
corresponding to control unit programming), appliances, panels, equipment, junction/terminal
cabinets/boxes, risers, electrical power connections, individual circuits and raceway routing, system
zoning; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors in each raceway; conduit fill calculations
with cross section area percent fill for each type and size of conductor and raceway. Only those
devices connected and incorporated into the final system shall be on these floor plans. Do not show
any removed devices on the floor plans. Show all interfaces for all fire safety functions.
3. Riser diagrams: Provide, for the entire system, the number, size and type of riser raceways and
conductors in each riser raceway and number of each type device per floor and zone. Show door
holder interface, elevator control interface, HVAC shutdown interface, fire extinguishing system
interface, and all other fire safety interfaces. Show wiring styles on the riser diagram for all circuits.
4. Detailed wiring diagrams: Provide for control panels, modules, power supplies, electrical power
connections, auxiliary relays and annunciators showing termination identifications, size and type
conductors, circuit boards, LED lamps, indicators, adjustable controls, switches, ribbon connectors,
wiring harnesses, terminal strips and connectors, spare zones/circuits. Diagrams shall be drawn to a
scale sufficient to show spatial relationships between components, enclosures and equipment
configuration.
5. Two weeks prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the DCPL one (1) set of
reproducible, as-built drawings. As-built drawings (floor plans) shall show all conduit used for the fire
alarm system.

C. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance and
operating manuals including technical data sheets for all items used in the system, power
requirements, device wiring diagrams, dimensions, and information for ordering replacement parts.
a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, operation, expansion
and maintenance.
b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections
between the items of equipment.
c. Include complete listing of all software used and installation and operation instructions including
the input/output matrix chart.
d. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to
properly operate, inspect, test and maintain the equipment and system. Provide all manufacturer's
installation limitations including but not limited to circuit length limitations.
e. Complete listing of all digitized voice messages.
f. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare parts,
tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.
D. Certifications:
1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit the technician's NICET level III fire alarm certification
as well as certification from the control unit manufacturer that the proposed performer of contract
maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include in the
certification the names and addresses of the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed
performer of contract maintenance. Also include the name and title of the manufacturer’s
representative who makes the certification.
2. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from either the control unit
manufacturer or the manufacturer of each component (e.g., smoke detector) that the components
being furnished are compatible with the control unit.
3. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment
manufacturer that the wiring and connection diagrams meet this specification, UL and NFPA 72
requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY
All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects
and shall remain so for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the
Contracting Officer.
1.6 GUARANTY PERIOD SERVICES
A. Complete inspection, testing, maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be provided by
a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five
years from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the Contracting Officer.

B. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required inspection,
testing, maintenance and repair.
C. All inspection, testing, maintenance and permanent records required by NFPA 72, and recommended by
the equipment manufacturer shall be provided by the contractor. Work shall include operation of sprinkler
system alarm and supervisory devices. It shall include all interfaced equipment including but not limited to
elevators, HVAC shutdown, and extinguishing systems.
D. Maintenance and testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72. A computerized preventive
maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of
equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all
equipment.
E. Non-included Work: Repair service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use,
accidents, or negligence for which the contractor is not responsible.
f. Emergency Service:
1. Warranty Period Service: Service other than the preventative maintenance, inspection, and testing
required by NFPA 72 shall be considered emergency call-back service and covered under the warranty
of the installation during the first year of the warranty period, unless the required service is a result of
abuse or misuse by the Government. Written notification shall not be required for emergency warranty
period service and the contractor shall respond as outlined in the following sections on Normal and
Overtime Emergency Call-Back Service. Warranty period service can be required during normal or
overtime emergency call-back service time periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer or his
authorized representative.
2. Normal and overtime emergency call-back service shall consist of an on-site response within two hours
of notification of a system trouble.
3. Normal emergency call-back service times are between the hours of 7:30 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday
through Friday, exclusive of federal holidays. Service performed during all other times shall be
considered to be overtime emergency call-back service. The cost of all normal emergency call-back
service for years 2 through 5 shall be included in the cost of this contract.
4. Overtime emergency call-back service shall be provided for the system when requested by the
Government. The cost of the first 40 manhours per year of overtime call-back service during years 2
through 5 of this contract shall be provided under this contract. Payment for overtime emergency call-
back service in excess of the 40 man hours per year requirement will be handled through separate
purchase orders. The method of calculating overtime emergency call-back hours is based on actual
time spent on site and does not include travel time.
H. The contractor shall maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit. The log shall list the date and time of all
examinations and trouble calls, condition of the system, and name of the technician. Each trouble call shall
be fully described, including the nature of the trouble, necessary correction performed, and parts replaced.

1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata) form a
part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in text by the basic
designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC).
72-2002 ...................................... National Fire Alarm Code.
90A-2002 ................................... Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
101-2003 .................................... Life Safety Code
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
2000-2000...............Fire Protection Equipment Directory
D. Factory Mutual Research Corp (FM): Approval Guide, 2005 Edition
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
S3.41-1996 ................................ Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal
F. International Code Council, International Building Code (IBC) 2003 Edition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer's current model. All equipment shall be
tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual Research Corporation for use as part
of a fire alarm system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall
certify that the installation complies with all manufacturer's requirements and that satisfactory total system
operation has been achieved.
2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES, AND WIRE
A. Conduit shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS and as follows:
1. All conduit shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area.
3. All conduit shall be 19 mm (3/4 inch) minimum.
B. Wire:
1. Wiring shall be in accordance with NEC article 760, Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW), and as recommended by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm system. All wires shall be color coded. Number and size of conductors
shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for
initiating device circuits and 14 AWG for notification device circuits.
2. Addressable circuits and wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and
shielded unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer in writing.
3. Any fire alarm system wiring that extends outside of a building shall have additional power surge
protection to protect equipment from physical damage and false signals due to lightning, voltage and
current induced transients. Protection devices shall be shown on the submittal drawings and shall be
UL listed or in accordance with written manufacturer's requirements.
4. All wire or cable used in underground conduits including those in concrete shall be listed for wet
locations.
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Cabinets:
1. Shall be galvanized steel in accordance with UL requirements.
2. All new and reused boxes shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA 70.
3. Covers shall be painted red in and shall be identified with white markings as "FA" for junction boxes
and as "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM" for cabinets and terminal boxes. Lettering shall be a minimum of 19
mm (3/4 inch) high.
4. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have a volume 50 percent greater than required by the NFPA 70.
Minimum sized wire shall be considered as 14 AWG for calculation purposes.
5. Terminal boxes and cabinets shall have identified pressure type terminal strips and shall be located at
the base of each riser. Terminal strips shall be labeled as specified or as approved by the COTR.
2.3 FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT
A. General:
1. All circuits shall be monitored for integrity.
2. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble condition including, but not limited to main power failure,
grounds and system wiring derangement.
3. Transmit digital alarm information to the fire alarm control unit.
B. Enclosure:
1. The control unit shall be housed in a cabinet suitable for both recessed and surface mounting. Cabinet
and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard
finish.
2. Cabinet shall contain all necessary relays, terminals, lamps, and legend plates to provide control for
the system.
C. Operator terminal at main control unit:

1. Operator terminal shall consist of the central processing unit, display screen, keyboard and printer.
2. Display screen shall have a minimum 15-inch diagonal non-glare screen capable of displaying 24 lines
of 80 characters each.
3. Keyboard shall consist of 60 alpha numeric and 12 user/functional control keys.
4. Printer shall be the automatic type, printing the date, time and location for all alarm, supervisory, and
trouble conditions.
D. Power Supply:
1. The control unit shall derive its normal power from a 120 volt, 60 Hz dedicated supply connected to the
emergency power system. Standby power shall be provided by a 24 volt DC battery as hereinafter

specified. The normal power shall be transformed, rectified, coordinated, and interfaced with the
standby battery and charger.
2. Door holder power shall be arranged so that momentary or sustained loss of main operating power
shall not cause the release of any door.
3. Power supply for smoke detectors shall be taken from the fire alarm control unit.
4. Provide protectors to protect the fire alarm equipment from damage due to lightning or voltage and
current transients.
5. Provide new separate and direct ground lines to the outside to protect the equipment from unwanted
grounds.
E. Circuit Supervision: Each alarm initiating device circuit, signaling line circuit, and notification appliance
circuit, shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or ground fault condition in the field wiring.
These conditions shall cause a trouble signal to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by an off
switch.
F. Supervisory Devices: All sprinkler system valves, standpipe control valves, post indicator valves (PIV), and
main gate valves shall be supervised for off-normal position. Closing a valve shall sound a supervisory
signal at the control unit until silenced by an off switch. The specific location of all closed valves shall be
identified at the control unit. Valve operation shall not cause an alarm signal. Low air pressure switches
and duct detectors shall be monitored as supervisory signals. The power supply to the elevator shunt trip
breaker shall be monitored by the fire alarm system as a supervisory signal.
G. Trouble signals:
1. Arrange the trouble signals for automatic reset (non-latching).
2. System trouble switch off and on lamps shall be visible through the control unit door.
H. Function Switches: Provide the following switches in addition to any other switches required for the system:
1. Remote Alarm Transmission By-pass Switch: Shall prevent transmission of all signals to the main fire
alarm control unit when in the "off" position. A system trouble signal shall be energized when switch is
in the off position.
2. Alarm Off Switch: Shall disconnect power to alarm notification circuits on the local building alarm
system. A system trouble signal shall be activated when switch is in the off position.
3. Trouble Silence Switch: Shall silence the trouble signal whenever the trouble silence switch is
operated. This switch shall not reset the trouble signal.
4. Reset Switch: Shall reset the system after an alarm, provided the initiating device has been reset. The
system shall lock in alarm until reset.
5. Lamp Test Switch: A test switch or other approved convenient means shall be provided to test the
indicator lamps.
6. Drill Switch: Shall activate all notification devices without tripping the remote alarm transmitter. This
switch is required only for general evacuation systems specified herein.
7. Door Holder By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent doors from releasing during fire alarm tests. A system
trouble alarm shall be energized when switch is in the abnormal position.

8. Elevator recall By-Pass Switch: Shall prevent the elevators from recalling upon operation of any of the
devices installed to perform that function. A system trouble alarm shall be energized when the switch is
in the abnormal position.
9. HVAC/Smoke Damper By-Pass: Provide a means to disable HVAC fans from shutting down and/or
smoke dampers from closing upon operation of an initiating device designed to interconnect with these
devices.
I. Remote Control Capability: Each building fire alarm control unit shall be installed and programmed so that
each must be reset locally after an alarm, before the main fire alarm control unit can be reset. After the
local building fire alarm control unit has been reset, then the all system acknowledge, reset, silence or
disabling functions can be operated by the main fire alarm control unit
K. System Expansion: Design the control units and enclosures so that the system can be expanded in the
future (to include the addition of twenty percent more alarm initiating, alarm notification and door holder
circuits) without disruption or replacement of the existing control unit and secondary power supply.
2.4 STANDBY POWER SUPPLY

A. Batteries:
1. Battery shall be of the sealed, maintenance free type, 24-volt nominal.
2. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours
plus five minutes of alarm to an end voltage of 1.14 volts per cell, upon a normal AC power failure.
2.5 ANNUNCIATION
A. Annunciator, Alphanumeric Type (System):
1. Shall be a supervised, LCD display containing a minimum of two lines of 40 characters for alarm
annunciation in clear English text.
2. Message shall identify floor, zone, etc on the first line and device description and status (pull station,
smoke detector, waterflow alarm or trouble condition) on the second line.
3. The initial alarm received shall be indicated as such.
4. A selector switch shall be provided for viewing subsequent alarm messages.
5. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application.
B. Printers:
1. System printers shall be high reliability digital input devices, UL approved, for fire alarm applications.
The printers shall operate at a minimum speed of 30 characters per second. The printer shall be
continually supervised.
2. Printers shall be programmable to either alarm only or event logging output.
a. Alarm printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of all alarm information that occurs within
the fire alarm system. Alarm information shall include the date, time, building number, floor, zone,
device type, device address, and condition.
b. Event logging printers shall provide a permanent (printed) record of every change of status that
occurs within the fire alarm system. Status information shall include date, time, building number,

floor, zone, device type, device address and change of status (alarm, trouble, supervisory,
reset/return to normal).
3. System printers shall provide tractor drive feed pins for conventional fan fold 213 mm x 275 mm (8-1/2"
x 11") paper.
4. The printers shall provide a printing and non-printing self test feature.
5. Power supply for printers shall be taken from and coordinated with the building emergency service.
6. Each printer shall be provided with a stand for the printer and paper.
7. Spare paper and ribbons for printers shall be stocked and maintained as part of the five (5) year
guarantee period services in addition to the one installed after the approval of the final acceptance test.
2.6 VOICE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (VCS)
A. General:
1. An emergency voice communication system shall be installed throughout the building.
2. Upon receipt of an alarm signal from the building fire alarm system, the VCS shall automatically
transmit a pre-recorded fire alarm message throughout the building.
3. A digitized voice module shall be used to store each prerecorded message.
4. The VCS shall be arranged as a dual channel system capable of transmitting two different messages
simultaneously.
5. The VCS shall supervise all speaker circuits, control equipment, remote audio control equipment, and
amplifiers.
B. Speaker Circuit Control Unit:
1. The speaker circuit control unit shall include switches to manually activate or deactivate speaker
circuits grouped by floor in the system.
2. Speaker circuit control switches shall provide on, off, and automatic positions and indications.
3. The speaker circuit control unit shall include visual indication of active or trouble status for each group
of speaker circuits in the system.
4. A trouble indication shall be provided if a speaker circuit group is disabled.
5. A lamp test switch shall be provided to test all indicator lamps.
6. A single "all call" switch shall be provided to activate all speaker circuit groups simultaneously.
7. A push-to-talk microphone shall be provided for manual voice messages.
8. A voice message disconnect switch shall be provided to disconnect automatic digitized voice
messages from the system. The system shall be arranged to allow manual voice messages and
indicate a system trouble condition when activated.
C. Speaker Circuit Arrangement:
1. Speaker circuits shall be arranged such that there is one speaker circuit per smoke zone.
2. Audio amplifiers and control equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal and abnormal
conditions.
3. Speaker circuits shall be either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with a minimum of 50% spare power available.
4. Speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any one speaker circuit will
not cause the loss of any other speaker circuit in the system.
D. Digitized Voice Module (DVM):
1. The Digitized Voice Module shall provide prerecorded digitized evacuation and instructional messages.
The messages shall be professionally recorded and approved by the COTR prior to programming.
2. The DVM shall be configured to automatically output to the desired circuits following a 10-second slow
whoop alert tone.
3. Prerecorded magnetic taped messages and tape players are not permitted.
4. The digitized message capacity shall be no less than 15 second in length.
5. The digitized message shall be transmitted three times.
6. The DVM shall be supervised for operational status.
7. Failure of the DVM shall result in the transmission of a constant alarm tone.
8. The DVM memory shall have a minimum 50% spare capacity after those messages identified in this
section are recorded. Multiple DVM's may be used to obtain the required capacity.
E. Audio Amplifiers:
1. Audio Amplifiers shall provide a minimum of 50 Watts at either 25 or 70.7 VRMS output voltage levels.
2. Amplifiers shall be continuously supervised for operational status.
3. Amplifiers shall be configured for either single or dual channel application.
4. Each audio output circuit connection shall be configurable for Style X.
5. A minimum of 50% spare output capacity shall be available for each amplifier.
F. Tone Generator(s):
1. Tone Generator(s) shall be capable of providing a distinctive three-pulse temporal pattern fire alarm
signal as well as a slow whoop.
2. Tone Generator(s) shall be continuously supervised for operational status.
2.7 ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Speakers:
1. Shall operate on either 25 VRMS or 70.7 VRMS with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0W and
originally installed at the one-half watt tap. Speakers shall provide a minimum sound output of 80 dBA
at ten feet with the one-half watt tap.
2. Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ.
3. 100 mm (4 inches) or 200 mm (8 inches) cone type speakers ceiling mounted with white colored
baffles in areas with suspended ceilings and wall mounted in areas without ceilings.
B. Strobes:
1. Xenon flash tube type minimum 15 candela in toilet rooms and 75 candela in all other areas with a
flash rate of 1 HZ. Strobes shall be synchronized where required by the National Fire Alarm Code
(NFPA 72).

2. Backplate shall be red with 13 mm (1/2 inch) permanent red letters. Lettering to read "Fire", be oriented
on the wall or ceiling properly, and be visible from all viewing directions.
3. Each strobe circuit shall have a minimum of twenty (20) percent spare capacity.
4. Strobes may be combined with the audible notification appliances specified herein.
2.8 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Fire Alarm Stations:
1. Shall be non-breakglass, address reporting type.
2. Station front shall be constructed of a durable material such as cast or extruded metal or high impact
plastic. Stations shall be semi-flush type.
3. Stations shall be of single action pull down type with suitable operating instructions provided on front in
raised or depressed letters, and clearly labeled "FIRE".
4. Operating handles shall be constructed of a durable material. On operation, the lever shall lock in
alarm position and remain so until reset. A key shall be required to gain front access for resetting, or
conducting tests and drills.
5. Unless otherwise specified, all exposed parts shall be red in color and have a smooth, hard, durable
finish.
B. Smoke Detectors:
1. Smoke detectors shall be UL listed for use with the fire alarm control unit being furnished.
2. Smoke detectors shall be addressable type complying with applicable UL Standards for system type
detectors. Smoke detectors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and NFPA 72.
3. Detectors shall have an indication lamp to denote an alarm condition. Provide remote indicator lamps
and identification plates where detectors are concealed from view. Locate the remote indicator lamps
and identification plates flush mounted on walls so they can be observed from a normal standing
position.
4. All spot type and duct type detectors installed shall be of the photoelectric type.
5. Photoelectric detectors shall be factory calibrated and readily field adjustable. The sensitivity of any
photoelectric detector shall be factory set at 3.0 plus or minus 0.25 percent obscuration per foot.
6. Detectors shall provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal
diagnostics. Detectors shall also provide visual indication of sensitivity level upon testing. Detectors,
along with the fire alarm control units shall be UL listed for testing the sensitivity of the detectors.
C. Heat Detectors:
1. Heat detectors shall be of the addressable restorable rate compensated fixed-temperature spot type.
2. Detectors shall have a minimum smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet.
3. Intermediate temperature rated (200 degrees F) heat detectors shall be utilized.
D. Water Flow and Pressure Switches:

1. Wet pipe water flow switches and dry pipe alarm pressure switches for sprinkler systems shall be
connected to the fire alarm system by way of an address reporting interface device.
2. All water flow switches shall be of a single manufacturer and series and non-accumulative retard type.
3. All switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently adjustable from 0 to 60
seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. Timing shall be recorded and documented during
testing.
2.9 SUPERVISORY DEVICES
A. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided and connected by way of an address reporting interface
device. Detectors shall be provided with an approved duct housing mounted exterior to the duct, and
shall have perforated sampling tubes extending across the full width of the duct (wall to wall). Detector
placement shall be such that there is uniform airflow in the cross section of the duct.
2. Interlocking with fans shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 90A and as specified hereinafter
under Part 3.2, "TYPICAL OPERATION".
3. Provide remote indicator lamps, key test stations and identification nameplates (e.g. "DUCT SMOKE
DETECTOR AHU-X") for all duct detectors. Locate key test stations in plain view on walls or ceilings so
that they can be observed and operated from a normal standing position.
B. Sprinkler and Standpipe System Supervisory Switches:
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve, riser valve or zone control valve, and each standpipe
system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test
and drain valves shall not be equipped with supervisory switches.
2. PIV (post indicator valve) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch.
3. Valve supervisory switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system by way of address reporting
interface device. // See Section 21 13 13, WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS for new switches to be
added. Connect tamper switches for all control valves shown on the approved shop drawings. //
4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die-cast aluminum housing that shall provide a
19 mm (3/4 inch) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the
valves.
5. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the
housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
6. Where dry-pipe sprinkler systems are installed, high and low air pressure switches shall be provided
and monitored by way of an address reporting interface devices.
2.10 ADDRESS REPORTING INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Shall have unique addresses that reports directly to the building fire alarm panel.
B. Shall be configurable to monitor normally open or normally closed devices for both alarm and trouble
conditions.
C. Shall have terminal designations clearly differentiating between the circuit to which they are reporting from
and the device that they are monitoring.

D. Shall be UL listed for fire alarm use and compatibility with the panel to which they are connected.
E. Shall be mounted in weatherproof housings if mounted exterior to a building.
2.11 SMOKE BARRIER DOOR CONTROL
A. Electromagnetic Door Holders:
1. New Door Holders shall be standard wall mounted electromagnetic type. In locations where doors do
not come in contact with the wall when in the full open position, an extension post shall be added to the
door bracket.
2. Operation shall be by 24 volt DC supplied from a battery located at the fire alarm control unit. Door
holders shall be coordinated as to voltage, ampere drain, and voltage drop with the battery, battery
charger, wiring and fire alarm system for operation as specified.
B. Door holder control circuits shall be electrically supervised.
C. Smoke detectors shall not be incorporated as an integral part of door holders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, 72, 90A, and 101 as shown on the drawings, and as
recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. Fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All
conduit and wire shall be installed in accordance with Section 26 05 33, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS , Section 26 05 21, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW), and all penetrations of smoke and fire barriers shall be
protected as required by FIRESTOPPING method.
B. All conduits, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may
be exposed in unfinished areas.
C. All exposed conduit shall be painted to match surrounding finished areas and red.
D. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control units and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted
when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.
E. Speakers shall be ceiling mounted and fully recessed in areas with suspended ceilings. Speakers shall be
wall mounted and recessed in finished areas without suspended ceilings. Speakers may be surface
mounted in unfinished areas.
F. Strobes shall be flush wall mounted 2,000 mm (80 inches) above the floor or 150 mm (6 inches) below
ceiling, whichever is lower. Locate and mount to maintain a minimum 900 mm (36 inches) clearance from
side obstructions.
G. Manual pull stations shall be installed not less than 1050 mm (42 inches) or more than 1200 mm (48
inches) from finished floor to bottom of device and within 1500 mm (60 inches) of a stairway or an exit
door.
I. Where possible, locate water flow and pressure switches a minimum of 300 mm (12 inches) from a fitting
that changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of 900 mm (36 inches) from a valve.

J. Mount valve tamper switches so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjust to
operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem has moved
no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.
3.2 TYPICAL OPERATION
A. Activation of any manual pull station, water flow or pressure switch, heat detector, kitchen hood
suppression system, gaseous suppression system, or smoke detector shall cause the following operations
to occur:
1. Operate the emergency voice communication system in the Building. Flash strobes continuously only
in the zone of alarm.
2. Continuously sound a temporal pattern general alarm and Flash all strobes in the building in alarm until
reset at the fire alarm control unit.
3. Release only the magnetic door holders in the smoke zone after the alert signal.
4. Transmit a separate alarm signal, via the main fire alarm control unit to the fire department.
5. Unlock the electrically locked exit doors within the zone of alarm.
B. Heat detectors in elevator machine rooms shall, in addition to the above functions, disconnect all power to
all elevators served by that machine room after a time delay. The time delay shall be programmed within
the fire alarm system programming and be equal to the time it takes for the car to travel from the highest to
the lowest level, plus 10 seconds.
C. Operation of a smoke detector at a corridor door used for automatic closing shall also release only the
magnetic door holders // on that floor // in that smoke zone //. //Operation of a smoke detector at a shutter
used for automatic closing shall also release only the shutters // on that floor // in that smoke zone //.
F. Operation of duct smoke detectors shall cause a system supervisory condition and shut down the
ventilation system and close the associated smoke dampers as appropriate.
G. Operation of any sprinkler or standpipe system valve supervisory switch, high/low air pressure switch, or
fire pump alarm switch shall cause a system supervisory condition.
3.3 TESTS
A. Provide the service of a NICET level III, competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the
adjustments and tests for the system.
B. When the systems have been completed and prior to the scheduling of the final inspection, furnish testing
equipment and perform the following tests in the presence of the COTR. When any defects are detected,
make repairs or install replacement components, and repeat the tests until such time that the complete fire
alarm systems meets all contract requirements. After the system has passed the initial test and been
approved by the COTR, the contractor may request a final inspection.
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits,
ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

2. Test the insulation on all installed cable and wiring by standard methods as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
3. Run water through all flow switches. Check time delay on water flow switches. Submit a report listing
all water flow switch operations and their retard time in seconds.
4. Open each alarm initiating and notification circuit to see if trouble signal actuates.
5. Ground each alarm initiation and notification circuit and verify response of trouble signals.
3.4 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Prior to final acceptance a minimum 30 day "burn-in" period shall be provided. The purpose shall be to
allow equipment to stabilize and potential installation and software problems and equipment malfunctions
to be identified and corrected. During this diagnostic period, all system operations and malfunctions shall
be recorded. Final acceptance will be made upon successful completion of the "burn-in" period and where
the last 14 days is without a system or equipment malfunction.
B. At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall
repeat the tests in Article 3.3 TESTS and those required by NFPA 72. In addition the representative shall
demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect.
3.5 INSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representative shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of
Operation" including a trouble shooting guide of the entire system for submittal to the VA. The sequence of
operation will be shown for each input in the system in a matrix format and provided in a loose leaf binder.
When reading the sequence of operation, the reader will be able to quickly and easily determine what
output will occur upon activation of any input in the system. The INPUT/OUTPUT matrix format shall be as
shown in Appendix A to NFPA 72.
PART 4 - SCHEDULES
4.1 LOCATION OF VOICE MESSAGES:
Upon receipt of an alarm signal from the building fire alarm system, the voice communication system shall
automatically transmit a 3 second tone alert and a pre-recorded fire alarm message throughout the
building.
- - - END - - -

SECTION 16670-LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing and installation of a complete
master labeled lightning protection system, complying with NFPA 780, UL
96 and UL 96A.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of
Division 16.
B. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground faults.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS, submit
the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Isometric and plan views showing layout and connections to the
required metal surfaces.
2. Show the methods of mounting the system to the adjacent construction.
C. Qualifications: Submit proof that the installer of the lightning
protection system has had suitable and adequate experience installing
other lightning protection systems, and is capable of installing the
system as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies
of the following certifications to the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the lightning protection system has been properly
installed and tested.
2. Certification that the lightning protection system has been
inspected by a UL representative and has been approved by UL without
variation.
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.
70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC)
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 16670-1

780-00..................Standard for the Installation of Lightning

Protection Systems
96-94...................Lightning Protection Components
96A-01..................Installation Requirements for Lightning
Protection Systems
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Attach master labels "A" or "B" to each item by its manufacturer as
evidence that the materials have been manufactured in conformance with
the UL Standards for master label lightning protection materials.
B. In additional to conformance to UL 96, the component material
requirements are as follows:
1. Conductors: Electrical grade copper.
2. Air terminals: Solid copper, not less than 3/8 inch diameter, with
sharp nickel-plated points.
3. Ground rods: Copper clad steel, not less than 1/2 inch diameter by 8
feet long.
4. Ground plates: Solid copper, not less than 1/16 inch thick.
5. Tubing: Stiff copper or brass.
C. Anchors and fasteners: Bolt type which are most suitable for the
specific anchor and fastener installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the conductors as inconspicuously as practical and with the
proper bends.
B. Install the vertical conductors within the concealed cavity of exterior
walls. Run the conductors to the exterior at elevations below the
finished grade and make the ground connections to the earth outside of
the building or stack perimeter.
C. Make connections of dissimilar metal with bimetallic type fittings to
prevent electrolytic action.
D. Use the exothermic welding type connections that form solid metal joints
in the main vertical and horizontal conductors, and for connections that
are not exposed in the finish work.
E. Protect copper conductors with stiff copper or brass tubing, which
enclose the conductors from the top to the bottom of the tubing, between
one foot below and seven feet above the finished grade.
F. Sheath copper conductors, which pass over cast stone, cut stone,
architectural concrete and masonry surfaces, with not less than a 1/16
inch thickness of lead to prevent staining of the exterior finish

surfaces.
G. For the earth connections, install ground rods and ground plates, and
the conductor connections to them and the main water pipes in the
presence of the Resident Engineer. For the conductors located outside of
the building or stack, install the conductors not less than two feet
below the finished grade.
H. For structural steel buildings, connect the steel framework of the
buildings to the main water pipe near the water system entrance to the
building.
I. Connect exterior metal surfaces, located within three feet of the
lightning protection system conductors, to the lightning protection
system conductors to prevent flashovers.
J. Grounding: Test the ground resistance to earth by standard methods and
conform to the ground resistance requirements specified in Section,
GROUNDING.
K. Where shown, use the structural steel framework or reinforcing steel as
the main conductor:
1. Weld or bond the non-electrically-continuous sections together and
make them electrically continuous.
2. Verify the electrical continuity by measuring the ground resistances
to earth at the ground level, at the top of the building or stack,
and at intermediate points with a sensitive ohmmeter. Compare the
resistance readings.
3. Connect the air terminals together with an exterior conductor
connected to the structural steel framework at not more than 60 foot
intervals.
4. Install ground connections to earth at not more than 60 foot
intervals around the perimeter of the building.
5. Weld or braze bonding plates, not less than eight inches square, to
cleaned sections of the steel and connect the conductors to the
plates.
6. Do not pierce the structural steel in any manner. Connections to the
structural steel shall conform to UL Publication No. 96A.
L. When the lightning protection systems have been installed, have the
systems inspected by a UL representative. Obtain and install a UL
numbered master label "C" for each of the lightning protection systems
at the location directed by the UL representative and the Resident
Engineer.

- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 16520-SITE LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of
exterior luminaries, controls, poles and supports.
1.2 RELATED WORK
electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one
section of Division 16.
B. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits, fittings, and boxes for
raceway systems.
C. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage
power and lighting wiring.
D. Section 16402, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground
handholes and conduits.
E. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to
determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details,
materials, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection
diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaries, lamps and
controls.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of
operating and maintenance manuals to the Resident Engineer. Include
technical data sheets, wiring and connection diagrams, and information
for ordering replacement parts.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies
of the following to the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings
and specifications.
SITE LIGHTING 16520-1

2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has

been properly installed and tested.
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
supplements and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic
designation only.
A. Aluminum Association Inc. (AA):
AAH35.1-2006 ...........Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for
Aluminum
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
LTS-4-2003 .............Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaries and Traffic Signals
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
318-2005 ...............Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
C57.12-2000.............General Requirements For Liquid-Immersed
Distribution, Power, and Regulating
Transformers
C81.61-2005 ............Electrical Lamp Bases
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A123/A123M-2002 ........Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
A153/A153M-2001.........Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware – AASHTO No.: M232
B108-03a -2003 .........Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
D3487-2000..............Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical
Apparatus
F. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA):
AC 70/7460-IK CHG 1-2000......Obstruction Lighting and Marking
AC 150/5345-43E-1995....Specification for Obstruction Lighting
Equipment
G. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
HB-9-2000...............Lighting Handbook
RP-8-2000 (R-2005)......Roadway Lighting

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

C78.41-2001.............Electric Lamps – Guidelines for Low-Pressure
Sodium Lamps
C78.42-2004 ............Electric Lamps – Guidelines for High-Pressure
Sodium Lamps
C78.43-2005 ............Electric Lamps – Single-Ended Metal-Halide
Lamps
C78.1381-1998...........(R 1997) Electric Lamps – 70-Watt M85 Metal-
Halide Lamps
C82.4-2002 .............Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-
Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)
C136.17-2005 ..........Roadway Lighting Equipment – Enclosed Side-
Mounted Luminaries for Horizontal-Burning High-
Intensity-Discharge Lamps
ICS 2-2005 .............Industrial Control and Systems Controllers,
Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts
ICS 6-2001 .............Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 ................National Electrical Code (NEC)
J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
496-2004 ...............Edison-Base Lamp holders
773-1995................Plug-in, Locking Type Photo controls, for Use
with Area Lighting
773A-2006 ..............Non-industrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control
1029-1994...............High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
1598-2004 ..............Luminaries
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Poles: Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they are at least
305 mm (one foot) above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not
remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing
pole.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and
as shown on the drawings and specified.

2.2 POLES
A. General:
1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified.
2. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite hand hole openings.
3. Provide a base cover matching the pole in material and color to
conceal the mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.
2.3 FOUNDATIONS FOR POLES

A. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete.
B. Foundations shall support the effective projected area of the specified
pole, arm(s), and luminaire(s) under wind conditions previously
specified in this section.
C. Place concrete in spirally wrapped treated paper forms for round
foundations, and construct forms for square foundations.
D. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately
1/4 inch radius.
E. Concrete shall have 3000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength.
F. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be
as shown on the drawings and meet ACI 318. Anchor bolts shall be in a
welded cage or properly positioned by the tie wire to stirrups.
G. Prior to concrete pour, install a copperclad steel ground rod, not less
than 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet long, below each foundation. Drive
the rod vertically under the foundation so not less than 6 feet of rod
is in contact with the earth. Remainder of rod may be in the concrete
pour. Where rock or layered rock is present, drill a hole not less
than 2 inches in diameter and 6 feet deep, backfill with tamped fine
sand and drive the rod into the hole. Bond the rod to the pole with
not less than number 6 AWG bare copper wires. The method of bonding
shall be approved for the purpose.
2.4 LAMPS
A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed.
B. Lamps to be general-service, outdoor lighting types.
C. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.42, wattage as indicated.
Lamps shall have average rated life of 16,000 hours minimum for 35 watt
lamps and 24,000 hours minimum for all higher wattages.
D. Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.41.
E. Metal-Halide Lamps: NEMA C78.43 or NEMA C78.1381
F. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactors. Rate contactors as indicated.
Provide in NEMA enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Contactors shall
have silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing contacts for
mechanically held contactor] and shall require no arcing contacts.
Provide contactors with on-off selector switch.
2.6 CONTROLS
A. Each Lighting System:
1. Shall be controlled by one of the following methods as shown for
each system on the drawings:
a. A photocell to act as the pilot device. The photocell shall be
the type which fails safe to the closed position meeting UL 773
or773A
2. Mount and connect photocells as shown on the drawings.
3. Photocells shall have the following features:
a. Quick-response, cadmium-sulfide type.
b. A 15 to 30 second, built-in time delay to prevent response to
momentary lightning flashes, car headlights or cloud movements.
c. Energizes the system when the north sky light decreases to
approximately 1.5 footcandles, and maintains the system energized
until the north sky light increases to approximately 3 to 5 foot
candles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings,
and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Poles:
1. Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts,
threaded at the top end and bent 1.57 rad 90 degrees at the bottom
end. Provide galvanized nuts, washers, and ornamental covers for
anchor bolts. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged
to prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath and the end
of conduit. Adjust poles as necessary to provide a permanent
vertical position with the bracket arm in proper position for
luminaire location.

2. After the poles have been installed, shimmed and plumbed, grout the
spaces between the pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink
concrete grout material. Provide a plastic or copper tube, of not
less than 3/8-inch inside diameter, through the grout tight to the
top of the concrete base for moisture weeping.
C. Foundation Excavation: Depth shall be as indicated. Dig holes large
enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the full depth of the
hole. Place backfill in the hole in 150 mm 6 inch maximum layers and
thoroughly tamp. Place surplus earth around the pole in a conical shape
and pack tightly to drain water away.
D. Photocell Switch Aiming: Aim switch according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.2 GROUNDING
Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles,
luminaries, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as
specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING. Where copper grounding conductor
is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or
lined connectors suitable and listed for this purpose.
- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 16510-BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of
the interior lighting systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
B. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and
wiring.
C. Section 16140, WIRING DEVICES: Wiring devices used as part of the
lighting systems.
D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault
currents.
A. Refer to Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND
REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
B. Refer to Paragraph, GUARANTY, in Section 01001, GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL), submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials,
required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams,
photometric data, ballasts, lenses, louvers, lamps, and controls.
3. When catalog data and/or shop drawings for fluorescent fixtures are
submitted for approval, photometric data from an independent testing
laboratory shall be included with the submittal, indicating average
brightness and efficiency of the fixture, as specified in
specification or as shown on the drawings. Coefficient of utilization
data will not be considered a suitable substitute.
C. Samples:
BUILDING LIGHTING, INTERIOR 16510-1

1. Simultaneously with the shop drawing and catalog cut submittal,

deliver to the Resident Engineer a sample of each lighting fixture
types: ____________, ______________, ______________ for approval. The
approved samples shall be installed in the location directed by the
Resident Engineer and shall be removed, repackaged and turned over to
the Resident Engineer after final inspection.
D. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of
complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data
sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts.
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the
final updated maintenance and operating manuals, including any
changes, to the Resident Engineer.
E. Certifications:
1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the
following certifications to the Resident Engineer:
a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been
properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
b. Include with shop drawings, certification from the manufacturers
that all electronic high-frequency ballasts meet the transient
protection required by IEEE C62.41, Cat. A. Include with initial
shop drawing submittal.
supplements, and errata) form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
C78.1-91................Fluorescent Lamps - Rapid-Start Types -
Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics
C78.2-91................Fluorescent Lamps - Preheat-Start Types -
Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics
C78.3-91................Fluorescent Lamps - Instart Start and Cold-
Cathode Types - Dimensional and Electrical
Characteristics
C78.376-91..............Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps (ANSI/NEMA
C78/376-96)
C. Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM):
Requirements for Ballast Certification.

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C62.41-91...............Recommended Practice on Surge Voltage in Low
Voltage AC Power Circuits
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
101-00..................Life Safety Code
F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
C82.1-97................Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications
C82.2-02................Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp
Ballasts
C82.4-02................Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-
Pressure Sodium Lamps
C82.11-02...............High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
496-96..................Edison-Base Lampholders
542-99..................Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for
Fluorescent Lamps
844-95..................Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations
924-95..................Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
935-01..................Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
1029-94.................High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
1598-00.................Luminaires
H. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, Part 18
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)
A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, UL 1598 and shall be as shown on
drawings and as specified.
B. Sheet Metal:
1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and
lens frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and
parallel to each other as designed.
2. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and
shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage
to the wiring.
3. Where lighting fixtures are detailed with minimum 20 gauge housing,
minimum 22 gauge housings will be acceptable provided they have

strengthening embossed rib and break formations, which give the

equivalent rigidity of a 20 gauge housing.
4. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door
frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall
close in a light tight manner.
5. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding
when the fixture is in the installed position, and latches shall
function easily by finger action without the use of tools.
C. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally
installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or
wireway covers unless so specified.
D. Lamp Sockets:
1. Fluorescent: Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type or
phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall
conform to the applicable requirements of UL 542. Contacts for
recessed double contact lampholders and for slimline lampholders
shall be silver plated. Lampholders for bi-pin lamps, with the
exception of those for "U" type lamps, shall be of the telescoping
compression type, or of the single slot entry type requiring a
one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion.
2. Incandescent: Shall have porcelain enclosures and conform to the
applicable requirements of UL 496.
3. High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures.
E. Recessed incandescent fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be
listed for use in insulated ceilings.
F. Fluorescent fixtures with louvers or light transmitting panels shall
have hinges, latches and safety catches to facilitate safe, convenient
cleaning and relamping. Vapor tight fixtures shall have pressure
clamping devices in lieu of the latches.
G. Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame,
hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive
screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be
accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.
H. Metal Finishes:
1. The manufacturer shall apply his standard finish (unless otherwise
specified) over a corrosion resistant primer, after cleaning to free
the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other deposits. Edges of
pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing
processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner

to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of

stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking.
2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than
85 percent reflectances, except where otherwise shown on the drawing.
3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.
I. Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding their
metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.
J. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:
1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed,
crystal glass.
2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) of
average thickness. The average thickness shall be determined by
adding the maximum thickness to the minimum unpenetrated thickness
and dividing the sum by 2.
3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, diffusers and louvers shall be
retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a
manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens without
distortion or cracking.
K. Lighting Fixtures in Hazardous Areas: Fixtures shall be suitable for
installation in flammable atmospheres (Class and Group) as defined in
NFPA 70 and shall comply with UL 844.
L. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for
compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture.
Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are prohibited
except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures.
Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.
2.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A. Where applicable, fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall comply with the
National Energy Policy Act of 1992.
B. Ballasts shall comply with NEMA 82.1, 82.2 and 82.11, NFPA 70, and UL
935 unless otherwise specified.
C. Lamp types F32T8 and F32T8/U shall be operated by electronic, high
frequency ballasts. All other fluorescent lamp types shall be operated
by the standard energy saving electromagnetic core-and-coil ballasts.
For these applications, the lamps shall be operated by core-and-coil
ballasts where specifically required on the drawings as "core-and-coil".
D. Electronic high-frequency ballasts:
1. Ballasts shall operate the lamps at a frequency between 20 and 60 KHz
from an input frequency of 60Hz.
2. Ballast package:
a. Size: The ballast case shall be sized to be physically inter-
changeable with standard core-and-coil ballasts and suitable for
standard mounting in new or existing lighting fixtures.
b. Case marking: Mark the ballast to indicate the required supply
voltage, frequency, RMS current, current surge during starting,
input watts, and power factor at the design center voltage, open
circuit voltage, crest factor and efficacy.
3. Performance:
a. Light output:
1) At the design voltage, the light output shall be at least equal
to that obtained by a core-and-coil ballasted system meeting
ANSI, NEMA and CBM standards. The comparison test shall be
measured in the same fixture at 25 degrees C (plus or minus one
degree) ambient room temperature.
2) Tests shall be made in fixtures designed only for the number of
lamps being tested.
3) For other applications (higher ambients, etc.) the tests should
be operated with equivalent lamp wall temperatures plus or
minus 4 degrees C.
b. Efficacy: The efficacy of the high-frequency, electronically
ballasted system shall be at least 15 percent greater than the
equivalent CBM core-and-coil ballasted system (see "Light output"
above).
c. Starting: The ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining
operation of lamps at an ambient temperature of 10 degrees C (50
degree F) or more for an input voltage of plus or minus 10 percent
about the center design voltage unless otherwise indicated. The
ballast shall never be started in the instant start mode at any
temperature.
d. Operation:
1) The ballast shall safely and reliably operate in a room ambient
temperature from 10 degrees C (50 degree F) to 40 degrees C
(105 degree F).
2) The light output shall not vary by more than plus or minus 5
percent for a plus or minus 10 percent variation of the input
voltage about the center design voltage. Light output shall
remain constant for a plus or minus 5 percent variation of the
input voltage.

3) The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not
adversely curtail the normal life of the lamp.
e. Transient protection: The ballast shall comply with IEEE C62.41,
Cat. A.
f. Flicker: The flicker shall be less than 5 percent and without
visible flicker.
g. Noise: The audible noise levels should be equivalent to or better
than the Class A rating of CBM certified ballasts.
h. Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency
Interference (RFI): The EMI and RFI limits shall meet the
requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and
Regulations (CFR 47 Part 18).
i. Rated life: The ballast shall have a rated life of 10 years or
30,000 hours (based on a 10 hour day).
j. The two-lamp ballast shall safely operate two F32T8 RS, 32- watt
lamps or two F32T8/U lamps. The single lamp ballast shall safely
operate one F32T8 RS, 32-watt lamp or one F32T8/U lamp.
k. Power factor: Not less than 95 percent.
l. Reliability:
1) Labels: Ballasts must be labeled or listed by UL and CBM/ETL.
2) Submit, simultaneously with shop drawings, a certified test
report by an independent testing laboratory showing that the
electronic ballasts meet or exceed all the performance
requirements in this specification.
m. Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 10 percent.
E. Core-and-coil ballasts (for lamps other than F32T8 and F32T8/U or where
shown on drawings as "core-and-coil"):
1. Shall be rapid starting type.
2. Shall comply with NEMA 82.1 and UL 935.
3. Shall be UL Class P with automatic-resetting, internal, thermal
protection.
4. Shall be CBM/ETL certified.
5. Power factor shall be not less than 95 percent. Capacitors in
ballasts shall not contain PCB (Polychlorinated Biphenyl) fluids or
other fluids recognized as hazardous when discharged into the
environment.
6. Sound ratings shall be Class A or better, except for ballast sizes
which are not available with Class A ratings, as standard products

from any manufacturer. Ballasts which are not available with Class A
ratings shall have the quietest ratings available.
7. Where core-and-coil ballasts are specified or detailed in lieu of the
normally required electronic high-frequency types, two lamp ballasts
shall be energy-saving type, UL listed to operate F40T12 rapid start
lamps for both standard 40 watt lamps and the reduced wattage 35/34
watts energy-saving lamps. Lamp output shall be within 5 percent of
nominal rating. When operating energy-saving lamps, the input watts
to the ballast shall not exceed 78 watts at 120 V.A.C. or 79 watts at
277 V.A.C. Energy-saving type ballasts should not be used in ambient
temperatures below manufacturer's recommendations.
F. Ballasts for lighting fixtures controlled by dimming devices shall be
the electronic, high frequency type as specified herein, equipped for
dimming and conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
associated dimming devices to assure satisfactory operation of the
lighting system.
G. All ballasts serving straight or "U" type lamps shall be mounted by four
non-turning studs (or captive bolts) equipped with lock washers and nuts
or locking type nuts, or by four thread cutting (TC) sheet metal screws
which are firmly secured against the fixture body (or wireway) to
maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noise. Exception: electronic
high-frequency ballasts may be mounted at a minimum of two points, one
at each end of unit.
H. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally
installed position, and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or
wireway covers unless so specified.
I. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be
wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same
ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the
innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch
shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in
all fixture units that are being controlled.
J. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements
dictate otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the
center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous
row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory wired
with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually
mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a
single-lamp ballast for operation of the center lamp.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES:

A. Shall comply with NEMA 82.4 and UL 1029.
B. Shall have individual overcurrent protection sized in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Shall have integral thermal protection where the fixture is recessed in
an interior ceiling.
D. Shall be the constant wattage, high power factor type or the reactor
high power factor type. Capacitors shall not contain PCB
(Polychlorinated Biphenyl) fluids or other fluids recognized as
hazardous when discharged into the environment.
E. Shall have not less than Class B sound ratings for interior fixtures,
when available. Ballasts which are not available with Class B ratings
shall be of the next standard rating.
2.4 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; preheat-
start type shall comply with ANSI C78.2; and instant-start and cold-
cathode lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.3.
2. Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376.
3. The lamps shall include the F32T8, F32T8/U 32 watt energy saving type
and EPACT approved F40T12 type if specifically required by contract
drawings for special applications.
4. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be energy saving type, have a
color temperature between 3500 and 4100°K, a Color Rendering Index
(CRI) of not less than 75, and an initial lumen output not less than
2800. "U" tube lamps shall have the same color temperature and CRI
limits as the above.
a. In utility areas (Electrical, Communication and Mechanical)
Service rooms and closets), maintenance closets and non-medical
storage spaces, utilize energy saving light-white lamps.
b. In areas with ambient temperatures below 60 degrees use the 40
watt version of the lamp above.
c. Over the beds in Intensive Care, Coronary Care, Recovery, Life
Support, and Observation and Treatment areas; Electromyographic,
Autopsy (Necropsy), Surgery, and certain dental rooms
(Examination, Oral Hygiene, Oral Surgery, Recovery, Labs,
Treatment, and X-Ray) use color corrected lamps having a CRI of 90
or above and a correlated color temperature between 5000 and
6000°K.
d. Other areas as indicated on the drawings.

B. Incandescent lamps shall be the general service, inside frosted type
rated 130 volts except where otherwise shown on the drawings.
C. High Intensity Discharge Lamps:
1. Mercury vapor lamps shall be ANSI type "DX". Lamps in open or
louvered fixtures mounted less than 4500 mm (15 feet) above the
finished floor (or grade) shall be of the safety type in which the
arc will automatically extinguish if the outer glass envelope becomes
broken.
2. Multi-vapor lamps shall be as defined on the detail drawings.
3. High pressure sodium lamps shall be as defined on the detail
drawings.
2.5 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 101 and
UL 924.
B. Housing and Canopy:
1. Shall be made of cast or extruded aluminum, or rolled steel.
2. Optional steel housing shall be a minimum 20 gauge thick or
equivalent strength aluminum.
3. Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resistant, matte
black or ivory white primer.
C. Door frame shall be cast or extruded aluminum, and hinged with latch.
D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.
E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.
F. Fixtures:
1. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of
2.25 mm (0.090 inch) thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high
letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass. Lamps
shall be luminous red Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center
of letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass. The LED shall
be rated minimum 25 years life; maximum of 3.5 watts for single face
and 7 watts for double-faced fixtures that do not use diffuser panels
in front of the LEDs. LED exit light fixtures that use diffuser
panels shall require a maximum of 1.0 watt per fixture for single or
double face fixtures.
2. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required
or as shown on drawings.
3. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the
inscription panel where required or as shown on drawings. Directional
arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the

letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.
G. Voltages: Fixtures shall be wired for // 120-volt // 277-volt //
operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's
instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.
B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment. Where the
indicated locations for the lighting fixtures conflict with the
locations for equipment, change the locations for the lighting fixtures
by the minimum distances necessary as approved by the Resident Engineer.
D. For suspended lighting fixtures, the mounting heights shall provide the
clearances between the bottoms of the fixtures and the finished floors
as shown on the drawings.
E. Fluorescent bed light fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the
walls. Attachment to gypsum board only is not acceptable.
F. Lighting Fixture Supports:
1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be
anchored to channels of the ceiling construction, to the structural
slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a
suspended ceiling.
2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping.
3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or
partition to deflect.
.
4. Hardware for recessed fluorescent fixtures:
a. Where the suspended ceiling system is supported at the four
corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall clamp the
fixture to the ceiling system structural members, or plaster frame
at not less than four points in such a manner as to resist
spreading of the support members and safely lock the fixture into
the ceiling system.
b. Where the suspended ceiling system is not supported at the four
corners of the fixture opening, hardware devices shall
independently support the fixture from the building structure at
four points.

5. Hardware for surface mounting fluorescent fixtures to suspended

ceilings:
a. In addition to being secured to any required outlet box, fixtures
shall be bolted to a grid ceiling system at four points spaced
near the corners of each fixture. The bolts shall be not less than
6 mm (1/4 inch) secured to channel members attached to and
spanning the tops of the ceiling structural grid members.
Non-turning studs may be attached to the ceiling structural grid
members or spanning channels by special clips designed for the
purpose, provided they lock into place and require simple tools
for removal.
b. In addition to being secured to any
required outlet box, fixtures shall be
bolted to a plaster ceiling at four points
spaced near the corners of each fixture.
Pre-positioned 6 mm (1/4 inch) studs or
threaded plaster inserts secured to
ceiling structural members shall be used
to bolt the fixtures to the ceiling. In
lieu of the above, 6 mm (1/4 inch) toggle
bolts may be used on new or existing
ceiling provided the plaster and lath can
safely support the fixtures without
sagging or cracking
G. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures
installed and all existing lighting fixtures reinstalled under this
project.
H. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that
approved lighting fixtures are furnished in the proper sizes and
installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames,
flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.
I. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as
specified in Section 16450, GROUNDING.
J. At completion of project, relamp all fixtures which have failed/burned-
out lamps. Clean all fixtures, lenses, diffusers and louvers that have
accumulated dust/dirt during construction.
- - - E N D - - -

mcla
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF3
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
SF1/SF2
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
SF3/SF3a
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
SF4
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
SF5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
TR1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
TR1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
TT1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
TT1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
TT1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
TT1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
WC1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
WF1a thru WF1b
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
WF2a thru WF2h
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
WF3
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
WF4
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
WF4
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT: FIXTURE TYPE:
OC1
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OC1
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OC2
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
OC3/OC3a
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OM1
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OM2
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OM2
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OM2
mcla
GEORGETOWN
OM2
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY
Lighting Fixture Schedule mcla
29 APRIL 2009 ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING DESIGN
Type Mounting Lamps Manufacturer and Series Notes
AR1 Recessed 1 x 39CDMT6/830 Gotham Lighting #DTH-T6-39MHC-4BC-T20-*-TRW Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling G12 Base Architect to verify fixture flange finish.
Fixture to be provided with full microprism lens trim.
CF1 Surface 2 x F14T5/830 Schmitz # 28950.25 Voltage per Electrical Engineer.

Wall Mini Bipin Base Finish per Architect
Verify mounting height and location with elevation drawings
CF2 NOT USED
JL1 Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-26'F-2-WW-B Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Bench Warm white Remote driver to be located underneath bench or in millwork bookcase
Fixtures mount underneath bench and will need to be segmented for
radius curve.
JL1a Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-24.5'F-2-WW-B Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Cove Warm white Remote driver to be located underneath bench or in millwork bookcase
Fixtures mount behind letters in a cove on the lower level.
JL2 Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-4.5'F-2-B-L Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Stair Blue Remote driver to be located in an accessible back of house location
Fixtures mount behind perforated panels of stair risers.
JL2a Surface 1w LED included ProLume #XLA-4.5'F-2-WW-B Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Stair Warm White Remote driver to be located in an accessible back of house location
Fixtures mount behind perforated panels of stair risers.
NF1 Recessed 1 x F21T5/830 a.Light # D5-3-S-volt-A-XP-A(Black)-*MOD* Voltage per Electrical Engineer

MOD: Fixture to be mounted in half wall as lensed uplight Fixture mounts in millwork panel to uplight behind bench
PC2a Pendant 6 x FT36W/2G11/830 GLighting # G-10063 Qvolts F YY G 3 072 Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling 2G11 Base Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval.
MOD: Modify fixture so that there are no visible connectors or hardware. Provide fixture with no visible hardware or connectors.
MOD: Modify fixture suspension for 6'-0" overall height Architect to verify suspension length.
Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.
PC2b Pendant 6 x FT36W/2G11/830 GLighting # G-10063 Qvolts F YY G 3 036 Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling 2G11 Base Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval.
MOD: Modify fixture so that there are no visible connectors or hardware. Provide fixture with no visible hardware or connectors.
MOD: Modify fixture suspension for 3'-0" overall height Architect to verify suspension length.
PC3 Pendant 2 x FT18W/2G11/830 Schmitz # 26982.06/2831 MOD Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling 2G11 Base Architect to verify finish.
MOD: Non-Standard Cable and Power Cord Lengths Overall fixture heights vary from 14' to 51'. Provide a shop drawing for review
PC4 Pendant 8x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Crenshaw # Custom SCUS pendant - oil rubbed bronze Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Architect to verify overall diameter of fixture.
Architect to verify suspension length.
4x CFTR18W/GX24q/830 Provide oiled rubbed bronze finish on metal
GX24q-2 Base
PC5 Pendant 2 x CFQ26W/G24q/830 Visa #CP4516-finish-OAH Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Ceiling G24q-3 Base Manufacturer must submit finish sample for design team approval.
MOD: Overall height is 4'-0" Architect to verify overall height and finish
PC6 Pendant 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Brass Light Gallery #CN-411-A8-03M-D303-Brnz-36"-MOD Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamping and integral
electronic ballast.
Architect to verify finish and overall height
PC7 Pendant 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Brass Light Gallery #CN413-A6-03M-C314-Brnz-30"-Mod Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamp and integral ballast
Architect to verify finish and stem length.
PF1 Pendant 4 x F24T5HO/830 Artemide # MOUETTE SYMMETRICAL Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Fixture comes with 72" of cable - field shorten to approximately 30" overall
height - verify with Architect in field
PF3 Pendant NOT USED

Ceiling
PF5 Pendant 10 x F28T5/830 Focal Point # FTWS M12T5 1C volts D J12 WH 20' Voltage per Electrical Enginner
Mini Bipin Base Architect to verify finish
Bottom of fixture to hang flush with dropped ceiling in public meeting room
Fixture to be provided with Lutron dimming ballast.
RC1 Recessed 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Kurt Versen # H8632-SZ-WT-FLT6MP-volt Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling GX24q-3 Base Architect to verify fixture reflector and flange finish.
Fixture to be provided with full microprism lens trim.
RC2 Recessed 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Kurt Versen # WH432-WHP-LP-volt Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Fixture to be provide with large prism lens.
RC3 Recessed 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Kurt Versen # H8653-SZ-WT-volt Voltage per Electrical Engineer
RF1 Recessed 2 x F24T5HO/830 Ledalite # 9722-D1-ST-H224-S-1-volt-E Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Ceiling type and mounting per Architect.
RF2 Recessed 10 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R20-2-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Finish per Architect
Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and
sanded to provide trimless finish.
RF2a Recessed 2 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R4-D-volt-A-G-finish Voltage per Electrical Engineer

RF2b Recessed 4 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R8-2-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON Voltage per Electrical Engineer
RF3 Recessed 3 x F28T5/830 a.Light # D5-R11-S-volt-A-G-finish-D LUTRON-*MOD* Voltage per Electrical Engineer
MOD: Provide fixture with one lamp staggered lamping. Fixture to be integrated into ceiling - taped, mudded and
SF1 Surface 1 x F28T5/830 Birchwood # WP-T5-DS-volt-STD-128-HRW-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Cove Mini Bipin Base Fixture to be installed in architectural detail.
SF2 Surface 1 x F21T5/830 Birchwood # WP-T5-DS-volt-STD-121-HRW-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Cove Mini Bipin Base Fixture to be installed in architectural detail.
SF3 Surface 1 x F28T5/830 Birchwood # WP-T5-S-AC-volt-STD-121-HRW-*MOD* Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Ceiling Mini Bipin Base Fixture to be installed in architectural detail.
MOD: Provide fixture with UV filtering lens with a minumum filtering of 99.9%. Provide UV filter sleeve
SF3a Surface 1 x F28T5/830 Birchwood # WP-T5-S-AC-volt-STD-121-HRW-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Ceiling Mini Bipin Base
SF4 Surface 2 x F28T5/830 Birchwood # WP-T5-US-ACP-volt-EB-228-HRW Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Millwork Mini Bipin Base
SF5 Surface 1 x F28T5/830 Sistemalux # ST 128 ST 109-opal lens Fixture to be surface mounted in cabinet for internal illumination.
Millwork Mini Bipin Base Provide opal lens and have part of lens masked to diminish glare
Provide fixture with UV filtering lens with a minumum filtering of 99.9%. Provide UV filter sleeve
TR1 Track 1 x 50MR16/NFL25 LSI # 260-00-WL-finish/ AAA962/AAA990 Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Mounted Ushio Ultraline Titan Provide UV and beam symmetric spead lens
GU 5.3 Base Finish per Architect
TT1 Recessed n/a LSI # One Ckt Recessed Flangeless Track Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Ceiling Recessed track mounted into molding detail to be confirmed by Architect
Finish per Architect
WC1 Surface 2 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Brass Light Gallery # CN-201-A4-(2) B100-Bronze-MOD Voltage per Electrical Engineer
Wall GX24q-3 Base Modify fixture for dedicated compact fluorescent lamps and integral ballast
MOD: Modify fixture for 32W CFL lamping Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8"
to comply with ADA standards.
Provide etched fantail furn shades
WF1a Surface 5 x F21T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-12'-12"-00-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Bookcase Mini Bipin Base Finish per Architect
12'-0" overall length Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8"
Mount ballast on top of bookcases within 5' of fixture
WF2a Surface 3 x F28T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-12'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Fixture mounts at entry vestibule.
WF2b Surface 1 x F14T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-30"-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Fixture mounts at entry vestibule.
WF2c Surface 4 x F28T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-19'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Wall 1 x F21T5/830 Finish per Architect
Mini Bipin Base 19'-0" overall length Fixture must be installed such that the bottom of the fixture is above 6'-8"
WF2d Surface 1 x F14T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-2'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

WF2e Surface 1 x F21T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-3'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE3-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

WF2f Surface 6 x F21T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-18'-6"-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE3-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

WF2g Surface 6 x F21T5/830 Vode #WG-01-LA-WA-17'-6"-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE3-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

WF2h Surface 1 x F28T5/830 Vode # WG-01-LA-WA-4'-24"-IB-Z-volt-0-HE4-0-0 Voltage per Electrical Engineer

WF3 Surface 2 x F21T5/830 Winona #5622-36-volt-WLG-Bronze Voltage per Electrical Engineer

WF4 Surface 2 x F28T5/830 Ledalite #7328-F02-I-G-4-1-volt-E-W Voltage per Electrical Engineer

OC1 Surface 1 x CFTR32W/GX124q/830 Gardco # 111-MT-32TRF-volt-finish Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Wall GX24q-3 Base Finish per Architect
Electrical Engineer to determine if energency is required for fixture.
OC2 Recessed 1 x CFTR18W/GX24q/830 BEGA # 2225P Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Wall GX24q-2 Base Finish per Architect
OC3 Surface 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Existing Decorative Sconce to be refurbished Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification.
Wall GX24q-3 Base Refurbish exterior metal and repaint
Interior to be cofigured for fluroescent lamp and full cut off distribution.
OC3a Surface 1 x CFTR32W/GX24q/830 Crenshaw - Reproduction of Existing Decorative Sconce Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification.
Wall GX24q-3 Base Refurbish exterior metal and repaint
OM1 Surface 1 x CMH39/T6/830 Refurbish Decorative pier mount fixture Fixture must be modified to classify as full cut off classification.
Wall G12 Base Refurbish exterior metal and repaint
Fixture is to be mounted to existing pier. Surface conduit required.
Conduit to be painted to match brick wall.
OM2 Pole 1 x 150HPS AAL # CLL-H2-150HPS-TRA-1L-WRZ-LDL-CHM Voltage per Electrical Engineer

Med. Base POLE: SSA4-STB-10'-D4-finish Finish per Architect
Pole finish to match fixture finish.
General Notes:
1. Electrical engineer shall verify voltages.
2. All fixture substitutions shall have a working sample provided for review within 10 working days upon request from the design team.
3. Judgment of fixture quality and optics, as equal, shall be determined by the Architect or Lighting Designer.
4. All transpositions of the specifications in this schedule must be complete and accurate in order to be considered valid.
5. Low-temperature ballast must be capable of starting at -18 degrees Celsius.
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
AR1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
CF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
JL1 thru JL2a
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
JL1 thru JL2a
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
NF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC2a/b
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC2a/b
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PC3
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC4
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC6
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PC7
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PF5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
PF5
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
RC1
mcla
GEORGETOWN
RC2
mcla
GEORGETOWN
RC3
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF1
FIXTURE TYPE:
mcla
GEORGETOWN
PROJECT:
RF2 thru RF2b
FIXTURE TYPE:
SECTION 16464-SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of
the low voltage indoor switchgear.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 13081, SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS:
Requirement for Seismic Restraint for Nonstructural Components.
B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General
electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one
C. Section 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY: Coordination
study of overcurrent protection devices.
D. Section 16111, CONDUITS: Conduct and outlet boxes.
E. Section 16112, BUSWAYS: Feeder Busways and Fittings.
F. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and
Wiring.
G. Section 16312, UNIT SUBSTATION, SECONDARY: Unit secondary substation.
H. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path for possible fault currents.
1.3 FACTORY INSPECTION:
A. The Government shall have an option to witness factory tests. All
expenses of the Government Representative's trip to witness the testing
will be paid by the Government.
B. Notify the VA Central Office through the Resident Engineer not less than
30 days prior to the scheduled factory tests.
C. Witness tests shall be a repeat of production tests as indicated in IEEE
C37.20 and ANSI C37.51. Tests shall include, but not be limited to,
power frequency dielectric, mechanical, grounding of instrument
transformer case, electrical operation and control wiring, calibration,
control and wiring, dielectric withstand, and no-load operation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
Submit in accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL):
A. Shop Drawings:
SWITCHGEAR, LOW VOLTAGE (600 Volts and Below) 16464-1

2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials,

required clearances, terminations, weight, temperature rise, wiring
and connection diagrams, plan, front, side, and rear elevations,
sectional views, bus work, circuit breaker frame sizes, trip and
short-circuit rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous and ground
fault settings, coordinated breaker and fuse curves, accessories, and
device nameplate data.
3. Show the size, ampere-rating, number of bars per phase and neutral in
each bus run (horizontal and vertical), bus spacing, equipment ground
bus, and bus material.
B. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of
complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data
sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement
parts.
a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to
facilitate installation, maintenance, and operation.
b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of
equipment and the interconnection between the items of equipment.
c. Provide a clear and concise description of operation, which gives,
in detail, the information required to properly operate the
equipment.
d. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals
together with shop drawings.
2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the final
updated maintenance and operating manuals to the Resident Engineer.
a. The manuals shall be updated to include any information
necessitated by shop drawing approval.
b. Complete "As Installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be
included which show all items of equipment and their
interconnecting wiring.
c. Show all terminal identification.
d. Include information for testing, repair, trouble shooting,
assembly, disassembly, and recommended maintenance intervals.
e. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a
list of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for
testing and maintenance purposes.
f. Furnish manuals in loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard
binder.
C. Certifications:

1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the

following to the Resident Engineer:
a. Certification by the Contractor that the assemblies have been
properly installed, adjusted and tested, including circuit breaker
settings.
b. Certified copies of all of the factory design and production
tests, field test data sheets and reports for the assemblies.
1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

supplements, and errata), form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic
designation only.
B. Institute of Engineering and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
C37.13-95...............Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures
C57.13-93...............Instrument Transformers
C62.41-95...............Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
SG-3-90.................Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.
SG-5-90.................Power Switchgear Assemblies.
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-02...................National Electrical Code (NEC).
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
977-94..................Safety Fused Power Circuit Devices
1053-99.................Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Low voltage switchgear shall be in accordance with IEEE, NEMA, NFPA and
UL.
B. Provide complete switchgear including, but not limited to housing,
buses, draw out air circuit breakers, instruments and related
transformers, relays fuses and wiring.
C. Switchgear dimensions shall not exceed the space provided as shown on
the drawings.
D. Manufacturer’s nameplate shall include complete ratings of switchgear in
addition to date of manufacture.

2.2 HOUSING:
A. Construction: Provide housing of structural or formed steel frame braced
to maintain alignment and resist damage during shipment, erection, and
by stresses resulting from short circuits. Enclose the frame on all
sides, top, and bottom (except cable compartment) with sheet steel
covers, doors and panels and equip with interior barriers. Provide rear
access panels of the hinged type with provisions for padlocking. Provide
ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature rise of
current carrying parts. Provide breakers with hinged covers and cutouts
for control mechanism. Protect all openings against entrance of falling
dirt, water or foreign matter. Isolate each breaker in its own
compartment. Metering transformers and instruments shall be similarly
isolated.
B. Painting: Enclosure shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphate treated and
primed by a phosphate or similar treatment, and followed immediately
with a rust-inhibiting paint. Final finish coat shall be the
manufacturers standard gray. Supply a quart of finish paint for touch-up
purposes.
C. Breaker Compartments: The breaker compartments shall include stationary
primary contacts, stationary secondary contacts as required, barriers,
and rails for the drawout elements.
D. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly.

Include the following:
1. Utility metering compartment that complies with utility company
requirements.
2. Bus transition sections.
3. Incoming-line pull sections.
4. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
5. Pull box on top of switchgear for extra room for pulling cable, with
removable top, front, and side covers and ventilation provisions
adequate to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits
as switchgear.
a. Set pull box back from front to clear circuit-breaker lifting
mechanism.
b. Bottom: Insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes
for cable drops into switchgear.
c. Cable Supports: Arranged to ease cabling and adequate to support
cables indicated, including those for future installation.

E. Cable Compartment: Provide adequate space for feeder cables and

connections including spare breakers or spaces.
2.3 BUSES:
A. General: Arrange buses for 3 phase, 4 wire distribution. The phase buses
(through bus), neutral bus, and ground bus shall be full capacity and
shall extend the entire length of the switchgear. Make provisions for
future extensions by means of bolt holes or other approved method. Brace
bus to withstand short circuit current available at the particular
location. No magnetic material shall be used between buses to form a
magnetic loop.
B. Material and Size: Buses and connections shall be hard-drawn copper of
98 percent conductivity. Bus size and arrangement shall be such that the
temperature rise of the buses shall not exceed IEEE standards. Bus
connections to circuit breakers shall be copper. Size feeder busing to
the line side of breakers based on IEEE. Bus laminations shall have a
minimum of 1/4 inch spacing.
C. Bus Connections: Provide bolted or welded connections. All contact
surfaces are of copper. A minimum of two plated bolts per splice or
connection is required for nonwelded bus except where physical bus size
permits only one bolt; the joint shall include an approved means, other
than friction, to prevent turning, twisting, or bending. Bolts shall be
torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Neutral Bus: Provide bare neutral bus mounted on insulated bus supports.
Provide neutral disconnect links to permit isolation of the neutral bus
from the common ground bus and service entrance conductors.
E. Ground Bus: Provide an uninsulated 1/4 inch by 2 inch copper equipment
ground bus bar the length of the switchgear and secure to each unit
frame.
F. Main Bonding Jumper: An uninsulated 1/4 inch by 2 inch copper bus shall
interconnect the neutral and ground buses, when the secondary service
equipment is incorporated within the switchgear to establish the system
common ground point.
2.4 INTERNALLY INTEGRATED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
A. Integral Surge Suppressor:
1. SPD (Surge Protective Devices) shall be Component Recognized and
listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition to include Section
37.3 highest fault category testing on devices intended for service
entrance use. SPD shall also be UL 1283 listed.
2. SPD shall be UL 67 listed, installed by and shipped from the
electrical distribution equipment manufacturer’s factory.
3. SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of
protection; L-N, L-G, N-G, in WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA
systems.
4. SPD shall be modular in design. Each mode shall be fused with a
200kAIC UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal
cutout device.
5. SPD shall be integrally mounted to the bus bars of the switchboard.
6. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This
alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch
shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch
shall be provided as well.
7. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase
shall be:
1) Service Entrance Switchboard 250 kA.
2) Distribution Panelboards 160 kA.
3) Branch Panelboards 160 kA.
4) Service Entrance MCC 240 kA specified.
5) Distribution Class MCC 160 kA.
b. UL 1449 Second Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression
Voltage Ratings (SVR’s) for Service Entrance and Distribution
Location equipment shall not exceed the following:
c. Voltage Let-Thru values for Solidly Grounded Systems:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G
480Y/277 800V 800V 800V
8. SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of –50Db at 100 kHz with
an insertion ration of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology.
9. SPD shall have the following diagnostic features: transient counter,
status lights on each phase, and one set of 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary
dry contacts for alarming.
10. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating
unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if transients destroy them
during the warranty period. Warranty shall be the responsibility of
the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be
supported by their respective field service division.

2.5 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS:

A. Nameplates: Provide laminated black phenolic resin with core with 1/4
inch engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker to indicate
the feeder, panelboards and equipment served. Plates shall be mounted
with plated screws on front of breaker or control station.
B. Mimic Bus: Provide an approved mimic bus on front of each switchgear
assembly. Color shall be blue (480Y/277 Volt) or black (208/120 Volt),
either factory painted, plastic or metal strips. Plastic tape shall not
be used. Use symbols similar to a one line diagram. (Refer to drawings).
Plastic or metal strips shall be mounted with plated screws.
2.6 METERS AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA
accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class
suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.
B. Power Circuit Monitoring and Control System: The Power Circuit Monitor
shall be a multi-functional, digital, data acquisition and control
device. The Power Circuit Monitor shall be metered over 50 values and
extensive Min/Max data can be viewed on the LED display. Each Circuit
Monitor shall offer true RMS metering and communications standard.
Provide 0.2% accuracy true RMS metering and other powerful features such
as automatic relay control, waveform capture, on-board event and data
logging, and programmable logic for special applications like custom
data logging and control function. On-board memory can be expanded to
add 512 K or 1024K. Provide input/output modules, status inputs, a pulse
output, relay outputs and analog inputs and outputs.
1. Power Circuit Monitor shall be:
a. Certified ANSI C12.16 revenue accuracy
b. True RMS Metering through the 31st harmonic
c. High accuracy: 0.2% on current and voltage
d. Power quality readings displayed: THD and K-Factor
e. Harmonic Analysis Data through 63rd harmonic
f. Automatic Alarm/Relay control
g. On-board event and data logging
h. Waveform capture
i. UL listed, CSA Approved, CE Marketing, NOM Approved
j. MV-90 compatible
C. Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with
test blocks and plugs.
D. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply

with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1:
1. Install in cable termination compartments and connect in each phase
of circuit.
2. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.
2.7 SPACE FOR FUTURE:
Where "provision for”, “future”, or “space” is noted on drawings, equip
the compartment with rails, mounting brackets, supports, bus
connections, and any appurtenances necessary for ready insertion of a
future breaker. A blank door shall close off the front of the
compartment. Design buses for the breaker ampere rating as indicated on
the drawings.
2.8 BREAKER REMOVAL EQUIPMENT:
Furnish a portable elevating carriage or switchgear mounted device for
installation and removal of circuit breakers.
2.9 CONTROL WIRING:
Switchgear control wiring shall be 600 volt Class B stranded SIS.
Install all control wiring complete at the factory, adequately bundled
and protected. All conductors size No. 8 and smaller, all conductors
across hinges, and all conductors for interconnection between shipping
units shall be Class C stranded. Size conductors in accordance with the
NEC. Provide separate control circuit fuses in each breaker compartment
and locate for ease of access and maintenance.
2.10 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A. General: Circuit breakers shall be dead front, drawout, stored energy
type with solid state trip devices. Arcing contacts shall be renewable.
Circuit Breakers shall be UL listed (Category PAQX).
B. Rating: Circuit breakers shall be 3 pole, 600 volts AC and below, 60
cycle with indicated frame size, trip rating and system voltage.
Interrupting rating shall be without instantaneous trip. Breakers shall
have 30 cycle short time current ratings.
C. Drawout Mounting: Provide a racking mechanism to position and hold the
breaker in the connected, test, or disconnected position. Provide an
interlock to prevent movement of the breaker into or out of the
connected position unless the breaker is tripped open.
D. Trip Devices: Breakers shall be electrically and mechanically trip free
and shall have trip devices in each pole. Unless otherwise indicated,
each breaker shall have overcurrent, short-circuit and integral ground
fault trip devices. Trip devices shall be of the solid state type with

adjustable pick-up settings, with both long time and short time
elements, and integral trip unit testing provisions. Devices shall have
time-delay band adjustment of minimum, intermediate, and maximum
setting. Long-time delay element shall have inverse time
characteristics. Main circuit breakers shall have short-time trips, in
lieu of instantaneous trips. Final settings, of pick-up and time bands
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer as reflected by the Electric
System Protective Device Study as shown on the drawings.
E. Position Indicator: Provide a mechanical indicator visible from the
front of the unit to indicate whether the breaker is open or closed.
F. Trip Button: Equip each breaker with a mechanical trip button accessible
from the front of the door, which shall permit tripping of the breaker.
G. Padlocking: Provisions shall be included for padlocking the breaker in
the open position.
H. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, breakers 1600
ampere frame size and less shall be manually operated. Breakers larger
than 1600 ampere frame size shall be electrically operated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the switchgear in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the
drawings, and as recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Anchor switchgear to the floor with plated 1/2 inch minimum anchor bolts
as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor the switchgear on two 4 inch
minimum channel iron sills with plated 1/2 inch bolts. Furnish sills to
suit the switchgear. Coordinate installation of sills with concrete pour
of floor. Sills shall be level and grouted flush with floor.
3.2 INSTRUCTION:
Furnish the services of a competent instructor for one 4 hour period for
instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the switchgear
on the date requested by the Resident Engineer.
3.3 SPARE FUSES:
Furnish two spare sets of current-limiting fuses of each size and rating
for fused circuit breakers. Each set shall consist of three current-
limiting fuses and three trigger fuses. A steel compartmented wall
mounted box or cabinet for fuse storage shall be provided and located in
the switchgear room where directed. Mark the cabinet with 1/4 inch high
letters "SPARE FUSES".
- - - E N D - - -

PDF TO BE MADE.DOC
SECTION 16460-TRANSFORMERS (GENERAL PURPOSE)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the dry type general-purpose
transformers.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 13081, SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS: Requirements
for seismic restraint of nonstructural components.
B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
C. Section 16111, CONDUITS: Conduits and outlet boxes.
D. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
E. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low
impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL),
submit the following Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, impedance, dimensions, weight, mounting details decibel rating,
terminations, temperature rise, no load and full load losses, and connection diagrams.
3. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s name and catalog number.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance
and operating manuals including technical data sheets and wiring diagrams.
2. Two weeks prior to final inspection submit four copies of updated maintenance and operating
manuals to the Resident Engineer.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the transformers conform to the requirements of the
2. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed and
tested.
TRANSFORMERS (GENERAL PURPOSE) 16460-1

A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by
designation only.
B. National Fire Protection Association (FPA):
70-ional Electrical Code (NEC)
ST 20-19921997 ........................ Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
1.Unless otherwise specified, dry type transformers shall be in accordance with NEMA, NEC and
as shown on the drawings. Transformers shall be UL listed or labeled. 2. Rating and winding
connections shall be as shown on the drawings.
2. Transformers shall have copper windings.
3. Ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous-duty without the use of cooling fans.
4. Insulation systems:
a. Transformers 30 KVA and larger: UL rated 220 degree C
system having an average maximum rise by resistance of 150 degree C in a maximum
ambient of 40 degree C.
b. Transformers below 30 KVA: Same as for 30 KVA and larger or UL rated 185 degree C
system having an average maximum rise by resistance of 115 degree C in a maximum
ambient of 40 degree C.
5. Core and coil assemblies:
a. Rigidly braced to withstand the stresses caused by short circuit currents and rough
handling during shipment.
b. Cores shall be grain oriented, non-aging, and silicon steel.
c. Coils shall be continuous windings without splices except for taps.
d. Coil loss and core loss shall be minimum for efficient operation.
e. Primary and secondary tap connections shall be brazed or pressure type.
f. Coil windings shall have end fillers or tie downs for maximum strength.
6. Certified sound levels determined in accordance with NEMA, all not exceed the following:
Transformer Rating Sound Level Rating

0 - 9 KVA 40 dB
10 - 50 KVA 45 dB
51 - 150 KVA 50 dB

151 - 300 KVA 55 dB

301 - 500 KVA 60 dB
. Nominal impedance shall be as shown on the drawings. If not shown on drawings, nominal
impedance shall be as permitted by NEMA.
7. Single phase transformers rated 15 KVA through 25 KVA shall have two, 5 percent full
capacity taps below normal rated primary voltage. All transformers rated 30 KVA and larger
shall have two, 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above, and four, 2-1/2 percent full capacity
taps below normal rated primary voltage.
8. Core assemblies shall be grounded to their enclosures by adequate flexible ground straps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of transformers, as shown on drawings, shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
B. Install the transformers with adequate clearance at a minimum of 4 inches from wall and adjacent
equipment for air circulation to remove the heat produced by transformers.
D. Use flexible metal conduit to contain the conductors from the transformer to the raceway
systems.
- - - E N D - - -

SECTION 16450-GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirements of electrical and
telecommunication installations for personnel safety, equipment operations and to provide a low
B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as including made,
supplementary, lightning protection system and telecommunications system grounding
electrodes.
C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same
meaning.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that are common to more than one section of Division 16.
B. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low Voltage power and
lighting wiring.
C. Section 16670, LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM: Requirements for a lightning protection
system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of
aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.
C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has been properly installed and
tested.
GROUNDING
16450 - 1 of 5

Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata)
the basic designation only.
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B1-2001 ...................................... Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
B8-2004 ...................................... Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
81-1983 ...................................... IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,
and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
99-2005 ...................................... Health Care Facilities
D. Telecommunications Industry Association, (TIA)
J-STO-607-A-2002 ..................... Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
44-2005 ..................................... Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
83-2003 ..................................... Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
467-2004 ................................... Grounding and Bonding Equipment
486A-486B-2003 ....................... Wire Connectors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that sizes 10
AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all
equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes 25 mm² (4 AWG) and larger shall be
permitted to be identified per NEC.
B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes 10 AWG and
smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.
C. Electrical System Grounding: Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the
drawings and not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater.
2.2 GROUND RODS
A. Copper clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter by 10 feet long, conforming to UL 467.
B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance.
GROUNDING
16450 - 2 of 5
2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog
number, and permitted conductor size(s).
2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.
B. Above Grade:
1. Bonding Jumpers: compression type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external
tooth lockwashers.
2. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated copper or copper alloy
bolts and nuts.
3. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using zinc-plated or copper
alloy fasteners.
A. Cable Shields: Make ground connections to multipair communications cables with metallic shields
using shield bonding connectors with screw stud connection.
2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS
Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinet-
enclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 3/8 inch x ¾ inch.
2.6 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS
At any equipment mounting location (e.g. backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where rack-
type ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.
2.7 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES
Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shall be supplied by the splice case
manufacturer when available. Otherwise, use 6 AWG insulated ground wire with shield bonding
connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as hereinafter specified.
B. System Grounding:
1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means
and at the related transformers.
2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground
the secondary neutral.
3. Isolation transformers and isolated power systems shall not be system grounded.
C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures (including ductwork and building steel), enclosures,
raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in
close proximity with electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.
GROUNDING
16450 - 3 of 5
3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

Make grounding connections, which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible (except
connections for which periodic testing access is required) by exothermic weld.
3.3 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS
A. Switchgear: Provide a bare grounding electrode conductor from the switchgear ground bus to the
grounding electrode system.
B. Lightning Arresters: Connect lightning arresters to the equipment ground bus or ground rods as
applicable.
C. Metallic Conduit: Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to an electrical
equipment housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with
grounding bushings. Connect bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground
bus.
3.4 CORROSION INHIBITORS
When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact
surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals
used.
3.5 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the building to the grounding
electrode system. Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment
ground bus.
3.6 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Bond the lightning protection system to the electrical grounding electrode system.
3.7 ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING
Building Earth Ground Busbars: Provide ground busbar hardware at each
electrical room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring.
3.8 WIREWAY GROUNDING
A. Ground and Bond Metallic Wireway Systems as follows:
1. Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100 percent electrical continuity throughout
the wireway system by connecting a 6 AWG bonding jumper at all intermediate metallic
enclosures and across all section junctions.
2. Install insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers between the wireway system bonded as required in
paragraph 1 above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 16
meters (50 feet).
GROUNDING
16450 - 4 of 5
3. Use insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wireway at each end at all
intermediate metallic enclosures and cross all section junctions.
4. Use insulated 6 AWG bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building
ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 meters.
3.9 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make necessary modifications
or additions to the grounding electrode system for compliance without additional cost to the
Government. Final tests shall assure that this requirement is met.
B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-of-
potential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before
the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not
less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding
electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The
combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the
specified number of electrodes must still be provided.
C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground
resistance requirements.
D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the Resident Engineer prior to backfilling.
The Contractor shall notify the Resident Engineer 24 hours before the connections are ready for
inspection.
3.10 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION
A. Drive each rod vertically in the earth, not less than 3000 mm (10 feet) in depth.
B. Where permanently concealed ground connections are required, make the connections by the
exothermic process to form solid metal joints. Make accessible ground connections with
mechanical pressure type ground connectors.
C. Where rock prevents the driving of vertical ground rods, install angled ground rods or grounding
electrodes in horizontal trenches to achieve the specified resistance.
---END---
GROUNDING
16450 - 5 of 5
SECTION 16430-METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, complete installation, and connection of the electric meters
for special loads.
1.2 RELATED WORK
Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting details and clearances required for
servicing.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Complete maintenance, operating and testing manuals including wiring diagrams, technical
data sheets and information for ordering replacement parts:
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the meter conforms to the requirements of the drawings
and specifications, and the meter has been properly calibrated.
2. Certification by the contractor that the meter has been properly installed, adjusted, and
tested.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
C12.1-01 .................................... Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering
C12.10-04 .................................. American National Standard for Watt-hour Meters
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
METERING
16430 - 1 of 2
C37-90.1-02 ............................... Standard Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protection
Relays and Relay Systems
70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
414-04 ........................................ Standard for Safety Meter Sockets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMETERING EQUIPMENT FOR SPECIAL LOADS
A. The equipment shall meter all of the single phase and three phase electrical service used by the
equipment shown on the drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Install circuits and make connections as required for the metering equipment.
---END---
METERING
16430 - 2 of 2
SECTION 16170-DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of low voltage disconnect
switches.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of Division
16: Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
B. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS.
C. Cables and wiring: Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).
D. Motor rated toggle switches: Section 16155, MOTOR STARTER.
E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground
faults: Section 16450, GROUNDING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include sufficient information, clearly presented to determine compliance with drawings and
specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, enclosure types, fuse type
and class.
3. Show the specific switch and fuse proposed for each specific piece of equipment or circuit.
C. Manuals:
1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals for disconnect switches, including
technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering replacement parts.
Deliver four copies to the Resident Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection.
2. Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate maintenance and operation.
3. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring and any interlocking.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of
the certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES (MOTOR AND CIRCUIT)
16170 - 1 of 3
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

KS l-01 ....................................... Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches
(600 Volts Maximum)
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
98-98 .......................................... Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches
198C-89 ..................................... High-Interrupting-Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Types
198E-94 ...................................... Class R Fuses
977-99 ........................................ Fused Power-Circuit Devices
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS
A. Shall be quick-make, quick-break type in accordance with UL 98, NEMA KS 1 and NEC.
B. Shall have a minimum duty rating, NEMA classification General Duty (GD) for 240 volts and
NEMA classification Heavy Duty (HD) for 277/480 volts.
C. Shall be horsepower rated.
D. Shall have the following features:
1. Switch mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type.
2. Copper blades, visible in the OFF position.
3. An arc chute for each pole.
4. External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF position and shall have lock-open
padlocking provisions.
5. Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when the switch is in the OFF
position, defeatable by a special tool to permit inspection.
6. Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses specified.
7. Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which includes a neutral conductor.
8. Ground Lugs: One for each ground conductor.
9. Enclosures:
a. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the switches.
b. Where the types of switch enclosures are not shown, they shall be the NEMA types
which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the switches are being
installed. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, all outdoor switches shall be NEMA
3R.
c. Shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel paint over pretreated
steel (for the type of enclosure required).
16170 - 2 of 3
2.2 LOW VOLTAGE UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS
Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, but no fuses.
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED OVER 600 AMPERES TO 1200 AMPERES
Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and Less, except for the
minimum duty rating which shall be NEMA classification Heavy Duty (HD). These switches shall
also be horsepower rated.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS
A. Install nameplate identification signs on each disconnect switch to identify the equipment
controlled.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core, with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 1/4-inch high. Secure nameplates with screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings.
B. Fusible disconnect switches shall be furnished complete with fuses.
3.2 SPARE PARTS
Two weeks prior to the final inspection, furnish one complete set of spare fuses for each fusible
disconnect switch installed on the project. Deliver the spare fuses to the Resident Engineer.
---END---
16170 - 3 of 3
SECTION 16160-PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of panelboards.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09900, PAINTING: Identification and painting of panelboards.
B. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
requirements and items that are common to more than one Section of Division 16.
C. Section 16051, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY: Requirements for the
over current protective devices to be installed to ensure proper equipment and personnel
protection.
D. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlet boxes.
E. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wiring.
F. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, wiring diagrams
accessories and weights of equipment. Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s
name and catalog number.
C. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications has been
properly installed, and that the loads are balanced.
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements and errata)
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
PB-1-2006 .................................. Panelboards
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 1 of 4
AB-1-2002 .................................. Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
70-2005 ..................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
70E-2004 .................................... Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the Workplace
50-2003 ...................................... Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
67-2003 ...................................... Panel boards
489-2006 .................................... Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with UL, NEMA, NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Panelboards shall be standard manufactured products. All components of the panelboards shall
be the product and assembly of the same manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be
of the same manufacturer.
C. All panelboards shall be hinged “door in door” type with:
1. Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required to provide access to
circuit breaker operating handles only, not to energized ports.
2. Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box with factory bolts,
screws, clips or other fasteners requiring a tool for entry, hand operated latches are not
acceptable.
3. Push inner and outer doors shall open left to right.
D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case circuit breakers. Include
one-piece removable, inner dead front cover independent of the panelboard cover.
E. Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus size, voltage, phase, top or bottom feed,
and flush or surface mounting as scheduled on the drawings.
F. Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB-1, NEMA AB-1 and UL 67 and have the following
features:
1. Nonreduced size copper or aluminum bus bars, complete with current ratings as shown on
the panel schedules connection straps bolted together and rigidly supported on molded
insulators.
2. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the “distributed phase” or “phase
sequence” type. Single-phase, three-wire panelboard busing shall be such that when any
two adjacent single-pole breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can
be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be such that when any three
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 2 of 4
adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different
phases, two-or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. Current-carrying parts of
the bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as shown.
3. Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast, stamped or machined metal alloys
of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected thereto.
4. Neutral bus shall be 100% rated, mounted on insulated supports.
5. Grounding bus bar equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of grounding wires.
6. Buses braced for the available short circuit current, but not less than 22,000 amperes
symmetrical for 120/208 volt panelboards, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical for 277/480-volt
panelboards.
7. Branch circuit panels shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers.
8. Protective devices shall be designed so that they can be easily replaced.
9. Where designated on panel schedule "spaces", include all necessary bussing, device support
and connections. Provide blank cover for each space.
2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS
A. Cabinets:
1. Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house panelboards.
2. Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating openings.
3. Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed steel or of formed sheet steel with end
and side panels welded, riveted, or bolted as required.
2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Breakers shall be UL 489 listed and labeled, in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the
drawings, and as specified.
B. Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar or branch circuit bar.
1. Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards shall have
minimum interrupting rating as indicated but not less than:
a. 120/208 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetrical.
b. 277/480 Volt Panelboard: 14,000 amperes symmetrical.
2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and
instantaneous magnetic trips for 100-ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable
from 3X to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frames and higher. Breaker trip setting shall be
set in the field based on the approved protective device study as specified in Section 16051.
Factory setting shall be HI, unless otherwise noted.
C. Breaker features shall be as follows:
1. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material.
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 3 of 4
2. Silver alloy contacts.

3. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.
4. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.
5. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and instantaneous
characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.
6. Electrically and mechanically trip free.
7. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED, and OFF positions.
a. Line connections shall be bolted.
b. Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current available at the
line terminals as indicated on the drawings, as shown on the electrical system protective
device study as required in Section 16051.
8. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of the
breaker to open.
9. Shunt trips shall be provided where indicated
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions, the NEC, as shown on the
drawings, and as specified.
B. Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can be conveniently connected.
Coordinate the sizes of cabinets with designated closet space.
C. Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard after being submitted to and
approved by the Resident Engineer. Schedules, after approval, shall be typed on the panel
directory cards and installed in the appropriate panelboards, incorporating all applicable contract
changes pertaining to that schedule. Include the room numbers and items served on the cards.
D. Mount the panelboard fully aligned and such that the maximum height of the top circuit breaker
above finished floor shall not exceed 78 inches. For panelboards that are too high, mount
panelboard so that the bottom of the cabinets will not be less than 6 inches above the finished
floor.
E. Directory-card information shall be typewritten to indicate outlets, lights, devices, and equipment
controlled and final room numbers served by each circuit and shall be mounted in holders behind
protective covering.
---END---
PANELBOARDS
16160 - 4 of 4
SECTION 16150-MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of motors.
1.2 RELATED WORK:
requirements that are common to more than one Section of Division 16.
B. Section 16155, MOTOR STARTERS: Starters, control and protection for motors.
C. Section 16480, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: Multiple motor control assemblies, which include
motor starters.
D. Other sections specifying motor driven equipment in Divisions 14 and 15.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, horsepower, RPM,
enclosure, starting characteristics, torque characteristics, code letter, full load and locked
rotor current, service factor, and lubrication method.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance
and operating manuals, including technical data sheets and application data.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, unless otherwise noted, submit four copies of
the following certification to the Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the motors have been properly applied, installed, adjusted, lubricated, and
tested.
1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
designation only.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
MG 1-98 ..................................... Motors and Generators
16150 - 1 of 4
MOTORS
MG 2-01 ..................................... Safety Standard and Guide for Selection, Installation and Use of
Electric Motors and Generators
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS:
A. For alternating current, fractional and integral horsepower motors, NEMA Publications MG 1 and
MG 2 shall apply.
B. Voltage ratings shall be as follows:
1. Single phase:
a. Motors connected to 120-volt systems: 115 volts.
b. Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts.
c. Motors connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460 volts, dual connection.
2. Three phase:
a. Motors connected to 208-volt systems: 200 volts.
b. Motors, less than 74.6 kW (100 HP), connected to 240 volt or 480 volt systems: 230/460
volts, dual connection.
c. Motors, 74.6 kW (100 HP) or larger, connected to 240-volt systems: 230 volts.
d. Motors, 74.6 kW (100 HP) or larger, connected to 480-volt systems: 460 volts.
e. Motors connected to high voltage systems: Shall conform to NEMA Standards for
connection to the nominal system voltage shown on the drawings.
C. Number of phases shall be as follows:
1. Motors, less than 373 W (1/2 HP): Single phase.
2. Motors, 373 W (1/2 HP) and larger: 3 phase.
3. Exceptions:
a. Hermetically sealed motors.
b. Motors for equipment assemblies, less than 746 W (one HP), may be single phase
provided the manufacturer of the proposed assemblies cannot supply the assemblies
with three phase motors.
D. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the
prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the
NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulation.
E. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected
loads to assure adequate starting and running torque.
F. Motor Enclosures:
1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors.
16150 - 2 of 4
MOTORS
2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA
types, which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being
installed.
3. Enclosures shall be primed and finish coated at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat
and standard finish.
G. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply.
H. Energy-Efficient Motors (Motor Efficiencies): All permanently wired polyphase motors of 746
Watts or more shall meet the minimum full-load efficiencies as indicated in the following table,
and as specified in this specification. Motors of 746 Watts or more with open, drip-proof or totally
enclosed fan-cooled enclosures shall be NEMA premium efficiency type, unless otherwise
indicated. Motors provided as an integral part of motor driven equipment are excluded from this
requirement if a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency requirement is indicated for that
equipment by the provisions of another section.
Minimum Efficiencies Minimum Efficiencies

Open Drip-Proof Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled
Rating 1200 1800 3600 RPM Rating 1200 1800 3600
kW (HP) RPM RPM kW (HP) RPM RPM RPM
0.746 (1) 82.5% 85.5% 77.0% 0.746 (1) 82.5% 85.5% 77.0%
1.12 (1.5) 86.5% 86.5% 84.0% 1.12 (1.5) 87.5% 86.5% 84.0%
1.49 (2) 87.5% 86.5% 85.5% 1.49 (2) 88.5% 86.5% 85.5%
2.24 (3) 88.5% 89.5% 85.5% 2.24 (3) 89.5% 89.5% 86.5%
3.73 (5) 89.5% 89.5% 86.5% 3.73 (5) 89.5% 89.5% 88.5%
5.60 (7.5) 90.2% 91.0% 88.5% 5.60 (7.5) 91.0% 91.7% 89.5%
7.46 (10) 91.7% 91.7% 89.5% 7.46 (10) 91.0% 91.7% 90.2%
11.2 (15) 91.7% 93.0% 90.2% 11.2 (15) 91.7% 92.4% 91.0%
14.9 (20) 92.4% 93.0% 91.0% 14.9 (20) 91.7% 93.0% 91.0%
18.7 (25) 93.0% 93.6% 91.7% 18.7 (25) 93.0% 93.6% 91.7%
22.4 (30) 93.6% 94.1% 91.7% 22.4 (30) 93.0% 93.6% 91.7%
29.8 (40) 94.1% 94.1% 92.4% 29.8 (40) 94.1% 94.1% 92.4%
37.3 (50) 94.1% 94.5% 93.0% 37.3 (50) 94.1% 94.5% 93.0%
44.8 (60) 94.5% 95.0% 93.6% 44.8 (60) 94.5% 95.0% 93.6%
56.9 (75) 94.5% 95.0% 93.6% 56.9 (75) 94.5% 95.4% 93.6%
74.6 (100) 95.0% 95.4% 93.6% 74.6 (100) 95.0% 95.4% 94.1%
93.3 (125) 95.0% 95.4% 94.1% 93.3 (125) 95.0% 95.4% 95.0%
16150 - 3 of 4
MOTORS
112 (150) 95.4% 95.8% 94.1% 112 (150) 95.8% 95.8% 95.0%
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, the NEC, NEMA, as shown
on the drawings and/or as required by other sections of these specifications.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
Megger all motors after installation, before start-up. All shall test free from grounds.
---END---
16150 - 4 of 4
MOTORS
SECTION 16140-WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of
wiring devices.
1.2 RELATED WORK
electrical requirements that are common to more than one section of
Division 16.
B. Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS: Conduits and outlets boxes.
C. Section 16127, CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and
wiring.
D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to
provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault
currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS
(ELECTRICAL), submit the following:
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details,
construction materials, grade and termination information.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver four copies of the
following to the Resident Engineer: Technical data sheets and
information for ordering replacement units.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies
of the following to the Resident Engineer: Certification by the
Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and specifications,
and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 1 of 4
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by basic designation

only.
WD 1-99.................General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
WD 6-02 ................Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements
D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
5-96....................Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings
20-00...................General-Use Snap Switches
231-98..................Power Outlets
467-93..................Grounding and Bonding Equipment
498-01..................Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
943-03..................Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECEPTACLES
A. General: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc.
1. Mounting straps shall be plated steel, with break-off plaster ears
and shall include a self-grounding feature. Terminal screws shall be
brass, brass plated or a copper alloy metal.
2. Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal
clamp type terminals (four min.) and side wiring from four captively
held binding screws.
B. Duplex receptacles shall be single phase, 20 ampere, 120 volts, 2-pole,
3-wire, and conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The
duplex type shall have break-off feature for two-circuit operation. The
ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate
terminal.
1. Bodies shall be black in color.
2. Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: Shall be an integral
unit suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box.
a. Ground fault interrupter shall be hospital grade and consist of a
differential current transformer, solid state sensing circuitry
and a circuit interrupter switch. It shall be rated for operation
on a 60 Hz, 120 volt, 20-ampere branch circuit. Device shall have
nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes
and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value
of ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 2 of 4
milliamp) on the load side of the device. Device shall have a

minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a second. Devices shall
meet UL 943.
3. Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the as follow:
a. Bodies shall be black phenolic compound supported by a plated
steel mounting strap having plaster ears.
b. Shall be NEMA WD 1 heavy duty type.
C. Receptacles; 20, 30 and 50 ampere, 250 volts: Shall be complete with
appropriate cord grip plug. Devices shall meet UL 231.
D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Shall consist of a duplex receptacle, mounted
in box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap
over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to
the cover plate by a spring-hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity
shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or hospital grade
attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted
flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner.
2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES AND DIMMERS
A. Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodies of
phenolic compound. Toggle handles shall be black in color unless
otherwise specified. The rocker type switch is not acceptable and will
not be approved.
1. Shall be single unit toggle, butt contact, quiet AC type, heavy-duty
general-purpose use with an integral self grounding mounting strap
with break-off plasters ears and provisions for back wiring with
separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held
binding screws.
2. Shall be color coded for current rating, listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., and meet the requirements of NEMA WD 1,
Heavy-Duty and UL 20.
3. Ratings:
a. 277 volt circuits: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts AC.
4. The switches shall be mounted on the striker plate side of doors.
5. Incorporate barriers between switches with multigang outlet boxes
where required by the NEC.
6. All toggle switches shall be of the same manufacturer.
2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type smooth nylon.
Oversize plates are not acceptable.
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3 of 4
B. Color shall be black unless otherwise specified.

C. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will
be interchangeable. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be
accordance with NEMA WD1.
D. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates
shall be common for each group of receptacles or switches.
E. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be
as specified in the associated specification.
2.4 SURFACE MULTIPLE-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Assemblies shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 5.
B. Shall have the following features:
1. Enclosures:
a. Thickness of steel shall be not less than 0.040 inch steel for
base and cover. Nominal dimension shall be 1-1/2 by 2-3/4 inches with
inside cross sectional area not less than 3.5 square inches. The
enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and painted at
the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard baked enamel
or lacquer finish.
2. Receptacles shall be duplex. See paragraph 'RECEPTACLES' in this
section. Device cover plates shall be the manufacturer's standard
corrosion resistant finish and shall not exceed the dimensions of the
enclosure.
3. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, spacing of the receptacles along
the strip shall be 24 inches on centers.
4. Wires within the assemblies shall be not less than No. 12 AWG copper,
with 600 volt ratings.
5. Installation fittings shall be designed for the strips being
installed including bends, offsets, device brackets, inside
couplings, wire clips, and elbows.
6. Bond the strips to the conduit systems for their branch supply
circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the
drawings.
B. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box
with an approved green bonding jumper, and also connected to the green
equipment grounding conductor.
- - - E N D - - -
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 4 of 4
SECTION 16127-CABLES, LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and
lighting wiring.
B. Definitions: The term HCF Type AC cable, as used in this specification, shall mean Type AC
cable in accordance with the National Electrical Code with an insulated equipment grounding
conductor, an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum and the outer metal armor or sheath
of the assembly shall be approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Excavation and backfill for cables that are installed in conduit: Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
B. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated construction: Section 07270,
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS.
C. General electrical requirements that are common to more than one section in Division 16: Section
16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
D. Conduits for cables and wiring: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS.
E. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
currents: Section 16450, GROUNDING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following:
1. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Showing each cable type and rating.
2. Certificates: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies
of the certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and
has been properly installed.
3. Where Type AC cable is used, manufacturer's literature shall indicate that the outer metal
sheath is approved and identified as an acceptable grounding return path.
form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are reference in the text by
B. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):
LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
16127 - 1 of 8
D2301-04 ................................... Standard Specification for Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure

Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape
C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
A-A-59544-00 ............................. Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation)
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
4-01 ............................................ Armored Cable
44-02 .......................................... Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
83-03 .......................................... Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
467-01 ........................................ Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment
486A-01 ...................................... Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors
486C-02 ..................................... Splicing Wire Connectors
486D-02 ..................................... Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or in
Damp or Wet Locations
486E-00 ...................................... Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or
Copper Conductors
493-01 ........................................ Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch
Circuit Cable
514B-02 ...................................... Fittings for Cable and Conduit
1479-03 ...................................... Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE AND WIRE (POWER AND LIGHTING)
A. Cable and Wire shall be in accordance with Fed. Spec. A-A-59544, except as hereinafter
specified.
B. Single Conductor:
1. Shall be annealed copper.
2. Shall be stranded for sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, solid for sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller.
3. Shall be minimum size No. 12 AWG, except where smaller sizes are allowed herein.
C. Insulation:
1. THW, XHHW, or dual rated THHN-THWN shall be in accordance with UL 44, and 83.
2. Direct burial: UF or USE shall be in accordance with UL 493.
3. Isolated power system wiring: Type XHHW with a dielectric constant of 3.5 or less.
D. Color Code:
1. Secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows:
16127 - 2 of 8
208/120 volt Phase 480/277 volt

Black A Brown
Red B Orange
Blue C Yellow
White Neutral Gray *
* or white with colored (other than green) tracer.
a. The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have color
coding unique and distinct (i.e. pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above.
The unique color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Field coordinate
for a final color coding with the Resident Engineer.
2. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG branch
circuit conductors and neutral sizes.
3. Phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one of the following
methods:
a. Solid color compound or solid color coating.
b. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above.
c. Color as specified using 3/4 inch wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a
minimum of three inches for terminal points, and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs,
manholes, and handholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable
stating size and insulation type.
4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the
existing wiring system.
5. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.
2.2 ARMORED CABLE: HCF TYPE AC

A. Cable assembly shall in accordance with Fed Spec J-C-30B, NEC and UL 4.
B. Assembly shall include an insulated green equipment grounding conductor, sized in accordance
with the NEC in addition to an internal bonding strip of copper or aluminum in intimate contact
with the armor for its entire length. Minimum size bonding strip shall be No. 16 AWG. The outer
metal armor or sheath of the assembly shall be approved and identified as an acceptable
grounding return path.
C. Armored Cable Fittings:
1. Fed Spec W-F-406E and UL 514B, except only steel or malleable iron material is acceptable.
16127 - 3 of 8
2. Clamp type with insulating throat.

D. Supports:
1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coated or equivalent corrosion protection.
2. Individual hangers: Straps, hangers or similar fittings shall be used and installed at intervals
so as not to damage the cable. Staples are not permitted to be used for supports.
3. Cable trays: In lieu of individual hangers, a single cable tray may be used to support all
armored cable runs within an area.
4. Color Coding: Color coding for conductors shall be in accordance with paragraph 2.1D
above.
2.3 SPLICES AND JOINTS
A. In accordance with UL 486A, C, D, E and NEC.
B. Branch circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller):
1. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 degree C with
integral insulation, approved for copper and aluminum conductors.
2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires.
3. The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturers packaging
shall be strictly complied with.
C. Feeder Circuits:
1. Connectors shall be indent, hex screw, or bolt clamp-type of high conductivity and
corrosion-resistant material.
2. Field installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 kcmil and larger shall have not
less than two clamping elements or compression indents per wire.
3. Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use, location, voltage,
and temperature. Insulate with not less than that of the conductor level that is being joined.
4. Plastic electrical insulating tape: ASTM D2304 shall apply, flame retardant, cold and weather
resistant.
2.4 CONTROL WIRING
A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these specifications, control wiring shall be as
specified for power and lighting wiring, except the minimum size shall be not less than No. 14
AWG.
B. Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under inrush conditions does not
adversely affect operation of the controls.
2.5 COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING
A. Shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturers of the communication and signal
systems; however, not less than what is shown.
B. Wiring shown is for typical systems. Provide wiring as required for the systems being furnished.
16127 - 4 of 8
C. Multi-conductor cables shall have the conductors color coded.

2.6 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND
A. Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become
adhesive.
B. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.
2.7 FIREPROOFING TAPE
A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side
with flame-retardant elastomer.
B. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc-proof and
fireproof.
C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and
be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.
D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.
E. Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 7 mils thick, and 3/4 inch wide.
2.8 WARNING TAPE
A. The tape shall be standard, 3 inch wide, 4-Mil polyethylene detectable type.
B. The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with the NEC, and as specified.
B. Install all wiring in raceway systems, except where direct burial or HCF Type AC cables are used.
C. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes, or handholes.
D. Wires of different systems (i.e. 120V, 277V) shall not be installed in the same conduit or junction
box system.
E. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC. Provide split wedge
type which firmly clamps each individual cable and tightens due to cable weight.
F. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies, neatly form, train,
and tie the cables in individual circuits.
G. Seal cable and wire entering a building from underground, between the wire and conduit where
the cable exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound.
H. Wire Pulling:
1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of insulation during
pulling of cables.
2. Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.
16127 - 5 of 8
3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes
attached directly to the conductors, as approved by the Resident Engineer.
4. Pull in multiple cables together in a single conduit.
I. No more than (3) single-phase branch circuits shall be installed in any one conduit.
J. The wires shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310. Neutral wires, under conditions
defined by the NEC, shall be considered current-carrying conductors.
3.2 ARMORED CABLE SYSTEM INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation: Shall be in accordance with UL, NEC, as shown on drawings and as hereinafter
specified.
B. Install HCF Type AC cable as follows:
1. Flattened, dented, deformed, or opened armor is not permitted. If damaged during
installation, damaged cables shall be replaced with new undamaged material.
2. Assure that cable installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways,
or doorways.
3. Cut square with manufacturer's armor stripping tool and remove burrs.
4. Remove enough armor from cable to permit sufficient conductor to extend into the enclosure.
5. Cable shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.
6. Secure cable to cabinets, junction boxes, and outlet boxes with fittings approved for
grounding.
7. Cables shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
C. Bends: Bends shall be made so that the cable is not damaged. The radius of the curve of the
inner edge of any bend shall not be less than five times the diameter of the cable.
D. Concealed Work Installation: Cables installed above furred or suspended ceilings or in walls shall
be supported as specified below.
E. Exposed Work Installation: Cables may be run exposed only in unfinished areas such as
electrical closets or mechanical rooms. Where installed exposed, cables shall closely follow the
surface of the building finish and be supported as specified below.
F. HCF Type AC cable shall not be installed embedded in concrete.
G. Cable Identification: HCF Type AC cable shall be marked in accordance with the NEC except the
cable shall have ready identification of the manufacturer by distinctive external markings on the
cable sheath throughout its entire length.
H. Cable Supports, Installation:
1. The cable shall be secured by approved straps, hangers, or similar fittings designed and
installed as to not damage the cable.
16127 - 6 of 8
2. Independently support the cable or install in cable trays. Do not use other supports i.e.,
suspended ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, mechanical
piping, or mechanical ducts.
3. Where independent supports are used for the cable, support at intervals not exceeding 1350
mm (4 1/2 feet) and within 300 mm (one foot) of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or
fitting.
4. Where cable trays are used to support the cables, each cable shall be securely fastened to
transverse members of the cable trays. Cable trays shall be independently supported in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NEC.
5. Through Metal Framing: Cable shall be supported in accordance with the NEC where run
through metal framing members.
6. Fished Cables: Cables may be fished in existing structures only. Supports are not required
where cables are fished through existing walls or above non-removable ceilings. Where
cables are installed in new structures, appropriate supports shall be provided.
I. Penetrations:
1. Cutting of Holes
a. Cut holes in concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core
drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type
drills are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by
limited working space.
2. Fire Stops: Where HCF Type AC cable passes through fire partitions, fire walls or smoke
partitions, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke
and gasses as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with rock wool fiber or
silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between cables and openings
with the fire stop material. Penetrations shall meet the requirements of UL 1479.
3. Waterproofing: Where Type AC cable passes through floors, floors shall be core drilled and
appropriately sized sleeves shall be installed for the cables. Sleeves shall terminate not less
than 75 mm (3 inches) above floor slabs and not less than 75 mm (3 inches) below the
ceiling of the floor below. Completely seal clearances between the cable and sleeve and
make watertight as specified in section, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
3.3 SPLICE INSTALLATION
A. Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure.
B. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory splices or terminations have been
installed, remove the devices and install approved devices at no additional cost to the
Government.
16127 - 7 of 8
3.4 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise specified in other sections, install wiring and connect to equipment/devices to
perform the required functions as shown and specified.
B. Except where otherwise required, install a separate power supply circuit for each system so that
malfunctions in any system will not affect other systems.
C. Where separate power supply circuits are not shown, connect the systems to the nearest
panelboards of suitable voltages, which are intended to supply such systems and have suitable
spare circuit breakers or space for installation.
D. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit breaker for the power supply
circuit for each system to prevent accidental de-energizing of the systems.
E. System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings or as required by the
NEC.
3.5 CONTROL, COMMUNICATION AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.
B. Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to those on the wiring
diagrams used for installing the systems.
C. Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning.
D. In each manhole and handhole, install embossed brass tags to identify the system served and
function.
3.6 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION
A. In each interior pulbox and junction box, install metal tags on each circuit cables and wires to
clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage.
3.7 DIRECT BURIAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Tops of the cables:
1. Below the finished grade: Minimum 24 inches unless greater depth is shown.
B. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to prevent any
damage.
C. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly:
1. Excavating and backfilling is specified in Section, EARTHWORK.
2. Place a 3 inch layer of sand in the trenches before installing the cables.
3. Place a three inch layer of sand over the installed cables.
4. Install continuous horizontal, 25 mm by 1 inch by 8 inch preservative impregnated wood
planking three inches above the cables before backfilling.
D. Provide horizontal slack in the cables for contraction during cold weather.
E. Install the cables in continuous lengths. Splices within cable runs will not be accepted.
F. Connections and terminations shall be submersible type designed for the cables being installed.
16127 - 8 of 8
G. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above the buried cables.
3.8 FIELD TESTING
A. Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after installation and before
connection to utilization devices such as fixtures, motors, or appliances.
B. Tests shall be performed by megger and conductors shall test free from short-circuits and
grounds.
C. Test conductor phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials, and labor for these tests.
3.9 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Furnish the services of a competent factory trained engineer or technician for two, 2-hour periods
for instructing VA personnel in the use and installation of HCF Type AC cable. Sessions shall be
accomplished at the job site and the location will be determined by the VA. The first 2-hour
session shall be presented after submittal approval, but before installation of any of the cable.
Session may be attended by Contractor's staff (maximum of 4 personnel) in addition to VA
personnel. The second 2-hour session shall be accomplished two weeks prior to the final
inspection and shall be attended by VA staff only.
---END---
16127 - 9 of 8
SECTION 16126-CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (ABOVE 600 VOLTS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the high voltage cables.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Bedding of conduits: Section 02200, EARTHWORK.
B. General electrical requirement and items that are common to more than one section of Division
C. Conduits for high voltage cables: Section 16111, CONDUIT SYSTEMS.
D. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS and Section
16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL).
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include splice and termination kit information prior to purchase and installation.
3. Provide cable minimum bend radius, and flammability data.
C. Samples:
1. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with a 300 mm (12
inches) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils or
reels from which the samples were taken. The sample shall contain the manufacturers
markings.
D. Certifications:
1. Factory test reports: Prior to installation of the cables, deliver four copies of the
manufacturers certified NEMA WC 71 or WC 74, standard factory test reports to the Resident
Engineer. Certified copies of test data shall show conformance with the referenced standards
and shall be approved prior to delivery of cable.
2. Field Test Reports: Test Reports on the following shall be in accordance with the paragraph
entitled “Field Tests for High Voltage Cables” and include the following tests:
a. High Potential Tests
b. Dielectric Absorption Tests
c. Radiographic Tests
16126 - 1 of 14
CABLES, HIGH VOLTAGE (Above 600 Volts)
After testing, submit four certified copies of each of the graphs specified under field testing, to
the Resident Engineer. Adequate information shall be included identifying the cable locations,
types, voltage rating and sizes.
3. Splices and terminations, after having been installed and tested, deliver four copies of a
certificate by the Contractor to the Resident Engineer which includes the following:
a. A statement that the materials, detail drawings and printed instructions used, are those
contained in the kits approved for this contract.
b. A statement that each splice and each termination was completely installed without any
overnight interruption.
c. A statement that field made splices and terminations conform to the following
requirements:
1) Pencil the cable insulation precisely.
2) Connector installations:
a) Use tools that are designed for the connectors being installed.
b) Round and smooth the installed connectors to minimize localized voltage
stressing of the insulating materials.
3) Remove contaminants from all surfaces within the splices and terminations before
installing the insulating materials.
4) Solder block throughout stranded grounding wires that will penetrate the splicing and
terminating materials.
5) Use mirrors to observe the installation of materials on the backsides of the splices
and terminations.
6) Eliminate air voids throughout the splices and terminations.
7) Stretch each layer of tape properly during installation.
d. List all of the materials purchased and installed for the splices and terminations for this
contract including the material descriptions, manufacturer's names, catalog numbers and
total quantities.
E. Power Company Approval: Prior to construction, obtain written approval from the power company
that will supply electrical service for the following items:
1. Service entrance cables. Obtain the power company’s written approval on the submittal
papers for the cables before submitting them for VA approval.
2. Employees who will splice and terminate the service entrance cables.
F. Installer Approval:
1. Employees who install the splices and terminations and test the cables shall have not less
than five years of experience splicing and terminating cables which are equal to those being
spliced and terminated, including experience with the materials in the kits.
16126 - 2 of 14
2. Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each employee who splices or terminates
the cables.
G. Cable Voltage Ratings
1. Medium voltage power cables shall include multiple and single-conductor cable rated as
follows:
a) 5000 Volts shall be used on 4160 3-phase 60hz distribution systems.
b) 15000 volts shall be used on 12,470, 13,200 and 13,800V 3 phase 60hz distribution
systems.
H. Shipment
1. Cable shall be shipped on reels such that cable will be protected from mechanical injury.
Each end of each length of cable shall be hermetically sealed and securely attached to the
reel.
Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions,
referenced. Publications are referenced in the text by the designation
only.
B3-2001 ...................................... Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
386-95 (R2001) .......................... Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems above 600 V
400.2-2005 ................................. Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems
404-2000 .................................... Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated
2500-500,000 Volts
WC 71-1999 ............................... Standard for Non-Shielded Cables Rated 2001-5000 Volts for
Use in the Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-96-659)
WC 74-2000 ............................... 5-46 KV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy (ICEA S-93-969)
70-2005 ...................................... National Electrical Code (NEC)
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1072-2006 ................................. Medium-Voltage Power Cables
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE
A. High voltage cable shall be in accordance with the NEC and NEMA WC71, WC74 and UL 1072.
16126 - 3 of 14
B. Shall be single conductor stranded copper conforming to ASTM B3.

C. Insulation:
1. Insulation level shall be 133 percent.
2. Types of insulation:
a. Cable type abbreviation, EPR: Ethylene propylene rubber insulation shall be
thermosetting, light and heat stabilized.
B. Cable type abbreviation, CCLP: Polyethylene insulation shall be thermosetting, light and
heat stabilized, chemically crosslinked.
c. In wet locations, anti-tree CCLP or EPR shall be used.
d. Cable type abbreviation, XLPE cross-linked polyethylene insulated shielded shall be
thermosetting, light and heat stabilized chemically cross-linked.
//e. For series type outdoor lighting systems, install the direct burial, series lighting system
type cables shown on the drawings. The cables shall be designed for direct burial
whether or not they are installed in underground raceways.//
D. Conductors and insulation shall be wrapped separately with semiconducting tape.
E. Insulation shall be wrapped with non-magnetic, metallic shielding except for cables for series type
lighting systems.
F. Heavy duty, overall protective jackets of chlorosulphonated polyethylene, neoprene or polyvinyl
chloride shall enclose every cable.
G. Cable temperature ratings for continuous operation, emergency overload operation and short
circuit operation shall be not less than the NEC, NEMA WC71 or NEMA WC74 Standard for the
respective cable.
H. Manufacturer's name and other pertinent information shall be marked or molded clearly on the
overall outside surface of the jackets, or incorporated on marker tapes within the cables at
reasonable intervals.
2.2 MATERIAL, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. The materials shall be compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the
cables and wires.
B. The splices shall insulate and protect the conductors not less than the insulation and protective
jackets on the cables and wires that protect the conductors. In locations where moisture might be
present, the splices shall be watertight. In manholes and handholes the splices shall be
submersible.
C. Splicing and Terminating Fittings: Shall be in accordance with IEEE 386, 404.
1. Shall be heavy duty, pressure type fittings, which will assure satisfactory performance of the
connections under conditions of temperature cycling and magnetic forces from available short
circuit currents.
16126 - 4 of 14
2. The fittings shall be suitably designed and the proper size for the cables and wires being
spliced and terminated. Terminations to bus shall be with two hole lugs.
3. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory fittings have been installed, contractor
shall replace the unsatisfactory installations with approved fittings at no additional cost to the
Government.
D. Splicing and Terminating Kits:
1. General:
a. Shall be assembled by the manufacturer or supplier of the materials and shall be
packaged for individual splices and terminations or for groups of splices and terminations.
b. Shall consist of materials designed for the cables being spliced and terminated and shall
be suitable for the prevailing environmental conditions.
c. Shall include detail drawings and printed instructions for each type of splice and
termination being installed, as prepared by the manufacturers of the materials in the kits.
d. Detail drawings, and printed instructions shall indicate the cable type, voltage rating,
manufacturer's name and catalog numbers for the materials indicated.
e. Voltage ratings for the splices and terminations shall be not less than the voltage ratings
for the cables on which they are being installed.
f. Shall include shielding and stress cone materials.
2. Taped splices and terminations with insulating and semi-conducting rubber tapes shall
withstand 200 percent elongation without cracking, rupturing or reducing their electric and
self-bonding characteristics by more than 5 percent.
3. Epoxy resin kits shall be as follows:
a. Compatible with the cable insulations and jackets and make the splices watertight and
submersible.
b. Thermosetting and generate its own heat so that external fire or heat will not be required.
c. Set solid and cure in approximately 60 minutes in 21 degree C (70 degree F) ambient
temperature.
d. Not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage and fungus.
e. Furnished in pre-measured quantities, sized for each splice and each termination, with
two resin components in an easy mixing plastic bag which will permit mixing the resin
without entrapping air or contaminants. Other methods of packaging and mixing the
epoxy resin components will be considered for approval, provided they include adequate
safeguards to assure precise proportioning of the resin components and to prevent
entrapping air and contaminants.
f. Use snap-together, longitudinally-split, interlocking seam, transplant mold bodies or taped
frameworks, injection fittings and injection gun or pouring equipment. Completely fill voids
within the splices and terminations.
16126 - 5 of 14
E. Pre-molded Rubber Splices and Terminations:

1. Splices and terminations shall be in accordance with IEEE 386, and 404.
2. Pre-molded rubber devices shall have a minimum of 3 mm (0.125 inch) semi-conductive
shield material covering the entire housing. Test each rubber part prior to shipment from the
factory.
3. Grounding of metallic shields shall be accomplished by a solderless connector enclosed in a
watertight rubber housing covering the entire assembly. The grounding device and splice or
terminator shall be of same manufacturer to insure electrical integrity of the shielded parts.
4. The pre-molded parts shall be suitable for indoor, outdoor, submersible, or direct-burial
applications.
2.3 MATERIAL, FIREPROOFING TAPE
A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side
with flame-retardant elastomer.
B. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc proof and
fireproof.
C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus. It
shall be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light.
D. The finished application shall withstand a 200 ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds.
E. Securing tape: Shall be glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19
mm (3/4 inch) wide.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use non-detectable type for
cemeteries only.
2.4 MATERIAL, WARNING TAPE

A. The tape shall be standard, 76 mm (3 inch) wide, 4-Mil polyethylene // detectable// //non-
detectable// type with aluminum backing.
B. The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Contractor shall ensure that radii of bends fittings, cable risers, and other conditions are suitable
for the cable and conform with the recommendations of the cable manufacturer.
C. Cable shall be installed in underground duct banks, in conduit above and below grade; inside
buildings, on insulator hooks; on racks in wall and ceiling mounted cable trays in utility tunnels
and manholes; and by direct burial.
D. Cables shall be secured with heavy duty cable ties in existing or new trays mounted horizontally,
where cable rests on tray bottom.
16126 - 6 of 14
E. Cables shall be secured with PVC coated metallic non-metallic cable clamps, straps, hangers, or
other approved supporting devices to tunnel walls, ceilings, and in new or existing cable trays
mounted vertically, where tray bottom is in a vertical plane.
F. Contractor shall ensure that all cable tray is properly secured and supported prior to installing
new armored cable. Contractor shall add new permanent and/or temporary tray support devices
as required to preclude cable tray failure during cable pulling or after cable is installed.
G. Cable or conductors of a primary distribution system shall be rejected when installed openly in
cable trays or openly racked along interior walls; in the same raceway or conduit with AC/DC
control circuits or ac power circuits operating at less than 600 volts; or in a manner allowing cable
to support its own weight.
H. Use suitable lubricating compounds on the cables and wires to prevent damage to them during
pulling-in. Provide compounds that are not injurious to the cable and wire jackets and do not
harden or become adhesive.
I. Splice the cables and wires only in manholes and accessible junction boxes. Ground shields in
accordance with Section 16450, GROUNDING.
J. In manholes, trenches and vaults install the cables on suitable porcelain insulators with steel
cables racks. Ground cable racks in accordance with Section GROUNDING 16450.
K. In manholes, underground raceways and other outdoors locations:
1. Seal the cable ends prior to pulling them in to prevent the entry of moisture.
2. For ethylene propylene rubber and polyethylene insulated cables, use bags of epoxy resin
that are not less than 6 mm (1/4 inch) larger in diameter than the overall diameter of the
cable. Clean each end of each cable before installing the epoxy resin over it.
3.2 PROTECTION DURING SPLICING OPERATIONS
Blowers shall be provided to force fresh air into manholes or confined areas where free
movement or circulation of air is obstructed. Waterproof protective coverings shall be available on
the work site to provide protection against moisture while a splice is being made. Pumps shall be
used to keep manholes dry during splicing operations. Under no conditions shall a splice or
termination be made with the interior of a cable exposed to moisture. Conductor insulation paper
shall be moisture-tested before the splice is made. A manhole ring at least 150 mm (6 inches)
above ground shall be used around the manhole entrance to keep surface water from entering
the manhole. Unused ducts shall be plugged and water seepage through ducts in use shall be
stopped before the splice is started.
3.3 PULLING CABLES IN DUCTS, MANHOLES AND UTILITY TUNNELS
A. Medium-voltage cables shall be pulled into ducts and utility tunnels with equipment designed for
this purpose, including power-driven winch, cable-feeding flexible tube guide, cable grips, and
lubricants. A sufficient number of trained personnel and equipment shall be employed to ensure
the careful and proper installation of the cable.
16126 - 7 of 14
B. Cable reel shall be set up at the side of the manhole or tunnel hatch opening and above the duct
or hatch level, allowing the cable to enter through the opening without reverse bending. Flexible
tube guide shall be installed through the opening in a manner that will prevent the cable from
rubbing on the edges of any structural member.
C. Pulling force for a cable grip on lead-sheathed cable shall not exceed manufacturer’s
recommendation. A dynamometer shall be used in the pulling line to ensure that the pulling force
is not exceeded. Pulling force for a nonmetallic-sheathed cable shall not exceed the smaller of
4400 Newton (1,000 pounds) or a value computed from the following equation:
TM = 0.008 X N X CM
Where: TM = maximum allowable pulling tension in Newton pounds
N = number of conductors in the cable
CM = cross-sectional area of each conductor in square millimeter circular mils.
D. Cable shall be unreeled from the top of the reel. Payout shall be
carefully controlled. Cable to be pulled shall be attached through a swivel to the main pulling wire
by means of a //pulling eye// suitable cable grip permitted only on cables less than 60 mm (200-
feet) long and less than 50 mm (2 inches) in diameter//.
E. Woven-wire cable grips shall be used to grip the cable end when pulling small cables and short
straight lengths of heavier cables.
F. Pulling eyes shall be attached to the cable conductors to prevent damage to the cable structure.
G. Pulling eyes and cable grips shall be used together for nonmetallic sheathed cables to prevent
damage to the cable structure.
H. Cables shall be liberally coated with a suitable cable-pulling lubricant
as it enters the tube guide or duct. Grease and oil lubricants shall be used only on lead-sheathed
cables. Nonmetallic sheathed cables shall be covered with wire-pulling compounds when
required which have no deleterious effects on the cable. Rollers, sheaves, or tube guides around
which the cable is pulled shall conform to the minimum bending radius of the cable.
I. Cables shall be pulled into ducts at a reasonable speed not in excess of maximum permissible
pulling tension specified by the cable manufacturer. Cable pulling using a vehicle shall not be
permitted. Pulling operations shall be stopped immediately with any indication of binding or
obstruction and shall not be resumed until such difficulty is corrected. Sufficient slack shall be
provided for free movement of cable due to expansion or contraction.
J. Cable splices made up in manholes or utility tunnels shall be firmly supported on cable racks as
indicated. No cable splices shall be pulled in ducts. Cable ends shall overlap at the ends of a
section to provide sufficient undamaged cable for splicing. Cables to be spliced in manholes or
utility tunnels shall overlap the centerline of the proposed joint by not less than 600 mm (2 feet).
K. Cables cut in the field shall have the cut ends immediately sealed to prevent entrance of moisture.
Nonleaded cables shall be sealed with rubber tape wrapped down to 75 mm (3 inches) from the
16126 - 8 of 14
cable end. Rubber tape shall be cover-wrapped with polyvinylchloride tape. Lead-Covered
cables shall be sealed with wiping metal making a firm bond with the end of the sheath or with a
disk of lead fitted over the end and wiped to the sheath.
3.4 INSTALLATION, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Install the materials as recommended by their manufacturer including special precautions
pertaining to air temperature during installation.
B. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE), Ethylene Propylene Rubber and Polyethylene Insulated
Cables:
1. Cables rated 5000 volts or less: Install epoxy resin splices and terminations, or pre-molded
rubber splices and terminations.
2. Cables rated more than 5000 volts: Install taped splices and terminations, or pre-molded
rubber splices and terminations.
C. Installation shall be accomplished by qualified personnel trained to accomplish high voltage
equipment installations. All instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed in detail.
D. Splices shall be made in manholes or tunnels except where cable terminations are specifically
indicated. Splicing and terminating of cables shall be expedited to minimize exposure and cable
deterioration.
E. Cables shall be terminated in potheads. Dry terminations with medium voltage pennants,
preformed, and hand wrapped stress cones may be used for terminating cables. Potheads shall
be provided with adequate means for making external connections to the cable conductors of
single or multiple conductor cables; protecting the cable insulation against moisture, oil, or other
contaminant; physically protecting and supporting cables, and maintaining the insulation level of
the cable.
F. Pothead terminations shall be field fabricated from termination kits supplied by and in accordance
with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations for the type, size, and electrical characteristics
of the cable.
G. Installation shall include built-up or prefabricated heat or cold shrink stress-relief cones at the
terminals of all shielded cables and at the terminals of single-conductor lead-covered cables rated
15 kV and above, ungrounded.
H. Cable splices shall be field fabricated from splicing kits supplied by and in accordance with cable
manufacturer’s recommendations for the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable
specified. Cable splices in manholes shall be located midway between cable racks on walls of
manholes and supported with cable arms at approximately the same elevation as the enclosing
duct.
I. Cable splices in the tunnel that are not installed in cable trays shall be installed on cable racks or
by other approved methods that will minimize physical stress on the splice connections. Splices
16126 - 9 of 14
shall be supported at approximately the same elevation as the installed cable except where
space limitations or existing cable length limitations make this method impractical or impossible.
J. Universal demountable splices shall be supported in such manner so as to minimize physical
stress on the splice connections. Each cable end termination shall be supported using a pair of
saddle type supports under the cable end termination and/or cable with a minimum 300 mm (12
inches) and a maximum 750 mm (30 inches) separation between the supports. Cable end
termination and cable shall be secured to the supports in such a manner as to prevent movement
of termination or cable at the support. Saddle type supports shall be installed on galvanized steel
framing channel anchored to the wall or securely fastened to the cable tray or installed by other
approved methods.
3.5 MULTIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS
A. Multiple-conductor potheads shall be hermetically sealed cap-nut type and shall be suitable for
the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable. Potheads shall consist of bells or bodies
with bell caps lids, bushing, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance fittings.
B. Pothead bells or bodies shall be cast iron aluminum with mounting brackets as required, pipe
plugs for filings and vent holes, machine-flanged surfaces for bell caps lids, and cable entrance
fittings. Pothead bell caps lids for cables up to 130 mm² (250 Kcmils), 250 amperes shall be cast
iron aluminum; and for cables of larger size and higher current ratings shall be cast aluminum
bronze nonmagnetic metal casting. Bell caps Lids shall have matching machined flanged
surfaces for sealing with gasket and cap-screw connections.
C. Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insulators, factory assembled and
hermetically sealed to bell cap lid.
D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined and threaded for internal
and external electrical connections. Cross-sectional and contact areas shall be adequate to carry
the full-load current rating of the conductors. Cable connectors shall be solder type with gasket
seal between the connector and bushing.
E. Cable-entrance fittings shall be cast-bronze wiping-sleeve type for lead-covered cable, and cast-
aluminum positive-sealed stuffing boxes for non-lead-covered cables. Conduit couplings and
armor base fittings shall be cast iron.
F. Three-conductor potheads with a neutral stud and lug may be used in lieu of four-conductor
potheads in four-wire grounded neutral systems.
G. Potheads shall be completely filled, leaving no gaps or voids, with an insulating compound
suitable for the type of cable, insulation, voltage rating, and ambient operating temperatures in
accordance with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations. Pothead parts that do not carry
current shall be grounded.
16126 - 10 of 14
3.6 SINGLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS

A. Single-conductor potheads shall be the hermetically sealed cap-nut type and shall be suitable for
the type, size, and electrical characteristics of the cable specified. Potheads shall consist of cast
bodies, bushings, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance fittings.
B. Pothead bodies shall be metal castings with mounting brackets, when required, pipe plugs for
filling and vent holes, and machined flanged surface for cable-entrance fitting. Bodies shall be
cast iron for cables up to 130 mm² (250 kc mils) 250 amperes, and cast aluminum bronze
nonmagnetic metal casting for cable of larger size and higher current ratings.
C. Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insulators, factory assembled and
hermetically sealed to the pothead body.
D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined and threaded for internal
and external electrical connections. Cross-sectional and contract areas shall be adequate to
carry the full-load current rating of the conductors. Cable connectors shall be solder type with
gasket seal between the connector and bushing.
E. Potheads shall be completely filled, leaving no gaps or voids, with an insulating compound
suitable for the type of cable, insulation, voltage rating, and ambient operating temperatures in
accordance with the pothead manufacturer’s recommendations. Pothead parts that do not carry
current shall be grounded.
3.7 INSTALLATION, FIREPROOFING
A. Cover all power cables located in manholes, handholes and junction boxes with arc proof and
fireproof tape.
B. Apply the tape in a single layer, one-half lapped or as recommended by the manufacturer. Install
the tape with the coated side towards the cable and extend it not less than 25 mm (one inch) into
each duct.
C. Secure the tape in place by a random wrap of glass cloth tape.
3.8 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION
In each manhole and pullbox install permanent tags on each circuit's cables and wires to clearly
designate their circuit identification and voltage. In manholes the tags shall be the embossed
brass type and shall also show the cable type and voltage rating. Position the tags so they will be
easy to read after the fireproofing is installed.
3.9 INSTALLATION, DIRECT BURIAL CABLE
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC.
B. Tops of the cables shall be:
1. Not less than 750 mm (30 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings below the
finished grade.
2. Not less than 60 mm 750 mm (24 inches) and not less than shown on the drawings below
road and other pavement surfaces.
16126 - 11 of 14
3. Do not install them under railroad tracks.

C. Under road and paved surfaces, install the cables within bituminous coated, galvanized steel,
rigid conduits, not less than 50 mm (2 inch) trade size, with bushings at each end of each conduit
run.
D. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to prevent any
damage.
E. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly:
1. Excavating and backfilling is specified in Section, EARTHWORK 02200.
2. Place a 75 mm (3 inch) layer of sand in the trenches before installing the cables.
3. Place a 75 mm (3 inch) layer of sand over the installed cables.
4. Install continuous, horizontal, 25 by 200 mm (1 by 8 inch), preservative impregnated wood
planking three inches above the installed cables before backfilling.
F. Provide horizontal slack in the cables for contraction during cold weather.
G. Install the cables in continuous lengths. Splices within cable runs will not be accepted.
H. Connections and terminations shall be submersible type designed for the cables being installed.
I. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 300 mm (12 inches) above buried cable.
3.10 FIELD TESTS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE
A. New Cable:
1. Acceptance tests shall be performed on new and service aged PE XLPE, PVC and paper
cables in accordance with IEEE 400.2 and as specified herein.
2. Test new cable after installation, splices, and terminations have been made, but before
connection to equipment and existing cable.
3. Test equipment, labor and technical personnel shall be provided as necessary to perform the
electrical acceptance tests. Arranges shall be made to have tests witnessed by the Resident
Engineer.
B. Service Age Cable:
1. Maintenance tests shall be performed on service-aged cable interconnected to new cable.
See test voltages below.
2. After new cable test and connection to an existing cable, test the interconnected cable.
Disconnect cable from all equipment that might be damaged by the test voltages.
C. Dielectric Absorption Test: Both new and service aged power cable shall be completely isolated
from extraneous electrical connections at cable terminations and joints. Safety precautions shall
be observed. Each cable shall be given a full dielectric – absorption test with a 5000v insulation
resistance test set. Test shall be applied for a long enough time to charge the cable. Readings
shall be recorded every 15 seconds during the first 3 minutes of test and at 1 minute intervals
thereafter. Test shall continue until three equal readings 1 minute apart are obtained. Minimum
16126 - 12 of 14
readings shall be 200 megohms at an ambient temperature 20 degrees C (68 degrees F).
Readings taken at other temperatures shall be corrected accordingly.
D. High Potential Test: High potential test shall not be applied to the XLPE new or service aged
cables. All other cables shall be subjected to the test but only upon successful dielectric
absorption test.
1. Leakage current test shall be by high potential dc step voltage method.
2. High potential test shall measure the leakage current from each conductor to the insulation
shield. Use corona shields, guard rings, taping, mason jars, or plastic bags to prevent corona
current from influencing the readings. Unprepared cable shield ends shall be trimmed back
25 mm (1 inch) or more for each 10 kV of test voltage. Upon the successful completion of the
high potential test on new and service aged PE CCLP, PC PVC cables a second dielectric
test will be run on the HV cable system to ensure the cables have not been damaged by the
hi-pot test
E. Safety Precautions:
1. Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior to, during, and after the high potential
tests, including placing warning signs and preventing people and equipment from being
exposed to the test voltages.
F. Test Voltages:
1. New shielded EPR and CCLP cable dc test voltages shall be as follows:
Rated Circuit Voltage Wire Size Test Voltage KV

Phase-to-Phase Volt AWG or
MCM
2001-5000 8-1000 25
5001-8000 6-1000 35
8001-15000 2-1000 65
15001-25001 1-1000 100
25001-28000 1-1000 -
28001-35000 1/0-1000 -
2. Existing cable of all types interconnected to a new cable shall be tested at 1.7 times the
existing cable rated voltage (maintenance test).
G. High Potential Test Method:
1. Apply voltage in approximately 8 to 10 equal steps.
2. Raise the voltage slowly between steps.
3. At the end of each step, allow the charging currents to decay, and time the interval of decay.
16126 - 13 of 14
4. Read the leakage current and plot a curve of leakage currents versus test voltage on graph
paper as the test progresses. Read the leakage current at the same time interval for each
voltage step.
5. Stop the test if leakage currents increase excessively or a "knee" appears in the curve before
maximum test voltage is reached.
a. For new cable, repair or replace the cable and repeat the test.
b. For existing cable interconnected to new cable, notify the Resident Engineer for further
instructions.
6. Upon reaching maximum test voltage, hold the voltage for five minutes. Read the leakage
current at 30 second intervals and plot a curve of leakage current versus time on the same
graph paper as the step voltage curve. Stop the test if leakage current starts to rise, or
decreases and again starts to rise. Leakage current should decrease and stabilize for good
cable.
7. Terminate test and allow sufficient discharge time before testing the next conductor.
H. Test Data: Test data shall be recorded and shall include identification of cable and location,
megohm readings versus time, leakage current readings versus time, and cable temperature
versus time.
I. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance shall depend upon the satisfactory performance of the cable
under test. No cable shall be energized until recorded test data have been approved by the
Resident Engineer. Final test reports shall be provided to the Resident Engineer. Reports shall
have a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the words “Final Test
Report” Forward to the Resident Engineer for inclusion in the Maintenance Database.
J. Radiographic Tests: Radiographic tests shall be performed on all potheads at the discretion of the
Resident Engineer to determine if voids exist in the pothead. Unacceptable terminations shall be
reworked at no additional expense to the Government.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Include the following paragraph
for projects with series outdoor lighting systems.
//K. Series Outdoor Lighting Cables: Test the series outdoor lighting system cables by standard
megger methods in lieu of testing by high potential methods. //
L. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests.
---END---
16126 - 14 of 14
SECTION 16112- BUSWAY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the busways to form a
complete coordinated system.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS: Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity
of time rated construction.
B. Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING: Sealing around busway penetrations through the
building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the building.
C. Section 16050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL): General electrical
D. Section 16450, GROUNDING: Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low
impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings:
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details and position, mounting method,
vertical supports, materials, fire stops, weather stops, and layout of the busway runs.
3. Show the detailed coordinated connections to equipment terminations such as switchgear,
switchboards, transformers and panelboards.
C. Manuals:
1. Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and
information for ordering replacement parts.
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the manuals to the Resident
Engineer.
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
BUSWAY 16112 - 1 of 3

A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement and errata)
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
857-01 ........................................ Busways
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
BU 1-99 ...................................... Busways
BU 1.1-00 ................................... General Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less
BU 1.2-02 ................................... Application Information for Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Busway shall be in accordance with UL 857 and NEMA BU 1, BU 1.1 and BU 1.2.
B. Busway shall be rated as shown on the drawings for the positions in which they are being
installed, and have the following features:
1. For indoor locations, they shall be totally enclosed, low impedance type and moisture
resistant.
2. Ratings shall not be less than required by the NEC and NEMA BU 1 and not less than shown
on the drawings. Short circuit current ratings shall not be less than 42,000 amps, as required
by NEMA BU 1 or as required for the available fault current, whichever is higher.
3. Busway shall be 3-phase, 4-wire, full neutral except where 3-phase, 3-wire is shown on the
drawings.
4. Busway shall include an internal ground bus bar, not less than 50 percent of the phase bus.
5. All bus bars for each busway shall be within a single housing. Paralleled or multiple busways
will not be accepted.
6. Bus Bars:
a. Shall be copper.
b. Bus bar and interconnection joints shall be silver plated, constant high-pressure type with
high strength, copper silicon alloy bolts, nuts and washers.
c. Shall be completely insulated with flame-retardant, track-resistant, self-extinguishing
insulation.
d. Temperature rises shall not exceed NEMA Standards.
BUSWAY 16112 - 2 of 3
7. Housings:
a. Shall be steel or aluminum with continuous mounting rails.
b. Bus bar assemblies and housing shall be products of the same manufacturer.
c. Shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted at the factory with primer and the
manufacturer's standard finish.
d. Shall have rustproof metal hardware.
e. At busway entrances to buildings, install external flanges and weatherproofing.
f. For busways that pass through floors or firewalls, incorporate fire stops within the
busway housings and external flanges to close the openings in the walls or floors
adjacent to the busways.
g. Install expansion fittings in the busway runs in compliance with the manufacturer's
standard recommendations.
9. Busway shall not be reduced in size at any point.
C. Storage: All busway shall be stored at the job site as recommended in NEMA BU 1.1.
D. Dimensions and Configurations:
1. Configure within the spaces designated for their installation.
2. Coordinate the routing of equipment installations by other trades to avoid conflicts.
3. Make final field measurements and check them with the shop drawings for the busways prior
to authorization of fabrication of the busways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install busways as required by the NEC, UL, manufacturer's recommendations and as follows:
B. Support the busways as required by the NEC with not less than 3/8 inch steel rods.
C. Install side bracing to prevent swaying or movement of the busways. In seismic zones, bracing
shall be installed as per details on drawings.
D. When the installations are complete, inspect the busway joints and eliminate any strains and
stresses on the bus bars and housings.
E. Coordinate all of the busway terminations to equipment to insure proper phasing, connection and
lugs.
F. Tighten all of the bolt connections in the busways with a torque wrench as recommended by the
manufacturer of the busways. After the busways have been energized for not less than 30 days,
repeat the torque wrench tightening of all bolt connections.
3.2 FIELD TESTS
A. Perform tests per NEMA BU 1.1 and as follows:
1. After installation but prior to energizing, busways shall be tested for continuity, phasing and
insulation resistance.
BUSWAY 16112 - 3 of 3
2. Insulation resistance shall be measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with a 500 volt
megger and values shall not be less than one megohm.
B. The contractor shall furnish the instruments, materials and labor for these tests.
---END---
BUSWAY 16112 - 4 of 3
SECTION 16111- CONDUIT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to
form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring
unless shown or specified otherwise.
B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in this specification, shall mean any or all of the raceway
types specified.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Bedding of conduits: Section EARTHWORK.
B. Mounting board for telephone closets: Section ROUGH CARPENTRY.
C. Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated construction: Section
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS.
D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building envelope at penetrations:
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
E. Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration
into the building: Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
F. Identification and painting of conduit and other devices: Section PAINTING.
G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one section of DIVISION
H. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault
1.3 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Size and location of main feeders;
2. Size and location of panels and pull boxes
3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.
4. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.
B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the
certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been
properly installed.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 1 of 11

1-03 ............................................ Flexible Metal Conduit
5-01 ............................................ Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings
6-03 ............................................ Rigid Metal Conduit
50-03 .......................................... Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
360-03 ........................................ Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
467-01 ........................................ Grounding and Bonding Equipment
514A-01 ...................................... Metallic Outlet Boxes
514B-02 ...................................... Fittings for Cable and Conduit
514C-05 ..................................... Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers
651-02 ........................................ Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit
651A-03 ...................................... Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit
797-03 ........................................ Electrical Metallic Tubing
1242-00 ...................................... Intermediate Metal Conduit
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
TC-3-04 ...................................... PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
FB1-03 ....................................... Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Conduit Size: In accordance with the NEC, but not less than 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown.
Where permitted by the NEC, 1/2 inch flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to
recessed lighting fixtures.
B. Conduit:
1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5.
3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.
4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to
exceed 4 inch and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.
5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 2 of 11
6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.

7. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or high
density polyethylene (PE).
8. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.
C. Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable
iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also
acceptable.
b. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.
c. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into
the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material
are not permitted.
d. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are
permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use
set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit
wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.
e. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings to
prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes
with blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the
room.
2. Rigid aluminum conduit fittings:
a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron, steel or
aluminum alloy materials; Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings. Aluminum fittings
containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.
b. Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.
c. Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.
3. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated
throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes
2 inches and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for conduit
sizes over 2 inches. Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point
to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 3 of 11
d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.

e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.
4. Flexible steel conduit fittings:
a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
b. Clamp type, with insulated throat.
5. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring,
and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.
6. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.
b. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
7. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.
8. Expansion and deflection couplings:
a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.
b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction,
and allow 30 degree angular deflections.
c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault
currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.
d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded
rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
D. Conduit Supports:
1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.
2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure bolt
and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12
gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel
hanger rods.
4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt
expansion.
E. Outlet, Junction, and Pull Boxes:
1. UL-50 and UL-514A.
2. Cast metal where required by the NEC or shown, and equipped with rustproof boxes.
3. Sheet metal boxes: Galvanized steel, except where otherwise shown.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 4 of 11
4. Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised covers so that front face of
raised cover is flush with the wall. Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed
with surface style flat or raised covers.
F. Wireways: Equip with hinged covers, except where removable covers are shown.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use non-detectable type for
cemetery projects only.
G. Warning Tape: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape // detectable // non-
detectable // type, red with black letters, and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE
BELOW”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PENETRATIONS
A. Cutting or Holes:
1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or
beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural
sections.
2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core
drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills
are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited
working space.
B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wireways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions,
fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against
the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with
rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between
raceways and openings with the fire stop material.
C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances
around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Section, SEALANTS AND CAULKING.
A. In accordance with UL, NEC, as shown, and as hereinafter specified.
B. Essential (Emergency) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of other raceway systems,
except where specifically "accepted" by NEC Article 517.
C. Install conduit as follows:
1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.
2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged
conduits with new undamaged material.
3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or
doorways.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 5 of 11
4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.
5. Mechanically and electrically continuous.
6. Independently support conduit at 8’.0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended
ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical
piping, or mechanical ducts).
7. Support within 300 mm (1 foot) of changes of direction, and 1 foot of each enclosure to which
connected.
8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of
debris, until wires are pulled in.
9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.
10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type
locknuts. For rigid and IMC conduit installations, provide a locknut on the inside of the
enclosure, made up wrench tight. Do not make conduit connections to junction box covers.
11. Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Section, FLASHING AND
SHEET METAL.
12. Do not use aluminum conduits in wet locations.
13. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed
concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings.
D. Conduit Bends:
1. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
2. Conduit hickey may be used for slight offsets, and for straightening stubbed out conduits.
3. Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.
E. Layout and Homeruns:
1. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns, as shown.
2. Deviations: Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings
showing the proposed deviations have been submitted approved by the Resident Engineer.
F. Fire Alarm:
1. Fire alarm conduit shall be painted red (a red “top-coated” conduit from the conduit
manufacturer may be used in lieu of painted conduit) in accordance with the requirements of
Section 13850-“Fire Alarm Systems”
3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION
A. In Concrete:
1. Conduit: Rigid steel, IMC or EMT. Do not install EMT in concrete slabs that are in contact
with soil, gravel or vapor barriers.
2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.
3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 6 of 11
a. Where shown on the structural drawings.

b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of
drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.
4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 3 inches thick is prohibited.
a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.
b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one
conduit diameter at conduit crossings.
c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of
3/4 inch of concrete around the conduits.
5. Make couplings and connections watertight. Use thread compounds that are UL approved
conductive type to insure low resistance ground continuity through the conduits. Tightening
set screws with pliers is prohibited.
B. Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Walls:
1. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:
a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.
b. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is
prohibited.
2. Conduit for conductors 600 volts and below:
a. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type conduits mixed indiscriminately
in the same system is prohibited.
3. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
4. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum six feet of flexible metal
conduit extending from a junction box to the fixture.
5. Tightening set screws with pliers is prohibited.
3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and
electrical rooms.
B. Conduit for conductors above 600 volts:
1. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.
2. Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other types in the same system is prohibited.
C. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:
1. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in
the system is prohibited.
D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
E. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.
F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over eight foot intervals.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 7 of 11
G. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.

H. Painting:
1. Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section, PAINTING.
2. Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety orange. Refer to Section,
PAINTING for preparation, paint type, and exact color. In addition, paint legends, using two
inch high black numerals and letters, showing the cable voltage rating. Provide legends
where conduits pass through walls and floors and at maximum 20 foot intervals in between.
3.5 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION
A. Exterior routing of Lighting Systems and Other Branch circuits (600 Volt and Less, and 5 feet
from the buildings):
1. Conduit: Thick wall PVC or high density PE, unless otherwise shown.
2. Mark conduit at uniform intervals to show the kind of material, direct burial type, and the UL
approval label.
3. Install conduit fittings and terminations as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
4. Tops of conduits shall be as follows unless otherwise shown:
a. Not less than 24 inches below finished grade.
b. Not less than 30 inches below road and other paved surfaces.
5. Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities to avoid
damaging them.
6. Excavation for conduit bedding and back-filling of trenches is specified in Section,
EARTHWORK.
a. Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly.
b. Do not kink the conduits.
7. Seal conduits, including spare conduits, at building entrances and at outdoor terminations for
equipment with a suitable compound that prevents the entrance of moisture and gases.
8. Where metal conduit is shown, install threaded heavy wall rigid steel galvanized conduit or
type A20 rigid steel galvanized conduit coated with 20 mil bonded PVC, or rigid steel or IMC,
PVC coated or standard coated with bituminous asphaltic compound.
9. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above conduits or electric lines.
B. Exterior routing of lighting systems and other branch circuits (600 volts and less-under buildings
slab on grade to 5 feet from the building):
1. Pre-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit in accordance with the requirements of Section
16402-“Underground Electrical Construction.”
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 8 of 11
3.6 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

A. Use rigid steel conduit only, notwithstanding requirements otherwise specified in this or other
sections of these specifications.
B. Install UL approved sealing fittings, that prevent passage of explosive vapors, in hazardous areas
equipped with explosive proof lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles, as required by the
NEC.
3.7 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS
A. Unless otherwise shown, use conduits of rigid steel or IMC.
B. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to
cold locations, i.e., (refrigerated spaces, constant temperature rooms, air conditioned spaces
building exterior walls, roofs) or similar spaces.
C. Unless otherwise shown, use rigid steel or IMC conduit within 5 feet of the exterior and below
concrete building slabs in contact with soil, gravel, or vapor barriers. Conduit shall include an
outer factory coating of 20 mil bonded PVC or field coat with asphaltum before installation. After
installation, completely coat damaged areas of coating.
3.8 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT
A. Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and other electrical equipment subject to
movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped quarters, or noise transmission.
B. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity
laden atmosphere, corrosive atmosphere, water or spray wash-down operations, inside (air
stream) of HVAC units, and locations subject to seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water.
Provide a green ground wire with flexible metal conduit.
3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Conduits 3 inches and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides of a
building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide conduits smaller than 3 inches with junction boxes on both sides of the expansion joint.
Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 5 inch
vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground
bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and deflection couplings as
specified above for 15 inches and larger conduits are acceptable.
C. Install expansion and deflection couplings where shown.
3.10 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION

A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 9 of 11
B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum
distance between supports is 8 foot on center.
C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to
support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger
itself, and 200 pounds. Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.
D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars,
angle supports, and similar items.
E. Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:
1. Existing Construction:
a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 1/4 inch bolt size and not less than 1-1/8 inch
embedment.
b. Power set fasteners not less than 1/4 inch diameter with depth of penetration not less
than 3 inches.
c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for attaching to concrete
ceilings.
F. Hollow Masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted.
G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.
H. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and
approved for the application.
I. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and
bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.
J. Chain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.
K. Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all uses except: Horizontal and vertical
supports/fasteners within walls.
L. Vertical Supports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and supports in accordance with
the NEC and as shown. Provide supports for cable and wire with fittings that include internal
wedges and retaining collars.
3.11 BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:
1. Flush mounted.
2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.
B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables
and wires during pulling in operations.
C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast
metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 10 of 11
D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are prohibited. A minimum 24 inch, center-
to-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.)
E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 4 inches square by
2-1/8 inches deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.
F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for
example "SIG-FA JB No. 1".
G. On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.
3.12 TELEPHONE CONDUIT
A. Install the telephone raceway system as shown on drawings.
B. Minimum conduit size of 3/4 inch, but not less than the size shown on the drawings.
C. All conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings.
D. All four inch conduits within buildings shall include pull boxes after every two 90 degree bends.
Size boxes per the NEC.
E. Vertical conduits/sleeves through closets floors shall terminate not less than 3 inches below the
floor and not less than 3 inches below the ceiling of the floor below.
F. Terminate conduit runs to/from a telephone backboard in a closet or interstitial space at the top or
bottom of the backboard. Conduits shall enter telephone closets next to the wall and be flush with
the backboard.
G. Where drilling is necessary for vertical conduits, locate holes so as not to affect structural
sections such as ribs or beams.
H. All empty conduits located in telephone closets or on telephone backboards shall be sealed with
a standard non-hardening duct seal compound to prevent the entrance of moisture and gases
and to meet fire resistance requirements.
I. Conduit runs shall contain no more than four quarter turns (90 degree bends) between pull
boxes/backboards. Minimum radius of telephone conduit bends shall be as follows (special long
radius):
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 11 of 11
Sizes of Conduit Radius of Conduit Bends

Trade Size Inches
3/4 6
1 9
1-1/4 14
1-1/2 17
2 21
2-1/2 25
3 31
3-1/2 36
4 45
J. Furnish and install 3/4 inch thick fire retardant plywood specified in Section, ROUGH
CARPENTRY on the wall of telephone closets where shown on drawings . Mount the plywood
with the bottom edge one foot above the finished floor.
K. Furnish and pull wire in all empty conduits. (Sleeves through floor are exceptions).
---END---
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16111 - 12 of 11
SECTION 16051 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the requirements of the Electrical System Protective Device Study.
B. A short circuit and coordination study shall be prepared for the electrical over current devices to
be installed under this project to assure proper equipment and personnel protection.
C. The study shall present an organized time-current analysis of each protective device in series
from the individual device back to the utility and the on-site generator sources. The study shall
reflect the operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions.
1.2 RELATED WORK
B. Section 16160, PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboards.
C. Section 16462, DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS: Low voltage distribution switchboards
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Complete short circuit and coordination study as described herein.
C. Protective equipment shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously with or after the
protective device study. Protective equipment shop drawings will not be accepted prior to
protective device study.
D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the Contractor that the protective devices have been adjusted and set in
accordance with the approved protective device study.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
The protective device study shall be prepared by qualified engineers of the low voltage
switchgear manufacturer or an approved consultant. The Contractor is responsible for providing
all pertinent information required by the preparers to complete the study.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS
A. The complete study shall include a system one line diagram, short circuit and ground fault
analysis, and protective coordination plots.
B. One Line Diagram:

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY 16051 - 1/2
1. Show, on the one line diagram, all electrical equipment and wiring to be protected by the
overcurrent devices installed under this project. Clearly show, on the one line, the schematic
wiring of the electrical distribution system.
2. Also show on the one line diagram the following specific information:
a. Calculated fault impedance, X/R ratios, and short circuit values at each bus.
b. Breaker and fuse ratings.
c. Generator kW and Transformer kVA and voltage ratings, percent impedance, X/R ratios,
and wiring connections.
d. Voltage at each bus.
e. Identification of each bus.
f. Conduit material, feeder sizes, length, and X/R ratios.
C. Short Circuit Study:
1. Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the available short circuit and
ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate the motor contribution in determining the
momentary and interrupting ratings of the protective devices.
2. The study shall be calculated by means of a computer program. Pertinent data and the
rationale employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory
remarks of the study.
3. Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table format. Include the following:
a. Device identification.
b. Operating voltage.
c. Protective device.
d. Device rating.
e. Calculated short circuit current.
1.6 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS
A. Necessary final field adjustments, settings and minor modifications shall be made to conform with
the protective device study without additional cost to the Government.
B. All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be made in accordance with the
recommendations of the protective device study.
---END---
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY 16051 - 2/2

SECTION 16050 - BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section, Basic Methods and Requirements (Electrical) applies to all sections of Division 16.
B. Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the
specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, cable,
switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, and other items and arrangements
for the specified items are shown on drawings.
C. Electrical service entrance equipment (arrangements for temporary and permanent connections
to the power company's system) shall conform to the power company's requirements. Coordinate
fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the power company's system, and obtain power company
approval for sizes and settings of these devices.
D. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the
conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.
E. All energized electrical work shall be in compliance with VHA Directive 2006-056.
1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are minimum installation requirement standards.
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements
are greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.3 TEST STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been
established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted
provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet
safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe,
will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as
NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop
drawings.
B. Definitions:
1. Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned which:
a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of
production of such equipment.
b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested
and found safe for use in a specified manner.
BASIC METHODS AND RQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL) 16050 - 1/6

2. Labeled; equipment or device is when:

a. It embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized
testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
b. The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment.
c. The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to
determine safe use in a specified manner.
3. Certified; equipment or product is which:
a. Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet
nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.
b. Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory.
c. Bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
4. Nationally recognized testing laboratory; laboratory which is approved, in accordance with
OSHA regulations, by the Secretary of Labor.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of
the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and
shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.
B. Product Qualification:
1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of
similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.
2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations
where the products have been in operation before approval.
C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by

the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of
receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.
1.5 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.
C. Where applicable, equipment shall comply with Energy Star or FEMP designated products.
D. Equipment Assemblies and Components:
1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall
assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended
service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
E. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.
F. When Factory Testing Is Specified:
1. Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer prior to final inspection and not more than 90 days after completion of the tests.
2. When equipment fails to meet factory test and reinspection is required, the contractor shall
be liable for all additional expenses.
1.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in accordance with Section
01001, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, the connecting work and related components shall
include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices,
conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.
1.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices,
and other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum
cleaned both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class
operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.
3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy kraft paper, sheet
vinyl or equal.
4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint
and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.
1.8 WORK PERFORMANCE
A. All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, NFPA 70E,
OSHA Part 1910 subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 subpart S and OSHA Part 1910 subpart K in
addition to other references required by contract.
B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When
an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following
requirements are mandatory:
1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to
cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.)
while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.

2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in
accordance with NFPA 70E.
3. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the contractor with
a peer review conducted and documented by the Resident Engineer. The work plan must
include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be
installed, safety equipment to be used and exit pathways.
D. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.
1.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified.
C. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of
ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to,
motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.
1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates
information required for use and maintenance of items such as panelboards, cabinets, motor
controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers
and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and
other significant equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are
furnished by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is
herein specified, are exceptions.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. The Government's approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before delivery to
the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had prior
approval will not be permitted at the job site.
B. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other
data necessary for the Government to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials
comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and
clearly identify equipment being submitted.
C. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item
or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be
considered for approval.
1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".

2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and
paragraph numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
D. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's
name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings,
pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems,
control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on
wiring diagrams.
3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
F. Manuals: Submit in accordance with Section 01010, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment
specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders,
(manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual
as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems
or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of
Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local
representatives for the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents,
with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be
legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manuals shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
d. Installation and maintenance instructions.
e. Safety precautions.
f. Diagrams and illustrations.
g. Testing methods.
h. Performance data.
i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.

j. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended
spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
H. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.
G. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of
the following:
1. A 12 inch length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the coils of
reels from which the samples were taken.
2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, outlet box, manual motor starter, device plate,
engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material and single pole molded
case circuit breaker.
6. Each type of light fixture specified in Section 16510 or shown on the drawings.
1.12 SINGULAR NUMBER

Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular
number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as
are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
---END---

Washington, DC GMP SET
SECTION 15995 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 15 responsibilities in the

commissioning process.
B. Refer to Section 01810 and 16995 for other commissioning requirements.
C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure that all systems are
operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general
commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 15
shall be familiar with all parts of Division 01 and shall execute all commissioning
responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.
D. With respect to HVAC commissioning, the Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall:
Include cost for HVAC commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this and other Cx
sections and the Preliminary Cx Plan posted in Div.1, in the quoted price.
Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification
checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.
Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all
mechanical and electrical systems provided.
Provide mechanical and electrical system technicians to assist during system verification
and functional performance testing as required by the CxA.
Review specification Division 1 and 16 to fully understand their responsibilities as they
pertain to the commissioning processes.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Mechanical. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the contractors of

Division 15 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
Construction and Acceptance Phases

1. Include cost of commissioning in the contract price.
2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal
data, commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data and training.
3. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to
facilitate the Cx process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a
regular agenda item during the normal construction meetings, and minutes
submitted to CxA for review.
4. Contractors shall provide the CxA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing
submittals of commissioned equipment.
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 15995-1

5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual

submittals, to the CxA for development of start-up, review and functional testing
procedures.
a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-
up, operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details
of any Owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing
reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all
responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly
identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials
that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field
checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall
be submitted to the CxA.
b. The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the
commissioning process.
c. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.
6. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment,

through normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval. O&M’s are to be
equipment specific and clearly identified to indicate equipment installed.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the
operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the
Specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for
writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up
procedures. Submit to CxA for review and approval prior to start-up. Refer to
Section 01810 for further details on start-up plan preparation.
9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the
mechanical-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned
equipment. Startup will not be considered complete until documentation is
complete and approved by the CxA.
10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational
checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
11. Address current A/E punch and Action list items before functional testing. Air
and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied
before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.
12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist the
functional performance tests for all commissioned equipment. Ensure that they
are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient
duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance)
as interpreted by the CxA and A/E and retest the equipment.
14. Prepare equipment specific O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents,
including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built
conditions.
15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and
final CAD as-builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after
completion of commissioning (excluding deferred testing).
16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel,
as specified.

17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to

maintain the validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period
1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-
built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
B. Mechanical Contractor and TAB. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical and
TAB contractors, during construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in
(A) are:
1. Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment, and for the building automation
control system.
2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CxA by:
a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing
the operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as
required.
b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB.
3 Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe and duct system testing,
flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use
by the CxA. Update the schedule as appropriate.
4. Notify the CM/GC when pipe and duct system testing, flushing, cleaning, start-
up of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the
CM/GC ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not
yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that commissioning
processes are executed and that the CxA has the scheduling information needed
to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
C. TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component
to the CxA, CM/GC and the Controls Contractor six weeks prior to starting the
TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the
control system.
2. The submitted plan will include:
a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction
documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to
sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.
b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The
Controls Contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan.
c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct
drawings during the process.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and
issue: terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser
proportioning, branch / submain proportioning, total flow calculations,
rechecking, diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc.

Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and
sensors will be discussed.
f. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and
efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific
test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.
g. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and
their most recent calibration date.
h. Specific procedures that will ensure that the air side is operating at the
lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify this.
i. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity
will be checked.
j. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound
measurement methods.
k. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including
any required room pressure differentials.
l. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or
uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of
completed tests (scope and frequency).
m. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency).
n. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).
3. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians.
Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by
others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA
and CM/GC at least weekly.
4. Communicate in writing to the Controls Contractor all setpoint and parameter
changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect
the control system setup and operation.
5. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be
provided to the CxA. The report will contain a full explanation of the
methodology, assumptions and the results in a clear format with designations of
all uncommon abbreviations and column headings. The report should follow the
latest and most rigorous reporting recommendations by AABC, ASHRAE
Standard 111.
6. Provide the CxA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft
reports.
7. Provide a final TAB report for the CxA with details, as in the draft.
8. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as
specified for TAB in Division 1 and 15.
D. Architect, Owner, Electrical and Mechanical Designer. Refer to Section 01810
E. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Contractor: Refer to Division 01 and 23.
ATC Contractor is responsible to act as a Cx team member and issue to the CxA for review
and comment, their prefunctional plan (point to point and startup) and be onsite and
available to perform all required system commissioning.

All ATC/BAS graphics and sequences are to be demonstrated to the CxA prior to functional
testing.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 1 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are
found.
B. Refer to Division 1 for sections involving related commissioning work; for functional
testing requirements, and preliminary Cx Plan.
1.04 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS
A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral equipment controls) will be
commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer
only to equipment that is to be commissioned.
Refer to Division 01810 for systems to be commissioned
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements
of this Division.
B. Refer to Division 1 for additional Division 15 requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 15 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required

in this Division 1.
3.02 START-UP / PREFUNCTIONAL COMMISSIONING
A. The HVAC mechanical Contractor shall follow the start-up and initial checkout
procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this Division 1. Division 15 has start-up
responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully
functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The
commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this
responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner. It is the
contractors responsibility to create the start-up / prefunctional documents and submit to
the CxA for review and comment within two weeks of system startup.

B. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing

may proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the
CxA and CM/GC. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the
Contractor from fully completing the system, including all prefunctional checklists as
soon as possible.
3.03 TAB
A. Refer to the TAB responsibilities in Part 1 and 2 above.
3.04 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Refer to this section and the Cx Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned.
B. The CxA shall create the functional performance procedures and guideline after review
and comment of the equipment startup documents supplied by the contractor.
C. The CxA is to witness and document the functional performance testing. All hands on
testing and equipment required by the CxA is to be supplied and performed by the
contractor. The contractor’s fees are to be included in their base bid.
D. If more than one return visit is required by the CxA due to failed systems, the contractor
is responsible for the CxA team hourly rate and expenses.
NOTE; THAT FUNCTIONAL TESTING IS A VERIFICATION THAT SYSTEMS

ARE FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY PER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THIS IS
NOT A PERIOD OF SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING, AND THE CxA SHALL
HAVE THE AUTHORITY TO SUSPEND FUNCTIONAL TESTING UNTIL
SYSTEMS ARE COMPLETE AND OPERATING AS PER THE DESIGN AND
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION.
3.05 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS
A. Refer to Section 01810 for issues relating to functional performance tests.
3.06
A. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the
following with other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the
Specifications.
1. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test

conditions and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon
abbreviations and column headings.
2. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical
measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the TAB report.

B. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M
manuals shall be made by the A/E and by the CxA. Refer to Division 1 for details.
3.07 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. The CM/GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately
to ensure that training is completed.
B. TAB:The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. After completion of TAB, TAB shall meet with facility staff for the number of
hours specified in the contract documents, and shall instruct them on the
following:
a) Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of
each data type.
b) Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that
may affect the proper delivery of air.
c) Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.
d) Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas
that are not finished.
e) Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations,
relative to TAB.
CxA does not oversee or document training
3.08 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan
described in Section 01810 and the executed start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional
checklists.

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:
1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including sub-mains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment

are included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and
equipment installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub-mains,

branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of
high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is
withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield

repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement.
In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990 - 1/15

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance

ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the
fan was performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves
the distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.
O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.
P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this
Project's testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications
specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article below.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3
of this Section.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of
report forms intended for use on this Project.
D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared,
as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent.
E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report
forms.
F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB.
B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment
manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other
support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and
location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting,
and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced
in this Specification.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from one of the following:
1. AABC's "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

2. NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems."
3. SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
4. Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's standard forms approved by the
Architect.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards

or as described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more

frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the
entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing,
adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building
before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and
balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and

equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and
equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and
water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article
shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National

Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the
Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and
balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the
following provisions:
1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to

discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of

the Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of
these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and
for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record

Documents."
D. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment
controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare
this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification
Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify
that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction

piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multi-zone units, mixing
boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,
drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system
reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can
be met.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC national standards and this Section.
B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems" or according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems-Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

C. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing
and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to
those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation
Specifications for this Project.
D. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes
with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multi-zone, dual-
duct, induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These
additional procedures are specified in other articles in this Section.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflow within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as

practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the
fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from
duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps,
heat recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections
to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and
measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to determine the
maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub-main ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflow within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in sub-mains and branch ducts is unavailable for

Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and
inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Re-measure each sub-main and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust sub-mains and branch ducts to design airflow within specified
tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's

written instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflow within specified
tolerances of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at the air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of
design quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed
by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds

varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
3.7 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature
regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.8 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to
input changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates
on a grounded or non-grounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.10 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes
and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for
performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and
problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for
each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.11 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper,

in 3-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Fan curves.
2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved
Shop Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data
in the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design
values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflow.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
4. Terminal units.
5. Balancing stations.
F. Roof top Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches

(mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:
1. Coil Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degrees F (degrees C).

h. Leaving-water temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
i. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
j. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
k. Refrigerant suction temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's
factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).

b. Entering-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
c. Leaving-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
d. Air temperature differential in degrees F (degrees C).
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW).
i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW).
j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in degrees F (degrees C).
l. Operating set point in Btuh (kW).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW).
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches

(mm).
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches
(mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
g. Design airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Design velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device manufacturer.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).
e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).
g. Space temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flow meter type.

b. Entering-water temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
c. Leaving-water temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa).
e. Entering-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
f. Leaving-air temperature in degrees F (degrees C).
M. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:
1. Report Data: Include the following:
a. Instrument type and manufacturer.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing
and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to
correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not
performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional
inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

SECTION 15970 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including
control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired
controls.
1. "Intrusion Detection" for building intrusion detection system.

2. "Clock Control" for building clock control system.
3. "Lighting Controls" for building lighting control system.
4. "Fire Alarm" for fire and smoke detectors mounted in HVAC systems and
equipment.
5. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operations" for requirements that relate to this
Section.
6. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
B. Control system includes the following:
1. Building intrusion detection system specified in "Intrusion Detection."

2. Building clock control system specified in "Clock Control."
3. Building lighting control system specified in "Lighting Controls."
4. Fire alarm system specified in "Fire Alarm."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
HVAC CONTROLS 15970 - 1/15

1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
4. Written description of sequence of operation.
5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
6. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.
7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk
data conductors.
8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)
point addresses, and operator notations.
10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies,
diagrams, modems, and interconnections.
C. ASHRAE BACnet Statement: PICS for each DDC system component (panel, zone
controller, field devices, and operator workstation) proposed.
D. Samples: For each color required, of each type of thermostat cover.
E. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control
systems.
F. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future power
system revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device
and compressed air station.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components
and devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator
function.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and
calibration tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
I. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including

control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual
installation and operating sequences.

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an approved installer of the

automatic control system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperature-

control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful
in-service performance.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
E. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system control components.
F. Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately

processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations.
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are

indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to
unit manufacturer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with
plans and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Intrusion Detection" to achieve

compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Clock Control" to achieve compatibility

with equipment that interfaces with that system.
D. Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Lighting Controls" to achieve

compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.
E. Coordinate equipment with Specifications Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility

with equipment that interfaces with that system.
F. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
G. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panel Boards" to achieve compatibility

with starter coils and annunciation devices.
H. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve

compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.
I. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
B. Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjustment key.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Control Systems Components:
a. Air Monitor Corporation

b. Honeywell, Incorporated; Home & Building Control
c. Johnson Controls, Incorporated; Controls Group
2. DDC Systems:
a. Alerton Technologies, Incorporated

b. Andover Controls Corporation
c. Automated Logic Corporation
d. Auto-Matrix, Incorporation; Auto-Flow Division
e. CSI Control Systems International, Incorporated.
f. Danfoss Automatic Controls
g. Delta Controls Incorporated
h. EDA Controls Corporation
i. Electronic Systems USA, Incorporated
j. Honeywell, Incorporated; Home & Building Control
k. Johnson Controls, Incorporated; Controls Group
l. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group
2.2 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Station: Microcomputer station with printer.
B. Workstation: IBM-compatible microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:
1. Processor: Intel Pentium MMX, MHz.

2. Random Access Memory: 32 MB.
3. Cache Memory: 256 kB.
4. Graphics: Super video graphic adapter (SVGA), minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels, 2.0-
MB EDO video memory.
5. Monitor: 17 inches (432 mm), non-interlaced, color, with maximum 0.28-mm dot
pitch.
6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7. Floppy-Disk Drives: 1.44 MB.
8. Hard-Disk Drive: 4.0 GB.
9. CD-ROM Drive: 24x.
10. Mouse: Three-button type.
11. Modem: Auto-dial, internal, minimum 56-kBaud.
12. Tape Backup Internal Zip-drive, 100 MB.
13. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 95 or later.
14. BACnet Conformance: Workstation shall support BACnet device and have
minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
c. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
C. Printer: Dot-matrix type as follows:
1. Print Head: 24 pin, 360 x 360 dpi resolution.

2. Carriage: Wide, 132 characters per line of paper.
3. Paper Handling: Fan-fold paper, with 2 cartons containing minimum of 2500 sheets
each.
4. Print Speed: Minimum of 120 characters per second.
D. Application Software: Include the following:
1. Input/output capability from operator station.

2. Operator system access levels via software password.
3. Database creation and support.
4. Dynamic color graphic displays.
5. Alarm processing.
6. Event processing.
7. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
8. Data collection.
9. Graphic development on workstation.
10. Maintenance management.
E. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile,

random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface
equipment; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; execute

commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download
from or upload to operator station.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.
Functions include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware
and controlled environment.
3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator
station.
4. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN in Ethernet IEEE 802.3, Class 3,
minimum, with routers between LAN and other panels, with at least one
communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the
following areas:
a. Network.
b. Functional groups.
c. Standard application services supported.
d. Standard objects supported.
F. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically

programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and

download from or upload to operator station.
2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.
Functions include the following:
a. Global communications.
b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
2.3 CONTROL PANELS
A. Central (Master) Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel-rack-type cabinet with locking
doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multicolor graphic
displays, schematically showing system being controlled.
B. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting,
located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all
panels.
1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-

aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with
manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish.
2. Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and
automatic switches; except safety devices. Mount devices with adjustments
accessible through front of panel.
3. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches,
including damper-positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and
gages.
4. Graphics: Color-coded graphic, laminated-plastic displays on doors, schematically
showing system being controlled, with protective, clear plastic sheet bonded to
entire door.
C. Alarm Panels: Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and
test switch, mounted in hinged-cover enclosure.
1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.

2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady.
3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady.
4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished.
5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company.
2.4 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Step Controllers: Six- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads
and operated by electric motor.
B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type,

proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range
minus 10 to plus 70 degrees F (minus 23 to plus 21 degrees C), and single- or double-
pole contacts.
C. Electronic Controllers: Wheat-stone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with

provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers,
including proportional band and authority.
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible
control readjustment potentiometer.
D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control

of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below
minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to
rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio
interference.
2.5 TIME CLOCKS
A. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day

dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure
carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day
with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts.
B. Solid-state, programmable time control with 4 separate programs; 24-hour battery

carryover; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20
programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; and system fault
alarm.
2.6 SENSORS
A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct
mounting as required.
1. Thermistor temperature sensors as follows:
a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 degree F (0.3 degree C at calibration point.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches (20 cm) long; use where
not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9
sq. ft. (1 sq. m).
d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches (91 cm) long, flexible use where
prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1
sq. m); length as required.
e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length
of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
f. Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.
g. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting shielded from direct sunlight.
h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and
security screws.
2. Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum.
a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.

b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches (20 cm long; use where
not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9
sq. ft. (1 sq. m).
d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches (91 cm) long, flexible; use where
prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (1
sq. m); length as required.
e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length
of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
f. Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover.
g. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting shielded from direct sunlight.
h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and
security screws.
3. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
a. Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output.

b. Room Sensors: With locking cover matching room thermostats, span of 25
to 90 percent relative humidity.
c. Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate,
range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.
4. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Non-directional sensor with suitable range for

expected input, and temperature compensated.
a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

b. Output: 4 to 20-mA.
c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25-inch wg (0 to 62 Pa).
d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).
5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range
suitable for system; proportional output 4 to 20-mA.
6. Space and Duct Humidity Transmitters: One pipe, directly proportional, with
minimum sensing span of 20 to 80 percent relative humidity for 3- to 15-psig (21-
to 103-kPa) output signal, corrosion resistant and temperature compensated, and
with factory-calibrated adjustment.
a. Space Mounting: With covers to match thermostats.
B. Equipment operation sensors as follows:
1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5

inches wg (0 to 1243 Pa).
2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with
adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60-psig (55 to 414-kPa).

3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
C. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and
2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
D. Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting

type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with stainless steel or
bronze paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vapor-proof type.
E. Carbon-Monoxide Detectors: Single or multi-channel, dual-level detectors, using solid-

state sensors with 3-year minimum life, maximum 15-minute sensor replacement,
suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F (minus 5 to plus 55 degrees C),
calibrated for 50 and 100 ppm, with maximum 120-second response time to 100-ppm
carbon monoxide.
F. Carbon-Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared

sensors, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 degrees F (minus 5 to plus 55
degrees C), calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20-
mA output, and wall mounted.
G. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state zircon cell sensing,
suitable over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 degrees F (0 to 593
degrees C), calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20-
mA output, and wall mounted.
H. Refrigerant Detectors: Dual-level detectors, using solid-state sensors, with alarm preset
for 300-ppm, alarm indicator light, alarm silence light and button, alarm test light and
button, and trouble light. Provide auxiliary relay preset for 150-ppm.
I. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity
control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.
2.7 THERMOSTATS
A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with two-, three-, or
four-position, push-button or lever-operated fan switch.
1. Label switches "FAN ON-OFF," "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF," "FAN HIGH-MED-LOW-

OFF." Provide unit for mounting on two-gang switch box.
B. Electric solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.

2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.
3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.
4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.
5. Short-cycle protection.
6. Programming based on weekdays, Saturdays and Sundays
7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display; 12- or 24-hour clock;
keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.
8. Battery replacement without program loss.
9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch

type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.
D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,

enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, integral
manual on-off-auto selector switch.
1. Equip thermostats, which control electric heating loads directly, with off position on
dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.
2. Dead Band: Maximum 2 degrees F (1 degree C).
E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for

changes in ambient temperature, with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.

2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.
3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,
extended to cover full width of duct or unit, adequately supported.
4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front
of instrument.
5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches, with electrical ratings required
by application.
6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper
assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration
of instrument.
F. Fire-Protection Thermostats: UL listed with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not

less than 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) above normal maximum operating temperature,
with the following:
1. Reset: Manual.
G. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.

2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
3. Thermometer: Exposed
4. Color: Color from manufacturer's standard colors.
5. Orientation: Horizontal.
H. Room thermostat accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.

2. Thermostat Guards: Locking, solid metal, ventilated.
3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
4. Aspirating Boxes: For flush-mounted aspirating thermostats.
5. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, adjustment knob.
I. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action

with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.
J. Air stream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type, with

adjustable set point in middle of range and adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting
or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.
K. Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or

automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of
bulb length is equal to or below set point.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m).

2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20-sq. ft. (2-sq. m) of coil surface.
L. Electric High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or

automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of
bulb length is equal to or above set point.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m).

2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20-sq. ft. (2-sq. m) of coil surface.
M. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow,

molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at
minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig (172-kPa), and cast housing with position indicator
and adjusting knob.
2.8 HUMIDISTATS
A. Duct-Mounted Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable 2 percent

throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, single- or double-pole contacts.
2.9 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two-position action.
1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring
mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of
limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
2. Non-spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for
running torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m) and breakaway torque of 300-in.-lbf (33.9 N
m).
3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running
and breakaway torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m).
4. Non-spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for
running torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m) and breakaway torque of 300-in.lbf (33.9 N
m).
5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for
running and breakaway torque of 150-in.lbf (16.9 N m).
B. Electronic Damper Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-
stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-

cm/sq. m) of damper.
3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,
manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
7. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20-mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position
feedback signal.
8. Temperature Rating 40 to 104 degrees F (4 to 40 degrees C).
9. Run Time: 120 seconds.
2.10 DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.1084-inch (2.8-mm) minimum,

galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less
than 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches (203
mm).
1. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using

zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-
plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings,
and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 degrees F (minus 40 to
plus 93 degrees C).
3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable
seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10
cfm per sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4
inches wg (995-Pa) when damper is being held by torque of 50-in.lbf (5.6 N m);
when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.11 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section
"Control/Signal Transmission Media."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator
workstation.
B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping
are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb.
B. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation

specified.
D. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches (1524 mm) above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
E. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1. Entrances.
2. Public areas.
3. Where indicated.
F. Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
G. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to
outdoor temperatures.
H. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15

Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
I. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15

Section "Mechanical Identification."
J. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
K. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifying air

ducts.
L. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal

Transmission Media."
M. In concealed locations, such as pipe chases and suspended ceilings with easy access,
install copper tubing. Electrical metallic tubing materials and installation requirements are
specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal

Transmission Media."
1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and
piping are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway.
3. Install concealed cable in raceway.
4. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables
where several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of
control system, except local individual room control cables.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when

switch is in hand position.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment, and retest.
4. Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and
stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.

2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and
control sequences.
3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of
operation specified.
D. Verify DDC as follows:
1. Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset

controls, and occupied/unoccupied cycles.
2. Verify operation of operator workstation.
3. Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.
3.6 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up

to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components
and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors
and controls to suit actual conditions.

WASHINGTON, D.C. 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 15940 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS – SEQUENCES OF

OPERATION
Part 1 – GENERAL
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Division 15900 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control.
B. VAV: Variable air volume.
1.4 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
A. General - The chiller plant control system shall monitor and control the chilled water system
including the chiller(s), pump(s), and variable speed drive(s) as appropriate.
B. The chiller plant control system shall have a fully editable user interface set-up via point and click
on a standard windows screen. It shall not require special software tools or a building
automation system technician to operate.
C. The chiller plant control system shall include the following features:
1. Operator interface
2. System Start/Stop
3. Chiller and pump sequencing
4. Failure Status
5. Energy optimization routines
6. Chiller freeze protection
7. System and chiller status reports
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15940 - 1/18
PDF Created with deskPDF PDF Writer - Trial :: http://www.docudesk.com

D. Operator interface - The chiller plant control system shall include the following operator interface
elements:
1. Operational status screen to include:
− Chiller System Status (Off/Soft Start/Normal/Ambient Lockout/Shutdown in

Progress)
− Chiller Plant Supply Water Setpoint
− Chilled Water System Supply Water Temperature
− Chilled Water System Return Water Temperature
− Predictive chiller addition / subtraction status messages (i.e. “Next Compressor
will be added if the system supply water temp [ 41.7 ] exceeds [ 43.5 ] degrees
for [ 10 ] minutes.” Or “Next Compressor will be subtracted if there is no add
request and the actual system Delta T [ 10.7 ] degrees is less than [ 7.5 ]
degrees for [ 10 ] minutes.”)
2. Screen that allows editing of the following data (to be performed without entering
program code editor):
− Supply Water Setpoint

− System Soft Loading Parameters
− Ambient Lockout Parameters
− Chiller Compressor Addition Parameters
− Chiller Compressor Subtraction Parameters
− Alarm Handling Setup
− Security Setup
3. Individual Chiller Graphic(s) to include all data listed on the supplementary Chiller
System Point List, including:
− Chiller Name
− Chiller Operating Mode
− Chilled Water Setpoint
− Chiller RLA %
− Entering Chiller Water Temperature
− Leaving Chilled Water Temperature
− Evaporator Flow Status
E. System Start/Stop - The chilled water system shall start in response to a binary signal from an
external source such as the building automation system, with the option to use outside ambient
temperature lockout.
1. Upon the start of the chilled water system the chiller plant control system shall
automatically start Trend Log Reports to include:
a. Hourly logging of system shall include the following points:

− Outside Air Dry Bulb
− System Chilled Water Setpoint
− System Chilled Water Supply Temperature
− System Chilled Water Return Temperature
− Operating Status of each chiller
− Operating Status of pumps

F. Module Sequencing - The chiller plant control system will start and stop the chilled water
pump(s) and chillers based upon system load.
1. When the chilled water system is enabled the chiller plant control system shall:
a. Send an Enable signal to the lead chiller.

b. Upon receiving the enable signal the chiller shall enable its chilled water
pump.
c. Upon confirmation of evaporator water flow the chiller shall continue its pre-
start sequence and start its compressor(s).
d. Upon the start of each chiller the Chiller Plant Control system shall
automatically start chiller specific Trend Log Reports to include:
i. Hourly logging of chiller
− Unit Chilled Water Setpoint
− Compressor(s) RLA
− Evaporator Entering Water Temp
− Evaporator Leaving Water Temp
− Evaporator Approach Temp
ii. Five-minute logging of chiller:
− Unit Chilled Water Setpoint
− Compressor(s) RLA
− Evaporator Entering Water Temp
− Evaporator Leaving Water Temp
2. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the start of the next chiller in the
sequence whenever insufficient chilled water capacity exists continuously, as
indicated by supply water temperature deviation from system chilled water
temperature setpoint, is not met for [ 20 ] minutes.
a. The chiller plant control system will unload operating chillers to an operator
editable current limit prior to starting a lag chiller.
b. Lag chillers shall start in a similar manner to the lead chiller start sequence.
3. The chiller plant control system shall initiate the shut down of the next chiller in the
sequence whenever excess chilled water capacity, as determined by the system
supply and chiller return water temperatures, exists for [ 20 ] minutes.
a. The chiller shall shut down its pump when the chiller determines it is safe to
do so.
4. Upon sensing a chiller failure the chiller plant control system shall shut down the failed
chiller immediately and initiate the start of the next chiller in the rotation sequence.
5. The chiller plant control system shall control individual chiller setpoints to maintain the
system supply water temperature at setpoint.
6. The design system chilled water setpoint shall be [ 42 ] degrees F and editable by the
operator.
7. Reset of the system chilled water supply temperature upward shall be allowed only
when a single chiller is operating. The maximum reset chilled water setpoint shall be [
5 ] degrees F above the base setpoint. Reset shall be accomplished using critical
valve position OR system return chilled water temperature OR outside air dry bulb.

a. The system chilled water supply temperature shall not be reset if the space
relative humidity rises above [ 60% ].
G. Air-cooled chiller freeze protection
1. If required by the chiller manufacturer the chiller shall be permitted to start its pump
for unit freeze protection.
H. Diagnostics/Protection - the Building Automation System shall be able to alarm from all sensed
points and diagnostic alarms monitored by the chiller controller.
I. Chiller Status Report - Provide an operating status report for each chiller. The report(s) shall
provide the present status for the following information to provide the operator with critical chiller
operating data.
− Compressor On/Off Status

− Compressor Starts/Run Hours
− Compressor Phase 1/2/3 Percent RLA - separate for each compressor
− Compressor Current Draw - RLA Percent
− Active Chiller Diagnostics or Alarms
− Leaving Chilled Water Temperature
− Entering Chilled Water Temperature
− Chilled Water Setpoint
− Refrigerant Temperature Evaporator - Separate for each circuit
− Operating Mode
− Chiller Model and Serial Number
− Outside Air Dry Bulb
J. Demand Limiting - As part of the demand limiting scheme on the building, the chiller plant control
system shall be able to monitor and reduce peak power demand through the limiting of chiller
current draw.
1.5 AIR COOLED MODULAR CHILLER
A. MECHANICAL COOLING MODULES
1. The Master Controller operates the independent refrigeration circuits based on the
inputs from its integrated chilled water sensors. Every 24 hours the master
controller will select a new lead compressor.
2. The Master Controller utilizes return water temperature control. Based on the set
points (which are field programmed into the controller) and the return water
temperature of the system the chiller will enable and disable all refrigerant
circuits to meet the system load. All compressors are either on or off and do not
modulate. For a full description of the available system set points and how they
affect system operation please see the Airstack User’s Manual.
B. PUMP SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

1. The Pump Module incorporates a lead and a standby pump. The lead pump may
be selected and rotated manually by the “Lead-Lag” switch located in the pump
control panel. Whenever the Pump Module is enabled (by applying power to the
module and closing the dry-contact start signal to the control system) the lead
pump will start.
2. Once the system is in operation a proof of flow signal is monitored by the control
system. This signal is received from an integrated differential pressure switch
installed across the pumping system’s common inlet and outlet. If this signal is
interrupted for more than 4-seconds the control system will automatically shutdown
the lead pump and start the stand-by pump. An associated 24vac alarm
signal will be enabled and may be monitored by the customer.
3. During a loss of flow situation the Mechanical Cooling Modules will be

automatically shut down by the Master Controller. Once flow is reestablished the
Mechanical Cooling Modules will automatically restart. An alarm will be
generated at the Master Controller for troubleshooting purposes but will not affect
the operation of the system as long as flow has been successfully reestablished.
4. During a loss of flow situation, as indicated by the differential pressure switch

across the pumping system, the chiller system will shut-down and the stand-by
pump will be engaged. Once flow is reestablished the chiller system will
automatically restart. If during standby pump operation there is again an
indication of a loss of flow by the differential pressure switch the stand-by pump
will be shut down as well as the chiller system. In order to restart the system after
this second loss of flow the cause of the fault must be corrected and the pumping
system must be reset manually. (Note: Once the stand-by pump is engaged flow
must be re-established within 4-seconds to avoid a second loss of flow indication
by the control system.)
C. SEQUENCE TIMING
1. The pump module and mechanical cooling modules may be started and stopped remotely
through a two-wire dry contact interlock. Additionally, both the pump module and master
mechanical cooling module can provide a 24cvac, 5va feedback signal for an alarm condition.
If a BAS System is sequencing the Airstack Chiller the following timing is recommended:
D. START-UP
1. Enable the chilled water pump via the two-wire dry contact interlock at the Airstack Pump
Modules Terminal Strip. This must be done no less than 10-seconds before enabling the
Mechanical Cooling Modules.
a. Note: If pumps are provided by others, insure they are started at least 10
seconds prior to initiating the start signal to the Airstack Chiller.
1. Enable the Airstack Mechanical Cooling System via a two-wire dry contact
interlock (EX2) at the chiller Master Controller Terminal Strip.
2. Monitor the fault signal at both the Airstack Pump Module Terminal Strip (if
applicable) and the Mechanical Cooling System’s Master Controller Terminal

Strip. These are both 24vac signals.
E. Shut-Down
1. Disable the Mechanical Cooling System by opening the two-wire interlock (EX2)
at the chiller Master Controller Terminal Strip.
2. Shut Down the chilled water pumps no sooner than 10-seconds after the chiller
has been disabled.
1.6 HOT WATER SYSTEM
A. Boiler System: The boiler system shall be selected for operation and shall remain in
constant operation while building has a need for heating.
B. Refer to diagrams on drawings regarding operation of system.
C. Pumps: Pumps HWP-1, HWP-2, shall be capable of being started and stopped manually,
or automatically by the BAS, through an H-O-A switch on the starter.
D. Existing boiler controller shall be upgraded if necessary to provide points new DDC
controller with BACnet Interfaces.
E. Boilers 1 and 2 will be operated with Lead-Lag control. The Lead Boiler shall maintain
supply water temperature setpoint. If the Lead Boiler fails, the Lag Boiler shall be
energized. Provide weekly alternation of the Lead Boiler.
F. To prevent short cycling, the boiler system shall run for a minimum of 5 min (adj) and be
off a minimum of 1 min (adj) unless shutdown on safeties or outside air conditions. The
boiler shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls.
G. Refer to boiler specification section for additional information.

1.7 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT
A. Occupied Mode:


B. Unoccupied Mode:

1.8 FAN COIL UNITS
A. Occupancy - The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the ASC via a
binary input. Valid Occupancy modes for the ASC shall be:
1. Occupied: Normal operating mode for occupied spaces or daytime operation.

When the unit is in the occupied mode the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. The occupied
mode shall be the default mode of the ASC.
2. Unoccupied: Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime

operation. When the unit is in unoccupied mode the ASC shall maintain the
space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The
hardwired or communicated setpoint is not used in unoccupied. When the space
temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the ASC shall bring on
100% of the primary heating or cooling capacity.
3. Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied
operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space
sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The
tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time.
During the override the unit shall run in occupied mode.
B. Heat Cool Mode - The Heat Cool mode can be set by a communicated value or
automatically by the ASC. In standalone or auto mode the ASC shall automatically
determine the Heat Cool mode by integrating over time between the active setpoint and
the space temperature.
1. Heat Cool Setpoint- The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either
by a local hardwired setpoint, the ASC default setpoint or a communicated value.
The ASC uses the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local hardwired
setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a hardwired setpoint and
communicated setpoint exist, the ASC shall use the communicated value.
a) The occupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be limited by adjustable

parameters in the ASC to prevent them from being set too low or too high. These
limits do not apply in the unoccupied mode. In the Unoccupied mode the ASC
shall always use the stored default (Unoccupied) setpoints. These setpoints shall
be widened to accommodate night setback and shall be adjustable.
Setpoint Default Value

Heating Setpoint Low Limit 40°F
Cooling Setpoint Low Limit 40°F
Heating Setpoint High Limit 105°F
Cooling Setpoint High Limit 110°F
C. Cooling Operation - When the unit is in cooling mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active cooling setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following:

Occupied Cooling Setpoint 74°F
Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 85°F

Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint 78°F
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to
determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity.
D. Heating Operation - When the unit is in heating mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active heating setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active heating setpoint shall be one of the following:

Occupied Heating Setpoint 71°F
Unoccupied Heating Setpoint 60°F
Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint 67°F
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to
determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity.
E. Transition from Unoccupied to Occupied - When the unit transitions from unoccupied
mode to the occupied mode, morning warm-up/cool down and random start routines shall
be activated.
1. Morning Warm-Up - When there is a call for heating and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-
up sequence shall be activated. During warm-up the fan shall be turned on, the
outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating capacity shall be
enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the
occupied heating setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
2. Morning Cool-down - When there is a call for cooling and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more over the occupied cooling setpoint a morning cool-
down sequence shall be activated. During morning cool-down the fan shall be
turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the cooling capacity
shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees
of the occupied cooling setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
3. Random Start - A randomly generated 3-32 second delay shall be activated
when electric power is applied to the ASC or after receiving a communicated
occupied command.
F. Fan Operation - The fan shall be configurable to operate continuously or cycling in all
occupied modes. During Unoccupied operation, the fan shall cycle between off and high
regardless of the fan configuration. The fan can be configured to run continuous at a
configured speed, cycling or off. When configured for cycling the ASC shall cycle on and
off based on the required capacity.
G. Hydronic Cooling Valve Control- If the unit is in the cooling mode the ASC shall cycle on
and off the cooling valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain space comfort. The cooling
valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the heating capacity is enabled.
H. Hydronic Heating Valve Control- If the unit is in the heating mode, the ASC shall cycle on
and off the heating valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain the space comfort. The
heating valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the cooling capacity is enabled.
I. Generic Binary Output - The controller shall have a 24V output to be controlled from a
BAS.

J. Discharge Air Temperature - The ASC shall be capable of passing a discharge air
temperature to the BAS.
K. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the ASC the occupied space heating
and cooling temperature setpoints. The BAS shall also send the following commands:
Occupied
Unoccupied
Heat/Cool Mode
Priority Shutdown Commands
If communication with the BAS is lost, the ASC shall use predetermined default setpoints
and operate in the occupied mode.
L. SAFETIES AND ALARMS
1. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it
shall be feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown.
2. Fan Status - The ASC shall monitor the fan outputs to determine fan status.
3. Filter Status - A maintenance timer shall be incorporated into the ASC to signal a filter
change after a configurable number of fan run hours.
4. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service
tool, BAS, or by cycling power to the unit. Some diagnostics can only be reset by cycling
power or replacing the failed sensor.
5. Fan Off Delay - After heating has being controlled off, the ASC shall keep the fan
energized for an additional 30 seconds. The purpose of this action is to remove residual
heat from the heating source.
6. Condensate Overflow - When the condensate overflow switch trips, the ASC shall shut
the unit down, close all valves and close the outside air damper (if present).
7. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following ASC diagnostics. The
ASC shall initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition.
Diagnostic Manual Reset required

Condensate Overflow Yes
Low Coil Temperature Detection No
Space Temperature Failure Yes
Entering Water Temp Failure No
Discharge Air Temperature No
Local Setpoint Failure No
Local Fan Mode Failure No
Maintenance Required Yes
M. TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for
troubleshooting. This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of
additional tools.

2. Unit Identification - The ASC shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a
command from a service tool or BAS. The ASC shall also be able to send the unit
neuron ID and the program ID to a service tool or BAS for unit identification from the
controller board or space sensor with no need of additional tools.
3. Water Valve Override - This command from a service tool or BAS shall cause all valves
to stroke fully open for water balancing.
N. COMMUNICATIONS
1. Data Sharing - All ASC's shall be able to communicate in a peer-to-peer environment

over a twisted pair of communications wire.
Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single
space sensor. The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool
mode, occupancy, fan speed, entering water temperature, economizer, and capacity
control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure seamless
cooperation between the units.
1.9 BLOWER COIL UNITS
A. Occupancy - The occupancy mode can be communicated or hardwired to the ASC via a
binary input. Valid Occupancy modes for the ASC shall be:
1. Occupied: Normal operating mode for occupied spaces or daytime operation.

When the unit is in the occupied mode the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. The occupied
mode shall be the default mode of the ASC.
2. Unoccupied: Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime

operation. When the unit is in unoccupied mode the ASC shall maintain the
space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The
hardwired or communicated setpoint is not used in unoccupied. When the space
temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the ASC shall bring on
100% of the primary heating or cooling capacity.
3. Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied
operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space
sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (configurable). The
tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time.
During the override the unit shall run in occupied mode.
B. Heat Cool Mode - The Heat Cool mode can be set by a communicated value or
automatically by the ASC. In standalone or auto mode the ASC shall automatically
determine the Heat Cool mode by integrating over time between the active setpoint and
the space temperature.
4. Heat Cool Setpoint- The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either
by a local hardwired setpoint, the ASC default setpoint or a communicated value.
The ASC uses the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local hardwired
setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a hardwired setpoint and
communicated setpoint exist, the ASC shall use the communicated value.

a) The occupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be limited by adjustable

parameters in the ASC to prevent them from being set too low or too high. These
limits do not apply in the unoccupied mode. In the Unoccupied mode the ASC
shall always use the stored default (Unoccupied) setpoints. These setpoints shall
be widened to accommodate night setback and shall be adjustable.

Heating Setpoint Low Limit 40°F
Cooling Setpoint Low Limit 40°F
Heating Setpoint High Limit 105°F
Cooling Setpoint High Limit 110°F
C. Cooling Operation - When the unit is in cooling mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active cooling setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following:

Occupied Cooling Setpoint 74°F
Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 85°F
Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint 78°F
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to
determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity.
D. Heating Operation - When the unit is in heating mode, the ASC shall maintain the space
temperature at the active heating setpoint. Based on the ASC occupancy mode, the
active heating setpoint shall be one of the following:

Occupied Heating Setpoint 71°F
Unoccupied Heating Setpoint 60°F
Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint 67°F
The ASC shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to
determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs shall be controlled
based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity.
E. Transition from Unoccupied to Occupied - When the unit transitions from unoccupied
mode to the occupied mode, morning warm-up/cool down and random start routines shall
be activated.
5. Morning Warm-Up - When there is a call for heating and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more below the occupied heating setpoint a morning warm-
up sequence shall be activated. During warm-up the fan shall be turned on, the
outside air damper shall remain closed, and the heating capacity shall be
enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees of the
occupied heating setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
6. Morning Cool-down - When there is a call for cooling and the space temperature
is three degrees F or more over the occupied cooling setpoint a morning cool-
down sequence shall be activated. During morning cool-down the fan shall be
turned on, the outside air damper shall remain closed, and the cooling capacity
shall be enabled at full capacity. When the space temperature is within 2 degrees
of the occupied cooling setpoint the ASC shall operate in occupied mode.
7. Random Start - A randomly generated 3-32 second delay shall be activated

when electric power is applied to the ASC or after receiving a communicated

occupied command.
F. Fan Operation - The fan shall be configurable to operate continuously or cycling in all
occupied modes. During Unoccupied operation, the fan shall cycle between off and high
regardless of the fan configuration. The fan can be configured to run continuous at a
configured speed, cycling or off. When configured for cycling the ASC shall cycle on and
off based on the required capacity.
G. Hydronic Cooling Valve Control- If the unit is in the cooling mode the ASC shall cycle on
and off the cooling valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain space comfort. The cooling
valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the heating capacity is enabled.
H. Hydronic Heating Valve Control- If the unit is in the heating mode, the ASC shall cycle on
and off the heating valve using a PWM algorithm to maintain the space comfort. The
heating valve shall be closed if the fan is off or if the cooling capacity is enabled.
I. Generic Binary Output - The controller shall have a 24V output to be controlled from a
BAS.
J. Discharge Air Temperature - The ASC shall be capable of passing a discharge air
temperature to the BAS.
K. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall send the ASC the occupied space heating
and cooling temperature setpoints. The BAS shall also send the following commands:
Occupied
Unoccupied
Heat/Cool Mode
Priority Shutdown Commands
If communication with the BAS is lost, the ASC shall use predetermined default setpoints
and operate in the occupied mode.
L. SAFETIES AND ALARMS
8. Space Sensor Failure - If there is a fault with the operation of the zone sensor module, it
shall be feed back to the BAS. Zone sensor failure shall cause the unit to shutdown.
9. Fan Status - The ASC shall monitor the fan outputs to determine fan status.
10. Filter Status - A maintenance timer shall be incorporated into the ASC to signal a filter
change after a configurable number of fan run hours.
11. Reset - All diagnostics shall be capable of being reset through the zone sensor, service
tool, BAS, or by cycling power to the unit. Some diagnostics can only be reset by cycling
power or replacing the failed sensor.
12. Fan Off Delay - After heating has being controlled off, the ASC shall keep the fan
energized for an additional 30 seconds. The purpose of this action is to remove residual
heat from the heating source.
13. Condensate Overflow - When the condensate overflow switch trips, the ASC shall shut
the unit down, close all valves and close the outside air damper (if present).

14. The BAS system shall provide alarm messages for the following ASC diagnostics. The
ASC shall initiate a failsafe operational sequence based on the diagnostic condition.
Diagnostic Manual Reset required

Condensate Overflow Yes
Low Coil Temperature Detection No
Space Temperature Failure Yes
Entering Water Temp Failure No
Discharge Air Temperature No
Local Setpoint Failure No
Local Fan Mode Failure No
Maintenance Required Yes
M. TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Manual Output Test - The ASC shall be able to manually exercise all outputs for
troubleshooting. This shall be done directly from the controller board with no need of
additional tools.
5. Unit Identification - The ASC shall have the capability of flashing an LED upon receiving a
command from a service tool or BAS. The ASC shall also be able to send the unit
neuron ID and the program ID to a service tool or BAS for unit identification from the
controller board or space sensor with no need of additional tools.
6. Water Valve Override - This command from a service tool or BAS shall cause all valves
to stroke fully open for water balancing.
N. COMMUNICATIONS
2. Data Sharing - All ASC's shall be able to communicate in a peer-to-peer environment

over a twisted pair of communications wire.
Master/Slave - Master/Slave shall be used for operating multiple units from a single
space sensor. The Master unit shall share space temperature, setpoint, heat/cool
mode, occupancy, fan speed, entering water temperature, economizer, and capacity
control algorithm data over a twisted pair of communication wire to ensure seamless
cooperation between the units.
1.10 OUTSIDE AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall perform the following VAV Air System
(VAS) control strategies, appropriate to the given occupancy mode of the system, as
determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day schedule for the system.
1. The BAS will intitiate the Normal Start mode when it receives an Occupied command
from the schedule associated with the VAV Air System.
The VAS shall enable ventilation functions for the associated ERU and VAV
boxes.
The air handler shall modulate its airflow to maintain the duct static pressure
setpoint.

The ERU shall control to either its cooling occupied setpoints, as determined by
the Outside Air Temperature and BAS.
Each VAV box in the VAV Air System shall modulate its air damper to control to
its local occupied setpoints.
2. Occupied Mode
a) The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into
Off/Standby mode as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day
schedule for the system. The VAV boxes shall control to their
individual unoccupied temperature setpoints, and all ventilation
functions shall be disabled.
b) Each VAV box that is associated with the VAS shall control its local
reheat source to control to the occupied heating setpoint, and shall
modulate box airflow to maintain the space CO2 setpoint for the zone
being served by the VAV box.
3. Unoccupied Mode
a) The BAS shall place the members of the VAV Air System into
Off/Standby mode as determined by the user-adjustable time-of-day
schedule for the system.
b) After the VAV boxes have been commanded to unoccupied, the VAS
shall command the associated ERU to Unoccupied mode. Supply fan
shall be shut down, heating and cooling shall be disabled, outdoor air
damper shall be closed, and all ventilation functions shall be disabled.
1.11 ELECTRICAL ROOM EXHAUST FAN
A. The Electrical Room Exhaust Fan shall be thermostatically controlled by a wall mounted
thermostat and shall cycle on and off to control temperature setpoint.
1.12 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A. The unit shall come equipped with manufacturer provided microprocessor controls and
wall-mounted temperature sensor.
B. The unit shall be controlled by the wall-mounted sensor and shall cycle on and off to
control temperature setpoint.
1.13 UNIT HEATER
A. The unit heater shall come equipped with unit mounted thermostat and shall cycle on and
off to control temperature setpoint.


SECTION 15910 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual-volume dampers.
3. Fire dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
7. Flexible ducts.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
1. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors and
panels
2. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric damper
actuators.
5. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers
2. Manual-volume dampers
3. Fire dampers
4. Duct silencers
5. Duct-mounted access doors and panels
6. Flexible ducts
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loading,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each
field connection. Detail the following:
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and
panels.
DUCT ACCESSORIES 15910 - 1/7

C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise
power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and
weights.
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with
oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form;
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for
concealed ducts.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and
mounting flange.

C. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
D. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.3 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper
blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other

seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade

design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside air stream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064

inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where
indicated for attaching to walls; and flange-less frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
2. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper
assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper

of a multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-
(2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include
center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated
duct mounting.
2.4 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of air stream fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) or 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick as
indicated, and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.

In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized
steel blade connectors.
G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 or 212 degrees F (74 or 100 degrees C) rated as
indicated.
2.5 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance

characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall
have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when
tested according to ASTM E 84.
C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick,

solid sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, perforated sheet
metal for inner casing.
D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thickness for diameters listed below:
1. Up to 24 Inches (600 mm): 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).

2. 26 through 40 Inches (660 through 1000 mm): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
3. 42 through 52 Inches (1060 through 1300 mm): 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch (3-mm) diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet
metal.
F. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not
less than 5 percent compression.
G. Non-fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Moisture-proof non-fibrous material.
H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise
react to system pressure variations.
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in
quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both

directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power
levels, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air
and noise in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face
velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for air-tightness at 200 percent of associated fan static
pressure or 6-inch wg (1500-Pa) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and

Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades set
3/4 inch (19 mm) o/c; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o/c;
and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness,
and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision
panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam
latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
E. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying

with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches
(89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-)
thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) aluminum sheets. Select metal
compatible with connected ducts.
C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
poly-chloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26-oz./sq. yd. (880-g/sq. m).

2. Tensile Strength: 480-lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp, and 360-lbf/inch (63 N/mm)
in the filling.
D. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated
with a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and
ozone environment.
1. Minimum Weight: 26-oz./sq. yd. (880-g/sq. m).

2. Tensile Strength: 530-lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp, and 440-lbf/inch (77 N/mm)
in the filling.
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Un-insulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner
liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral
fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film.
4. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
D. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg (1500 Pa) positive, 1/2-inch wg (125 Pa) negative.
2.10 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch (6-mm), zinc-
plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and
square-head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten
band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install fire dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access
panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning,
inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
F. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing."

SECTION 15900 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.0 SECTION INCLUDES
.1 Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section

.2 Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section
.3 Products Not Furnished or Installed But Integrated with the Work of this Section
.4 Related Sections
.5 Description
.6 Approved Control System Contractor
.7 Quality Assurance
.8 Codes and Standards
.9 System Performance
.10 Submittals
.11 Warranty
.12 Ownership of Proprietary Material
1.1 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Division 15 - Hydronic Piping:

1. Control Valves
2. Flow Switches
3. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
4. Flow Meters
B. Division 15 - Refrigerant Piping:

1. Pressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
C. Division 15 - Ductwork Accessories:

1. Automatic Dampers
2. Airflow Stations
3. Terminal Unit Controls
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Division 15 - Refrigeration Equipment:

1. Refrigerant Leak Detectors
B. Division 15 - Rooftop Air Handling Equipment:

1. Thermostats
2. Sensors
3. Controllers
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 15900 - 1/31

1.3 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF
THIS SECTION
A. Division 15 – Heat Generation Equipment

1. Boilers
B. Division 15 – Refrigeration Equipment

1. Chiller controls
C. Division 15 – Rooftop Air Conditioning Equipment

1. Discharge Air Temperature Control
2. Economizer Control
3. Air volume control
D. Division 15 – Variable Frequency Drives

1. Pump controls
E. Division 16 – Utility Metering Equipment

1. Electrical meters
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements
are a part of these Specifications and shall be used in conjunction with this Section as a part of
the Contract Documents. Consult them for further instructions pertaining to this work. The
Contractor is bound by the provisions of Division 0 and Division 1.
B. The following sections constitute related work:

1. Division 1 - Commissioning
2. Division 15 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
3. Division 15 - Air Distribution Materials and Methods
4. Division 15 - Refrigeration Piping
5. Division 15 - Valves, Fittings, and Piping Accessories
6. Division 15 - Refrigeration Equipment
7. Division 15 - Air Handling Equipment
8. Division 15 - Air Distribution
9. Division 15 - Test and Balance
10. Division 16 - Basic Electrical Requirements
11. Division 16 - Basic Electrical Materials
12. Division 16 - General Wiring
13. Division 16 - Equipment and Motor Wiring
14. Division 16 - Uninterruptible Power Supply
15. Division 16 - Emergency Systems
16. Division 16 - Fire Alarm Systems
1.5 DESCRIPTION
A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the
specifications, and consist of a peer-to-peer network of digital building control panels and
operator workstation(s). The operator workstation shall be a personal computer (PC) including a
color monitor, mouse and keyboard. The PC shall provide users an interface with the system
though dynamic color graphics of building areas and systems.
B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for
control of systems defined for control on this project.

C. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the
control system data should be limited by operator password. An operator shall be able to log
onto any workstation of the control system and have access to all designated data.
D. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under
stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of
other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected
equipment.
E. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed
network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A modem or network communications card
shall be provided to for remote access to the system.
1.6 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Control System Contractors and Manufacturers:
Contractor
Manufacturer Name Product Line Contact
Name/Address
Trane Tracer Summit Trane
-
Johnson Controls Metasys Johnson Controls
-
Siemens Apogee Siemens
-
1. The above list of manufacturers applies to operator workstation software, controller

software, the custom application programming language, Building Controllers, Custom
Application Controllers, and Application Specific Controllers. All other products specified
herein (i.e., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the
above manufacturers.
A. System Installer Qualifications

1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System
Manufacturer of not less than three years.
2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes
on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed
training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request.
3. The installer shall have an office within [50] miles of the project site and provide [24-hour]
response in the event of a customer call.
1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and
ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with
the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes:
1. National Electric Code (NEC)
2. International Building Code (IBC)
3. International Mechanical Code (IMC)
4. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed.
5. [Optional] ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 (BACnet)
6. [Optional] ANSI/EIA/CEA-709.1 (LonTalk)

1.9 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following:
1. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with a minimum of [20] dynamic
points with current data displayed within [20] seconds of the request.
2. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within
[30] seconds.
3. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the
operator and the reaction by the device shall be [10] seconds. Analog objects shall start
to adjust within [10] seconds.
4. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over
the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or
workstation will be current, within the prior [60] seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when
it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed [45] seconds.
6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of
running as often as once every [5] seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for
selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
7. Performance. Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops
at a selectable frequency from at least once every [5] seconds. The controller shall scan
and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same
frequency.
8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within
[5] seconds of each other.
9. Reporting Accuracy. Table 1 lists minimum acceptable reporting accuracies for all
values reported by the specified system.
Table 1
Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy

Space Temperature ±0.5°C [±1°F]
Ducted Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]
Outside Air ±1.0°C [±2°F]
Water Temperature ±0.5°C [±1°F]
Delta-T ±0.15°C[±0.25°F]
Relative Humidity ±5% RH
Water Flow ±5% of full scale
Air Flow (terminal) ±10% of reading *Note 1
Air Flow (measuring stations) ±5% of reading
Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.]
Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa [±0.01 "W.G.]
Water Pressure ±2% of full scale *Note 2
Electrical Power ± 5% of reading *Note 3
Carbon Monoxide (CO) ± 5% of reading
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ± 50 PPM
Note 1: (10%-100% of scale) (cannot read accurately below 10%)

Note 2: for both absolute and differential pressure
Note 3: * not including utility supplied meters

1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on
all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project
until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and
specifications. [Six (6)] copies are required. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner
electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats.
B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall
not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion.
C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary
to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting
the system to be installed.
D. Submit the following within [60] days of contract award:
1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer

and model number.
2. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern
and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location.
3. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop,
manufacturer and model number.
4. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's
cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically
applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each
submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or
drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include:
a) Building Controllers
b) Custom Application Controllers
c) Application Specific Controllers
d) Operator Interface Computer(s)
e) Portable Operator Workstation
f) Auxiliary Control Devices
g) Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations,
addresses, and cabling
h) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations.
Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled
i) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names
j) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific
for the use of the Control System being provided for this project
k) Color prints of proposed graphics with a list of points for display

E. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (as-
built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and
include:
1. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop
drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall
also be provided.
2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists.
3. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the
submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual
shall include:
a) Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment,

and the control systems and service representative of each.
b) Operators Manual with procedures of operating the control systems including logging
on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer
control, and changing set points and other variables.
c) Programming Manual with a description of the programming language including syntax,
statement descriptions including algorithms and calculations used, point database
creation and modification, program creation and modification, and use of the editor.
d) Engineering, Installation and Maintenance Manual(s) that explains how to design and
install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventative maintenance and calibration
procedures; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
e) A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming
language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the
software and database shall also be provided.
f) One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the
project.
g) Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all
third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors.
h) Complete original issue media for all software provided including operating systems,
programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software.
i) Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems.
j) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including
a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions.
F. Training Materials: The Contractor shall provide a course outline and training material for all
training classes at least six weeks prior to the first class. The Owner reserves the right to modify
any or all of the training course outline and training materials. Review and approval by Owner
and Engineer shall be completed at least 3 weeks prior to first class.

1.11 WARRANTY
A. Warrant all work as follows:
1. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a
period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control
System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no
charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the
Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours.
2. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating
satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that
the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the
terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of
warranty.
3. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and
firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty
period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation
of such changes.
4. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource
that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips,
upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules.
1.12 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
A. All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These
items include but are not limited to:
1. Project graphic images
2. Record drawings
3. Project database
4. Project-specific application programming code
5. All documentation

PART 2: PRODUCTS
.1 Materials
.2 Communication
.3 Operator Interface
.4 Application and Control Software
.5 Building Controllers
.6 Custom Application Controllers
.7 Application Specific Controllers
.8 Input/Output Interface
.9 Auxiliary Control Devices
.10 Radio Frequency (RF) Wireless Room Temperature Sensing System
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be
applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. The installation shall not be used as a
test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s representative in writing.
Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract.
2.2 COMMUNICATION
A. This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed BACnet for communications
between Building Controllers and PC Workstations. LonTalk sub-networks shall be used for
communications between Building Controllers, Custom Application Controllers and Application
Specific Controllers.
B. The controls Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and
routers necessary for the DDC system internetwork.
C. All Building Controllers shall have a communications port for connections with the operator
interfaces. This may be either a network interface node for connection to the Ethernet network or
an RS-232 port for Point to Point connection.
D. Remote operator interface via a 56K baud modem shall allow for communication with any and all
controllers on this network as described in the following paragraph.
E. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value
passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows:
1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one building controller on the

internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other building controllers as if that
interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information,
reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all building controllers shall be
available for viewing and editing from any one building controller on the internetwork.
2. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one
building controller shall be readable by any other building controller on the internetwork.
This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a
point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An
operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform
internetwork value passing.
F. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily.

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Operator Interface. Furnish [1] PC based workstations as shown on the system drawings. Each
workstation shall be able to access all information in the system. Workstations shall reside on
the same high-speed network as the building controllers, and also be able to dial into the system.
B. Workstation information access shall use the BACnet Protocol. Communication shall use the
ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Remote communications shall use the
BACnet Point to Point Physical/Data Link Layer Protocol.
C. Hardware. Each operator workstation shall consist of the following:
1. Personal Computer. Furnish IBM-compatible PCs to be used as DDC system

workstation. The CPU shall be a minimum of an Intel Pentium 4 or AMD Athlon 64
processor and operate at a minimum 2.2 GHz. Include a minimum 512 Megabytes of
RAM, 48X CD ROM drive, 80 Gigabyte hard disk, and two-button mouse. Furnish all
required serial, parallel, and network communication ports, and all cables for proper
system operation. The PC shall include a minimum 17", color monitor with 1024 x 768
screen resolution.
2. Modems. Furnish auto-dial telephone modems and associated cables as required for
communication to remote buildings, and workstations. The modem shall be capable of
transmitting at up to 56K baud, and communicate over voice-grade telephone lines.
D. System Software
1. Operating System. Furnish a commercially available, concurrent multi-tasking operating

system. Acceptable operating systems are Microsoft Windows XP Professional.
2. System Graphics. The Operator Workstation software shall be graphically oriented. The
system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and
monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between
graphic displays and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen.
The system graphics shall be able to be modified while the system is on line. An
operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic
points on a graphic. Dynamic points shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text,
static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation of
equipment. Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a sequence of images
reflecting the position of analog outputs, such as valve or damper positions (V17).
Graphics shall be capable of launching other PC applications.
3. Custom Graphics. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of commonly
available graphics packages such as Corel Paint Shop Pro. The graphics generation
package shall create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats
such as BMP, GIF and JPEG.
4. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment such as
chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators, including 2-
dimensional and 3-dimensional graphic depictions. The library shall include a minimum of
300 such files available for use by the Owner. This library shall also include standard
graphical representations of equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping,
dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the
graphics generation package program.
5. Engineering Units. Allow for selection of the desired engineering units (i.e. Inch pound or
SI) in the system. Unit selection shall be able to be customized by locality to select the
desired units for each measurement. Engineering units on this project shall be Inch
Pound.
E. System Applications. Each workstation shall provide operator interface and off-line storage of
system information. Provide the following applications at each workstation.
1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard
disk a copy of the current database of each building controller. This database shall be
updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this
data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database
loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall
automatically restore the database for that panel.
2. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password
clearance shall be able to archive the database from any system panel and store on
magnetic media. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually
initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system.
3. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a graphical method of
configuring the system. The user with proper security shall be able to add new devices,
and assign modems to devices. This shall allow for future system changes or additions.
4. On-Line Help and Training. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the
operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all
system functions and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional
help shall be available through the use of hypertext links onscreen.
5. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and
password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable
for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set security levels for
all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’s
access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and
object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or
mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All
system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
6. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all
workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and
controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
7. Alarm Notification. Alarm messages shall use full language, easily recognized
descriptors for alarm. System shall allow the user to have up to 10 popup windows
appear for incoming alarms. The popup dialog shall allow the user to silence and
acknowledge alarms, view an expanded message or graphic, and add and save
comments for the alarm.
8. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of
normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits,
states, and reactions for each object in the system.
9. Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what actions, if any, are to be
taken, by object, during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, start a custom
control program, displaying messages, dialing out to remote workstations, paging or text
message to a cell phone, forwarding to an e-mail address, providing audible annunciation
or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by
workstation and time of day. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within
an operator specified time period shall be re-routed to an alternate operator specified
alarm receipt device. For text messaging, the system shall support TAP protocol
including parities 7-E-1 and 8-n-1, such that if the system fails to dial out/connect with
one parity it will automatically try the other one.
10. Alarm and Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and
events from any location in the system. The operator shall be able to sort and filter
alarms from events. Alarms shall be sorted in up to 5 color-coded categories based on
Owner preference (V17). Include an alarm count summary for each alarm category on
the system toolbar. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and
clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be archived to the hard
disk on the workstation. Provide a comment field in the event log that allows a user to
add specific comments associated with any alarm.
11. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a trend log for any data in the system.
This definition shall include interval, start-time, and stop-time. Trend intervals of 30
seconds,1, 5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, once
a week, and once a month shall be selectable. Each trend shall accommodate up to 64
system objects. The system operator shall be able to determine how many samples are
stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller
panel and be archived on the workstation hard disk. Trend data shall be able to be
viewed and printed from the operator interface software. Trends must be viewable in a
text-based format or graphically. Trends shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII
format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages.
12. Dynamic Graphical Trending. The system shall have the ability to save the data collected
by a trend object and display that collected data in a graphical chart. Trend viewing
capabilities shall include the ability to show up to 10 points on a chart, to include live
and/or historical data. Each data point trend line shall be an individual color, and include
on-graph icons that represent associated events/alarms, manual overrides, and
automated changes that have occurred over the time frame represented on the chart.
Navigation and viewing functions shall include scrolling and zooming of x and y axes, and
a trace display of the associated time stamp, and values for any selected point along the
x-axis. Trend data shall be able to be stored for up to 10 years on the PC workstation.
13. Object and Property Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view, and
edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses
shall be available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs.
14. Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building controllers and workstations
shall be synchronized on command of an operator. The system shall also be able to
automatically synchronize all system clocks; daily from any operator designated device in
the system. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable.
15. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select,
modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format,
interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard disk for historical reporting.
Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects.
Reports and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily
accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word
processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. The operator
shall be able to designate reports that shall be printed or stored to disk at selectable
intervals. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user.
a) Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to define any system
data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time
and date stamped and shall contain a report title.
b) Standard Reports. The following standard system reports shall be provided for
this project. These reports shall be readily customized to the project by the
owner.
i. Electrical Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical
consumption and peak electrical demand for each building meter. Provide an
annual (12 month) summary report showing the monthly electrical consumption
and peak demand for each meter.
ii. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current
alarms.
iii. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides
in effect.
iv. Schedule Report: Provide a summary of all schedules including Holiday and
Exception schedules.
v. Commissioning Report: Provide a one time report that lists all equipment with the
unit configuration and present operation.

vi. Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum,
maximum and average outdoor air temperature and the number of heating and
cooling degree days for each day. Provide an annual (12 month) report showing
the minimum, maximum and average outdoor air temperature for the month and
the number of heating and cooling degree days for the month.
F. Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstation shall support dedicated screens for
editing of all system applications. Provide editors for each application at the PC workstation. The
applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate controller panels.
1. Controller. Provide a full screen editor for each type custom application, and application
specific controller that shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration,
name, control parameters, and system set-points.
2. Scheduling. An editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each
workstation. Provide a monthly calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and
holidays shall be shown clearly on the calendar. Provide a method for allowing several
related objects to follow a schedule. An advance and delay time for each object shall be
adjustable from this master schedule. An operator shall be able to modify the schedule.
Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and/or dates.
3. Manual Control and Override. Provide a means of manually controlling analog and binary
output points. Control overrides shall be performed through a simple, graphical on-off-
auto editor for binary points, and auto-manual selector for analog control. Provide a icon
indicator of override status when a point, unit controller or application has been
overridden manually.
4. Air System Equipment Coordination. Provide editor screens with monitoring and control
functions that group together and coordinates the operation of air handling equipment
and associated VAV boxes as specified in the sequence of operations. For each air
system, the editor pages shall include:
a) System mode of the air handling system

b) Listing and assignment of the associated air handler and VAV boxes
c) AHU supply air cooling and heating setpoints
d) AHU minimum, maximum and nominal static pressure setpoints
e) VAV box minimum and maximum flow, and drive open and close overrides
5. Chiller System. A chiller plant control application shall be configured using a full screen
editor and shall provide operating status for the system. The display shall include:
a) System mode of the chiller plant

b) Chiller enable/disable status
c) System supply water setpoint
d) System supply and return water temperature
e) System Chilled water pump status
f) System Chilled water flow
g) Bypass pipe flow rate (if applicable)
h) Messages as to when an additional chiller modules will be added or removed
from operational sequence
i) Chiller or system failure information
j) Run Status
k) Override capabilities to force an added chiller, subtract a chiller, or change of
sequence.
l) Control to remove a chiller from a sequence temporarily for service purposes.
G. Custom Application Programming. Provide the tools to create, modify, and debug custom
application programming. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom
programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be
fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded.
2.4 APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE
A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software
applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at
the operator workstation.
B. System Security
1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names.
2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions
as assigned by the system manager.
3. User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded.
4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off
following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable.
C. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system.
Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and
night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to [10] events. When a group of
objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each
member. Each schedule shall consist of the following:
1. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week.
2. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the
year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard
schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance.
Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the
standard schedule for that day of the week.
3. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or
holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will
be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday
period.
4. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start
algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the
equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified
occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates
for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide
the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an
early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator
determined time limit.
D. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to transmit alarms to multiple
associated alarm receivers. Receivers shall include PC Workstations, email addresses, cell
phones and alphanumeric pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm
location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall
be able to remotely access and operate the system utilizing the system Ethernet
communications, or dial up communications via modem, in the same format and method used on
site as described under the Operator Interface section of this specification.
E. Demand Limiting. The demand limiting program shall monitor building power consumption from
signals generated by a pulse generator (provided by others) mounted at the building power
meter, or from a watt transducer or current transformer attached to the building feeder lines.
1. The demand limiting program shall be based on a predictive sliding window algorithm.
The sliding window duration and sampling interval shall be set equal to that of the local
Electrical Utility.

2. Control system shall be capable of demand limiting by resetting HVAC system setpoints
to reduce load while maintaining a widened band of comfort control in the space.
3. Input capability shall also be provided for an end-of-billing period indication.
F. Maintenance Management. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate
maintenance messages based upon user designated run time, starts, and/or calendar date limits.
G. Chiller Sequencing. Provide applications software to properly sequence the chiller plant to
minimize energy use. This application shall perform the following functions:
1. The chiller plant control application shall have the ability to control up to 25 chillers as
detailed in the sequence of operations.
2. This application shall be able to control both constant and variable flow systems as well
as parallel, series and decoupled piping configurations.
3. The chiller plant control application shall be able to control multiple chiller plants per site.
4. Diagnostics/Protection - The chiller plant application program shall be able to integrate
individual chiller diagnostics into control action decisions.
5. Event Processing - All chiller plant control and status events shall be recorded, at the
operator’s selection, in the building management system event log to facilitate
troubleshooting.
6. Alarm Indications - The chiller plant control status screens shall display chiller plant and
individual chiller alarm messages.
7. Add/Subtract actions - The status screens shall provide information on when the next
chiller add or subtract action will occur. The operator shall have the ability to manually
force a chiller addition or a chiller subtraction.
H. PID Control. A PID (proportional-integral-derivative) algorithm with direct or reverse action and
anti-wind-up shall be supplied. The algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value used to
position an output or stage a series of outputs. The controlled variable, set-point, and PID gains
shall be user-selectable. The set-point shall optionally be chosen to be a reset schedule.
I. Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control

when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, workstation, or the operator display. The
amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the workstation.
J. Staggered Start. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously
restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of equipment) is
started, along with the time delay between starts shall be user-selectable.
K. System Calculations. Provide software to allow instantaneous power (e.g. KW), flow rates (e.g.
L/s [GPM]) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data. Provide an algorithm that
calculates a sliding-window KW demand value. Provide an algorithm that calculates energy
usage and weather data (heating and cooling degree days). These items shall all be available for
daily, previous day, monthly and the previous month.
L. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. This feature
shall allow minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.
2.5 BUILDING CONTROLLERS
A. General. Provide Building Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this
division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.
1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent,
standalone, microprocessor based Building Controllers to manage the global strategies
described in System software section.
2. The Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,
database, and programming requirements.
3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output
communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point
information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
4. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.
5. Data shall be shared between networked Building Controllers.
6. The Building Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for
communication to unit controllers.
7. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory
circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:
a) Assume a predetermined failure mode.

b) Generate an alarm notification.
c) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the
failure.
d) Automatically reset the Building Controller to return to a normal operating mode.
A. Communications. Each Building Controller shall reside on a BACnet internetwork using the ISO
8802-3 (Ethernet) Physical/Data Link layer protocol. Each Building Controller shall also perform
routing to a network of Custom Application and Application Specific Controllers. Each Building
Controller shall perform communications to a network of Custom Application and Application
Specific Controllers using LonTalk FTT-10 and LonMark profiles.
B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for
operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].
C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. The Building
Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the
controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal strips or to a
termination card connected by a ribbon cable. The primary logic board shall be removable
without disconnecting field wiring.
D. Memory. The Building Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the
event of a power loss for at least 72 hours.
E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage
2.6 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS
A. General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section
1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.
1. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database,
and programming requirements.
2. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.
3. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output
communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point
information and allow central monitoring and alarms.
4. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If
an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure
mode, and generate an alarm notification.

B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type enclosures, and
shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].
2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type
waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 70 C [-40 F to 158 F].
C. A local operator interface shall be provided at building locations where specified in the sequence
of operations or point list. The operator interface shall be provided for interrogating and editing
data. A system security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad
and display.
D. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low
voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed
and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring.
E. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a
power loss for at least 72 hours.
F. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
2.7 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which
through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment.
They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the
equipment they are designed to serve.
1. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control
functions without being connected to the network.
2. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.
B. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controller used in conditioned ambient spaces shall be mounted in NEMA 1 type rated
enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by building activity (such as
above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum-rated enclosures and non-enclosed
wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 0 C
to 50 C [32 F to 120 F].
2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within NEMA 4 type
waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 65 C [-40 F to 150 F].
C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections
shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable.
D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming
information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days.
E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%.

F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power
consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type.
G. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10
transceivers. All communications shall follow LonMark profiles. ASCs which do not have a
profile that applies must comply with LonMark standards, utilize SNVTs for all listed points, and
be provided with a XIF file for self-documentation.
2.8 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE
A. Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Building, Custom, or Application
Specific Controllers.
B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself,
another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall
be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause
no damage to the controller.
C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs
shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control
devices.
D. Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of Binary
Input points, and also accept up to 3 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be
protected against effects of contact bounce and noise.
E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or
resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field
configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
F. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation. Terminal unit and zone control applications may
use 2 outputs for drive-open, drive-close (tri-state) modulating control.
G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall
provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the output
device.
2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. Motorized dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as follows:
1. Damper frames shall be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal or 1/8" extruded aluminum
with reinforced corner bracing.
2. Damper blades shall not exceed 8" in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be suitable for
medium velocity performance (2,000 fpm). Blades shall be not less than 16 gauge.
3. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for application.
4. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with compressible
seals. Side seals shall be compressible stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for
a maximum leakage rate of 6 CFM per square foot at 4" w.c. differential pressure.
5. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.
6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60". Provide a minimum of one
damper actuator per section.
B. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade types as scheduled on drawings.

C. Electric damper/valve actuators.
1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent
damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.
2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return
mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.
3. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise
spring return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.
4. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a
2-10 VDC or 4-20 ma operating range.
5. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow
manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return
actuators with more than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this
purpose.
6. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and
shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make
electrical connections.
7. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.
8. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's
rated torque.
D. Control Valves
1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or modulating service
as scheduled or shown.
2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to
provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:
a) Water Valves:
i. Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.
ii. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow
or 100% of total system (pump) head.
b) Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
3. Water Valves:
a) Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for
design conditions and service shown, with equal percentage ports for modulating
service.
b) Sizing Criteria:
i. Two-position service: Line size.
ii. Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice the pressure
drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the pressure difference between
supply and return mains, or 5 psi, whichever is greater.
iii. Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to twice the pressure drop
through the coil exchanger (load), 5 psi maximum.
iv. Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 250,
spring loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service. Two-way
valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball.
v. 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and
Teflon packing.

c) Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows:
i. Heating coils in air handlers - normally open.
ii. Chilled water control valves - normally closed.
iii. Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation.
d) Zone valves shall be sized to meet the control application and they shall maintain
their last position in the event of a power failure.
4. Steam Valves:
a) Body and trim materials shall be per manufacturer's recommendations for design
conditions and service. Linear ports for modulating service.
b) Sizing Criteria:
i. Two-position service: pressure drop 10% to 20% of inlet psig.
ii. Modulating service 15 psig or less: pressure drop 80% of inlet psig.
iii. Modulating service 16 to 50 psig: pressure drop 50% of inlet psig.
iv. Modulating service over 50 psig: pressure drop as scheduled on plans.
E. Binary Temperature Devices
1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be 24 V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type,

with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-
30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.
2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats shall be bimetal-actuated, open-contact type or
bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or equivalent solid-state type, with heat
anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating, concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C
(55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F) maximum differential, and vented cover.
3. Low-Limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor pressure type. Element shall be
at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section
and shall respond to lowest sensed temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual
reset only.
F. Temperature Sensors
1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor.

2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a
minimum of 1.5m [5 feet] in length.
3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure
rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed.
4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display,
and/or communication port as shown on the drawings.
5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement.
Differential accuracy shall be within 0.1 C [0.2 F].
G. Humidity Sensors
1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 80% with accuracy of ±5%
R.H.
2. Duct sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20% to 95% R.H. It shall be
suitable for ambient conditions of -40 C to 75 C [-40 F to 170 F].
4. Humidity sensor's drift shall not exceed 1% of full scale per year.

H. Static Pressure Sensors
1. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable.
2. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus
50% greater than calibrated span without damage.
3. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure
of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting
brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service.
4. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction,
proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure
shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting
brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service.
I. Low Limit Thermostats
1. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft]
minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one
foot section.
2. Low limit shall be manual reset only.
J. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors
1. Carbon Dioxide sensors shall measure CO2 in PPM in a range of 0-2000 ppm. Accuracy
shall be +/- 3% of reading with stability within 5% over 5 years. Sensors shall be duct or
space mounted as indicated in the sequence of operation.
K. Flow Switches
1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.

2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot
duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure
unless otherwise specified:
3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-
acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range and
differential suitable for intended application, or as specified.
4. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.
L. Relays
1. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating,
configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application.
2. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay.
Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans.
Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide NEMA 1
Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel.
M. Transformers and Power Supplies
1. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished

with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service.
2. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current
output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 3.0 mV maximum Peak-
to-Peak. Regulation shall be 0.10% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond
response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection.
3. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C.
4. Unit shall be UL recognized.
N. Current Switches
1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current.
The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output
requirements of the DDC system.
O. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 Type construction with hinged
door,and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies.
2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with
color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped.
Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually
identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control
terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings.
3. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to
each local panel.
2.10 RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM
A. General
1. Provide a wireless zone temperature sensing system for use in Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems. The wireless system shall work with any controller that
accepts a 10k thermistor temperature input.
2. The ambient operating temperature range for the RF wireless transmitter shall be 32 to
122°F (0 to 50°C). The ambient operating temperature range for the RF receiver shall be
-40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C). The ambient storage temperature range for the RF wireless
transmitter and the RF receiver shall be -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).C. The ambient
operating and storage humidity range shall be 5 to 95% non-condensing.
B. Approved Manufacturers
1. Trane Model WZS
2. Siemens Model WRTS
3. Approved Equal
C. Components
1. A RF wireless zone temperature, set point and timed override transmitter.
2. A RF receiver that connects directly to the zone controller.
D. Accuracy
1. Zone temperature sensing accuracy shall be +/- 0.5F (+/- 0.28C).
2. Temperature sensing and transmission shall occur at least once each 30 seconds under
conditions of rapid space temperature change or if the sensor is programmed with a fixed
transmission period. Maximum time between transmissions shall be 15 minutes.
E. Communication
1. RF Type: Sensor system shall use spread spectrum technology.
2. Operating range shall be a minimum of 200 feet; open range shall be 2,500 ft (762 m) with
less than 2% packet error rate.
3. Sensor shall include a readily visual on-sensor signal strength meter. Acceptable metering
shall be a minimum of three-level RF signal strength Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
4. Two-way communications shall be used between the zone sensor and controller receiver to
allow channel switching based on varying channel traffic and verification of signal strength at
the zone sensor.
5. One-to-one topology with zone/receiver address set by physical switches or held in non-
volatile memory to ensure operating through system voltage disturbances.
F. Power Requirements
1. Zone Sensor battery life shall provide at least 5 years life under normal operating conditions
and must be readily available for replacement through retail stores.
2. Zone sensor shall include a readily visual indication of battery condition. The battery
indication lights shall flash periodically for a minimum of 5 days to indicate the need for
battery replacement prior to failure. No site survey tools shall be required.
3. Sensor system RF receiver shall operate on 24VAC power, provided by the associated unit
controller transformer.
G. Installation and Configuration Tools
1. A set of all site survey and installation tools as well as software shall be provided to the
contractor use for system installation and commissioning for the duration of the warranty
period.
2. A set of all site survey and installation tools as well as software shall be provided to the
owner for permanent possession for ongoing system maintenance and trouble shooting.

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.0 SECTION INCLUDES:
.1 Examination
.2 Protection
.3 General Workmanship
.4 Field Quality Control
.5 Wiring
.6 Fiber Optic Cable
.7 Installation of Sensors
.8 Flow Switch Installation
.9 Actuators
.10 Warning Labels
.11 Identification of Hardware and Wiring
.12 Controllers
.13 Programming
.14 Cleaning
.15 Training
.16 Acceptance
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and
any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for
resolution before rough-in work is started.
B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any dis-
crepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution
before rough-in work is started.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and
shall be liable for all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested,
and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall
carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The
Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and
construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and
parallel to walls) wherever possible.
B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the
NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment
enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for
unobstructed access for service.
D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.

E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and
standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to
local codes and standard practices.
A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local,
state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section.
B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of
workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to building lines and
properly supported.
C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction
over the work.
3.5 WIRING
A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes and
Division 16 of these specifications. Where the requirements of this section differ with those in
Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.
B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air
plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:
C. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be
sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)
D. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed
specifically for that purpose.
E. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing
high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two
(e.g. relays and transformers).
F. Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular
to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundled
cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more
often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result.
G. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to
wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within
enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to
devices and terminals.
H. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available,
the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers.
I. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be
made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device.
J. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at
all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes.
K. Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System
Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC.

L. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also
be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be
located within Class 1 starter enclosures.
M. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling.
Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring.
N. Adhere to Division 16 requirements for installation of raceway.
O. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated
(as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.
P. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and
shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall
not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible
metal conduits shall be used.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates.
C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by
the wall framing.
D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air
transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.
E. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow.
F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type.
Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend
shall be supported with a capillary clip.
G. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature
sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells.
H. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in building walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within
mechanical and service rooms.
I. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall complete with sun shield at designated
location.

3.7 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION
A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.
B. Install and adjust flow switch in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Assure correct flow direction and alignment.
D. Mount in horizontal piping - flow switch on top of the pipe.
3.8 ACTUATORS
A. Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.
1. To compress seals when spring return actuators are used on normally closed dampers,
power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the damper, and then
tighten the linkage.
2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates
damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.
3. Valves - Actuators shall be mounted on valves with adapters approved by the actuator
manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.9 WARNING LABELS
A. Affix labels on each starter and equipment automatically controlled through the DDC System.
Warning label shall indicate the following:
CAUTION
This equipment is operating under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning.
Switch disconnect to “Off” position before servicing.
B. Affix labels to motor starters and control panels that are connected to multiple power sources
utilizing separate disconnects. Labels shall indicate the following:
CAUTION
This equipment is fed from more than one power source with separate disconnects.
Disconnect all power sources before servicing.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING
A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be labeled at each end
within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.
B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item
served.
C. Identify control panels with minimum 1-cm (1/2”) letters on nameplates.
D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record
documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of the component does
not remove the label.
3.11 CONTROLLERS
A. Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. A custom application
controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system
are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or
space temperature are exempt from this requirement.
B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide a minimum
of 10% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each location. If input points are not
universal, 10% of each type is required. If outputs are not universal, 10% of each type is
required. A minimum of one spare is required for each type of point used.
1. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field wiring, points
database definition, and custom software. No additional Controller boards or point
modules shall be required to implement use of these spare points.
3.12 PROGRAMMING
A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There
shall be a minimum of 25% of available memory free for future use.
B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface
without the use of a written point index.
C. Software Programming
1. Provide programming for the system as written in the specifications and adhere to the
sequence strategies provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation
of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control
System Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment
statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program.
The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations.

D. Operators' Interface
1. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in
the building. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and
Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified
in the points list.
2. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up,
and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this
section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database,
and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation
of the operator interface.
3. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the
operator interface. Test duration shall be a minimum of 16 hours on-site. Tests shall be
made in the presence of the Owner or Owner's representative.
E. Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and
control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site
with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system
requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits
acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation.
3.13 CLEANING
A. This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor
shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have
been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction
Manager or General Contractor.
B. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment,
etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc.
C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint
damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the
adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with
new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.

3.14 TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum of 2 classroom training sessions, 4 hours each, throughout the contract
period for personnel designated by the Owner. Computer-based audio-visual training may be
substituted for up to 8 hours of hands on training.
B. Train the designated staff of Owner's representative and Owner to enable them to proficiently
operate the system; create, modify and delete programming; add, remove and modify physical
points for the system, and perform routine diagnostic and troubleshooting procedures.
C. Additional training shall be available in courses designed to meet objectives as divided into three
logical groupings; participants may attend one or more of these, depending on the level of
knowledge required:
1. Day-to-day Operators
2. Advanced Operators
3. System Managers/Administrators
D. Provide course outline and materials as per Part 1 of this Section. The instructor(s) shall provide
one copy of training material per student.
E. The instructor(s) shall be factory-trained instructors experienced in presenting this material.
F. Classroom training shall be done using a network of working controllers representative of the
installed hardware or at the customer’s site.
G. This training shall be made available in addition to the interactive audio-visual tutorial, provided
with the system.
3.15 ACCEPTANCE
A. The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all
tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer
and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the
Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the
Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty.

ANNEX 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO OTHER CONTRACTORS
CONTROL VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Valve submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, size, and piping configuration to ensure
compatibility with pipe design.
B. All control valves shall be installed so that the stem position is not more than 60 degrees from the
vertical up position.
C. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Control valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that
actuators may be serviced and removed without interference from structure or other pipes and/or
equipment.
E. Isolation valves shall be installed such that control valve body may be serviced without draining
the supply/return side piping system. {Note to designer: this must also be shown.} Unions shall
be installed at all connections to screwed type control valves.
F. Provide tags for all control valves indicating service and number. Tags shall be brass, 1-1/2" in
diameter, with 1/4" high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook. Match identification num-
bers as shown on approved controls shop drawings.
CONTROL DAMPER INSTALLATION
A. Damper submittals shall be coordinated for type, quantity, and size to ensure compatibility with
sheet metal design.
B. Duct openings shall be free of any obstruction or irregularities that might interfere with blade or
linkage rotation or actuator mounting. Duct openings shall measure 1/4" larger than damper
dimensions and shall be square, straight, and level.
C. Individual damper sections, as well as entire multiple section assemblies, must be completely
square and free from racking, twisting, or bending. Measure diagonally from upper corners to
opposite lower corners of each damper section. Both dimensions must be equal ±1/8".
D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for field installation of control dampers. Unless specifically
designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted with blade axis horizontal.
E. Install extended shaft or jackshaft per manufacturer's instructions. (Typically, a sticker on the
damper face shows recommended extended shaft location. Attach shaft on labeled side of
damper to that blade.)
F. Damper blades, axles, and linkage must operate without binding. Before system operation, cycle
damper after installation to assure proper operation. On multiple section assemblies, all sections
must open and close simultaneously.
G. Provide a visible and accessible indication of damper position on the drive shaft end.
H. Support duct-work in area of damper when required to prevent sagging due to damper weight.
I. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and duct or opening to
prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.

DUCT SMOKE DETECTION
A. Provide complete submittal data to controls system contractor for coordination of duct smoke
detector interface to HVAC systems. This contractor shall provide a dry-contact alarm output in
the same room as the HVAC equipment to be controlled.
END OF SECTION -

SECTION 15899 – VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The Contractor shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Variable frequency drive units
A. All components to be UL listed or labeled.
B. All wiring to conform to the NEC.
C. All enclosures to be NEMA rated.
D. Consult VFD manufacturer on outdoor installations.
E. All units shall conform to Part 15 of the FCC regulations on RFI/EMI emissions.
F. The VFD and any associated hardware are to be "run in" at rated ambient temperature and rated
load on variable speeds at the manufacturers plant prior to shipment to minimize field start-up
problems.
G. After installation the manufacturer's representative of the equipment provided in this section shall
certify in writing to the Owner's representative that the equipment has been assembled and
installed within the guidelines of the manufacturer's written installation instructions and that its
performance meets or exceeds the operating characteristics specified and/or scheduled and that its
emissions are within the limits set by the aforementioned regulations.
H. A Field Service Engineer is to be provided for start up assistance for the drive and its related motor.
Start up assistance shall consist of verifying factory performance standards for the drive and aiding
in establishing reference speed points for control of the motor.
I. Variable frequency drive units shall comply with IEEE 519-1992 for requirements for harmonic
control in electrical power systems.
J. Electronic harmonic analysis to be performed by manufacturer prior to installation.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS 15899 - 1/3

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010: Mechanical General
Provisions.
B. Submit complete performance and dimensional data along with construction details and wiring
diagrams.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Variable Frequency Drive Units:
1. Trane
2. Yaskawa
3. Magnetek
4. Square D
2.2 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS (VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES)
A. The VFD’s are to be selected for operation with the motors provided for this project. The drive
system shall provide an input power factor of 95% throughout the entire speed range. The VFD
shall not contribute 5th or 7th harmonic current to the power distribution system or contain the
appropriate filter network to limit those harmonics to not more than 5% of the theoretical value.
B. The VFD’s shall be as per UL 508C (Component listing are not sufficient) pulse width modulating
type for maximum reliability and provide inherent short circuit protection. The VFD shall be capable
of withstanding an output phase to phase, phase to ground short circuit and VFD semi-conductor
short circuit, without causing a failure to the VFD. The drive system shall provide a near unity
power factor. It is to provide operation of the fan and pump motors as scheduled. Units shall be
mounted in a NEMA I enclosure or better. The following equipment and features are to be
incorporated:
1. Fully range minimum and maximum speed adjustment with ability to automatically select
speeds.
2. Adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration, each separately adjustable.
3. Field adjustable or automatic current limit.
4. Inherent short circuit protection.
5. All units shall operate from 4-20 MA or 0-10VAC Signal in automatic mode.
6. Under voltage and over voltage protection.
7. Over temperature protection.
8. Be rated to provide 100% of rated current, minimum 110% breakaway current.
9. The VFD is to be rated for an input line voltage variation of +10% and -5%.
10. The VFD shall include a line reactor.

11. The VFD is to include a door interlocked disconnect switch or circuit breaker. If integral
disconnect is not supplied, the manufacturer shall furnish a separate disconnect with the VFD.
12. The following are to be included in the VFD cabinet:
a. Filtered ventilation louvers or heat sinks.
b. Door mounted analog or digital speed indicator calibrated 0-100%.
c. Power on light.
d. Fault light.
e. Fault reset button.
f. Manual speed potentiometer for operation in the manual mode.
g. Manual-off-automatic switch.
h. Manually switched bypass circuit to bypass power feed around the VFD.
C. Unit to include automatic restart circuitry in the event of a power outage, with no more than a 60
second delay after power is reapplied. Unit shall try at least three re-starts before shut down and
alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. The contractor shall assume the responsibility for coordinating the purchased equipment with the
motor served and with the automatic temperature control system, paying specific attention to the
signal sent and received, the ground source and the required speed range.
C. Start up shall be by a factory trained field service engineer representing the manufacturer of the
equipment purchased. Start up shall be done in the presence of the controls contractor and the
engineer.
D. Variable frequency drives shall be supplied by Division 15 and installed and wired by Division 16.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15891- METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for
heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to
plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct
penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors for
access to concealed ducts.
3. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents
connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation.
5. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
6. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
7. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for automatic volume-
control dampers and operators.
8. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final
adjusting of manual-volume dampers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in

ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq.
ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as
Btu or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
METAL DUCTWORK 15891 - 1/10

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration
isolation, seismic restraints, and duct attachment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required for access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform

welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-
Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum," for
aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct
joint and seam welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,"
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure
classifications higher than 2-inch wg (500 Pa). Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:
1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct
system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

a. Five transverse joints.

b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.
3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup

construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum
acceptable results.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or

bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color,
expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component
materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for
concealed ducts.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."

B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to air stream to prevent erosion of
glass fibers.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 degrees F (0.037 at 24 degrees C)

mean temperature.
2. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-

developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
4. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile, dead-load test

perpendicular to duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) into air stream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of
adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric
strips and mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with
tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concrete

or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-
aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or

galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel
rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal
thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and
intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and

rigidity class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, and discoloration.
B. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

following:
1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch-wg (750 Pa).

2. Return Ducts: 2-inch-wg (500 Pa) negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch-wg (500 Pa) negative pressure.
C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480
mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq.
m) of un-braced panel area, unless ducts are lined.
2.6 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of
round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

following:
1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg (750 Pa) positive pressure..

2. Return Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa) negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa) negative or positive pressure.
C. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
D. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-
-Metal and Flexible."
E. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with an outer shell
and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions.
Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and
insulation, and in metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.
3. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise
indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-
wall duct or un-insulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct
diameter to inner liner diameter.
4. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal
having 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23
percent. Use the following sheet metal thickness and seam construction:
a. Ducts 3 to 8 Inches (75 to 200 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) with
standard spiral seam construction.
b. Ducts 9 to 42 Inches (225 to 1070 mm) in Diameter: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm)
with single-rib spiral seam construction.
c. Ducts 44 to 60 Inches (1120 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.022 inch (0.55 mm)
with single-rib spiral seam construction.
5. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain

insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
2.7 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thickness specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend

radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa):
a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm).
b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches (685 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa):
c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as

longitudinal seam flat-oval duct.

5. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust
systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions
do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness
turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows, 8 Inches (200 mm) and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for
45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only.
Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows
with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm): Fabricate gored or
pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a
mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard
diameter elbows with gored construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm), and All Flat-Oval Elbows:
Fabricate gored elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) and All Pressures: 0.040
inch (1.0 mm) thick with two-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct
specified above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) and Pressures through 10-
Inch wg (2490 Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm).
D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer

shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions.
Fabricate outer-shell lengths 2 inches (50 mm) longer than inner shell and
insulation. Use the same metal thickness for outer duct as for un-insulated fittings.
3. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise
indicated. Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-
wall duct or un-insulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct
diameter to nominal single-wall size.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal
having 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23
percent. Use the following sheet metal thickness:
6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain

insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-
edge overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints
necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7
m/s).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches (75 mm)
from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the air stream with metal nosing that
have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as
specified for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner
distance from duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct build-outs installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated build-outs (metal hat sections) or other build-
out means are optional; when used, secure build-outs to duct wall with bolts, screws,
rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification
indicated.
C. Install round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m), unless interrupted
by fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer

vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening
and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct.
Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant.
Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate

leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated,
test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems
above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface
area of test section.
D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for
round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure
classifications less than and equal to 2-inches-wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative
pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10-
inches-wg(500 to 2490 Pa).
E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-
control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,
registers, and grilles.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a side-wall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings
for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to
show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items
installed in ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
DIFFUSER, REGISTER, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1/3

D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard

sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be
used for the Work.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,

registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems
indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve
design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure

drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in
lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features
or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean
exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and
grilles that have damaged finishes.
3.5 DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
A. Diffuser: See Schedule.
3.6 REGISTER SCHEDULE
A. Register: See Schedule.
3.7 GRILLE SCHEDULE
B. Grille: See Schedule.

SECTION 15835 - UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories.
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
D. Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
UNIT HEATERS 15835 - 1/4

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company.

2. Carrier Corp.
3. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
4. Engineered Air.
5. International Environmental Corp.
6. McQuay International.
7. Rosemex Products.
8. Ruffneck Heaters, Starozik Industries Ltd.
9. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
10. U S A Coil & Air Inc.
2.2 UNIT HEATERS
A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge configuration with
radial louver diffuser in draw-through
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Casing: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and manufacturer's standard
paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.
2.4 COILS
A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch (0.78-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically bonded
aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200
psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering water temperature of 325 deg F (163 deg C), with manual air
vent. Test for leaks to 375 psig (2690 kPa) underwater.
2.5 FAN
A. Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor.
2.6 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 hp and Smaller: Shaded-pole Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection.
B. Motors, 3/4 hp and Larger: Totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings.
2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Vertical Configuration: Louver cone diffuser.
2.8 CONTROLS
A. Control Devices: Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and thermostat.
A. Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before propeller unit
heater installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.
B. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers).
Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic
Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match
lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange on each connection.
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening

values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit
operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical
connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each propeller unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

Washington, DC 100% FINAL
CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 15830 - FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements."

2. "Basic Materials and Methods."
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of Fans:
1. Inline centrifugal fans.

2. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.
3. Mixed-Flow, Induced Dilution Roof-mounted exhaust fans.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Specialties and Accessories" for roof curbs and equipment
supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration hangers and supports
3. Division 15 Section "Central-Station Air Conditioning Units" for package units that
include fans.
4. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for electronic control devices
5. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operations" for control sequence descriptions.
6. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air- handling systems
testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements and procedures.
7. Division 16 Section "Circuit and Motor Disconnects" for disconnect switches.
8. Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for motor starters

9. Division 16 Section "Motor Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted
exhaust fans.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections:
1. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following:
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
FANS 15830 - 1/8

CONSTRUCTION
d. Materials gages and finishes including color charts.

e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field
connections.
3. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field- installed wiring.
4. Product certificates, signed by manufacturers of air-handling units, certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
5. Maintenance data for air-handling units, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance
Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Requirements."
A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL

705 "Power Ventilators."
B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.
C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and
components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA
Regulation 1910.7.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70
"National Electrical Code."
F. The mixed-flow, induced dilution fan shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 210-85
Laboratory Methods of Testing fans. Provide documentation with submission of equipment.
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into
pad.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations specified
in Division 7.
FANS 15830 - 2/8

CONSTRUCTION
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Inline Centrifugal Fans:
a. Cook (Loren) Company

b. Greenheck Fan Corporation
c. ILG Industries, Incorporated
2. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Carnes Company, Incorporated

b. Cook (Loren) Company
c. Greenheck Fan Corporation
3. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators:
a. Carnes Company, Incorporated

b. Cook (Loren) Company
c. Greenheck Fan Corporation
4. Mixed-Flow, Induced Dilution Fans:
a. Strobic Air Corporation
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance
with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to
bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2.3 FANS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory
FANS 15830 - 3/8

CONSTRUCTION
finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation
at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor: 1.4.
D. Belts: Oil-resistant, non-sparking, and non-static.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed
pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA (L50)) of
200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA
Standard 11 for roller bearings.
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.4 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet
guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting
brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet
flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect
located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside
of fan housing.
E. Wheel: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume Control Damper: Manual operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame.
4. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to
50 percent of fan air delivery.
FANS 15830 - 4/8

CONSTRUCTION
2.5 MOTORS
A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large
enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor
range.
C. Temperature Rating: 50 degrees C maximum temperature rise at 40 degrees C ambient for

continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).
D. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
E. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

Provide permanent-split capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor
start classification for belted fans.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
2. Bearings: The following features are required:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

b. Grease lubricated.
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce
lateral or axial thrust in motor.
3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
a. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during

operation.
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.
4. Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.

5. Noise rating: Quiet.
6. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in

accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified,
motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in
accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B.
7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, and special features.
F. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of
fans.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FANS 15830 - 5/8

CONSTRUCTION
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support
units as described below, using the vibration control devices indicated. Vibration control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls."
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using neoprene pads.

Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
2. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring
isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.
4. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and vibration isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air- handling units for service
and maintenance.
3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4
inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36, size and location
as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor
slab.
3. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top
edge and corners of pad.
4. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
5. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000-psi compressive strength, and normal weight
aggregate.
6. Clean exposed steel form in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation
Specifications SP 2 or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make final duct
connections with flexible connections.
B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:
1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16.

2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 15 Section
“VAC Instrumentation and Controls.”
3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National
Electrical Code.
FANS 15830 - 6/8

CONSTRUCTION
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory- authorized service
representative to perform the following:
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork
and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
3.6 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.
Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:
1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing.

2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection
is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align
belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
B. Starting procedures for fans:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated RPM.
a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for
air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to

train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following:
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting,

servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.
FANS 15830 - 7/8

CONSTRUCTION
2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in

Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.
FANS 15830 - 8/8

Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTIN
SECTION 15785 – DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Heat wheels.
2. Packaged energy recovery units.
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs for mounting rooftop equipment.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control wiring and control
devices connected to energy recovery units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. For installed
products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and
base weights.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air-to-air
energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
DUAL WHEEL ENERGY RECOVERY DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT 15785 - 1/6

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for energy recovery devices shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
E. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed according to
recommendations of NRCA.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: Furnish two sets of each type of filter specified.

2. Fan Belts: Furnish two sets of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
3. Wheel Belts: Furnish two sets of belts for each heat wheel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
B. Manufacturer[s]:
1. Trane Company, Model CDQ
2. Advanced Thermal Technologies.
3. Munters; Cargocaire Division.

C. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.
D. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved centrifugal fan with restrained, spring isolators and
flexible duct connections.
1. Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustable
base, and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
2. Integral variable frequency drive on the supply and exhaust fans.
E. Filters: [1-inch- (25-mm-) thick] [2-inch- (50-mm-) thick] disposable type, in galvanized steel frame,
mounted upstream of unit in both supply and exhaust airstreams.
F. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electrical conduits.
Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation.
G. Standalone factory mounted DDC controls including all actuators sensor wiring and control logic.
H. Unit shall be pre-programmed to provide variable air volume control, dehumidification control, CO2
monitoring and ventilation reset control, chilled and hot water control. BAS manufacturer shall
provide all necessary interface capability required to communicate to the BAS front end.
2.2. DEHUMIDIFICATION CASSETTE

1. The CDQ dehumidification wheel shall be placed in the air handler as shown in the air handler
unit drawings. The dehumidification wheel shall not require an additional regeneration airflow
stream or the use of a high heat source. If any preheat is required it shall not exceed the sche-
duled capacity.
2. The CDQ dehumidification wheel shall not utilize exhaust air. The CDQ wheel shall have no
exhaust air transfer.
3. Cassette casing shall be constructed of heavy duty G90 galvanized steel. Cassettes up to 7000
cfm shall be single face panel construction for easy service access to the wheel drive motor and
belt. Larger cassettes shall be double face panel with removable side panel for access to belt and
drive motor. Small amounts of casing deflection shall have no significant impact on wheel per-
formance or life. Casings shall have a 1”-1 1/2" perimeter flange to facilitate mounting inside
AHU cabinet with self-tapping sheet metal screws. Alternatively, cassettes may be mounted us-
ing “safeoff’ blanking to the side, top, and bottom of the cassette.
4. The CDQ dehumidification wheels shall be constructed of synthetic matrix with an adsorbent
integrally bound into the matrix. The adsorbent shall be selected for its high affinity for water
vapor at the CDQ operating conditions. The adsorbent shall be a type III desiccant. Construction
of the wheel shall be corrugated, fluted design, which provides distinct air passageways and pre-
vents internal wheel bypass. The desiccant is intimately, permanently bound and uniformly dis-

persed throughout the wheel matrix. Because the desiccant is not applied as a glued on surface
coating, it is not susceptible to erosion, abrasion, or delamination of the desiccant. The wheel
matrix shall be rigid and glued layer-to-layer, and not susceptible to sagging or separation of the
layers. The wheel shall be structurally reinforced with a spoking system to minimize wheel def-
lection. Because the product is nonmetallic, it offers complete resistance to corrosion. The media
shall meet the flammability requirements governing this class of products and be UL recognized
components in accordance to UL 1812 and UL1995
5. All cassettes shall include both a circumferential seal as an air block-off around the perimeter,
and an inner diametric seal separating regeneration and supply sides. Seals shall be full contact
nylon brush seals, which minimizes leakage. Seals are factory set and field adjustable and make
intimate contact with the wheel on all surfaces. CDQ cassette, wheel and seal configuration al-
lows for operation at high differential pressures. Seal replacement should not be necessary during
the life of the product.
6. The drive system shall consist of a heavy-duty fractional horsepower A/C gear motor mounted
in the cassette and cooled by the AHU air stream. Motor location shall be as required. All motors
have permanently lubricated bearings. Minimal amp draw will be required and all motors shall
be 115V/1PH/60Hz or 230V/1PH/60Hz. Drive belts shall be high performance v-belt multilink
belts. The multilink belt allows for replacement of individual links(1” each) if a section of belt
becomes worn or breaks. Belts are installed under tension, require no mechanical tensioner, and
do not require adjustment after startup. The rotation speed of the wheel shall not exceed the
scheduled value.
7. The wheel matrix shall be cleanable by vacuuming or pressurized air blowing, or alternatively
with low temperature steam, hot water, light detergent.
8. Cassettes shall be provided with bearings which support rotation of the wheel around a center
shaft driven by a perimeter belt. The bearings shall be internal ball bearings press fitted into the
bored wheel hub for all wheels up to and including 72” diameter. Internal bearings are perma-
nently lubricated, no maintenance bearings which support fixed shaft operation of the wheel as-
sembly. Flanged or pillow block bearings which support rotating shaft operation of the wheel
assembly are used for all units larger than 72” diameter. Outboard bearings are provided with
grease fittings for periodic lubrication. L10 bearing life is greater than 400,000 at design condi-
tions.
9. The wheel cassette shall be capable of continuous operation over ambient temperatures rang-
ing from -40F to 200F at any relative humidity without adversely affecting wheel performance or
life.
10. Performance shall be as predicted by CDQ selection software as scheduled. The performance
shall be based on testing conducted on the wheel cassette installed in the air handler configura-
tion as shown in the AHU drawings. Performance based on stand-alone desiccant wheel cassette
or tests with two independent air streams are unacceptable. Performance data shall be from tests
of a complete unit per-formed by an ISO 9000 certified laboratory. Temperature measurements
shall be taken using instrumentation whose calibration is traceable to NIST standards. Dry bulb
and wet bulb temperature measurements shall be accurate to +/- 0.1 Deg F. Performance predic-
tion for the CDQ air handler shall be available for multiple conditions as required.

11. Warranty : The dehumidification wheel shall be warranted for a period of five (5) years from
date of manufacture (terms and conditions apply). The warranty applies to all parts and compo-
nents in the cassettes with the exception of the motor, which is warranted for a period of eighteen
(18) months.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotation is
from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream,
for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on building
side for bypass during startup.
3. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
4. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to heat exchanger. Access doors and panels are specified in
Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
C. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
D. Pipe drains from units and drain pans to nearest floor drain; use Schedule 40 PVC pipe and solvent
welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Duct and fan installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and specialties.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.
Report results in writing.
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures
Demonstration and Training."
3.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Meet requirement of section 4-7 of ASHRAE 62.1-2004
B. Coordinate with commissioning requirements of Division 1 Section and 15 Commissioning.
C. Installation adhesives and sealants must meet California Department of Health Services emissions
standard, with documentation.
D. Refrigerant shall meet LEED Eac4 requirements.
E. Coordinate with requirements of Division 1 Section “Construction Indoor Air Quality Management”
including use of minimum MERV 8 filters if system used during construction and installation of
MERV 13 filters prior to occupancy

SECTION 15763 - FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations
and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed units.
5. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
F. Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 - 1/5

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Trane Company (Basis of Design)

2. Carrier Corp.
3. International Environmental Corp.
4. McQuay
2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Vertical Units: An assembly chassis, coil, Plastic drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through
configuration with hydronic four pipe cooling coil and heating coil.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: ½ inch closed cellular insulation.

C. Drain Pans: Stainless steel or plastic, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be removable
and insulated with polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall be formed to slope
from all directions to drain connection.
D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
1. Vertical Unit Panels: Removable, galvanized steel, with integral bar grilles discharge
grilles and channel-formed edges and with insulation on back of panel.
E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect, applied to factory-assembled and -
tested fan-coil unit before shipping].
2.4 WATER COILS
A. Primary Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 300
psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 275 deg F.
2.5 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized steel
or thermoplastic material; directly connected to the motor.
2.6 FAN MOTORS
A. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.
B. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.7 FACTORY INSTALLED
A. Four-Pipe, Valve Control: Vertical units shall be provided with unit-mounted thermostat, with
manual fan-speed switch and three way modulating electric valves. Horizontal units shall be
provided with wireless wall mounting thermostat, with manual fan-speed switch and three way
modulating electric valves.
B. DDC Controller: Factory installed DDC Controller shall modulate the three way valve and stage
the fan speed from low to medium to high to satisfy the space setpoint. DDC controller shall
communicate via Lontalk.
C. Piping Package: Provide factory installed piping package in accordance with the detail drawing
on the plans.

A. Test and rate units according to ARI 440.
B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-
coil unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers).
Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation
and unit operation.

2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements
are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.

SECTION 15628 - AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rotary cooled air-cooled water chillers.
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints” for chiller
vibration isolation requirements.
2. Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for chiller piping requirements.
3. Division 15 Section “Refrigerant Piping” for chiller piping requirements.
4. Division 15 Section “Chemical Water Treatment” for chemically treating chilled and
condenser water.
5. Division 15 Section “HVAC Controls” for temperature-control devices for chillers.
6. Division 15 Section “Sequence of Operation” for temperature-control sequence for chillers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include refrigerant; rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawing: Signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculation: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for design
vibration bases.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Details fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slide and rails, and base
weights.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with the following:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements. Determine space reserved for electrical equipment.
4. Access requirements around other work, including working clearance to mechanical controls
and electrical equipment.
D. Product Certificates: Certification of performance according to ARI 550 and those chillers have been
started and function properly.
E. Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
AIR COOLED PACKAGED CHILLER WITH INTEGRAL PUMP MODULES 15628 - 1/10
Articles 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASHRAE 15 for chiller design, construction, leak testing, and
installation.
C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, “Pressure
Vessels” for constructing and testing evaporator and condenser pressure vessels. Stamp ASME
label.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 465.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
A. Deliver scroll water chiller with protective crating and covering.
B. Store chillers to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, and construction
debris.
C. Handle chillers according to manufacturer’s written rigging and installation instructions for
unloading, transporting, and setting in final location.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provision of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B. Manufacture’s Special Warranty on Refrigerant Compressor: Written warranty, signed by

manufacturer agreeing to replace compressor.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than five years after date of
Substantial Completion, parts only.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Operating Conditions
A. Provide outdoor packaged air-cooled liquid chiller with the

capacity as scheduled on drawings at job site elevation listed in
Section 15050.
B. Chiller shall be designed to operate using R-410-A

Refrigerant.
C. Chiller shall be designed for parallel evaporator water flow.
D. The liquid to be chilled will be water containing corrosion

inhibitors and antifreeze solution as required.
2.2 Outdoor Packaged Air-Cooled Chiller
A. Approved manufacturer is AIRSTACK.
B. System Description: Chiller shall incorporate Scroll type compressors and consist of mul-
tiple independent refrigerant circuits. Each refrigerant circuit shall consist of an individual
compressor set, evaporator, thermal expansion valve, liquid line solenoid valve, filter drier, fin
and tube condenser, and control system. Each circuit shall be constructed to be independent
of other circuits from a refrigeration and electrical stand-point. The multi-circuit chiller must
be able to produce chilled water even in the event of a failure of one or more refrigerant cir-
cuits.
C. General
1. Chiller Modules shall be ETL listed in accordance with UL Standard 1995, CSA
certified per Standard C22.2#236, and bear the ASME UM stamp on all water-to-
refrigerant heat exchangers.
2. Modules shall ship wired and charged with refrigerant. All modules shall be fac-
tory run tested prior to shipment.
3. Compressors, heat exchangers, condenser fans, piping and controls shall be

mounted on a heavy gauge steel frame. Electrical controls, contactors, and relays for
each module shall be mounted within that module. Module shall be provided within
a steel enclosure suitable for outdoor use. Exposed steel surfaces shall be provided
with a powder coat paint finish.
D. Chilled Water Mains: Each module shall include supply and return mains for chilled
water. Grooved end connections are provided for interconnection to four inch standard
(4.5” outside diameter) piping with Victaulic type couplings.
E. Evaporators: Each evaporator shall be a brazed plate

heat exchangers constructed of 316 stainless steel; designed, tested, and stamped
in accordance with ASME code for 360 psig water-side working pressure. Evapora-
tor heat exchanger shall not be mounted above the compressor, to prevent the effect
of migration of refrigerant to the cold evaporator with consequent liquid slugging on
start-up.
F. Compressor: Each module shall contain two hermetic scroll compressors in a tan-
dem piping arrangement mounted to the module with rubber-in-shear isolators. Each
system also includes high discharge pressure and low suction pressure safety cut-
outs.
G. Condenser Fans: Each module shall contain dual condenser fans for each refrige-
rant circuit. These fans shall be multi-blade vane-axial type made of plastic compo-
site material for quiet operation. Fans shall be direct drive at maximum RPM of
1,150. Fan motors shall all be pressure controlled and suitable for outdoor use. Fan
speed control shall be provided by integral variable frequency drives.
H. Central Control System.
1. Scheduling of the various compressors shall be performed

by a microprocessor based control system (Master Controller). A new lead
compressor is selected every 24 hours to assure even distribution of com-
pressor run time.
2. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the

following on each refrigeration system:
a. Discharge Pressure Fault

b. Suction Pressure Fault
c. Compressor Winding Temperature
d. Suction Temperature
e. Evaporator Leaving Chilled Water Temp.
3. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the

following system parameters:
a. Chilled Water Entering and Leaving Temperature

b. Discharge Refrigerant Temperature
c. Chilled Water Flow
4. An out of tolerance indication from these controls or

sensors shall cause a “fault” indication at the Master Controller and shutdown
of that compressor with the transfer of load requirements to the next availa-
ble compressor. In the case of a System Fault the entire chiller will be shut
down. When a fault occurs, the Master Controller shall record conditions at
the time of the fault and store the data for recall. This information shall be
capable of being recalled through the keypad of the Master Controller and
displayed on the Master Controller’s LCD. A history of faults shall be main-
tained including date and time of day of each fault (up to the last 20 occur-
rences).
5. Individual monitoring of leaving chilled water temperatures

from each refrigeration system shall be programmed to protect against
freeze-up.
6. The control system shall monitor entering and leaving

chilled water temperatures to determine system load and select the number
of compressor circuits required to operate. Response times and set points
shall be adjustable. The system shall provide for variable time between
compressor sequencing and temperature sensing, so as to fine tune the
chiller to different existing building conditions.
I. Chiller shall communicate via Bacnet to be compatible with the building management
system.
J. Each refrigerant circuit shall include all refrigerant specialties including a properly sized
refrigerant receiver to provide reliable operation down to 0°F Ambient.
L. SINGLE POINT POWER CONNECTION

Chiller shall be provided with a single point power
connection. This will include pre-engineered wiring for field
installation and connection to a factory mounted chiller junction
box. Junction box shall include individual fusing for each Module
Set and provide a single point of connection to building power.
M. FREE COOLING MODULE

Free Cooling Modules shall interconnect through the common chiller header system
and require no additional water connections. Free Cooling Modules shall include
glycol cooling coils, temperature controlled fans and an automatic 3-way bypass
valve to eliminate the need for mechanical cooling underlow ambient conditions.
Module shall be completely factory assembled and tested before shipment.
O. PUMP MODULE WITH EXPANSION TANK
Provide a Pump Module of size and capacity indicated on the drawings and sche-
dules. The Pump Module shall be interconnected though the common chiller header
system and require no additional water connections. Pump Module will become an
integral part of the chiller system. Pump Module shall incorporate dual in-line centri-
fugal pumps in a Primary/Standby pumping arrangement. Pump starters and con-
trols shall be provided to enable manual selection of lead pump. In addition, in the
event of a loss-of-flow failure of the chilled water system, the Pump Module controls
shall disable the lead pump and automatically start the standby pump. Module shall
be completely factory assembled and tested prior to shipment.
Expansion tank shall be welded steel with butyl rubber diaphragm and capable of a
maximum operating temperature of 240 F and maximum working pressure of 100
psig. Tank shall be interconnected through the common chiller header system and
require no additional water connections. Module shall be completely factory assem-
bled and tested prior to shipment.
2.3 SAFETIES, CONTROLS AND OPERATION
A. The chiller safety controls shall be provided (minimum) as follows:
1. Low evaporator refrigerant pressure

2. Loss of water flow through the evaporator
3. High condenser refrigerant pressure
4. High compressor motor temperature
5. Low suction gas temperature
6. Low leaving evaporator water temperature
B. Failure of chiller to start or chiller shutdown due to any of the

above safety cutouts shall be enunciated by display of the appropriate diagnostic de-
scription at the unit control panel. This annunciation will be in plain English. Alpha-
numeric codes shall be unacceptable.
C. The chiller shall be furnished with a Master Controller as an

integral portion of the chiller control circuitry to provide the following functions:
1. Provide automatic chiller shutdown during periods when

the load level decreases below the normal operating requirements of the
chiller. Upon an increase in load, the chiller shall automatically restart.
2. Provisions for connection to automatically enable the

chiller from a remote energy management system.
3. The control panel shall provide alphanumeric display

showing all system parameters in the English language with numeric data in
English units.
D. Normal Chiller Operation
1. When chiller is enabled, the factory supplied Master

Controller modulates the chiller capacity from minimum to maximum as re-
quired by building load.
2. The Chiller control system shall respond to Entering Water
Temperature and will have an integral reset based on entering water temper-
ature to provide for efficient operation at part-load conditions.
2.4 ACCOUSTICAL SOUND ATTENUATION
A. The chiller shall be provided with sound attenuation with the following:
1. Low RPM condenser fans

2. Condenser fan Variable Frequency Drives
3. Compressor sound wraps
4. Integral sound attenuating casing
5. Low noise scroll compressor design
6. Integral sound attenuator
B. Sound levels shall meet the sound levels as listed below and in accordance with the
with the neighborhood noise sound levels as calculated by the owners acoustical
consultant.
3.1 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING PROCEDURE
A. Prior to connecting the chiller to the building chilled water

loop, the piping shall be flushed with a detergent and hot water (110-130° F) mixture
to remove previously accumulated dirt and other organic residue. In old piping sys-
tems with heavy encrustation of inorganic materials consult a water treatment spe-
cialist for proper passivation and/or removal of these contaminants.
B. During the flushing a 30 mesh (max.) Y-strainers (or acceptable

equivalent) shall be in place in the system piping and examined periodically as ne-
cessary to remove collected residue. The flushing process shall take no less than 6
hours or until the strainers, when examined after each flushing, are clean. Old sys-
tems with heavy encrustation shall be flushed for a minimum of 24 hours and may
take as long as 48 hours before the filters run clean. Detergent and acid concentra-
tions shall be used in strict accordance with the respective chemical manufacturers
instructions. After flushing with the detergent and/or dilute acid concentrations the
system loop shall be purged with clean water for at least one hour to ensure that all
residual cleaning chemicals have been flushed out.
C. Prior to supplying water to the chiller the Water Treatment

Specification shall be consulted for requirements regarding the water quality during
chiller operation. The appropriate chiller manufacturer’s service literature shall be
available to the operator and/or service contractor and consulted for guidelines con-
cerning preventative maintenance and off-season shutdown procedures.
3.2 Water Treatment Requirements
A. Supply water for the chilled water circuit shall be analyzed and
treated by a professional water treatment specialist who is familiar with the operating
conditions and materials of construction specified for the chiller’s heat exchangers,
headers and associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be controlled such that
recirculated water quality for modular chillers using 316 stainless steel brazed plate
heat exchangers and carbon steel headers is maintained within the following para-
meters:
1. pH Greater than 7 and less than 9

2. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Less than 1000 ppm
3. Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 500 ppm
4. Alkalinity as Ca CO3 30 to 500 ppm
5. Chlorides Less than 200 ppm
6. Sulfates Less than 200 ppm
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive chillers for compliance with requirements for installation tolerance and
other conditions affecting chiller performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrections have been corrected.
B. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact location before
roughing-in piping and electrical connections.
A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and chiller installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report
results in writing. Manufactures local service agency shall provide chillers start up and labor
warranty.
4.3 CLEANING
C. Upon completion of installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect unit components.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original
finish.
4.4 COMMISSIONING
D. Verify that installation complies with the Contract Documents.
E. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
F. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions and check
for the following items:
1. No physical damage to unit
2. Unit is level.
3. Chiller vibration isolation and flexible pip connection are installed
4. Clearance has been maintained and piping is installed for easy removal for service and tube
cleaning.
5. Chilled-water pips have been connected to correct ports.
6. Labels and safety instructions are clearly visible.
7. Oil levels are as recommended by manufacturer.
8. Refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak-tested.
9. Shipping skids, blocks, and straps are removed.
10. Refrigerant and pressure relief is vented to outside.
11. Thermometers and pressure gages are installed.
12. Controls and safety interlocks are installed and connected.
13. Pumps are installed, connected, and operational.
G. Check and record performance of chiller protection devices
H. Check and record performance of chiller-water flow and low-temperature interlocks.
I. Operate chiller for run-in period as recommended by manufacturer.
J. Check static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup and
shutdown.
K. Check refrigerant charge. Check oil level.
4.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain chillers as specified below:
1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedule for starting up and
shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining chillers.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout.”
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section “Operation and
Maintenance Data.”
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days’ advance notice.
SECTION 15575 – BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Breeching
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section for insulation of breeching, chimneys, and stacks.

2. Division 16 Sections for power supply wiring from power source to vent fans.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include materials, dimensions, weights, and
accessories.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of breeching and stacks, including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction elements.
Detail connections to equipment.
D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements
specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Engineering report certifying that stacks meet the design wind and seismic loads.
F. Maintenance data for vent fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
A. Welder Qualifications: Certified according to AWS D9.1.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing breeching, chimneys, and

stacks similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful
in-service performance.
C. Comply with NFPA 211 for components and installation
BREECHING, CHIMNEYS, AND STACK 15575 - 1/4

D. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for
fabricated breeching.
E. Comply with SMACNA "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction."
F. Comply with AWS D1.1 for welder qualifications, welding details, and workmanship
standards
G. Comply with ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook," Chapter 31 for "Chimney, Gas
Vent, and Fireplace Systems," for material requirements and design criteria.
H. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 211.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
I. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain all Type B vent system components from 1 source and
by a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to, the following:
1. Type B Gas Vents:
a. Metal-Fab
b. Selkirk Metalbestos
c. Van-Packer Company
2. Steel, Positive-Pressure, Double-Wall Vents:
a. Metal-Fab
b. Selkirk Metalbestos
c. Van-Packer Company
2.2 TYPE B GAS VENTS
A. Description: Double-wall gas vents, conforming to NFPA 211, Type B. Inner pipe of sheet
aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized-steel sheet, each with the following minimum thickness:
1. Round, 6-Inch (152-mm) Inside Diameter and Smaller: 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) inner
pipe; .187-inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe.
2. Round, 7- to 18-Inch (178- to 457-mm) Inside Diameter: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm) inner
pipe; .0187-inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe.
B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier,
adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire-stop spacers, and
fasteners, fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.
2.3 STEEL, POSITIVE-PRESSURE, DOUBLE-WALL VENTS

A. Description: Double-wall metal stacks conforming to NFPA 211, suitable for use with
building heating equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels.
B. Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 1-inch (25-mm) airspace,
with positive sealing joints.
C. Inner Shell: Type 304 stainless steel of the following thickness:
1. 6- to 36-Inch (152- to 914-mm) Size: 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick.
D. Outer Jacket: Aluminum-coated steel of the following thickness:
1. 6- to 24-Inch (152- to 610-mm) Size: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm) thick.
E. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier,
adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, fire-stop spacers, and
fasteners fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL CONNECTORS, BREECHING, AND VENTS
A. Install gas vents as indicated, according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.

Locate to comply with stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles.
B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's installation

instructions, using only sealants recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight of the
vent and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS
A. Install barometric and thermostatically operated dampers according to manufacturer's

instructions. Locate as close to draft hood collar as possible.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes, including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean breeching internally during installation to remove dust and debris. Clean external
surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Closure: Provide at ends of breeching and chimneys that are not completed or
connected to equipment.


SECTION 15545 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Hot water heating systems

2. Chilled water systems.
A. Closed System: One bypass feeder on each system, with isolating and drain valves installed
around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated
by test.
2. Performance: Water treatment sized and equipped to treat raw water available at
Project site to sustain the following water characteristics:
Chilled Water Hot Water
a. Ph 7.0 to 10.0 7.0 to 10.0

b. Corrosion Inhibitor 50 to 100 PPM 100 to 150 PPM
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product
data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights
(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and
startup instructions
C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loading, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
E. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified
requirements.
CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 15545 - 1/5

F. Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for
each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.
A. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with warehousing

facilities in the Project's vicinity and that is or employs an experienced consultant, available at
reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and
Owner about water treatment.
B. Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article
100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program for period of one year from startup
date of equipment, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Start-up assistance
3. Training of operating personnel.
4. Periodic field service and consultation
5. Customer report charts and log sheets
6. Laboratory technical assistance
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective
covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.
B. Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 50 percent of amount initially installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Chemical Water Treatment Products:

a. Aqua-Chem, Incorporated; Cleaver-Brooks Division

b. Barclay Chemical Company, Incorporated
c. Nalco Chemical Company
d. ARC
e. Stewart-Hall Chemical Corporation
f. Watcon, Incorporated
2.2 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
A. Bypass (Pot) Feeders: steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel, shutoff valve
on top, air release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and re-circulating shutoff valves on
sides.
1. Capacity: 5 gallons. (19 L).

2. Working Pressure: 125-psi (860-kPa).
3. Working Pressure: 175-psi (1210-kPa).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance.

2. Hot Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for connecting

electrical equipment.
1. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will
perform field quality control testing.
B. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform
field quality control testing.
3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Sample boiler water at 1-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of 5 weeks and
prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where
applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
3. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
4. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
5. Particulate and Dissolved Matter: ASTM D 1888.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair damaged finishes, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Ensure that system is operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Place terminal
control valves in OPEN position during cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each
system.
C. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Hot-Water Heating System: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising system to
design temperature; maintain for a minimum of 12 hours. Remove heat and allow to
cool. Drain and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperature,
then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
2. Chilled-Water System: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water;
circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system
cleaner is removed.
3. Open System: Flush with clean water for a minimum of one hour. Drain completely
and refill.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to

provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water treatment system
(after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required steady-state characteristics of
feed-water.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide services of supplier's technical representative for half a day to instruct Owner's
personnel in operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of boiler water treatment
system.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

C. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout."
D. Schedule training with Owner, through the Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of HVAC pumps for hydronic systems:
1. In-line circulators
2. End-suction pumps.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers and pressure gages,
connector plugs, and devices.
2. Division 15 Section "Motors" for pump motors.
3. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for inertia pads, isolation pads, spring supports,
spring hangers, and flexible pipe connectors.
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for interlock wiring between
pumps and between pumps and field-installed control devices.
5. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field installed disconnect-switches,
required electrical devices, and motor controllers.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system's maximum operating pressure at point
where installed, but not less than specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data including certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models,
weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate
pump's operating point on curves.
C. Shop drawings showing pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with
templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchors.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiating
between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
E. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of pumps, certifying accuracy under specified

operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
HVAC PUMPS 15540 - 1/8

F. Maintenance data for pumps to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1. Include startup instructions.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for piping materials and installation
2. Hydraulic Institute's "Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary & Reciprocating Pumps" for
pump design, manufacture, testing, and installation.
3. UL 778 "Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps" for construction requirements.
Include UL listing and labeling.
4. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators" for electric motors. Include NEMA
listing and labeling.
5. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical components and installation.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of pumps from 1 source and by a single
manufacturer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of pumps from 1 source and by a single
manufacturer. Include responsibility and accountability to answer questions and resolve
problems regarding compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance of pumps.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profile, connections, and dimensional requirements
of pumps and are based on the specific type and model indicated. Other manufacturers'
pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Substitutions."
A. Store pumps in dry location.
B. Retain shipping flange-protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
D. Extended Storage Longer than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or vacuum-producing
device. Coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze after drying. Dismantle
bearings and couplings; dry; coat with acid-free, heavy oil; tag; and store in dry location.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. In-Line Circulators:
a. Amtrol, Incorporated
b. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated

c. Dunham-Bush, Incorporated
d. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; Bell & Gossett Division
e. Taco, Incorporated
2. Separately Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:
a. Buffalo Pumps, Incorporated

b. Burks Pumps, Incorporated; Weinman Pump
c. Crane Company; Deming Pump Company Division
d. Gould Pumps, Incorporated
e. Paco Pumps, Incorporated
f. Peerless Pump Company
g. Taco, Incorporated
h. Weil Pump Company
3. Supported-Volute, Separately Coupled, End Suction Pumps:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Incorporated

b. Dunham-Bush, Incorporated
c. General Signal; Aurora Pump
d. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; Bell & Gossett Division
e. Taco, Incorporated
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL
A. General: Factory assembled and tested.
B. Base-Mounted Pumps: Include pump casings that allow removal and replacement of
impellers without disconnecting piping.
C. Types, Sizes, Capacities, and Characteristics: As indicated.
D. Motors: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B, except Design C where
required for high starting torque. Furnish single-, multiple-, or variable-speed motors, with
type of enclosures and electrical characteristics indicated. Include built-in thermal-overload
protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Select each motor to be non-overloading
over full range of pump performance curve.
E. Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to

IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard
industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
F. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units
before shipping.
G. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed-machined metal

surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Horizontal, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case

design rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water
temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Include the following:

1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller
than 2-1/2 inches (DN65) and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
a. Connection Option: Include unions, instead of threaded companion flanges, at

connections for casings that are not available with threaded companion
flanges.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
4. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.
6. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated, sleeve type.
7. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
8. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.
2.4 SEPARATELY COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, separately coupled, end-suction, single-stage,

bronze-fitted, radially split case design rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working
pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Include
back-pull-out design, except where other design is indicated, and the following:
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug in bottom of volute, and
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections
B. Description: Supported-volute, centrifugal, separately coupled, end-suction, single-stage,

bronze-fitted, radially split case design rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working
pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Include
back-pull-out design, except where other design is indicated, and the following:
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug in bottom of volute, and
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet flange connections. Include integral feet or
other means on volute to support weight of casing and attached piping.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
3. Wearing Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Seals: Stuffing-box type. Include at least 4 rings of graphite-impregnated braided
yarn with bronze lantern ring between center 2 graphite rings, and bronze packing
gland.
7. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
Include flexible-spacer type, with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled
and removed without removing pump or motor, where indicated.
8. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment for
motor sizes of 100 hp (74.6 kW) and less. Include flexible-spacer type, with flange
and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed without removing pump or
motor, for sizes larger than 100 hp (74.6 kW).
9. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and
removed without removing pump or motor.

10. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.

11. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory-fabricated from
ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump
casing, coupling guard, and motor. Grind welds smooth before application of factory
finish. Field-drill motor mounting holes for field-installed motors.
a. Option: Frame may be cast iron instead of steel.
12. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
2.5 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Include the following pump specialty fittings with end connections matching pump and piping,
where indicated:
1. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating,

cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. Include bronze startup and bronze or
stainless steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless steel straightening vanes;
drain plug; and factory- or field-fabricated support.
2. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating,
cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. Include drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff,
balancing, and check valve features.
2.6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check
valves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of pumps.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written installation and alignment instructions.

B. Install pumps in locations indicated and arranged to provide access for periodic
maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping such that piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers
of sufficient size to support weight of pump independent of piping system.
E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before

setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges
with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches
(19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check
coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level
and plumb.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections
have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers written instructions
C. Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by 1 of 2
methods specified in the HI's Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary & Reciprocating Pumps,
"Instructions for Installation, Operation and Maintenance."
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill base plate
completely with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
E. Alignment Tolerances: According to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Install shutoff valve and strainer on pump suction and check valve and shutoff
valve on pump discharge, except where other arrangement is indicated.
B. Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are the same size as piping
connecting to pumps.
C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of pump
nozzles.
D. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators
E. Install non-slam check valve and globe valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.

F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line pumps.
G. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.
H. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
I. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.
J. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps and
where indicated. Install between pump casing and valves, except where other arrangement
is indicated.
K. Install thermometers where indicated.
L. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure gage
tappings where provided.
M. Install temperature and pressure gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping
around each pump.
N. Install flow check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
O. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
P. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Check pump suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
B. Clean pump strainers
C. Set pump controls
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and
checks before startup:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction
marked on pump casing.
4. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Pumps for handling hot liquids shall be
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or even
drags slightly until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power:
1. Prime pumps, opening suction valve, closing drains, and preparing pumps for
operation.

2. Open cooling water supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where
applicable.
3. Open cooling water supply valves if stuffing boxes are water-cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at
operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to
ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
10. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

11. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.
C. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves
open, steps are the same, except that discharge valves are opened sometime before motors
are started
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for
testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.

SECTION 15513 - CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes high-efficiency boilers for heating hot water and accessories used
for heating hot water.
1. Division 15 Section "Chemical Water Treatment" for boiler feed-water treatment

and connections
2. Division 15 Section "Breeching" for connections to breeching, chimneys, and
stacks
3. Division 15 Section "Feedwater Equipment" for connections to condensate and
boiler feed-water piping and equipment
4. Division 15 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required

clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results
for compliance with performance requirements before shipping.
D. AGA design certificates, for information.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include

parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
Condensing Boilers 15513 - 1/6

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70, Article 100.
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
B. AGA Compliance: Design certified by AGA; tests and ratings according to AGA
requirements.
C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, "Heating Boilers."
D. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat
exchanger.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering boilers

that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the following:
1. Sealed-Combustion Boilers:
a. A.O. Smith
b. Viessmann
c. Fulton
2.2 PACKAGED UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and –tested modules include combustion-air inlet

chamber, pre-purge and post-purge blower assembly, air-gas fuel control valve,
combustion chamber, heat exchanger, and exhaust; with insulated jacket around module
and unit-mounted electrical control panel with operation sequence indicator lights.

B. Type: Sealed-combustion, gas-fired, condensing-type hot-water boiler with capacities

and accessories as scheduled.
C. Fuel: Natural gas.
2.3 CONTROLS
A. Controller: Solid state, with pressure-sensing flame safeguard system, ignition

transformer, spark plug, manual gas shutoff valve, system-pressure-controlled regulator,
automatic redundant control valves, high-limit water temperature controller, ASME-
approved safety-relief valve, and temperature and pressure gauge.
B. Operating Temperature Control: Electric indoor/outdoor controller maintains boiler water

temperature with outdoor temperature reset.
2.4 BOILER ACCESSORIES
A. All boilers are to come equipped with the following accessories piped and wired at the
factory.
1. Exhaust mufflers
2. Air-supply mufflers
3. McDonnell Miller No. 750-MT-120 probe type low water cut-off with manual reset.
4. ASME safety relief valve (s).
A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IV for low-pressure boilers.
2.6 EMERGENCY SHUT OFF SWITCHES
A. The contractor will install at least 2 emergency shut off switch(s) as required by code
authorities. All electrical devices and equipment required to enable the operations of the
switch(s) shall be provided and installed by the contractor. The switch shall shut down all
power to the burners, oil pumps and gas valves. It shall be of design that does not
require manual resetting in the event of a power failure. The locations of the switches
shall be approved by the Owner and the applicable regulatory agencies. A vandalism
resistant pre-alarm cover acceptable to the Owner shall protect such switches. Affix
proper signage to identify said switches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced standards.
B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54
C. Support boilers on 4 inch (100-mm) thick concrete base, 4 inches (100-mm) larger on
each side than base of unit. Dowel base to floor on 18-inch (450-mm) centers along
perimeter of base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts through base into floor
D. Assemble units and parts shipped loose or disassembled.
E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.
B. Connect air-intake and exhaust piping to boiler, size as recommended by manufacturer.

Pitch piping toward boiler minimum of 2 percent or as indicated. Provide termination as
indicated.
C. Connect hot=water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and
union or flange at each connection.
D. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
E. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors according to manufacturer’s published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
F. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.
G. Install piping from safety-relief valves to nearest floor drain.
H. Install piping from safety valves to drip pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.
I. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet.
.

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping
and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
controls and equipment.
B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler
startup until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.

2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief
pressure. Adjust as required.
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and
servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
7. Labels are clearly visible.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Burner blower rotates in correct direction.
10. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
11. Control installations are completed.
D. Ensure pumps operate properly.
E. Check operation of pressure reducing valves on gas train, including venting.
F. Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.
G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners for maximum operating efficiency.
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and
firing sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-
temperature interlocks.
5. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.
6. Measure and record gas pressure on manifold.
7. Measure and record combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
8. Measure and record flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
H. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each
boiler.

I. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve,
water level, and backflow preventer.
J. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners and for 100, 66, and
33 percent load for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing
rate. Measure and record the following:
1. Gas pressure on manifold.

2. Combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
3. Flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
4. Flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration
5. Natural flue draft.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel as specified below:
1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate compliance

with requirements.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.

SECTION 15496 - NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within
building and to point indicated on the contract drawings.
B. The gas system operation pressures are identified on the contract drawings with the
symbols:
LPG (Low Pressure Gas)

MPG (Medium Pressure Gas)
HPG (High Pressure Gas)
The Contractor will select the materials and execution methods as applicable in
accordance with the operation pressures, piping, specialties and accessories indicated on
the contract drawings.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems" for natural gas service piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LPG: (Low Pressure Natural Gas Piping) operating pressure of 1-psig or less.
B. MPG (Medium-Pressure Natural Gas Piping) Operating pressure greater than 1-psig, but
not greater than 2-psig.
C. HPG (High Pressure Natural Gas Piping) operating pressure greater than 2-psig, but not
greater than 5-psig.
D. Gas Service: Operating pressure indicated, on contract drawings.
E. Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source to gas point of delivery for building being
served. Piping includes gas service piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar
or meter support, and gas meter.
F. Gas Delivery Point: Gas meter or service pressure regulator outlet, or gas service valve if
gas meter is not provided.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 1/11

A. Minimum Working-Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, minimum pressure

requirements are as follows:
1. Low Pressure Natural Gas Piping: 1-psig.

2. Medium Pressure Natural Gas Piping: 2-psig.
B. Approximate values of natural gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu. ft.

2. Specific Gravity: 0.6.
3. Service Line Pressure: Contractor shall contact Natural Gas Supplier.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data for each type of natural gas specialty and special-duty valve. Include
pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models.
C. Coordination Drawings for natural gas piping, including required clearances and
relationship to other services for same work areas.
D. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.
E. Maintenance data for natural gas specialties and special-duty valves to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
A. Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," for gas piping materials and components;
installations; and inspecting, testing, and purging.
B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring
and electrically operated control devices.
C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified

standards.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, dimensional requirements,

and characteristics of natural gas piping equipment, specialties, and accessories and are
based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment and
components with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Substitutions."

A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from drips in existing
gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify gas supplier. Handle
flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises
from end of one day to beginning of next day.
A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Notify each affected user when gas supply will be
turned off.
B. Work Interruptions: Leave gas-piping systems in safe condition when interruptions in work
occur during repairs or alterations to existing gas piping systems.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with the provisions of the following:
1. International Mechanical Code 1996 Edition

2. International Plumbing Code 1997 Edition
3. Montgomery County Plumbing and Gas Fitting Regulations
4. Code of Maryland Regulations 09.20
5. Montgomery County Amendments to BOCA Code 1991
6. Local Gas Supplier Requirements
1.10 SPARE PARTS
A. Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for all manufactured
equipment and devices, included in its scope
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the following:
1. Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller:
a. Hammond Valve Corporation

b. Jomar International, Limited
c. Maxitrol Company
d. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Manufacturing Company
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
f. Mueller Company
g. National Meter
2. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller:
a. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated; Apollo Division

b. Core Industries, Incorporated; Mueller Steam Specialty Division
c. Huber: J.M. Huber Corporation; Flow Control Division
d. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Manufacturing Company

e. Milliken Valve Company, Incorporated

f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
g. Mueller Company
h. National Meter
i. Nordstrom Valves, Incorporated
j. Olson Technologies, Incorporated
3. Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger:
a. Core Industries, Incorporated; Mueller Steam Specialty Division

b. Huber: J.M. Huber Corporation; Flow Control Division
c. Milliken Valve Company, Incorporated
d. Nordstrom Valves, Incorporated
e. Olson Technologies, Incorporated
f. Xomox Corporation
4. Solenoid Valves:
a. Atkomatic Valve Company, Incorporated

b. Automatic Switch Company
c. Goyen Valve Corporation
d. Honeywell, Incorporated; Skinner Valve Division
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Controls
f. Magnatrol Valve Corporation
5. Gas Pressure Regulators:
a. American Meter Company

b. Equimeter, Incorporated
c. Fisher Controls International, Incorporated
d. Maxitrol Company
e. National Meter
f. Richards Industries, Incorporated; Jordan Valve Division
g. Schlumberger Industries; Gas Division
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type E, electric-resistance welded or Type S, seamless; Grade B;
Schedule 40; black.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 standard pattern, with threaded
ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1
B. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250.
D. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt-welding type; and ASME B16.11 forged
steel.

E. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
F. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, streamlined pattern.
G. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
H. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
I. Refer to Section 15050 for dielectric fitting requirements.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for joining materials not included in this Section.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing
phosphorus is prohibited.
C. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
D. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
2.5 VALVES
A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed or, where appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15
B. Gas Stops, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, bronze-body, plug type with bronze
plug, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel disc and
fluorocarbon elastomer seal, for 2-psig or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or
square head or lever handle, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
1. Locking Device: Include locking (tamperproof) feature.
C. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 150-psig WOG, bronze body, bronze
plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends conforming
to ASME B1.20.1.
D. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125-psig WOG, cast-iron body,
bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type, with threaded ends
conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
E. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: 125-psig WOG minimum, equivalent to
ASME B16.33, lubricated, straightaway pattern, and cast-iron or ductile-iron body. Include
tapered plug, O-ring seals, square or flat head, and threaded ends conforming to
ASME B1.20.1.
F. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: 125-psig WOG minimum, equivalent to
ASME B16.33, non-lubricated-plug type with poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) lining or
sleeve, straightaway pattern, cast-iron body. Include square or flat head and threaded ends
G. Gas Valves, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: AGA-certified, 350-psig non-shock, bronze-body,
butterfly valve with stainless steel disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal, for 2-psig or less

natural gas. Include AGA stamp, lever handle, and threaded ends conforming to
ASME B1.20.1.
H. Gas Valves, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: MSS SP-78, Class 125 or Class 175 WOG, non-
lubricated-plug type with poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) lining or sleeve, semi-steel body,
wrench operated, with flanged ends.
2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Automatic Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.21, for operation by appliance automatic shutoff
device. 2-inch NPS and smaller with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 and 2-
1/2-inch NPS and larger with flanged ends.
1. Operation: Mechanical.
2. Operation: Electrical.
B. Solenoid Valves: Bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body; 120 VAC, 60 Hz, Class B
continuous-duty molded coil; UL labeled and FM approved. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4,
and coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position is normally
closed. Include threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 for 2-inch NPS and smaller
and flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, single-stage, steel-jacketed, corrosion-resistant

pressure regulators. Include atmospheric vent, elevation compensator, with threaded ends
conforming to ASME B1.20.1 for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch
NPS and larger. Regulator pressure ratings, inlet and outlet pressures, and flow volume in
cubic feet per hour of natural gas at specific gravity are as indicated.
1. Service Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than natural gas
distribution system service pressure.
2. Line Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure.
3. Appliance Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system
pressure, with capacity and pressure setting matching appliance
4. Gas Pressure Regulator Vents: Factory- or field-installed corrosion-resistant screen
in opening when not connected to vent piping.
B. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.
C. Strainers: Y pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include stainless-steel screens with
3/64-inch (1.2-mm) perforations, except where other screens are indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum steam or 175-psig WOG working pressure,

except where otherwise indicated.
2. 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body, with threaded ends conforming to
ASME B1.20.1.
3. 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends.
4. Screwed screen retainer with centered blow-down and pipe plug.

D. Quick Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, ANSI Z21.41a, and ANSI Z21.41b convenience
outlets and matching plug connector.
2.8 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for
use in corrosive atmosphere. Coating properties include the following:
1. Applied to pipe and fittings treated with compatible primer before applying tape.
2. Overall Thickness: 20 mils (0.5 mm), synthetic adhesive.
3. Water-Vapor Transmission Rate: Maximum 0.10 gallons/100 square inches (0.59
L/sq. m)
4. Water Absorption: 0.02 percent maximum.
2.9 CONCRETE BASES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for concrete bases
for gas meters, gas pressure regulators, and specialties.
B. Concrete Bases: Pre-cast, reinforced, made of 3000-psig minimum 28-day compressive

strength concrete, and of dimensions not less than those indicated
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping.
Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all
equipment is turned off in affected piping section.
B. Comply with NFPA 54 Paragraph "Prevention of Accidental Ignition."
3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service) piping in
location and size indicated for gas service entrance to building.
1. Gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and gas meter are
specified in Division 2 Section "Gas Distribution Systems."
B. Install shutoff valve, downstream from gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance.
3.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, where indicated, for gas meters, gas
pressure regulators, and specialties.
3.4 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except
where otherwise indicated.
B. LPG (Low Pressure, 1-psig or Less, Natural Gas Systems): Use the following:
1. 1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints or Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
2. 1-1/4- to 4”-Inch NPS: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded
joints or steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints, or steel pipe,
butt-welding fittings, and welded.
3. 4-Inch NPS and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.
C. MPG (Medium-Pressure, 1 to 2-psig Natural Gas Systems) Use the following:
1. 1-Inch NPS and Smaller: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints or
Copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
2. 1-1/4-Inch NPS (DN32) and Larger: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded
joints.
D. Underground Natural Gas Systems, All Pressures: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and
welded joints. Encase gas carrier piping in containment conduits.
E. Underground Containment Conduits: Steel pipe, butt-welding fittings, and welded joints.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Use gas stops for shutoff to appliances with 2-inch NPS or smaller low-pressure gas
supply.
B. Use gas valves for shutoff to appliances with 2-1/2-inch NPS or larger low-pressure gas
supply and all sizes for medium-pressure gas supply.
C. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where
indicated.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight
conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent
conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject

to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as
plenums. Do not locate valves in such spaces.
2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in
"Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum
of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic
structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed
piping in concrete slabs containing quickset additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval
of authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space
above cover for ventilation.
4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in
"Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts,
clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or
dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where water may collect. Include outlets
of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not
install where water would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or
capped. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches
long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip
and floor for removal of plug or cap.
D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, and in floor channels, except where indicated to be exposed to view.
E. Install gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
G. Connect branch piping to top or side of horizontal piping.
H. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged
devices.
I. Install corrugated stainless-steel tube and fittings according to manufacturers written

instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is
restrained and cannot move.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve,
and elsewhere as indicated.
K. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with ferrous and brass or bronze end
connections, separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals is joined, at
outlet from gas meter and, where indicated, for ferrous piping.
L. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger
connections.
M. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install
expansion joints, expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated.

N. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and
vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with
corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.
O. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gas-tight conduits
extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate
vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in
large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar epoxy-polyamide paint
according to SSPC-Paint 16.
3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Use materials suitable for natural gas service.
1. Brazed Joints: Make joints with brazing alloy having melting point greater than 1000-
deg F (540-deg C). Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.
3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag
indicating piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain.
1. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for valve
tags.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags.
B. Install gas valve upstream from each gas pressure regulator. Where 2 gas pressure
regulators are installed in series, valve is not required at second regulator.
C. Install pressure relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to
determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and
examine for leakage when in closed position.
3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. 1/2-Inch NPS Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
2. 3/4- and 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
3. 1-1/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
4. 1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
5. 2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch
6. 4-Inch NPS and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch
C. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. 3/8-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch

2. 1/2- and 5/8-Inch NPS (DN15 and DN18): Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod
size, 3/8 inch
3. 3/4- and 7/8-Inch NPS (DN20 and DN22): Maximum span, 84 inches, minimum rod
size, 3/8 inch
4. 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 96 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
D. Support vertical pipe and tube at each floor.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Install gas piping next to equipment and appliances using gas to allow service and
maintenance.
B. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions.
Install gas valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using gas. Install
union or flanged connection downstream from valve. Include flexible connectors when
indicated.
C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom forming drip, as close as
practical to inlet for appliance using gas.
D. Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.11 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
A. Install aboveground portions of natural gas piping systems that are upstream from
equipment shutoff valves, electrically continuous, and bonded to grounding electrode
according to NFPA 70.
B. Do not use gas piping as grounding electrode.
A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection,
Testing, and Purging" and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties.
E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
3.13 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
safety devices.


SECTION 15460 - WATER HEATERS
SECTION 15460 - WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes residential electric water heaters.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division 3
2. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
3. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Specialties”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed,
and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions,
required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring
connections.
C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical

power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type-wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls.
Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are
to be field installed.
D. Certificates of shop inspection and data report as required by provisions of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
A. UL Standards: Provide water heaters complying with the following:
WATER HEATERS 15460 - 1/5

1. UL 174, "Commercial Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters."
B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components complying with NFPA 70

"National
Electrical Code."
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled.
1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in the National Electrical
Code, Article 100.
D. ASME Code Compliance: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves that comply
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and that bear the appropriate code
symbols.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than
prescribed in ASHRAE 90A, "Energy Conservation in New Building Design."
F. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types and capacities of water heaters and are
based on specific descriptions and manufacturers indicated. Water heaters having
equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided
that deviations in capacities, dimensions, operation, or other characteristics are minor
and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the
Architect. Burden of proof for equality of water heaters is on the proposer.
G. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for electrical
components.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer,

agreeing to repair or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship
within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks,
coils, and burners. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other
rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty period is 10 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Commercial Electrictial Water Heaters:
a. A.O. Smith Water Products Company Division; A.O. Smith Corporation

b. Lockinvar Water Heater Corporation
c. State Industries, Incorporated
d. Rheem Manufacturing
2.2 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Automatic, Commercial Electric, ASME labeled, 160-psig-rated tank;

with integral controls, brass drain valve, and (T&P) relief valve.
B. Jacket: Heavy gauge steel, with baked-on enamel finish.
C. Controls: Adjustable thermostat.
D. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and labeled.
H. Vacuum Relief Valve: ANSI Z21.22.
I. Size and capacity as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. General: Install water heaters on concrete bases. Set and connect units in accordance
with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level,
firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturers recommended
clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.
B. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping; thermometers are specified
in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and

maintenance.
2. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions.
Extend relief valve discharge to closest floor drain.
a. Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make

connections with dielectric fittings or dielectric unions specified in
Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods."
b. Install vacuum relief valve in cold water inlet piping.
3. Install drain as indirect waste to spill into open drain or over floor drain.
a. Install drain valve at low point in water piping, for water heaters not
having tank drain.
B. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division
16. Arrange wiring to allow for unit servicing.
1. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National

Electrical Code.
A. General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate and train Owner's
maintenance personnel as specified below.
1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up

and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.
1. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1

Section "Project Closeout."
2. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice.
3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Perform the following before start-up final checks:
1. Fill water heaters with water.

2. Piping systems test complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Test operation of safety controls and devices.
B. Perform the following start-up procedures:
1. Energize circuits.
2. Adjust operating controls.
3. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting.

SECTION 15452 - PLUMBING PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of pumps for permanent installation in plumbing
systems:
1. In line recirculating pump.
1. Division 15 Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

2. Division 15 Section 15170 Motors.
3. Division 15 Section 15411 Water Distribution Piping.
4. Division 16 Electrical Sections as applicable.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. Product data including certified performance curves, weights (shipping, installed,

and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories; include startup instructions
2. Shop drawings showing layout and connections for pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts,
and other anchorages.
3. Installation, and operations and maintenance manuals
4. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems
differentiating between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
5. Product certificates signed by pump manufacturers certifying accuracy under
specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:
1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for piping materials and installation.
2. HI. "Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating
Pumps" for pump design, manufacture, and installation.
3. UL 778 "Standard for Motor Operated Water Pumps" for construction
requirements. Include UL listing and labeling.
4. NEMA MG 1 "Standard for Motors and Generators" for electric motors. Include
NEMA listing and labeling.
5. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for electrical components and installation.
PLUMBING PUMPS 15452 - 1/5

B. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models
indicated. Pumps having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may
be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the
design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof
for equality of pumps is on the proposer.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULE
A. As indicated in specifications 15411.
A. Refer to contract drawing schedule.
A. Store pumps in a clean, dry location.
B. Retain shipping flanges, protective covers, and protective coatings during storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.
D. Extended Storage Longer Than 5 Days: Dry internal parts with hot air or a
vacuum-producing device. After drying, coat internal parts with light oil, kerosene, or
antifreeze. Dismantle bearings and couplings, dry and coat with an acid-free heavy oil,
and tag and store in a dry location.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
1.8 SPARE PARTS
A. Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's recommended spare parts for all equipment
provided under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following or approved equal:
1. In-line recirculating:
a. Bell & Gossett Series 60

b. Taco 1600
c. Thrush 6T
d. Aurora
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Plumbing Pumps: Factory assembled and tested, and of construction required for
permanent installation.
B. Motors: NEMA MG 1; Motor shall meet all characteristics indicated on drawings. Include
built-in thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Motors are
non-overloading within full range of pump performance curves.
C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested plumbing

pump unit prior to shipping.
D. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed-machined metal

surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect
flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATING PUMP
A. Design:
1. Cast iron casing designed for 175-psig working pressure.

2. Bronze fitted with bronze impeller.
3. Carbon steel shafts and stainless steel or brass shaft sleeves.
4. Provide gauge tappings on both suction & discharge of pump casing or flange.
5. Back pull out feature to permit disassembly without disconnecting piping.
6. Provide companion flanges.
7. Spring type coupler is acceptable.
B. Connections:
1. 2" and smaller: Screwed

2. 2 1/2" and larger: 125-psi ANSI flanges
C. Seals (provide standard type):
1. Mechanical seals:
a. Designed for closed system with positive suction pressure.

b. Select temperature, pressure and service as recommended by
manufacturer.
c. Provide 1 spare set of seals per pump for post warranty replacement.
d. Provide additional seals during warranty period.
2. Packing seals:
a. Seal shaft sleeves through stuffing box with teflon-asbestos packing rings,
and locking type throat bushings.
b. Provide lubricant piping connection.
c. Provide galvanized drain pan with NPT connection for drain.
D. Bearings: Regreaseable ball bearings with grease fittings.
E. Wearing Rings: Bronze, with renewable casing and impeller wearing rings

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions with Installer present for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance
of pumps. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations and event of
piping connections prior to pump installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with pump manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Install pumps in locations indicated and arrange to provide access for periodic
maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so that weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Connect piping to pumps as indicated. Install valves that are same size as
piping connecting to pumps.
B. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
C. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
D. Electrical power connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, alternating and alarm
operation as required for system application
B. Follow the instructions in the installation Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals tasks precedent to this section
B. Final Checks Before Startup: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations
and checks before startup:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings.

2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers and flush bearings with kerosene and
thoroughly clean. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper rotation. Rotation shall match
direction of rotation marked on pump casing.

C. Check that pumps are free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump, if bound or even
drags slightly, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
1. Check that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valves for proper
flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage
through stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
4. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
PART 4 - QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conform to all applicable provisions indicated in General Instructions of this contract.

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
Part – 1 GENERAL
1.1 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. The Contractor shall conform to the General Conditions
1.2 WORK INCUDED

A. The work of this section shall include furnishing all labor and material for complete
installation of all plumbing fixtures with fittings, trim, supports and appurtenances as
specified herein and shown on the drawings.
B. All fixture and trim shall comply with the International Plumbing Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit plumbing fixture information in an assembled brochure, showing cuts and full
detailed description of each fixture.

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI):
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

A112.6.1M-02 ……………..Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures
For Public Use
A112.19.1M-04……………..Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing fixtures
A112.19.2M-03……………..Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
A112.19.3-2001…………..Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed

For Residential Use)
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): NAAMM AMP

500-505
Metal Finishes Manual (1988)
D. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):

1016-05…………………..Performance Requirements for Individual
Thermostatic, Pressure Balancing and Combination
Pressure balancing and Thermostatic Control
Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings
E. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61-2000
F. American with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.) Section 4-19.4 Exposed
Pipes and Surfaces

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1/8

A. The manufacturers referenced herein are those in which the specifications and
drawings are based. Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered provided
they are equal in every respect to those listed.
2.2 STOPS
A. Provide lock-shield loose key or screw driver pattern angle stops, straight stops or
stops integral with faucet, with each compression type faucet whether specifically
called for or not, including sinks and lavatories. Locate stops centrally below fixture in
accessible location.
B. Furnish keys for lock shield stops to Resident Engineer
C. Supply from stops not integral with faucet shall be chrome plated copper flexible
tubing or flexible stainless steel with inner core of non-toxic polymer.
D. Supply pipe from wall to valve stop shall be rigid threaded IPS copper alloy pipe, i.e.
red brass pipe nipple.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
Heavy type, chrome plated, with set screws. Provide for piping
serving plumbing fixtures and at each wall, ceiling and floor
penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets
and millwork.
2.4 CARRIERS
A. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, with adjustable gasket faceplate chair carriers for wall hung
closets with auxiliary anchor foot assembly, hanger rod support feet, and rear anchor
tie down.
B. ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M, lavatory, chair carrier for thin wall construction steel plate.
All lavatory chair carriers shall be capable of supporting the lavatory with a 250-
pound vertical load applied at the front of the fixture.
C. Where water closets, lavatories or sinks are installed back-to-back and carriers are
specified, provide one carriers to serve both fixtures in lieu of individual carriers. The
drainage fitting of the back to back carrier shall be so constructed that it prevents the
discharge from on fixture from flowing into the opposite fixture.
2.5 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Water Closet: WC-1

1. Vitreous China wall hung flushometer toilet with elongated rim consumption 1.6
Gallon per flush,1-1/2 top spud inlet. Model TOTO CT708
2. Seat: TOTO SC534 Open Front Seat Less Cover

3. Flush Valve: Sloan Ecos – 8111-1.6 / 1.1

D. Water Closet: WC-2 (ADA)

1. Vitreous China wall hung flushometer toilet with elongated rim. Low
consumption 1.6 Gallon per flush,1-1/2 top spud inlet. Model TOTO CT708
2. Seat: TOTO SC534 Open Front Seat Less Cover
3. Flush Valve: Sloan Ecos – 8111-1.6 / 1.1
E. Urinal: UR-1
1. Vitreous China Wall Hung, Wall Hanger, Color Cotton White Outlet
Connection Bolts and Washer. Sloan WES-500 Waterless.
F. Lavatory: L-1
1. Fire Clay Lavatory Undermount, TOTO LT156
2. Faucet Sloan ETF-660
3. Drain: Cast or Wrought Brass with Flat Grid Strainer, Offset Tailpiece, Brass,
Chrome Plated.
4. Stop: Angle Type
5. Trap: Cast copper alloy ( 1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with
connected elbow and 17 gauge tubing extension to wall. Exposed metal trap
surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth
bright finish. Set Trap parallel to the wall.
G. Lavatory: L-2 (ADA)

1. Fire Clay Lavatory Undermount, TOTO LT156
2. Faucet Sloan ETF-660
Chrome Plated.
4. Stop: Angle Type
5. Trap: Cast copper alloy ( 1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with
6. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per ADA.
H. Lavatory: L-3 (ADA)

1. Vitreous China Wall Mounted Kohler Model K-2084 SOHO
2. Faucet Sloan ETF–660
Chrome Plated.
4. Stop: Angle Type
5. Trap: Cast copper alloy (1-1/2 by 1-1/4) inch P-Trap. Adjustable with
6. Provide cover for drain, stops and trap per ADA.
I. Electric Water Cooler: EWH-1

1. Elkay EDFP217RAC
J. Mop Sink: MS-1

1.Acorn TSH-24-KF24
2.Mop and Broom Holder Bobrick B-223
K. Kitchen Sink: KS-1

1. Dayton 23321
2. Faucet Delta 29C2801
L. Kitchen Sink: KS-2

1. Dayton GE12521L
2. Faucet Delta 29C2801
M. Wall Hydrant: WH1

1. Zurn Model Z-1300
N. Shower: Sh-1
1. Bricor B150CH-HH
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 FIXTURES
A. All plumbing fixtures and trim shall be new as manufactured by
firms regularly engaged in the manufactured of plumbing fixtures
and trim of type style and configuration required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use and similar service.
B. Provide protection of all fixtures during construction from damage. Replace all
damaged fixtures as directed by the Architect.
C. Each water supply connection to each fixture and each item of water consuming
equipment shall be equipped with an accessible stop valve.
D. All flush valves shall be quiet diaphragm type with integral screwdriver stops, vacuum
breakers and have non-hold-open water-saving feature.
E. All wall-hung fixtures shall be supported with floor mounted fixture supports designed
and fitted to suit the fixture and building construction.
F. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate and assemble proper selection and

installation of all necessary sleeves, stiffeners, nailing strips, supports, wall hangers,
trap assemblies, supplies, drainage fittings and electronic flushing requirements for
all fixtures and trim furnished.
G. All exposed bolt heads on water closets shall be covered with acorns or covers made
from china, stainless steel, or chrome plated brass.
H. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be provided with all necessary stops,
valves, traps, supplies and appurtances required, except where specifically provided
for by another contract.

I. All handicapped fixtures indicated and shown on the plumbing and Architectural
drawings shall comply with ADA.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for portable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and
vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing
fixtures.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be
installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations

and locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated, and of
type required:
1. Carriers for following fixtures:
a. Wall-hanging urinals
b. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks
c. Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's
written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.
B. Fasten wall hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building

substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction.
C. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.
D. Install stop valve in an accessible location on each water supply to each fixture.
E. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.
F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where
required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
G. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
H. Install floor mounted and floor outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and
flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturer's recommended
cleaning methods and materials.
F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section
"Project Closeout".
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by
the COTR.
PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after
units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then
retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.
4.2 TEST OF WATER COOLERS
A. General: Start-up, adjust and test equipment performance.
B. Verity performance of refrigeration compressor including proper operation of automatic

reset overload protection.
C. Check compressor mountings for vibration free operation.
D. Verify proper operation of condenser fan including obstruction free rotation, cleanliness
and lubrication.

E. Inspect air circulation through condenser coil; remove dirt, lint, and vacuum coil clean.
F. Inspect electrical wiring termination for tightness and/or corrosion including relays, and
aquastats.
G. Adjust factory setting of water adjustment valve to obtain optimum bubbler operation.
H. Inspect water piping and reservoir for evidence of leaks.
I. Inspect and clean drain pan.
4.3 INSPECTIONS
A. Contractor shall coordinate with the Quality Control Engineer before the installation of
plumbing fixtures. The Contractor shall seek the guidance in any installation
procedures he is unfamiliar with.
B. Periodic inspections of the installations of the materials specified in this section shall be
performed and reported in writing to the Contractor, including any deviation from good
installation practice observed.
C. On completion of installation the Quality Control Engineer shall inspect the complete
system and report in writing any installation error, improperly selected devices, or other
fault in the system that could impair the performance of the system.
D. A report shall be submitted by the Contractor to the COTR, including the final report of
the Quality Control Engineer, indicating all materials reported as properly installed or
requiring correction. The Contractor shall also report on steps taken to properly
complete the work.

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:
1. Backflow preventers
2. Water regulators.
3. Balancing valves.
4. Thermostatic water mixing valves.
5. Water tempering valves.
6. Strainers.
7. Outlet boxes.
8. Washer-supply outlets.
9. Hose stations.
10. Key-operated hydrants.
11. Wheel-handle wall hydrants.
12. Trap seal primer valves.
13. Drain valves.
14. Backwater valves.
15. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
16. Sleeve penetration systems.
17. Flashing materials.
18. Clean-outs
19. Floor drains.
20. Roof drains.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, and
pressure gages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1/18

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 125-psig (860-kPa)

2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30-kPa).
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30-kPa).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights.
Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly
of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.

2. Balancing valves, water filters, and strainers.
3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
4. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
5. Drain valves, hose bibbs, hydrants, and hose stations.
6. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
7. Backwater valves, clean-outs, floor drains, open receptors, trench drains, and roof
drains.
8. Air-admittance valves, vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
9. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field test reports.
D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include

the following:
1. Backflow preventers and water regulators.

2. Water filters.
3. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves.
4. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
5. Hose stations and hydrants.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

plumbing specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section “Product Requirements."
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping," for piping
materials and installation.
E. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for
plastic domestic water piping components. Include marking “NSF-pw" on plastic
potable-water piping and “NSF-dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects,
Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed and that are
contents.
1. Water Filter Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount installed for each type and
size indicated.
2. Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each key-
operated hose bibb and hydrant installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited
to, the manufacturers specified.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. Ames Company, Incorporated

2. Sparco, Incorporated
3. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
4. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Wilkins Division
B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or Stainless steel body
with flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow

preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.

4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
5. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.

C. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
atmospheric vent.
D. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with non-removable and
manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units
attached to rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
E. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Back-flow preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for

continuous pressure application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves
with intermediate atmospheric vent.
F. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous

pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and
strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-
gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12-psig (83-kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
G. Double Check Back-flow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test
cocks; and two positive-seating check valves.
H. Anti-siphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous

pressure application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded
floating disc, test cocks, and atmospheric vent.
I. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1024, suitable for continuous

pressure application. Include union inlet and two independent check valves.
J. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved

or UL listed and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and
yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-
differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between two positive-
seating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and
reduced-pressure back-flow preventer.
K. Hose-Connection Back-flow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least 3-gpm (0.19-
L/s) flow and applications with up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
Include two check valves; intermediate atmospheric vent; and non-removable,
ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads on outlet.
L. Back-Siphonage Back-flow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for continuous

pressure and back-flow applications. Include shutoff valves, check valve, test cocks, and
vacuum vent.
2.3 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with two readout ports and memory setting
indicator. Include manufacturer's standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure
meter, and carrying case.

1. Available Manufacturers:
c. Armstrong-Yoshitake, Incorporated
d. Flow Design, Incorporated
e. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Division
f. Taco, Incorporated
g. Tour & Andersson, Incorporated
h. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob,
calibrated nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and
threaded ends.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and
flanged or grooved ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve,
rated for 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with
standard or full-port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, threaded or
solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
a. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated

b. Crane Company; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves
c. Crane Company; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves
d. Crane Company; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division
e. Grinnell Corporation
f. Hammond Valve
g. Milwaukee Valve Company
h. NIBCO Incorporated
i. Red-White Valve Corporation
2.4 THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES
1. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Incorporated

2. Leonard Valve Company
3. Mark Controls Corporation, Powers Process Controls
4. Symmons Industries, Incorporated
5. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Incorporated
B. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze
body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable
temperature setting, and thermometer.
1. Type: Bimetal thermostat, operation and pressure rating 125-psig (860-kPa)

minimum
2. Type: Liquid-filled motor, operation and pressure rating 100-psig (690-kPa)
minimum.
C. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:

1. Piping, valves, and unions.

2. Piping Component Finish: Rough bronze.
3. Cabinet: Recessed-mounting steel box with steel hinged door, white enameled
finish, and thermometer in front.
2.5 WATER TEMPERING VALVES
1. Heat-Timer Corporation
2. Holby Valve Company, Incorporated
3. Sparco, Incorporated
B. General: Manually adjustable, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve; bronze

body; and adjustable temperature setting.
C. System Water Tempering Valves: Piston or discs controlling both hot- and cold-water
flow, capable of limited anti-scald protection. Include threaded inlets and outlet.
1. Finish: Chrome plated
D. Limited-Volume, Water Tempering Valves: Solder-joint inlets and NPS 3/4 (DN 20)
maximum outlet.
2.6 STRAINERS
A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of connecting piping.
Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel screens with 3/64-inch (1.2-mm) round
perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum steam working pressure, unless

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-
approved, epoxy coating and flanged ends.
4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blow-down.
a. Drain: Factory- or field installed, hose-end drain valve.
5. T-Pattern Strainers: Malleable-iron or ductile-iron body with grooved ends; access

end cap with drain plug and access coupling with rubber gasket.
6. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out handle.
a. Type: Simplex with one basket.

b. Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
B. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with

bolted flange or clamp cover and drain with plug.
1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 1/8- or 3/16-inch- (3.2- or 4.8-mm-) diameter
holes and lift-out handle.
2. Female threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, and flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2.7 OUTLET BOXES
1. Acorn Engineering Company

2. Gray, Guy Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
3. IPS Corporation
4. LSP Products Group
5. Oatey
6. Plastic Oddities, Incorporated
8. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Jonespec Division
B. General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with supply fittings complying with

ASME A112.18.1M. Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment
connections, and wood-blocking reinforcement.
C. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hot- and cold-water hose connections, drain, and the
following:
1. Box and Faceplate: Stainless steel.

2. Shutoff Fittings: Two hose bibbs
3. Supply Fittings: Two NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2
(DN 15) copper, water tubing.
4. Drain: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) standpipe, P-trap, and direct waste connection to
drainage piping.
5. Inlet Hoses: Two ASTM D 3571, 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household
clothes washer inlet hoses with female hose-thread couplings.
6. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- (1200-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer
drain hose with hooked end.
2.8 WASHER-SUPPLY OUTLETS
1. B & K Industries, Incorporated

2. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated
3. IMI Cash Valve
6. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Jonespec Division
7. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation
B. Description: Surface-mounting, washer-supply outlet fittings complying with

ASME A112.18.1M and with reinforcement. Include the following:
1. Shutoff Fitting: Combination, single lever.

2. Supply Fittings: Two NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2
(DN 15) copper, water tubing.
3. Inlet Hoses: Two ASTM D 3571, 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household
clothes washer inlet hoses with female hose-thread couplings.
C. Reinforcement: 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking between

studs.

2.9 KEY-OPERATED HYDRANTS
1. Josam Company
2. Murdock, Incorporated
3. Simmons Manufacturing Company
4. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
5. Tyler Pipe; Wade Division
6. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division
7. Woodford Manufacturing Company
B. Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-draining with flush-

mounting box with cover, integral non-removable hose-connection vacuum breaker or
back-flow preventer, casing and operating rod to match wall thickness, concealed outlet,
and wall clamp.
1. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
2. Box and Cover Finish: Satin chrome plate.
C. Moderate-Climate, Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: ASSE 1019, self-draining with flush-

mounting box with cover, integral non-removable hose-connection vacuum breaker or
back-flow preventer, and concealed outlet.
1. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for
automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.
D. Hot and Cold, Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Wall Hydrants: With deep flush-mounting
box with cover; hot- and cold-water casings and operating rods to match wall thickness;
concealed outlet; wall clamps; and factory- or field-installed, non-removable and manual
drain-type, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or back-flow
preventer complying with ASSE 1052.
E. Non-freeze Concealed-Outlet Ground Hydrants: Draining type with flush-mounting box

with cover, casing and operating rod of at least length required for burial of valve below
frost line, drain hole, and garden-hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1. Box and Cover Finish: Rough bronze.
2.10 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the
following characteristics:
a. E & S Valves
b. Josam Company
c. MIFAB Manufacturing, Incorporated
d. Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated
e. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Division

g. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division

h. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
i. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Jonespec Division
j. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation
2. 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure

3. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
5. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
6. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
B. Drainage-Type Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1044, fixture-trap, waste-drainage-fed

type, with the following characteristics:
a. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
2. Chrome-plated, cast-brass, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum, lavatory P-trap with
NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup connection.
C. Trap Seal Primer System: Factory-fabricated, automatic-operation assembly for wall

mounting with the following:
a. Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated
2. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper,
water tubing inlet and manifold with number of NPS 1/2 (DN 15) outlets as
indicated.
3. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover.
4. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac
power.
5. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010.
6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
2.11 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, rated for 400-psig
(2760-kPa) minimum CWP. Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-
covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
B. Hose-End Drain Valve: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads
on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig (1380-kPa)
minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with
NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side drain outlet and cap.

2.12 BACKWATER VALVES
1. Josam Company
2. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
3. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Drainage Products Division
4. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation
B. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removable bronze
swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover.
1. Closed-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang closed

unless subject to back-flow condition.
2. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field-modified to hang open for
airflow.
3. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class, full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to
field-installed clean-out at floor, instead of cover.
C. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float,
threaded inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet for installation in bottom outlet of floor drain.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, metal-bellows type with
pressurized metal cushioning chamber. Sizes indicated are based on ASSE 1010 or
PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
a. Josam Company
b. Smith, Jay R. Manufacturing Company
c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Division
d. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Specification Drainage Operation
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with replaceable seat disc complying with ASME A112.18.1M
for compression-type faucets. Include NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or
solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for pressure of at least 125-psig (860-kPa); integral or
field-installed, non-removable, drain-able hose-connection vacuum breaker; and garden-
hose threads complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.
1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

2. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze, chrome or nickel-plated.
C. Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm,

designed to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer
gas into building.
a. B & K Industries, Incorporated

b. Durgo, Incorporated
c. IMI Cash Valve
d. IPS Corporation
e. J & B Products

f. Magic Vent Company, Incorporated

g. Oatey
h. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
i. Studor, Incorporated
2. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste,
and vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in NPS 2 to NPS 4
(DN 50 to DN 100).
3. Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping, instead
of vent connection, for single fixture, in NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50).
D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m),
0.0938-inch- (2.4-mm-)] thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) from pipe with galvanized steel boot reinforcement, and counter-flashing fitting.
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Division
2. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

3. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
4. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
E. Open Drains: Shop or field-fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting, joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and clean-out trap seal primer valve connection.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.
G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and
trap seal primer valve connection.
H. Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: Manufactured cast-iron or bronze drainage fitting with semi-open
top with threads or device to secure drainage inlet piping in top and bottom spigot or
threaded outlet larger than top inlet. Include design complying with ASME A112.1.2 that
will provide fixed air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
I. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counter-flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extension of vent pipe.
J. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
K. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof

assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide
1-inch (25-mm) enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar
extension, with counter-flashing.
L. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing; of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
M. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron casting, with NPS 4 (DN 100)
outlet; shop-applied bituminous coating; and inlet size to match downspout.

N. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
O. Conductor Nozzles: Bronze body with threaded inlet for connected conductor size, and
bronze wall flange with mounting holes.
1. Finish: Nickel bronze.
2.14 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
1. ProSet Systems, Incorporated
B. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration fire-stop assembly consisting of sleeve and

stack fitting with fire-stopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48 (ASTM A 48M), gray-iron, hub-less pattern, wye-branch
stack fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release
harness in branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for

plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.15 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weight and thickness, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152 (ASTM B 152M), of the following minimum weights and
thickness, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12-oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8-oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and
0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275)
hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-
mm) minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.16 CLEANOUTS
A. Clean-outs: Comply with ASME A112.36.2M] [ASME A112.3.1.
B. Traffic area floor clean-out:
1. Cast iron body.

2. Spigot or non-hub connection
3. Internal gasketed ABS clean-out plug
4. Adjustable ABS housing
5. Heavy duty cast iron tractor cover with round top
C. Non-traffic area floor clean-out:
1. Cast iron body.

2. Spigot or Non-hub connection.
3. Internal gasketed Clean-out plug.
4. Adjustable ABS housing.
5. Nikaloy cover and round top.
D. Inline cast iron pipe clean-outs:
1. Cast iron with straight body for spigot connection or inside caulk with bronze plug.
2. Use No-hub cap for clean-out on No-hub piping.
E. In line screwed pipe clean-out: Cast bronze countersunk plug.
F. Stack clean-outs: Clean-out tee with cast bronze countersunk threaded plug.
G. Wall clean-outs:
1. Clean-out tee with cast bronze countersunk threaded plug.

2. Square Nikaloy frame.
3. Cover with minimum 6” by 6” opening.
2.17 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains, Comply with ASME A112.21.1M, ASME A112.21.1M with ASME A112.14.1,
backwater valve, or ASME A112.3.1 as applicable..
B. FD-1: Cast iron floor drain, two piece body with double drainage flange, invertible non-
puncturing flashing collar, weep holes, bottom outlet and adjustable round extended rim
strainer. Similar to Josam 3000-E1.
C. FD-2: Similar to FD-1 without extended rim strainer with EJ tractor strainer.
2.18 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof Drain type designations and sizes indicated on Drawings (RD-1 through RD-36)
B. RD-1 Roof Drain:
1. Bottom outlet cast iron body.

2. Clamping ring and gravel guard.
3. Aluminum dome enclosing entire drain sum.
4. Expansion joint.
5. Acceptable manufacturer and product: Josam Series 21500.
2.19 INLINE CIRCULATING PUMP
A. Circulation pump shall be of the electric motor driven “in-line” type, having a capacity of
not less than indicated on the drawings.
B. Pump shall be of the centrifugal type and shall be designed in accordance with the
standards of the Hydraulic Institute, including latest modifications. Pump shall operate at
a speed not in excess of 1750 rpm and shall be designed for quiet operation. Pump shall
be designed to permit complete servicing without breaking the piping connections.
1. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure.

2. Impeller: Bronze
3. Shaft: Alloy steel, with integral thrust collar and two lubricated bronze sleeve
bearings.
4. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
5. Drive: Flexible couplings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install back-flow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems
and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.
Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Locate back-flow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for back-flow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with
air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least
two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device
attached to or under back-flow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for
this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around back-flow preventers.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid
valve.
E. Install draining-type ground and ground post hydrants with 1 cu. yd. (0.75 cu. m) of
crushed gravel around drain hole.

1. Set ground hydrants with box flush with grade.

2. Set post hydrants in concrete paving or in 1 cu. ft. (0.03 cu. m) of concrete block at
grade.
F. Install trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap with a
minimum slope of 1 percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust
valve for proper flow.
G. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide clean-
out deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate
size to remove valve cover for servicing.
H. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors if indicated.
I. Install clean-outs in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for
larger drainage piping unless larger clean-out is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and
smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
J. Install clean-out deck plates with top flush with finished floor, for floor clean-outs for
piping below floors.
K. Install clean-out wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
finished wall, for clean-outs located in concealed piping.
L. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and clean-out passing through
floors with waterproof membrane.
M. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-
mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
O. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor
drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area
radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1-percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1-percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1-percent slope, but
not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
P. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
Q. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building

substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is
indicated.
R. Fasten recessed type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
S. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounted and recessed-type plumbing

specialties.
T. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball,
gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible
locations. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check,
gate, and globe valves.
U. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet [and drain
piping from outlet to floor drain].
V. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless
trap is indicated.
W. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16
Sections.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-
mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m),
0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches
(250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
(200 mm) around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter-flashing or commercially
made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having caulking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment

nameplate or sign on or near each back-flow preventer, thermostatic water mixing valve,
water tempering valve, and trap seal primer system.
1. Text: Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational

requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards
and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification” for nameplates and signs.

inspect field-assembled trap seal primer systems and their installation, including piping
and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace
with new units, and retest.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain trap seal primer systems. Refer to Division 1
Section “Closeout Procedures.”

CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems, including
drains and drainage specialties.
1. Division 2
2. Division 7
3. Division 9
4. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification."
5. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
6. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data for plumbing piping products including piping specialties and drains.
C. Coordination drawings, drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information for all products in accordance with the
requirements of Specification Section 01730.
A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing, and roof penetrations.
B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining substrate

work.
C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain
elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.
D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface
building drains with drainage piping systems.
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 - 1/10

CONSTRUCTION
A. Comply with the provisions of the following:
1. Requirements and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction

2. International Plumbing Code 1997
3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Regulations
4. American National Standards (ANSI) Institute
5. “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook."
A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B 31.9 “Building Services Piping" for materials, products
and installation.
1.7 TRAINING
A. Training shall be in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01731.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactures offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to:
1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains, trap
primers, and vent caps:
a. Josam Company
b. Smith (Jay R) Manufacturing Company
c. Tyler Pipe; Subsidiary of Tyler Corporation
d. Zurn Industries Incorporated; Hydromechanics Division
e. MIFAB Incorporated
2. Non-Metallic Trench Drains:
a. Polydrain ABT Incorporated

b. Quazite Corporation
c. ACO Drain Incorporated
2.2 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTING
A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings.
1. Clamps and compression gaskets: ASTM C564 neoprene rubber gasket.
B. Hub-less Cast Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and
fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. Stainless steel worm-drive
clamps.

CONSTRUCTION
C. Galvanized steel: ASTM A-53, schedule 40, fittings, black cast iron. Joints shall be screwed
ASME B 16.12. Threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1
2.3 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Heavy weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and
fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside
surfaces.
1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
B. Force-Main Pipe: Ductile iron AWWA C 151, class 50 with mechanical joint.
1. Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends conforming to
AWWA C 110 or AWWA C 153.
2. Encase in polyethylene film.
2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover.
Flapper shall provide a maximum 1/4-inch clearance between flapper and seat for air
circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.
B. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2-inch connections
matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.
C. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts.
D. Clean-out Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk
head.
E. Floor Clean-outs: Cast-iron body and frame, with clean-out plug and adjustable round top as
follows:
1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:
a. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8-inch thick resilient floor finish.
b. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1-inch thick terrazzo floor finish.
c. Exposed finish type, standard mill finish.
d. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.
2. Cast iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:
a. Exposed flush type, standard mill finish.

b. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finishes.
F. Wall Clean-outs: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass clean-out plug;
stainless steel cover including screws.
G. Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring.
Provide under-deck clamp and sleeve length as required.
H. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron
threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks.

CONSTRUCTION
2.5 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.
B. Floor Drain: FD-1:
1. Cast iron, two-piece body, double drainage flange-flashing collar, weep holes, bottom
outlet, with the following features:
a. Adjustable nickel bronze round strainer.

b. 1/2" primer tap.
c. Secure grate, vandal-proof.
2. Josam 30000 - A Series
C. Floor Drain: FD-2:
1. Cast-iron, double drainage flange, weep holes, bottom outlet, with the following
features:
a. Adjustable nickel bronze round strainer in adjustable nickel bronze clamping

collar.
b. Deep seal trap.
c. Secure grate, vandal-proof.
2. Josam 30200 - AD Series
a. Secure grate, vandal-proof
3. Josam 30000 - D Series
2.6 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.
B. Roof Drain: RD-1:
1. Cast-iron body, large polypropylene locking dome, clamp ring, with integral gravel
stop, with the following features:
a. Support ring.
b. Adjustable top with wide roof flange.
c. Large sump with anchor flange and bottom outlet
d. Deck clamp assembly.
2. Josam 21,000 Series
C. Roof Drain: RD-2 (For Canopy Roof)
1. Coated cast iron, sill drain, secured low bronze dome, bronze clamp ring shallow sump
with flashing flange and side outlet threaded connection.
a. Deck clamp assembly.

b. Vandal-proof dome

CONSTRUCTION
2. Josam 24520 Series
D. Vertical Expansion Joint: Coated cast iron body, packing gland and silicone bronze sleeve
with preformed neoprene packing gasket. Zurn Z-190.
2.7 PIPE SLEEVE ABOVE CEILING
A. PVC plastic pipe: ASTM D1785-83, schedule 40.
B. Fittings: Field fabricated.
2.8 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Plumbing Valves."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to
installations.
B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and
specialties are to be installed.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS
A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock,
throughout the length of the pipe.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be
laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference.
Fill unevenness with tampered sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the
bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the
foundation.
3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING
A. Install hub and spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with compression gasket joints for
larger than 3-inch drainage and vent pipe.
B. Install hub-less, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage
and vent pipe.

CONSTRUCTION
C. Install galvanized steel pipe for storm system piping, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install galvanized steel pipe for vent piping systems. (Optional)
3.4 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING
A. Install hub-and-spigot, extra heavy weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasket joints
for 15 inches and smaller drainage pipe.
3.5 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, OUTSIDE BUILDING FOUNDATION DRAIN.
A. Install 4-inch diameter schedule 40, PVC perforated drainage pipe placed within the granular
sub-base.
3.6 INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper
insulation applications.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch
and larger shall be sheet metal.
H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and
floors, maintain the fire rated integrity.
I. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,
half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short
quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction
of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed
back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on
vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where
different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard
increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited.
J. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance
with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fitting Handbook. Lay underground building drains
beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

CONSTRUCTION
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other
special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it
is completed.
1. Keep drainage pipe starts at a minimum to ensure maintenance of noted invert

elevations.
K. Install drains pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inch
smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 3 inch to 6 inch.
1. Where noted or required, install at 1/16 inch per foot for piping 8 inch or larger.
L. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service
entrance to building. Sewer piping is specified in a separate section.
M. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation.
A. Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section “Hangers and
Supports"
B. Install hangers at intervals indicated in plumbing code.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Contractor shall provide roof drains, floor drains and all specialties as specified or shown,
with all required accessories for a complete installation.
B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers as required by the plumbing code. Special attention
shall be required for roof drains and rain leaders draining the high dome / skylight roof areas.
C. Above Ground Clean-outs: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as
indicated and as required by plumbing code.
1. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees;

2. At minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" smaller and 100' for larger piping;
3. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack;
4. Ceiling clean-outs are not permitted.
D. Clean-outs Covers: Install floor and wall clean-out covers for concealed piping, types as
specified.
E. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and clean-out
passing through waterproof membranes.
F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS

CONSTRUCTION
A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations
indicated.
B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of
drains flush with finished floor.
C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper
slope to drain.
D. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer, drain traps shall be deep seal type except as
noted.
E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
F. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS
A. Install trap primers with piping towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).
Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof manufacturer's
installation instructions.
B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
C. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.12 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Run-outs to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping run-outs to plumbing fixtures
and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated.
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris,
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

CONSTRUCTION
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
3.15 LEAK PROTECTION
A. For piping located at or above ceiling of electrical rooms, telephone equipment rooms or
rooms with electronic equipment, such as Tracon areas, install pipes inside PVC plastic pipe
sleeve.
3.16 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. Install valves for duty indicated, where shown on drawings.
B. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item located to drain
equipment for service and repair.
A. Conform to all applicable provisions of Section “Contractor Quality Control Program".
A. Inspections
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it
has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner, at least 24 hours prior to the
time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of
the COTR or his representative.
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange the inspection of the piping system before

concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the Owner to observe the
tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the
plumbing code.
3. Re-inspection: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make
the required corrections, and arrange for re-inspected by the Owner.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Contractor.
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures
indicated by the Authority, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems. If testing is
performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test segment, complete with
a diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all drainage and vent piping until it has been tested
and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open
jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon
completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping

CONSTRUCTION
system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of
water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the
inspection starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their
traps filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and watertight.
Plug the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building,
and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1" water column. Use a "U"
tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air
pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the
period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
4.3 INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall coordinate with the Quality Control Engineer before the installation of the
drainage and vent systems. The contractor shall seek the guidance in any installation
procedures he is unfamiliar with.
B. Periodic inspections of the installations of the materials specified in this section shall be
performed and reported in writing to the contractor, including any deviation from good
installation practice observed.
C. On completion of installation the Quality Control Engineer shall inspect the complete system
and report in writing any installation error, improperly selected devices, or other fault in the
system that could impair the performance of the system.
D. A report shall be submitted by the Owner, including the final report of the Quality Control
Engineer, indicating all materials reported as properly installed or requiring correction. The
contractor shall also report on steps taken to properly complete the Work.

CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes potable cold-water, hot water, and circulation hot water piping,
pipefittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.
1. Division 2
2. Division 9
3. Division 15 Section “Valves"
4. Division 15 Section “Meters and Gauges"
5. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification"
6. Division 15 Section “Plumbing Pumps"
7. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
8. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports”
9. Division 15 “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
1. Product data for each piping plumbing piping products including specialty and valve
specified.
2. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with
requirements specified in “Quality Assurance" Article.
3. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified
below.
4. Laboratory analysis of water samples taken after disinfecting and flushing the piping
system. Laboratory shall be certified and licensed by the state of Maryland.
5. Test reports specified in Part 4 of this Section.
6. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information for all products in accordance
with the requirements of specification.
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 1/10

CONSTRUCTION
B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes:
1. International Plumbing Code/1997

2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing"
3. Board of Health State of Maryland.
1.7 SPARE PARTS
A. Contractor shall furnish spare parts for all manufactured equipment or devices.
1.8 TRAINING
A. Training of maintenance personnel shall be per requirements of Section “Training."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to:
1. Strainers:
a. Josam Company
b. Metraflex Company
c. Smith (Jay R.) Manufacturing Company
2. Special Duty Valves:
a. ITT Bell and Gossett

b. Spirax Sarco, Incorporated
3. Hose Bibbs:
a. Nibco, Incorporated
b. Watts Regulator Company
c. Woodford Manufacturing Company

CONSTRUCTION
4. Backflow Preventers:
a. Watts Regulator Company
5. Relief Valves:

b. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated
c. Cash (A. W.) Valve Manufacturing Corporation
d. Zurn Industries, Incorporated Wilkins Regulator Division
6. Water Hammer Arresters:
a. Josam Company
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Incorporated
c. Smith (Jay R.) Manufacturing Company
d. Wade Division, Tyler Pipe
e. Watts Regulator Company
f. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Hydromechanics Division
7. Vacuum Breakers for Hose Connections:

b. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated
c. Cash (A. W.) Valve Manufacturing Corporation
8. Flexible Connectors
a. Metra-Flex
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C 151 class (52), mechanical joint, with cement mortar lining per
AWWA C 104.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
B. Galvanized Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125 standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Ductile-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C110 or AWWA C153, 150-psi rating, with cement
mortar lining and AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.
D. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B161.1, Class 125, raised ground face, bolt holes spot
faced.

CONSTRUCTION
E. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket
joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform
to ASME B1.20.1.
F. Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit

application; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent
corrosion.
G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze wire reinforced
protective jacket; minimum 150-psig working pressure, maximum 250 degrees F operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match
equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B-32, Lead Free Solder and Anticorrosive Flux.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.
C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design
temperatures and pressures.
A. General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in
Division 15 Section “Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name;
refer to Part 3 Article “Valve Application" for specific uses and applications for each valve
specified.
2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES
A. Circuit Setter: Calibrated balance valve, bronze body, brass ball construction with glass and
carbon filled TFE seat rings. Differential read-out ports across valve seat area. EPT inserts
and check valve. 1/4 NPT tapped drain port. Memory stop. Designed for positive shut-off.
B. Maximum working pressure 300-Psi, maximum operating temperature 2500F
C. Manufacturer: ITT Bell & Gossett Model CB, or as acceptable to the Authority.
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure
rated for 250-psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.
B. Hose Bibbs: Hexagonal shoulder with tee handle, 3/4" I.P. inlet, hose end.
C. Strainers:
1. 3" and larger, cast-iron body, 125-psi flanges, bolted-type with removable non-
corrosive perforated strainer having 1/8-inch perforations.
2. 2-1/2" and smaller, 250-lb iron body, furnished with 20-mesh stainless steel screen,
threaded ends.

CONSTRUCTION
D. Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to
ASME B1.20.7.
E. Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011,
with finish to match hose connection.
F. Back-flow Preventers: Standard reduced pressure zone, consisting of two in-line independent
check valves with an intermediate relief valve. Furnished with ball type test cocks and quarter
turn, full port resilient seated bronze ball valve shutoffs:
1. Tested and certified under ASSE Standard No. 1013, AWWA Standard No. C511 and
FCCCHR of USC manual, Section 10.
2. Watts 909 type RPZ
G. Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Codes for indicated capacity of the appliance for which is installed.
1. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat,

complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity.
Temperature relief valves shall be factory set at 210 degrees F and pressure relief at
150-psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes
4 inches and smaller, above ground, within building
B. Install galvanized steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 5 inches and larger, above
ground, within building.
C. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with grooved ends or flanged ends within the building.
D. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with mechanical joints below ground, inside and outside
building.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections.
C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper

CONSTRUCTION
insulation applications.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of
the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside
the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel
removal.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and
servicing of valves.
H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-
inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple, cap, and chain.
I. Install vents at high points in risers and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting 3/4" ball valve
and short 3/4" threaded nipple and pipe cap and chain.
J. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior wall with sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe;
pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be galvanized steel sheet metal.
K. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes though fire-rated wall, partitions, ceilings, and floors,
maintain the fire-rated integrity.
L. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot downward slope towards drain point.
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hanger and
Supports."
B. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual horizontal runs less than
20 feet in length.
2. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers for horizontal piping as required by the plumbing code.
D. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor, where applicable.
3.5 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Solder Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Soldering Manual."
B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS “Brazing Manual."
1. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping
specialties before soldering and brazing.
2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or

CONSTRUCTION
carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.

3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.
C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal
seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where
dry seal threading is specified).
4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the
pipe is being threaded.
a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a

weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not
be used.
D. Flanged Joints: Align Flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening
to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location
indicated for service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in a separate
B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for
watertight installation.
C. Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building complete with strainer and pressure
gage.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C-600. Pipe below ground inside building
and to a point 5 feet outside of building shall have restrained joints.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where
specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling duty: Use globe and ball valves.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where
branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere
as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For sectional
valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each

CONSTRUCTION
supply to each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and
smaller, use gate or ball valves. For shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or
butterfly valves.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain
equipment completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at
low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution-piping system
completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves. For drain valves
2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
D. Check Valves: Install check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as
indicated.
E. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot water re-circulating loop, discharge side of each pump,
F. Hose-Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Back-flow Preventers: All water supply lines shall be designed and equipped with back-flow
preventers as mandated by the Rules and Regulations of the Board of Health of Maryland.
1. Installing contractor shall be responsible for certification of all back-flow prevention

devices. Certification shall be performed by individual or company certified to test
such devices. Documentation of individual or company certification shall be provided
to the Owner prior to final acceptance.
2. Install back-flow preventers at each connection to plumbing equipment and systems
and in compliance with the plumbing codes, and the authority requirements.
3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Run-outs to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run-outs to fixtures of sizes
indicated, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.
B. Plumbing Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical
equipment and fixtures as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.
Provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inches and larger, use
flanges instead of unions.
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the Authority. If a method is
not prescribed by the Authority follow the procedure described below:
a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least
50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof

CONSTRUCTION
and allow to stand for 24 hours.

c. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and
isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water
until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to a certified testing laboratory. Repeat
the procedure if the biological examination made by the laboratory shows
evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities and submit to the Owner for
approval.
3.13 COORDINATION
A. For balancing the Hot Water Circulating System refer to Division 15 “Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing".
A. Conform to all applicable provisions of Specifications Section “Contractor Quality Control

Program".
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the Owner.
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner at least 24 hours prior to the
time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of
the Owner.
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before being
concealed or closed in after system before concealed or closed in after system
is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to
observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the
requirements of the plumbing code.
3. Re-inspection: Whenever the Owner finds that the piping system will not pass the test
or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports for the Owner review and approval.
B. Test water distribution piping as follows:

CONSTRUCTION
1. Test all water distribution piping systems for leaks and defects. If testing is performed
in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the
portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, water distribution piping until it has been
tested and approved. (Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved).
3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50-psig above the
operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system
materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in
test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and required corrective action.
5. Prepare reports for all required tests, including corrective actions and submit to Owner.

CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 15326 - STANDPIPE AND WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies standpipe and sprinkler systems for buildings and structures.
B. Products specified in this Section with installation include sprinkler cabinets with spare sprinklers
and sprinkler wrenches. Deliver to the Owner's maintenance personnel.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for fire barrier sealers

2. Division 10 Section “Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories” for fire extinguishers
and cabinets for fire extinguishers, hose valves, and rack and hose assemblies.
3. Division 15 Section “Hanger and Supports”
4. Division 16 Section “Fire Alarm Systems” for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) specified in inches. Tube sizes are
standard tube size specified in inches.
B. Working plans as used in this Section refer to documents prepared pursuant to requirements in
NFPA 13 and 14 for obtaining preliminary approval of authority having jurisdiction, Contractor
shall be responsible for developing installation plans and calculation for approval of the Fire
Marshall.
C. Other definitions for fire protection systems are included in referenced NFPA standards.
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: System with automatic sprinklers attached to piping system
containing water and connected to water supply so that water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened by fire.
B. Sprinkler System Protection Limits: All spaces. Include closets, toilet and locker room areas,
each landing of each stair, and special applications areas.
C. Standpipe Systems: Systems that are wet type have water supply valve open and pressure
maintained at all times and include branches extending from standpipes to sprinkler zone valves.
Standpipe and Wet Pipe Sprinkler 15326 - 1/19
CONSTRUCTION
D. Class I, Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Arrangement of piping, valves, hose connections, and
accessories for use by persons trained in use of heavy fire streams. Hose valves are 2-1/2-inch
size.
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for a complete fire
protection system specified.
B. Minimum Pipe Sizes: Not smaller than sizes indicated for connection to water supply piping and
standpipes.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for conducting fire hydrant flow tests as required to obtain
hydraulic data needed to prepare design for hydraulically calculated systems.
D. Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to the following criteria:
1. Sprinkler System Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As follows:
a. Office and Public Areas: Light hazard.

b. Storage Areas: Ordinary hazard. Group 2.
c. Equipment Rooms: Ordinary hazard. Group 2.
d. Service Areas: Ordinary hazard. Group I.
2. Minimum Density Requirements for Automatic Sprinkler System Hydraulic Design: As

follows:
a. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area.
b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 GPM over 1500 sq. ft. area.
c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authority having jurisdiction.
3. Maximum Sprinkler Spacing: As follows:
a. Office Space: 225-sq. ft./sprinkler

b. Storage Areas: 130-sq. ft./sprinkler
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130-sq. ft./sprinkler
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130-sq. ft./sprinkler
e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13

CONSTRUCTION
E. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum
working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise.
1. Sprinkler Systems: 175-psig.

2. Standpipe and Hose Systems: 175-psig.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit under provisions of Section 01300 and as modified herein.
B. Product data for fire protection system components. Include the following:
1. Back-flow preventers
2. Valves
3. Specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
5. Fire department connections. Include type of fire department connection; number, size, type,
and arrangement of inlets; size and direction of outlet; and finish.
6. Hose valves. Include size, type, and finish.
7. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting,
finish, and other data.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings showing layouts of systems shall contain sufficient plans, elevations,
sections, details, and schematics to describe work clearly. They shall be minimum scale of
1/4" = 1'-0". Provide larger scale details as necessary. Show elements of reflected ceiling
plans, exposed ductwork, walls, partitions, diffusers, registers, grilles, fire dampers, sleeves
and other aspects of construction as necessary for coordination.
2. Highlight all firewalls and smoke partitions for appropriate coordination.
3. Shop drawings showing manufacturer's engineering and product data shall contain detailed
dimensional drawings, accurate and complete description of materials and construction,
manufacturer's published performance characteristics and capacity ratings (performance
data, alone, is not acceptable), electrical requirements, and wiring diagrams. Drawings shall
clearly indicate location (terminal block or wire number), voltage and function for all field
terminations, and other information necessary to demonstrate compliance with all
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Sprinkler work layout, including sprinkler head type, dimensioned location and sizes of
piping, heads, guards, flushing connections, drains, test stations, alarm valves, and all
other accessories as required by NFPA #13 Chapter 6.
b. Hydraulic calculations, including piping data and municipal flow test results shall be
per applicable NFPA Standards and Owner's Insurer. Chapter 6 of NFPA #13 shall be
the minimum requirement.
c. Equipment Cuts for:
(1) Alarm valves.

(2) Inspector's test valves
(3) Valves, gauges, drains, fittings, and piping.
(4) Head guards, spare head cabinet.
(5) Fire Department Connections with ball drip and check valves.

CONSTRUCTION
(6) Hangers and supports.
(7) Sprinkler heads, escutcheons.
(8) Flow switches, tamper switches and other switches.
(9) Access panels.
(10) Fire Department valves.
5. Submit samples of all sprinkler heads.

6. Prior to final shop drawing submittals, prepare "Head Location Drawings" depicting all
sprinkler head locations and submit them to Architect for approval. Show location of all
heads, all required dimensions, and lights, diffusers and ceiling tile patters indicated on
Architectural Drawings.
7. Disposition of shop drawings shall not relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from the
responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications, unless he has submitted, in
writing, a letter itemizing or calling attention to such deviations at the time of submission and
secured written approval from the Architect, nor shall such disposition of shop drawings
relieve the Fire Protection Subcontractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings or
schedules.
D. Coordination Drawings:
1. Prepare in accordance with requirements of Sections 01041 and 15050.

2. Before materials are purchased, fabricated or work is begun; prepare coordination
drawings for all floor areas, including buried services.
3. Show all sprinkler heads, piping, equipment, etc. and circulate drawings to any and all sub-
subcontractors so they can indicate their work to result in a fully coordinated installation.
E. Working Plans:
1. Contractor shall be responsible for determining exact number of sprinkler heads, and type as
well as other required components including wiring but not limited to electrical services.
Submit required number of sets to authority having jurisdiction for review, comment, and
approval. Include system hydraulic calculations where applicable. Working drawings shall be
signed and sealed by registered engineer licensed in the District of Columbia.
2. Licensed engineer's sprinkler system drawings specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to
authority having jurisdiction. Include system hydraulic calculations.
3. Licensed engineer's installation report specified in “Field Quality Control” Article.
4. Test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13. Include “Contractor's Material &
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping” and “Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for
Underground Piping.”
F. Maintenance data for each type of fire protection specialty specified, for inclusion in “Operating
and Maintenance Manual” specified in Division 1 Section “Project Closeout.”
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by
product name and manufacturer in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory and FM Approval Guide
and that conform to other requirements indicated.
B. Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Marking: On equipment, specialties, and accessories

made to specified standards
C. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.

CONSTRUCTION
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"
(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
D. Comply with requirements of authority having jurisdiction for submittals, approvals, materials,
hose threads, installation, inspections, and testing.
E. Comply with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter for submittals, approvals, materials,
installation, inspections, and testing.
F. Sprinkler Contractor's Licensed Engineer: Submit design drawings, design calculations, and
installation inspection reports. Include seal and signature of registered engineer licensed in
jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.
G. Installer's Qualifications: Firms qualified to install and alter fire protection piping, equipment,
specialties, and accessories, and repair and service equipment. A qualified firm is one that is
experienced (minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project) in such work,
familiar with precautions required, and in compliance with the requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction. Submit evidence of qualifications to the Architect upon request. Refer to Division 1
Section “Reference Standards and Definitions” for definition of “Installer.”
H. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with
the following:
1. NFPA 13 “Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.”

2. NFPA 14 “Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.”
3. NFPA 26 “Recommended Practice for the Supervision of Valves Controlling Water
Supplies for Fire Protection.”
4. NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.”
5. NFPA 231 “Standard for General Storage.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Specialty Valves and Water Motor Alarms Devices:
a. Central Sprinkler Corporation

b. Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation
c. Star Sprinkler Corporation
d. Viking Corporation
2. Detector Check Valves:
a. Ames Company, Incorporated

b. Cla-Val Company
c. Hersey Products, Incorporated, Grinnell Corporation
CONSTRUCTION
e. Watts Regulator Company
3. Back-flow Preventers:
a. Ames Company, Incorporated

b. Hersey Products, Incorporated, Grinnell Corporation
c. Watts Regulator Company
d. Wilkins Regulator Division, Zurn Industries, Incorporated
4. Water flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches:
a. Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation

b. System Sensor Division, Pittway Corporation
c. Victaulic Company of America
d. Watts Regulator Company
5. Fire Department Connections:
a. Croker Division, Fire-End and Croker Corporation

b. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
c. Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation
d. Potter-Roemer Division, Smith Industries, Incorporated
e. Sierra Fire Equipment Company
6. Sprinklers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corporation

b. Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation
c. Star Sprinkler Corporation
7. Hose Valves:
a. Croker Division, Fire-End and Croker Corporation

b. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Incorporated
c. Potter-Roemer Division, Smith Industries, Incorporated
d. Sierra Fire Equipment Company
8. Fire Protection Service Gate and Check Valves:
a. Gem Sprinkler Company Division, Grinnell Corporation

b. Nibco Incorporated
c. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Incorporated
d. Victaulic Company of America
9. Grooved Couplings for Steel Piping:

CONSTRUCTION
a. Grinnell Supply Sales Company, Grinnell Corporation
b. Gustin-Bacon Division, Tyler Pipe Subsidiary, Tyler Corporation
c. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Incorporated
10. Grooved Couplings for AWWA Ductile-Iron Piping:
a. Gustin-Bacon Division, Tyler Pipe Subsidiary, Tyler Corporation

b. Victaulic Company of America
11. Grooved Couplings for Copper Tubing:
a. Victaulic Company of America
12. Press-Seal Fittings for Steel Piping:
a. Victaulic Company of America
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Refer to “Sprinkler System Piping Applications” and “Standpipe System Piping Applications” for
identification of systems where pipe and fitting materials specified below are used.
B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile-iron barrel with iron-alloy threaded flanges, 250-psig
(1725-kPa) minimum working pressure rating, and AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
1. Option: Pipe may be AWWA pattern, cut-grooved for grooved-coupling joints.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6- inches and smaller and Schedule 30 in sizes 8-
inches and larger, black and galvanized, plain and threaded ends, for welded, threaded, cut-groove,
and rolled-groove joints.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5-inch sizes and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness
for 6-inch through 10-inch sizes, with plain ends, black and galvanized, for rolled-groove and welded
joints.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, thread-able light wall, black and galvanized, for threaded joints.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795, black and galvanized, for joints listed and for use with fittings for
plain-end steel pipe.
1. Type: Standard-weight pipe, Schedules 30 and 40, for cut-groove, rolled-groove,

threaded, and welding joints.
2. Type: Lightweight pipe, Schedule 10, for rolled-groove and welding joints.
3. Type: Extra-lightweight pipe, thickness less than Schedule 10, for rolled-groove and
welding joints.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 250, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

CONSTRUCTION
B. Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum
pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
C. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 250 standard pattern with threads
D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300 standard pattern with threads
according to ASME B1.20.1.
E. Grooved-End Fittings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47

malleable-iron, AWWA pipe-size, designed to accept AWWA C606 grooved couplings. Include
cement lining or Food and Drug Administration (FDA)-approved interior coating.
F. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, seamless or welded; ASME B16.9, butt-welding type; or
ASME B16.11, socket-welding type for welded joints.
G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
H. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Pipe: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
ductile iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to
accept grooved couplings.
I. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, streamlined pattern.
J. Cast-Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24 Class 300 raised ground face with bolt holes spot
faced.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for joining materials
not included in this Section.
B. Flanged Joints for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Ductile-Iron or Cast Iron Fittings: AWWA C115
ductile-iron or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.
D. Couplings for Grooved-End Steel Pipe and Grooved-End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C606,
ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing, with enamel finish. Include
synthetic-rubber gasket with central-cavity, pressure-responsive design; ASTM A 183
carbon-steel bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check
valves.
2.6 FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE VALVES

CONSTRUCTION
A. General: UL-listed and FM-approved, with 175-psig non-shock minimum working pressure
rating.
1. Option: Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type.
B. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: UL 262, cast-bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside
screw and yoke, rising stem.
C. Indicating Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded
ends, and integral indicating device.
1. Indicator: Visual.
2. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts AC, pre-wired, single-circuit, and supervisory switch.
3. Indicator: Electrical 115 volts AC, pre-wired, 2-circuit, and supervisory switch.
D. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, outside
screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends.
E. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger for Use with Indicator Posts: UL 262, iron body, bronze
mounted, solid wedge disc, non-rising stem with operating nut and flanged ends.
F. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with
bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends.
G. Butterfly Check Valves, 4 Inches and Larger: UL 213, split-clapper style, cast-iron body with
rubber seal, bronze alloy discs, stainless steel spring and hinge pin.
2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175-psig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical
installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and
single-hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm
switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, and fill line attachment with strainer.
1. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, separate from main drain piping.
B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 400-psig minimum rating, brass, and pressure-regulating

type. Include female NPS inlet and outlet and adjustable setting feature. Size 1-1/2 inches or
2-1/2 inches, and straight or 90 degree angle (1.57-rad) pattern design as indicated.
1. Optional Finish: Rough chrome plate.
C. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, 3/4-inch size, spring-loaded, ball check
device with threaded ends.
D. Master Test Module: 175-psig, UL and FM listed.
2.8 CONTROL PANELS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with electrical contractor for all electrical
wiring to fire alarm control.

CONSTRUCTION
2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. General: ASSE standard back-flow preventers of size indicated for maximum flow rate
indicated and maximum pressure loss indicated.
1. Working Pressure: 150-psig minimum except where indicated otherwise.

2. Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless steel body with flanged ends.
3. Interior Lining: FDA-approved epoxy coating, for back-flow preventers having cast-iron
or steel body.
4. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
5. Strainer on inlet, where strainer is indicated
B. Double Check Valve Back-flow Preventer: ASSE 1048 consisting of OS&Y gate valves on inlet
and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve with
ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous
pressure application.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinkler Heads - general:
1. Provide heads of type required for service indicated.

2. Standard 165 degrees F rating except when application requires higher rating.
a. Use 212 degrees F rating for sprinkler heads in mechanical equipment rooms.
b. Use 212 degrees F rating for sprinkler heads in elevator machine rooms.
3. In no case use heads rated less than 50 degrees F higher than anticipated ambient
temperature.
4. Sprinklers UL listed.
5. Metallic fusible link type.
6. Quick response type.
7. Head application:
a. Rooms without ceilings: Type 1.

b. Finished rooms: Type 2 or 3.
c. Basement corridor: Type 8, 10 and 11.
8. Provide sprinklers with 1/2-inch orifice unless specifically noted otherwise.
B. Sprinkler Head Type 1:
1. Upright or pendent design as required.

2. Standard bronze finish.
C. Sprinkler Head Type 2:
1. Pendant design.
2. Satin chrome finish with escutcheon plate.
3. Provide extended escutcheon where necessary due to surface mounted light fixtures.

CONSTRUCTION
D. Sprinkler Head Type 3:
1. Recessed design, deflector 1 to 1-1/2 inches below finished ceiling.

2. 2 piece recessed escutcheon with 1/2-inch adjustment.
3. Allow removal of escutcheon ceiling title without disturbing head and drop assembly.
4. Chrome finish.
E. Sprinkler Head Type 4:
1. Recessed design, deflector 1 to 1-1/2 inches below finished ceiling.

2. 2 piece recessed escutcheon with 1/2-inch adjustment.
3. Satin chrome finish.
F. Sprinkler Head Type 5:
1. Adjustment flush concealed.

2. Ceiling plate flush with finished ceiling.
3. 1/2-inch housing adjustment
4. White finish.
G. Sprinkler Head Type 6:
1. Horizontal sidewall design.

H. Sprinkler Head Type 7:
1. Extended coverage horizontal sidewall design.

I. Sprinkler Head Type 9:
1. Recessed design, pendent type, "Quick Response".

2. 160-degrees F temperature rating
3. Chrome finish.
J. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
K. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for following sprinkler mounting
applications: Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 2-piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 1-piece, flat
L. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
M. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for minimum of 6 spare
sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench, suitable for wall mounting. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and 1 wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each style sprinkler on Project.
N. Provide and install dry sprinkler heads in unheated areas as required.

CONSTRUCTION
1. Sprinkler head shall have a thermo-sensitive glass bulb spray sprinkler, suitable for use in
areas subject to freezing. This assembly shall feature a sealed brass inlet, and a durable
threaded steel barrel with an electrode posted epoxy base coating, a 5mm glass bulb
sealed at the threaded end of the assembly, shall be held in place by force transmitted
from the compression screw, through the glass bulb and internal parts.
2. Contractor shall coordinate final dimension of unheated ceiling space before ordering dry
sprinkler head.
3. Provide and install flow alarm where indicated on contract drawings on water supply
branch line feeding dry sprinkler heads.
2.11 SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler Alarm Test Fittings: Ductile-iron housing with 1-1/2-inch (40 mm) inlet and outlet,
integral test valves, combination orifice and sight glass, and threaded or locking-lug ends.
2.12 NON-ADJUSTABLE HOSE VALVES
A. General: UL 668, 300-psig minimum rating, brass, nonadjustable type, hose valve for connection
of fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern design, female NPS inlet and male hose outlet,
and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Size or 2-1/2 inches as indicated. Hose valve threads are
according to NFPA 1963 and match local fire department threads.
1. Finish: Polished brass.
2.13 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Flush, Wall-Type Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-brass body; NH-standard thread
inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads; and threaded NPS
outlet. Include lugged cap, gasket, and chain; lugged swivel connection, extension pipe nipples,
and clappers for each hose connection inlet; and wall escutcheon plate with marking “AUTO
SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1. Connections: Two 2-1/2-inch inlets and 6-inch outlet.

2. Inlet Alignment: In line, horizontal.
3. Direction of Outlet: Back.
4. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular.
5. Finish: Polished brass.
2.14 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical operation type, 10-inch diameter, and

cast-aluminum alarm gong, with red enamel factory finish. Include Pelton-wheel-type operator
with nylon shaft bearings, and shaft length and sleeve to suit wall thickness and construction;
3/4-inch inlet and 1-inch drain.
C. Water flow Indicators: UL 346, electrical-supervision type, vane-type water flow detector, rated to
250-psig, and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 SPDT (single-pole,
double-throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere, 125
volts AC. (7 A, 125 V AC) and 0.25 ampere, 24 volts DC.; complete with factory-set,

CONSTRUCTION
field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamper-proof cover that sends a
signal when cover is removed.
D. Pressure Switches: UL 753, water flow switch with retard, electrical-supervision type, SPDT
(single-pole, double-throw), normally closed contacts, designed to operate on rising pressure and
signal water flow.
E. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for indicator posts, electrical-supervision type, SPDT

(single-pole, double throw), normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in
other than full open position.
F. Alarm pressure switch:
1. UL listed and FM approved.

2. Designed to signal fire alarm system upon sensing of pressure in fire system valve.
Switch shall automatically reset when pressure drops.
3. Service: Normal.
G. Alarm Bell:
1. Audible horn/visible light alarm signal; electrically operated.

2. For use with water flow detector systems.
3. 10 inch diameter bell
4. UL listed and FM approved.
H. Water motor gong:
1. 175-psi iron body mechanical alarm device with 8 inch diameter gong, 5 inch water
motor.
2. Drive shaft length compatible with wall thickness encountered.
3. Red hood finish with nameplate.
4. For use with alarm valve systems.

5. Provided wye strainer upstream of motor.
2.15 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
A. Provided in Division 16.
2.16 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch diameter dial with dial range of 0-250-psig.
B. Automatic Ball Drips: 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT.
C. Inspector's Tests: Inspectors alarm tests module style 718 or 719 test master by Victaulic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

CONSTRUCTION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections prior to installing cabinets.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for cabinets, and other conditions where cabinets are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications on pipe and fittings products.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved-End Pipe and Grooved-End Fitting Joints: Use grooved-end fittings and grooved
couplings that are made by the same manufacturer and that are listed for use together. Groove
pipe and assemble joints with grooved coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Groove Type: Cut.

2. Groove Type: Rolled.
C. Locking-Lug Joints: Follow manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both piping
materials.
3.4 WATER SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Connect fire protection piping to water supply piping of size and in location indicated on
contract drawings.
B. Install shutoff valve, back-flow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories
indicated at connection to water supply piping.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved “working plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval
from authority with jurisdiction. File written approval with the Architect prior to deviating
from approved “working plans."

CONSTRUCTION
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipe 2 inches and smaller. Unions are not required
on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved couplings.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch and
larger connections.
F. Install “Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized
and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain headers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipe.
I. Install drain valves on standpipe systems, of sizes and in locations indicated.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves,
and where indicated. Drain to or outside building.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13. Install according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
1. Install hanger at support spacings and locations for steel piping joined with grooved
mechanical couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for rigid
systems.
2. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than 1/4 inch and with soft metal-
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit
removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section “Valves" for installation of general-duty valves. Install fire-protection
specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install fire-protection service valves supervised-open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire department connections. Where there is more than 1 control valve,
provide permanently marked identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Install check valve in each water supply connection. Install back-flow preventers instead of check
valves in potable water supply sources.
D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including
bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection.

CONSTRUCTION
3.7 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION
A. Install back-flow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Comply with plumbing code
and authority with jurisdiction. Install air-gap fitting on units with atmospheric vent connection
and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around back-flow
preventer.
3.8 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
B. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Flush sprinklers.
C. Wall Mounting: Side wall sprinklers and drywall ceiling sprinklers.
D. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent dry-type, and sidewall dry-type sprinklers.
E. Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-response sprinklers

where indicated.
F. Unheated Area: Dry sprinkler heads.
G. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with following finishes:
1. Upright, Pendent, and Side wall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished spaces

exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax-coated
where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS
A. Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.
B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of 2' x 2' acoustical panels and tiles. Install
sprinkler a minimum of 1'-0" from edge of 2' x 4' acoustical panels and tiles.
C. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use
dry-type sprinklers heads, water supplied from heated space.
3.10 HOSE VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Hose Outlet Valves: Install 2-1/2 inch hose outlet valves at each standpipe outlet for hose
connections for use by fire department.
B. Install hose valves in cabinets at angle required for connection of fire hose.
3.11 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS

CONSTRUCTION
A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated in locations indicated.
B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains and where
indicated. Drain outside building.
3.12 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
B. Connect water supplies to standpipe and sprinkler systems. Include back-flow preventers.
C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
D. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm system.
A. Perform field acceptance tests of each fire protection system.
1. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler-piping systems according to NFPA 13 Chapter

"System Acceptance."
2. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14 Chapter "Tests and
Inspection."
B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures specified. Then retest
to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect.

2. Report test results promptly and in writing to authority having jurisdiction when
required.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory
finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If manufacturer prescribes

no procedures, proceed as follows:
1. Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories have been installed
correctly and operate correctly.
2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
3. Check that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified have
been replaced with new, correct type of sprinklers.
4. Check that sprinklers are correct type, have correct finish and temperature ratings, and
have guards where required for applications.
5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type of back-flow preventer.

CONSTRUCTION
6. Check that hose valves and fire department connections have threads compatible with
local fire department equipment and have correct pressure rating.
7. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler systems with water.
8. Fill wet standpipe systems with water.
9. Check for correct type and size hose valves.
10. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
B. Coordinate with fire alarm system tests. Operate systems as required.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance

information.
B. Schedule demonstration with at least 7 days' advance notice.

SECTION 15290 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semi-rigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation;
insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.
1. Division 7 Section “Firestopping” for firestopping materials and requirements for

penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section “Equipment Insulation” for insulation materials and application
for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section “Metal Ducts” for duct liner.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample,
describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of
each sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type
of field-applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
DUCT INSULATION 15290 - 1/7

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S.
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-

developed rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may
begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson
b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation
d. Schuller International, Incorporated
e. Rubatex Corporation
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket
manufactured from Kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturers that are

compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates per

square foot for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and
sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o/c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm): Space 16
inches (400 mm) o/c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular
ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13 mm) staples, 1-inch
(25 mm) o/c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
7. Overlap un-faced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams
and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18
inches (450 mm) o/c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 6-inch- (150-mm) wide strips of the same material used to insulate the
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o/c.
10. Apply vapor retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer’s recommended coverage rates per

square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation end joints and 16 inches (400-mm) o/c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space 116
inches (400 mm) o/c each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from
insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly
against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular
ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13 mm) staples, 1-inch
(25 mm) o/c, and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible
to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct
elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 6-inch (150-mm) wide strips of the same material used to insulate the
duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o/c.
8. Apply vapor-retardant mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
3.3 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation material and thickness is specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thickness for systems listed below are specified at the end of this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply, return, and outside air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply, return, and outside air ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment
1. Metal ducts with duct liner

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
5. Testing agency labels and stamps.
6. Nameplates and data plates
7. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.4 FINISHES
A. Glass- Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified
in Division 9 Section “Painting.”
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow for visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Duct Insulation: For use in locations other than public areas.
Insulation
Thickness (Inches)
Duct Type Insulation Type Notes
1. Outdoor Air Intake Ducts Rigid Fiberglass 2

and Plenums Insulation
2. Exhaust Air None Required
3. Return Air Section Blanket Fiberglass 2
(Duct Wrap)
4. Supply Air Blanket Fiberglass 2
(Duct Wrap)
Insulation
Thickness (Inches)
Duct Type Insulation Type Notes

5. Round Branch Duct to Blanket Type (Duct 2

Diffuser and Diffuser Wrap)
Back
6. Medium Pressure S.A. Blanket Fiberglass 2

(Duct Wrap)
7. Supply and Return Air Blanket Fiberglass 2
Plenums (Duct Wrap)
8. Grease Duct Refractory Ceramic 1 1/2 Apply in

Fiber layers to
meet code
required
rating.
B. Piping and Equipment Insulation Above Grade:
Insulation Insulation
Piping and Thickness and And Jacket*
Equipment Pipe Size - Inches Inches Type
1. Chilled Water Piping All Sizes to 3 1 1 or 1A

(Inside Building) 4 and Above 1 1/2
2. Domestic Cold Water All Sizes 1/2 1 or 1A

Piping, Horizontal Storm
st
and 1 Elbow Turned
Down, and Roof Drain
Bodies
3. Domestic Hot Water All Sizes 1 1 or 1A

Piping
4. Hot Water Heating 1/2 to 2 1 1/2 1 or 1A

2 1/2 and larger 2
5. Cold Condensate Drains All Sizes 1 1A
6. Duct Coils and 1 1/2 2

Terminal Box Coils
7. Boiler Flues and Breeching All Sizes 4 3B
8. Exterior Cooling Tower All Sizes ¾ 5B

Condensing Water Piping
* Letter designation references field applied jackets only. See paragraph 2.2 Materials
for Factory Jackets.
INSULATION AND JACKET DESIGNATIONS
Number Designation Insulation Type

1 Rigid Fiberglass
2 Blanket Fiberglass
3 Calcium Silicate
4 Foamed Plastic
5 Flexible Elastomeric
Letter Designation Jacket Type
A Glass Cloth Lagging

B Aluminum

SECTION 15260 - PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements;
field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for fire-stopping materials and requirements for

2. Division 15 Section “Equipment Insulation” for insulation materials and application
for other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe insulation shields and
protection saddles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type
of insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field-applied jackets.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S.
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those

specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials
and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-
PIPE INSULATION 15260 - 1/5

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports.”
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of
piping that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. Certain Teed Manson

b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation
d. Schuller International, Incorporated
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corporation
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated

b. Rubatex Corporation
4. Polyolefin Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated

b. IMCOA
5. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:
a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Limited

6. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation

b. Pabco
c. Schuller International, Incorporated
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with
the following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied,
all-purpose, vapor-retardant jacket.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to un-faced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding
lagging cloth to un-faced glass-fiber insulation.
b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
4. Vapor-Retardant Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retardant mastic for

indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells, incombustible.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation, without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 1.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation, with Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's

written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the
length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retardant mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
(50 mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retardant mastic.
C. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through

penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Fire-stopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section

“Fire-stopping.”
D. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retardant mastic
where floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming
insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retardant mastic.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o/c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retardant mastic.

3.5 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thickness are specified in schedules at the end of the Section
15081.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
A. Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform field quality-
control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine
compliance with requirements.

SECTION 15241 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Provisions and
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Vibration Isolators
2. Isolation Bases
3. Equipment Connectors
1. Pipe and Pipe Fittings
A. The materials and systems specified in this section shall all be purchased by the Mechanical
Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer, to assure single responsibility
for the performance of all isolation materials used.
B. The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring
rates to accomplish the specified minimum static deflections for all spring and pad type isolators
based on the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.
C. The vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural steel beam
bases and concrete inertia bases to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a
supplementary base.
1.4 APPLICATION
A. This work in general includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means
of noise and vibration isolators.
2. All piping over 1 inch outside diameter located in mechanical equipment rooms, and for a
minimum of fifty (50) feet or 100 pipe diameters, whichever is greater, from connection to
vibration isolated mechanical or electrical equipment shall be isolated from the building
structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers. All piping in the building that is
connected to vibration isolated equipment shall be noise isolated at connections to the
building structure.
3. All piping vertical risers shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and
vibration isolation guides and supports.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15241 - 1/6

4. All piping and ductwork shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections.
Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or
ductwork and maintain a minimum of 3/4 inch and maximum of 1-1/4 inch clearance around
the outside surfaces. This clearance space shall be tightly packed with 1.58 P.C.F. fiberglass,
and caulked airtight, after installation of piping and ductwork.
1.5 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper selection of spring rates to
accomplish the specified minimum static deflections, for all spring and pad type isolators, based on
the weight distribution of equipment to be isolated.
B. The isolation materials manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural design of steel beam
bases, and concrete inertia bases, to support mechanical equipment scheduled to receive a
supplementary base.
C. The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of approved shop drawings, of all mechanical and
electrical equipment to receive vibration isolation devices, to the vibration isolation materials
manufacturer based upon which the selection of vibration isolators and design of supplementary
bases will be completed. The shop drawings to be furnished shall include operating weight of the
equipment to be isolated and the distribution of weight to support points.
D. The Contractor shall furnish a complete layout of piping and ductwork to be isolated, including
vertical risers, showing size or weight and support points of the piping and ductwork system, to the
vibration isolation materials manufacturer, for selection and layout of isolation hangers.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are required and shall include product data noting calculations, materials, sizes,
dimensions, and load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device.
B. Vibration isolation shop drawings shall show isolator locations, and load on each isolator, deletion,
compressed spring height, solid spring height, spring diameters and color-coding.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7 Section “Roof Accessories.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Vibration Isolators:
1. Kinetics Noise Control, Incorporated

2. Mason Industries, Incorporated

3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Incorporated
B. Vibration Bases:
1. Kinetics Noise Control, Incorporated

2. Mason Industries, Incorporated
3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Incorporated
C. Flexible Pipe Connectors:
1. Metraflex Company
2. Mercer Rubber Company
3. Flex-Hose Company, Incorporated
4. Flex-weld, Incorporated (Keflex)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Vibration Isolators:
1. Type C - Restrained Spring Type Mount:
a. Spring type isolators shall be laterally stable with housing and complete with 1/4"
neoprene acoustical friction pads between the base-plate and the support. All mountings
shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters
shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs
shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. A
housing shall be used that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when
height is removed. The installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum
clearance of 1/2" shall be maintained around retraining bolts and between the housing
and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of
contact during normal operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
2. Type D - Vibration Hangers:
a. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in
series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes
through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be
large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing thru a 30-degree arc before contacting
the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to
solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
B. Isolation Bases:
1. Type 1 - Structural Steel Base (without inertia pad):
a. All perimeter members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10th of the
longest dimensions of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14" provided that the
deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the
manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to
provide a base clearance of one inch.
2. Type 3 - Roof Curb:

a. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit
over the curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top member
shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The
aluminum members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1" minimum deflection
with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the
spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient
snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4" so as not to interfere with the
spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed
cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible duct-like
EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or
other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept
to a minimum. Submittals shall include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed
spring height and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details.
C. Flexible Pipe Connectors:
1. Pipe connectors shall be constructed of type 321 stainless steel corrugated hose and type 304
stainless steel-braid with steel flanges. Pipe connectors shall be rated for a working pressure
of 150-psi at 70 degrees F, and maximum operating temperature of 850 degrees F.
2. Connectors 1/2 inch I.D. through 2 inches I.D. shall be provided with N.P.T. nipples with
malleable iron ferrules with wrench flats.
3. Connectors 2-1/2 inch I.D. and larger shall be provided with 150 pound welded forged steel
fixed flanges.
4. Overall length and face to face dimensions shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
standards and recommendations, but no shorter than 18". Installation shall comply with the
manufacturer's instructions, including all required anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of vibration isolation, piping connections, and inertia bases shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. Rigid connections between vibrating equipment and the building shall not be permitted.
3.3 INSPECTION
A. The local representative of the vibration isolation equipment manufacturer shall conduct periodic
inspections of the installation of equipment herein specified, and shall report in writing to the
Contractor any deviations from good installation practice observed.

B. The contractor shall submit a report to the Contracting Officer including the manufacturer's
representatives’ final report indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or requiring
correction, and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation
work.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal
operation.
C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
A. Fans, Belted Vent Sets, Roof:
1. Base Type: “1”

2. Isolator Type: “C”
3. Deflection: 0.75"
B. Fans, Belt Vent Sets, Floor Mounted:

C. Fans, Vane Axial:

3. Deflection: 2.5"
4. Accessories: Type “E”
D. Air Compressor:

E. Terminal Boxes:
1. Base Type: None required

2. Isolator Type: “D”

F. Piping: (Location as specified in this section)

2. Isolator Type: “D”
G. Packaged Air Handling Units:

3. Deflection: 1"
H. Centrifugal Roof Exhausters:
1. Base Type: Type “3”

2. Isolator Type: Integral with Base
3. Deflection: 1.0"
I. Base mounted Centrifugal Pumps:
1. Base Type: Type “1”

3. Deflection: 1.0"

SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, makeup water, blow-down drain
lines, and condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this
Section include the following:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties

2. Special-duty valves
3. Hydronic piping specialties
1. Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping” for materials and methods for sealing pipe
2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section “Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods” for general piping
materials and installation methods.
4. Division 15 Section “Valves” for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.
5. Division 15 Section “Meters and Gages” for thermometers, flow meters, and
pressure gages.
6. Division 15 Section “Hangers and Supports” for pipe supports.
7. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification” for labeling and identifying hydronic
systems
8. Division 15 Section “HVAC Pumps” for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
systems.
9. Division 15 Section “Control Systems Equipment” for temperature-control valves and
sensors
10. Division 15 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for hydronic system adjusting
and balancing.
A. Hydronic systems are hot water systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed,
and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each
hydronic specialty and special-duty valve specified
HYDRONIC PIPING 15181- 1/12

1. Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,
based on manufacturer's testing.
C. Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides,
and expansion joints and loops.
D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with performance
requirements specified in Part 3 of this Section.
E. Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions:
1. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” for materials, products, and installation.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
3. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and form-work requirements are specified in Division 3
Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for fire-stopping specified in Division 7 Section
“Fire-stopping” for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemicals for initial system startup and
for preventive maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:
a. Grinnell Supply Sales Company

b. Victaulic Company of America
2. Calibrated Plug Valves:
c. Flow Design, Incorporated
d. Gerand Engineering Company
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett
f. Taco, Incorporated
3. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
c. Grinnell Supply Sales Company
d. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Handling Division
4. Safety Relief Valves:
c. Conbraco Industries, Incorporated
d. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT McDonnell & Miller
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
a. Griswold Controls
6. Compression Tanks:
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett
d. Taco, Incorporated
7. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks:
8. Air Separators:
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corporation; ITT Bell & Gossett
d. Taco, Incorporated
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 “Pipe Applications” Article for identifying where the following
materials are used.
B. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)
C. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A)
D. Steel Pipe, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedule 40, plain ends.
E. Steel Pipe, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN300): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-
resistance welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, carbon steel,
seamless for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for 2-
1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger.
F. Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, Schedules 40 and 80,
plain ends.
G. Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.
H. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe: ASTM D 2310, Type I (filament-wound pipe),
Grade 1 (glass-fiber-reinforced, epoxy-resin pipe), Class A (no liner).
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
B. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
C. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
E. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
F. Cast Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt
holes spot faced.
G. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234 (ASTM A 234M), Standard Weight.
H. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1

2. End Connections: Butt-welding
3. Facings: Raised face
I. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47
(ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B

fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed
to accept grooved end couplings.
J. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Consist of ductile- or malleable-iron housing, a

synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts,
locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
K. Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe-fittings,

ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.
L. Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for
Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.
M. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
protective jacket; 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, 250-degrees F (121
degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded
end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm)
misalignment.
N. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body, steel flanges drilled
to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250
degrees F (121 degrees C) and pressures up to 150-psig (1035-kPa).
O. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, steel pipe
fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit
rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (silver).
C. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe
being welded.
D. Chlorinated Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (CPVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493
E. Poly-Vinyl-Chloride (PVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section “Valves.”
B. Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for specific uses and applications for each valve
specified.
C. Calibrated Plug Valves: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250-degrees F (121

degrees C) maximum operating temperature, bronze body, and plug valve with calibrated
orifice. Provide with connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral check
valves and seals. Valve shall have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree

of valve opening. Valves 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller shall have threaded connections
and 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) valves shall have flanged connections.
D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low

inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and non-
corrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit
system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field
adjustment.
E. Safety Relief Valves: Brass or bronze body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working
parts; to suit system pressure and heat capacity; according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section IV.
F. Brass, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) cold working pressure (CWP),
250 degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature, brass housing, stainless-
steel operating parts; for soldered, threaded, or compression connections. Factory
set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while
compensating for system operating-pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves
for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve,
factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and flow rate.
G. Cast Iron, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Class 150, cast-iron housing, stainless steel
operating parts; threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, flanged
connections for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow
rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating-
pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment.
Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone
identification, valve model number, and flow rate.
H. Plastic Ball Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP, 73 degrees F (22.7-degrees C) maximum

operating temperature, full port design, CPVC body and ball, poly-tetra-fluoro-ethylene
(PTFE) seats, EPDM seals, tee handle; threaded, socket, union, or flanged connections.
I. Plastic Butterfly Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP, 73-degrees F (22.7-degrees C)

maximum operating temperature, 1- or 2-piece body design, PVC body and ball, poly-tetra-
fluoro-ethylene (PTFE) seats, lever lock handle, wafer style for installation between flanges.
2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working
pressure, 225 degrees F (107 degrees C) operating temperature; manually operated with
screwdriver or thumbscrew; with 1/8-inch NPS (DN6) discharge connection and 1/2-inch
NPS (DN15) inlet connection.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 240 degrees F (116
degrees C) operating temperature; with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) discharge connection and 1/2-
inch NPS (DN15) inlet connection.
C. Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 375
degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Provide taps in bottom of
tank for tank fitting; taps in end of tank for gage glass. Factory test tank with taps fabricated
and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
Furnish with the following fittings and accessories:

1. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug,
and stainless steel ball check, 100-gal. (379-L) unit only; sized for compression-tank
diameter. Design tank fittings for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 250-
degrees F (121 degrees C) maximum operating temperature.
2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig (860-kPa) working
pressure and 240 degrees F (116 degrees C) maximum operating temperature;
designed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system.
3. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) diameter
gage glass, and slotted metal glass guard.
D. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working
pressure, 375 degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating temperature. Separate air
charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by a flexible diaphragm
securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting, and drain
fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel
saddles. Fabricate and test tank with taps and supports, and label according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
E. Air Separators: Welded black steel, ASME construction and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa)
minimum working pressure and 375-degrees F (191 degrees C) maximum operating
temperature. Separators shall have perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed to
direct released air into compression tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections, threaded
connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, with flanged connections for 1-1/2-inch
NPS (DN40) and larger, threaded blow-down connection. Provide units in sizes for full-
system flow capacity.
F. Chemical Feeder: Bypass-type chemical feeders of 5-gal. (19-L) capacity, welded steel
construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet,
and drain valves.
1. Chemicals: Specially formulated to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in

piping system and connected equipment, and based on a water analysis of makeup
water.
G. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 degrees F (121 degrees C)
maximum operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper
with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting.
H. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,
Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, threaded connections for 2-
inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket,
and bottom drain connection.
I. Basket Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body

(ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304
stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
J. T-Pattern Strainers: 750-psig (5170-kPa) working pressure; ductile-iron or malleable-iron

body, grooved end connections, Type 304 stainless-steel strainer basket with 57 percent
free area; removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Hot Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-
temper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints. Below ground
or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tube with soldered joints.
Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.
B. Hot Water: Above ground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered
joints. Below ground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tube
with soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.
C. Hot Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: RTR pipe with mechanical joints.
D. Hot Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
E. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints
or Schedule 40 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply

connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return

connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere
as required to facilitate system balancing.
E. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required
for system drainage
F. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required for flow direction
control.
G. Install safety relief valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge to floor without valves. Comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation
requirements.
H. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required for
system pressure regulation.
A. Install piping according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-
inch NPS (DN20) ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) threaded nipple and cap.

D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of
main, except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.
G. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not
required at flanged connections.
H. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and
larger connections.
I. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line
pumps) and other vibration-producing equipment.
J. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, pressure-
regulating valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch
NPS (DN20) nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS (DN50)
and larger.
K. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section
“Hangers and Supports.” Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of
supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping runs less than 20 feet
(6 m) in length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6
m) or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:
1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
(10 mm)

(10 mm)
(13 mm)
(13 mm)
(16 mm)
(19 mm)
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and
maximum spacing:
1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m), minimum rod size, 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm)
(6.4 mm)
(10 mm)
4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m), minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm)
(10 mm)
(10 mm)
E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space pipe hangers according to pipe manufacturer's
recommendations for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers
with the least practical number of rigid anchor points.
F. Support vertical runs at each floor.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint
construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded,
welded, and flanged joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC
piping.
B. Mechanical Pipe Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written

instructions.
C. Heat-Fusion Joints in RTR Pipe: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere
as required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents at high points in system, heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as
required for system air venting. Do not install above finished ceilings.

C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS (DN50) and
larger.
E. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Run piping to
compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blow-down piping with
gate valve; extend to nearest drain.
F. Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated in upright
position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Install feeder in
bypass line, off main using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between
bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.
G. Install compression tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank.
Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish
proper water level in tank.
1. Support tank as detailed on Drawings. In the absence of details, provide support

from floor or structure above sufficient for weight of tank, piping connections, and
fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building components and
structural members.
H. Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from
hydronic system, and charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design
requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to equipment.
C. Install by-pass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one by-pass is required.
D. Install pressure-gage at coil inlet connections.
A. Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, un-insulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to
test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is
used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test
pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to
isolate equipment need not be tested.

5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,
to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure
during test.
B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:
1. Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of
damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and
compatible with piping system components.
2. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling
system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid.
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test
pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and
that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress
due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of
specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times “SE” value in Appendix A of
ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, “Building Services Piping.”
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
or replacing components as appropriate and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no
leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
A. Upon completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer
screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic-piping system, but before balancing, remove
disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
D. Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by chemical treatment supplier to

determine type and level of chemicals required to prevent scale and corrosion. Perform
initial treatment after completing system testing.
3.10 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is
completely full of water.
C. Perform these steps before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and
operating freely (automatic type) or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to
design requirements
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.

SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment.
1. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for materials for attaching hangers and
supports to building structure.
2. Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
3. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints” for
vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, “Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers

and Supports.”
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of
supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and
thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple
piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and
characteristics of components and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
HANGER AND SUPPORTS 15145 - 1/7

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations

for each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. AAA Technology and Specialties Company, Incorporated

b. B-Line Systems, Incorporated
c. Carpenter & Patterson, Incorporated
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. B-Line Systems, Incorporated

b. Grinnell Corporation; Power-Strut Unit
c. GS Metals Corporation
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Carpenter & Patterson, Incorporated

b. Michigan Hanger Company, Incorporated
c. PHS Industries, Incorporated
4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:
a. Gunnebo Fastening Corporation

b. Hilti Incorporated
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head
d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Incorporated
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components.

Refer to “Hanger and Support Applications” Article in Part 3 for where to use specific
hanger and support types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are

indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength

insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-
treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with

pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and
galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and packaged, non-shrink and

nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both

interior and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Non-staining, non-corrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and

systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 degrees F
(49 to 232 degrees C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)
of insulation.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow
off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes,
NPS 1/2 to NPS.
5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to
retain pipe.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of
beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Pre-set to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building steel structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field-assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers,
and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed. Fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings
at top of inserts.
E. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048
inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06
inch (1.52 mm) thick.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. All equipment, ducts, pipes, motors, should be supported by way of building steel
structure.
B. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to

support equipment above floor.
C. Grout: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that
cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water meters
installed outside the building.
1. Division 2 Section “Water Distribution” for water meters outside the building.
2. Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of factory-
fabricated equipment.
C. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each
meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings,
and location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracy

under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flow meters
3. Thermal-energy flow meters.
4. Water meters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
2.2 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
METERS AND GAGES 15135 - 1/2

A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.
1. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than
thickness of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than
thickness of insulation lining.
2.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection,

dry type, unless liquid-filled-case type is indicated.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, NPS 1/4 (DN8).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15-psig of pressure (100-kPa of vacuum to

103-kPa of pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings,
and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
METERS AND GAGES 15135 - 2/2

SECTION 15125 – PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. The Contractor shall conform to the General Conditions.
B. Section 15010: Mechanical General Provisions.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Expansion Joints
B. Guides
C. Anchors
1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Base expansion calculations on 60 degrees F installation temperature and include 30 percent

safety factor.
1. Design for hot water heating at 200 degrees F maximum temperature.

2. Design for domestic hot water at 140 degrees F maximum temperature.
3. Design for chilled water at 37 degrees F to 80 degrees f maximum temperature.
B. Piping system expansion compensation based on Metraflex expansion joints.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Conform to standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010 Mechanical General Provisions.
B. Expansion joint shop drawing data shall include maximum allowable temperature and pressure
rating and maximum expansion compensation. Provide a five-year warranty and service guarantee
and five year leak free warranty.
C. Submit Pipe expansion joint schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location,
and features for each required expansion joint.
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS 15125 - 1/4

D. Submit thrust force and expansion calculations for all piping systems. Calculations shall be
certified by a registered structural engineer.
E. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of pipe expansion joint, pipe alignment guide, and
anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component
assembly.
F. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified
under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Maintenance data for each type pipe expansion joint specified to include in the "Operating and
Maintenance Manuals" specified in the Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."
1.6 INSPECTION
A. Provide any additional anchors or means of compensating for expansion and contraction as
required by actual field conditions and as necessary to protect piping systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Expansion Joints:
1. Adsco Manufacturing Company

2. Hyspan Precision Products, Incorporated
3. Advanced Thermal Systems
4. Metraflex Company
B. Guides:
1. B-Line Systems, Incorporated

2. Adsco Manufacturing Company
3. Advanced Thermal Systems
4. Pipe Shields
2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Expansion joints in hot water and chilled water piping based on Metraflex TYPC dual weld end
internally, externally guided joint with connections.
B. Body fabricated steel with flanged ends.
C. External guides bronze for axial guiding of slip.
D. Slip to be Schedule 80 seamless steel with chromium over nickel plate on ground surface.
E. Externally mounted ram to permit injection of semi-plastic packing material into packing chamber
while under pressure.

F. Packing material shall be for service to 300 degrees F.
G. Outward limit stop to prevent disengaging joint in event of anchor failure.
H. Joints to be single type with base suitable for use as intermediate anchor.
I. Service connection.
J. Fully packed with sealing rings at front and rear of stuffing box and semi-plastic Teflon derived
packing between sealing rings.
K. Arranged to permit removal of packing, with line pressure off, without removing joint or section of
piping from line.
L. Suitable for 150 psig working pressure.
M. Include all necessary external pipe alignment guides to ensure only axial motions.
N. Provide packing nut extension to allow accessibility for tightening after installation.
2.3 GUIDES
A. Guides shall have spider type, two-piece pipe clamps.
B. Guides shall be rated for 750 degree F maximum service.
C. Guides shall be fabricated of black carbon steel.
D. Guides shall be B-Line Figure B238 size D for insulation thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Provide expansion joints where required to control expansion and contraction of piping per
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Manufacturer of expansion joints shall review piping layout, location of anchors and guides to
ensure compatibility with expansion joints.
B. Guides:
1. Install piping guides per expansion joint manufacturer's recommendations to constrain pipe
movement to an axial plane.
2. Bolt spider guide to piping per manufacturer's recommendations and before insulation is
installed.
3. After insulation is applied to guide, weld the body of the pipe guide to the mounting plate or
rigid structure.

C. Anchors
1. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
2. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping
and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.
3. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated.

4. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit
manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators.
5. Pipe Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset
anchors as required, accommodating both expansion and contraction of piping.
6. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and
pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.
3.2 TESTING
1. Test expansion joint for adequacy of travel and freedom of movement. Verify joint and
installation acceptable.
2. Provide one (1) year warranty on expansion joint parts and labor.
3. After start-up, pack joints as required to stop leakage.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15100 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.

2. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section “Mechanical Identification.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing,
disassembling, and repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section

“Materials and Equipment,” under “Source Limitations” Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1
for power piping.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
VALVES 15100 - 1/9
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use hand
wheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to:
1. Gate Valves:
a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division

b. Hammond Valve Corporation
c. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company
d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
e. NIBCO Incorporated
f. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The)
g. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
2. Ball Valves:
a. Hammond Valve Corporation

b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
c. NIBCO Incorporated
d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
e. Tyler Pipe
f. Victaulic Company of America
3. Plug Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation
b. NIBCO Incorporated
c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
4. Globe Valves:

c. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company
d. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
e. NIBCO Incorporated
f. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The)
VALVES 15100 - 2/9
5. Butterfly Valves:
a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation

b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division
c. Grinnell Corporation
d. Hammond Valve Corporation
f. NIBCO Incorporated
h. Tyler Pipe
i. Victaulic Company of America
6. Swing Check Valves:
a. Cla-Val Company
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division
c. Hammond Valve Corporation
d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Company
f. NIBCO Incorporated
g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The)
h. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
i. Victaulic Company of America
7. Wafer Check Valves:
a. Cla-Val Company
c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
d. NIBCO Incorporated
e. Red-White Valve Corporation
f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
g. Tyler Pipe
h. Victaulic Company of America
8. Lift Check Valves:

b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Incorporated
c. NIBCO Incorporated
d. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The)
e. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Incorporated
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the “Application Schedule” of Part 3 of

this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and hand wheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
VALVES 15100 - 3/9
1. Hand wheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches (DN150) and smaller, except for plug
valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10
plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches (DN100) and larger, installed 96 inches
(2400 mm) or higher above finished floor elevation.
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
I. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 840 degrees F (450 degrees C) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421
degrees F (216 degrees C) for ball valves.
VALVES 15100 - 4/9

2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, Teflon-
impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and
with aluminum or malleable-iron hand wheel.
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside
screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged
end connections; and with cast-iron hand wheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches (DN100) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa)
CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball,
standard port for 1/2-inch (DN15) valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch
(DN20) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals;
threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.

2. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
3. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
4. Memory Stop: For operator handles.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet,
cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or Teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
1. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed
bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, Teflon-impregnated packing
with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
hand wheel.
B. Globe Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze
seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with
cast-iron follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron hand wheel.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035-kPa) maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel
stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:
1. Disc Type: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches (DN50) to 6 Inches (DN150): Standard lever handle.
VALVES 15100 - 5/9
3. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches (DN200) to 24 Inches (DN600): Gear operator with
position indicator.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi
(1380-kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-
kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged
or grooved end connections.
C. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body,
bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.
D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components),
horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel
holder threaded or soldered end connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition
suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
VALVES 15100 - 6/9

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or below the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches (1500 mm) above finished floor
elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to
a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the
solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe
is being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
VALVES 15100 - 7/9

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and
butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension.
3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or
Teflon disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
7. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
C. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or Teflon packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze
disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile
iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
7. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be
Class 150 with bronze seat ring.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
VALVES 15100 - 8/9

VALVES 15100 - 9/9

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their
installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Duct markers.
7. Stencils.
8. Valve tags.
9. Valve schedules.
10. Warning tags.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C. Valve numbering scheme.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted
copies) to include in maintenance manuals.
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems,” for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MECHANICAL INDENTIFICATION 15075 - 1/8

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent

attachment on equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.

b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c. Labels of tested compliance.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type,

permanent adhesive.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.

2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving
conditions, and speed
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves;
4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate

engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
sub-core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide
holes for mechanical fastening.
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.

2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches
(200 mm) in length, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic,
with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch
(3.2-mm) center hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating

service, and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for
each application length.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe
markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and larger: Either full-band
or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required
for label.
5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Pre-tensioned Pipe Markers: Pre-coiled semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Pre-formed semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not
penetrate insulation vapor barrier.
D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, and self-

adhesive back.
E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with
pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150
mm): 3/4-inch (19 mm) minimum.
2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of
airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type,
permanent adhesive.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4-inch (19 mm)
for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar
operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated.
Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1,
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme approved by
Architect. Provide 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.0375-inch- (1-mm-) thick stainless steel.

2.6 VALVE SCHEDULES
A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations
for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on

masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.
2. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, and single-
thickness glass.
2.7 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized

card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum.

2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO
NOT OPERATE.
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more
than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
Installer's option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located
where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include
nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.

2. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar equipment.
3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
4. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and
markers may be omitted if both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and
identify units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following
general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
c. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
d. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
e. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
f. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
g. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
h. Tanks and pressure vessels.
i. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar
equipment.
C. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of

laminated-plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch
(25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location
of required identification.
D. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color

codes:
a. Green: For cooling equipment and components.

b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components.
c. Green and Yellow: For combination cooling and heating equipment and
components.
d. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and
identify units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Pumps, compressors, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
c. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
d. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
e. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
f. Tanks and pressure vessels.
g. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar
equipment.

E. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-
plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is
needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required
identification.
F. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with
flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6 Inches (150 mm): Pre-tensioned
pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, less than 6-inches (150 mm): Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 3/4 inch (19 mm) 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe
marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.
3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6-inches (150 mm) and larger: Shaped pipe
markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6-inches (150 mm) and larger: Self-adhesive
pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) wide, lapped at least 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and
covering full circumference of pipe.
B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of

manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with
painted, color-coded bands or rectangles complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping
system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums;
and exterior non-concealed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and non-accessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals
to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
markers.
3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow,
may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering
larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance
from normal location of required identification.
C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves;
faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices
and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a
valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme
and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square

b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square
c. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square
d. Condensate: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square
e. Hydronic Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square
2. Valve-Tag Color:
a. Cold Water: Blue.

b. Hot Water: Green
c. Fire Protection: Red.
d. Condensate: Black
e. Hydronic Hot Water: White
3. Letter Color:
a. Cold Water: White.
b. Hot Water: Black.
c. Fire Protection: White.
d. Condensate: White
e. Hydronic Hot Water: Black
3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices.

SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
1. Division 15 Section “Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls” for mounting

motors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
2. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor
requirements for motor-driven equipment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a

component of equipment.
B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an
integral component of motorized equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide
nameplate data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; mounting
arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground
lug locations; and information on coatings or finishes.
B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and
details including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the
following:
1. Each installed unit's type and details.

2. Nameplate legends.
3. Diagrams of power and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each
type of motor and for each control scheme.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working

clearances, and required area above and around field-installed motors. Show motor
layout, mechanical power transfer link, driven load, and relationship between electrical
components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations,
type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motors,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section
“Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls.” Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.
MOTORS 15055 - 1/5

a. The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.”
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Motorized Equipment: Identify center of gravity

and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F. Test Reports: Written reports specified in Parts 2 and 3.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain field-installed motors of a single type through one source from
a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options for Field-Installed Motors: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of motors and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements.”
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices. Provide motors
that are:
1. Compatible with the following:
a. Multi-speed controllers.
b. Reduced-voltage controllers.
2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for
use throughout speed range without overheating.
3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control
sequence.
B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and
motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of
sliding rails for belt tensioning.
MOTORS 15055 - 2/5

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed and field-installed motors except as follows:
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for a motor are specified in

another Section.
2. Manufacturer for a factory-installed motor requires ratings, performance, or
characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance
specified.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motors HP and Larger: Three phase.
B. Motors Smaller Than 1/2HP: Single phase.
C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to
which motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip-proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 degrees F (40 degrees C) and at
altitude of 3300 feet (1005 m) above sea level.
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate

connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
H. Enclosure: Open drip-proof.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of
motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
MOTORS 15055 - 3/5

D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft; sealed, pre-lubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following tests on each motor according to
NEMA MG 1:
!. Measure winding resistance.

2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. Perform high-potential test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements,

installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections

before motor installation.
3.2 MOTOR INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and
sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align
with load transfer link.
B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3.
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Section

“Mechanical Vibration Controls.”
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and
speed at motor design load.
2. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.
3. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform the following:
MOTORS 15055 - 4/5
1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and

electrical connections for compliance with requirements.
3. Verify bearing lubrication.
4. Verify proper motor rotation.
5. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.

b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action
taken to achieve compliance.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters
and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
MOTORS 15055 - 5/5

100%
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 15 Sections:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems

2. Concrete base construction requirements
3. Escutcheons
4. Dielectric fittings
5. Flexible connectors
6. Mechanical sleeve seals
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment are specified in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
9. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations
10. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections
12. Cutting and patching
13. Touchup painting and finishing
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and
duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, un-excavated spaces, crawl
spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and
mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and
weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical
contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations
within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1/15

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic
3. NP: Nylon plastic
4. PE: Polyethylene plastic
5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. CR: Chlorosulfonated-polyethylene synthetic rubber

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-dieneter-polymer rubber
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification materials
and devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space
requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are important
to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space for
disassembly required for periodic maintenance
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during
construction
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their
relationship to other penetrations and installations
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light fixtures,
communication system components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items
E. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material
and device.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and
ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are
increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these

increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet
design and commissioning requirements
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to
allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other
structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Schedule installation of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate
installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services.
Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are concealed
behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors.”
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to
surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to, the following:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company

b. Central Plastics Company
c. Eclipse, Incorporated; Rockford-Eclipse Division
d. Epco Sales Incorporated
e. Hart Industries International, Incorporated
f. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
g. Zurn Industries, Incorporated; Wilkins Division
2. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company

c. Epco Sales Incorporated
d. Watts Industries, Incorporated; Water Products Division
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Calpico, Incorporated
4. Dielectric Couplings:
b. Lochinvar Corporation
5. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Grinnell Corporation; Grinnell Supply Sales Company

b. Perfection Corporation
c. Victaulic Company of America
d.
6. Metal, Flexible Connectors:
a. ANAMET Industrial, Incorporated

b. Central Sprinkler, Incorporated
c. Flexicraft Industries
d. Flex-Weld, Incorporated
e. Grinnell Corporation; Grinnell Supply Sales Company
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Incorporated
g. McWane, Incorporated; Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Division
h. Mercer Rubber Company
i. Metraflex Company
j. Proco Products, Incorporated
k. Uniflex, Incorporated
7. Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
a. General Rubber Corporation

b. Mercer Rubber Company
c. Metraflex Company
d. Proco Products, Incorporated
e. Red Valve Company, Incorporated
f. Uniflex, Incorporated
8. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
b. Metraflex Company
c. Thunderline/Link-Seal
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Section for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead
content
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.

2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and
chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and
nuts.
K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.

2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic
action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous with threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types
and matching piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure
at 180 degrees F (82 degrees C).
E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-
kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type.

Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers,
and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-
kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded
ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 degrees F
(107 degrees C).
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connections.
Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated,
and ends according to the following:
1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid.
Include copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends; braze welded to hose.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe with Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless steel, inner tubing
covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

D. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of NP fabric,
molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating at
220 degrees F (104 degrees C). Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and
integral water-stop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping
ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Under-deck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
5. PVC: Manufactured, permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
6. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
7. PE: Manufactured, reusable, tapered, cup shaped, smooth outer surface, with nailing flange for
attaching to wooden forms.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal protruding
fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with setscrew
a. Finish: Rough brass in non-public areas.

b. Finish: Polished chrome-plate in public areas.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and setscrew
a. Finish: Rough brass in non-public areas.

b. Finish: Polished chrome-plate in public areas.
5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with setscrew and chrome-plated finish.

6. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
2.8 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application, selection is
Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened
to equipment.
1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power
characteristics, labels of tested compliance, and similar essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible location.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes complying with
recommendations of ASME A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4-inch- (30-mm-)
high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) high letters for access door signs and similar
operational instructions
1. Material: Fiberboard or brass.

2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior-type stenciling enamel; black, unless otherwise indicated; either
brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.
3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for
piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors.
D. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid, snap on, color-coded,
complying with ASME A13.1.
E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded,

pressure-sensitive vinyl, complying with ASME A13.1.
F. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following
color code:
1. Green: Cold air.

2. Yellow: Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
5. For hazardous exhausts use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Nomenclature: Include the following:
a. Direction of airflow
b. Duct service
c. Duct origin
d. Duct destination
e. Design cubic feet per meter (liters per second)
G. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate

engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub-core, unless
1. Fabricate in sizes required for message.

2. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with wording to match equipment
identification.
3. Punch for mechanical fastening.
4. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
5. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
H. Plastic Equipment Markers: Color-coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the following color code:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.

3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any criteria above.
6. For hazardous equipment use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
7. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and rpm.
8. Size: Approximately 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100-mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; and
4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
I. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical
identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, lettering, and wording indicated for
proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: If multiple systems of same generic name are indicated, provide identification that
indicates individual system number and service such as “Boiler No. 3,” “Air Supply No. 1H,” or
“Standpipe F12.”
2.9 GROUT
A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107,

Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-staining, non-

corrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psig (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Pre-mixed and factory packaged
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 15
piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location
and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.

D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Conceal piping in interior and exterior locations except in equipment rooms and service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient
space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install piping fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wallboard partitions, and
suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with setscrew, and polished chrome-plated finish. Use
split-casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Un-insulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with setscrew.
3. Un-insulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome-plated
finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with setscrew or spring clips.
N. Sleeves are not required for all core-drilled holes.
O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE removable sleeves.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet
areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor
slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.

3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).
b. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).
c. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS (DN150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-
board partitions.
d. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2

inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim” for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink, non-metallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation, using elastomeric joint sealant. Refer to Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals. Size sleeve to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve to provide for
installation of mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber-sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve to provide for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve to allow for installation of mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with the manufacturers written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber-sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire-stopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section “Fire-stopping”
for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
V. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping
specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Soldering Manual,” Chapter “The Soldering of
Pipe and Tube”; or CDA's “Copper Tube Handbook.”
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's “Brazing Handbook,” Chapter “Pipe and Tube.”
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full
and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe,
fittings, and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading
is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, “Recommended Practices and Procedures
for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe,” using qualified processes and welding operators according to
“Quality Assurance” Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and
thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by
sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as
possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque
wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Non-pressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Non-pressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement according to
ASTM D 3138.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturers written instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
X. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in
exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend
grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if
possible.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1.

2. Plastic markers, with application systems: Install on insulated segment if required for hot, un-insulated
piping.
3. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and
accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior non-concealed
locations:
a. Near each valve and control device.

b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at
branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 50-foot (15-m) intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet
(7.5 m) in congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment.
1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) high lettering for distances up to 72 inches
(1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units,
inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of
hazards and improper operations.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or provide
stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow.
1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system, locate signs
near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m).
D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section “Painting” for painting materials, surface preparation, and application.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.

2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Support: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over enamel
undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-
inhibiting metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over
galvanized metal primer
6. Exterior, Ferrous Support: Use semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-
inhibiting metal primer.
C. Do not apply paint to piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures
to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in
both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting
templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-
strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place
Concrete.”
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and erect miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support
and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code-Steel.”
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and erect wood grounds, nailing strips, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical
materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical
installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger and service elevators.
B. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for disposition of excavated material from cylinder well
hole.
C. See Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for finish flooring in elevator cars.
D. Unit Prices: Rock excavation for cylinder well holes will be paid for under the unit price
indicated in the Contract and as specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features,

finishes, and similar information.
B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating
service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure,
relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate
variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on
building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway,

pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical
service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by

authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1[ and elevator design

requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7].
1. Effective peak velocity acceleration (Av) for Project's location is less than 0.10
(seismic risk zones 0 and 1) .
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1/7

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section [4.10 in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."] [407 in ICC A117.1.]
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's

full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components,
lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated
speed and capacity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Fujitec America, Inc.

2. KONE Inc.
3. Otis Elevator Co.
4. Schindler Elevator Corp.; “330A Holeless Hydraulic Elevator.” (Basis of Design)
5. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems, including standard

components published by manufacturer as included in standard preengineered
elevator systems and as required for complete system.
B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation

between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following:
1. Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in
prime-painted steel enclosure lined with 1-inch- thick, glass-fiber insulation
board.

C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material

in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit.
D. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable, fire-resistant fluid made from

vegetable oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating
additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator
equipment.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by

Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.
E. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1, of
sufficient size to provide not less than 1-inch clearance from cylinder and extending
above pit floor. Provide means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with
ASME A17.1.
F. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and
counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or
polymer-coated, nonlubricated guides.
2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each

elevator as required to provide type of operation system indicated.
B. Single-Car Auxiliary Operations:

1. Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, car is lowered to
the lowest floor, opens its doors, and shuts down.
2. Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, cars are lowered to
the lowest floor, open their doors, and shut down.
C. Security Feature: Security feature shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car control stations to

authorize calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times
calls require authorization by card reader. Provide stripe-swipe card reader
integral with each car control station.
2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance.
Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined
adjustable time, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced
kinetic energy.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels,

with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where
required by ASME A17.1.
2. Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction.
4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction.
5. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway

entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories.
1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting

frames with reinforced head sections.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the
following:
1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet.

Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
3. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction.
4. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
5. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.

2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit
until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.
B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in
return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1
and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station
and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice
communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when
system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is
contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery
backup power supply.
D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted

cabinet telephone jack in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for
firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 13 Section
"Fire Alarm."
E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located
above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to
passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served.
1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as

indicated.
G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows.

1. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame.
H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival
and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button
stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.9 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator Description:
1. Type: Holeless, beside-the-car, single-acting, dual cylinder.
2. Rated Speed: 100 fpm.
3. Operation System: Single automatic operation.
4. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Standby-powered lowering.
b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.

c. Nuisance call cancel.
5. Car Enclosures:
a. Inside Width: 84 inches from side wall to side wall.

b. Inside Depth: 80 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels).
c. Inside Height: 96 inches to underside of ceiling.
d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral
car door frames.
e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
g. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish .
h. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides
of car.
i. Floor prepared to receive ceramic tile (specified in Division 9 Section
"Ceramic Tile").
6. Hoistway Entrances:
a. Width: 42 inches .
b. Height: 96 inches.
c. Type: Single-speed side sliding.
d. Fire-Protection Rating: 2 hours.
e. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
f. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
7. Hall Fixtures : Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

8. Additional Requirements:
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with
frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s) of full-height protective
blankets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation for Cylinder: Drill well hole in elevator pit to accommodate installation of
cylinder; comply with applicable requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Provide waterproof well casing to retain walls of well hole.
C. Install cylinder in protective casing within well hole. Before installing protective casing,
remove water and debris from well hole and provide permanent waterproof seal at
bottom of well casing.
1. Align cylinders and fill space around protective casing with fine sand.

D. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel.
Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor. Seal between protective casing and pit
floor with 4 inches of nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
E. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel.
Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to
maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment
and avoid overstressing guides.
F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use

(either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required
and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to operate elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

SECTION 12560 – LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following free-standing library furniture and equipment:
1. Bulletin Boards; EQ-1, EQ-2 and EQ-3.

2. Filing Cabinets; EQ-5, EQ-10, EQ-11, EQ-12 EQ-13.
3. Computer Stand; EQ-8.
4. Computer Workstations; EQ-9.
5. Worksurface Basket: EQ-18.
6. Clock: EQ-16.
7. Stepping Stools: EQ-17.
8. Waste Basket: EQ-18.
9. Recycling Bins: EQ-19.
10. Film Scanner: EQ-20.
11. Step Ladder; EQ-14
12. Chairs.
13. Tables.
B. RELATED SECTIONS
1. Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements" for additional LEED requirements.
2. Section 06400 “Interior Woodwork Refinishing” for restoration of existing
furniture.
3. Section 06402 “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for mahogany custom built
furniture.
4. Section 11101 “Visual Display Surfaces” for marker boards, EQ-4.
5. Section 11510 “Library Equipment” for book trucks and book return carts; EQ-6
and EQ-7.
6. Section 11511 “Library Book and Media Depository” for through-wall drop
system.
7. Refer to Equipment Schedule on Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Seating Layout: Show seating layout, aisle widths, row-lettering and chair-
numbering scheme, chair widths, and chair spacing in each row.
LIBRARY FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT 12560 - 1/4

2. Accessories: Show accessories, including locations of left- and right-hand tablet

arms, electrical devices, accessibility provisions, and attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For each seating component and for each color and texture required.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of flame-retardant treatment of fabric, from

manufacturer.
F. Maintenance Data.
G. Warranty.
A. Upholstery Fabric Source Limitations: Obtain fabric of a single dye lot for each color
and pattern of fabric required.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Upholstered Chairs:
1. Fabric: Class 1 according to DOC CS 191 and 16 CFR 1610.61, tested

according to California Technical Bulletin 117.
2. Padding: Comply with California Technical Bulletin 117.
3. Full-Scale Fire Test: Comply with California Technical Bulletin 133.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of electrical wiring and devices with seating layout to ensure
that floor junction boxes for electrical devices are accurately located to allow
connection without exposed conduit.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Chairs: Manufacturers Standard 12 year, 3-shift warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Furniture Schedule and Equipment Schedule on Drawing Sheet A-5.51 for
quantity, location and color.
2.2 FILING CABINETS; EQ-5
A. Mobile Pedestal Filing Cabinets: HON “Embark” Series with “M” pull.

1. Model: HON 1623MP.

2. Dimensions: 15 W x 20 D x 28 H inches.
3. Casters: Locking.
4. Color: Black.
2.3 COMPUTER PRINTER STANDS; EQ-8
A. Mobile Under Desk Machine Stand: SAFECO; SAF 1855BL.

1. Dimensions: 20-1/2 W x 16-1/2 D x 14-1/2 H inches.
2. Casters: 4, 2 locking.
2.4 COMPUTER WORKSTATIONS; EQ-9
A. Mobile Laptop Z-Frame Computer Workstation: SAFCO; TIF 944.

1. Dimensions: 23-1/2 W x 19-1/2 D x 28-1/2 H inches.
2. Finish: To be selected by Architect.
2.5 CHAIRS
A. Ergonomic Chairs:
1. Manufacturer: Herman Miller “Aeron Chairs.”
2. Style: Work Chair.
3. Seat & Back Textile: “Waves Pellicle.”
a. Color: “Carbon.”
4. Armrest Material: Plastic.
5. Frame: Steel.
6. Recycled Content: 62%
a. Post Consumer: 41%
b. Pre Consumer: 21%
B. Molded Plastic Chairs: 100% recyclable, High-density polyethylene or polypropylene,

blow or injection molded, with smooth and perforated surfaces that ares mar and dent
resistant.
1. Manufacturer: Herman Miller “Caper Chairs.”
2. Chair Styles:
a. Stackers.
1) Floor saver glides.
2) Casters.
b. Multipurpose.
3. Recycled content: 21% recycled content.
a. Post consumer: 15%.
b. Pre consumer: 6%.
4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Upholstered Chairs:
1. Manufacturer and Product: Lee Industries; #3088-01 Chair.
2. Upholstery Material: European, full grain, aniline dyed cowhide.
a. Manufacturer: Teddy & Arthur Edelman, Limited; “Dream Cow.”

b. Colors:
1) Brownie DRC20.
2) Cola DRC15.
3) Soft Green DRC03.
2.6 TABLES
A. Tables: As shown on Drawings.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install furniture in locations indicated on Drawings.

SECTION 12484 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Entrance mats in recessed frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of floor mat and frame.
B. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section

01352 including:
1. Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and

preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include
statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for

regionally manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each
regionally manufactured material
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames.

2. Divisions between mat sections.
3. Perimeter floor moldings.
D. Samples: For each floor mat and frame member.
E. Maintenance data.
A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in
the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
Sections 302 and 303 in ICC A117.1.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Standard Warranty: 5 years.
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12484 - 1/3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE MATS; CPT-5
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

product indicated on Drawings Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.; “EnvironTread II”
Model G-218D or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. American Floor Products Company, Inc.

2. C/S Group.
3. Durable Corporation.
4. Matco International.
5. Mats, Inc.
6. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.
7. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division.
8. Tennessee Mat Company, Inc.
9. U.S. Mat & Rubber Corporation.
B. Entrance Mats: 11/16-inch- thick, reversible double-sided buffed rubber-tire mats

alternating with 6063-T52 aluminum alloy divider bars spaced 1-1/2 inches o.c.
1. Recycled Content:
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Recessed Frames:
1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for
maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically
and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with
hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.
B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with

corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.
1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions

exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible,
with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight
connecting pins.
C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with
manufacturer's standard protective coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat
tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action;
coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide
clearance between door and mat.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of
plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring.
Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial
Completion.

SECTION 12356 - KITCHEN CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Kitchen cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops and backsplashes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 12355 “Institutional Casework”: Coordinate PLM-3 and PLM-4 with this
section. Plastic laminate for kitchen casework in Meeting Room closet will match
plastic laminate for Meeting Room casework.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Cabinets.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Cabinet hardware.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4.2: For adhesives, documentation
indicating that products meet the testing and product requirements of the Section
01353 “LEED Requirements.”
C. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and
attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and
backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
D. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain cabinets from a manufacturer that is certified for

chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
KITCHEN CASEWORK 12356 - 1/5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS
A. Basis of Design Product: The design for cabinets is based on Merillat “Essentials
Rutland II”. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following:
B. Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1.
1. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal

affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the
above standard.
C. Face Style: Flush overlay.
D. Cabinet Style: Frameless.
E. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch- thick, plastic-laminate-faced particleboard, with

PVC edge banding.
F. Face Frames: 5/8-inch- thick particleboard with plastic laminate on exposed and
semiexposed surfaces.
G. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Plastic laminate.
2.2 CABINET MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Adhesives and Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Do not use products
that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Adhesives: Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
3. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
4. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
5. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.
6. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea
formaldehyde.
7. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
8. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
B. Exposed Materials:

1. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects.

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with
Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces.
3. Plastic Laminate, PLM-2 and PLM-4: Particleboard faced with high-pressure
decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Schedule on

Drawings.
4. PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm
thick at doors and drawer fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range.
C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high-pressure decorative laminate
complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
a. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: If not indicated on Drawings, as selected

by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range.
D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species,

with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or
hardboard.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size,
style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Pulls: Back-mounted decorative pulls.
C. Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing hinges.
D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent

rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying
with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091.
2.4 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: KCMA A161.2.
B. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top
with backsplash), backsplash, and endsplash style:
1. Front: Rolled.
2. Cove: Applied (backsplash rests on top forming seam at inside corner).
3. Backsplash: Square edge.
4. Endsplash: Square edge.

2.5 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate, PLM-1 and PLM-3: High-pressure decorative laminate complying

with NEMA LD 3.
1. Grade: HGS.
2. Provide through-color plastic laminate.
3. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL.
4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
touch sanded.
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E. Adhesives: Use adhesives that comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed

shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit.
Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.
B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings, are aligned, and
are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install cabinets and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less
than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration
into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less
than 24 inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum
board.
E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units

into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces,
and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose.

F. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and
operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as
recommended by manufacturer.

SECTION 12355 - INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood cabinets of stock design.
2. Plastic-laminate countertops.
3. Wall shelving.
1. Section 12356 “Kitchen Casework”: Coordinate PLM-3 and PLM-4 with this
section. Plastic laminate for kitchen casework in Meeting Room closet will match
plastic laminate for Meeting Room casework.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:

work.
D. Samples: For cabinet finishes and for each type of top material indicated.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of

custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with requirements for modular
cabinets in AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."
INSTITUTIONAL CASEWORK 12355 - 1/5

C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish material of

manufactured wood casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog
numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer
configurations, of same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of manufactured wood casework that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.

b. Warping of components.
c. Failure of operating hardware.
d. Deterioration of finishes.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

the following:
1. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Manufactured Casework: Architectural Cabinet Systems;
a division of Windham Millwork, Inc.
a. Fisher Hamilton L.L.C.
b. Hausmann Industries, Inc.
c. Merillat.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide manufactured wood casework, including countertops,

made with adhesives and composite wood products containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for
softwood.
C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core unless
D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
F. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 .
G. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.
H. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
I. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Plastic laminate matching adjacent surfaces .
2.3 CABINET MATERIALS
A. Exposed Cabinet Materials:

1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.
B. Semiexposed Cabinet Materials:

1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS.
a. Provide plastic laminate for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise

indicated.
b. Provide plastic laminate for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts.
2.4 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH
A. Design: Provide manufactured wood casework of the following design:

1. Flush overlay with wire pulls.
B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes; PLM-3 and PLM-4: As indicated in

Finish Schedule on Drawings.
2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE
A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard

satin-finish , commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to
particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.
B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semiconcealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with

BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, self-
closing.
D. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls.
E. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catch.
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

G. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Mortise type, 5-pin tumbler, complying with
BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
2.6 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform
plane free of defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets.
B. Plastic-Laminate Tops: Plastic-laminate sheet, shop bonded to both sides of 3/4-inch

plywood or particleboard.
1. Plastic Laminate for Flat Tops: Grade HGS.

2. Plastic Laminate for Backing: Grade BKL.
3. Provide plastic-laminate edgings of the same material as top on front edge of
top, on top edges of backsplashes and end splashes, and on ends of tops and
splashes.
4. Construct top and backsplash from one piece of plastic laminate with rolled
edges and coved intersection. Where indicated, provide separate end splashes
fitted to top.
5. Use exterior plywood or exterior glue particleboard for countertops containing
sinks.
2.7 WALL SHELVING
A. Plastic-Laminate Shelving: Plastic-laminate sheet, Grade HGL or HGP, shop bonded

to both sides of plywood. Sand surfaces to which plastic laminate is to be bonded.
1. Shelf Thickness: 1 inch or as indicated.

2. Edge Treatment: Finish both edges with plastic laminate that matches faces.
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Powder-coated steel standards and shelf brackets,

complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112, surface mounted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where
manufactured wood casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe
for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16
inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to masonry or framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in walls and partitions with fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. Bolt
adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining
doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.

C. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, or framing,
blocking, or reinforcements in walls or partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a
tolerance of 1/16 inch.
D. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TOPS
A. Field Jointing: Where possible make in the same manner as shop jointing, using
dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare
edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not
required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping

devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not
exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to
exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.
B. Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent, using two or more
fasteners at each front, end, and back.
C. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SHELVING
A. Securely fasten shelf standards to masonry, partition framing, wood blocking, or

reinforcements in partitions.
B. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves.
C. Install shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or

soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
B. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over

countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c.
Remove protection at Substantial Completion.

SECTION 11511 – LIBRARY BOOK AND MEDIA DESPOSITORY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through wall single drop library depository.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.
C. Samples: For exterior finish.
D. Product test reports.
F. Warranty.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by

manufacturer.
1.4 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of depository that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and
other materials beyond normal wear.
2. Limited Warranty Period: Life of building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIBRARY DEPOSITORY
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kingsley

“Kwik Drop Standard Book Return Faceplate” #10-8950-BK with “Stainless Steel
Standard Chute” #50-8500.
LIBRARY BOOK AND MEDIA DEPOSITORY 11511- 1/2

1. General Features:
a. Weather-resistant.
b. Theft-deterrence.
c. Wording:
1) “BOOK RETURN” on faceplate.
2. Exterior Materials and Features
a. Material: 16 gage stainless steel exterior faceplate, depository doors and
cover plate. #4 finish.
b. Features:
1) Built-in weather shroud and door flap.
2) Depository Doors: Flush mounted spring loaded doors which open
inward and down. Doors are field replaceable.
3. Interior Materials and Features:
a. Materials:
1) Chute Housing: 20 gage stainless steel
2) Entry Chute: 16 gage stainless steel.
3) Interior Trim: 16 gage stainless steel.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Transport Carts: As specified in Section 11510 “Library Equipment.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect wall opening and verify dimensions prior to installation.
A. Install depository according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install using anchorage or bracing as recommended by manufacturer and as required

for stability. Complete installation to comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
LIBRARY BOOK AND MEDIA DEPOSITORY 11511- 2/2

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION HWA/7590
SECTION 11510 - LIBRARY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes

1. Book Trucks
2. Under Counter Book Return Carts
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BOOK TRUCKS – Provide 8 Book Trucks
A. Aluminum Book Trucks as manufactured by DEMCO
1. Fully welded aluminum construction
2. 300 lb. capacity, 100 lbs. per shelf
3. 12-1/2” between shelves
4. 5” diameter “LibraryQuiet” casters, 2 locking
5. Color to be Light Beige
2.2 UNDER COUNTER BOOK RETURN CARTS – Provide 4 Carts
A. Under Counter Cushion Drop Book Return Cart as manufactured by Kingsley.
1. 190 Book/475 DVD/CD capacity
2. 26” maximum height
3. Ball bearing casters
LIBRARY EQUIPMENT 11510 - 1/2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY
A. Deliver library equipment to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against
damage.
LIBRARY EQUIPMENT 11510 - 2/2

SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Cooking equipment including microwave ovens.
2. Refrigerator/freezers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 1.4: For appliances, documentation indicating that
products are ENERGY STAR rated.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Maintenance data.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer

for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

C. Residential Appliances: Comply with NAECA standards.
D. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR
product labeling program.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each

appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for defects in the magnetron tube.
2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the
sealed refrigeration system.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11451 - 1/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on
the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the
named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers
specified.
2.2 COOKING APPLIANCES
A. Microwave Oven:
a. Hotpoint.
b. KitchenAid.
c. Maytag.
2. Basis-of-Design Product: GE “Profile” Countertop Microwave Oven, Model
#PEB1590SMSS or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Hotpoint.
b. KitchenAid.
c. Maytag.
3. Oven Capacity: 1.5 cu. ft..
4. Exhaust Fan: Nonvented, recirculating-type with charcoal filter.
2.3 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES
A. Refrigerator/Freezer:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE “Profile” Energy Star Side by Side Refrigerator,
Model #PSFW3YGXSS or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Hotpoint.
b. KitchenAid.
c. Maytag.
2. Type: Freestanding, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer.
3. Storage Capacity:
a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 14.55 cu. ft..
b. Freezer Volume: 8.61 cu. ft..
4. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front and lower access panel.
11451 - 2/3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been
completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate
equipment.
B. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
11451 - 3/3
Washington, DC 100% Final Construction
SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Roll-up, electrically projected screens.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications: Metal rods, chains, bracing, fasteners and other
support components for suspending projection screens.
2. Section 06105 – Miscellaneous Carpentry: Wood blocking for installation of projection
screens.
3. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings to
contain recessed projection screens.
4. Section 16400 – Electrical supply, conduit, and wiring for motorized projection screens.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures:
1. List of proposed products and product data.

2. Shop drawings showing dimensions, method of attachment, structural support, bracing,
and electrical wiring.
3. Samples of finishes for selection by Architect.
4. Manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instructions.
A. Source limitation: Obtain projection screens from single manufacturer as a complete unit
including necessary mounting hardware, motor, controls, limit switches, and accessories.
B. Motorized projection screens shall be certified for use in the United States and Canada by
Underwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc. and shall bear UL label.
A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces
where screens will be installed is substantially complete and installation of screens is ready to
begin.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact.
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1 / 4

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
A. Draper, Inc., 411 South Pearl Street, Spiceland, IN 47385.
1. Draper Access Series V.
B. Manufacturers of equivalent products submitted and approved in accordance with Section 01630
– Product Substitution Procedures.
2.2 MOTORIZED PROJECTION SCREENS
A. Type: Electrically operated projection screen for ceiling installation consisting of case, screen,
motor, controls, electric brake, limit switches, mounting accessories, and other components
necessary for complete installation.
B. Method of installation: Recessed ceiling mounted with 3/8 diameter threaded steel suspension
rods.
C. Screen case:
1. Extruded aluminum housing with white paint finish and stamped steel end caps suitable
for installation in return air plenums. Bottom closure panel forms slot for passage of
viewing surface and is removable for access to operating mechanism and viewing
surface. Bottom perimeter flange provides trim for gypsum board ceiling.
2. Housing is symmetrical allowing for left and right hand motor locations and for viewing
surface to unroll off front or back of roller.
3. Housing designed with internal junction box and plug-in wiring connections to allow
housing to be installed and connected to building power supply separately from motor
and viewing surface.
D. Roller: Factory installed 3 inches diameter steel or aluminum tube mounted on zinc plated
brackets with double row radial ball bearings. Roller mounted on vibration insulators.
E. Viewing surface securely attached to roller at top and at bottom to weighted dowel. Provide each
side of viewing surface with black masking borders and tab-guide cable tensioning system to
maintain even lateral tension and to hold surface flat. Top of screen masked by 12” (30 cm)
black drop.
2.3 VIEWING SURFACE
A. Material: Matt white vinyl surface laminated on woven fiberglass base and surface is washable,
flame resistant, and mildew resistant; Fiberglass Matt White Surface as manufactured by
Draper, Inc.
B. Size of viewing surface:
1. Public Meeting Room: 58 inches high by 104 inches wide.

2. Children’s Program Room: 45 inches high by 80 inches wide.
C. Joints: Viewing surface shall contain no seams.
D. Edge treatment: 2 inches wide black masking borders.
E. Extra drop: 12 inches, black. A/V contractor to determine and verify.
2.4 MOTOR
A. Type: 110-120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3 wire, instantly reversible, lifetime lubricated, and equipped with
internal thermal overload protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.
B. Mount inside screen roller on rubber vibration insulators.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Provide 1 control stations to lower, raise, stop and reverse projection screen at any point.
B. Single station control: 3-position rocker switch with cover plate, accepting 110V current, and
operating by sustained contact.
C. Low voltage control: Control station without switches for interface with master control system.
Wiring from switches or receivers to low voltage control unit to be 24 V.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with ceiling construction and related
components penetrating or above ceilings such as lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, and fire-suppression system.
B. Coordinate requirements for blocking, structural supports, and bracing to ensure adequate means
for installation of screens.
C. Coordinate requirements for power supply conduit, and wiring required for projection screen
motors and controls.
D. Coordinate interface and installation of screen and masking controls with provision of video
projector/projector control system.
E. Prior to installation, verify type and location of power supply.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install projection screens and controls at locations and heights indicated on drawings.
B. Comply with screen manufacturer’s written instructions and shop drawings.

C. Install screens securely to supporting substrate so that screens are level and back of case is
plumb.
D. Provide required brackets, hanger rods and fasteners.
3.3 TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. Test motorized projection screens to verify that screen, controls, limit switches, closure, and other
operating components are functional. Ensure that screen is level and viewing surface plumb
when extended. Correct deficiencies.
B. Demonstrate operation of screen to Owner’s designated representatives.
3.4 PROTECTING
A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage from construction operations. If damage
occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in
their original, undamaged condition.


SECTION 11130 – AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. General: Comply with all Contract Documents, including Divisions 0, 1, and 15 of the general
contract specifications.
B. Statement of Work: the work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the
following:
1. Provide and install complete and operational Audiovisual System(s) as outlined in these
specifications and related drawings and documentation requirements as set forth in this
documentation.
2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all wiring, plates, connections, and
miscellaneous equipment for complete and operational System(s) even if specified in
this or other related documents or not.
C. Coordination, provision, installation, inspection, testing, instruction, and warranties of the

Audiovisual System(s).
D. All facilities, materials, equipment, transportation, and necessary labor for a complete and
operational Audiovisual System(s).
E. Additional section information:
1. Required licenses and permits including any required bonding or insurance

requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract
documentation.
2. Verification of dimensions and conditions at the job site.
3. Installation in accordance with the contract documentation, applicable installation
procedures or codes as set forth by the state or county of the project or manufacturers’
recommendations.
4. Submittal information and provisions.
5. Documented Audiovisual System(s) testing procedures.
6. Instruction of operating personnel.
7. Manuals and provisions thereof.
8. Maintenance and warranties.
F. Definitions:
1. “Contractor” – Installer who has been awarded the contract to perform the work.
2. The term “shall” is mandatory, the term “will” is informative, and the term “should” is
advisory.
3. “Provide and install” – To supply, install, and connect up complete and ready for safe
and regular operation.
4. “Indicated”, “shown”, or “noted” – As indicated, shown, or noted on drawings or
specifications.
5. “Equivalent”, “similar”, or “equal” – Of base bid manufacturer, equal in materials, size,
color, design, and efficiency of specified product, conforming to base bid
manufacturers.
AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT 11130 - 1 / 23


6. “Reviewed”, “satisfactory”, “accepted”, “approved”, “directed” – As reviewed,
satisfactory, accepted, approved, or directed by the Owner.
7. “Professional grade” – Equipment that is intended for commercial, not residential, use
and is rated for continuous duty.
8. “User-friendly controls” – Controls that are designed and laid out for ease of use in a
logical, easily recognizable, format that utilizes industry standard symbols wherever
applicable.
9. “Labels” – All labels on audio-visual equipment and racks shall be self-adhering black
laminate with white engraved letters as specified in Sections 3.03 and 3.04.
G. Below is a listing of specification standards, tests, or recommended installation methods and

procedures or applicable installation or safety codes.
1. National Electrical Code (NEC)

2. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
4. Electronics Industries Association (E.I.A.)
5. American National Safety Institute (ANSI)
6. Audiovisual System Engineering, by Davis and Davis Second Edition published by
SAMS
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide Audiovisual System(s) compatible with the Owner’s
communications systems (i.e. telephone, video, and computer systems) and operations.
B. The Contractor shall provide equipment that, where required, shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., local codes, the National Electrical Code
and any other governing codes. Such items shall bear a label or mark indicating their
conformance to the above requirements.
C. The Contractor shall provide complete and operational system(s) configured and installed for
user-friendly operation and low maintenance. On-site factory technical support shall be
provided if necessary, to assure performance.
D. The Contractor shall restore finish hardware to original condition including painting, ceiling
modifications, and attachments.
E. Work shall be in compliance with all applicable standards listed above and all governing
codes and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and the Contract Documents.
F. Coordinate exact location and installation of the equipment, power, conduit, and raceway
systems with the Owner and electrical contractor.
1.3 SYSTEM(S) DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. The following is a basic system(s) description and is not intended to be exhaustive in nature
and is not complete for proper installation or operation of system(s). The AV specification
and the AV drawings need to be fully reviewed together to ensure that the design intent and
list of design intent equipment is completely covered.
1. The Public Meeting Room is an easy to operate audio visual system with a recessed,
ceiling mounted, front projection screen at the front of the room. The system will include


one wireless microphone, a CD/MP3 player, and six microphone inputs located
throughout the room as shown on the TA drawings. Each input shall be split through a
distribution amplifier and sent to an analog mixer and an automixer for easy automated
operation. A button control panel shall be located at the rear of the room in order to
control the projection screen, CD player, and basic audio controls. A press plate shall
be located at the rear of the room as shown in the AV drawings.
2. The Lobby shall have a 32” portrait oriented, wall mounted, flat panel video screen for
public information display. The Pre-function area shall have a 32” portrait oriented,
ceiling mounted flat panel video screen for public information display. The Pre-function
flat panel will be housed in a custom wood enclosure. Graphics still store and DVD
player will be located in a rack in the information desk area.
3. The Children’s Program area shall have a recessed ceiling mounted, front projection
screen.
4. The Staff Lounge shall have a 32” wall mounted flat panel video screen with external
speakers. The system will include a DVD player located in the information desk area.
5. A separate 70 Volt general paging system shall be installed in the building for coverage
of the public areas and hallways. Paging shall be utilized via the phone system and
shall interface with the phone system as appropriate for easy use from any handset.
The speaker locations are shown on the drawings and each floor shall have its own
zone. The paging equipment shall be located on the third floor in the Technology Room.
General paging shall be muted in the Public Meeting Room when the AV systems are in
use.
6. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and installation for all
conduit, outlet boxes, raceway and floor boxes suitable for installation of the Audio and
Video device locations as shown on the AV drawings. This would also include all power
circuits notated; coordinate with the electrical and data drawings. The AV contractor
will be responsible for providing and installing the AV equipment and AV cabling as
noted in this specification.
1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Conduits:
1. Review all conduit runs, junction boxes, and electrical outlets provided and installed by
the electrical contractor and provide fit-up drawings based on these.
2. Verify and inspect rough-in of all necessary conduits and outlets.
3. Provide a written acceptance of all field conditions or a list of any discrepancies within
ten (10) working days from Notice to Proceed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall carefully control handling and installation of all items which are not
immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware or
equipment losses before, during, and after installation. The Contractor is responsible for all
items until Final Acceptance.
B. The Contractor shall, prior to installation, protect exposed surfaces with material which is
easily removed without marring finishes.
C. The Contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, replace any products damaged during
storage or handling.


1.6 SCHEDULING
A. The Contractor shall submit a schedule to the Owner for approval. The schedule shall show
sequence of work, etc. from time of Notice to Proceed to final sign off of project. This
schedule shall be submitted on Microsoft Project, both paper and electronic format, with
submittals.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the installation of the system(s) to
be compatible with the work of the other trades. The Contractor shall attend weekly progress
meetings and provide continuous on-site project management.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to arrange with the Owner a mutually
acceptable time for Acceptance Testing, based upon the dates provided in the Solicitation.
D. The Contractor shall provide operating personnel with extensive training for each system
type and room type as outlined in Section 1.03.
1.7 BID/TECHNICAL PROPOSALS
A. A pre-bid site visit will be utilized to allow the contractor to see the current jobsite conditions.
This meeting will be scheduled in advance with the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be experienced in the provision of systems similar in complexity to

those required for this project and shall at least meet the following criteria:
1. The primary business of the Contractor/Installer shall be the installation of audio or

video systems.
2. At least five (5) years experience with the specified equipment and systems.
3. Experience with at least one project of similar size and complexity as outlined in these
specifications.
4. Be a franchised dealer and service facility for the products furnished.
5. Maintain a fully staffed installation crew and service crew for maintenance and
installation of the specified system(s).
6. Lead Installer shall have attended factory trained DSP and digital format classes for
equipment specified in this specification.
7. Audiovisual System(s) shall be approved by the Owner, Architect and Consultant.
8. At the request of the Owner, Contractor shall demonstrate that he has:
a) Adequate facilities and equipment for this work.
b) Adequate staff with the appropriate technical expertise and experience for
this project.
C. Provide a list of five (5) references with locations, names of contacts, and contact phone
information with brief system descriptions and dollar amounts for each reference.
References shall be no more than three (3) years old.
D. A detailed equipment list in Microsoft Excel format (both hard copy and disk) showing Item
Number, Item Description, Manufacturer, Part Number, Quantity, Heat (BTU/hr.), Power
(Watts), Weight, and Price. Include manufacturer’s specification sheets for each piece
submitted. This shall be generated from this document and related drawings.
1.8 SUBMITTALS


A. Provide the following for approval thirty days after Notice to Proceed and prior to
commencement of work:
1. A complete list of all products to be incorporated within the work with all quantities
listed. Each product shall be listed with specification section references in Excel format.
2. Complete functional diagrams of each system required for a complete and operational
system with descriptive narratives of any deviations from the specified system design.
3. All shop drawings as defined in the section.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shall not be smaller than 24”x36” and shall be sized as appropriate for thorough
understanding of system(s).
2. Shall be scaled appropriately but not less than 1/8” =1’.
3. Shall show detailed schematic wiring diagrams showing interconnection of Contractor-
provided components and fabricated products, wiring and cabling diagrams depicting
cable types, and device designators. Each component shall have a unique designator
and use same designator throughout the project.
4. Shall show location of all equipment in racks, consoles, or on tables, with complete
dimensions, wire routing, and cabling within housing.
5. Shall show all A.C. power outlet locations and terminal strip locations within each
equipment rack.
6. Shall show plans and sections of the building and adjacent grounds with the location of
all installed equipment such as loudspeakers, racks, consoles, plates/panels, antennas,
(etc.).
7. Shall show patch panel layouts and labeling strips, including color schemes, as
necessary.
8. Shall show full fabrication detail of custom enclosures and millwork indicating
dimensions, material, finish, and openings for equipment.
9. Shall show all speaker mounting details including hardware types and load capacity.
Structural information with design calculations and a copy of the PE’s certifications for
each item/drawing.
10. Shall provide complete drawings for all fabricated plates and panels. Drawings shall
include dimensional locations of components, component type, engraving information,
plate color information, and a complete bill of materials for each plate.
11. Shall show complete labeling schemes for all cabling and equipment components for
project. Include font size and styles along with a sample cable label and equipment
label. All labeling shall be consistent within the project scope.
12. Shall show a complete wire schedule showing source and destination and indicating
conduit location and sizing. Provide conduit sizing and layout with at least a 20%
oversize for project utilization for future system growth.
13. Shall show a complete conduit riser and associated conduit plans for a complete
conduit system. Include a Junction Box schedule showing type, size, mounting style,
and location of each box.
C. Submittal Format:
1. Each submittal shall be in three-ring binders no larger than 3” spines and sized for
150% of material enclosed. Use multiple volumes if necessary.
2. Arrange product data in alphanumeric order.
3. Separate major groupings with labeled binder tabs.
4. Index product data sheets by manufacturer and model or part number.
5. Each submittal shall include a unique numbering scheme and be numbered in
consecutive order.
6. Reference addendum or change order numbers as applicable.


7. Reference specification section, part, article, paragraph, and/or drawing reference as
applicable.
8. Each submittal shall include a complete table of contents with the following information:
a) Project title and number.
b) Submittal number.
c) Date of submission.
A. Verify conditions on the job site applicable to this work. Notify Owner’s Representative in
writing of discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions promptly upon discovery.
B. If conditions exist on the jobsite which make it impossible to install work as shown on the
drawings or detailed in the specifications, recommend solutions and submit drawings
showing how the work may be installed to the Consultant and Owner for approval.
1.10 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Upon completion of installation and Contractor commissioning (as outlined in Section 3), the
Consultant shall perform system(s) inspection and testing.
B. To assist the Consultant, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of one person for
inspection and two persons for testing who are familiar with all aspects of the system(s).
C. The process of testing the system(s) may necessitate moving and adjusting certain
components such as speaker aiming and transformer tap values.
D. Testing will include operation of each system and any components deemed necessary.
Provide required test equipment, tools, and materials required to perform necessary repairs
and/or adjustments.
E. In the event that further adjustments or work is required during testing, the Contractor shall
continue his work until the system(s) is (are) acceptable at no addition to the contract price.
If approval is delayed due the defective equipment, and/or failure of equipment or installation
to meet the requirements of this specification, the Contractor shall pay for additional time
and expenses of the Owner at the rate specified by the Owner.
F. All Control Systems shall be fully tested prior to Final Testing. Once the Control
Programming is “finalized” all source code, programming, and touch panel software shall be
“burned” on to a CD ROM and delivered to the owner. All Control System programming
(including source, files, touch panel design), and DSP is the property of the owner.
G. Infrastructure Labeling Requirements: Raceways, boxes and fittings shall be Underwriters'

Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed and labeled. UL listing and labeling will not be required if it can
be shown that raceways and boxes meet the requirements of another nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL).Required licenses and permits including any required bonding or
insurance requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract
documentation.
1.11 WARRANTY


A. All equipment provided by the Contractor shall be installed per manufacturer’s specifications
and warranted by the Contractor for a period of one (1) year from the date of written
acceptance to meet all performance requirements outlined herein. Warranties shall not be
pro-rated. For all Owner-provided equipment, include pricing for an initial one year service
contract.
B. During the warranty period, no charges shall be made for any labor, equipment, or
transportation to maintain performance and functions.
C. The Contractor shall respond with remedy to a trouble call within twenty-four (24) hours after
receipt of such a call, and shall provide a 24-hour service phone number. Downtime for
system(s) shall be no longer than a 24-hour period. All replacement parts/components shall
be of equal or higher level for service.
D. Equivalent replacement equipment shall be temporarily provided when immediate on-site

repairs cannot be made.
E. At least one routine inspection and adjustment visits will be scheduled for the first year.
Submit reports to the Owner.
F. Provide a separate price for an optional yearly service contract for five (5) years, to begin at
the end of the initial warranty and service contract. Provide details on coverage and options.
G. The Contractor shall be present at the first use of the system (scheduled by the owner), and
(one) additional event as requested by the owner.
1.12 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. After final inspection and completion, provide instruction to Owner-designated personnel on

the operation and maintenance of the system(s).
B. Develop an instructional course based on the use of the system(s) and manufacturers’
recommendations. Provide a minimum of six (6) hours of instruction. Arrange course so that
operational and maintenance classes are separate.
C. Submit an outline of the course with sample instructional aids for approval thirty (30) days
prior to scheduled instruction sessions.
D. The Contractor shall be present at first system use and one (1) additional event as
requested by the Owner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Electronic component models shall be commercially available for a least one (1) year prior to
bid, or be approved by the Owner.
B. All equipment and material shall be new.
C. All equipment must be UL listed or built to UL standards, where required.


2.2 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be professional grade and rated for continuous duty. Basic guidelines
have been prepared with manufacturer names, makes, and model numbers included as
minimum performance requirements. These must be satisfied, unless a variance (separate
document) is submitted and approved by the Owner.
B. System(s) shall be installed and configured for simplicity of operation, with user-friendly
controls.
C. Product quantity is as required for complete and operable system(s). If any quantities are
given, the Audiovisual System Contractor shall provide at least the given amount. Some of
the product listed under this section may not be required to fulfill the work as outlined.
D. Regardless of the length or completeness of the descriptive paragraphs listed herein, each
device shall meet published manufacturer’s specifications.
E. Remove all manufacturer’s nameplates or logos from product, such as found on speaker(s),
within the public sight lines or spaces.
F. Paint all wall and ceiling mounted speaker grilles and enclosures as directed by the
Architect.
G. The Contractor is responsible for providing a fully operational turnkey system. The following
equipment list and attached drawings are for design intent purposes. It is the responsibility
of the AV contractor to review the AV specification and drawing package to ensure that the
design intent, quantities and equipment is captured in the bids proposal.
2.3 EQUIPMENT – PUBLIC MEETING ROOM
A. CD/MP3 Player
1. CD-R/RW playback compatibility.

2. Instant start.
3. Direct track select buttons.
4. CD-Text.
5. Auto cue.
6. +/- 12% Pitch control.
7. Folder/title search.
8. Repeat mode (Single track/all tracks/program and random repeat)
9. RCA Stereo outputs and Coaxial RCA Digital output (SPDIF).
10. Headphone output.
11. Rack mounted.
12. Acceptable product:
a) Denon DN-C615 or equal by Tascam (provide one)
B. CD Record Deck
1. CD-R and CD-RW Recorder and Player.

2. Compatible with CD-R data, CD-R for digital audio, CD-RW data, and CD-RW for digital
audio.
3. CD-Text and ID3 tag display.
4. Input CD-Text to recorded tracks from front panel.
5. Play unfinalized CD-Rs and CD-RWs


6. Analog and Coaxial/Optical (SPDIF) digital inputs and outputs.
7. Auto fade-in and out with programmable time.
8. Sync (level dependent) recording.
9. Headphone output.
10. Auto-cue feature for playback.
11. Rack mounted.
a) Marantz CDR633 or equal by Tascam (provide one)
C. Wireless Microphone
1. 1440 frequencies within a 36 MHz switching bandwidth.

2. Robust metal construction.
3. Pilot tone squelch.
4. Audio signal metering on transmitter LCD display.
5. XLR and ¼ inch outputs.
6. Handheld transmitter.
7. Rack mounted.
a) Sennheiser ew135G2 or Equal by Shure (provide one)
D. Eight Channel Microphone mixer
1. Four balanced mic/line inputs (XLR).

2. 15V Phantom power.
3. Bi-color signal present/overload indicators.
4. Trimless mic stage preamplifiers.
5. Four balanced stereo line inputs (TRS).
6. Independent mono switch.
7. 12dB of line gain.
8. Two balanced outputs (XLR).
9. Independent overload indicators.
10. Independent level controls.
11. Internal pad for mic level output.
12. Rack mounted.
a) Rane MLM 82S (provide one)
E. Automixer
1. Eight balanced mic-line input channels (Phoenix block connectors)

2. One unbalanced ¼” aux level input.
3. Eight unbalanced ¼” direct line level outputs.
4. One balanced master line level output (Phoenix block connectors)
5. Selectable 48V phantom power per channel.
6. Level selectable peak output limiter.
7. Rack mounted.
a) Shure SCM810 (provide one)
F. DSP
1. Four balanced analog I/O plus AES3 stereo digital I/O.

2. Up to 48-bit precision processing.
3. 106 dB dynamic range for line levels.
4. Studio grade mic/line preamplifiers on all analog inputs.


5. 48 volt phantom power.
6. Presets recall via contact closures’.
7. Versatile input port for remote control via voltage.
8. Versatile output port provides relay drive.
9. 10Base-T Ethernet control.
10. RS-485 control.
a) Rane RPM 44 (provide one)
G. Assistive Listening System
1. Field strength maximum 8000 micro volts.

2. Transmitter input balanced with level of -55dBu to +21dBu.
3. Antenna type 50 ohm BNC.
4. Receiver to be battery powered and have approximately a 30 hour life when used with
alkaline batteries.
5. Four receivers with ear speakers.
a) Listen LS03 (provide one)
H. Two Channel Audio DA
1. Two operation modes: stereo and combine.

2. Four outputs per channel.
3. Balanced line level XLR connectors.
4. Ground lift, level control, and clip indicator light on each output.
5. Input signals are monitored by signal-present LEDs and clip LEDs.
6. Headphone circuit to monitor either channel.
a) Whirlwind DA-2 (provide four)
I. Amplifier
1. Switching power supply.

2. 2 RU chassis.
3. Solid state two channel.
4. Protection circuits: shorted, open, mismatched loads, overheating, DC, high-frequency
overload, under/over voltage, and internal faults.
5. Channel specific fault protection.
6. Front panel power switch.
7. Rear-mounted level controls and mode switch.
8. 300 watts per channel at 70V
a) Crown CTs 600 or equal by QSC (provide one)
J. Speaker
1. Consistent 120 degree broadband pattern control.

2. Coaxial design.
3. Kevlar-reinforced 6.5 inch woofer and 1 inch compression driver.
4. 150 watts power handling.
5. 70V taps: 68W, 34W, 17W, 8.5W
6. Back can.
a) JBL Control 227CT (provide eight)
b) JBL MTC-200BB6 (provide eight)


K. Wall Mount Control
1. 15 Programmable buttons with LED feedback.

2. Customizable backlit button labels.
3. Five way navigation pad.
4. Volume control knob and LED bar graph.
5. Built-in IR receiver and light sensor.
6. Two RS-232, two IR, four inputs and six relay control ports.
7. Cresnet, 10/100 Ethernet and built-in webserver.
a) Crestron MPC-M25 (provide one)
L. Rack
1. 21 RU and 20 inches deep.

2. Welded construction with up to 300 lb. weight capacity.
3. Abundant Velco and internal cable tie points.
4. 10-32 threaded rack rails with marked rack space increments.
5. Grounding/bonding stud in top and bottom of center section and backpan.
6. 16-guage steel construction with 1/8 inch think laser-cut corner braces.
7. Reversible padlackable center section.
8. Power distribution.
a) Middle Atlantic DWR-21-22PD (provide one)
b) Middle Atlantic DWR-FK22 (provide one)
c) Middle Atlantic PD-815SC (provide one)
2.4 EQUIPMENT – STAFF LOUNGE
A. DVD Player
1. DVD, DVD+/-RW, CD, CD-r/RW, VCD Playback.

2. MP3, WMA, DivX Playback.
3. JPEG Playback, Kodak Photo CD compatible.
4. HDMI Interface.
5. NTSC/PAL Conversion.
6. IR, RS-232 Control.
7. Simultaneous output from all analog video outputs.
8. Optical, Coaxial digital outputs.
9. Programmable DVD playback.
10. Changeable wallpaper.
11. Rack mounted.
a) Denon DN-V210 (provide one)
B. Flat Panel Display
1. 32” LCD.
2. 2000:1 Contrast ratio.
3. 500 cd/m2 brightness.
4. 1366 x 768 native resolution.
5. Built-in expansion slots.
6. Inputs: DVI-D, Analog D-sub, 5 BNC (RGBHV), Composite (Shared RCA and BNC), S-
Video, HDMI, Component BNC.


7. RS-232 control.
8. TV tuner.
9. Power conditioner.
10. Tilt wall mount.
11. Attached speakers.
a) NEC LCD3215 (provide one)
b) NEC SP4020-4620 (provide one)
c) Furman AC-215 (provide one)
d) Chief MTR6045 (provide one)
C. UTP Receiver
1. Female RJ-45 input.

2. Female HD-15 output, one 1/8 inch captive screw connector, one female RJ-45 loop
through connector.
3. Receives high resolution video and mono audio signals 600 feet or more over single
UTP cable.
4. Supports RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video, S-video, and composite
video.
5. Compatible with HDTV component video, bi-level or tri-level sync.
6. Separate variable level and peaking controls.
7. Additional buffered UTP output for daisy-chaining up to eight receivers.
8. LED power indicator on front panel.
9. Rack mountable.
10. Acceptable Product:
a) Extron MTP RL 15HD A (provide two)
2.5 EQUIPMENT – PRE-FUNCTION AREA
A. Flat Panel Display
1. 32” LCD.
7. RS-232 control.
8. TV tuner.
11. Attached speakers.
12. Custom enclosure w/ceiling mount (mahogany finish)
b) NEC SP4020-4620 (provide one)
c) Furman AC-215 (provide one)
d) Chief MTR6045 (provide one)
e) Forbes AV Custom 8938 – ceiling mount (provide one)
B. UTP Receiver


through connector.
UTP cable.
video.
9. Rack mountable.
2.6 EQUIPMENT – LOBBY VIS
A. DVD Player
1. DVD, DVD+/-RW, CD, CD-r/RW, VCD Playback.

2. MP3, WMA, DivX Playback.
3. JPEG Playback, Kodak Photo CD compatible.
4. HDMI Interface.
5. NTSC/PAL Conversion.
6. IR, RS-232 Control.
7. Simultaneous output from all analog video outputs.
8. Optical, Coaxial digital outputs.
9. Programmable DVD playback.
10. Changeable wallpaper.
11. Rack mounted.
a) Denon DN-V210 or equal by Tascam (provide one)
B. Flat Panel Display
1. 32” LCD.
7. RS-232 control.
8. TV tuner.
b) Furman AC-215 (provide one)
c) Chief MTR6045 (provide one)
C. Graphic Still Store
1. Stores BMP or JPEG format high resolution graphic files.

2. Plays back stored images as an automated, programmable slide show.
3. Smooth image transitions including cut and variable-rate dissolves.


4. RGBHV or RGBS pass-through BNC inputs.
5. RGBHV or RGBS BNC outputs.
6. Upload graphic files from a PC via Ethernet.
7. 16 MB internal image storage.
8. RS-232 control.
9. Rack mountable.
a) Extron GSS 100 (provide one)
D. UTP Transmitter
1. Female HD-15 input.

2. Female RJ-45 output.
3. Transmits high resolution video and summed mono audio signals over a single UTP
cable.
video.
6. Pre-peaking circuit for optimizing video signal on long cable runs.
8. Rack mountable.
a) Extron MTP T 15HD A (provide two)
E. UTP Receiver

through connector.
UTP cable.
video.
9. Rack mountable.
F. Rack
1. High-quality black wood grain laminate finish.

2. 12 RU by 18 inches deep.
3. Power distribution.
a) Middle Atlantic BRK12 (provide one)
b) Middle Atlantic PD-815SC (provide one)
2.7 EQUIPMENT – PAGING
A. Amplifier


1. Switching power supply.
2. 2 RU chassis.
3. Solid state four channel.
4. Protection circuits: shorted, open, mismatched loads, overheating, DC, high-frequency
overload, under/over voltage, and internal faults.
5. Channel specific fault protection.
6. Front panel power switch.
7. Rear-mounted level controls and mode switch.
8. 220 watts at 70V by four channels.
a) Crown CTs 4200 USP/CN or equal by QSC (provide two)
B. Matrix Processor:
1. All system parameters shall be software controllable via serial port.

2. Software shall be supplied with DSP.
3. System signal processing shall include crossover functions, parametric, and graphic
equalization, delay, compression, limiting, and feedback suppression.
4. Software shall allow for easy and flexible configuration of the DSP.
5. DSP shall have at least eight (8) with up to then (10) outputs configurable in any
configuration.
6. DSP shall include user definable preset configurations.
7. All inputs and outputs shall be electronically balanced.
8. Provide appropriate serial cables as required for computer interface.
9. Contractor shall utilize software configuration as supplied by Consultant and shall
submit finals for approval
10. Provide the latest release version of software.
11. Processor shall be rack-mounted.
a) Ashly ne24.24m (provide one)
b) Ashly ne24.24m Input (provide three)
C. Backup Power Supply
1. 1850 Watts / 2200 VA output power capacity.

2. Nine NEMA 5-15R and 2 NEMA 5-20R receptacles,
3. RS-232, Smart-Slot, and USB interface ports.
4. Rack mounted.
a) APC SUA2200XL (provide one)
D. Speakers
1. 4” ceiling type with self contained enclosure.

2. Speaker shall have a 4 inch woofer and tweeter.
3. Formed steel back can.
4. Wattage Taps: 3.7, 7.5, 15, 30
a) JBL Control 24CT (provide fifty-five)
E. Rack
1. Welded construction with up to 10000 lb load capacity.

2. Cable pass-through
3. Standard locking rear door
4. Electrical knockouts on removable split rear plates


5. Provide with vented front and rear door, keylock side panels, fan top with 10” fan and
rear rack rails.
6. 1/8” thick internal steel braces
a) Middle Atlantic WRK-44-32 (provide one)
b) Middle Atlantic VFD-44
c) Middle Atlantic MW-VRD-44
d) Middle Atlantic SPN-44-312
e) Middle Atlantic MW-10FT-550CFM
f) Middle Atlantic CBS-WRK-32
g) Middle Atlantic WRK-RR44
h) Furman PL-8C or approved equal
2.8 PLATES, PANELS, CONDUIT AND FLOOR BOXES
A. Provide plates and panels as described in the drawings and as required for fully operable
system(s).
B. Custom plates shall be 1/8” thick aluminum, standard EIA sizes, brushed black anodized
finished unless otherwise noted.
C. Plastic plates are not allowed.
D. Lettering shall be in all caps and numbers engraved with a color contrasting to the base
material with a minimum size of 0.25”.
E. Acceptable manufacturers of custom plates and panels:
1. FSR or approved equal

2. RCI Custom
3. Panel Crafters
F. Conduit and Outlet Box System:
1. Empty Conduit and outlet box system complying with sections 16050 and 16820
2. Not less than ¾” conduit size and larger conduit sizes as indicated.
G. Outlet Boxes:
1. 1 gang box – 2-1/8 inches deep by 2-1/8 inches high with 1 gang ring.
2. 3 gang box – 2-1/8 inches deep by 2-1/8 inches high with 1 gang ring
3. 12” x 12” NEMA Type 1 enclosure
4. 24” x 24” NEMA Type 1 enclosure
5. Others as required or per manufacturer’s recommendation
H. Cover Plates
1. Comply with Section 16050 and 16820.

2. Provide blank plates for all outlet boxes that are not utilized for each phase.
I. Floor Boxes: Shall be as follows:
1. Acceptable Product: The product shall be the FSR or Wiremold.


a) FSR FL-710 in Meeting Room
b) FSR-710-BLK-C
c) Wiremold RFB4 in Conference Room
d) Wiremold S38CCTCBS
2. Type: Unless otherwise indicated, floor boxes shall be fully adjustable, UL listed, CUL
listed, scrub water approved and not less than 480 in3 in volume. Adjustment leveling
feet shall provide 1/8 inch (minimum) vertical or angular (tilting) adjustment.
3. Cover Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, cover plates for floor boxes shall be made of
heavy steel not less than 11-gauge thick and each shall be provided with a 0.25 inch
aluminum ring (SLP-type) or flange permanently attached to the adjusting ring.
2.9 CABLES AND WIRING
A. All audio cable shall be stranded copper.
B. Shielded cables located in raceways shall have aluminum foil shield with drain wire.
C. Where speaker cables are run exposed in return plenum space, provide plenum rated cable.
D. Where cables are routed through cable tray, provide tray rated cable of equal gauge.
E. Provide the following as required for fully operable system(s).
1. Microphone level cables: No. 22 shielded jacketed – West Penn 452 with gray jacket.
2. Line level cables: No. 22 shielded jacketed – West Penn 452 with gray jacket.
3. Constant voltage speakers: amplifier to zone: Min No. 14 gauge – West Penn 226.
4. Constant voltage speakers: plenum rated amplifier to zone: No. 14 gauge jacketed-
West Penn 25266.
5. Constant voltage speakers: within zone No. 16 gauge jacketed – West Penn 225.
6. Constant voltage speakers: within zone plenum No. 16 gauge jacketed – West Penn
252225.
7. Communication outlet cables: No. 20 shielded – Belden 83559 Plenum.
8. Ethersound cables (runs under 105m): No. 24 – Belden 1304A.
9. Control cables: No. 20 shielded – Belden 83559 Bladen.
10. Communication outlet cables: No. 22 shielded – Belden 83559 Plenum.
11. RGB video cable: Belden 1406B, 1407B, 1417B as required.
12. RGB riser: Belden 7710A, 7711A, 7712A, 7713B as required.
13. RGB plenum rated: Belden 1824A, 1825A, 1826A as required.
14. SVHS cables: Belden 1808A as required.
15. Precision video cable: Gepco VSD200ITS Plenum as required.
16. RGB sync cable: West Penn wire WP6355as required.
17. Loudspeaker cable: No. 10 THHN provide different colors for each pass band type,
supply plenum as required.
18. Antenna cable: RG-59 minimum refer to manufacturer’s specification and
recommendations as required.
2.10 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Where specific equipment is described, it is not the intention to discriminate against the
products of other manufacturers, but rather to establish a standard of quality. All proposed
substitutions should be submitted as alternates with complete data.


B. The Owner requires manufacturer’s original specification tests. The owner will evaluate and
approve all substitutions.
C. Items designated “no substitutions” will be specified item only. Submission of items other
than specified shall not be considered.
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Electronic equipment shall be permanently mounted in equipment racks.
B. Follow ASDI standards as a minimum.
C. Provide shaft locks or security covers on non-user operated equipment having front panel
access.
D. Install XLR-type connectors wired as follows: Pin 2 High, Pin 3 Low, and Pin 1 Shield.
E. Mount all equipment, speakers, plates and panels, plumb and level.
F. Permanently install all equipment to be firmly mounted and held in place. Provide necessary
equipment supports to hold and support loads with at least a 5:1 safety factor.
G. Raceway
1. Install raceway and outlet box system continuous from outlet to junction box and to
equipment location with no more than four (4) quarter bends (360 degrees total).
2. Install raceway from outlet boxes to cable ladder in corridor as indicated. Bush and
ream conduit ends and terminate with insulated bushings. Clamp conduit to ladder as
required for proper support. Provide fittings.
3. Install raceway from outlet boxes to accessible ceiling spaces. Bush and ream conduit
ends and terminate with insulated brushings.
4. Where cable tray/ladder is not utilized, make continuous runs from box to box with
isolation from building systems as required.
H. Floor Boxes
1. General: Install boxes as indicated or as necessary, complying with the manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of codes and standards, and according to
recognized industry practices. Finished installation shall have a 4 hour minimum fire
rating.
2. Room Locations: Install boxes per plans.
3. Adjustments: Under the following condition and with the approval of the Contracting
Officer, move raceways and boxes from the shown location as follows:
a) Where box locations shown would interfere or cause associated electrical
equipment to interfere with architectural, structural or mechanical features,
install the box in a location which eliminates interference but with the
smallest deviation from the location shown.
4. Knockouts: Open only knockouts which will be used for a conduit. Install tight fitting
knockout closers in holes from which conduits have been removed.


5. Box Supports: Fasten raceways and boxes securely in place, using any approved
spring clips and other fasteners, required in Section 16072 - Supporting Devices.
6. No Extension Rings: Install boxes which provide the required volume without the use of
extension rings.
7. Masonry Boxes: Install masonry boxes where boxes are recessed in wood, concrete
block or brick or wood paneling. Saw-cut the opening for the boxes so that they will fit
snugly in the opening. Install boxes with front edges flush with adjacent surfaces.
8. Cast Metal Boxes: Install cast metal boxes with weatherproof covers under any of the
following conditions:
a) Exterior locations
b) Where exposed to moisture
c) In exposed rigid steel conduit systems
9. Boxes for Receptacles: Shall be equipped with a grounding terminal screw.

10. Communication, Signal and Alarm Outlets: Install boxes for telephone, intercom, public
address and fire alarm outlets. Grounding terminal is not required for these boxes.
11. Box Covers: Install box covers appropriate for the box, type of outlet and device, and
with additional requirements as follows:
a) For boxes recessed in gypsum wallboard, install raised device covers.
b) For exposed, surface mounted boxes, install covers deep drawn 1/2 inch,
with height and width dimensions identical to the associated box.
c) Terminate and install plates specified in Section 16140 - Wiring Devices and
per plans.
d) For cast metal boxes, install gasketed, cast metal covers.
12. Care for Insulation: Replace any thermal insulation cut or damaged during installation
of boxes.
13. Floor Box Adjustment: Adjust floor boxes and covers so that cover plates are flush with
the finished floor around the entire circumference.
14. Carpet Plates: In carpeted areas, install a carpet plate at each floor box.
3.2 EQUIPMENT HOUSING
A. Install amplifiers in equipment racks according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Provide adequate ventilation fans to maintain a rack temperature of less than 92 degrees
Fahrenheit.
C. Provide rear support for housing mounted equipment greater than 15” deep.
D. Allow a minimum of 20% open rack space.
E. Fill all empty spaces with blank panels, sizing as required, painted to match housing.
F. Locate operator useable equipment and patch panels at an appropriate operating height.
G. Key all door locks for each housing type (front, rear) alike.
H. Looking at the equipment racks from the rear of the racks, install all AC power and ground
cabling on the left and audio and video cabling on the right.
I. Provide lights mounted in the top of each rack to illuminate the interior for service or
maintenance. Lights shall be individually switch-able and placed so as to provide maximum
illumination throughout the rack.


J. Provide rear-mounting rails as required for proper mounting.
3.3 LABELING
A. Provide, for each piece of rack-mounted equipment, an engraved lamicoid label and attach
to the front of the equipment. Install in a plumb, level, and permanent manner. Provide rear
mounted labeling for all rack-mounted equipment.
B. Provide engraved label over each user-operated control that describes the function or
purpose of the control. Adjust size of label to appropriate size for location.
C. Provide custom project plates at the top of each equipment rack designating consultant and
installation contractor (see rack elevations for details).
D. Provide each terminal strip with a unique descriptor and numerical designator for each strip.
Show strip information on the drawings.
E. Provide logical and legible cable and wiring labels permanently attached for easy
identification to each cable on both ends.
F. Label on cables shall be adhesive style striping covered with clear, heat shrink tubing, sized
appropriately for the cable.
G. Wiring designator shall be alphanumeric code, unique for each cable.
H. Each cable type shall be labeled starting with different destinations (i.e. mic series “Mxxx”,
speaker series “Sxxx”, etc.).
I. Locate the cable designator at the origination and the destination of each circuit. Locate
cable designator within 2” of connection point.
3.4 CONTRACTOR COMMISSIONING
A. Prior to energizing or testing the system(s), ensure the following:
1. All products are installed in a proper and safe manner per the manufacturers’
instructions.
2. Insulation and shrink tubing are present where required.
3. Dust, debris, solder, splatter, etc. is removed.
4. Cable is dressed, routed, and labels and all connections are consistent with regard to
polarity.
5. All labeling has been provided and installed.
6. All products are neat, clean, unmarred and securely fastened.
7. All debris has been cleaned and removed from the site.
8. All electronic devices are properly grounded.
B. Perform the following test. Record all results in the final project manual.
1. Test each AC power outlet for proper connections for hot, neutral and ground.
2. Measure and record the DC resistance for the technical ground in the equipment racks
and console. Resistance should be 0.15 ohms or less.
3. Measure the impedance of each speaker line from the amplifier rack.


C. Speaker Verification Test:
1. Provide a low level distinctive tone to each amplifier input.

2. Systematically turn on each amplifier, one by one, and verify that the correct speaker is
being driven. Correct wiring as required for proper operation.
D. Constant Voltage Speaker test:
1. Provide a low level distinctive tone to each amplifier input.

2. Systematically turn on each amplifier, one by one, and verify that the correct speaker is
being driven. Correct wiring as required for proper operation.
3. Walk the areas covered by the speakers and check for even level volume coverage.
Adjust any speakers that are not correct by changing tap values as required for even
volume level.
E. Speaker Polarity:
1. Use an electronic polarity checker to test each reinforcement speaker. All speakers
should have the same relative polarity.
F. System(s) Gain Adjustment:
1. Adjust each active device to have unity gain from the console output to the input of the
amplifiers.
2. With all amplifiers turned off, connect a sine wave and pink noise to an input of the
console. Using a RMS voltmeter, adjust the scale to an output between -10 and 0dBu.
Once level has been established, it should remain unchanged throughout the testing.
G. Signal Delay Adjustment:
1. Adjust the delay speakers to ensure proper synchronization between the main speakers
and the delayed speakers.
2. Using TEF20 or SMARRT Live measure and adjust the arrival times of each speaker to
be fully synchronized.
H. Amplifier Level Adjustment:
1. Adjust the gain of each amplifier to provide consistent and appropriate levels throughout
the seating areas/facilities.
2. With the console and other electronic devices feeding the amplifiers adjusted as
described above, adjust the output of the console to be -10dB on the output VU meter.
3. Adjust the appropriate amplifiers to achieve 85dBA in the area covered by one of the
speakers. Use a calibrated sound level meter to make the adjustments.
4. If the speaker is utilizing an active crossover, mute the individual bandpass sections to
adjust each section independently.
5. Start with the speaker closest to the stage area or the booth location as appropriate.
Once that speaker has been adjusted to the above criteria, repeat this procedure for
each speaker cabinet.
6. Amplifiers should be set to provide an average of 85dBA plus or minus 1.5dB
throughout each seating section.
I. Amplifier Level Adjustment 70 volt System:
1. Adjust the level of the 70 volt systems to achieve a volume level appropriate for their
location and intended use.


2. After initial amplifier adjustment, walk all areas utilizing the 70 volt systems and check
for volume uniformity. If any changes of 3dB or more occur, adjust that specific area or
speaker as required for even coverage.
J. Input Verification Test:
1. Using a microphone, portable signal generator, or CD player, send signal from every
microphone input to the console. Check every connection location in the facility.
2. Verify video signal presence at each component input with test equipment and verify
the proper signal and uniform strength.
3. Verify that the receptacle under test appears at the correct position on the patch bay
and is operating properly.
4. In a similar manner, check any other inputs or tielines, as appropriate.
K. Video Path Tests:
1. Insertion Gain.
2. Line Time Waveform Distortion.
3. Short time Waveform Distortion (2T pulse).
4. Chrominance-Luminance Gain Inequality.
5. Gain/Frequency Distortion, Differential Gain and Phase
L. Notification:
1. Once all of the above is complete, the system(s) is (are) ready for inspection. Formally
notify the Owner at least seven (7) days prior to desired inspection date.
2. Final adjustments and equalization will be conducted at the time of inspection.
3.5 APPLICABLE FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. The list below forms only a part of this specification.
1. J-C-30A &Am-1 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, fixed installations)

2. W-C-3735B Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit, and Service
3. W-C-586C Conduit outlet boxes, bodies, and entrance caps, electrical: cast metal
4. W-C-596E/Gen Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specifications
5. W-F-406B Fittings for Cable, Power, Electrical and Conduit, Metal, Flexible
6. W-F-408C Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Thick wall and EMT)
7. W-J-800D Junction Box: Extension, Junction Box; Cover, Junction Box (Steel,
Cadmium, or Zinc Coated)
8. HH-I-553C Insulation Tape, Electrical (Rubber, Natural, or Synthetic)
9. HH-i-595C Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive, Plastic
10. WW-C-0054OC Conduit, Metal, Rigid: and Coupling, Elbow, Nipple, Electrical Conduit:
Aluminum
11. WW-C-566C Conduit, Metal, Flexible
12. WW-C-581 E Conduit, Metal, Rigid, and Intermediate: and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple
Electrical Conduit: Steel Zinc Coated
13. C2-1990 National Electrical Safety Code
14. C97.1-1972 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600v or less
15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
16. 142-1982 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems



SECTION 11054 - LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Cantilever bracket metal library stack shelving system
1.2 PRE-APPROVED MANUFACTURES
A. Spacesaver Corporation, Fort Atkinson, Wisconsin
The above manufacturer is pre-approved by the Owner as meeting the quality, features
and components required. Other manufacturers offering products which are equal to
or exceed these requirements may submit product information for approval.
A. Seismic requirements: Shelving units must meet, or be modified by the manufacturer

to meet local seismic code requirements. Contractor to provide an affidavit certifying
that the installation meets or exceeds current local seismic code requirements.
B. Plumbness of shelving units: 1/8” maximum deviation between level of bottom shelf
and canopy top, measured on the edge of any upright in any direction.
C. Resistance of shelving units to lateral loads: 1/4” maximum deflection from vertical
under a horizontal force of 100# at top of upright. Permanent set after load is removed
shall not be more than 1/8 of an inch.
D. Deflection of uprights under load: Maximum deflection of upright in any direction with
all shelves evenly spaced and all shelves on one side of the range evenly loaded at
50# per lineal shelf foot shall not exceed 1.00” at top of upright. Permanent set after
lad is removed shall not be more that 1/8 of an inch.
E. Shelf loading and deflection: Shelves shall support loads of 50# per lineal shelf foot
without deflection in excess of 3/16” and without permanent set after load is removed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.
C. Samples: For shelving, uprights, and accessories.
LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS 11054 - 1/4

E. Warranty (see 1.6 below).
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be trained and approved by manufacturer, with a

minimum of two years experience installing the specified library shelving system.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain library stack system and all components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of library stack system that fail in materials or
1. Failures include, but are not limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and
other materials beyond normal wear.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish 5 percent of amount of shelf units installed for each size and type indicated,
but no fewer than 10 units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, steel sheet substrate complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
2.2 STEEL BRACKET SHELVING
A. Steel Bracket Library Shelving: Shelving consisting of two upright support columns per
section, with adjustable shelves cantilever-hung by brackets on one or both sides of
uprights, and complying with ANSI Z39.73.
B. Upright Post Frames: Welded
1. Upright Posts: Vertical upright columns, minimum 14 gauge steel, 2” deep with a
1-1/4” face with 1/2” return flanges. The uprights are fully welded to a tubular top
spreader and a channel bottom spreader. The uprights shall have shelf
attachment slots on 1 inch increments the entire length of the uprights. Uprights
shall include location indicators the length of upright on 6” centers.

2. Spreaders: Top spreader shall be a minimum of 14 gauge steel tube 2-1/2” tall
and 1” wide. The bottom spreader channel shall be minimum 16 gauge channel.
C. Base Supports: The support shall be minimum of 14 gauge steel and provide lateral
unit stability.
D. Leveler Kits: Single and double faced as required, with 3/8-1i6 UNC cage nuts and
levelers held by the base support.
E. Base Shelves: One-piece shelves with integral back stops, 18 gauge cold-rolled steel,
designed to fit snugly around upright columns, with kick plate 3 inches high. Provide
sloped units unless indicated otherwise. Provide 2 brackets per base shelf.
F. Adjustable Steel Shelves: Manufacturer’s standard shelves, minimum 18 gauge cold-

rolled steel. The front edge shall consist of three 90 degree bends to form a shelf
thickness of 3/4”. The rear edge of the shelf shall be upturned 2 inches to form a shelf
backstop unless otherwise noted.
G. Shelf End Brackets: Minimum 16 gauge steel of a depth not less that that of the shelf
on which they are used, and shall extend not less than 6” above the top surface of the
shelf. The upper front corner shall have a minimum radius of 1”. Shelf brackets shall
have a minimum of two hooks at the top for engaging into the upright posts and one
safety lug to prevent accidental dislodgement at the bottom.
H. End Panels and Canopy Tops: Wood end panels and canopy tops are covered in
Section 06410 – Architectural Wood Casework.
I. Bookstack Unit Types
1. Type: Single-faced and Double-faced units as shown.

2. Frame Style: Welded Upright Post Frame.
3. Width: 36 inches unless otherwise noted.
4. Height: Manufacturers standard heights of 42 inches, 66 inches, 78 inches and
84 inches.
5. Number of Shelves: Two, Four, Five, or Six adjustable shelves depending on unit
height; one sloping base shelf.
6. Shelf Depth: 8 inches, 9 inches, 10 inches or 12 inches nominal as shown.
7. Shelf Types:
a. Flat with low integral backstops.

b. Sloping with integral backstops.
c. Adjustable divider with integral backstops.
d. Fixed periodical.
e. Hinged periodical.
f. Zigzag paperback shelf.
g. Cascade newspaper display.
h. Horizontal newspaper display.
i. Multimedia browser bin.
j. Media shelf tier.
k. Videocassette shelf.

l. Hinged flipper door unit.

m. Bag rack.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Findable Book Supports: Unattached book support, 6 inches high, with cork pad on
bottom, for use on shelf surface.
1. Provide two per shelf.
2.4 STEEL FINISHES
A. All components to be painted with an electrostatically applied Powder Coat Finish.

Color to be “Frost”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean all finished flooring over which shelving is to be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install library stack systems according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Level library stack units with integral adjustable leveling devices to a tolerance of 1/8
inch in 96 inches for level and plumb.
C. Install using anchorage or bracing as recommended by manufacturer and as required

for stability.
D. Install shelves at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, at equal spacing in each unit.
Insure that ADA clearance requirements are met.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean all library stack shelving units and all components.

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Warm-air dryers.
3. Childcare accessories.
4. Underlavatory guards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by

room of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.
C. Maintenance data.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1/6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
B. Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser; #3:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2892.

2. Description: Two-roll unit with sliding panel to expose other roll.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Capacity: 9- or 10-inch- diameter rolls.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
6. Lockset: Tumbler type.
7. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front.
C. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser ; #1:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Model 2490.

2. Description: Lever-actuated mechanism permits controlled delivery of paper rolls
in preset lengths per stroke.
4. Minimum Capacity: 8-inch- wide, 800-foot- long roll .
5. Material and Finish: Heavy gage steel body with navy translucent high impact
plastic door.
D. Waste Receptacle; #10:

2. Mounting: Open top, recessed .
3. Minimum Capacity: 12 gal.
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) .
5. Liner: Bobrick Part No. 3944-12; Reusable vinyl liner .
6. Lockset: Tumbler type for waste-receptacle.
E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser; #-2:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-306..

2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
3. Mounting: Horizontally oriented, recessed .
4. Capacity: 45 fluid oz.

5. Materials: Molded plastic reservoir with stainless steel inner spring and spot.
Chrome-plated brass housing.
7. Refill Indicator: Window type.
F. Grab Bar #5 and #6:

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in

grip area.
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Grab Bar #7: As indicated on Drawings.
H. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit; #4:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-254

3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with
tumbler lockset.
4. Receptacle: Removable.
I. Seat-Cover Dispenser; #13:

3. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers.
4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
J. Folding Utility Shelf; #15:

2. Description: Hinged unit with spring-loaded shelf that automatically returns to
vertical position.
3. Nominal Size: 15-1/2 inches long by 5-3/4 inches wide.
4. Material and Finish: 18 gage Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
K. Utility Shelf; #9:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI Model 0694.

2. Description: Surface mounted shelf
3. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.

L. Mirror Unit; #8:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI Model 0600.

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method
indicated below.
a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking

mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.
b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices
requiring a special tool to remove.
4. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2 WARM-AIR DRYERS

1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc.

2. American Dryer, Inc.
4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
5. Bradley Corporation.
6. Excel Dryer Corporation.
9. World Dryer Corporation.
B. Warm-Air Dryer; #11:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Sloan Valve Company; Model EHD-501.

3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.
a. Operation Time: 30 to 40 seconds.
4. Cover Material and Finish: Chrome-plated steel .

5. Electrical Requirements: 110/120 VAC, 1500 W.
2.3 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES


2. Brocar Products, Inc.

3. Diaper Deck & Company, Inc.

5. Koala Kare Products; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
6. SSC, Inc.
B. Diaper-Changing Station#14:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Model 962.

2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and
with child-protection strap.
a. Engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.
3. Mounting: Semirecessed, with unit projecting not more than 1 inch from wall
when closed.
4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), exterior shell with
rounded plastic corners; HDPE interior in manufacturer's standard color .
6. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.

2. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without
removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install
units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.

SECTION 10671 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes post-and-beam metal storage shelving.
A. Delegated Design: Design metal storage shelving, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance for Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Capable of

withstanding the loads indicated according to MH 28.2.
C. Seismic Performance: Metal storage shelving shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 .
1. Seismic Component Importance Factor: 1.5 .
1.3 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:


C. Shop Drawings: For customized metal storage shelving. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include installation details of
connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal storage shelving indicated to comply with

performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.
METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10671 - 1

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For metal storage shelving, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.
G. Product certificates.
H. Maintenance data.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Floor Anchors: Galvanized-steel, post-installed expansion anchors, power-actuated

fasteners or threaded concrete screws. Provide number per unit recommended by
manufacturer unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.
B. Wall Anchors: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel anchors designed to secure

metal storage shelving to adjacent wall. Provide one per shelving unit for each
shelving unit adjacent to a wall unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.
2.2 POST-AND-BEAM METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. General: Factory-formed, field-assembled, freestanding, post-and-beam metal storage

shelving system, designed for shelves to be supported by beams that span between
and are supported by corner posts, with beams adjustable over the entire height of
shelving unit. Fabricate initial shelving unit with a post at each corner. Fabricate
additional shelving units as add-on units, designed to share two corner posts with initial
shelving unit. Provide fixed top and bottom beams, adjustable intermediate beams,
and accessories indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Durham Manufacturing Company (The).
b. Equipto.
c. Penco Products, Inc.
d. Schaefer Systems International, Inc.
e. Tennsco.
f. Unicor; Federal Prison Industries, Inc.
B. Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 1000 lb.

C. Posts: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel of thickness required for load-carrying capacity
per shelf and number of shelves; in manufacturer's standard open-box shape; with
perforations at 1-1/2 inches o.c. to receive beam-to-post connectors.
1. Add-On Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel, T-shape; perforated to
match main posts and of same thickness.
2. Post Base: Cold-rolled steel floor plate, drilled for floor anchors.
D. Beams: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel of thickness required for load-carrying

capacity per shelf; in manufacturer's standard shape; with projecting manufacturer's
standard beam-to-post connectors at each end designed to engage posts. Provide
beam at each side of each shelf, with center supports as required for load-carrying
capacity of shelf.
1. Provide top, bottom, and intermediate shelf beams with [single] [double] beam-
to-post connectors.
2. Provide top and bottom shelf beams with double beam-to-post connectors and
intermediate shelf beams with single beam-to-post connectors.
3. Provide beams for the number of shelves required.
E. Flat Metal Shelves: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet of thickness required
for load-carrying capacity per shelf. Fabricate backs and sides of shelves with box-
formed edges, with corners lapped and welded.
F. Unit Dimensions and Number of Shelves or Beams Without Shelves: As shown on

Drawings.
G. Accessories:
1. Tie Plates: Cold-rolled steel, finished to match posts; designed for joining posts
of adjacent shelving units.
2. Supports: Back-to-wall type that bolt to posts; as required for shelving unit
stability.
H. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication: Prefabricate shelving components in shop to greatest extent

possible to minimize field fabrication.
B. Fabricate metal storage shelving square and rigid, with posts plumb and true and
shelves flat and free of dents or distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid
structure, free of buckling and warping.
1. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners,
and similar items.
C. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form backs of shelving units up to
48 inches wide from one piece.

D. Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Remove burrs.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to develop strength, minimize distortion, and
maintain the corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed locations, finish welds
and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour
of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Weld before finishing components
to greatest extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and ceilings to which metal storage shelving will be attached for
properly located blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support
fasteners.
B. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling
and warping.
1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible.
2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to
support shelf loading and as required for stability.
3. Adjust post-base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation.
4. Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor
plate to achieve level and plumb installation.
5. Install seismic restraints.
6. Connect side-to-side shelving units together.
7. Install shelves in each shelving unit at spacing indicated on Drawings or, if not
indicated, at equal spacing.
a. Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with beam-to-post
connectors fully engaged in post perforations.
C. Accessories:
1. Install finished end panels and trim at exposed ends of shelving units.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect post-and-beam metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical of

1/4 inch in 84 inches of height.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage
accurately and securely.

B. Replace metal storage shelving that has been damaged or has deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for
fire extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to
ensure fit and function.
1.4 WARRANTY

repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 1/3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and
mounting bracket indicated.

a. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
b. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
c. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
d. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 5 gallon nominal capacity, with

monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
1. UL Rating: As indicated on Drawing Sheet A-0.00.
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire
extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

a. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.
b. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.
c. Fire End & Croker Corporation.
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,
size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a. Orientation: Vertical .

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at

locations indicated.

SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:

C. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear) .
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 1/3

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that

a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;
“Cosmopolitan”
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;
c. Potter Roemer LLC; “Alta”.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of
trim indicated.
1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at
outer edge (backbend).
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.
F. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
J. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities
of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle.
3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect .
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER ."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing.

2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Lettering Color: Black.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
K. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Interior of cabinet.
2. Stainless Steel: No. 4.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and
weld joints and grind smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Standard metal lockers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:

C. Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
D. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with

accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers
Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.4 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship,
excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1/5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, cold rolled.
C. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-
locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
D. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside

face of exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated, for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.2 STANDARD METAL LOCKERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Penco Products, Inc.; Vanguard Lockers.
2. Tennsco Corp.; Tennsco Lockers.
B. Locker Arrangement: Triple tier, as indicated on Drawings.
C. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Body and Shelves: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together.

Fabricate from unperforated 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet;

lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded
into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical
main frames.
F. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed
into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend
at horizontal edges.
1. Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-
thickness steel sheet.
2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or
stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors.
3. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors
and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full
perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors.
4. Door Style: Louvered vents at top and bottom.

G. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-
installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when
door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.
H. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either
built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated;
pry and vandal resistant.
1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks;
fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to
full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
2. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism
and moving components isolated to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and
incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door
is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching
mechanism.
I. Combination Padlocks: Provided by user.
J. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Triple-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook.
K. Accessories:
1. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from manufacturer's standard thickness, but

not less than 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
a. Height: 4 inches .
2. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet.
L. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp
edges and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for
complete installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom,
and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld
frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or

rivets for nominal assembly at Project site.
D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:
1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor.

2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than
48 inches above the floor.
E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
F. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped plastic

plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.
G. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in
lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to
match lockers.
H. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch- wide edge dimension, and designed for
concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers;
finished to match lockers.
I. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners,
except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished
to match lockers.
2.4 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing,

apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
B. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply

manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with
resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film
thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but

not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through
backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal
distortion.

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed

fasteners on door faces or face frames.
C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice
plates.
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.

2. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on
Drawings.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
aluminum rivets.
3. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed
ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.

SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
2. Wall vents (brick vents).
B. See Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.
C. See Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using structural and seismic performance requirements
and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver
blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on 90 mph wind speed, B exposure and
1.15 importance factor.
C. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall

withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 .
1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project
is 0.154 g.
2. Component Importance Factor is 1.25 .
D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified,

as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided,
except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section

01352 including:
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1/4


3. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate
VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
C. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles,
and spacing.
D. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural and

seismic performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:

a. Airolite Company, LLC (The).
b. All-Lite Architectural Products.
c. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
d. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Louver Depth: 6 inches.
3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and
0.080 inch for frames.
4. Louver Performance Ratings:
a. Free Area: Not less than 50% for louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm.
c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 600
fpm free-area intake velocity.
d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 800-
fpm free-area exhaust velocity.
5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which
screens are attached.
C. Louver Screening:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
2. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick.
2.5 WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS)
A. Extruded-Aluminum Wall Vents:

a. Airolite Company, LLC (The).
b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
e. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Extruded-aluminum louvers and frames, not less than 0.125-inch nominal
thickness, assembled by welding; with 18-by-14- mesh, aluminum insect
screening on inside face; incorporating weep holes, continuous drip at sill, and
integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of load-bearing design and construction.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to be selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with
adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new
units.
E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete,
masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint.

SECTION 10185 – UNIT SHOWER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Unit Shower fabricated from gel coat fiberglass with integral plywood backing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:

3.
C. Shop Drawings: For shower unit. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
E. Product certificates.
F. Maintenance data.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings
of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] [75] [200] or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural

& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1 for shower and dressing compartments designated as accessible.
UNIT SHOWER 10185 - 1/2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBERGLASS SHOWER UNIT
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Accessibility Professionals “Accessible Corner Shower” #API3LEN4242B75B or
1. Lasco Bathware.
2. or equal.
B. Corner Shower Unit:

1. Configuration: 3 piece module; as shown on Drawings.
a. Sides: Fiberglass panels with 8 inch tile appearance.
b. Floor: Multi-layer fiberglass, non-skid, reinforced bottom.
c. Corner: Molded soap ledges.
2. Size: 43 inches x 43 inches x 78 inches.
3. Finish: Gelcoat.
4. Color: White.
C. Accessories:
1. Grab bars:
2. Curtain Rod
3. Curtain: Weighted.
4. Handheld Shower:
5. Collapsible Water Retainer:
6. Drain: caulkless.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install

compartments rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure compartments in position with
manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
B. Curtains: Install curtains to specified length and verify that they hang vertically without
stress points or diagonal folds.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Curtain Adjustment: After hanging curtains, test and adjust each track or rod to
produce unencumbered, smooth operation. Steam and dress down curtains as
required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. Remove and replace curtains
that are stained or soiled or that have stress points or diagonal folds.
UNIT SHOWER 10185 - 2/2

SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each
product having recycled content.
C. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
D. Samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
F. Maintenance data.
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings
of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural

& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1/4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: Leveled, Type 304..
B. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45-lb density, made with binder
2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL UNITS

a. All American Metal Corp.
b. Flush Metal Partition Corp.
c. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
d. Global Steel Products Corp.
e. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
f. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
g. Metpar Corp.
h. Rockville Partitions Incorporated.
i. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung.
C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure
laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-
formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground
smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.
1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1
inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.
2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars
mounted on units.
3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading)
at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.
D. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses standard

with manufacturer:
E. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel.
F. Stainless-Steel Finish: Custom textured finish as selected by Architect on exposed

faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipment.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating

hardware and accessories.
1. Material: Chrome-plated zamac.
2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to
hold doors open at any angle up to 270 degrees.
3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at
compartments designated as accessible.
4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted
accessories.
5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging
doors.
6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.
B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless

steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing,
with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications.
For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-
resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural
support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from
structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of
pilasters to conceal anchorage.
B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels
and walls.

C. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two
brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall
anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at
walls.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware

manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.

SECTION 10101 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Markerboards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections,
1. Show locations of panel joints, if any.
B. Samples: For each exposed product.
C. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES; EQ-4
A. Magnetic,Glass, Dry-Erase Markerboards: Shop-fabricated, glass surface laminated to

enamel coated steel backing.
1. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Glass Whiteboard “Foreverwhite
Glass Whiteboard.”
a. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Steel:
1) Coating: White enamel baked-on coating.
c. Glass: 6 mm thick, tempered, low-iron glass with 1-inch bevel edges and
radius corners.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10101 - 1/2

d. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, acrylic adhesive.
2.3 MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide 1 set of each accessory for each markerboard.
B. Marker Pens: Set of 4 dry-erase maker pens (black, red, blue and green) with
magnetic organizer.
C. Magnet Indicator: Two, round, rate-earth magnets.
D. Markerboard Cleaner: “GFC-2000” glass and furniture cleaner.
E. Mounting Hardware:
1. Edge Grips: Four, round, brushed stainless steel.
2. 3/16 inch toggle bolts.
2.4 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Markerboard Assemblies: Laminate glass face sheet to steel material under heat and
pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair
installation of visual display surfaces onto wall surfaces.
B. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated
on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide clips, backing
materials, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean markerboards promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.
B. Protect installed markerboards from damage during construction.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10101 - 2/2

SECTION 09991 - ENCAPSULATION COATING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of encapsulation coatings
on the following existing interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
7. Plaster.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC
content.
A. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color
and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental

services have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added
cost to Owner.
ENCAPSULATION COATING SYSTEM 09991 - 1/3

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s 20 year limited warranty against manufacturing defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCASEMENT COATING SYSTEM
A. General: Water-based, acrylic, non-toxic liquid protective coating system complying

with ASTM E-1795 for encasement of leaded paint.
B. System Manufacturer and Products:

1. Primer: Global Encasement, Inc.; “PrepLESS Primer” or equal.
2. Protective Coating: Global Encasement, Inc. ; “LeadLock” or equal.
C. VOC Content: Less than 0.0001 pounds per gallon (0.1 g/l).
D. Nonflammable.
E. Moisture Vapor Transmission:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic

moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with

existing finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates

and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease.
3.3 INTERIOR ENCAPSULATION SCHEDULE
A. As indicated on Drawings and Hazardous Materials Report.

SECTION 09931 - WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the
following substrates:
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Exposed wood panel products.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section

01352 including:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior primers, stains, and transparent
finishes, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
D. Product List: Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI
Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each finish system indicated and each color
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
application of each type of finish system and substrate.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09931 - 1/4

a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional

benchmark samples of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no
added cost to Owner.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix)
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each
material and color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Primers, Stains, and Transparent Finishes:

Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to primers, stains, and transparent
finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Flat Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
8. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
C. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples .
2.2 PRIMERS AND SEALERS
A. Lacquer Sanding Sealer: MPI #84.
B. Shellac: MPI #88.

2.3 STAINS
A. Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90.
2.4 VARNISHES
A. Exterior Marine Spar Varnish (Gloss): MPI #28, Gloss Level 7.
2.5 LACQUERS
A. Lacquer (Clear Gloss): MPI #86, Gloss Level 6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured

with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes.
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces are dry.
4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrate and conditions.

B. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced finished wood surfaces.

3.3 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1. Lacquer Over Stain and Sealer System: MPI INT 6.3F.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).

b. Seal Coat: Lacquer sanding sealer.
c. Two Finish Coats : Lacquer (clear gloss).
B. Exposed Wood Panel-Product Substrates:
1. Lacquer Over Sealer System: MPI INT 6.4Y.
a. Seal Coat: Lacquer sanding sealer.

b. Two Finish Coats: Lacquer (clear gloss).

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following new and existing interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Wood.
3. Gypsum board.
4. Plaster.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
D. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC
content.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1/8

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental

services have been activated.

cost to Owner.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint
base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these
requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or
finishing shop:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more
than 250 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more
than 250 g/L.


13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
14. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L.
15. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340
g/L.
16. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.
C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat

paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with
the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and
coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
l. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
v. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule .
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in

paint systems indicated.
2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
2.4 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

1. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3].
2.5 LATEX PAINTS
A. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2).
B. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3).
C. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5).
2.6 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

1. Concrete: 12 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.

surfaces are dry.


and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION AND PAINTING OF EXISTING SURFACES
A. Examine areas to be repainted, or refinished and conditions under which paint or finish
is to be applied. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
1. Where existing finishes are indicated to be removed, verify that finishes, under-
coats, and adhesives have been completely removed, exposing bare substrates
free of films or coatings.
B. Requirements for Existing Painted Surfaces:
1. Except where otherwise indicated, where existing paint is essentially sound,

remove only loose and peeling paint, rust, oil, grease, dust, soiling, and other
substances which would affect bond or appearance of new paint.
C. Removing Paint:
1. For limited paint removal, use abrasive methods, including scraping and sanding.
Use hand tools. Avoid gouging substrates. Use mechanical abrasive methods
such as orbital sanders and belt sanders only with approval in each case. Do not
use rotary sanders, sandblasting, or water-blasting.
2. Chemicals formulated for the purpose, such as solvent based strippers and
caustic strippers, may be used for total paint removal. Use care and follow
manufacturer's direction exactly. Protect workers and others against harm,
including vapor inhalation, fire, eye damage, chemical poisoning from skin
contact with chemicals, and other dangers associated with use of chemicals.
Dispose of lead residue and other harmful substances properly.
3. Grind smooth and sand as necessary to remove shoulders at edges of sound
paint
to prevent flaws from photographing through new paint. Where manufacturer
recommends, feather paint edges using drywall joint compound or other method
paint manufacturer recommends.
4. Where existing surfaces to be painted, repainted, finished, or refinished are
glossy, roughen the surface by sanding or other accepted method that will
produce a surface tooth sufficient to properly receive new paint or finish.
5. Existing surfaces indicated to be cleaned but not painted, finished, repainted, or
prefinished:
a. Remove soiling, stains, dirt, grease, oil, and other unsightly
contaminants. Use detergents and cleaning compounds that are
compatible with surfaces and that will not damage existing finishes.
Materials and methods used are subject to approval. Refinish surfaces
damaged by using incorrect products or improperly using cleaning as
agents, at no additional cost.
6. Scrub existing paint to be repainted using household cleaner and water. Rinse
thoroughly and allow to dry before painting.
7. Water Stained Surfaces: Prime each such interior surface, and the interior finish
surface applied as directly to exterior walls, indicated to be painted. Use an oil

base coating or paint product specifically recommended by the manufacturer to

conceal water stain marks so that they will not show through scheduled paint
coats. This prime coat shall be in addition to coats in indicated in Painting
Schedule.
8. Before starting painting, repainting, finishing, or refinishing in each area, broom
clean and remove excessive dust. After beginning operations in a given area,
do
not broom-clean; clean only with commercial vacuum cleaning equipment.
a. Surfaces to be painted or finished shall be clean, dry, smooth, and free
from dust and foreign matter that will adversely affect adhesion or
appearance.
D. Previously Painted Wood:
1. Existing Natural Finish Wood Surfaces:

a. Where surfaces to be refinished are in good condition, remove old wax and
polish by wiping with mineral spirits. Change rags frequently. Sand lightly
until dull; remove dust using a tack rag. Where surfaces are porous or in
poor condition, and where existing finish is scratched or otherwise
damaged, remove old finish completely, clean surfaces and treat as for
new wood.
b. From surfaces to be refinished, remove grease, wax, oil, and other
materials that might interfere with adhesion.
E. Application to Existing Surfaces:
1. Paint, repaint, finish, or refinish indicated surfaces.

2. Paint or finish previously painted, unpainted, or natural finished surfaces in
accordance with color schedule. Where surfaces were previously concealed and
are exposed by the Work under this Contract, paint to match adjacent work in
color, texture, degree of gloss, and type of paint used.
3. Existing painted surfaces damaged during the work under this contract: Entire
surface to natural breaks such as corners or projections.
4. Existing painted surfaces repaired, extended, or patched under this contract:
Entire surface to natural breaks such as corners or projections.
5. Existing painted and natural finished surfaces indicated to be repainted or
refinished: Entire surface to natural breaks such as corners or projections.
6. Existing natural finish surfaces damaged during the work under this contract:
entire surface. Where surface cannot be refinished without affecting edges and
projections, also refinish edges and projections.
7. Paint, repaint, finish, and refinish existing surfaces after completing patchwork,
extension, or repair work and new Work in the space.
8. When applying flat finish over previously painted surfaces, apply all coats as
scheduled for new Work.
9. When applying semi-gloss or gloss finish over previously painted surfaces, apply
first coat (primer) in accordance with paint manufacturer's specifications and
final coats as if on new Work
10. Before painting or finishing over existing paint or finishes, paint or finish small
inconspicuous locations representing each condition to test for compatibility.
Notify Architect of incompatibility; do not proceed without instructions.

F. Number of Coats: Number indicated is minimum number acceptable; shall produce a

fully covered, workmanlike, presentable job; and must be applied in heavy body,
without improper thinning.
1. Apply every coat indicated, other than primer coat, to every surface to be
covered, including previously painted surfaces indicated to be painted or
finished, even when the existing paint is sound.
2. When stain, dirt, or undercoats show through final coat of paint, correct defects
and cover surface with additional coats until paint or coating, film is uniform
finish, color, appearance, and cover-age, at no additional costs to the Owner.

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as

required to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms
and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air
inlets and outlets.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for
field painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for
field painting.

E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced painted surfaces.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.1C.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)]
[(satin)] [(semigloss)].
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).

b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1. Steel.
2. Wood.
3. Plastic trim fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..

cost to Owner.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1/4

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule .
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.
B. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in

paint system indicated.
2.3 METAL PRIMERS
A. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
2.4 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI #5.
2.5 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).

2.6 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS
A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION


surfaces are dry.

and conditions.

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as

required to produce paint systems indicated.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced painted surfaces.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates:
1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).
B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.3A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).
C. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including board siding.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.

D. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.8A.
a. Prime Coat: Bonding primer (water based).


SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes woven carpet.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

01352 including:

3. Credit EQ 4.1: Product data for adhesives and sealants indicating that products
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
SCAQMD Rule #1168:
4. Credit EQ 4.3: Product data
a. For carpet, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product

requirements of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.
b. For carpet cushion, documentation indicating compliance with testing and
product requirements of CRI's "Green Label" program.
c. For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content.
5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For carpet and installation adhesives,
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations

where cutouts are required in carpet.
CARPET 09680 - 1/7

2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.

3. Seam locations, types, and methods.
4. Pile direction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Warrant: Sample of special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International

Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.
B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet identical to those of

assemblies tested for fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
A. Comply with CRI 104.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber,
edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge,
and delamination.
3. Warranty Period: Lifetime Commercial Limited
CARPET 09680 - 2/7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOVEN CARPET; CPT-1

1. <Insert manufacturers' names>.
B. Recycled Content: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Color: Match Architect's samples.
D. Pattern: Match Architect's samples.
E. Fiber Content: ”eco solution Q nylon.”
F. Pile Characteristic: Multi-Level Pattern loop.
G. Gauge: 1/12
H. Stitches per Inch: 11.0
I. Avg. Density: 8,852 oz./cu. yd..
J. Pile Thickness: 0.122 inch for finished carpet.
K. Face Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd..
L. Dye Method: 100% solution dyed.
M. Tufted Pattern Repeat: 72 inches W x 48 inches L.
N. Backing: eco worx performance broadloom.
O. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: S.S.P. Shaw Soil Protection.
P. Performance Characteristics: As follows:

1. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf per ASTM D 2646.
2. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
3. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165.
4. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements
of CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.

CARPET 09680 - 3/7

E. Fiber Content: ”eco solution q(R) nylon.”
F. Pile Characteristic: Multi-Level Pattern loop.
G. Gauge: 1/10
H. Stitches per Inch: 12.0.
M. Tufted Pattern Repeat: 3 feet x 5 feet.
N. Backing: eco worx(R) broadloom.

2.3 CPT-3: Not Used.

CARPET 09680 - 4/7

E. Fiber Content: ”eco solution Q nylon.”
F. Pile Characteristic: Multi-Level Pattern cut loop.
G. Gauge: 1/10,
H. Stitches per Inch: 11.0.
M. Tufted Pattern Repeat: 122 inches x 12 inches.
N. Backing: eco worx performance broadloom.

2.5 CPT-3: Not Used.
2.6 CPT-5: As specified in Section 12484 “Floor Mats and Frames.”
2.7 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-

based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and

subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer .
1. Use adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
CARPET 09680 - 5/7

C. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet

manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form
secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances,
and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color,
pattern, and potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.
D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,"
and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
E. Installation: Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation
instructions for the following:
1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-

Down Installation."
F. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for
seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay
of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or
seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15,
"Patterned Carpet Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written
recommendations.
L. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.
CARPET 09680 - 6/7

M. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using
cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
N. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor
Installations."
CARPET 09680 - 7/7

SECTION 09654 - LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Linoleum sheet flooring.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 5: Include location and distance from Project of
material manufacturer.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 6.0: For linoleum flooring, including printed
statement of costs for each rapidly renewable material.
3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of
VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts,
locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture,
cabinets, and cutouts.
D. Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of
each color and pattern of floor covering required.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces

to receive floor coverings.
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERINGS & DESK TOPS 09654 - 1/4

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after floor covering installation.
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Marmoleum. (Basis of Design)
2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; ”Marmorette.”
3. Or equal product.
2.2 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING MCT -1 and MCT-2
A. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing .
1. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length by not less than 78 inches wide.
B. MCT-1:
1. Product: Marmoleum Real.
2. Thickness: 2.5 mm
3. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
C. MCT-2:
1. Product: Marmoleum Fresco.
2. Thickness:2.0 mm
3. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement

based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and

substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion

of floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor
covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical
methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed
with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately

before installation.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.
B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds,
and nosings.
C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
E. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to

substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
3.3 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out sheet floorings as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas,
at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying
process (stove bar marks).
3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET DESK TOP INSTALLATION
A. According to manufacturer’s installation instructions and as indicated on Drawings.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor
coverings.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor
coverings before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coats.
C. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to
disappear, cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Resilient base.
2. Resilient molding accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit EQ 4.1: Product Data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
C. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples

but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern
required.


to receive resilient products.

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1/4

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE ; RB-1
A. Resilient Base:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Johnsonite.
c. Roppe Corporation, USA. (Basis of Design)
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
3. Style: Cove (base with toe).
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch.
D. Height: 4 inches.
E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Preformed.
H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

a. Johnsonite.
b. Roppe Corporation, USA.
B. Description: Transition strips.
C. Material: Vinyl.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height
required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to
minimize running joints.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by

resilient stair tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where
they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to

substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet,
resilient floor covering and other floor finishes as indicated by Architect that would
otherwise be exposed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For VCT, include recycled content data.
2. Product Data for Credit MR 5: Include location and distance from Project of
material manufacturer.
VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
D. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.


to receive floor tile.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1/4

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE ; VCT-1

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; ”Migrations.” (Basis of Design)
2. or equal product by one of the following:
a. Congoleum Corporation.
b. Mannington Mills, Inc..
c. Tarkett, Inc..
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C. Recycled Content:
1. Pre-Consumer: 10% minimum.
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
G. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Material Schedule

on Drawings. Match Architect's sample .

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and

substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

of resilient products.
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering
manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed
with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative
humidity level measurement.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
A. Allow adhesive to dry for at least 96 hours.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
C. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile
surfaces before applying manufacturer’s recommended liquid floor polish.
D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09629 - CORK FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cork floor tile.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesive, including printed statement of
VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of cork flooring. Include cork flooring layouts, edges,
columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
D. Samples: Full-size units of each shade, pattern, and finish of cork flooring required.
A. Product Certificates: For cork floating floor system, from manufacturer, certifying that
MDF core contains no urea-formaldehyde resins.

to receive cork flooring.

CORK FLOORING 09629 - 1/4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CORK FLOOR TILE ; CK-1 and CK-2
A. Cork Floor Tile: Composed of 100 percent natural cork bark and recycled cork
granules and set in a natural or synthetic, flexible resin matrix; homogeneous and
uniform in composition throughout the tile thickness.

a. CERES Cork Flooring Products.

b. Cork Direct.
c. Dodge-Regupol, Inc. (Basis of Design)
d. Expanko, Inc.
e. Gerbert Limited.
f. Globus Cork.
g. Jelinek Cork Group.
h. Natural Cork Company.
i. Nova Distinctive Floors.
j. WE Cork Inc.
B. Provide cork floor tile made with adhesives and binders that do not contain urea-
formaldehyde resins.
C. Thickness: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
D. Size: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
E. Shade: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
F. Color: As indicated in Material Schedule on Drawings.
G. Finish: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-

based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by cork
flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesive: Water-resistant products as recommended by manufacturer to suit cork

flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions to

ensure adhesion of cork flooring.
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by cork flooring
manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-
vapor emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to
ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a
maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
D. Do not install cork flooring until materials are same temperature as space where they
are to be installed.
1. Move cork flooring products and installation materials into spaces where they will
be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by

cork flooring products.
3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions for installing cork flooring.
B. Mix floor tiles from each carton together to ensure uniform distribution of shade.
C. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles.

D. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
E. Lay floor tiles in pattern indicated.
F. Apply adhesive to substrate and set floor tiles in adhesive.
G. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
H. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
I. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting cork
flooring.
B. Cover cork flooring until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical tile ceiling

installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items.
Show size and location of initial access modules.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. LEED Submittal:
preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled

content.
E. Product test reports.
F. Research/evaluation reports.
G. Maintenance data.
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an

NVLAP-accredited laboratory.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and

inspecting agency.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 1/5

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264

for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply

with ASTM E 580.
2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--
Seismic Zones 0-2."
3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling
Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4."
4. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9,
"Earthquake Loads."
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed
component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
1. Recycled Content: Provide acoustical tiles with recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content
constitutes a minimum of 40 percent by weight.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

1. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average
recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design
requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion or Bonded anchors fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated
and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or
ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M,
Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
E. Seismic struts and seismic clips.
F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic
design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING; ACT-1

product indicated on Drawings Armstrong, “Bravada II” #936 or a comparable product
by one of the following:
1. USG Interiors, Inc..
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type
and form as follows:
1. Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; Pattern F.
C. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
D. LR: Not less than 0.80.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
F. CAC: Not less than 33.
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular Edge.
H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 24 x24 inches.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude 15/16 Exposed Grid.

2. USG Interiors, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>.
B. Direct-Hung, Fire-Rated Suspension System: Intermediate duty structural

classification.
C. Access: Upward, with each access unit identified by manufacturer's standard

unobtrusive markers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per
manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at
borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from
contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only
where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss
obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other
equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling
plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes
or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires
at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for
attachment of hanger wires.
1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor
into concrete slabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling
area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings
to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from
ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings
and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile
joints are closed by double lap of material.

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ceramic tile.
2. Stone thresholds.
3. Waterproof membrane.
4. Tile backing panels.
5. Metal edge strips.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed
statement of VOC content.
C. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile
and for each color and finish required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent of
amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1/8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with
ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. General:
1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following:
a. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.

b. Crossville, Inc.
c. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
d. Interceramic.
e. Lone Star Ceramics Company.
f. Portobello America, Inc.
g. Seneca Tiles, Inc.
C. Tile Types TL-1, 2, 3 & 4: Unglazed ceramic tile.

1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Module Size:
a. 6 x 6 inches; TL-1.
b. 12 x 12 inches; TL-2.
c. 12 x 18 inches; TL-3.
d. 18 x 18 inches; TL-4.
3. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
4. Face: Plain.
5. Finish: unglazed.
6. Tile Color and Pattern: Dal Tile “Villa Valleta.” As indicated in Finish Schedule
on Drawings.
7. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
shapes:
a. Base Cove; TL-5: Cove, module size 6 x 12 inches.
D. Tile Type TL-6 & TL-7: Unglazed ceramic tile.

1. Composition: Porcelain.
2. Module Sizes:
a. 2-1/8 x 8-1/2 inches.
b. 4-1/4 x 12-3/4 inches.
4. Face: Plain.
5. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture.
6. Tile Color and Pattern: Dal Tile “Modern Dimensions.” Colors as indicated in
Finish Schedule on Drawings.
7. Grout Color: To be determined by Architect.

8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
shapes:
a. Base Cove: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch.

b. External Corners: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 1 inch.
c. Internal Corners: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch.
d. Tapered Transition Tile: Shape designed to effect transition between
thickness of tile floor and adjoining floor finishes of different thickness,
tapered to provide reduction in thickness from 1/2 to 1/4 inch across
nominal 4-inch dimension.
2.2 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition

between adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch
above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold.
Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per

ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1. Description: Match Architect's sample.
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.

b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.
c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: As indicated.
2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies
with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated.
B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; B 6000 Waterproof Membrane.
b. Bostik, Inc.; [Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane] [Hydroment Gold].

c. Custom Building Products; Redgard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention

Membrane.
d. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG.
e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100 Crack Suppression and
Waterproofing.
C. Latex-Portland Cement: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex

additive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following]
[provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Boiardi Products, a QEP company; Elastiment 323 Cement Based

Waterproofing, Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane.
b. C-Cure; UltraCure 971.
c. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic (PRP 315).
d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100.
e. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; Triple Flex Waterproofing,
Crack Isolation Membrane & Mortar.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
[product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or
designation> or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
c. Bostik, Inc.
d. C-Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. Jamo Inc.
g. Laticrete International, Inc.
h. MAPEI Corporation.
i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
c. Bostik, Inc.
d. C-Cure.

f. Jamo Inc.
h. MAPEI Corporation.
i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.

a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.

b. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.
c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.
d. Bostik, Inc.
e. C-Cure.
f. Custom Building Products.
g. Jamo Inc.
h. Laticrete International, Inc.
i. MAPEI Corporation.
j. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.
k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
l. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
m. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.
2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that
comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
B. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS;

Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O;
formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other
nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and
extreme temperatures.
a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant.

b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.

c. GE Silicones, a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.

d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant.
e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland

cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting
materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series
exposed-edge material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with
thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically
recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced

mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward
drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at
Project site before installing.
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to

prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with
continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile
surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation
methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108
Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of
setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.
b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work
and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile
work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint
widths unless otherwise indicated.
E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
2. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch.
3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during
installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after
installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly
above them.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants."
H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent
floor unless otherwise indicated.
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above
adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or
other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
J. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and
manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland
cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written
instructions.
K. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written

instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded
securely to substrate.
3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation F122: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA F122.
a. Tile Type: TL-4.

b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded grout.
d. Grout Joint Size: 1/16 inch.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Tile Installation W???: Thin-set mortar on “green” board;
a. Tile Type: TL-5.

b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.
d. Grout Joint Size: ¼ inch.
2. Tile Installation W244: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units; TCA W244.
a. Tile Type: TL-5.

b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
d. Grout Joint Size: ¼ inch.

09280 ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.
1.3 SUMMARY

1. Replicating plaster trim and castings to replace deteriorated or missing trim.
1. Division 9 Section "Plaster Repair."

2. Section 09215; veneer plaster wall restoration.
3. Section 09991; encapsulation coating system.
C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for plaster trim replacement are specified in

Division 1 Section "Allowances."
D. Unit Prices:Plaster trim replacement to be provided under unit prices are described in
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application
and use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply
with requirements.
B. Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following:

1. For each product indicated.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
D. Schedule of Work: Submit a schedule of spaces that require ornamental plaster, and
a list of ornamental plaster items or areas that require repair or replacement in each
of the affected spaces. Indicate procedures to be used, and time requirements.
ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM AND CASTING REPLACEMENT 09280 - 1/11

E. Restoration program for each phase of the cleaning and repair process, including
protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations.
Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to
be used for each phase of the cleaning and repair work.
1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
phase of restoration and cleaning work, provide a written description, including
evidence of successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program
to demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced plaster cleaning and repair firm that
has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
cleaning work and 1 for repair/replication work.
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that plaster
restoration and cleaning are in progress.
B. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing

plaster cleaners and consolidants that have been used for similar applications with
successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for
consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.
C. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use
materials and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under
same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.
1. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect.

2. Plaster repair: Prepare sample panels of 9 square feet for each type of
restoration proposed. Maintain the sample panel throughout the restoration to
demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship expected.
3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 9 square feet for each type of surface
condition.
a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible

adverse reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a
deleterious effect.
b. Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
4. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be
prepared.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of plaster
restoration and cleaning.


D. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in

performing the type of tests indicated and approved by Architect to perform
preconstruction tests.
E. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for plaster replacement from a single source
for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and
texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship marble units and accessories strapped together in
suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
B. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened

containers, labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.
C. Store gypsum materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.
D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum

temperature requirements for storage.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Keep the room temperature above 55oF until the plaster/joint compound has set.
2. Provide ample ventilation as the plaster dries.
1.8 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Specifications: ANSI, 1430

Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications: ASTM,
1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187, 215/299-5400.
C. U.S. Gypsum Association, 810 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002
202/289-5440
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPLICATING ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM
A. REPLICATING ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM
1. MANUFACTURERS
a. National Gypsum Co.

Gold Bond Building Products Division
P.O. Box 25884
Charlotte, NC 28229

704/536-0023
b. United States Gypsum Association

10 First Street NE, #510
Washington, DC 20002
202/289-5440, FAX 202/289-3707
c. Plastic Tooling Co.

303 Commerce Dr.
Exton, PA 19341
610/363-5440
d. Charles Street Supply Co.

54 Charles St.
Boston, MA 02114
617/367-9046
B. MATERIALS
1. Gypsum Plaster Materials:
a. Base coat plasters: ASTM C28, types as indicated below.
1) Gypsum neat plaster such as "Red Top Gypsum Plaster", "Red Top Two-
Purpose Plaster (United States Gypsum Association), "Two-Way
Hardwall Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
2) High strength gypsum neat plaster with a minimum average dry

compressive strength of 2,800 psi per ASTM C472 for a mix of 100 lbs.
plaster and 2 cu. ft. of sand such as "Structo-Base" (United States
Gypsum Association), or approved equal.
b. Finish coat plasters: Types as indicated below:
1) Gypsum gauging plaster, ASTM C28; for flatwork such as "Champion

Gauging Plaster", "Red Top Gypsum Plaster", "Star Gauging Plaster"
(U.S. Gypsum Association), "Super-White Gauging Plaster" (National
Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
2) Gypsum molding plaster, ASTM C59; for crown moldings such as "USG
Molding Plaster" (United States Gypsum Association), "Super-White
Molding Plaster" (National Gypsum Co.), or approved equal.
3) Gypsum casting plaster, ASTM C59; for ornamental plaster such as "USG
No. 1 Casting Plaster" (United States Gypsum Association), or approved
equal.
c. Finishing Hydrated Limes: ASTM C206; Type S, such as "Ivory Finish Lime",
"Snowdrift Finish Lime" (United States Gypsum Association", or approved
equal.

d. Aggregates for Base Coat Plasters: ASTM C35, sand.
e. Clean, potable water
f. Bonding Compound for Gypsum Plaster: ASTM C631.
g. Plaster Molds: Urethane rubber liquid mold material that can produce
detailed impressions (Perma Flex Mold Co.), or approved equal.
h. Reinforcing Fibers: Sisal hemp fibers, or polypropylene fibers, not more than
2" long (Plastic Tooling Co.), or approved equal.
i. Anchors for Reattachment of Existing Plaster: Zinc plated washers with

appropriate mechanical fasteners for existing substrates, (Charles Street
Supply Co.), or approved equal.
C. MIXES
1. Plaster Base Coat Compositions: Comply with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's
directions for gypsum plaster base coat proportions for three-coat work:
2. Scratch Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand.
3. Brown Coat: High strength gypsum gauging plaster with job-mixed sand.
D. For Finish Coat: Proportion casting plaster and molding plaster to comply with the
manufacturer's instructions. Proportion gypsum gauging plaster to comply with
ASTM C842; 1 part plaster and 2 parts lime.
2.2 DUPLICATING PLASTER CASTINGS
A. MANUFACTURERS
1. Rubber Casting Materials:
a. Industrial Plastic Supply

309 Canal Street
New York, NY 10013
212/226-2010
b. Polytek Development Corp.

P.O. Box 384
Lebanon, NJ 08833
908/534-5990
c. Smooth-On, Inc.
1000 Valley Road
Gillette, NJ 07933
908/647-5800

2. Rubber Latex: #660:
a. Cementex Co.
336 Canal St.
New York, NY 10013
212/741-1770
3. Plaster:
a. Gold Bond Building Products Division

National Gypsum Co.
P.O. Box 25884
Charlotte, NC 28229
704/536-0023
b. U.S. Gypsum Association

810 First Street NE, #510
Washington, DC 20002
202/289-5440, FAX 202/289-3707
B. MATERIALS
1. Plaster of Paris: "Kal-Kote Finishing Plaster" (Gold Bond, National Gypsum Co.),
"Red Top Molding Plaster (U.S. Gypsum Association), or approved equal.
2. Spackle or patching compound
3. Rubber latex such as #660 (Cementex Co.)
4. Paper towels
5. Plywood
6. Clean, potable water
7. Cheese cloth or burlap strips
C. EQUIPMENT
1. Stiff bristle brushes
2. Heating lamp, electric hair dryer or warm oven
D. MIXES
1. NOTE: VERIFY MIX WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
2. 7 parts plaster
3. 4 parts water

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPLICATING ORNAMENTAL PLASTER TRIM
A. EXAMINATION
1. Examine surfaces to receive ornamental plaster and conditions under which the
ornamental plaster will be installed. Proceed with the ornamental plaster work
only when substrate surfaces and conditions comply with referenced standards,
to ensure satisfactory installations.
2. Promptly notify the contracting officer of conditions that need to be corrected or

coordinated.
B. PREPARATION
1. Surface Preparation:
a. Remove ornamental plaster that is damaged or loose and requires

replacement, or that has to be reset.
b. Reinforce and secure loose ornamental plaster that is to remain, using

appropriate concealed methods.
c. Make molds or screeds as necessary for replacement of ornamental plaster.
Match existing plaster profiles.
d. Make accurate reproductions for missing, deteriorated or damaged

ornamental plaster.
e. Clean plaster surfaces to be restored, to remove loose and deleterious

materials that may affect adhesion or application of new plaster. Re-attach
loose lath or install new lath as required.
f. Spray existing plaster to be pointed or patched with water, or use bonding

agent, to ensure adhesion of new plaster. Install keying systems for larger
pieces as necessary. Comply with referenced standards.
g. All existing plaster to be painted shall be stripped down to a bare finish

plaster surface with a non-water based solvent of paint stripper which cannot
be water flushed clean.
h. Measure and layout ornamental plaster accurately to maintain pattern and

alignment of the work.
C. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
1. NOTE: Conform to the requirements of the "Gypsum Construction Handbook"

published by United States Gypsum Association concerning application of
ornamental plaster.

2. Make a template from sheets of metal (brass) cut full-scale in shapes to match
existing; use to screed or form gypsum plaster to desired shapes and contours.
3. Coat metal sheet with layout dye - a blue dye that makes the scribed pattern
easier to follow.
4. When the dye is dry, scribe, cut and carefully file the template to remove any
roughness or other imperfections that might be transferred to the finished work.
5. Use a sled to guide the template as it is pushed through the plastic mass. Basic
parts of the sled include a "slipper-board" and the board to which the template is
nailed.
a. For bench work the sled is guided by the table edge. Bench-run molds are
installed on the job with mechanical fasteners or adhesively attached with
gypsum plaster.
b. For run-in-place work, a guide strip is attached to the wall or ceiling and forms
one edge of the pattern; after work is completed the guide strip is removed.
6. For circular shapes:
a. Follow procedures described above, except scribe the center line of the
circular shape on the template.
b. Center a pivot plate to this line and attach to the template board.
7. Mix Plaster: Use special plaster designed and manufactured for ornamental
plaster work.
a. NOTE: Mix the plaster a little below normal consistency for the first mix, then
allow the mix to "cream" a bit before placing it on the bench in front of the
template. For run-in-place work a slightly stiffer consistency is desirable.
8. For Hand Mixing:
a. Weigh the plaster, and measure or weigh the water.
b. Sift plaster into water evenly. Do not drop handsful of plaster into the water
at one time.
c. Allow to soak 2 minutes undisturbed, then mix thoroughly. Stir from bottom,
forcing material to top. Take care to avoid beating air into mix. Proper mixing
forces air out of mix.
d. Continue mixing until a smooth, even mass is produced.
9. For Mechanical Mixing: Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials

for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standards and with
recommendations of plasters manufacturer.

a. Weigh plaster and measure water accurately.
b. Sift or strew plaster slowly and evenly.
c. Allow it to soak 2 to 5 minutes, and mix for 2 to 5 minutes.

1) NOTE: For batches of 10 to 50 lbs., use a 3" diameter, 3-blade, 25
degree pitch propeller with 1/4 or 1/3 hp. 1,760 rpm direct-drive motor.
For batches of 50 to 200 lb., use a 4" diameter, 3-blade, 25 degree pitch
propeller with 1/2 hp. 1,760 rpm direct-drive motor.
10. Replicate the Ornamental Trim:
a. For Run Work or Straight Mold:

1) NOTE: This method is used to produce staff work or pattern stock having
parallel edges or to form a straight molding.
b. For bench work, some plaster should be allowed to lap over the end of the
bench to act as an anchor and prevent the mold from loosening from the
bench before work is completed.
c. Press small lumps of modeling clay onto the bench before the plaster is
placed to provide a grip for the plaster and help hold it in place.
11. For Circular Shapes (Turning): Like run work, turning can be done in the shop or
run-in-place.
a. For bench work, place a center post in a hole in the bench.
b. For run-in-place work, position the center post accurately at the center of the
circular shape to be formed and securely attach or brace to the structural
supports.
1) NOTE: THE CENTER POST SHOULD HAVE A RUNNING THREAD,
WITH A DOUBLE NUT FOR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. THE PIVOT
POINT MUST BE ABSOLUTELY RIGID AND SET HIGHER THAN THE
TOP OF THE PATTERN TO BE MADE, SO THAT THE TEMPLATE WILL
SCREED CLEARLY AS IT ROTATES AROUND THE PIVOT POINT.
12. Duplicate plaster molds by taking impressions from existing plaster molds; create
new rubber molds from these impressions and cast plaster into these molds.
13. Remove plaster molds after plaster has cured, following plaster manufacturer's
instructions.
14. Strip and clean existing decoration to produce a clean, sharp mold.
D. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
1. When replication and plasterwork is completed, remove unused materials,

containers and equipment. Clean floors and adjacent surfaces of all plaster
debris, including plaster droppings daily.

2. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to the

RHPO, which ensure ornamental plaster being without damage or deterioration
at time of substantial completion.
3.2 DUPLICATING PLASTER CASTINGS
A. PREPARATION
a. Remove ornamental plaster that is damaged or loose and requires

replacement, or that has to be reset.
b. Reinforce and secure loose ornamental plaster that is to remain, using

appropriate concealed methods.
c. Clean plaster surfaces to be restored, to remove loose and deleterious

materials that may affect adhesion or application of new plaster. Reattach
loose lath or install new lath as required.
d. Spray existing plaster to be pointed or patched with water, or use bonding

agent, to ensure adhesion of new plaster. Install keying systems for larger
pieces as necessary. Comply with referenced standards.
e. All existing plaster to be repaired shall be stripped down to a bare finish

plaster surface with a non-water based solvent or paint stripper which is not
water flushed clean.
B. ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
1. NOTE: IT IS NOT ALWAYS NECESSARY TO DETACH THE PLASTER

ORNAMENT IN ORDER TO DUPLICATE IT. HOWEVER, IF THE PLASTER
ORNAMENT CAN NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE WALL OR CEILING TO
MAKE THE MOLD, CURING MAY TAKE SEVERAL DAYS BETWEEN LATEX
COATS AND SEVERAL WEEKS FOR THE FINAL CURING.
2. Making the Mold:
a. Detach from the ceiling or wall plaster casting to be duplicated.
b. Patch the fragment or fill in any damaged portions of the pattern using
spackle or other patching compound.
c. Carefully clean the fragment for mold making.
d. Brush the master piece with the rubber latex.
e. Cure the latex at a temperature of about 110oF.; Use an infrared heating

lamp, an electric hair dryer, or a warm oven to provide the source of heat;
Cure for about 1 hour using heat.

f. When the rubber has cured, apply a second latex coating (the number of
coats required is dictated by the size of the original and the depth of the
relief); Cure as above.
3. Building the Mother:
a. The purpose of the mother is to support the mold when it is filled with wet
plaster.
b. Fill any undercuts in the latex mold with wet paper towels; Lay a thin layer of
wet paper towels over the entire surface of the rubber mold.
c. Build a frame around the mold to pour the mother into; The mother should be
at least 1/2 inch thick at the highest point of the mold.
d. Separate the mother from the rubber mold as soon as the plaster has set (in
less than an hour).
e. Wash the interior of the mold with soap and water and remove any residual
byproducts left from the curing process.
4. Mixing the Plaster:
a. Add 7 parts by volume of plaster to 4 parts water; Use cold water to retard the
set-up time.
b. Sprinkle plaster powder in slowly; Stir as little as possible.
5. Casting the Plaster:
a. Before pouring plaster into mold, fill the mold with water and then pour water
out (this will moisten the walls and ensure penetration of the plaster into all
crevices).
b. Add plaster and cheesecloth or burlap strips for strength; Jog the plaster-filled
mold gently to nudge plaster into all the indentations.
c. Level the plaster; Plaster should be hard enough to remove from the mold in
30 minutes; Allow 24 hours to air dry before installing.
6. Install the plaster casting using a thin coat of plaster of paris as an adhesive;
Hold the piece in place for a few minutes until the plaster sets; A mastic adhesive
or epoxy or gypsum board joint cement are other good adhesives for light pieces.

SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Shaft-wall enclosures.
2. Stair enclosures.
3. Horizontal enclosures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.

01352 including:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed
statement of VOC content.

content.
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of

assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of

assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by
a testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL

ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 1/6
1. American Gypsum Company.

2. BPB America Inc.
3. G-P Gypsum.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. USG Corporation.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL
A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-

rated assemblies indicated.
1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end

butt joints.
2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content.
B. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.
1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper

faces.
a. Core: 1 inch thick.

b. Long Edges: Double bevel.
C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards
and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes
specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-
wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum

Board."
D. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for

directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer
construction.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
E. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand

loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable
design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are
embedded.
1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane

facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured
from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.
2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content.
H. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a

qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
C. STC Rating: As indicated.
D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end
members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Depth: As indicated.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.
E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as

standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; The System by Metal-Lite, Inc.

b. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
G. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in
depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.
H. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.
I. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation.
J. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall

assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or
replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of
shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section
"Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials."
1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive
materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates
fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.
B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for
installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-
resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating
indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of

fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and the following:
1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing
indicated.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.
B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies;

frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings

and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of
fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be
supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing.
1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of
door frame.
2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum
board face-layer panel.
D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity
of assemblies where required to enclose rods.
E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by

installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire
protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor
indicators, and similar items.
F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of

panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated.
H. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-
wall assemblies.
I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly
where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install
acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft
and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with
ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are
more stringent.

J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned

within 4 inches of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar
projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- thick, gypsum board cants covering tops
of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially).
1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels
in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws
fastened to shaft-wall framing.
2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at
24 inches o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing.
K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
C. LEED Submittals:

content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board
panels to substrates, including printed statement of VOC content.
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100
sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1/6

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings,

on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF GYPSUM PANELS
A. Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content t.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable
to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. BPB America Inc.
c. G-P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
e. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
B. Type X:

2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings .
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or

paper-faced galvanized steel sheet .
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

a. Fry Reglet Corp.

b. Gordon, Inc.
c. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified .
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping
compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim

accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.
2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and
trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings .

2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings .
3.3 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at locations indicated to receive tile.
B. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce
a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-
resistant panels.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to
produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to
ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect].
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges .
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated .
4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges .
5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings .
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not
intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 5: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 5: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 5: Typical for locations not specified above.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9

Sections.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

SECTION 09215 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Gypsum veneer plaster over existing plaster walls.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control joints, and
reveals and trim; include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
C. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch length for each trim accessory.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish and on
rigid backing.
D. LEED Submittals:
VOC content.
a. Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled
content.
3. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site,
provide product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally
manufactured material
A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base
for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to

those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 1/4

C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413
by a testing and inspecting agency.
D. Mockups: Provide a full-thickness finish mockup for each type and finish of gypsum
veneer plaster and substrate to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select representative surfaces and conditions for application of each
type of gypsum veneer plaster and substrate.
2. Provide mockups of partitions in sizes of at least 100 sq. ft..
3. Apply gypsum veneer plaster, according to requirements for the completed Work,
after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, with separate formulations;

one for base-coat and one for finish-coat application over substrates.

a. National Gypsum Company:
1) Base Coat: Kal-Kote Plaster Base.

2) Smooth Finish Coat: Kal-Kote Smooth Finish.
b. USG Corporation:
1) Base Coat: Diamond Veneer Basecoat Plaster.

2) Smooth Finish Coat: Diamond Interior Finish Plaster.
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 631, polyvinyl acetate.
C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

D. Patching Mortar: Dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-

1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
2.3 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES
A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and
with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Existing Plaster Substrates: Prepare according to gypsum veneer plaster

manufacturer's written recommendations and as follows:
1. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles, grease, oil, incompatible curing
compounds, form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that
could impair bond with gypsum veneer plaster.
2. Apply bonding agent on dry and cured concrete substrates.
B. Apply “LeadLock” encapsulation coating as specified in Section 09991.
3.2 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
A. Bonding Agent: Apply bonding agent on dry existing plaster according to gypsum
veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer
plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster:
a. Base Coat: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of
1/16 to 3/32 inch. Fill all voids and imperfections.
b. Finish Coat: Trowel apply finish-coat plaster over base-coat plaster to
uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch.
2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other
units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.
3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from
exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to
restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's
written recommendations and as approved by Architect.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture,
furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the following areas

where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated
or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC ratings:
D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Level 5, smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise

indicated .
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation,
B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
1. Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but
are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not
limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

09210 PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR
PART 1---GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Patching hairline cracks in plaster with reinforcing tape and joint compound.
2. Patching holes in plaster. The extent of work described includes:

a. Removing deteriorated plaster, and
b. Applying three coats of plaster to the damaged area.
3. Patching small chips, cracks or depressions in plaster surfaces.
4. Resecuring a sagging suspended plaster ceiling by lifting the sag with heavy gauge
wire.
a. Common causes of sagging plaster include:
1) Wood shrinkage and weight of plaster pull the ceiling away from the
joists.
2) Lath pulling loose from the ceiling.
3) Broken vertical ties.
5. Removing efflorescence from plaster surfaces.
6. Concealing water stains on plaster walls or ceilings using a shellac-based primer

sealer. A product, such as white-pigmented shellac can be used to seal, prime and
block out existing stains, prohibiting them from bleeding through finish layers of paint.
1. Division 9 Section "Plaster Trim and Casting Replication."
C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for marble restoration and cleaning are specified in
D. Unit Prices: marble restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are
described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PLASTER CLEANING AND REPAIR 09210 - 1/13

with requirements.

1. For each product indicated.
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
D. Restoration program for each phase of the cleaning and repair process, including
be used for each phase of the cleaning and repair work.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced plaster cleaning and repair firm that
cleaning work and 1 for repair/replication work.
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that plaster

plaster cleaners and consolidants that have been used for similar applications with
successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for
consultation and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Use materials
and methods proposed for completed Work and prepare samples under same weather
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work.

2. Plaster repair: Prepare sample panels of 9 square feet for each type of
3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 9 square feet for each type of surface
condition.


deleterious effect.
prepared.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of plaster
D. Preconstruction Testing: Contractor will engage an independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of
replacement material for testing.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in

F. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for plaster cleaning and repair from a single
source for each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern,
and texture.

C. Store gypsum materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Keep the room temperature above 55oF until the plaster/joint compound has set.
2. Provide ample ventilation as the plaster dries.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Specifications: ANSI, 1430

Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications: ASTM,
1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187, 215/299-5400.

C. U.S. Gypsum Association, 810 First Street NE, #510 Washington, DC 20002 202/289-
5440
PART 2---PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. U.S. Gypsum Co.

125 South Franklin Street
P.O. Box 806278
Chicago IL 60680-4124
1 (877) 874-6655
www.usg.com
B.Tuff-Kote Company, Inc.

210 Seminary Avenue
Woodstock IL 6009
815/338-2006
C. William Zinsser & Co., Inc.

173 Belmont Drive
Somerset, NJ 08875
800/469-4539
FAX 908/469-4539
D. Masterchem Industries, Inc.

Antonia Missouri
1 (800) 325-3552
www.masterchem.com
E. Sika Corporation
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. For patching hairline cracks:
1. Joint compound such as "Durabond Wallboard Compound" (U.S. Gypsum Co.),

"Krack-Kote" (Tuff-Kote Co.), or approved equal.
2. Reinforcing tape (cloth or paper)
3. Acrylic latex caulk
B. For patching holes in 3 coat plaster:

1. Expanded Metal Diamond Mesh Lath
a. 3.4 lbs./sq. yard min.
b. Cut from copper bearing steel plate
c. Coated with rust inhibitive paint
2. 18 Gauge Tie Wire and Drywall Nails
3. Scratch and brown coats: aggregated gypsum plaster ASTM C 28

a. Use of Perlite as an aggregate is not allowed without compensating for

shrinkage rate of finish coat.
4. Finish Coat Gauging Plaster, Finish Lime
5. Drywall screws
6. Cloth mesh tape
7. Joint compound such as "Durabond Wallboard Compound” (U.S. Gypsum Co.),
"Krack-Kote" (Tuff-Kote Co.), or approved equal.
8. Fiber
a. Fiberglass
b. 2” maximum length, ½” minimum length
9. Reinforcing Wire
a. 1/8” dia. stainless steel, type 302
b. threaded
c. preformed to patch shape
10. Epoxy Adhesive
a. Two component
b. Solvent free
c. Moisture insensitive
d. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod or approved equal
C. For patching small chips:

1. Gypsum Plaster Materials:
a. General: gypsum plastering materials shall conform to ANSI A42.1. Provide
neat or ready-mixed materials at installer's option unless indicated otherwise.
b. Base coat plaster: gypsum plaster ASTM C 28
c. Base coat aggregate: Sand, ASTM C 35
d. Finish Coat Gauging Plaster, Finish Lime
8. Bonding Materials: Bonding agent shall conform to ASTM C631.
9. Fiber
a. Fiberglass
b. 2” maximum length, ½” minimum length
D. For repairing broken vertical ties:

1. Lag bolts
2. Heavy-gauge wire
E. For concealing water stains in plaster:

1. White-pigmented shellac such as "Kilz" (Masterchem Industries, Inc.), "Bin"
(William Zinsser & Co., Inc.), or approved equal.
F. For re-adhering existing plaster:

1. Pre-wetting agent
2. thickener gel
a. 5% Rohm and Haas Acrysol ASE-60 diluted with 81.9 parts water and 1.3 parts
concentrated ammonia by weight.
b. Gel pH: 8
3. unfilled adhesive
a. Rohm and Haas acrylic resin
b. Rhoplex MC-76
c. Rhoplex LC-67.

4. filled adhesive
a. glass microballoons
b. lime
c. coke
d. Rohm and Haas acrylic resin
e. Rhoplex MC-76
f. Rhoplex LC-67
g. gel thickener
G. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (dry method)

1. Scum –X pad or other rubber or vinyl eraser
H. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (wet method)

1. Vulpex soap
2. gum turpentine
3. Naptha
4. B-72 Acryloid resin (Rohm and Haas)
5. acetone.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. For patching hairline cracks:

1. Wide joint knife (approximately 5-6 inches wide)
2. Sponge or heavy-nap cloth
3. Caulking gun
4. Crack widener or triangular can opener
5. Stiff bristle brushes or vacuum
B. For patching holes in 3 coat plaster:

1. Hawk
2. Slicker (flexible straight-edge)
3. Plasterer's trowel
4. Margin trowel
5. Mortarboard and mudpan
6. Pointing trowel
7. Plywood scrap
8. 6 inch taping knife
9. 12 inch taping knife
10. Joint tape (cloth mesh preferred)
11. Stiff putty knife
12. Goggles, work gloves, and dust mask
13. Hammer and cold chisel
14. Needlenose pliers and wire cutter
15. Screwgun and drill
16. Spray bottle and dropcloths
17. Tin snips
18. Shop-vac
19. Paint brush
C. For patching small chips:

1. Joint knife
2. Sponge or heavy-nap cloth
3. Crack widener or triangular can opener
4. Stiff bristle brushes
5. Hawk
6. Slicker (flexible straight-edge)
7. Plasterer's trowel
8. Margin trowel
9. Mortarboard and mudpan
10. Pointing trowel
D. For repairing broken vertical ties:

1. Ladder
2. Wood 2x4s for T-brace
3. Phillips head screwdriver
4. Electric drill
E. For removing effluorescence:

1. Clean sponge
2. Stiff, fiber bristle brush
F. For concealing water stains:

1. Clean sponge
2. Stiff, fiber bristle brush
3. Paint brush, roller or airless sprayer
G. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (dry method)

1. Vacuum
2. soft brush
H. For cleaning decorative painted plaster surfaces (wet method)

1. soft clean cloths
PART 3---EXECUTION
3.1 PATCHING HAIRLINE CRACKS
A. Examination
1. Types of plaster cracking include, map cracking, alligatoring, settlement cracks,

hairline cracks, stress related cracks and cracks due to moisture. If a wall has an
enormous number of cracks to be taped, replaster the surface.
B. Application
1. Slightly widen the crack with a sharp, pointed tool like a crack widener or a
triangular can opener.
2. Brush or vacuum surface to remove dust and debris.

3. Apply joint compound with a wide joint knife; Butter the compound into the crack,
spreading it about 3 inches on either side of the crack.
4. Center mesh reinforcing tape over the crack, and force the tape down into the bed
of the joint compound with the knife; Remove any excess compound by wiping with
the joint knife.
5. When the tape is bedded, cover surface with a thin layer of compound and smooth
as much as possible by working with the joint knife.
6. When the first coat has dried (at least 24 hours), smooth out any ridges by "wet
sanding" with a damp sponge or a heavy-nap cloth folded flat or wrapped around a
suitable block.
7. Apply a second thin coat of joint compound and feather the edge at least 1 inch
beyond the first coat.
8. After the second coat has dried, wet-sand lightly and apply a thin finishing coat.
9. Lightly sand the surface again, and clean off the area with damp sponge.
10. After the surface has dried, brush off any plaster residue or dust.
11. For gaps between plaster surfaces and surrounding woodwork, apply acrylic latex
caulk using a caulking gun.
3.2 PATCHING HOLES IN 3 COAT PLASTER
A. Examination
1. Determine the extent of unsound plaster and evaluate work requirements and
causes before proceeding. Signs of damaged plaster in need of replacing include:
a) Holes
b) Water Stains: Brownish rings on the plaster, especially the ceilings, indicate
that the plaster has been wet. If the water was stopped quickly, the surface
may only need to be sealed with pigmented shellac to prevent the stain from
bleeding through the new paint or wallpaper. However, if the leak continued for
a long period, the plaster may need to be replaced, and will often have a
powdery appearance.
c) Chipping, flaking and delamination of plaster due to water infiltration.
B. Application
1. Removing Deteriorated Plaster:
a) Use plaster washers to re-secure weakly-keyed areas of otherwise sound
plaster to the wall or ceiling.
b) Wear a dust mask, goggles and gloves and pull loose plaster from the walls
with your hands or a flat prybar.
c) To remove sound plaster, drill holes in the line of cut with a carbide drill bit;
Holding the chisel at a shallow angle, carefully cut directly from hole to hole
with a cold chisel; Cut the resulting plaster free from the lath by chipping the
keys from the side.
d) Cut the plaster back to the studs, if necessary, and re-secure the lath with
drywall nails.
e) Knock any plaster stuck between the lath back into the wall cavity.
f) Vacuum all dust, loose plaster, and other debris from the hole with a shop-vac,
or brush it out with a stiff bristle brush.
2. Lathing the Hole:

a) Install metal lath over the wood lath (metal lath lessens the likelihood of
cracking caused by the old wood lath drawing too much moisture out of the
plaster).
b) If 2 hands are necessary to secure new metal lath, drive a finishing nail into an
exposed stud; take a piece of lath slightly larger than the hole and hang it on
the nail; with both hands now free, cut the lath to shape with tin snips.
c) Use tie wire to secure the metal lath over the wood lath.
d) To make a tie wire, bend a 6 inch long piece of wire into an elongated "U" and
pull it around the old wood lath; space the tie wires every 6 inches.
e) To secure the lath at studs, drive 1 inch drywall screws between the lath into
the stud.
f) Provide reinforcing rod at areas unsuited for expanded metal lath.
3. Applying the Scratch and Brown Coats:

a) Thoroughly moisten the old wood lath with a spray bottle, so it will not draw
moisture out of the wet plaster used for patching.
b) Apply the base coat (scratch coat) of plaster to the wall in an arching motion;
Keep the hawk close to the wall under the trowel to catch falling plaster; Use a
margin trowel to work the plaster into edges and corners. The thickness of the
new scratch coat should not exceed that of the old scratch coat (about 1/8 to
1/4 inch).
c) As it starts to set, score shallow, random scratches in it diagonally about every
inch or so to provide keys for the next layer; Let the scratch coat set for 48
hours.
d) Apply the second coat (brown coat) using the same plaster that was used for
the scratch coat.
e) Run a slicker (a long flexible straight edge) over the entire patch; Keep the
brown coat below the level of the surrounding finish coat by about 1/8 inch.
f) As the brown coat starts to set, knock off any high spots; Let the brown coat set
for 48 hours before applying the finish coat.
4. Mixing the Finish Coat

a) Place approximately 2 quarts of cold, potable water into a 5 gallon plastic
bucket.
b) Scoop in autoclave finish lime until it starts to float. NOTE: WEAR GOGGLES,
A DUST MASK OR RESPIRATOR, AND LATEX GLOVES WHEN MIXING
LIME.
c) If using single-hydrated lime, sift it into the water the day before and leave to
slake overnight.
d) Mix thoroughly with a mixer attachment on an electric drill, or by hand with a
pointing trowel.
e) Add small amounts of water or lime as necessary until all the lime is wet and
there are no lumps or standing water.
f) Use a scrap of plywood for a mortarboard and toss some lime putty onto it.
g) Form the putty into a ring using the margin trowel; Fill the center of the ring
about 2/3 full with cold, clear water.
h) Slowly sprinkle in gauging plaster until all the water is absorbed; The mix
should consist of 1 part gauging plaster to 3 parts lime putty.
i) Mix the water and the plaster in the middle of the ring; It should be slightly
stiffer than the lime putty.

j) Fold in the lime putty and mix until all of the ingredients are stirred up.
5. Applying the Finish Coat:

a) If applying the finish coat over an old brown coat, the existing brown coat must
be moistened well before applying the finish coat (unnecessary on a newly-
applied brown coat). NOTE: Finishing plaster over an old brown coat
occasionally fails because the new plaster does not bond to the dry, old
substrate, even if it is wet down. Furthermore, the old plaster will absorb water
faster, causing cracks in the finish coat as it starts to dry.
b) Following the same motions used when applying the first two coats, trowel the
finish coat onto the patch.
c) Fill in any hollows by dabbing with plaster and smooth out ridges.
d) Spray a fine mist of water onto the plaster and trowel over the patch again to
get a slick finish; Straighten edges and corners with margin trowel.
e) Let the finish coat cure for about 1 week; Check it for shrinkage.
f) Tape any small cracks with cloth mesh tape and joint compound.
g) Wash down new plaster with a zinc sulphate solution (2 lbs./gallon of water)
and allow to dry.
3.3 PATCHING SMALL CHIPS AND CRACKS
A. Application
1. Scrape loose or damaged finish plaster and peeling paint from surface with chisel
or joint knife. Remove material where required to enlarge cracks, chips, holes, etc.
to at least 1/2 inch across and undercut to improve bonding of new material.
2. Brush or vacuum surface to remove dust and debris.
3. Moisten the surface by lightly spraying a fine mist of clean water from a spray
bottle.
4. Apply skim finish coat over low areas to bring entire finished surface out flush with
the projecting firm and sound layers of adjacent plaster or paint. Form plaster as
required to match original configuration and design or ornamental plaster.
5. Once dry, sand by hand to produce a surface without bumps, cracks or

depressions, ready to receive finish treatment.
3.4 REPAIRING BROKEN VERTICAL TIES
A. Application
1. Determine direction, location, and spacing of nailers (they are usually

perpendicular to the rafters).
2. Dig out all previously patched cracks.
3. T-brace and gently lift the sag (it may be necessary to remove or cut back the old
wood vertical ties).
4. From above the ceiling, screw lag bolts into the rafter every 24 inches on center in
both directions.

5. Using heavy-gauge wire, sling the nailers from the bolts through the rafters; Double
the wire and wrap it around the lag bolt.
6. Bring it down, threading it between the lath and the nailer in a void near a plaster
key, and wrap it back around the nailer; Twist it tightly around itself.
3.5 REMOVING EFFLUORESCENCE
A. Examination
1. Before proceeding with steps to remove efflorescence, examine the plaster and
substrate material for potential sources of moisture and make repairs as required:
a. Determine the age of the structure: Efflorescence on older buildings is typically
caused by the presence of soluble salts in the construction combined with
moisture.
b. Determine the location of the efflorescence: Examination may show where the
water is entering.
c. If possible, examine the condition of the back-up material:
1) Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings
that could allow water to enter the building.
a) Are joints properly caulked or sealed?
b) Are flashings and drips in good condition?
c) Are there open or eroded mortar joints in copings or in sills?
2) Carefully note the condition and profile of the mortar joints.
3) Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding
with the cleaning operations.
d. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and
wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.
e. Examine laboratory test reports on the materials: The problem may stem from
the composition or misuse of the material.
B. Application
1. Carefully remove any surface deposits using a stiff fiber bristle brush only.
2. Wipe the surface with a clean, damp cloth.
3.6 CONCEALING WATER STAINS IN PLASTER
A. Examination
1. Before proceeding with steps to conceal water stains, examine the plaster and
substrate material for potential sources of moisture and make repairs as required.
a. Look for signs of water infiltration: Examination may show where the water is
entering.
b. If possible, examine the condition of the back-up material:
1) Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings
that could allow water to enter the building.
2) Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding
with the cleaning operations.
c. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and
wall junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.

B. Application
1. After source of moisture has been eliminated, allow the surface to thoroughly dry out.
2. Carefully remove any surface deposits and loose paint using a stiff fiber bristle brush
only. Fill cracks and holes as required.
3. Wipe the surface with a clean, damp cloth.
4. Apply white-pigmented shellac over the stained area using a brush, roller or airless
sprayer. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
a. Depending on the severity of the stain, multiple coats may be required. If so,
allow the first coat to thoroughly dry (typically 45 minutes) before proceeding
with additional coats.
b. If using a brush or roller, apply additional coats in the same direction as the
first coat.
b. If the surface is to be repainted with a high-hiding paint, spot-priming only the
stained areas is acceptable. However, if a high-hiding paint is NOT used to
finish the surface, spot-priming is NOT RECOMMENDED, as primed areas
may appear shiny through the paint finish. (Note: Many ceiling paints have
little hiding strength). In such cases, the entire wall or ceiling surface should
be primed with the white-pigmented shellac before repainting to produce a
more uniform final appearance.
5. Prime and repaint the entire surface with oil or latex paint as required.
3.7 RE-ADHERING EXISTING PLASTER
A. Identify areas needing consolidation for approval by Architect.

B. Drill 3/16” diameter holes at 6-8” on center in face of plaster for injection of adhesive.
C. Pre-wet plaster by injecting pre-wetting mixture through holes.
D. Inject adhesive into each hole using a caulk gun until all voids are filled or until
significant back pressure is built up.
3.8 CLEANING DECORATIVE PAINTED PLASTER (DRY METHOD)
A. Brush and vacuum surface to remove all loose dirt.

B. Rub Scum-X pad or eraser gently over surface of gilding and painted ground.
C. Remove all dust and eraser residue using a soft brush and vacuum.
3.9 CLEANING DECORATIVE PAINTED PLASTER (WET METHOD)
A. Brush and vacuum surface to remove all loose dirt.

B. Apply a 10% solution of Vulpex soap in gum turpentine. Agitate with a small brush.
Wipe off with a clean, soft cloth.
C. Neutralize surface with Naptha. Wipe off with a clean, soft cloth.
D. After surface is completely dry and cleaning is complete, apply 15% by volume B-72
Acryloid resin in acetone.
3.10 ADJUSTING/CLEANING

A. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls and other adjacent surfaces that are
stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by work in this procedure shall be cleaned and
repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and perfect
condition.
B. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building
operations and effects of weather. Protection shall be by methods recommended by the
manufacturer of installed materials.
C. Clean all affected surfaces of room and furnishings to their prior condition.
D. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster
from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair
floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused
materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following
applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,
etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:

content.

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that

incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1/5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content
of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal,
2. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating,
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of
main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.

b. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-

inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized
steel.
E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.


F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-

inch- wide flanges.

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
bare-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.
H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall
attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth
required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in
ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.
2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated
by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling

loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards .
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring
members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions
are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts
penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb
studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum
1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of

overhead structure.
2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated.
4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.
5. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent
to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 6 inches o.c.
C. Z-Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically

and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to
wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short
flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short
flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space
second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

SECTION 08892 - GLAZING REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes guidance on replacing cracked, broken or missing panes of glass,
replacing cracked or missing window putty and cleaning glazing.
B. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section “Historic Treatment of Wood Windows”.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. A window glass is in proper condition when it is set securely and tightly into the window
frame, is properly caulked, and is not scratched, cracked, or broken.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for this Section to be submitted with submittals for the following Sections:
1. Division 8, Door and Window Sections.
2. Section 08800, “Glazing.”
3. Section 08990, “Glazing Repair.”
B. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include recommendations for application and
use. Include test reports and certifications substantiating that products comply with
requirements.
C. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352
including:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide
product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured
materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material
1.4 QUALIFICATION DATA:
A. For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
A. Coordination of Work: The coordination of glass repairing/replacing with other proposed

work on the windows must be coordinated.
GLAZING REPAIR 08890 - 1/5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. For Glass:
1. Advanced Coating Technology
2. AFG Industries, Inc.
3. Cardinal IG
4. Environmental Glass Products
5. Falconer Glass Industries
6. Ford Glass Division
7. Guardian Industries Corp.
8. Hordis Brothers, Inc.
9. LOF Glass, Inc.
10. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited (wire glass)
11. PPG Industries, Inc.
12. Saint-Gobain/Euroglass
13. Spectrum Glass Prod. Div., H. H. Robertson Co.
14. Viracon, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Linseed oil putty (for wood windows)
B. Materials for Removing Glazing Compound:

1. Paint remover
-OR-
2. Mineral Spirits (for lacquer thinner):
a. A petroleum distillate that is used especially as a paint or varnish thinner.
b. Other chemical or common names include Benzine* (not Benzene); Naphtha*;
Petroleum spirits*; Solvent naphtha*.
c. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE.
d. Safety Precautions:
1) AVOID REPEATED OR PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT.
2) ALWAYS wear rubber gloves when handling mineral spirits.
3) If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap and
water.
e. Available from construction specialties distributor, hardware store, paint store, or
printer's supply distributor.
-OR-
3. Muriatic acid (generally available in 18 degree and 20 degree Baume solutions):
a. A strong corrosive irritating acid.
b. Other chemical or common names include Chlorhydric acid; Hydrochloric acid;
Hydrogen chloride; Marine acid*; Spirit of salt*; Spirit of sea salt*.
c. Potential Hazards: TOXIC, CORROSIVE TO FLESH; CORROSIVE TO
CONCRETE, STEEL, WOOD OR GLASS, FLAMMABLE.
d. Available from chemical supply house, drugstore or pharmaceutical supply
distributor, or hardware store.
-OR-

4. Linseed oil or thinned prime
C. Glass to match existing
D. Glazier's points (if old ones are not usable)
E. Neoprene setting blocks and shims
F. Clean, potable water
G. Ammonia
H. Paper towels or rags
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. For Replacing a Window Pane:

1. Goggles and gloves for protection when removing broken glass
2. Hammer and chisel
3. Soldering iron wrapped in foil, or a heat plate to remove old glazing compound
4. Pliers and chisels for maneuvering glazier's points
5. Sandpaper
6. Very fine 0000 steel wool
7. Paint brush to apply primer
8. Glass cutter and straight edge
9. Putty knife or glazier's tool for smoothing glazing compound
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Check for cracked, broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged glass.
B. Inspect glazing putty on both sides of pane for cracked, loose, or missing sections which
allow water to attack the metal components, especially at the joints.
C. Examine the condition of the metal window components for corrosion, loose connections,
etc.
1. Verify glass rattle or movement in the glazing system.
2. Verify that glass stops intact.
D. Inspect all surfaces which are to receive glass and/or glazing sealant for any defects or
condition which will interfere with, or prevent a satisfactory installation.
E. Correct all defects prior to installation of new glass.
F. Verify the glass type in each window type prior to the installation of new glass.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Prior to reglazing, remove all oil, dirt, rust and other materials from the glass and the
metal framing members using solvents such as toluol or xylol or using other rust
removal techniques.
2. Prime and clean all glazing rabbets prior to glazing.
3. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not be
damaged by corrosive action.
3.3 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
NOTE: BE SURE TO WEAR HEAVY GLOVES AND OTHER PROTECTIVE GEAR

WHEN HANDLING GLASS.
A. Remove existing glazing compound using one of the following four methods:
1. A hammer and chisel (at the risk of adjacent glazing).
2. A soldering iron wrapped in foil or heat plate (can soften the compound to ease
removal).
3. Chemicals such as a paint remover, mineral spirits or muriatic acid.
CAUTION: THESE ARE POTENTIALLY HARMFUL AND SHOULD BE USED IN WELL

VENTILATED AREAS ONLY.
4. Linseed oil (if the putty is linseed oil based - which most are).
B. Remove glazier's points with pliers and reserve for reinstallation.
C. Special Procedures For Wood Windows:

1. Thoroughly clean the sash of any remaining compound and sand grooves smooth.
2. Apply linseed oil or thinned oil based primer to grooves to prevent wood from
absorbing oil from new putty. If primer is used it should be applied in two coats, 24
hours apart.
D. Cut new glass 1/8" smaller in length and width, than the opening.
1. Practice cutting on an unusable piece of glass first.
2. Make sure the working surface is perfectly clean and do not press too hard with the
glass cutter.
a. Old window glass is often quite thin, and also contains impurities and irregular
internal tensions.
b. Pressure from the wheel cutter on even a tiny piece of dirt can cause the pane to
split or "run" in all the directions.
3. Cut straight pieces, use a straight edge as a guide.
a. Score the piece with one firm, even stroke of a sharp glass cutter dipped in oil.
b. Tap along the line to break it off. Plastic glass-cutter's pliers can also be used to
break the glass with a quick, downward snap.
E. Apply a small bead of glazing compound around the groove to cushion the new glass and
then install glass spaced evenly on all sides.

F. Replace glazier's points 4" to 6" apart around perimeter, tap them halfway in.
G. Form glazing compound into a 3/8" diameter rope and press around perimeter of new glass.
Using a putty knife, triangulate the surface of the compound. Hold the knife at a 45 degree
angle and align compound with the muntin on the interior.
H. Allow the compound to dry for a week, then paint accordingly with a 1/16" moisture seal
extending onto the surface of the glass.
A. After the installation of each light, remove all markings and labels from the glass.
B. Wash the glass on both sides with a mild solution of soapy water.
NOTE: IN NO CASE SHALL ALKALINE OR ABRASIVE AGENTS BE USED TO CLEAN GLASS.
CARE SHALL BE TAKEN DURING CLEANING TO AVOID SCRATCHING OF GLASS SURFACES
BY USING GRITTY MATERIALS OR DRY CLOTHS.
C. Rinse thoroughly with clean, clear water or as recommended by the glass manufacturer.
D. Dry both sides of glass with a soft cotton dry cloth.
E. Clean and trim excess glazing compound from glass, frames and sash promptly after
installation.
F. Clean adjacent surfaces if spills have occurred.

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to
this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Interior borrowed lites.
A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis

according to ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professional
engineer, using the following design criteria:
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical,
design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-
duration load.
4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by
differential shading within individual glass lites.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type,
tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to
and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of
current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the
weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
GLAZING 08800 - 1/10

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision
glass; 12 inches square.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
F. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American
Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and
Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark
glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate
manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.
C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated

glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is
for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test,
whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-
resistance rating in minutes.
D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at

least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in

which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined
as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or
to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
GLAZING 08800 - 2/10

instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on

interior surfaces of glass.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glass Types: Provide glass to match existing glass. Exterior glazing to have uniform
color appearance. Apply glass film on new and existing glass.
B. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
C. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-
treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated,
provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed
to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is
indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance

properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on
procedures indicated below:
1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on

LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless
otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
2.3 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in

16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use
materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical
and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
GLAZING 08800 - 3/10

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with

interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as
needed to comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass

separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and
complying with other requirements specified.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal.

2. Spacer: [Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction]
[Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish] [Aluminum with black, color
anodic finish] [Aluminum with bronze, color anodic finish] [Aluminum with
powdered metal paint finish in color selected by Architect] [Galvanized
steel] [Stainless steel] [Polypropylene covered stainless steel in color
selected by Architect] [Thermally broken aluminum] [Nonmetallic laminate]
[Nonmetallic tube] MATCH EXISTING.
2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window
assemblies.
B. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat
glass; 5/16-inch total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in
16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products);

FireLite Plus. (Basis of Design)
b. Schott North America, Inc.; Laminated Pyran Crystal.
c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keralite FR-L.
2.6 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness

required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
GLAZING 08800 - 4/10

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned

neoprene, EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with
ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight
seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by

inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure
applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
D. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by
testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they
are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
2.8 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids

elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;
with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers
for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for
products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
GLAZING 08800 - 5/10

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in
combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket

manufacturer.
B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of

size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing

agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for
application and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Clear [float glass] [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered
float glass].
1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.
2.11 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Clear laminated glass with two plies of [float glass] [heat-
strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass] [ultraclear float glass] [ultraclear
heat-strengthened float glass] [ultraclear fully tempered float glass].
GLAZING 08800 - 6/10

1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] [As
indicated] <Insert thickness designation>.
2. Interlayer Thickness: [0.030 inch] [0.060 inch] [0.090 inch].
B. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Low-e-coated, laminated vision glass with two plies of clear
[float glass] [heat-strengthened float glass] [fully tempered float glass].
1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] [As
indicated] <Insert thickness designation>.
2. Interlayer Thickness: [0.030 inch] [0.060 inch] [0.090 inch].
3. Low-E Coating: [Pyrolytic on second] [Pyrolytic on third] [Sputtered on
second] [Sputtered on third] [Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third]
surface.
4. Visible Light Transmittance: <Insert value> percent minimum.
5. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: <Insert value> maximum.
6. Summer Daytime U-Factor: <Insert value> maximum.
7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: <Insert value> maximum.
2.12 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: [1 inch] [5/8 inch] <Insert dimension>.

2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: [3.0 mm] [4.0 mm] [5.0 mm] [6.0 mm] <Insert
thickness designation>.
3. Outdoor Lite: [Float glass] [Heat-strengthened float glass] [Fully tempered
float glass] [Ultraclear float glass] [Ultraclear heat-strengthened float glass]
[Ultraclear fully tempered float glass].
4. Interspace Content: [Air] [Argon].
5. Indoor Lite: [Float glass] [Heat-strengthened float glass] [Fully tempered
float glass] [Ultraclear float glass] [Ultraclear heat-strengthened float glass]
[Ultraclear fully tempered float glass].
6. Low-E Coating: [Pyrolytic on second] [Pyrolytic on third] [Sputtered on
second] [Sputtered on third] [Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third]
surface.
7. Visible Light Transmittance: <Insert value> percent minimum.
GLAZING 08800 - 7/10

2.13 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES
A. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 45-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise
limitation.
B. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 60-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise
limitation.
C. Glass Type [GL-<#>]: 90-minute fire-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature rise
limitation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,

gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation

to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate
sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin
course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
GLAZING 08800 - 8/10

3.2 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges
are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch
tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to
jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads
and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward
centers of openings.
G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit

openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely
in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting
blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses
in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting

blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression
gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression
gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing
bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
GLAZING 08800 - 9/10

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,

between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants
cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth
of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing
by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is
damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
GLAZING 08800 - 10/10

SECTION 08716 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes power-assist door operators for swinging doors.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Single Swing Heavy Door:
1.3 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:


C. Shop Drawings: For automatic door operators. Include plans, elevations, sections,
F. Field quality-control reports.
H. Sample warranty.

approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 08716 - 1/6


NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Exit-Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

for doors with automatic door operators serving as a component of a required means of
egress.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
1.5 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of

the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware.
3. KM Systems, Inc.
4. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
5. Stanley Access Technologies; Division of The Stanley Works.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, complying with standards indicated below:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209.

2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
2.3 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,

weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; for long-term, maintenance-free
operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated; and complying with

UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation
devices.
1. Emergency Breakaway: Where indicated for center-pivoted doors, provide

emergency breakaway feature for reverse swing of doors. Equip system to
discontinue power to automatic door operator when door is in emergency
breakaway position, and to return to closed position after breakaway and
automatically reset.
2. Wind Load: Provide door operators on exterior doors that will open and close
doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to wind load of
indicated on Drawings.
B. Electromechanical Operating System: Self-contained unit powered by permanent-

magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and
dynamically by braking action of electric motor, connections for power and activation-
device wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off.
C. Electrohydraulic Operating System: Self-contained low-pressure unit; with separate

cylinders for power and checking, connections for power and activation-device wiring,
manual operation including spring closing when power is off.
D. Hinges: See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for type of hinge for each door that
door operator shall accommodate.
E. Housing for Overhead Concealed Operators: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch-

thick, extruded or formed aluminum and extending full width of door opening including
door jambs to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable
access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure
panels to prevent unauthorized access.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
2.4 POWER-ASSIST DOOR OPERATORS
A. Standard: BHMA A156.19.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Opening Force:
a. If Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided,
not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more
than 15 lbf required to fully open door.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door
from closing or opening.
C. Configuration: Operator to control single swinging door .

1. Traffic Pattern: Two way, outward swing .

2. Operator Mounting: Overhead concealed.
D. Operation: Power-assisted opening that reduces force to open door and power-
assisted spring closing. Pushing or pulling on door activates the operator. Provide
time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by
BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator shall function as manual
door closer, with or without electrical power.
E. Operating System: Electromechanical .
F. Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls.
G. Features:
1. Adjustable opening and closing speed.

2. Adjustable opening and closing force.
3. Adjustable backcheck.
4. Adjustable latch speed.
5. Adjustable hold-open time from zero to 30 seconds.
6. Adjustable time delay.
7. Adjustable acceleration.
8. Obstruction recycle.
9. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator; key operated.
H. Exposed Finish: Finish exposed components with finish matching door hardware .
1. Color: Oil-rubbed bronze.
2.5 ACTIVATION DEVICES
A. General: Provide devices in accordance with BHMA standards, for condition of

exposure and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for
type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate devices with door operation and door
operator mechanisms.
B. Push-Plate Switch: Momentary-contact door control switch with flat push-plate

actuator with contrasting-colored, engraved message.
1. Configuration: Square push plate with 4-by-4-inch junction box.
a. Mounting:
1) Interior: Recess mounted, semiflush in wall
2) Exterior: Recess mounted in exterior wall.
2. Push-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from

3. Message: International symbol of accessibility.

C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,
provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked,
latched, or bolted.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory fabricate automatic door operators to comply with indicated standards.
B. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and
moisture occurring or migrating within operator enclosure to the exterior.
C. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are
required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match
operator.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power

connections before automatic door operator installation.
B. Verify that full-height finger guards are installed at each door with pivot hinges where
door has a clearance at hinge side greater than 1/4 inch and less than 3/4 inch with
door in any position.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install complete automatic door operators according to manufacturer's written

instructions, including activation devices, control wiring, and remote power units if any;
connection to the building's power supply; and signage.
B. Activation Devices: Install devices and wiring according to manufacturer's written

instructions and cited BHMA standard for type of operator and direction of pedestrian
travel. Connect device wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and
Cables."
C. Access-Control System: Connect operators to access-control system as specified in

Division 13 Section "Security Access."
D. Adjusting: Adjust automatic door operators to function smoothly and for weathertight
closure, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of
applicable BHMA standards.

1. Readjust automatic door operators after repeated operation of completed

installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
E. Demonstration: Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators.

SECTION 08710 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Hardware for wood doors.
B. Hardware for fire rated doors.
C. Thresholds, weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
A. Section 06100 – Rough Hardware
B. Section 06110 – Provisions for installation of work in this section
C. Section 08100 – Hollow Metal Frames
D. Section 08210 – Stile and Rail Wood Doors
E. Section 08215 – Sound Rated Door and Frame Assemblies
F. Section 08410 – Fire Frames
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 – Standard for Accessibility and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2003
B. BHMA A156.1 – Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2000
C. BHMA A156.3 – Standard for Exit Devices; 2001
D. BHMA A156.4 – Standard for Door Controls-Closers; 2000
E. BHMA A156.5 – Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products; 2001
F. BHMA A156.6 – Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2001
G. BHMA A156.7 – Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; 2003
H. BHMA A156.8 – Standard for Door Controls-Overhead Stops and Holders; 2000
I. BHMA A156.13 – Standard for Mortise Locks and Latches; 2002
J. BHMA A156.16 – Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2002
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1/27

K. BHMA A156.18 – Standard for Material and Finishes; 2000
L. BHMA A156.21 – Standard for Thresholds; 2001
M. BHMA A156.22 – Standard for Door Gasketing Systems; 2003
N. BHMA A156.28 – Standard for Keying Systems; 2000
O. BHMA A156.29 – Standard for Exit Locks, Exit Locks with Exit Alarms, Exit Alarms and
Alarms for Exits; 2001
P. DHI A115 Series – Specification for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware;
Door and Hardware Institute; current edition
Q. DHI (LOCS) – Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990
R. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association; 2007
S. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Agency; 2006
T. UL (BMD) – Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratory, Inc.; current edition
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit six (6) copies of the hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated
by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the
Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned
for correction before checking. The hardware schedule shall clearly indicate the
architect’s hardware set and manufacturer of each proposed item. The schedule
shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant, who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and
correctness of the hardware schedule.
2. Provide two (2) copies of illustrations from the manufacturers catalogs and data
in brochure form.
3. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and
surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable items and proposed substitutions in
the hardware schedule.
4. Furnish hardware samples for design and finish as requested by the architect.
These samples may remain part of the project as long as product is protected
from damage and remain in new condition.

5. Provide a keying schedule using keyset symbols referenced in the Door and
Hardware Institute manual “Keying Systems and Nomenclature”. The keying
schedule shall be indexed by door number, keyset and hardware heading
number and shall include cross keying instructions and special stamping
instructions.
6. Provide a complete and detailed system of operating and elevation diagrams
specifically developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except
openings where only magnetic hold-opens and door position switches are
specified. Provide these diagrams with the hardware schedule submittal, for
approval. The following shall be included:
a. System schematic
b. Point to point wiring diagram
c. Riser diagram
d. Elevation of each door
e. Detail interface between electrified hardware and associated trades
B. Manufacturers Installation Instructions:

1. Provide manufacturers written installation and adjustment instructions for each
item of hardware. Send installation instructions to the site with hardware.
C. Maintenance Data:
1. Submit three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals containing the
following information:
a. Complete information in the care, maintenance, lubrication, adjustment
and preservation of finishes.
b. Data on repair and replacement parts.
c. Catalog pages for each product.
d. Name, address and phone number of the local representative for each
manufacturer.
D. Keys:
1. Deliver with identifying tags to the Owner by security shipment direct from the
hardware supplier.
E. Warranty:
1. Submit manufacturers written warranty and assure that forms have been
completed in the Owners name and registered with the manufacturer.
A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements:

1. NFPA 101
2. NFPA 80
B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products

specified in this section with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience.
Obtain each item of hardware (i.e. hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, closers)
from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products
complying with requirements.

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door

hardware with a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience. The hardware
supplier shall have warehousing facilities with-in 100 miles of the project and employ a
certified Architectural Hardware Consultant. This consultant shall be available to the
architect and general contractor during normal operating hours.
D. Substitutions: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of

quality and design. Any substitution of products not listed in the specifications must be
approved by the architect ten (10) days prior to bid date to allow sufficient time for
addendum to be added to the bid documents. All requests are to be in accordance with
Division 1, General Requirements and are to be in writing, hand delivered to the
architect. All requests are to be accompanied by three (3) copies of the manufacturers
brochures and a physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish.
E. Six (6) months after substantial completion of the project a factory representative of the
provided material shall perform a jobsite walk through. This will be done to determine if
products are performing as recommended by the manufacturer and meet all fire and life
safety requirements. Deficiencies due to installation shall be corrected by the general
contractor and defective material shall be replaced by the hardware distributor.
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements pertaining to fire rated doors and frames.
B. All Hardware on Fire Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene one (1) month prior to commencing work of this section with the owner to
establish final keying and masterkey groups.
B. Prior to installation of the hardware, manufacturers representatives for locksets, exit

devices and closers shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing
contractors personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of
compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be
sent to the architect and owner.
C. The general contractor shall arrange a meeting with the architect and owner to
establish security requirements for this project. This meeting shall be conducted prior to
erection of interior and exterior partitions to establish wire runs and location of junction
boxes and power supplies.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door
number and hardware item code to match the hardware schedule.
B. Deliver, store and handle packaged hardware to prevent damage to finishes and
deterioration in the product due to the elements.
C. Inventory door hardware upon receipt and provide a secure lock-up.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with other trades directly affected involving the manufacture or
fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B. Furnish two (2) complete sets of templates for door and frame preparation with copies
of the final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules
as soon as possible to the hollow metal, wood door and aluminum door (if applicable)
fabricators so as not to delay production.
C. Coordinate Owners keying requirements during the course of the work.
D. The general contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all Electrical System
rough-in and connections to electrified door hardware.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of substantial completion for all
items of hardware unless noted otherwise.
B. The warranty period for exit devices shall be five (5) years from the date of substantial
completion.
C. The warranty period for manual door closers shall be ten (10) years from the date of
substantial completion.
D. All manufacturers screws and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be
installed to maintain the warranty.
1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide special wrenches and tools as applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by the hardware component

manufacturer.

C. Furnish three (3) dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type and finish
used with the hardware items provided. These screws and fasteners are to be
delivered to the hardware installer for use during installation. All extra screws and
fasteners and all special installation tools furnished with the hardware shall be turned
over to the owner at the completion of the project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Hinges:
1. McKinney Products Company (MC)
2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BM)
3. Lawrence Brothers (LA)
B. Floor Closers and Pivots:

1. Rixson (RX)
2. Chase Doors (CH)
3. Jackson Corporation (JA)
C. Latchsets and Locksets:

1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 8200 Series (SA)
2. Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series (CR)
3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 8800 Series (YA)
D. Exit Devices:
2. Corbin Russwin ED5000 Series (CR)
3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 7100 Series (YA)
E. Push/Pulls:
2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI)
3. Trimco (TR)
F. Manual Door Closers:

1. Sargent Manufacturing Company 1431/351 Series (SA)
2. Corbin Russwin DC3000/DC6000 Series (CR)
3. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware 3501/4400 Series (YA)
G. Cam Action Closers:

2. Norton Door Controls 2800ST Series (NO)
H. Overhead Stops and Holders:

1. Sargent Manufacturing Company (SA)
2. Rixson (RX)
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RO)

I. Manual Bolts:
2. Door Controls International (DC)
3. Trimco (TR)
J. Protection Plates:
2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI)
3. Trimco (TR)
K. Door Stops:
2. Door Controls International (DC)
3. Trimco (TR)
L. Thresholds:
1. McKinney Products Company (MW)
2. Pemko Manufacturing Company (PE)
3. Zero International (ZE)
M. Gasketing and Door Bottoms:

1. McKinney Products Company (MW)
2. Pemko Manufacturing Company (PE)
3. Zero International (ZE)
N. Key Cabinet:
1. Telkee (TE)
2. Aladin (AD)
3. Lund (LU)
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS
A. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State and local codes.
2. ANSI/ICC A117.1 American National Standards for Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities.
3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101 Life Safety Codes.
4. Applicable provisions of NFPA 80 Fire Rated Doors.
5. All hardware on fire rated doors and frames as listed and classified by UL as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Finishes: Identified in the hardware sets at the end of this section.

2.03 HINGES
A. Provide hinges as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Provide non-removable pin (NRP) feature, utilizing a pointed set screw, at
exterior openings and where listed in the hardware sets.
2. Screws shall be flat-head Phillips finished to match the hinge.
3. Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12 x 1-1/4 inch steel threaded to the head wood
screws provided by the manufacturer for wood doors.
2.04 PIVOTS
A. Provide pivots as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Pivot sets shall be selected based upon the weight of the door.
2. Intermediate pivots shall allow for vertical door adjustment with shims at bottom
arm.
3. Pivots tested and approved for use for fire rated doors shall have a steel base
material plated to the specified finish. Where non-rated or 20 minute rated doors
are listed, provide pivots of cast brass or bronze.
4. Provide pivots of the same manufacturer as the floor closer to insure visible
components match in appearance and adjustability.
2.05 MORTISE LOCKSETS
A. Provide lock functions and trim as specified in the hardware sets, with the following
provisions:
1. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches.
2. Locks shall have field adjustable, beveled armored front, with a 1/8 inch
thickness minimum.
3. Cylinders shall be manufacturers restricted keyway, six pin.
4. Latchbolt shall be solid one-piece ¾ inch throw anti-friction stainless steel.
5. Deadbolt shall be a full one inch throw made of stainless steel and have two (2)
hardened steel roller inserts.
6. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim
but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf.
2.06 EXIT DEVICES
A. Provide exit device series and functions as specified in the hardware sets, with the
1. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors shall
be UL listed as “Fire Exit Hardware”.
2. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lockset levers. Exit
device lever trim shall withstand 1000 inch pounds of torque without allowing
access and be free-wheeling where listed.
3. Provide cylinders for exit devices with locking trim and cylinder dogging.
Cylinders shall be manufacturers restricted keyway, six pin.

4. All exit devices shall be heavy duty push rail and cast chassis type construction.
Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass
or bronze not less than .072 inches thick. Painted or anodized aluminum shall
not be considered heavy duty and are not acceptable.
5. All exit devices shall be provided with flush end caps as designated in the
hardware sets as prefix (43).
6. Provide protective lexan touchpad on the exit device push rail to prevent
scratches and serve as a visible guide to the user.
7. Provide cylinder dogging feature for all non-rated exit devices.
2.07 KEYING
A. All locks and cylinders to be Grandmaster or Masterkeyed to a new restricted keyway

key system as required by the owner.
B. All locks and cylinders to be construction masterkeyed using the lost ball method.
C. Keying requirements to be coordinated and completed at factory to protect the integrity

of the system. Field keying will not be permitted and will be considered as just cause
for rejection of supplier.
D. Cylinders shall be an integral part of the locks as manufactured by specified lock

supplier. Substitution of foreign made cylinders or components will not be allowed and
also will be cause for rejection of supplier.
E. All cylinders to be furnished with the manufacturers standard six pin tumbler.
F. Provide quantities of keys as follows:

1. Six (6) each grandmasterkeys
2. Six (6) each masterkeys each group
3. Ten (10) each construction masterkeys
4. Three (3) each change keys per lock or cylinder
G. Provide nickel-silver keys.
H. All keys to be stamped with the keyset symbol and “DO NOT DUPLICATE”
I. Provide a factory issued bitting list indicating the key cut numbers corresponding with
the keyset symbol.
J. Provide a key control system BHMA grade 1 including key holding hooks, labels, two
sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key gathering envelopes and temporary
and permanent markers. Contain system in a metal cabinet with baked enamel finish
and locking hardware. The general contractor shall verify that the key cabinet is
installed per the owners location.
1. Furnish a wall mounted cabinet with hinged panel door equipped with key
holding panels and pin tumbler cylinder door lock.
2. Furnish key holding capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks and
cylinders.

3. Furnish a cross index system.

4. Key cabinet to be set-up by the hardware supplier and to include three-way
indexing paper schedules in a hard bound binder, CD-ROM disc copy, tagging
of change keys and installing tags on the key cabinet hooks.
K. The hardware supplier shall review the key system with the owners representative after
all of the operating keys have been tested in all cylinders by the general contractor, and
the construction masterkeying is voided.
2.08 CLOSERS
A. Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of

ADA.
B. Heavy duty arms shall be provided with cast iron heavy duty soffit brackets. Stamped
bracket material will not be acceptable.
C. Provide drop plates, brackets or adaptors for door and frame as required to suit
conditions.
D. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, interior of exterior doors and stair side of
stairway doors, unless noted otherwise.
E. Provide back-check for all closers.
F. Back-check and delayed-action feature (where specified) shall be provided with a

standard pressure relief valve to protect the door from excessive force.
G. Closing speed, latching speed and back-check shall be controlled be separate key
operated valves. All valves to be captivated.
H. Closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade, secured
by machine screws. Projection of the closer body from the door shall not exceed 2-3/16
inches.
2.09 FLOOR CLOSERS
A. Provide floor closers as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Floor closers shall be furnished with a rust proof cycolac cement case. Furnish
four machine screws for attachment.
2. Floor closers shall have a helical torsion spring with adjustable spring power.
Double acting closers shall have adjustable independent springs and closing
speed valves for each direction of door swing. Compression springs will not be
acceptable.
3. Floor closers shall have independent adjustment valves for closing speed, latch
speed, back check and delayed action. All features shall be adjustable without
removing the door or threshold. Separate and independent piston and cylinder
for hydraulic back check shall be provided. Dual action valves are not
acceptable.

4. Provide non-hold open units unless otherwise listed in the hardware sets. Where
hold open units are required, furnish closers designed for specific degree of
opening built into the spindle assembly and at same point as the dead stop.
Where hold open is listed, provide one of the following:
a. AHO – Automatically holds open at the specified degree.
b. SHO – Selective hold open may be switched ON/OFF by a separate
valve
5. Provide floor closers with permanent solid one-piece non-removable spindles
that allow vertical adjustment of the door. Provide specific size extended one
piece spindles to match the undercut of the door.
6. For exterior doors, provide floor closers with built-in dead stop and installed with
overhead stop; coordinated to provide simultaneous cushion and dead stop at
the top and bottom of the door. Closers, pivots and overhead stops shall be of
the same manufacturer to assure proper templating and door coordination.
7. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically
disabled (PH prefix), provide units complying to ICC/ANSI A117.1, or other
governing codes and standards, with provisions for opening force and delayed
action closing.
8. Exterior doors shall be provided with sealed cement cases.
9. Provide floor closers of the same manufacturer as pivot sets to insure visible
components match in appearance and adjustability.
10. Floor closers shall have the capability of being shimmed without removing the
door.
11. Proved one 185 “Quickspotter” or similar device for each two floor closers
furnished.
2.10 DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES
A. Kickplates shall be .050 gauge and two (2) inches less the door width at single
openings, and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise
specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as
shown in the hardware sets.
B. Mop plates shall be .050 gauge and one (1) inch less the door width at single openings
and one (1) inch less the door width at pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified.
C. Push/Pull plates shall be stainless steel and beveled on all four (4) edges, unless
otherwise noted.
D. Push/Pull plates shall be cut for cylinders and thumb-turns as required.
E. Provide all protection plates with countersunk screw holes and pan head machine or
self tapping screws.

2.11 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Provide overhead stops and holders as specified in the hardware sets, with the
1. All overhead stops and holders shall be provided with extruded bronze
channels and arms.
2. All overhead stops and holders shall be provided with metal end caps
finished to match the channel.
2.12 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND DOOR SEALS
A. Provide thresholds as specified in the hardware sets, with the following provisions:
1. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.
2. Where thresholds are indicated to be used with floor closers or pivots, they shall
be provided by the same manufacturer. Thresholds shall be fluted on ramp
portion.
3. Provide machine screws and expansion bolts for all thresholds at concrete
floors.
4. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weatherstripping and door seals being applied
to hollow metal frames.
5. Where thresholds are specified at openings exposed to pools or high corrosive
areas stainless steel or zinc plated fasteners shall be provided.
2.13 EXISTING HARDWARE
A. All hardware for doors listed as existing to remain on the door schedule or in the
hardware sets will remain. The general contractor shall clean and adjust these items for
proper alignment and operation.
2.14 EXISTING HARDWARE PREPS
B. The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware specified for existing doors
and frames will work with the existing hardware preparations. Lack of verification, that
requires additional work to the existing doors and frames or additional material, will be
the responsibility of the general contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as
instructed by the manufacturer.
B. The general contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather
elements prior to installing interior hardware. Examine hardware before installation to
ensure it is free from defects.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and applicable

codes. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that
are later to be painted or finished in any other way, coordinate removal, storage and
reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in Division
9 sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on
the substrates involved.
B. Use templates provided by the hardware item manufacturer.
C. Install hardware on fire rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D. Set units level. Plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E. Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical openings in full bed of butyl-rubber or
polyisobutylene mastic sealant forming a tight seal between threshold and surface to
which it is set.
F. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to centerline of hardware item:
1. For steel doors and frames and wood doors comply with DHI Recommended
Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Hardware locations for steel and wood doors shall be the same.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilation equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility
requirements.
B. Clean hardware surfaces soiled by installation or by work in adjacent areas.
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage door hardware or finish.

3.05 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
SET #1
Doors: 000A
3 Hinge T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Alarmed Exit Device 21 43 AL 8810 J x restricted keyway 10B SA
1 Closer/Stop 351 CPS EB SA
1 Mounting Plate 351-D EB SA
1 Kickplate KP50 8" x 40" CSK HB4E US10B MC
1 Threshold MCK171 B x 42" x 1/4-20 ms & la MW
1 Door Seal MCK316 DS (1pc-42” x 2pcs-84”) MW
1 Door Bottom Seal MCK345 DNB x 42" MW
1 Drip Strip MCK346 D x 46" MW
SET #2
Doors: 001A
3 Hinge T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Entrance Lockset 21 8243 TRS x restricted keyway 10B SA
SET #3
Doors: 002A, 310A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Storeroom Lockset 21 76 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 10B SA
1 Closer 1431 O EB SA
1 Door Stop FS16 US10B MC
1 Kerfed Door Seal MCKPK52 BL x 18' MW
1 Automatic Door Bottom MCK434 APKL x 36" MW

SET #3.1
Doors: 306A, 311A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Storeroom Lockset 21 76 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 10B SA
1 Closer 1431 P10 EB SA
1 Automatic Door Bottom MCK434 APKL x 36" MW
SET #4
Doors: 003A
6 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Office Lockset 21 8255 TRS x restricted keyway 10B SA
2 Flush Bolt FB01M-12" US10B MC
1 Dust Proof Strike DPS1 US10 MC
(For active leaf of pair only)
2 Wall Stop WS01 US10B MC
2 Silencer S2W MC
Wood astragal furnished by door manufacturer

Salvaged doors to be reused
The general contractor shall verify that all new hardware will work with existing door
preps
SET #5
Doors: 005A
6 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Classroom Lockset 21 8237 TRS x restricted keyway 10B SA
(For LH leaf of pair)
1 Door Stop & Holder ADH03 US10B MC
(Install at top of door-for active leaf of pair only)
1 Overhead Holder 598H x 195 x 90 deg 10B SA
(Pull side mount)
1 Angle Bracket 195 10B SA
2 Silencer S2W MC

SET #6
Doors: 007A
6 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 NB 8713 F x 713-8 ETS x 10B SA
restricted keyway
1 Exit Device 16 21 43 NB 8710 F x 710 ETS-DT x 10B SA
restricted keyway
2 Closer/Holder 351 CPSH EB SA
1 Astragal MCK351 DS x MCK354 DV x 84" MW
SET #7
Doors: 007B, 013A
3 Hinge T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8810 F x restricted keyway 10B SA
SET #8
Doors: 008A, 009A, 010A
6 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Storeroom Lockset 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 10B SA
1 Dummy Lever 8293 TRS 10B SA
2 Flush Bolt FB02W US10B MC
1 Overhead Stop 598S x 90 deg 10B SA
(For inactive leaf of pair only)
2 Silencer S2W MC
Astragal furnished by door manufacturer

SET #9
Doors: 011A
6 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

2 Roller Latch RL1 US10B MC
2 Dummy Lever 8293 TRS 10B SA
2 Silencer S2W MC
Roller latch to be installed at the top of each leaf
SET #10
Doors: 012A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC

1 Storeroom Lockset 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 26D SA
1 Kickplate KP50 4" x 32" CSK HB4E US32D MC
1 Mop Plate KP50 4" x 33" CSK HB4E US32D MC
1 Overhead Stop 598S x 90 deg 26D SA
3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #11
Doors: 015A, 016A
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC

1 Classroom Deadlock 21 487 x restricted keyway 10B/26D SA
1 Pull Plate DP503 4 x 16 US32D MC
1 Cam Action Closer 421 CTB EN SA
1 Push Plate P053RC 4 x 16 US10B MC
1 Door Stop FS29 US26D MC
3 Silencer S2W MC
Salvaged door to be reused

preps

SET #12
Doors: 017A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC

1 Storeroom Lockset 21 8204 TRS x restricted keyway 26D SA
1 Wall Stop WS01 US32D MC
3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #13
Doors: 018A
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

3 Silencer S2W MC

preps
SET #14
Doors: 019A, 025A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

3 Silencer S2W MC

preps
SET #15
Doors: 020A, 204A, 205A, 206A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Passage Set 8215 TRS 10B SA
3 Silencer S2W MC

SET #15.1
Doors: 203A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #16
Doors: 022A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC

1 Privacy Set 49 8265 TRS 10B/26D SA
3 Silencer S2W MC
Salvaged door to reused

preps
SET #17
Doors: 023A
6 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

2 Silencer S2W MC
Astragal furnished by door manufacturer

Salvaged doors to be reused
preps
SET #18
Doors: 024A
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Exit Device 12 43 8815 F x 715-8 ETS 10B SA
1 Cam Action Closer 421 CTB EB SA
3 Silencer S2W MC

SET #19
Doors: 024B
3 Hinge T4A3386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8804 F x 704 ETS x restricted 10B SA
keyway
SET #20
Doors: 026A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

3 Silencer S2W MC

preps
SET #21
Doors: 103A
1 Floor Closer 27SHO x 90 deg x less floor plate 613 RX

1 Intermediate Pivot M19 613 RX
1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8813 F x 713-8 ETS x restricted 10B SA
keyway
1 Threshold Type 5 x 400 x 36" x 1/4-20 ms & la BR RX
1 Door Bottom Seal MCK234 AV x 36" MW

SET #22
Doors: 103B
1 Floor Closer 27SHO x 90 deg x SC x less floor plate 613 RX

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8804 G x 704 ETS x restricted 10B SA
keyway
SET #23
Doors: 104A
2 Pivot 147 613 RX

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8706 E x 706 ETS x restricted 10B SA
keyway
keyway
2 Automatic Door Operator Refer to Specification Section 08716 XX
2 Press Wall Switch Refer to Specification Section 08716 XX
1 Key Switch MKA x 24VDC SN
1 Mortise Cylinder 21 42 x restricted keyway 10B SA
1 Wiring Diagram Furnished by hardware supplier XX
Exit devices must be set in the dogged position before automatic door operator is
activated
Key switch to be used to activate and deactivate the automatic door operator

SET #24
Doors: 104B
2 Pivot 147 613 RX

2 Push Plate P053RC 4 x 16 US10B MC
2 Pull Plate DP503 4 x 16 US32D MC
2 Door Stop FS29 US26D MC
2 Door Bottom Seal MCK234 AV x 34" MW
SET #25
Doors: S1A, S1C, S1D
All hardware furnished by door manufacturer
SET #26
Doors: S2A
2 Floor Closer 27SHO x 90 deg x SC x less floor plate 613 RX

keyway
keyway

SET #27
Doors: 207A
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC

1 Cam Action Closer 421 CTB EN SA
3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #27.1
Doors: 208A
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Closer 351 P10 EN SA
3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #28
Doors: S2B, S2C
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Alarmed Exit Device 12 21 43 AL 8815 F x 715-8 ETS x 10B SA
restricted keyway
1 Cam Action Closer 421 CTB EB SA
3 Silencer S1M MC
SET #29
Doors: 300A, 305A
3 Hinge T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Mounting Bracket 770SPB USP ZE
STC 45 assembly-threshold, sound seal and automatic door bottom furnished by

door manufacturer

SET #30
Doors: 301A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

1 Kickplate KP50 8” x 34” CSK HB4E US10B MC
3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #31
Doors: 309A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 10B MC

3 Silencer S2W MC
SET #32
Doors: S1B
1 Pivot 147 613 RX

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8804 G x 704 ETS x restricted 10B SA
keyway
1 Key Switch MKA x 24VDC SN
1 Mortise Cylinder 21 42 x restricted keyway 10B SA
1 Wiring Diagram Furnished by hardware supplier XX
Exit device must be set in the dogged position before automatic door operator is
activated
Key switch to be used to activate and deactivate the automatic door operator

SET #33
Doors: T1A
4 Hinge TA2314 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Overhead Holder 598H x 90 deg 10B SA
Existing door and frame to remain

and frame preps
SET #34
Doors: T2A
8 Hinge TA2314 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Flush Bolt (Top) FB01M-24” 10B MC
1 Flush Bolt FB01M-12” 10B MC
2 Overhead Holder 598H x 90 deg 10B SA
SET #35
Doors: 027A
3 Hinge TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 10B MC

1 Exit Device 16 21 43 8804 F x 704 ETS x restricted 10B SA
keyway
3 Silencer S2W MC

preps

Opening List
Opening Hardware Set
000A 1
001A 2
002A 3
003A 4
005A 5
007A 6
007B 7
008A 8
009A 8
010A 8
011A 9
012A 10
013A 7
015A 11
016A 11
017A 12
018A 13
019A 14
020A 15
022A 16
023A 17
024A 18
024B 19
025A 14
026A 20
027A 35
103A 21
103B 22
104A 23
104B 24
203A 15.1
204A 15
205A 15
206A 15
207A 27
208A 27.1
300A 29
301A 30
305A 29
306A 3.1
309A 31

310A 3
311A 3.1
S1A 25
S1B 32
S1C 25
S1D 25
S2A 26
S2B 28
Opening Hardware Set
S2C 28
T1A 33
T2A 34

SECTION 08592 - HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Wood window repair and replacement.

2. Reglazing.
3. Window hardware repair, refinishing, and replacement.
1.2 UNIT PRICES
A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 1 Section "Unit
Prices."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: See Division 1 Section "Special Procedures for Historic Treatment" for other
definitions.
B. Design Reference Sample: A Sample that represents Architect's prebid selection of

work to be matched; it may be existing work or specially produced for Project.
C. Window: Includes window frame and sash, unless otherwise indicated by the context.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified historic treatment specialist to

perform preconstruction testing on historic wood windows.
1. Select sizes and configurations of existing work to adequately demonstrate

capability of products to comply with requirements.
2. Test historic treatment methods for effectiveness and compliance with specified
requirements.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when testing will
be performed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 08592 - 1/9

2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end
result, submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
C. Shop Drawings: For repair and replacement of historic wood windows and
components. Show location and extent of replacement work, with enlarged details of
replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing, method of splicing
into or attaching to existing wood window, accessory items, and finishes.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified historic treatment specialist.
F. Preconstruction Test Reports: For historic treatment of wood windows.
A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: A qualified historic wood window

specialist.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Prepare mockups so
they are inconspicuous or reversible.
1. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect .

2. Wood Window Repair: Prepare one entire window unit to serve as mockup to
demonstrate sample repairs of wood window members including frame, sash,
glazing, and hardware.
C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AWI's "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards" for construction, finishes, grades of wood windows, and
other requirements.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPLACEMENT WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood: Clear fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at

time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and
surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide.
1. Species: Match species of each existing type of wood product .

2.2 WOOD REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Wood Consolidant: Ready-to-use product designed to penetrate, consolidate, and

strengthen soft fibers of wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and
decay and designed specifically to enhance the bond of wood-patching compound to
existing wood.

a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood.

b. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100.
c. Wood Care Systems; ROTFIX.
B. Wood-Patching Compound: Two-part epoxy-resin wood-patching compound; knife-

grade formulation as recommended by manufacturer for type of wood repair indicated,
tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be
designed for filling voids in damaged wood materials that have deteriorated due to
weathering and decay. Compound shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading
to feather edge.

a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood with WoodEpox.

b. Advanced Repair Technology, Inc.; Primatrate with Flex-Tec HV.
c. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 with Flexible Epoxy
Patch 200.
d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; QuickWood.
e. West System Inc.; West System.
f. Wood Care Systems; ROTFIX with SCULPWOOD.
2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: See Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing System: Primer as recommended by glazing material manufacturer, with tape

glazing or sealant glazing according to Division 8 Section "Glazing."
2.4 WINDOW HARDWARE
A. General: Provide complete sets of window hardware consisting of sash balances,

hinges, pulls, latches, and accessories indicated for each window or required for proper
operation. Window hardware shall smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock
wood windows and be sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and
dimensions.
B. Replacement Window Hardware: Replace existing damaged or missing window

hardware with new hardware.

C. Material and Design:
1. Material: Match existing.

2. Design: Custom hardware to replicate existing hardware.
3. Weight and Pulley Sash-Balance: Concealed weight and pulley balance system
including steel or cast iron weights, cast-bronze pulleys, synthetic sash cord or
sash chain; size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position.
4. Spring Sash-Balance: Concealed [tape-spring] [spiral-tube] [spring-loaded,
block-and-tackle] type; size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open
position.
5. Replacement Window Hardware: Match existing window hardware.
D. Window Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for base material and finish
requirements indicated.
2.5 REPLICATED WOOD WINDOWS
A. Replicated Wood Windows and Window Sash: Custom-fabricated replacement wood

windows and trim, with operating and latching hardware; fabricated according to
AWI Section 1000 requirements for Custom Grade.
1. Wood Species: Match wood species of exterior window trim and frame parts .
2. Wood Window Members and Trim: Match profiles and detail of existing window
members and trim.
3. Glazing Stops: Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing
system indicated.
4. Exposed Hardware: [Reuse] [Match] existing exposed window hardware.
5. Weather Stripping: Full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each
operable sash.
2.6 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Compressible weather stripping designed for

permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action; completely concealed
when window is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Match existing materials and profiles as much as

possible unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene,

or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric; complying with AAMA 701/702.
1. Weather Seals: Elastomeric preformed seal with integral barrier fin or fins of
semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material.
C. Metal Weather Stripping: Bronze weather stripping as indicated on Drawings;

designed either as one piece to seal by sliding into a groove in the sash or as two
pieces that interlock with each other; and completely concealed when wood window is
closed.

A. Borate Preservative Treatment: Inorganic, borate-based solution, with disodium

octaborate tetrahydrate as the primary ingredient; manufactured for preserving
weathered and decayed wood from further damage by decay fungi and wood-boring
insects; complying with AWPA P5; containing no boric acid.
B. Cleaning Materials:
1. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium

polyphosphate, 1/2 cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts
of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5
gal. of solution required.
2. Mildewcide: Provide commercial proprietary mildewcide or a solution prepared
by mixing 1/3 cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5
percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water.
C. Adhesives: Wood adhesives for exterior exposure, with minimum 15- to 45-minute
cure at 70 deg F, in gunnable and liquid formulations as recommended by adhesive
manufacturer for each type of repair.
D. Fasteners: Fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal unless otherwise

indicated. Use metals that are noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined.
1. Match existing fasteners in material and type of fastener unless otherwise

indicated.
2. Use concealed fasteners for interconnecting wood components.
3. Use concealed fasteners for attaching items to other work unless exposed
fasteners are unavoidable or the existing fastening method.
4. For exposed fasteners, use Phillips-type machine screws of head profile flush
with metal surface unless otherwise indicated.
5. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of metal fastened unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of
aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with
requirements in ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (Severe) service condition.
2.8 WOOD WINDOW FINISHES
A. Factory-Finished Windows: Alkyd finish system consisting of primer and two finish
coats on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces.
1. Finish Coats: Match intermediate coat and topcoat products used for adjacent,
repaired wood windows, as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting Restoration."
.
2. Color and Gloss: Match colors indicated on Drawings .

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent materials from damage by historic treatment of wood windows.
B. Clean existing wood windows of mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint,
grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent
solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with
fresh water. Allow to dry before repairing or painting.
C. Condition replacement wood members and replacement windows to prevailing

conditions at installation areas before installing.
3.2 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES, GENERAL
A. General: Have historic treatment of wood windows directed and performed by a

qualified historic treatment specialist. Ensure that historic treatment specialist's field
supervisors are present when historic treatment of wood windows begins and during its
progress. In treating historic items, disturb them as minimally as possible and as
follows:
1. Apply each product according to manufacturer's written instructions unless

2. Stabilize and repair wood windows to reestablish structural integrity and weather
resistance while maintaining the existing form of each item.
3. Stop the progress of deterioration by removing coatings and applying borate
preservative treatment before repair.
4. Repair items in place where possible and retain as much original material as
possible.
5. Replace or reproduce historic items where indicated or scheduled.
6. Make historic treatment of materials reversible whenever possible.
7. Install temporary protective measures to protect wood window work that is
indicated to be completed later.
B. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use only the
gentlest mechanical methods, such as scraping and natural-fiber bristle brushing, that
will not abrade wood substrate, reducing clarity of detail. Do not use abrasive methods
such as sanding, wire brushing, or power tools except as indicated as part of the
historic treatment program and as approved by Architect.
C. Repair and Refinish Existing Hardware: Dismantle window hardware; repair and
refinish it to match finish samples.
D. Repair Wood Windows: Match existing materials and features, retaining as much
original material as possible to perform repairs.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, repair wood windows by consolidating, patching,

splicing, or otherwise reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood or
with salvaged, sound, original wood.
2. Where indicated, repair wood windows by limited replacement matching existing
material.
E. Replace Wood Window Units: Where indicated, duplicate and replace units with
salvaged, sound, original wood or with new wood matching existing wood. Use
surviving prototypes to create patterns for duplicate replacements.
1. Do not use substitute materials unless otherwise indicated.

2. Compatible substitute materials may be used.
F. Protection of Openings: Where sash or windows are indicated for removal, cover
resultant openings with temporary enclosures so that openings are weathertight during
repair period.
G. Identify removed windows, sash, and members with numbering system corresponding
to window locations to ensure reinstallation in same location. Key windows, sash, and
members to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently stamp
units in a location that will be concealed after reinstallation.
3.3 GLAZING
A. Remove cracked and damaged glass and glazing materials from openings and prepare
surfaces for reglazing.
B. Remove existing glass and prepare surfaces for reglazing.
C. Remove glass and glazing from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.
D. Reinstall glass with indicated glazing system and according to Division 8 Section
"Glazing."
E. Disposal of Removed Glass: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of it
3.4 WOOD WINDOW PATCH-TYPE REPAIR
A. General: Patch wood members that are damaged and exhibit depressions, holes, or
similar voids, and that have limited rotted or decayed wood.
1. Treat wood members with wood consolidant prior to application of patching

compound. Allow treatment to harden before filling void with patching
compound.
2. Remove rotted or decayed wood down to sound wood.
B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces either before applying wood
consolidant or after removing rotted or decayed wood.

C. Apply wood-patching compound to fill depressions, nicks, cracks, and other voids
created by removed or missing wood.
1. Apply patching compound in layers as recommended by manufacturer until the

void is completely filled.
2. Finish patch surface to match contour of adjacent wood member. Sand patching
compound smooth and flush, matching contour of existing wood member.
3.5 WOOD WINDOW MEMBER-REPLACEMENT REPAIR
A. General: Replace parts of or entire wood window members at locations scheduled and
where damage is too extensive to patch .
1. Remove sash from windows before performing member-replacement repairs

2. Remove broken, rotted, and decayed wood down to sound wood.
3. Custom fabricate new wood to replace missing wood; either replace entire wood
member or splice new wood part into existing member. Fabricate replacement
members according to AWI Section 1000 requirements for Custom Grade.
4. Secure new wood using finger joints or multiple dowels with adhesive and nailing
to ensure maximum structural integrity at each splice. Use only concealed
fasteners. Fill nail holes and patch surface to match surrounding wood.
B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces after replacements are

made.
C. Repair remaining depressions, holes, or similar voids with patch-type repairs.
D. Glazing: Reglaze units prior to reinstallation.
1. Mill new and existing glazed members to accommodate new glass thickness.
2. Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated.
3. Provide glazing stops to match contour of sash frames.
E. Reinstall units removed for repair into original openings.
F. Weather Stripping: Replace nonfunctioning and install missing weather stripping to

ensure full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each operable sash.
3.6 WOOD WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT
A. General: Replace existing wood window and sash units with new custom-fabricated
units to match existing at locations scheduled and where damage is too extensive to
repair .
B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces before finishing.
C. Mill glazed members to accommodate glass thickness. Glaze units prior to installation.

D. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement,
anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing,
trim, and other adjacent construction.
E. Set sill members in bed of sealant for weathertight construction unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Install window units with new anchors into existing openings.
G. Weather Stripping: Install full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each
operable sash.
H. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
I. Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of
them unless otherwise indicated.

SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unfinished wood-framed windows.
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements

indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those
specified, and that are of test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.
B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of

the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project
that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from
basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to
ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof
heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.

b. Importance Factor: 1.15.
c. Exposure Category: B.
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass

edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at
design pressure based on testing performed according to
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural
computations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated.

01352 including:
WOOD WINDOWS 08550 - 1/5

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to

other work, operational clearances, and installation details.
D. Samples: For each exposed finish.
E. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product test reports.
A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's

products.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer who is certified for chain of

custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers

and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
1.5 WARRANTY

repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.

b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air
infiltration, or condensation.
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of wood, metals, other materials, and finishes beyond normal
weathering.
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Unfinished Wood Windows:
a. BiltBest Windows and Patio Doors.

b. Crestline; a brand of Peachtree Companies, Inc. (The); TPC Acquisition,
Inc.
c. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products
Corporation Company.
d. Hurd Millwork Company.
e. Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc.
f. Marvin Windows and Doors.
g. Norco Premium Collection; JELD-WEN, Inc.
h. Pella Corporation.
i. Pozzi Custom Collection; JELD-WEN, Inc.
j. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a
moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints,
blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2
inches wide; water-repellent preservative treated.
2.3 WINDOW
A. Window Types: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

1. Performance Class and Grade: AW 45.
C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide wood windows tested for thermal

performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45 .
D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor

maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures
when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1. U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less.
E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window

SHGC maximum of 0.50, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.

2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and
glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.
B. Glass : Clear, insulating-glass units complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing."
C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces

weathertight seal.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator
framing.
B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash
and ventilator.
C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units,
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow
for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal
expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8
Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash
and ventilator frames.
2.6 WOOD FINISHES
A. Factory-Primed Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat

complying with WDMA T.M. 11 on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to
wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight
construction.

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or

electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight
fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight
closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging

protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and
other substances.
G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.

SECTION 08450 - ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior manual-swinging all-glass entrance doors.

2. All-glass transoms.
A. General Performance: All-glass systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Design all-glass systems, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details, including the following:
1. Plans, elevations, and sections.

2. Details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of patch fittings.
3. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish indicated.
E. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well
as procedures and diagrams.
ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08450 - 1/4

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For all-glass systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
G. Product test reports.
H. Maintenance data.
I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for all-glass systems, including Shop

Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units
in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain all-glass systems from single source from single
manufacturer.
D. Accessible All-Glass Entrance Doors: Comply with applicable provisions in

ICC/ANSI A117.1.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with
requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh.
2. Virginia Glass Products Corporation; a subsidiary of Virginia Mirror Company.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces),

Type I (transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and
for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Class 1: Clear monolithic.
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch .

b. Locations: As indicated .
2. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished.

3. Butt Edges: Flat ground.
4. Corner Edges: Lap-joint corners with exposed edges polished.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not
less than Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2.3 METAL COMPONENTS
A. Fitting Configuration:
1. Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors Transoms: Patch fittings at head

and sill on pivot side only .
B. Patch Fittings: Stainless-steel-clad aluminum.
C. Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types
recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed
parts, match metal and finish of patch fittings .
B. Push-Pull Set: As selected from manufacturer's full range As indicated Insert

description.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings
before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after
tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that
when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or
lite.

B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest
extent possible.
2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
1. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's

B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.
C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate
indicated.
F. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

SECTION 08352 - ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Power-operated accordion fire door system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. Summary of forces imposed on walls by doors.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Include description of fire-release system including testing
and resetting instructions.

01352 including:

work.
D. Product certificates.
E. Operation and maintenance data: Furnish complete manuals describing the materials,
devices and procedures to be followed in operating and maintaining the doors under
this section. Include manufacturer's brochures and parts lists describing the actual
materials used in the product.
F. Product Test Reports: Submit copy of manufacturer’s actual burn test report clearly
detailing the description of product, fire endurance method, test results and test
conclusions of actual burn test as conducted and witnessed by UL or WH.
1. Test Pressure: Test at as close to neutral pressure as possible.

2. Provide units with permanently fastened testing agency labels showing
temperature-rise ratings.
ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEM 08352 - 1/5


NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Testing: Provide documentation from a certified testing agency that the fire door
operator and self closing governor mechanism has been tested for a minimum of
50,000 cycles and 500 trip tests.
D. Manufacturer Requirements: Door manufacturer shall have been in the business of and
have experience in manufacturing the type of product covered under this specification
section as well as giving credible service for a minimum of five (5) years. Provide list of
at least ten (10) completed projects which include the products covered under this
section.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and
installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in
materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects
shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCORDION FIRE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model

AC8600-7SD-SS (Stainless Steel) as manufactured by McKeon Door Company or a
comparable product.
B. Fire-Protection Rating: 60 minutes.
C. General: Each unit shall consist of an interlocking single folding panel curtain
suspended from stainless steel head track system. Curtain shall be designed to travel
in a horizontal plane, smoothly and without binding. Curtain shall be driven to the open
and close position by a positive action sprocket drive chain system designed and built
by the door manufacturer.
1. Panels: Shall be fabricated of interlocking 18 gauge stainless steel panels with
an approximate cross section not greater than 7" wide.
D. Leading Edge: Each curtain shall be furnished of a stainless steel member of tubular
design to provide stiffness, limit deflection of curtain and provide for a tight fitting
closure.
E. Perimeter Smoke Seals: Provided UL classified perimeter smoke seals and sweeps.
F. Head Track System: Shall be fabricated of not less than 1/8" thick stainless steel
formed shape with removable pan and integral positive action drive chain system.
Overall track width shall not be greater than 9”.

G. Counterbalance Unit: The fire door shall be counterbalanced by means of an

adjustable steel counterweight system located in the area indicated in the construction
drawings.
H. Electric Motor Operator: Each door shall be provided with a compact power unit
designed and built by the door manufacturer. Operators shall be equipped with an
adjustable screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High
efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a
centrifugal governor, spring-set solenoid-operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic
release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust, and moisture.
Operator is to be NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device,
which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings
shall be integral with the unit.
1. Motor: Shall be totally enclosed, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball
bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be ½
hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size which ever is greater.
2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with
mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 24 volt control circuit.
3. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction.
4. Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the
operators housing.
5. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station.
I. Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire door shall be designed with a centrifugal governor as
an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall
be triggered by a smoke detector or fire alarm. When triggered the door is released
and begins to close due to the captured counterbalance unit force. The speed of the
door shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal
operating speed of the door, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6"
per second. The fire door shall self-close under it’s own power, battery back-up
systems to achieve self closing are not acceptable.
J. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device
shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When
power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the
door shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent
the fire door from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have
lapsed, the fire door shall self-close without the aid of electricity or battery back-up
systems. Once power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the
fire door shall reset.
K. Safety Edge: Each fire door shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction
sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during
the closing operation, the door shall stop, reverse and return to the open
position.
L. Easy Trip Test Feature: Each fire door shall be designed so that it may be trip-tested
simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the door shall
self-close without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the fire door
has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No
ladders or tools shall be needed to reset the door or the time delay unit.

M. Finish:
1. After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt. Steel
components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer. Stainless steel
components shall be of stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish.
2.2 STEEL FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to
remove dirt. Steel components shall receive two coats of rust inhibitive primer.
Stainless steel components shall be of stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish
finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify
architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and
timely completion of work.
B. Verify dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify Architect in any instance
where dimensions vary.
C. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not
to delay job progress.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of door
manufacturer.
B. Install door assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, straight and true.
C. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding

operation.
D. Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical
Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.
E. Install fire doors according to NFPA 80 and manufacturer's written instructions for type
of door operation indicated and fire-protection rating required.
1. Interface fire-detection devices with building's fire alarm system.
F. Drill necessary holes cleanly, with no broken areas or spalls, for installation of
fasteners in concrete or masonry. Remove and replace damaged masonry as
directed.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND TESTING
A. Operate sliding metal fire doors on completion of installation to ensure satisfactory

operation. Check moving parts for proper alignment and lubrication. Make
adjustments for smooth, easy operation.
1. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected, fire-release

system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation
until accepted by owner.
B. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.
C. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and
methods.

SECTION 08335 - SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes open-curtain self-opening coiling grilles.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling grille and accessory.
B. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section 01352
including:


C. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or
detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
SELF-OPENING COILING GRILLES 08335 - 1/5


approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. Motor Operator and Self-Opening Governor Mechanisms: Tested by certified testing

agency for a minimum of 50,000 cycles and 500 trip tests.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Grille Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and
installer agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in
materials or workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects
shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-OPENING COILING SECURITY GRILLES
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Model: Model G1000-G-SS-ST1 as manufactured

by McKeon Door Company. Provide basis of design product or equal product that
meets specified requirements.
B. Grille Curtain: ST1 pattern consisting of 5/16" diameter solid galvanized steel rods,
encased by 3/8” stainless steel tubular spacers 4-1/2” long. The vertical links are made
of 1/16” x 5/8” stainless steel and are set in a staggered pattern. The vertical spacing
shall be 9” while the horizontal spacing is 2”.
C. Bottom Bar: Stainless steel tubular section of not less than 1½” x 3" formed to fit
curtain and finished to match grille curtain.
D. Guides: Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of a minimum 3" x 3" steel angle or
support tube with a 2” x 3” stainless steel inner guide angle and a 3” x 3” stainless steel
outer guide angle. Guides shall be shall be finished to match grille curtain.
E. Mounting Brackets: Hot rolled 3/16” steel plate. Brackets shall be provided to house
both ends of the counterbalance assembly.
F. Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose coiled curtain and counterbalance

assembly. Hood shall be fabricated of 22 gauge stainless steel and designed to match
brackets. Top and bottom shall be bent and reinforced to provide stiffness.
G. Counterbalance Assembly: Grille shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable

steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting

blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bearings or self-lubricating

graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel which shall be fabricated of hot
formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe.
H. Electric Motor Operator: Grille shall be provided with a compact power unit designed
and built by the grille manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable
screw-type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency
planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal
governor, spring-set solenoid operated brake and a fail safe magnetic release device,
completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture. Operator is to be
NEMA type 1 enclosure. An efficient overload protection device, which will break the
power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with
the unit.
1. Motor: Shall be totally, intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type
with a class A or better insulation. Single phase motors shall be capacitor start,
polyphase shall be squirrel cage induction. Horsepower of motor is to be ½ hp
minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size, which ever is greater.
2. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with
mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt
control circuit.
3. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 90% efficiency minimum, 77:1 reduction.
4. Brake: Double shoe type, continuous duty, solenoid activated, integral within the
operator's housing.
5. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open,
close and stop.
I. Self-Opening Mechanism: The grille shall be designed with a centrifugal governor as

an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall
be triggered by smoke detector or fire alarm. When triggered the grille is released and
begins to fully open due to the captured torsion spring force. The speed of the grille
shall be governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating
speed of the grille, at a rate of not greater than 9" per second or less than 6" per
second. The grille shall self-open under its own power, battery back-up systems to
achieve self-opening and grilles that partially open are not acceptable.
J. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device
shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When
power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarm, the
grille shall begin to self-open. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent
the grille from opening for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed,
the grille shall self-open without the aid of electricity or battery back-up systems. Once
power has been restored the automatic reset time delay as well as the grille shall reset
themselves.
K. Safety Edge: Each grille shall be designed with a radio activated obstruction sensing
safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the closing
operation, the grille shall stop, reverse and return to the fully open position.
L. Easy Trip Test Feature: Each grille shall be designed so that it may be trip-tested
simply by cutting power to the operator. By turning the power switch off, the grille shall
self-open without the aid or electricity or battery back-up systems. Once the grille has

satisfactorily opened, it shall be reset simply by turning the power back on. No ladders
or tools shall be needed to reset the grille or the time delay unit.
M. Finish: After completion of fabrication, clean all metal surfaces to remove dirt.
1. Steel components: Two coats of rust inhibitive primer.
2. Stainless steel components: Stainless steel type 304 with number 4 polish finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and field conditions to which this work is to be performed and notify
architect if conditions of surfaces exist which are detrimental to proper installation and
timely completion of work.
B. Verify all dimensions taken at job site affecting the work. Notify the architect in any
instance where dimensions vary.
C. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not
to delay job progress.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation using only factory approved and certified representatives of the
grille manufacturer.
B. Install grille assemblies at locations shown in perfect alignment and elevation, plumb,
level, straight and true.
C. Adjust grille installation to provide uniform clearances and smooth non-binding

operation.
D. Install wiring in accordance with applicable local codes and the National Electrical
Code Standard. Materials shall be UL listed.
E. Test grille opening sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset
grille after successful test.
A. Protect installed work using adequate and suitable means during and after installation
until accepted by owner.
B. Remove, repair or replace materials which have been damaged in any way.
C. Clean surfaces of grime and dirt using acceptable and recommended means and
methods.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles.

SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings .
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.

01352 including:


work.
D. Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
E. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data
pertinent to installation.
A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are
identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following
test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.

2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain
access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in
the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1/3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.
D. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.
E. Manufacturer's standard finish.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

the following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.

2. Karp Associates, Inc.
3. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).
B. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.

2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type.
5. Latch: Cam latch with interior release.
6. Lock: Mortise cylinder.
a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from
steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.

4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal
with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch .
5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
6. Hinges: Concealed-pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by ring turn with interior release.
9. Lock: Self-latching device with mortise cylinder lock.
a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "Door Hardware ."
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units
ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth,
flat surfaces without blemishes.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to
types of supports indicated.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane
when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face
panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces to receive finish material.
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.

08290 – WOOD DOOR REFINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Cleaning door hardware.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Allowances: Quantity allowances for refinishing are specified in Division 1 Section

"Allowances."
B. Unit Prices: Door refinishing to be provided under unit prices are described in
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
D. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of
restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on
WOOD DOOR REFINISHING 08290 - 1/7

other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for
this Project.
E. Samples:
1. Submit sample of wood stain and finish for approval of Architect.

2. Prepare a sample refinishing area for review of color and finish.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage a firm with at least 5 years experience in hardware

cleaning. The firm must submit Qualification Data that it has completed work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Mock-Ups: Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall prepare examples of each
type of hardware to be cleaned for the Architect’s approval.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers,

labeled with type and name of products and manufacturers.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum

A. Environmental Requirements: Dispose of all used solutions, finishing products, solvent

residue and soiled rags in sealed noncombustible containers to prevent a fire hazard
daily.
A. Coordinating Work: Coordinate hardware cleaning so that it will not conflict with the
work of other trades.
A. The intent of refinishing is to restore the color, finish and overall surface uniformity of
the historic doors, consistent with the original design intent. A like new appearance is
neither expected nor desired.
B. Splotches, streaks, runs or other inconsistencies caused by improper application of

finishing products will not be accepted.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with municipal and Federal regulations governing

the refinishing operations, chemical waste disposal and scaffolding.

A. Existing Conditions: Determine that surfaces to which finishes are to be applied are
even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects affecting proper application.
Correct or report defective surfaces to Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The Sherwin Williams Company101 Prospect Ave. N.W.Cleveland, OH 44101

216/566-2000
B. 3M CompanyP.O. Box 33053St. Paul, MN 55133-3053612/737-6501 or 800/364-3577
C. Klean Strip, Inc.Division of W.M. Barr Inc.P.O. Box 13146Memphis, TN

38113901/775-0100
D. Pyrock Chemical Co.Long Island city, NY
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Commercial Stripper such as "Kwick Superfast paint and Varnish Remover" (Klean
Strip, Inc.), "Rock Miracle" (Pyrock Chemical Co.), or approved equal.
B. Stain: Penetrating, permanent oil-based stain such as "Oil Stain" (Sherwin Williams), or
approved equal, colored to match existing interior and exterior wood.
C. Varnish: Linseed-tung-oil modified phenolic spar varnish such as "Rexpar" (Sherwin

Williams), or approved equal.
D. Solvent: Mineral spirits, turpentine or denatured alcohol.
E. Mineral Spirits: A petroleum distillate that is used especially as a paint or varnish

thinner.
F. Other chemical or common names include Benzine* (not Benzene); Naphtha*;

Petroleum spirits*; Solvent naphtha*.
1. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE.

2. Safety Precautions:
a. AVOID REPEATED OR PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT.

b. Always wear rubber gloves when handling mineral spirits.
c. If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap and
water.
G. Turpentine: Typically used as a solvent and thinner.


2. Safety Precautions:
a. Work in a well ventilated area.

b. Observe safety rules as turpentine is flammable, and the fumes can trip an
ionization smoke detection system.
c. Store soiled cloths in a metal safety container to guard against
spontaneous combustion.
H. Denatured Alcohol: Other chemical or common names include Methylated spirit.
1. Potential hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE.

2. Denatured alcohol should be a satisfactory substitute for ethyl alcohol for stain
removing purposes.
I. Alternative Solvent: A mixture of 75% toluene, 24% acetone and 1% butyl acetate.
1. Toluene (C7H8): A liquid, aromatic hydrocarbon that resembles benzene but is

less volatile, flammable and toxic; Is produced commercially from light oils from
coke-oven gas and coal tar and from petroleum, and is used as a solvent, in
organic synthesis and an antiknock agent for gasoline. Other chemical or
common names include Toluol.
J. Acetone (C3H6O): A volatile fragrant flammable liquid ketone used chiefly as a solvent
and in organic synthesis. Other chemical or common names include Dimethyl ketone;
Propanone
1. Potential Hazards: VOLATILE AND FLAMMABLE SOLVENT
K. Detergent containing trisodium phosphate, such as "Spic n' Span", or approved equal.
L. Steel Wool: Grade 000 steel wool
M. Aluminum oxide sandpaper - 220 grit
N. Silicone carbide paper - 400 grit
O. Bronze wool
P. Sandpaper - 80 and 120 grit
Q. Shellac burn-in sticks
R. Tack rag
S. Clean cotton cloths
T. Soft, natural bristle brushes
U. Mild soap such as "Ivory Liquid", "Joy", or approved equal.

V. Abrasive pad such as "Scotch-brite" (3M Company), or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which
would interfere or prevent a satisfactory application of materials under this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove all non-original door louvers, panels and transom panels
taking care not to damage the remainder of the door, frame or paneling.
B. Replace the non-original elements with new wood which matches the species of the
original wood and which matches the detailing of the original millwork.
C. Hardware: Remove existing hardware, door numbers, and other applied elements, and
store for reinstallation.
D. Make minor repairs to doors as required:
E. Fill holes exceeding 1 inch in diameter with matching dutchmen.
F. Fill smaller holes with patching compound tinted to match wood.
G. Protection:
1. Make sure work area is well-ventilated and wear protective clothing and rubber
gloves. Do not allow smoking in the work area.
2. Place a fire extinguisher for Class B fires at entrances for emergency use.
3. Change clothes as often as necessary to be effective in cleaning.
4. Daily, dispose of all used solutions, finishing products, solvent residue and soiled
rags in sealed noncombustible containers to prevent a fire hazard.
5. Protect all surfaces adjacent to wood being refinished.
6. Maintain a healthy level of air circulation within the space being treated.
Regularly employ and maintain exhaust fans or other air moving devices to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
7. Curtain off areas being treated from other trades and occupants to prevent fumes
from reaching other parts of the building.
8. Wear appropriate safety devices such as respirators fitted with the correct
cartridge, gloves, and other protective clothing.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Strip the existing varnish finish:

1. Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the door to remove varnish build-up and
smooth out checked surface. Replace soiled steel wool frequently with clean and
continue with wiping process until a smooth, even-colored surface is achieved.
Use no water on wood surface under any circumstances.
2. Work only one 4' square area at a time. Work area should be within a
comfortable arms reach.
3. If solvent affects the stained color of the wood, discontinue use and use an
alternative solvent mixture as listed in Section 2.02 Materials.
B. Allow surface to dry thoroughly; no less than 24 hours -OR- Apply commercial stripper
following manufacturer's instructions.
C. Wash the surface with acetone to remove stripper residue.
D. Lightly sand the surface with 220 grit aluminum oxide sandpaper as needed to remove
carbon soiling and finish damage not removed by solvent application.
E. Wipe surface with a tack rag to remove traces of bronze wool, sand and dust prior to
applying new finishes.
F. Remove shallow scratches:

1. Lightly sand, in the direction of the grain only to remove shallow scratches,
against the grain sanding, and finish damage not removed by stripper
application.
2. Remove scratches using 80 grit sandpaper. Finish using 120 grit sandpaper until
smooth surface is attained. Smooth surface sufficiently to ensure uniform stain
absorption.
3. Wipe surface with a tack rag to remove traces of steel wool, sand, and dust prior
to applying new finishes.
G. Apply the Stain:
1. Color mix stain to match original finish.

2. Apply stain to bare wood surfaces using a soft cloth or bristle brush.
3. Allow stain to set as required for proper color match and maximum surface
uniformity.
4. Wipe off excess stain by rubbing parallel to the grain with a soft dry cloth.
5. Allow surface to dry for at least 24 hours.
H. Fill deep scratches and gouges with shellac burn sticks tinted to match the wood stain.
I. Apply the finish coating:
1. Make sure that surface is clean, level and free of defects. Promptly report to the
Architect any unanticipated conditions which may affect the quality of the finish.
2. Brush or spray apply 3 coats of varnish to produce a uniform sheen and
appearance.
3. Allow each coat to dry for at least 4 hours.

J. Lightly sand with #400 grit silicone carbon paper or rub with fine steel wool between
coats. Vacuum surface and wipe with a dry tack rag to remove all grit and dust prior to
applying next finish coat.
K. After curing, lightly rub surface with fine steel wool to replicate original finish.
L. Replace glazing as required.
M. Clean glazing as required:

1. Remove adhesive residues, paint spatters, and other soiling using soft cloths and
detergent.
2. Use a mild solvent and Scotch Brite pad or bristle brush to remove stubborn
residues.
3. Remove paint splatters with solvent or by scraping gently with a razor blade held
at a shallow angle. DO NOT USE TOOLS OR CLEANING PRODUCTS WHICH
MAY ETCH THE GLASS.
N. Reinstall kickplates and other hardware as required.
O. Remove and repaint louvers to match original as required.
P. Refinish jambs and frames to match original as required.
A. Adjust door to assure proper operation. Replace or rehang doors which are hinge
bound and do not swing or operate freely. Replace worn hinge pins with replicates.
B. Refinish or replace job-finished doors damaged during installation.

SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior stile and rail wood doors.

2. Interior stile and rail wood doors.
3. Interior fire-rated, stile and rail wood doors.
4. Priming and on-site finishing stile and rail wood doors.
5. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware.
6. Prehanging doors in frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.
D. Samples: Representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and
solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished
doors.
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on
testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible.
B. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201,
for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and
permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other
requirements specified. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites with wet-use adhesives.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212 - 1/5

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood
products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.
2.2 EXTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Exterior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Types A, D & F: Exterior doors complying with
AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements
specified.

a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

b. Buell Door Company.
c. Eggers Industries.
d. Enjo Architectural Millwork.
e. Maiman Company (The).
f. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.
2. Grade: Premium.
3. Finish: Opaque.
4. Door Construction for Opaque Finish:

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered edge- and end-glued lumber.
5. Glass: Uncoated, clear, match existing glass , complying with Division 8 Section
"Glazing."
2.3 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Types A, C, D and G: Interior doors complying with
AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other requirements
specified.


f. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
2. Grade: Premium.
3. Finish: Transparent.
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawed/sliced.
5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish:

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber.
6. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.0 mm thick, complying with
Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors; Type A: Fire-rated (90-minute rating) doors
complying with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," and with other
requirements specified.


f. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.
2. Grade: Premium.
3. Finish: Transparent .
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawed/cliced.
5. Interior Fire-Rated Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch- thick, edged and veneered
mineral-core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch- thick, veneered mineral-core raised
panels.
6. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting.
B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform
clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated:
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only
to extent permitted by labeling agency.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

D. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with
one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.
E. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated,
complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's
standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in
place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.
F. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials,
finish, and quality of construction.
G. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water-repellent
preservative to comply with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with
manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
H. Prehung Doors: Provide stile and rail doors as prehung units including doors, frames,
weather stripping, and hardware.
1. Provide wood door frames, other than fire-rated wood door frames, that comply
with Division 6 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork."
2. Provide hardware, including weather stripping and thresholds, that complies with
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
2.5 FINISHING
A. Finish wood doors on-site to match re-finished doors and woodwork.
B. Transparent Finish: To be determined by Architect.
1. Grade: Premium.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent
materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth.
B. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, [WDMA I.S.6,
"Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors,"] [AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards,"] [WI's "Manual of Millwork,"] [WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for
Architectural Stile and Rail Doors,"] and other requirements specified.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

D. Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after
fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: As shown on Drawings.

2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only
to extent permitted by labeling agency.
E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.

01352 including:

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of
hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,

"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as
close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B .
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1/3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
2. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood
products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to

provide fire-protection rating indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed
by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
E. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of
referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection
rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors ; Type I:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
2. Species: Match existing doors.
3. Cut: Quarter sliced.
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.

6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only
by mullions.
7. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then
entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply
with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions

and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do
not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated
doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and
mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4
inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

required at Project site.

SECTION 08113 – GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fire rated door and framing systems for installation as full vision fire rated doors
and windows.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section “Structural Steel Framing:” Steel attachment members
2. Section “Metal Fabrications:” Steel attachment members inserts and anchors
3. Section “Air Barriers:” Perimeter air, water and vapor seal between the work of
this section and adjacent construction
4. Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” Flashing between this work and other
work
5. Section “Firestopping:” Firestops between work of this section and other fire
resistive assemblies.
6. Section “Door Hardware:” Door hardware other than that provided by the work of
this section
7. Section “Automatic Door Operators” opener for door to comply with ADA and
Local Authority opening force requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM E2074-00: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies,
Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door
Assemblies.
2. ASTM E2010-01: Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Window Assemblies.

1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.
2. NFPA 251: Standard Methods of Tests of Fire Endurance of Building
Construction and Materials.
3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
4. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.

1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.
2. UL 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
4. UL 263: Fire tests of Building Construction and Materials
GLASS FIREWALL WINDOW & DOOR SYSTEM 08113 - 1/8

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.
E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC):

1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II: Safety Standard for Architectural
Glazing Materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass, fabricated glass or framing as

defined in referenced glazing publications.
A. Duration -- Doors: Capable of providing a fire rating for 60 minutes.
B. Fire Rating -- Window Assembly: Capable of providing a fire rating for 60 minutes.
C. Opening Applications in fire rated partitions or area separation walls and corridors
where opening protection is specified to provide 60 minute rating.
D. Design Requirements: As indicated on Drawings.

1. Construction: Roll formed and profiled steel tubes, factory-welded or complete
with mechanical joints for simplified installation or shipped spliced for assembly
at the building site or for fitting through available building openings.
a. Knock down frames are not permitted.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product
descriptions and technical data.

01352 .
C. Shop Drawings: Show doors, frames, hardware and steel frame components as
shown on drawings and schedules. Detail any need for on-site fabrication on shop
drawings.
D. Hardware schedule: list of manufacture supplied hardware and verification of cylinder

size complying with Section08710.
E. Samples for Initial Color Selection: For steel frames with factory-applied powder coat
color finishes.
1. Duplicate copies of manufacturer's powder coating color charts showing the full
range of colors available.
F. Samples: For following products:

1. Two 8-inch by 10-inch samples for glass.

2. Sample of Stainless Steel frame

3. Verification Sample of selected finish on steel frame piece
G. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on drawings for glazed openings
in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and
location.
H. Certificates of compliance from glass and glazing materials manufacturers attesting

that glass and glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements.
1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing
manufacturer’s permanent label designating type and thickness of glass,
provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized
certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to authority
having jurisdiction.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted
in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who
employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass
Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3
(Master Glaziers).
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain framing system, glazing and
glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method
indicated.
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed
mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.
E. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by UL, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.
Assemblies must be factory-welded or come complete with factory-installed
mechanical joints and must not require job site fabrication.
F. Listings and Labels - Fire Rated Assemblies: Under current follow-up service by
Underwriter Laboratory maintaining a current listing or certification. Label assemblies
accordance with limits of manufacturer’s listing.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to the work of this
section.
A. Deliver, store and handle under provisions specified by manufacturer. For details on
storage and product handling, please contact Technical Glass Products and request
information on storage and product handling.
B. Deliver materials to specified destination in manufacturer or distributor’s packaging

undamaged.
C. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.
A. Obtain field measurements prior to fabrication of frame units. If field measurements will
not be available in a timely manner coordinate planned measurements with the work of
other sections.
1. Note whether field or planned dimensions were used in the creation of the shop
drawings.
B. Coordinate the work of this section with others effected including but not limited to:
other interior components and door hardware beyond that provided by this section.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide limited five year warranty dated from substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLY AND WINDOW
A. Glass Material: Pilkington Pyrostop™ fire-rated glazing as fabricated and distributed

by Technical Glass Products, 8107 Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800-
426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail sales@fireglass.com, web site
http://www.fireglass.com.
B. Frame System for Door: “Heat Barrier Series Frame System” by TGP; fire-rated steel
frame system as manufactured and supplied by Technical Glass Products, 8107
Bracken Place SE, Snoqualmie, WA 98065 (800-426-0279) fax (800-451-9857) e-mail
sales@fireglass.com web site http://www.fireglass.com.
C. Custom Frame System for Window: Field constructed as indicated on Drawings.

1. Testing Standards: ASTM E-119 and UL263.
2. Fire Rating: 60 Minute.

D. Substitutions: Substitutions for Glazing Material and Frame System not permitted.
2.2 MATERIALS - GLASS
A. Fire Rated Glazing: ASTM C 1036 and ASTM C 1048.
B. Composition: Composed of multiple sheets of “Optiwhite” high visible light

transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer.
C. Thickness of Glazing Material: 7/8” Pilkington Pyrostop™ .
D. Approximate Visible Transmission: Varies with thickness (approximate range 88

percent).
E. Logo: Each piece of fire-rated glazing shall be labeled with a permanent logo including
name of product, manufacture, testing laboratory (UL® only), fire rating period, safety
glazing standards, and date of manufacture.
F. Performance: Glass must be rated to stop fire from either direction and must meet all
testing requirements including the required hose-stream test (where fire-rating exceeds
20 minutes).
2.3 MATERIALS – STEEL FRAMES AND DOORS
A. Steel Framing System for 60-minute rated doors.

1. Steel: Profiled steel tubing formed using cold drawn and profiled steel tubing.
2. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer
3. Glazing Accessories: calcium silicate setting blocks.
4. Glazing Compounds:
a. Pilkington Pyrostop™: Approved, pure silicone sealant.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Furnish frame assemblies pre-welded.

1. When necessary, splice frames too large for shop fabrication or shipping or to fit
in available building openings.
2. Fit with suitable fasteners.
3. Knock-down frames are not permitted
B. Field glaze door and frame assemblies.
C. Factory prepares steel door assemblies for field mounting of hardware when
necessary.
D. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to field dimensions.
E. Obtain approved shop drawings prior to fabrication.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish frames after assembly.
C. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
2.6 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Furnish hardware with 60 minute fire door by the manufacturer.
B. Select hardware from door manufacturer's standard recommended and approved

hardware groups as specified in Division 8 Section – Door Hardware.
C. Provide high traffic areas or areas requiring a door motion force of greater than 20
pounds with power assisted hardware for use with manufacturer’s frame system.
D. Operating hardware for Fireframes® Heat Barrierr Series Single Outswing Doors with Exit
Device. Each to have the following.
Item Description Manufacturer Finish
*
3 Hanging Devices Weld on Pivots Technical Glass PTM
Products
1 Exit Device F5300 Rim Dorma 630
1 Lever Trim Rectangular lever handles Technical Glass 630
Products
1 Cylinder ANSI Mortise Schlage C Technical Glass 626
Keyway Products
1 Closing Devices TS 93 Surface Applied Dorma 689
Closer
1 Auto door Bottom 420APKL Smoke Seal Pemko MA
1 Weather Seal Perimeter Gasket Technical Glass
Products
Balance of hardware by others
* FINISH LEGEND:
PTM Painted to match frame
MA Mill Finish Aluminum
689 Aluminum Paint
630 Satin Stainless Steel
626 Satin Chrome Plated

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and members to which the work of this section attaches or adjoins
prior to frame installation.
B. Provide openings plumb, square and within allowable tolerances.

1. Provide 3/8 inch shim space at all walls
C. Notify Architect of any conditions which jeopardize the integrity of the proposed fire wall
and door system.
D. Do not proceed until such conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire window and door by a specialty contractor with appropriate experience
qualifications; and in strict accordance with the reviewed shop drawings.
B. Install fire safing / fire stopping at edges of system.
C. Install glazing in strict accordance with fire resistant glazing material manufacturer’s
specifications.
1. Field cutting or tampering is not permissible.
D. Do not install damaged frames or chipped glassing units.
E. Install plumb and true. Limit out of plumb or true to 1/8 inch in 10’-0” in any dimension.
3.3 REPAIR AND TOUCH UP
A. Limited to minor repair of small scratches. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

products.
1. Such repairs shall match original finish for quality or material and view.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door function and hardware for smooth operation. Coordinate with other
hardware suppliers for function and use of any other attached hardware.

A. Protect glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
1. Do not clean with astringent cleaners. Use a clean “grit free” cloth and a small
amount of mild soap and water or mild detergent.
2. Do not use any of the following:
a. Steam jets
b. Abrasives
c. Strong acidic or alkaline detergents, or surface-reactive agents
d. Detergents not recommended in writing by the manufacturer
e. Do not use any detergent above 77 degrees F
f. Organic solvents including but not limited to those containing ester,
ketones, alcohols, aromatic compounds, glycol ether, or halogenated
hydrocarbons.
g. Metal or hard parts of cleaning equipment must not touch the glass surface
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating
substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.
Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

SECTION 08110 - STEEL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Standard hollow metal frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:


C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal
thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
F. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference

numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
A. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80

that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
STEEL FRAMES 08110 - 1/7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
H. Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing."
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-
mil dry film thickness per coat.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as knocked down unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board
partitions.
6. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame

size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less
than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch
thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression
anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-
inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor
location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick,
and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8
inch high unless otherwise indicated.
B. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as
frames.

C. Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a
[45] [90]-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover
opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth
and flush with frame.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment
plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to
be grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four
spot welds per anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.

d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door

silencers.
a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.
C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated

mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished
as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-
mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and
ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for
hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 16 electrical Sections.
D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated.
Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing
and type of installation indicated.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: ANSI/SDI A250.3.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of
opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are
constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or
damaged by grout forces.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors,
and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to
overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is
anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of
struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide
adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness,

alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
B. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each
corner.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged

areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair
paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Latex joint sealants.
3. Preformed joint sealants.
4. Acoustical joint sealants.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside
the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
F. Warranties.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the

testing indicated.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1/7

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to

repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside
the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and
joint substrates.
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for
joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is
deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining

to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come
in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant : ASTM C 920.

a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones.
c. May National Associates, Inc.
d. Pecora Corporation.

e. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division.

f. Tremco Incorporated.
2. Type: [Single component (S)] [or] [multicomponent (M)].

3. Grade: [Pourable (P)] [or] [nonsag (NS)].
4. Class: [100/50] [50] [25].
5. Uses Related to Exposure: [Traffic (T)] [Nontraffic (NT)].
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.

a. Bostik, Inc.
b. May National Associates, Inc.
c. Pecora Corporation.
d. Tremco Incorporated.
2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed,

open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10
lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in
precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side
with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals.

b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.
c. Sandell Manufacturing Co.
d. Schul International, Inc.
e. Willseal USA, LLC.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation.
b. USG Corporation.
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a

surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface
skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant
depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant

manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.

b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
d. Joints between different materials listed above.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors .
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in dimension stone cladding.

colors .
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.

colors .
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic

surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and stone.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows and elevator entrances.
2. Joint Sealant: Latex.

colors .
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and

horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Sealant Location:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated.

colors .
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Location:
a. Acoustical joints where indicated.
2. Joint Sealant: Acoustical.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping, including printed
statement of VOC content and chemical components.
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and

inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition,
submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration
firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and
found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the

following requirements:
1. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing
marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1/5

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

2. Grace Construction Products.
3. Hilti, Inc.
4. Johns Manville.
5. Nelson Firestop Products.
6. NUCO Inc.
7. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
8. RectorSeal Corporation.
9. Specified Technologies Inc.
10. 3M Fire Protection Products.
11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
12. USG Corporation.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or

UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or

UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at

both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
F. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits
for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those
components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components
of firestopping.
D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels
will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use
mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the
following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with
requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.4 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
B. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items[ FS-<#>]:
1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 000 Series.
C. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]:
1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 1000 and 1001 Series.
D. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]:
1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- and W-L- 2000 Series.
E. Firestopping for Electrical Cables[ FS-<#>]:
1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- and W-L- 3000 Series.
F. Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables[ FS-<#>]:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- and W-J- 4000 Series.
G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes[ FS-<#>]:
1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- F-A- W-L- 5000 Series.
H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]:
I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]:
J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants[ FS-<#>]:

SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes SFRMs applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind
other construction when the Work is completed.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction
and fire-resistance rating, applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
minimum thicknesses.
C. Product certificates and test reports.
D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports.
E. Research/evaluation reports.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by SFRM manufacturer to install

manufacturer's products. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor
or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the
buyer.
B. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or

manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and
test methods.
1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable
classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing
requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-
resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats,
tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final
application.
3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing
and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in
SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 1/8

test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test

specimens.
C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency
to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced
fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience,
has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide products identical to

those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting
agency.
2. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
E. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the

method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light
Microscopy."
F. Mockups: Apply mockups to [verify selections made under sample submittals] [and to
set quality standards for materials and execution].
1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product
indicated.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate

temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to
maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24
hours after product application.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use
natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive
material dries thoroughly.
C. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in
other Sections to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and

protect the environment.
2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-
resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient
conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation.
3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other
damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its
application.
4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete
topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete
topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until
roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of
fire-resistive material.
5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete
topping has been completed.
6. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports,
sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying
fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive
material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been
made to defective applications.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer,

in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or
a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements;

peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants
and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions
other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing,
and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal
use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCEALED SFRM


1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM:
a. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield.

b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote
Type MK-6 .
c. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300.
d. Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; Type 5.
2. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material:
a. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco Blaze-Shield II.
B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, or either of the following:
1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or

portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic
aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for
conveyance and application.
2. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry formulation
of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state
by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray nozzle to form a damp,
as-applied product.
C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values

required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test
methods referenced with each property as follows:
1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if
required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI
Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design
indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per
ASTM E 605:
a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or

more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design
thickness minus 0.25 inch.
b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1
inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness
of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness.
c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance
designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less
than 15 lb/cu. ft..
3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory
testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM.
4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum
thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as
specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft..
5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.

7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per

ASTM E 760.
8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per
ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch,
maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by
mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.
9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-
burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less .

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0 .
10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive
product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per
ASTM E 736.
2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response
characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of

SFRM.
D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and
finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive
material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories,
corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to
receive SFRM.
E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer
of SFRM.
F. Sealer for Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Transparent-drying, water-

dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of
sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material.
G. Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A
substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and
related materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill
scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible
encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-
resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire
exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support
sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related
work are completed.
D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written

recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering
with bond.
E. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials
during application.
F. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material,

including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale,
and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
G. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless

compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive
SFRM.
H. Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance
ratings and fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for
conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate
in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use
anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach
accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath and fabric to
substrate.

I. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where
required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM
manufacturer for material and application indicated.
J. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be
protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install
body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.
K. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the

spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other
placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
L. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM
over which they are applied.
M. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater
thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
N. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to

obtain designated fire-resistance rating and where indicated.
O. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
P. Apply sealer to concealed SFRM where indicated.
Q. Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM where indicated.
R. Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project,

remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
S. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections and prepare reports:
1. SFRM.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report
whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM

shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows.
Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for
previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements.

Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-
resistance design.
1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or
partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq.
in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.
2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of
structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for
structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for
joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns
per ASTM E 605.
3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency
and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of
construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For
each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion
from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of
construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.
a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel

members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel
receiving fire-resistive material.
b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise
painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's
"Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced
UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per
ASTM E 736.
5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements,

testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine
extent of noncompliance.
D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for
cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results
indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as
specified above.

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including
plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled work.
1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing
and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion
joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and
connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on
Drawings.
B. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture

Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including built-in gutter fascia fascia trim,
approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams,
attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1/8

1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.
1. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete
sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of
primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking

rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or Series 300 stainless
steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
2.4 REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1. Material: Copper, 16 oz./sq. ft. .
2. Finish: Mill .
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to
design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item
indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back
to form hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners
are not allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate

elastomeric sealant.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form

expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with
butyl sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for
intended use.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.]
G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.]

2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints,
complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required.
Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and
accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated.
1. Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and
hardware cloth screen .
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
B. Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish

with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1. Hanger Style: Banded.
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top
edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in
overflows. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. .
2.7 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:

D. Eave, Rake, Ridge, and Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but

not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where
indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches
beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high, end dams where flashing
is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials:

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 1 inch beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-
inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage.
Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that
completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall
remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing
and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous
coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or
install a course of polyethylene sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24
inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used
or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less
than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws metal decking

not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out

resistance .
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-
tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning
where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.
G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for
strength.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage
system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with
sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures
and seal watertight with sealant.
1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at
eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2
inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end
laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails.
Install slip sheet over felt underlayment.
2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50
feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with
fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and
bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch
below gutter discharge.
E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of

configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate
at staggered 3-inch centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to
substrate at 24-inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted
holes at 24-inch centers.
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar

with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over
base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base

flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with

installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant
and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of
wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and
louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4

Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies ."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in [Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete] [Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies].
D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and
similar flashings to extend 1 inch beyond wall openings.
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing
and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.

SECTION 07315 - SLATE SHINGLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Slate shingles.
2. Underlayment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples:
1. Slate Shingle: Full size, of each color, size, texture, and shape.
2. Ridge Cap : 12 inches long.
C. Sample warranty.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color of slate shingle from single quarry capable of
producing slate of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace
slate roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLATE SHINGLES
A. Slate Shingles: ASTM C 406, Grade S1; heavy texture roofing slate; hard, dense, and
sound; chamfered edges, with nail holes machine punched or drilled and countersunk.
No broken or cracked slates, no broken exposed corners, and no broken corners on
covered ends that could sacrifice nailing strength or laying of a watertight roof.
1. Basis of Design: Black Diamond Slate; “Dover Black.”
SLATE SHINGLES 07315 - 1/5

2. Thickness: Nominal 1/4 to 3/8 inch .

3. Surface Texture: Rough.
4. Size: 20 inches long by 12 inches wide.
5. Nail Holes: Minimum of Two per shingle.
6. Butt Shape: Standard square cut.
7. Color: Black,.
8. Weather-Exposure Color Change: Unfading.
B. Starter Slate: Slate shingles with chamfered nail holes front-side punched.
1. Length: Exposure of slate shingle plus head lap.
C. Ridge Slate: Slate shingles fabricated with vertical grain orientation.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felt, unperforated.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of

40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-
modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in slate-shingle roofing and
remain watertight.
C. Slating Nails: ASTM F 1667, copper, smooth shanked, wire nails; 0.135-inch minimum
thickness; sharp pointed; with 3/8-inch- minimum diameter flat head; of sufficient length
to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch into sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal
as flashing.
D. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section " Miscellaneous
Carpentry."
2.4 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."
1. Sheet Metal: Copper.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the
eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum
of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten
with felt underlayment nails.
1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet

underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less
than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches
over self-adhering sheet underlayment.
B. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment, where required: Install on roof deck parallel with and
starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- wide starter course at eaves and completely
cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous
courses 19 inches in shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches. Stagger end
laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment
nails.
1. Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet

underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3
inches in direction to shed water.
2. Terminate felt underlayment extended up not less than 4 inches against
sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projections.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with
low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable.
Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than
3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between courses.
Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.
D. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of 36-inch- wide felt

underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches.
Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with
asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck with felt underlayment nails.
1. Lap roof-deck felt underlayment over first layer of valley felt underlayment at
least 6 inches.
3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

3.3 SLATE-SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Beginning at eaves, install slate shingles according to written instructions of

manufacturer and details and recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual."
1. Install wood nailer strip cant at eave edges.

2. Install shingle starter course chamfered face down.
B. Install first and succeeding shingle courses with chamfered face up. Install full-width
first course at rake edge.
1. Offset joints of uniform-width slate shingles by half the shingle width in

succeeding courses.
C. Maintain a 4-inch- minimum head lap between succeeding shingle courses.
D. Maintain uniform exposure of shingle courses [between eaves and ridge] [midway
between eaves and ridge and increase head lap of succeeding shingle courses to
ensure uniform exposure on remaining shingle courses].
E. Extend shingle starter course and first course 2 inches over fasciae at eaves.
F. Extend shingle starter course and succeeding courses 1 inch over fasciae at rakes.
G. Cut and fit slate neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other projections
through roof.
H. Hang slate with two slating nails for each shingle with nail heads lightly touching slate.
Do not drive nails home drawing slates downward or leave nail head protruding enough
to interfere with overlapping shingle above.
I. Ridges: Install ridge slate in saddle configuration.
1. Install and anchor wood nailer strips of thicknesses to match abutting courses of
slate shingles, terminating nailer strip 3 to 4 inches from the eave. Cover with felt
underlayment strip, extending to underlying slate but concealed by ridge slate.
2. Anchor ridge slate to supporting wood nailer strip with two nails for each slate
shingle without nails penetrating underlying slate.
J. Hips: Install and anchor slate hips in saddle configuration.
1. Install and anchor wood nailer strips of thickness to match abutting courses of
slate shingles. Cover nailer strip with felt underlayment strip, extending on to
underlying slate but concealed by hip slate. Anchor hip slate to nailer strip with
two nails located in upper third of hip-slate length.
2. Notch starter shingle and first shingle course at hip to fit around nailer strips so
no wood is exposed at ridge eave.
3. Lay hip slate in bed of asphalt roofing cement or butyl sealant.
K. Remove and replace damaged or broken slate shingles.


SECTION 07271 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes self-adhering, vapor-retarding, modified bituminous sheet air

barriers.
A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air

barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior
incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable
of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control
joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter
conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins
with adjoining construction.
1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
C. Product certificates.
D. Qualification data.
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in

material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall
assembly , 150 sq. ft. , incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding,
window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface
preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and
penetrations of air barrier membrane.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS 07271 - 1/5

1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing

agency of air barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed.
2. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation
wall intersection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIER
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: 40-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 36 mils of

rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene film with release liner on
adhesive side and formulated for application with primer that complies with VOC limits
of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705.

b. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier.
c. Henry Company; Blueskin SA.
d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Air-Shield.
e. NEI; AC AirSeal.
f. Rubber Polymer Corporation; Rub-R-Wall SA.
g. Tremco, Incorporated; ExoAir 110.
3. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area
at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
c. Ultimate Elongation: 200 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
d. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F ; ASTM D 1970.
e. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement;
ASTM C 836.
f. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.
g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour
immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570.
h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms ; ASTM E 96, Water Method.
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended

use and compatible with air barrier. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with
VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air

barrier material.
C. Butyl Strip: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil- thick, self adhering; polyethylene-film-

reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive, with release liner backing.
D. Modified Bituminous Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, self-

adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick
polyethylene film with release liner backing.
E. Termination Mastic: Cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.
F. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
G. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place,

polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft. density; flame spread index of 25 or less
according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner
recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.
H. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced,

self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick
polyethylene film with release liner backing.
I. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65-
mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives
and lap sealant with galvanized steel termination bars and fasteners.
J. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of

cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-
component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding
extrusions to substrates.
K. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50

(low-modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint
substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.
B. Install modified bituminous sheets according to air barrier manufacturer's written

instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F,

install self-adhering, modified bituminous air barrier sheets produced for low-

temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or

substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.
C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than
24 hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed

to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
D. Apply and firmly adhere modified bituminous sheets horizontally over area to receive
air barrier sheets. Accurately align sheets and maintain a uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum
lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure
airtight installation.
1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water without interception by any

exposed sheet edges.
2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
E. Apply continuous modified bituminous sheets over modified bituminous strips bridging
substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.
F. Install air barrier sheets and auxiliary materials to form a seal with adjacent
construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.
G. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane
air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing
and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers,
exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings using
accessory materials .
H. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply elastomeric flashing sheet so that a minimum of 3
inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact
over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
I. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
K. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing
agency.
L. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for
C. Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency as

follows:
1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air
leakage according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or
depressurization .
D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of
construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed to these
conditions for more than 30 days.

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
2. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
3. Loose-fill insulation.
4. Vapor retarders.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Product test reports.
D. Research/evaluation reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1/4

2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

the following:
1. Fibrex Insulations Inc.

2. Owens Corning.
3. Roxul Inc.
4. Thermafiber.
B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without

membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
2.3 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION
A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-

resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.
B. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or

Type II for poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum

permeance rating of 0.13 perm.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-

retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support
of units.
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing

members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated
for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of
insulation to flanges of metal studs.
6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder

facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction
.
b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity .
C. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written

instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly
settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard
Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor

retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor
retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend
vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those
filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at
perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal
framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and
window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder
tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt
joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other
solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-
retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other

work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

SECTION 07162 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes crystalline waterproofing for negative-side application to concrete.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product certificates.
C. Product test reports.
D. LEED Submittals:
E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying crystalline waterproofing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
A. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains,
and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed.
Proceed only after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have
been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.
B. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is

maintained at 40 deg F or above during work and cure period, and space is well
ventilated and kept free of water.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07162 - 1/4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Prepackaged, gray -colored proprietary blend of portland

cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and
applied, penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts chemically with
the byproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to develop crystalline
growth within substrate capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof
substrate; that has VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction;
with properties meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below.

a. American PERMAQUIK Inc.; Super 200.

b. AQUAFIN, Inc.; AQUAFIN-1C.
c. IPA Systems, Inc.; Drycon.
d. Vandex USA LLC; Vandex Super/Super White.
2. Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 30 feet when tested according
to CE CRD-C 48.
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or

sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes,
honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other
materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic

properties and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and
moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and
horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); compatible with substrate and
other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
D. Sand: ASTM C 144.
E. Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture
designed to improve adhesion to prepared substrates and not to create a vapor barrier.
F. Water: Potable.

2.3 MIXES
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to water according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand to
required consistency.
B. Protective Topping: Measure, batch, and mix portland cement and sand in the
proportion of 1:3 and water. Blend together with mechanical mixer to required
consistency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to ensure adequate ambient temperatures
and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or

annular spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between
pipes and pipe sleeves.
C. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing

D. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according to

E. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to

remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing
compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application

and curing.
1. Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application and maintain
damp condition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water.
2. Apply waterproofing to surfaces indicated on Drawings.
3. Number of Coats: Number required for specified water permeability .
4. Application Method: Brush . Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is in
full contact with substrate or previous coat.
5. Dampen surface between coats.
B. Final Coat Finish: Brushed .
C. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three days immediately after final coat has set,
followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:

1. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pits, sumps and
similar offsets and features.
E. Protective Topping: Apply 1-inch- thick, protective topping over floor surfaces.
A. Inspection: Engage manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application

and provide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written
instructions.

SECTION 07140 – COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE AND CMU

WALLS)
PART 1 – GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Surface preparation and substrate treatment.

2. Waterproofing membrane.
3. Auxiliary materials.
4. Protection course.
5. Drainage panels.
Section:
1. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete placement, curing, and

finishing.
2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for joint sealant materials and installation.
A. General: Provide a waterproofing system that prevents the passage of liquid water
under hydrostatic pressure and complies with physical requirements as
demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of
manufacturer’s current waterproofing formulations and system design.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including

manufacturer’s printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating the
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties.
B. Project Data - Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of
waterproofing, including details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing,
penetrations, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples – Submit representative samples of the following for approval:
1. Waterproof membrane material.

2. Protection Course Material.
3. Prefabricated Drainage Mat.
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

(CONCRETE AND CMU WALLS) 07140 - 1/9
4. Geo-textile and detailing sheet as required.
D. Installer Certificates – Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that

Installers comply with requirements under the “Quality Assurance” Article.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing

and approved by waterproofing manufacturer EPRO Services, Inc. for the
installation of the SYSTEM III Plus Waterproofing System.
B. Manufacturer Qualification: Obtain waterproofing materials and system components

from a single manufacturer EPRO Services, Inc.
C. Field Sample: Apply waterproofing system field sample to 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m.) of
deck or wall to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment,
thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship.
1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when field sample
will be prepared.
2. If Architect determines that field sample, does not meet requirements; reapply
waterproofing until field sample is approved.
3. Retain and maintain approved field sample during construction in an
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed waterproofing.
An undamaged field sample may become part of the completed Work.
D. Pre-installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to

application of the waterproofing system to assure proper substrate and installation
conditions, to include contractor, applicator, architect/engineer and special inspector
(if any).
E. Installation inspections by manufacturer representative or other qualified

independent third party may be required.
A. Deliver materials to Project site as specified by manufacturer labeled with

manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life,
and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store materials as specified by the waterproofing manufacturer in a clean, dry,

protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing
manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

A. Protect all adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking
to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to
other finish surfaces.
B. Perform work only when existing and forecast weather conditions are within
manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and application method used.
C. A minimum over excavations of 24 inches is required for spray application of

product. For areas with less than 24-inch clearance, the product may be applied by
hand using ECOLINE-R.
D. Ambient temperature shall be within manufacturer’s specifications. (Greater than

19ºF/-7ºC.)
E. All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing

through the waterproof membrane shall be positively secured in their proper
positions and appropriately protected prior to membrane application.
F. Waterproof membrane shall be installed before placement of reinforcing steel.

When not possible, all exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General
Contractor prior to membrane application.
1.8 WARRANTY
Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer

and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet
requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate
prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and
cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width.
1. Standard Warranty Period: 5-years after date of Substantial Completion or as
specified in terms agreed upon by manufacturer and applicator.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. SYSTEM III Plus; EPRO Services, Inc., Wichita, KS, 800-882-1896
1. Spray-Applied ECOLINE-S or roller-applied ECOLINE-R.

2. Protection ECOSHIELD-E10.
3. Drainage mat ECODRAIN-E or ECODRAIN-S6000.

A. Fluid applied waterproofing system – ECOLINE-S; a single course, high build,

polymer modified, asphalt emulsion. Waterborne and spray applied at ambient
temperatures. Applied to a thickness of 60 dry mils, unless specified otherwise.
Non-toxic and odorless. ECOLINE-R has similar properties with greater viscosity
and is roller or brush applied. Manufactured by EPRO Services, Inc.
B. Fluid applied waterproofing physical properties.
ECOLINE-S TYPICAL PROPERTIES (MEMBRANE ONLY)
TYPICAL UNCURED PROPERTIES

Specific Gravity ASTM D 244 1
Viscosity ASTM D 1200 > 25 centipoise
PH 12.3
Flammability ASTM D 3143 500° F
Color Brown to Black
Non-Toxic No Solvents
Shelf Life 6 months
TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES
Initial Cure
Final Cure *
Tensile Strength ASTM 412 32 psi
Elongation ASTM 412 4140%
Resistance To Decay ASTM E 154 Section 13 4% Perm Loss
Accelerated Aging ASTM G 23 No Effect
Moisture Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 0.026 g/sq. ft. /hr.
Hydrostatic Water Pressure ASTM D 751 26 psi
Perm Rating (US PERMS) ASTM E 96 (US Persm) 0.21
Methane Transmission Rate ASTM D 1434 0
Adhesion To Concrete & Masonry ASTM C 836 & ASTM C 704
11 lbf./inch
Hardness ASTM C 836 80
Crack Bridging ASTM C 836 No Cracking
Low Temp. Flexibility ASTM C 836-00 No Cracking @ -20° C
Resistance To Acids:
Acetic 30%
Sulfuric and Hydrochloric 13%
*See curings, protection and cleaning
sections for further explanation.
ECOLINE-R – TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES

TYPICAL UNCURED PROPERTIES

Specific Gravity ASTM D 244 1.034
Viscosity ASTM D 1200 9m-13m centipoise
PH 11.5
Flammability ASTM D 3143 270° F
Color Brown to Black
Non-Toxic No Solvents
Shelf Life 6 months
TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES
Initial Cure 10 minutes
Final Cure* 24 -48 hours
Resistance to Decay ASTM E 154 Section 13 9% Perm Loss

Moisture Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 .026 g/sq. ft. /hr.
Perm rating (US Perms) ASTM E 96 0.17
Methane transmission rate ASTM D 1434 0
Adhesion to Concrete & Masonry ASTM C 836 7 lbf./inch
Low Temp. Flexibility ASTM C 836-00 No Cracking at –20ºC
Resistance to Acids:
Acetic 30%
*See curings, protection and cleaning sections for further explanation.
A. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil reinforced modified asphalt sheet good with double-sided
adhesive.
B. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer’s polyester fabric.
C. Joint Detailing Sealant Mastic.
1. Ecoline-T, a high viscosity polymer modified water-based asphalt material.

2. Single component urethane sealants, as approved by manufacturer.
3. Back Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
D. Eprostop HDPL waterstop.
2.4 PROTECTION COURSE
A. ECOSHIELD-E physical properties.

Ecoshield-E Properties
8-mil 10-mil 15-mil
Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 876 g 1593 g. 1898 g.
Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 24.59 lbs. MD 34.6 lbs. MD 39.7 lbs. MD
Tear Resistance ASTM D 4533 3.48 lbs. 5.98 lbs. 8.74 lbs.
Low Temperature Impact ASTM D 1790 Resistant to -105°C Resistant to -105 C Resistant to -105 C
Water Vapor Trans. Rate ASTM E 96 .00711 g/ft/hr .00621 g./ft./hr. .00585 g./ft./hr.
Perm Rating ASTM E 96 0.0143 0.0133 0.0123
Chemical or Environmental Resistance Excellent Excellent Excellent
Methane Gas Modified ASTM D 1434 0 0 0

2.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL
A. For vertical structures of 20 feet or less.

1. ECODRAIN-E, a HDPE composite drainage panel, 3-diminsional, non-
biodegradable with a permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core.
2. ECODRAIN-E Specification Table.
Ecodrain-E Properties
CORE HDPE
Color Brown
Weight ASTM D 3776 1.90 oz/ft²
Compressive Strength ASTM D 1621 5,200 lbs/ft²
Thickness ASTM D 1777 0.31 in.
Filter Fabric (Polypropylene)

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 130 lbs.
Elongation ASTM D 4632 60%
Trapexoidal Tear ASTM D 4533 60 lbs.
Puncture Strength ASTM D 4833 40 lbs.
Apparent Operating Size ASTM D 4751 70 sieve size
Mullen Burst ASTM D 3786 140 psi
Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.7 sec.
Water Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 55 gpm/ft²
Weight Typical ASTM D 5261 4.0 oz/yd²
UV Resistance ASTM D 4355 70% (500 hrs.)
Composite System
Water Flow Rate (V) ASTM D 4716 5.1 gal/min/ft
Water Flow Rate (H) ASTM D 4716
Roll Size ASTM D 4716 6.0 ft x 65.5 ft, 8.0 ft x 65.5 ft
Roll Weight ASTM D 4716 60 lbs, 73 lbs
B. For vertical structures of over 20 feet.
1. ECODRAIN-S6000, a polystyrene composite drainage panel, 3-diminsional,

non-biodegradable with a permeable geo-textile heat bonded to drainage core.
2. ECODRAIN-S6000 Specification Table.
ECODRAIN-S6000 Physical Properties
Core Polypropylene
Color Black
Weight ASTM D 3776 2.85 oz/ft²
Compressive Strength ASTM D 1621 17,000 psf
Thickness ASTM 1777 0.40 in.
FILTER FABRIC
Elongation ASTM D 4632 50%
Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D 4533 65 lbs.
Punchture Strength ASTM D 4833 90 lbs.
Apparent Operating Size ASTM D 4751 80 sieve size
Permittivity ASTM D 4491 1.6 sec
Water Flow Rate ASTM D 4491 110 gpm/ft²
Weight Typical ASTM D 5261 6.0 oz/yd°
UV Resistance ASTM D 4355 70% (500 hrs.)
COMPOSITE SYSTEM
Water Flow Rate (V) ASTM D 4716 17 gal/min/ft
Water Flow Rate (H) ASTM D 4716 2.8 gal/min/ft.
Roll Size ASTM D 4716 6.0 ft. x 50 ft.
Roll Weight ASTM D 4716 65 lbs.

*Note: These depths are approximate guidelines and appropriate drainage panel determination
may require consultation with soils engineer to determine soil type, soil compaction and seismic
activity.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will
be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over
spray affecting other construction.
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration
of waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with ECOLINE-T, hydraulic cement, or rapid-
set grout.
3.3 PREPARATIONS AND TREATMENT AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations, at penetrations through

waterproofing material, and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to
ASTM C 898 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Apply two coats ECOLINE-R (30-mil wet) and embed polyester reinforcing strip in
preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded polyester reinforcing strip
ensuring its complete saturation and covering.
1. Terminations should be treated 3-inches up vertical and 3-inches on horizontal.

2. Penetrations should be treated in a 3-inch radius around penetration and 3
inches onto penetrating object.
3.4 PREPARATIONS AND TREATMENT OF JOINTS AND CRACKS
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898
and waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.

B. Vertical - Apply two coats of ECOLINE-R (30-mil wet) waterproofing, 3-inches on

each side of joint and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat and apply a
second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring to complete saturation
and covering.
3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Set up spray equipment according to manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Mix materials according to manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative

or approved 3rd party inspector.
D. Apply waterproofing, according to manufacturer’s recommendations, by spray

(ECOLINE-S) or roller (ECOLINE-R).
E. Apply one spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three roller coats of ECOLINE-R

waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an
average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm).
F. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights

indicated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and details.
G. Verify film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).
3.6 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course with minimum 6” overlapped seams over

nominally cured membrane no later than recommended by manufacturer and before
starting subsequent construction operations.
B. Secure ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course seams with ECOTAPE and attach with
adhesive strips, shot pins or as recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure drainage panels to substrate according to manufacturer’s written

instructions. Use adhesives, adhesive strips and/or termination bars fastened with
shot pins or as recommended by manufacturer. Overlap edges of dimpled core and
ends of geo-textile a minimum of 6” to maintain continuity. Protect installed panels
during subsequent construction.
A. Membrane may be checked for coverage with a lightly oiled, needle nose depth
gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area, every 500 square feet.
Record the minimum reading. Mark the test area for repair.

B. Test areas are to be patched over with ECOLINE-S or R to a 60-mil minimum dry
thickness, extending a minimum of one inch (1”) beyond the test perimeter.
3.9 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer’s recommendations. It should be

noted normal curing time is 24 to 48 hours to achieve a permanent water barrier.
However, in some conditions such as a saturated substrate, extremely cold
conditions and/or high humidity, the full adhesion of the membrane may be delayed.
The length of delay may be subject the membrane thickness and severity of
conditions.
B. Take care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and
curing.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing, fabric reinforced.
2. Molded-sheet drainage panels.
3. Insulation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of
waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for
substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners,
tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.
D. Special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing

manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.
1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate

condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather
conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing
and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and

substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply
waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 1/5

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or
that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of

sheet waterproofing material.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for

substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade
or low viscosity.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified

coating.
F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and

thickness as sheet waterproofing.
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled
at 9-inch centers.
2.2 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage."
B. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite

subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent
opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film
bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet
drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft..

2.3 INSULATION
A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578,

square edged.
1. Type VII, 60-psi minimum compressive strength.
B. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board

insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi or Type VI, 40-psi minimum
compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having
grooved drainage channels faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.
C. Geotextile-Faced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board

insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi minimum compressive
strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved
drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter
fabric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and
overspray affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and
other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids.
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt
from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
F. Bridge and cover isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall and
deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second
sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.
G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to
ASTM D 6135.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and
penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to
ASTM D 6135.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap
and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point of decks to ensure
that side laps shed water.
E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and
contraction joints.
F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings

or ending in reglets with mastic.
G. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with
requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing
extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.
I. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.
J. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with
requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall
or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or
mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of
geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels
during subsequent construction.
1. For vertical applications, install board insulation before installing drainage

panels.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4
inch of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to

C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and

SECTION 07123 – COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING (CONCRETE DECK AND

BETWEEN SLABS)
PART 1 – GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Surface preparation and substrate treatment.

2. Waterproofing membrane.
3. Sheet flashing and accessories.
4. Protection course.
Section:
1. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete placement, curing, and

finishing
2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for joint sealant materials and installation.
A. General: Provide a waterproofing system that prevents the passage of liquid water
under hydrostatic pressure and complies with physical requirements as
demonstrated by testing performed by an independent testing agency of
manufacturer’s current waterproofing formulations and system design.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including

manufacturer’s printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating the
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties.
B. Project Data - Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of

waterproofing, including details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashing,
penetrations, and other termination conditions.
C. Samples – Submit representative samples of the following for approval:
1. Waterproof membrane material.

2. Protection Course Material.
3. Geo-textile and detailing sheet as required.
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07123 - 1/8

(CONCRETE DECK AND BETWEEN SLABS)
D. Installer Certificates – Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that

Installers comply with requirements under the “Quality Assurance” Article.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing

and approved by waterproofing manufacturer EPRO Services, L. C. for the
installation of the SYSTEM III Plus Waterproofing System.
B. Manufacturer Qualification: Obtain waterproofing materials and system components

from a single manufacturer EPRO Services, L. C.
C. Field Sample: Apply waterproofing system field sample to 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m.) of
deck or wall to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment,
thickness, texture, and standard of workmanship.
1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when field sample
will be prepared.
2. If Architect determines that field sample, does not meet requirements; reapply
waterproofing until field sample is approved.
3. Retain and maintain approved field sample during construction in an
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed waterproofing.
An undamaged field sample may become part of the completed Work.
D. Pre-installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to

application of the waterproofing system to assure proper substrate and installation
conditions, to include contractor, applicator, architect/engineer and special inspector
(if any).
A. Deliver materials to Project site as specified by manufacturer labeled with

manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life,
and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store materials as specified by the waterproofing manufacturer in a clean, dry,

protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing
manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.
A. Protect all adjacent areas not to be waterproofed. Where necessary, apply masking
to prevent staining of surfaces to remain exposed wherever membrane abuts to
other finish surfaces.
B. Perform work only when existing and for-cast weather conditions are within
manufacturer’s recommendations for the material and application method used.

C. Minimum clearance of 24 inches is required for application of product. For areas

with less than 24-inch clearance, the product may be applied by hand using
ECOLINE-R.
D. Ambient temperature shall be within manufacturer’s specifications. (Greater than

+19ºF/-7ºC.)
E. All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing

through the waterproof membrane shall be positively secured in their proper
positions and appropriately protected prior to membrane application.
F. Waterproof membrane shall be installed before placement of reinforcing steel.

When not possible, all exposed reinforcing steel shall be masked by General
Contractor prior to membrane application.
1.8 WARRANTY
Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing manufacturer

and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing that does not meet
requirements or that does not remain watertight within the specified warranty period.
Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate
prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and
cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width.
1. Warranty Period: 3 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. SYSTEM III Plus; EPRO Services, Inc., Wichita, KS, 800-882-1896
1. Spray-Applied ECOLINE-S or roller-applied ECOLINE-R.

2. Protection ECOSHIELD-E10 or E-15 or ECOSHIELD-P.
A. Fluid applied waterproofing system – ECOLINE-S: a single course, high build,

polymer modified, asphalt emulsion. Waterborne and spray applied at ambient
temperatures. A nominal thickness of 80 dry mils (60 mil minimum), unless
specified otherwise. Non-toxic and odorless. ECOLINE-R has similar properties
with greater viscosity and is roller or brush applied. Manufactured by EPRO
Services, Inc.
B. Fluid applied waterproofing physical properties.

ECOLINE-S – TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES (MEMBRANE ONLY)

Resistance to Decay ASTM E 154 Section 13 4% Perm Loss
Perm rating ASTM E 96 (US Perms) 0.21
Adhesion to Concrete & Masonry ASTM C 836 & ASTM C 704 11 lbf./inch

Acetic 30%
Temperature Effect:
Stable 248ºF
Flexible 13ºF
ECOLINE-R – TYPICAL CURED PROPERTIES

Resistance to Decay ASTM E 154 9% Perm Loss
Section 13
Perm rating (US Perms) ASTM E 96 0.17
Adhesion to Concrete & Masonry ASTM C 836 7 lbf./inch
Acetic 30%
Temperature Effect:
Stable 248ºF
Flexible 13ºF
A. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil reinforced modified asphalt sheet good with double-sided
adhesive.
B. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer’s recommended polypropylene and polyester fabric.

C. Joint Detailing Sealant Mastic: ECOLINE-T, a high viscosity polymer modified water
based asphalt material.
1. Back Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.
2.4 PROTECTION COURSE
A. Protection Course Usage
1. On vertical surfaces, use ECOSHIELD-E10 protection course or other

protection as approved by the manufacturer.
2. On horizontal surfaces, use ECOSHIELD-E10 or ECOSHIELD-P.
B. ECOSHIELD-E physical properties.
Ecoshield-E Properties
8-mil 10-mil 15-mil
Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 876 g 1593 g. 1898 g.
Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 24.59 lbs. MD 34.6 lbs. MD 39.7 lbs. MD
Tear Resistance ASTM D 4533 3.48 lbs. 5.98 lbs. 8.74 lbs.
Low Temperature Impact ASTM D 1790 Resistant to -105°C Resistant to -105 C Resistant to -105 C
Water Vapor Trans. Rate ASTM E 96 .00711 g/ft/hr .00621 g./ft./hr. .00585 g./ft./hr.
Perm Rating ASTM E 96 0.0143 0.0133 0.0123
Chemical or Environmental Resistance Excellent Excellent Excellent
Methane Gas Modified ASTM D 1434 0 0 0
C. ECOSHIELD-P physical properties.

Grab Tensile Elongation ASTM D 4632 50%
Puncture ASTM D 4833 70 lbs.
UV Resistance ASTM D 4355 70% (after 150 hrs. exposure)
Light Reflectance ASTM E 97 70%
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing systems will
be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or over
spray affecting other construction.
C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration
of waterproofing fluids.
D. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
contaminants from concrete.
E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
grout joints, tie holes, and other voids with ECOLINE-T, hydraulic cement, or rapid-
set grout.
3.3 PREPARATION AND TREATMENT AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at 90-degree terminations, at penetrations

through waterproofing material, and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves
according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Apply two coats of ECOLINE-T (30 mil each) and embed a joint reinforcing strip in
preparation coat and apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip
ensuring its complete saturation and covering.
1. Terminations should be treated 6 inches on each side for both vertical and
horizontal.
2. Penetrations should be treated in a 6inch radius around penetration and 3
inches onto penetrating object.
3.4 PREPARATIONS AND TREATMENT OF JOINTS AND CRACKS
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898
and waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 prior to coating surfaces.
B. Less than 1/16 in. - Apply two coats of ECOLINE-T waterproofing, 6 inches on each
side of joint or crack and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat and
apply a second coat over embedded joint reinforcing strip ensuring to complete
saturation and covering.
C. Greater then 1/16 in. – Rout joint or crack, install backer-rod and sealant to bring
flush to surface. Apply a coat of ECOLINE-T or R to joint or crack, 6 in. on each
side, embed a joint reinforcement strip and apply a second coat, where indicated or
required according to waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Set up spray equipment according to manufacturer’s instructions if spray-applying

material.
B. Mix materials according to manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative.
D. Apply waterproofing, according to manufacturer’s recommendations, by spray

(ECOLINE-S) or roller (ECOLINE-R).
E. Apply a base spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three 27 mil (wet) coats of ECOLINE-R,
to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film
thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.25
mm) at any point.
F. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights

indicated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and details.
G. Lay 3’ wide, polyester on and into the base coat of the membrane overlapping it
3”,(a light tack coat of ECOLINE-R or ECOLINE-S may be used around the edges of
the polyester to temporarily hold it in place).
H. Apply a second spray coat of ECOLINE-S or three 27-mil (wet) coats of ECOLINE-R
to obtain a composite reinforced membrane with average dry film thickness of 120
mils and a nominal thickness of 100 mils.
I. Verify film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq./ft. (9.3 sq./m).
3.6 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install ECOSHIELD-E15 protection course with overlapped seams over nominally

cured membrane no later than recommended by manufacturer and before starting
subsequent construction operations.
B. Secure ECOSHIELD-E15 protection course seams with ECOSHIELD Tape and

attach to adhesive strips (sheet flashing that does not penetrate waterproofing) as
A. Membrane may be checked for coverage with a lightly oiled, needle nose depth
gauge, taking four (4) readings over a one square inch area, every 500 square feet.
Record the minimum reading. Mark the test area for repair.
B. Test areas are to be patched over with ECOLINE-S to an 80-mil minimum dry
thickness, extending a minimum of one-inch (1”) beyond the test perimeter.
3.8 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer’s recommendations. It should be

noted normal curing time is 24 to 48 hours to achieve a permanent water barrier.
However, in some conditions such as a saturated substrate, extremely cold
temperatures and/or high humidity, the full adhesion of the membrane may be
delayed. The length of the delay is subject to the membrane and severity of those
conditions.

B. Take care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages, curing
and subsequent construction.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and

SECTION 06642 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Glass fiber reinforced plastic replication for exterior roof wood cornice.
B. Field painting as specified in Section 09911.
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Installed fiberglass fabrications and fastening systems shall meet applicable building
code requirements and withstand:
1. 70 mph.
2. 10 lbs/sq/inch live load with deflection limited to 1/360 of span.
3. Self supporting dead load with deflection limited to 1/360 of span.
4. 10 psf snow load.
B. Design loads shall not be cumulative.
C. Installed products shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative wind pressure
without structural failure, cracking, permanent distortion or displacement.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Credit MR 5.1: Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally
manufactured material.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of cornice, large-scale details, finishes, joint treatment,
attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and
elevations.
1. Include sequence of erection.
C. Samples: 12 inch long full-size sample of GFRP cornice showing finish, color and
texture.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum of 10 years experience in products typical of work

required for this Project.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (GFRP) 06642 - 1/4

A. Transport and handle units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses or damage.
1. Type “E” random chopped fibers.
B. Store units level on a clean and dry surface in an area protected from weather, soil
contact and damage, preferably in an upright position.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GFRP FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GFRP cornice by one of

the following:
1. Edon Corporation; Horsham, PA.
2. Fibertech Inc.; Pendleton, SC.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glass Cloth, Matt and “Chop”: Products of PPG-Owens Corning or equal.
B. Polyester Resins: Class A, flame retardant, promoted isophythalic polyester resin

designed for use in hand lay-up and spray-up processes.
1. Resin is specifically formulated for use in applications that require an ASTM E-
84, Class 1 flame spread rating, without the use of fillers or antimony trioxide.
a. Flame Spread; ASTM E-84: Less than 25 unfilled.
b. Smoke Density: Under 450.
2. Gel Coat: UV inhibited, NPG-ISO polyester coat, 18-22 mils thick.
C. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester:

1. Flexural strength; ASTM D-790: 15,000 – 20,000 psi.
2. Tensile strength; ASTM D-638; 10,000 – 20,000 psi.
3. Compressive strength; ASTM D-695: 15,000 – 20,000 psi.
4. Barcol hardener: 45-55.
5. Glass content: 25 – 30%.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal reinforcement anchorage clops, brackets, fasteners: Stainless steel.

1. Components: As indicated in shop drawings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Cornice: Fiberglass reinforced polyester components shall be manufactured using the

specified resins, reinforced with chopped glass fibers.
1. Exposed surface finish: Colored gel-coat with UV inhibitor.
2. Concealed surface finish: Prime coat.

B. Minimum Fiberglass Thickness: 3/16 inch.
C. Joints in components shall be matched at the factory and numbered for field
installation. Components shall be fabricated to minimize exposed fasteners.
D. Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site.

Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
1. Shop fabricate cornice in lengths to provide pieces that are uninterrupted by

joints. Machine edges of cornice units to provide joint profiles indicated.
E. Fabrication Tolerances:
1. Part Location: +/- 1/16 inch.
2. Length: +/- 1/8 inch.
3. Gel Coat Thickness: =/- 2.5 mils.
2.5 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish cornice at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and
polishing until after installation.
B. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of cornice.
C. Gel Coat:
1. Thickness: .015 inches to 0.25 inches.
2. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
3. Sheen: Gloss, 80-100 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Prior to manufacturing: Check dimensions and conditions not shown on Drawings for
inclusion by manufacturer’s shop drawings.
B. Prior to installation: Check job site dimensions. Contact Architect and Construction
Manager if there are any discrepancies between design and field dimensions. Do not
proceed until discrepancies are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Lift units carefully and without damage with suitable devices at points indicated by
manufacturer.
B. Install cornice level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 96 inches.

C. Fasten units with screws (through the face of from the back), bolting or welding as
shown on shop drawings.
1. Provide temporary supports to maintain units in place.
D. Cement butt joints together with approved mastic.
3.3 REPAIRS
A. Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy of unit and appearance are not
impaired, as approved by Architect and Construction Manager.
B. Blend and mix patching materials and repair cured patches to match color, texture and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.
C. Remove and replace damaged units when repairs do not comply with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled units with detergent and water using soft brushes and sponges. Rinse
with clean water. Prevent damage to surfaces and adjacent materials.

SECTION 06614 - COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. This Section includes composite surfacing for the following applications:

1. Bathroom vanities.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Blocking.
B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Plywood substrate.
C. Section 07920 - Joint Sealers: Joint sealant and backing materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 Section “Submittal Requirements.
B. Product Data : Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,

including:
1. Product description.
2. Fabrication instructions and recommendations.
3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate dimensions, edge configurations, cutouts, and relationship to
adjacent construction.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
D. Samples:
1. For each type of product indicated.
a. Submit minimum 4 by 4 inch (101 by 101 mm) sample in
specified gloss.
b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of
inconspicuous seam.
c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.
2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for Work.
E. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Compliance Certificate: Signed by manufacturer, indicating compliance
with specified performance requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Cleaning instructions, scratch removal procedures, and

materials harmful to countertops.
G. LEED Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01352 -

LEED Requirements:
1. Credit MR 4.1, Recycled Content: 10 percent (post-consumer plus 1/2
COMPOSITE COUNTERTOPS 06614- 1/5

pre-consumer.)
2. Credit MR 5.1, Regional Materials: 10 percent manufactured
regionally.
3. Credit EQ 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants.
4. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating[ chemical composition and] VOC
content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated
according to
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 97 - Test Method for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of

Dimensional Stone.
B. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch (50-mm) Cube Specimens).
C. ASTM C 293 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete

(Using Simple Beam with Center-Point Loading).
D. ASTM C 642 - Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in
Hardened Concrete.
E. ASTM C 666 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid

Freezing and Thawing (Superseded).
F. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient
of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal
Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.
G. ASTM C 1260 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of

Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method).
H. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
A. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation

techniques and application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect.
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and
sheen are approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
B. Installer: Trained and approved by simulated stone manufacturer.
A. Do not deliver components to project site until products are ready for
installation.
B. Store components indoors prior to installation.

C. Handle materials to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining

following installation for duration of project.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)

within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not
install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's
absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: IceStone, 63 Flushing Avenue, Unit 283,

Bldg. 12, Brooklyn, NY 11205. Telephone: (718) 624-4900. Fax: (718) 624-
4002. Web: www.icestone.biz. E-mail: info@icestone.biz.
2.2 MATERIAL, ST-3
A. Approved Product: “IceStone.”

1. Composition: 100 percent recycled glass in a cement matrix.
2. Physical Performance Characteristics:
a. Compressive Strength: 13,000 psi (914 Km/cm), in accordance
with ASTM C 109.
b. Flexural Strength: 890 psi (63 Km/cm), in accordance with ASTM
C 293.
c. Specific Gravity: 2.31, in accordance with ASTM C 97.
d. Porosity/Absorption: 0.18 percent, unsealed, in accordance with
ASTM C 642.
e. Chemical Durability: 0.05 percent expansion, in accordance with
ASTM C 1260 for ASR Reactivity.
f. Freeze Thaw: 0.49 percent expansion, 300 cycles, in
accordance with ASTM C666.
g. Fire Rating: Class 1 (A), in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame
spread index: 0. Fuel contribution: 0. Smoke density index: 0.
h. Coefficient of Static Friction: 0.78 (dry), in accordance with
ASTM C 1028.
3. Weight and Size:
a. Weight: 16.3 pounds per square foot at 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)
thick.
b. Maximum Slab Size: 52-1/2 inches (1334 mm) wide, 96 inches
(2438 mm) long and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick.
c. Finished Thickness: 1-1/4 inch (31 mm).
4. Edge Detail:
a. Half bullnose.
5. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
6. Surface Finish:
a. Polished, high-gloss.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant: Low-VOC or no-VOC mildew-resistant sealant, FDA-compliant,

NSF 51-compliant for food contact, to match durable surface.
1. Product: As recommended by durable surface manufacturer.
B. Available Sealer Manufacturers and Products:

1. Penetrating Sealer by Aquamix.
2. National Look Sealer by Buddy Rhodes.
3. Satin Sealer by Buddy Rhodes.
2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate using standard stone cutting equipment in

accordance with manufacturer's fabrication and installation guidelines.
1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes
indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and
manufacturer's printed instructions.
2. Form joints between components without conspicuous joints.
3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as
indicated on Drawings.
4. Rout and finish component edges with minimum radius of 1/8 (3 mm).
a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template.
b. Shape inside corner radius to minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to
relieve corner stress.
c. Smooth edges.
d. Repair or replace defective and inaccurate work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for

achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including but not

limited to the following:
1. Four-Sided Perimeter Support: Provide a four-sided perimeter frame
for countertops, and Icestone will not require a substrate. Provide
front-to-back support every 36 inches (914 mm), in addition to the
strong perimeter support, for spans within cabinets.

B. Clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's care and

maintenance instructions including the following:
1. Cleaner: Clean spills promptly. Longer exposure to spills may result
in a stain.
2. Manufacturer Recommended Cleaner:
a.IceStone recommends TileLab OneStep Cleaner & Resealer, Seventh
Generation All Purpose Cleaner, Simple Green Stone Cleaner. Pledge
Multipurpose Pads, clean and offer a light layer of wax protection.
Generally low Ph cleaners work best.
3. Polish: Manufacturer recommended; IceStone recommends Simple
Green Stone Polish, and Cheng's Concrete Countertop Wax used
sparingly.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial

Completion, as directed by Architect.

SECTION 06410 – ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Check Out Desk
2. Information Desks
3. Assorted Freestanding and Wall Mounted Casework Units
4. End Panels and Canopy Tops for Metal Shelving System
5. All other casework items indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for a
complete assembly.
B. Co-ordinate with the work of Division 16 for the installation of power and data.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Comply with the requirements of the following organizations:

1. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards (AWI)
2. Builder's Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA)
3. American Plywood Association (APA)
4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
5. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature for the following:

1. Product description showing construction, components, dimensions, features,
and finishes.
2. Installation instructions showing rough-in requirements, construction details, and
recommended procedures.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing plans, elevations, sections, and details
indicating all materials and dimensions.
1. Show layout pattern, fabrication details and attachment methods.
2. Indicate juncture with adjacent materials.
3. Indicate all fixtures and equipment to be incorporated.
D. Samples: Submit samples of material, color, and finish. Submit additional samples
until all products are approved.
1. Stained and varnished door and drawer fronts for veneers and solid stock, actual
size.
2. 12" x 12" sample of stained and varnished drawer box and cabinet interior.
3. 12" x 12" sample of countertop material showing leading edge and back splash.
4. An actual example of each accessory or items of hardware.
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06410 - 1/5

A. Standards Precedence: In case of conflict with published industry stan-

dards/specifications and the projection specifications, the one having the more strin-
gent requirements shall govern.
B. Organizations and Standards:

1. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium Grade Standards.
C. Qualifications
1. The cabinetmaker shall be certified by the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
2. The contractor shall have demonstrated experience and the ability to furnish
adequate supervision, equipment and production capacity. The firm shall be a
member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
3. The field superintendent shall have demonstrated experience producing the
work.
4. The installer shall be a qualified journeyman. Apprentices may work under the
direction of a journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to initiating the work, convene a meeting with the
general contractor, manufacturer, installer, owner's representative, and architect in
attendance.
A. Furnish products in accordance with Section 01600 – Product Requirements.
B. All materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer’s sealed packages with
labels intact and seals unbroken.
1. Do not deliver custom cabinets to building until "wet work" such as concrete,
plaster and gypsum wallboard work has been completed and cured.
C. Store materials above ground and in original protective packages. Store in a dry
place with adequate air circulation. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions to pre-
vent damage due to moisture, temperature, and contaminants.
D. Handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
A. Provide installation conditions in accordance with the manufacturer's recommenda-

tions.
B. The work area shall be enclosed, provide properly regulated heat and ventilation.
1. Acceptable temperature range is 50°F to 90°F.
2. Maximum humidity is 80%.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Dimension Lumber; Standing and Running Trim for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: AWI Premium Grade except as amended by more stringent requirements
herein.
2. Species: Maple to match existing woodwork.
B. Miscellaneous Lumber for Concealed Applications:

1. AWI Grade III or better; species Contractor's option, subject to compliance with
applicable requirements for fire resistance where treated applications are re-
quired.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood:
1. Grade: AWI Premium Grade except as amended by more stringent require-
ments herein
2. Core: Veneer
3. Face Species: Maple
4. Adhesive: As recommended for application
5. Components:
a. Door and Drawer Fronts: Maple
b. Drawer Construction: Maple
c. Ends and Backs: Maple
2.03 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. See Section 09654 Linoleum Floor Coverings & Desk Tops.
2.04 HARDWARE
A. Drawer slides shall be manufactured by Accuride. The number and style shall be
confirmed by the cabinetmaker.
1. Drawers 24" or less in width: model number 7437.
2. Drawers 24" to 42" in width: model number 3640.
B. Drawer pulls:
1. Manufacturer: Amerock
2. Model: #BP865
3. Finish: oil rubbed bronze
D. Cabinet Locks at Circulation Desk:

1. Manufacturer: Schlage
2. Model: 46-002
3. Finish: 613
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Bronze Grommets:

1. Manufacturer: Mockett
2. Model: 2-1/2” MM Series
3. Finish: Antique Bronze
B. Recessed Shelf Standard:

1. Manufacturer: K & V
2. Model: #255
3. Finish: Brown
C. Shelf Supports:
1. Manufacturer: K & V
2. Model: #256
3. Finish: Brown
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinetry in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium.
B. Shop-assemble cabinetry for delivery to the site in easily handled units and sized to
pass through existing openings.
C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece
for full length only.
D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
E. Provide cutouts for fixtures and fittings. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.
2.07 FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. Use wood filler that
matches surrounding surfaces and that is recommended for applied finishes.
C. Finish work in the factory in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium.
1. AWI Finish System: TR-6
a. 1 coat transparent stain to match Architect’s sample
b. 3 coats polyurethane
c. semi-gloss sheen
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect the work of other trades and the installation
conditions. Confirm that the conditions meet the installation requirements. Notify the
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the Work.
1. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

2. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are
placed and ready to receive this work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions have been resolved. Be-
ginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prior to starting work, protect the surrounding areas and surfaces.
B. Confirm that sufficient materials are stored on site to complete the space.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Quality Standards, Premium.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
F. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter
tops.
G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
H. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs
of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
A. During the execution of the work keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly con-
dition. At the end of each working day, remove all refuse and dispose of it properly.
B. Upon completion of this portion of the work. Adjust moving or operating parts to
function smoothly and correctly. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fit-
tings, and fixtures.
C. Repair or replace or otherwise restore to new condition all items damaged by work of
this section.

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Interior standing and running trim.

2. Interior frames and jambs.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-
scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
B. Samples:
1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut,
finished on one side and one edge.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the

bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive
contains no urea formaldehyde.
D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification

Program certificates .
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards."
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1/4

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural

woodwork by one of the following:
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple.
B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
C. Wood Products:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with
adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with

performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use
Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not
bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.
B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant

chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25
or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made from

softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of
panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index
of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-
retardant-treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project

site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom .

2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of
varnish.
B. Interior Standing and Running Trim:
1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered
construction. Do not glue for width.
2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of
installation require field assembly.
C. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from fire-retardant

particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed
surfaces and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252.
1. Fire Rating: 20 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for
complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent
finish is indicated.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-
length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent
possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if
any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish
same as wood base if finished.

SECTION 06401 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Exterior frames and jambs.
2. Exterior ornamental work.
3. Shop priming exterior woodwork.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For wood-preservative-treated materials and finishes indicated.
B. Samples: For lumber for exterior wood stain finish , for each finish system and color,
with one-half of exposed surface finished.
C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification

Program certificates .
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exterior architectural

woodwork by one of the following:
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Nonpressure Process: Comply with AWPA N1 using the

following preservative for woodwork items indicated to receive water-repellent
preservative treatment:
1. Water-Repellent Preservative/Insecticide: Formulation containing 3-iodo-2-
propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC) as its active ingredient, combined with an
insecticide containing chlorpyrifos as its active ingredient, both complying with
AWPA P8.
B. Nails: stainless steel.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06401 - 1/3

C. Screws: stainless steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: 9 to 15 percent.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to

maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components
only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site,
provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C. Woodwork for Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Wood Species: Maple.
D. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
E. Shop Priming: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer
specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in
contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
F. Shop Finishing: Entire finish of exterior architectural woodwork is specified in this

Section. To greatest extent possible, finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop.
Defer only final touchup and cleaning until after installation.
1. Grade: Premium .
2. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in
contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
3. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.
4. Sheen: Semigloss 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated
work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and
backpriming.

B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for
type of woodwork involved.
C. Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and
blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork.
F. Install trim with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from
maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints
and stagger in adjacent and related members.
G. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or
before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where
exposed.
H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
I. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied

finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

SECTION 06400 – INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Repair of damaged woodwork
2. Refinishing interior woodwork.
3. Staining and lacquering woodwork
4. Replacing deteriorated woodwork
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This procedure provides supplemental guidelines to be used when specifying any

type of repair to damaged woodwork. Guidelines for materials, fabrication and gen-
eral guidelines for installation are included.
B. Specifications for the repair of woodwork shall include all work, materials and equip-
ment required to:
1. Carefully remove required woodwork and securely reinstall it to its original place
and position. Use experienced riggers for the removal and transportation of
woodwork.
2. Repair woodwork to conservator quality standards.
3. Document work done through photography.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.
A. Coordinate the work in this specification with appropriate work of other specifications
to ensure proper scheduling for fabrication and installation of the work specified
herein.
B. Verify all dimensions in the field before fabrication of all architectural woodwork to
assure proper fit.
INTERIOR WOODWORK REFINISHING Page 1/19

C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for interior woodwork refinishing are specified in

D. Unit Prices: Interior woodwork refinishing to be provided under unit prices are
1.6 SUBMITTALS
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Samples for verification, before erecting the mockup, of the following:
D. Each type of refinished and repaired woodwork in the form of samples 2 linear feet
long.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
F. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection
of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe
in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used
for each phase of the restoration work.
G. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of
restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use
on other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their
effectiveness for this Project.
H. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding

materials on building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the
materials, methods, and equipment to be used.
I. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for refinishing and
repair work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on
other comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness
for this Project.

A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced woodwork refinishing and repair firm

that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: 1 for
refinishing work and 1 for repair work.
C. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced

full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that woodwork refinishing and
repair are in progress.
D. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
E. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect.
F. Woodwork Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of material
indicated to be patched, refinished, or repaired. Erect sample panels of an existing
woodwork, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of materials and
workmanship.
G. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse
reactions, unless cleaners and methods are known to have a deleterious effect.Notify
Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will be prepared.
I. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of woodwork

refinishing and repair.
J. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.
K. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for woodwork refinishing and repair from a
single source for each type of material.
A. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WOODWORK
A. MATERIALS
1. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried lumber with an average moisture

content range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative
humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture
content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the above
range.
2. Replacement Wood: Match species, grade, grain pattern, and other special
characteristics of woodwork.
3. Provide wood blocking, anchorages and fasteners for above:
a. Screws:
1) Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and as rec-
ommended by RHPO.
2) For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal

framing manufacturer.
b. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use and as rec-
ommended by RHPO.
c. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for
secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors
and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for cor-
rosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for
drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
4. Fire-Retardant Materials:
a. Fire-retardant treated lumber shall be lumber and plywood with fire-retardant

chemicals to comply with ASTM C20 and C27, respectively; provide materials
which are pressure impregnated with fire retardant chemicals and comply
with the following requirements.
1) Fire-Retardant Chemicals: Use chemicals of type which do not bleed

through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in
solution to distinguish treated lumber from untreated lumber.
a) Low Hygroscopic Type: Halogen anD sulfate-free solution intended

for interior applications not exposed to relative humidity more than
95%; with treated material having an equilibrium moisture content of
not over 28% per ASTM D3201 at 92 ñ 2% relative humidity.

2) Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products

which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a) "Dricon" (Koppers Co., Inc.).
b) "Flameproof LHC" (Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of America, Inc.).
c) "Protex" (Hoover Universal, Wood Preserving Division).
b. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials which are identical to

those tested per ASTM methods and are marked and listed for fire perform-
ance characteristics by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and comply
with the following requirements:
1) Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does
not affect listed fire performance characteristics, using a woodworking
plant certified by testing and inspection agency.
2) Marking: Identify treated lumber with separable paper classification mark-

ing of inspecting and testing agency, unless otherwise indicated.
3) Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding values shown below,

tested per ASTM E84 for 30 minutes with no evidence of significant com-
bustion.
a) Flame Spread: 25.
b) Smoke Developed: 50.
4) Kiln-dry woodwork after treatment to levels required for non-fire-retardant

woodwork
5) materials. Maintain moisture content required by kiln drying, before and
after treatment.
6) Discard treated lumber that does not comply with requirements of refer-
enced woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, dis-
colored, or otherwise damaged or defective lumber.
B. FABRICATION
1. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality stan-

dard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions ex-
isting during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
2. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details provided and approved

by RHPO.
3. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing and hardware application, be-

fore shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble compo-

nents only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fit-
ting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
4. Wood Surrounds and Trim: Fabricate to profiles required in single lengths for
jamb and head conditions. Provisions for securing through face of trim shall in-
clude plugs to match surface.
5. Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appli-

ances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings ac-
curately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized
and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in counter-
tops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating.
6. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be

fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and
shop drawing details as required for accurate fit.
a. Where the sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would delay

the project, continue with fabrication (without field measurements) and pro-
vide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming
of woodwork for accurate fit.
7. Preservative Treatment by Non-Pressure Method: Comply with requirements of

referenced woodworking standard for nonpressure treatment of woodwork with
nonaqueous water repellent solution, except as indicated. Treat units of wood-
work after cutting, machining, sanding, gluing and assembling has been com-
pleted to the greatest extent possible. Coat surfaces cut after treatment with
heavy brush coating of same preservative.
2.2 PRODUCTS CLEANING AND REFINISHING
A. MATERIALS
1. Wood Stain
2. Floor Varnish
3. Shellac
4. Alcohol
5. Paste Wax - Proprietary or job-mixed compound containing carnauba, beeswax,

cadelilla, or ceresin mixed with turpentine.
6. Floor Wax
7. Wood Bleach: Solution of sodium perborate, hydrogen peroxide or proprietary

mixture suitable for oak.
8. Wood Filler

9. Steel Wool
10. Sandpaper: Extra Fine Grit.
B. PRODUCTS REFINISHING INTERIOR WOOD
1. MANUFACTURERS
a. Bonakemi USA, Inc.

14805 East Moncrieff Place
Aurora, CO8001
1800/872-5515 or 303/371-1411
b. Butcher Polish Company

120 Bartlett Street
Marlborough, MA
617/481-5700
c. 3M Consumer Products Group

Box 33053
St. Paul, MN 55133
3053612/737-6501 or 800/364-3577
d. The Sherwin Williams Co.

101 Prospect Ave. NW
Cleveland, OH 44101
216/566-2000
e. Specialty Environmental Technologies, Inc.

4520 Glenmeade Lane
Auburn Hills, MI 48326
810/340-0400
C. MATERIALS
1. NOTE: Chemical products are sometimes sold under a common name. This
usually means that the substance is not as pure as the same chemical sold un-
der its chemical name. The grade of purity of common name substances, how-
ever, is usually adequate for stain removal work, and these products should be
purchased when available, as they may be less expensive.
2. Commercial Paint and Varnish Remover such as "Citristrip" (Specialties Envi-

ronmental Technologies, Inc.), "Safest Stripper" (3M), or approved equal
3. Mineral Spirits:
a. A petroleum distillate that is used especially as paint or varnish thinner.
b. Other chemical or common names include Benzine* (not Benzene); Naph-

tha*; Petroleum spirits*; Solvent naphtha*.

c. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE.
d. Safety Precautions:
1) AVOID REPEATED OR PROLONGED SKIN CONTACT.
2) ALWAYS wear rubber gloves when handling mineral spirits.
3) If any chemical is splashed onto the skin, wash immediately with soap
and water.
OR-
4. Turpentine:
a. Typically used as a solvent and thinner.

b. Potential Hazards: TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE.
c. Safety Precautions:
1) Work in a well ventilated area.
2) Observe safety rules as turpentine is flammable, and the fumes can trip
an ionization smoke detection system.
3) Store soiled cloths in a metal safety container to guard against spontane-
ous combustion.
-OR-
5. Solvent Wax Remover such as "Woodline Renovator" (Bonakemi USA, Inc.), or
approved equal.
6. Wood filler in color to match original stain.

a. CAUTION: WOOD FILLERS CONTAINING A LINSEED OIL VEHICLE MAY
CAUSE WHITE SPOTS TO DEVELOP IN THE LACQUER FINISH COAT.
7. Oil stain or universal stain (Sherwin Williams), or approved equal.
8. Alkyd or urethane-base satin varnish (Sherwin Williams), or approved equal.
9. Paste wax (non-yellowing) such as "Butcher's Paste Wax" (Butcher Polish Com-
pany), or approved equal.
D. EQUIPMENT
1. 000 steel wool
2. Steel or brass wire brushes
3. Stiff fiber bristle brushes
4. Putty knife or broad knife
5. Clean, dry cloths (cheese cloth or gauze)
6. Orbital Sander

7. Electric floor polisher
8. Nylon web scrubbing pads
9. Lamb's wool buffing pads
2.3 PRODUCTS STAINING AND LACQUERING WOODWORK
A. MANUFACTURERS
1. Mohawk Finishing Products, Inc.

Route 30 N.
Amsterdam, NY 12010
B. MATERIALS
1. Wood Filler: Paste wood filler shall be blended silica in aromatic mineral spirits
solvent with an alkyd resin base, color as required to match original stain (Mo-
hawk Finishing Products, Inc.), or approved equal.
2. NOTE: USE OF WOOD FILLER WITH LINSEED OIL VEHICLE MAY CAUSE
WHITE SPOTS IN LACQUER FINISH COAT OR INHIBIT ITS PROPER
DRYING.
3. Sanding Sealer: Lacquer based sanding sealer, formulated for brushing, com-
posed of the following products (Mohawk Finishing Products), or approved equal.
4. Note: Amounts of products listed below make one (1) gallon of sanding sealer.
The ratio of constituents shall remain constant if a greater quantity is required.
a. Product Amount
b. #610-160 High solids sanding sealer 50 oz.
c. #650-010 Lacquer thinner 12 oz.
d. #502-000 Solar lux retarder 2 oz.
5. Wood stain: Solvent (aromatic) reducible, pigmented wiping surface stain with an
alkyd binder, color matched to original stain, such as (Mohawk Finishing Prod-
ucts, Inc.), or approved equal.
6. Lacquer
7. Tack Rags
8. Steel wool: Grade 0000
9. Cloths: Soft, clean and lint free
10. Vegetable Oil Soap: Potassium soap of vegetable oil containing no acids, abra-
sives, caustics or solvents, such as "Murphy's Oil Soap" (Murphy-Phoenix Com-
pany), OR approved equal.

a. NOTE: NON-IONIC DETERGENTS ARE NOT RECOMMENDED; THEY

ARE TOO HARSH.
C. EQUIPMENT
1. Soft, Natural Bristle Brush
2.4 PRODUCTS REPLACING DETERIORATED WOODWORK
A. MATERIALS
1. New or Replacement Materials:
a. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln-dried lumber with an average moisture

content range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and rela-
tive humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that mois-
ture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed the
above range.
b. Replacement Wood: Match species, grade, grain pattern, and other special
characteristics of existing woodwork.
2. Clean, soft cloths
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR OF DAMAGED WOODWORK
A. EXAMINATION
1. Conserve as much of the original material as possible, repairing and restoring

damaged existing woodwork rather than replacing it wherever practicable. Use
salvaged material where practical in spaces with some existing woodwork to re-
main. If not practical, replace all woodwork with new materials that replicate the
existing items; maintain RHPO approval.
2. Do a thorough examination of the existing wood condition. Do any necessary
tests on an inconspicuous surface to learn the current condition and appropriate
steps and materials necessary for restoration of all existing wood surfaces.
B. PREPARATION
1. Protection:
a. Protect adjacent surfaces with polyethylene covers during wood removal op-
erations.
b. Protect persons and surrounding surfaces of building interiors whose wood

surfaces are being restored from damage resulting from wood restoration
work.

a. Condition woodwork according to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas before installing.
b. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for

completion and complete work as required, including back priming and re-
moval of packing.
3. Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at project site before delivery of architectural

woodwork and review coordination and environmental controls required for
proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. Include in
meeting the contractor; RHPO, contracting officer, and other owner representa-
tives (if any); installers of architectural woodwork, wet work such as plastering,
other finishes, painting, mechanical work and electrical work; and firms or per-
sons responsible for continued operation (whether temporary or permanent) of
HVAC system as required to maintain temperature and humidity conditions. Pro-
ceed with woodwork installation only when everyone concerned agrees that re-
quired ambient conditions can be maintained.
4. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates,
well ahead of time substrates are to be built.
C. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
1. General:
a. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for type
of woodwork involved.
b. Carefully remove at locations indicated any damaged or deteriorated
woodwork. Unless indicated otherwise, replace the entire length of the
existing damaged piece to the next butt joint.
c. For partial replacement of existing pieces, use a neat, well-fitted level cut with
grain aligned in transparent finish wood.
2. Replacing Deteriorated Material: Install new pieces as follows:
a. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as
required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for
plumb and level; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surface,
1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
b. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop-fabricated or shop-cut to exact size.

Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit.
Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.
c. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the
greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.

Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for join-
ery.
1) Reuse salvage material as required. Use only trim that can be reinstalled
and refinished to an acceptable condition consistent with the existing trim
to remain.
2) Where salvage material will not match existing, remove and replace with
new to replicate existing.
d. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to sub-

strates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, con-
cealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Ex-
cept where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine fin-
ishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork,
and matching final finish where transparent finish is suggested.
e. Finish replacement woodwork to match adjacent woodwork surfaces.
D. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
1. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls and other adjacent surfaces
stained, marred, otherwise damaged by work under this section shall be cleaned
and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean and per-
fect condition.
2. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent

building operations and effects of
3. weather. Protection shall be by methods recommended by the manufacturer of
installed materials and as approved by the RHPO.
4. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminate defects

functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace wood-
work. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
5. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-

applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
E. PROTECTION
1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be restored or not, against damage by

restoration work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, as
acceptable to RHPO. At completion of work of other trades, restore all damaged
or defaced surfaces.
2. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage
or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

3.2 CLEANING AND REFINISHING
A. PREPARATION
1. Protection: Mask all adjacent surfaces and protect other exposed surfaces in the
work area.
a. Select an inconspicuous area on which to test materials and application for

each method type
b. required. Test area must be approved by the Contracting Officer. After each
test area has been
c. prepared, receive approval from the Contracting Officer before commencing
general application.
d. Fill any split in existing wood and sand smooth prior to sealer application.
B. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
1. General:
a. Follow manufacturer's application instructions.
b. Final appearance of woodwork must be uniform in all respects.
2. Refinishing When Removal of Existing Shellac is Required:
a. Coat wood with denatured alcohol. Apply with soft cloth. Scrape up residue
as quickly as possible. Repeat application of alcohol until all shellac is re-
moved.
b. Sand smooth.
c. Apply one coat of shellac with soft cloth.
d. Apply mixture of shellac and alcohol with soft cloth and allow to dry overnight.
e. Apply liberal amount of paste wax with soft cloth and allow to dry.
f. Buff wood lightly with steel wool.
g. Buff wood with soft brush.
h. Polish with soft cloth.
i. Other processes may be used as long as final results conform to quality

standards and give uniform appearance.
3. Refinishing When Removal of Existing Wax is Required:

a. Rub wood with a soft cloth moistened in turpentine.
b. Apply liberal amount of paste wax with soft cloth and allow to dry.
c. Polish wood with soft cloth.
4. Refinishing Wood Floor:
a. Remove existing finish by sanding two or three times until bare wood is ex-
posed.
b. Repair scratched or broken boards. Do not replace boards unless approved

by the Contracting Officer.
c. Clean area of dust and sawdust.
d. Apply stain of same color as existing. Allow to dry overnight.
e. Apply two coats of floor varnish.
f. Apply two coats of floor wax.
C. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
1. Wash woodwork with mild detergent and water.
2. Dry immediately with clean cloth.
3. Apply a liberal amount of paste wax and allow to dry.
3.3 REFINISHING INTERIOR WOOD
A. ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
1. Remove Existing Coating:
a. Work in areas approximately 4' by 4' at one time.
b. Apply chemical stripper using a brush or roller. Follow manufacturer's in-

structions.
c. Allow stripper to stand for length of time as recommended by manufacturer,

depending upon the number of surface layers to be stripped; if necessary,
cover with plastic sheeting to keep the stripper moist.
d. Using a broad knife or scrapper, remove paint and stripper from the surface.
e. Safely dispose of paint and stripper residue. Follow EPA regulations for dis-
posal of lead-base paint.
f. Specifically for varnish buildup:

1) Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the wood surface to remove
varnish buildup and to smooth out any checks in the surface.
2) Replace steel wool frequently with clean, and continue the wiping process
until a smooth surface is achieved.
3) NOTE: DO NOT USE WATER ON THE WOOD SURFACE.
g. Wipe wood with a clean cloth soaked in mineral spirits to remove chemical
residue.
h. Allow to dry and dry-brush loose material from the surface using a short fiber
bristle brush.
i. Repeat as necessary to sufficiently remove the previous coating.
2. Special Procedures for Varnished Wood Floors:
a. Sand the floor with an orbital sander to remove stains, old finish and indenta-
tions in the wood. Sand in direction of wood grain.
b. NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE MORE THAN 1/16" OF THE WOOD SURFACE.
c. Remove dust from floor with vacuum and tack cloth.
B. Special Procedures for Waxed Wood Floors:
1. NOTE: Some sophisticated modern waxes, formulated for long wear and for
high production commercial use, require special strippers that most often are not
appropriate for historic materials because the ingredients cannot be readily de-
tected. Some silicon waxes can only be removed by abrasion.
2. NOTE: WORK IN A WELL-VENTILATED ROOM. OBSERVE SAFETY RULES

AS BOTH THE TURPENTINE AND THE WAX ARE FLAMMABLE, AND THE
FUMES CAN TRIP AN IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM. STORE
SOILED CLOTHS IN A METAL SAFETY CONTAINER TO GUARD AGAINST
SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION.
a. Dampen small area of floor with turpentine or mineral spirits, or apply wax
remover evenly over the floor following manufacturer's instructions.
b. Using a 16" electric floor machine, scrub lightly with a piece of 000 steel wool
or nylon web scrubbing pad. Change steel wool or pads as they become
clogged with old wax.
c. Wipe up solvent and wax with clean cloths.
d. Continue cleaning in this manner until all of the old wax has been removed.
Allow floor to dry, approximately 15-20 minutes after the last area has been
cleaned.

e. Apply wax and buff as described 06200-01-P. Apply two or more thin coats
rather than one thick coat. Buff after each coat.
3. Fill scratches, gouges and dents with wood filler.
4. Apply a high quality paste wood filler with a brush to all open grain wood species
(i.e., Oak) before staining.
5. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits and wipe the paste off across the grain
of the wood to enable the filler to remain in the grain depressions.
6. Allow the filler to fully dry before applying the stain or varnish.
7. Stain and Varnish the Wood:
a. On a SAMPLE area 12 inches square, brush apply oil stain or universal stain.
b. Allow the stain to penetrate the wood for at least 5-10 minutes.
c. Remove excess stain with a clean, lint-free cloth. Rub the wood parallel to
the grain.
d. Allow the stain to dry at least 12 hours before applying varnish.
e. Brush apply one coat of alkyd or urethane-base satin varnish. Varnish should
be thin, but not watery.
f. Allow to dry for at least 24 hours.
g. When dry, buff the surface with 000 steel wool and dry-brush with a fiber bris-
tle brush to remove any
h. metal particles left behind from the steel wool. A tack rag may also be used
to remove dust from the surface.
i. Apply second coat of satin varnish (full-strength).
j. Allow to fully dry.
k. Buff the surface with 000 steel wool and dry-brush with a fiber bristle brush to
remove any metal particles left behind from the steel wool.
l. If sample is approved by RHPO, follow the same procedures for all remaining
wood.
m. For areas subject to wear (i.e., handrails, wainscot, etc.):
1) After buffing the final coat of varnish, apply one coat of non-yellowing
paste wax
3.4 STAINING AND LACQUERING WOODWORK
A. PREPARATION

a. Lightly sand abraded veneer of windows and areas

b. damaged by chairs.
c. Make sure that all wood surfaces are clean and
d. smooth.
2. Fill all gouges and scratches with compatible surface putty color matched to
stain. Sand smooth.
1. Staining Procedures:
a. Color mix stain to match original.
b. Apply stain to all bare wood surfaces with a stiff flat bristle brush.
c. Allow stain to set as required for proper color match as determined by testing
process.
d. Wipe off excess stain by rubbing parallel to the grain with a soft, dry cloth.
e. Apply one (1) coat of sanding sealer rub with 0000 steel wool and wipe with a
tack rag. (May not be required, test during preparation of sample areas.)
f. Finish Coating:
1) Make sure that surface is clean, level and free of defects.
2) Rub with 0000 steel wool and wipe with a tack rag.
3) Apply a minimum of three finish coats. Brush on lacquer using a wide,

moderately full brush to flow a continuous, wet coat onto the surface with
minimum of retrace or back brushing - preferably none. Work area small
enough so that by working with long, fast, continuous strokes, each
succeeding stroke works against the wet edge of the last stroke. A dry
tack rag moving ahead of the brush will help to keep the surface dust
free.
4) Allow each coat to dry at least two, preferably four hours.
5) Sand with 4/0 to 6/0 paper, only if necessary to remove defects and level
surface for next coat.
6) Before adding the next coat, vacuum and wipe the surface with a dry tack
rag in order to remove all grit and dust.
3.5 REPLACING DETERIORATED WOODWORK

A. PREPARATION
a. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas prior to installing.
b. Back prime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat
of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of
Back prime coat before installation of woodwork.
c. Remove miscellaneous hardware, nails, etc., from all existing woodwork as

required to provide a first class installation of new or replacement woodwork.
2. Prior to installation of new architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work

for completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and re-
moval of packing.
1. Carefully remove at locations indicated any damaged or deteriorated woodwork.

Unless indicated otherwise, replace the entire length of the existing damaged
piece.
2. For partial replacement of existing pieces, use a neat, well-fitted level cut with
grain aligned in transparent finished wood.
3. Install new pieces as described below:
a. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as re-
quired using
b. concealed shims.
c. Cut to fit unless specified to be shop-fabricated or shop-cut to exact size.

Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit.
Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.
d. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the
greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members.
Cope at returns, miter at corners, and comply with Quality Standards for join-
ery.
e. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to sub-

strates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, con-
cealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Ex-
cept where prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine fin-
ishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork,
and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.

1) Finish replacement woodwork to match adjacent woodwork surfaces
C. ADJUSTING/CLEANING
1. Upon completion of this work, all floors, walls, and other adjacent surfaces that
are stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by work under this section shall be
cleaned and repaired and all work and the adjacent areas shall be left in a clean
and perfect condition.
2. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent

building operations and effects of weather. Protection shall be by methods rec-
ommended by the manufacturer of installed materials and as approved by the
RHPO.
3. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminate defects

functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace wood-
work. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
4. Clean woodwork: Dust and damp wipe woodwork with a soft cloth dampened in
clean water; dry rub with soft cloth to maintain the polish, rubbing along the grain
of the wood.
5. Stain and Spot Removal:
a. Stains may be cleaned by prompt damp wiping with cloth dampened in clear
water or rubbing with cloth dampened in solvent. Dry the wood with a soft
cloth.
b. White spots may be removed by rubbing them with a small amount of linseed
oil.

SECTION 06202 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. MDO paneling.
2. Shelving.
B. See Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not
specified in this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
B. Samples: For each type of paneling indicated.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and glues used at Project site,
including printed statement of VOC content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. MDO Plywood: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
2.2 PANELING
A. Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: Manufacturer's stock hardwood plywood panels

complying with HPVA HP-1.

a. Chesapeake Hardwood Products, Inc.

b. Davidson Plywood; a division of Do+Able Products, Inc.
c. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
2. Face Veneer Species and Cut: [Rotary-cut white birch] [Plain-sliced red oak]
[Plain-sliced hickory] .
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06202 - 1/3

3. Veneer Matching: [Random match] [Selected for similar color and grain].
4. Thickness: [1/8 inch] [5/32 inch] [5 mm] [1/4 inch] [5/16 inch] [7/16 inch].
B. MDO Paneling:
1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
2.3 SHELVING
A. Shelving: Made from the following material , 3/4 inch thick.

1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
A. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue.
1. Use wood glue that has a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated
B. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing

humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work.

2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is
unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining
interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset.
3.3 PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable
variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inch gap to

be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints
between panels.
1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and

fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer.
2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent.
B. Hardboard Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent
panels with moderate contact. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching
paneling color.
3.4 SHELVING INSTALLATION
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch less than width of shelves and sand
exposed ends smooth.
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set
below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches o.c.
C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more
than 36 inches o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use
toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.
D. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed
and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.

SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Roof sheathing.
2. Subflooring.
3. Underlayment.
4. Building paper.
5. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment.
6. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment and fire-retardant treatment from

chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated
plywood complies with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
VOC content.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following:
1. Preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,

provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
SHEATHING 06160 - 1/4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry
or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.
1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where
indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
C. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL,

U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency
D. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I; Exterior sheathing.
2.5 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.

1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective
coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to
ASTM B 117.
2.7 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt),

unperforated.
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with

ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives
and panels.
B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-

density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these

materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match
spacing of structural support elements.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K,

"APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
1. Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph

above.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Subflooring:

a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials.
3.4 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING-PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
3.5 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written

instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at
flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of
openings.
3. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
3. Wood furring.
4. Wood sleepers.
5. Plywood backing panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical

treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials
comply with requirements.

01352.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building

code in effect for Project:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from
wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1. Dimension lumber framing.

2. Miscellaneous lumber.
3. Interior wood trim.
4. Shelving and clothes rods.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1/5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-
writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the
rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is
not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be
treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not

use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl
spaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and

AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in
attic spaces, and where indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Framing for raised platforms.

2. Concealed blocking.
3. Roof construction.
4. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Southern pine; SPIB.
3. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
4. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
5. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
6. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
7. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
8. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
9. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or

attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Utility shelving.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with
19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of
eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and
any of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC , fire-

retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch
nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-

preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304
stainless steel.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material
being fastened.
A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-

density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-
treated lumber.
F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel
Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,
despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered
borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered
label.

SECTION 05910 – ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Stripping paint from metal.

2. Removing dirt buildup on metal.
3. Washing ornamental metal with and without detergents.
4. Cleaning and polishing brass plate.
B. Unit Prices: Ornamental metal cleaning to be provided under unit prices are described
in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:

1. Each type of cleaner.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration and cleaning process, including
be used for each phase of the restoration and cleaning work.
ORNAMENTAL METAL CLEANING 05910 - 1/13

1. Product Data
2. Work Plan
3. Materials
The names, quantity represented, and intended use for proprietary brands of ma-
terials proposed to be substituted for the specified materials when the required
quantity of a particular batch is 200 liters 50 gallons or less.
Manufacturer's current printed product description, material safety data sheets
(MSDS) and technical data sheets for each product. Detailed mixing, thinning
and application instructions, minimum and maximum application temperature,
and curing and drying times shall be provided for each product submitted.
4. Qualifications
A statement certified by the Contractor attesting that the experience and qualifi-
cations of the workers (journeymen) comply with the specifications.
5. Certificates
Certificate stating that products proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of
the local Air Pollution Control Districts having jurisdiction over the geographical
area in which the project is located.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced ornamental metal cleaning firm that

Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. The Contractor shall
provide qualified workers trained and experienced in the preparation for painting of
wood and metal surfaces in historic structures and shall submit documentation of 5
consecutive years of work of this type. A list of similar jobs shall be provided identify-
ing when, where, and for whom the work was done. A current point-of-contact for
identified references shall be provided.
1. At Contractor's option, the work may be divided between 2 specialist firms: one
for cleaning work and one for repair work.
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that metal

metal cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and
with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project site
inspection and assistance.
conditions to be expected during remainder of Work. Test adjacent non-metallic mate-
rials for possible reaction with cleaning and paint stripping materials.


2. Metal Restoration: Prepare sample panels of 3 linear feet for each type of
3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 3 linear feet in length for each type of
surface condition.

deleterious effect.
prepared.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of completed mockup submittal before starting the
remainder of metal restoration and cleaning.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in

1. LOCATE INDEPENDENT TESTS IN SPEC.
D. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for metal restoration from a single source for
each type of material required to ensure a match of quality.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum

ALL CLEANING REMOVES SOME SURFACE METAL AND PATINA. THEREFORE, USE
CAUTION, AS EXCESSIVE CLEANING CAN REMOVE THE TEXTURE AND FINISH OF THE
METAL.
THE CLEANING OR STRIPPING OF METALS MAY INVOLVE THE USE OF ABRASIVES,

LIQUIDS OR SOLVENTS WHICH MAY SPLASH OR RUN OFF ONTO ADJACENT
MATERIALS. TAKE SPECIAL CARE TO PROTECT ALL ADJACENT MATERIALS, AND DO
NOT USE THIS PROCEDURE ON METALS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE
SUMMARY.
BEFORE UNDERTAKING ANY PROJECT INVOLVING PAINT REMOVAL, APPLICABLE

STATE AND FEDERAL LAWS ON LEAD PAINT ABATEMENT AND DISPOSAL MUST BE
TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT AND CAREFULLY FOLLOWED. STATE AND FEDERAL

REQUIREMENTS MAY AFFECT OPTIONS AVAILABLE TO OWNERS ON BOTH PAINT

REMOVAL AND REPAINTING. THESE LAWS, AS WELL AS ANY REQUIREMENTS
PROHIBITING VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (VOCs), SHOULD BE REQUESTED
FROM THE STATE HISTORIC PRESERVATION OFFICER IN EACH STATE. (From
Preservation Brief 28, "Painting Historic Interiors"). REGULATORY INFORMATION MAY ALSO
BE REQUESTED FROM THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) REGIONAL
OFFICE AND/OR THE STATE OFFICE OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY.
1.6 REFERENCES
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS

(ACGIH)
ACGIH-02 (1997) Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances

and Physical Agents Biological Exposure Indices
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 1730 (1967; R 1993) Preparation of Aluminum and Alumi-

num-Alloy Surfaces for Painting
ASTM D 1731 (1967; R 1993) Preparation of Hot-Dip Aluminum Sur-

faces for Painting
ASTM D 3274 (1995) Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of

Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil
and Dirt Accumulation
ASTM D 3359 (1995a) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D 4214 (1997) Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint

Films
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATING (SSPC)
SSPC PA Guide 5 (1990) Guide to Maintenance Painting Programs
SSPC SP 1 (1982) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 2 (1995) Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 3 (1995) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 5/NACE 1 (1994) White Metal Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 6/NACE 3 (1994) Commercial Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 7/NACE 4 (1994) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC SP 10/NACE 2 (1994) Near-White Blast Cleaning

1.7 WORK PLAN
A. The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall provide for safe
conduct of the work, careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be sal-
vaged, protection of property which is to remain undisturbed, and coordination with
other work in progress. The work plan shall include a Safety and Health plan describ-
ing procedures for handling monitoring, and disposition of VOCs and other hazardous
and toxic materials. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the meth-
ods and equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations.
The Contractor shall test the materials designated by the Contracting Officer.
1.8 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORING
A. Paint removers, solvents, and other chemicals used for surface preparation shall be in
sealed containers that legibly show the designated name, formula or specification
number, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number, manufac-
turer's directions including any warnings and special precautions, and name of manu-
facturer. Such materials shall be furnished in containers not larger than 20 liters; 5
gallons; they shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions;
and as a minimum stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to pre-
vent the buildup of flammable vapors and at temperatures between 4 and 35 degrees
C. 40 and 95 degrees F.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Unless otherwise recommended by the product manufacturer, the ambient tempera-

ture shall be between 7 and 35 degrees C 45 and 95 degrees F when applying paint
removers, solvents, or other preparation materials.
1.9 SAFETY AND HEALTH
A Work shall comply with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity
Hazard Analysis as specified in the CONTRACT CLAUSES. The Activity Hazard
Analysis shall include analyses of the potential impact of surface preparation opera-
tions on personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone. Refer to
Division 1 “Safety and Health”.
1. Work shall be coordinated to minimize exposure of building occupants, other

Contractor personnel, and visitors to mists and odors from surface preparation
and cleaning operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


PART 2---PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. GAF Corporation
1361 Alps Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
201/628-4127
B. Flitz International, Ltd.

821 Mohr Ave.
Waterford, WI 53185
414/534-5898
C. ProSoCo, Inc.
755 Minnesota Avenue
P.O. Box 1578
Kansas City, KS 66117
800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
2.2 PRODUCTS
NOTE: Chemical products are sometimes sold under a common name. This usually means
that the substance is not as pure as the same chemical sold under its chemical name. The
grade of purity of common name substances, however, is usually adequate for stain removal
work, and these products should be purchased when available, as they tend to be less expen-
sive. Common names are indicated below by an asterisk (*).
A. Mild detergent
-OR-
B. Household Ammonia:
1. Other chemical or common names include Ammonium Hydroxide; Ammonia wa-
ter*; Aqua ammonia*.
-OR-
2. Mild Commercial Brass Cleaner (most brass cleaners will both clean and polish)
such as "Simichrome", "Wenol", "Flitz" (Flitz International, Ltd.), or approved
equal.
NOTE: "Simichrome", "Wenol", and "Flitz" are German manufactured cleaners

that come in tubes. They are generally more expensive than the liquids and
harder to find. They have a finer feel than the liquids, and are best used as an
intermediary or finishing polish.
C. Non-ionic detergent, such as "Zyfo" cleaner concentrate -a controlled suds, silicate

buffered, non-ionic, rinseless-type synthetic detergent, containing no soap,free alkali,
solvents, abrasives, acids, caustics or the like, "Igepal 630" (GAF Corporation) or ap-
proved equal.
D. Chemical Paint Stripper: Thixotropic/alkaline formulation for removing paint coatings

from ornamental metal work, such as "Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper," (ProSoCo, Inc.),
or approved equal.

E. Chemical Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength acidic ornamental metal restora-

tion cleaner, such as "Sure Klean 887 Stainless Steel Cleaner," (ProSoCo, Inc.), or
approved equal.
F. Protective Lacquer: Clear non-yellowing for protection of the finished metal surface.
G. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Liquid, film forming, strippable masking material for
protecting glass, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effect of acidic and alka-
line cleaners, such as "Sure Klean Acid Stop," (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.
H. Water for Cleaning: Clean, potable, free of oils, acids,

alkalis, salts, and organic matter.
I. Cleaning Pads: No. 4/0 fine steel wool or synthetic pads.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Supplementary Materials for Bronze:

1. Bronze wool, extra fine, such as that manufactured by Brillo
2. Corrosion Inhibitor, Benzotriazole (BTA) such as "Cobratec" (GAF Corporation),
or approved equal
B. Supplementary Materials for Cast Iron:

1. 600 grit aluminum oxide paper, emery paper or fine steel wool
2. Complexing agent such as "Versene", or approved equal
C. Clean, potable water
D. Toweling or rags, clean, lint-free
2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. Buckets, molded rubber or plastic, such as the "Fortex" molded rubber pail - 12 or 14
quart size, or Rubbermaid
B. Washing brushes: Available from local janitorial supply houses or hardware stores
1. Tampico fiber set in a hardwood block
2. "Whitewash brush" - ideal for most purposes
3. "Parts washing" brush - useful for small areas and crevices
C. Rubber gloves and rain gear, if desired
D. Garden hose
E. Eye and skin protection
F. Heavy gloves and protective gear
G. Soft natural bristle brushes

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for

protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products.
B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored,

building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from Metal
restoration work.
1. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians,
motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured
by such contact.
2. Do not clean metal during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
unprotected surfaces.
3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property.
4. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that
prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to
landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
5. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of
entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during
course of marble restoration work.
6. Provide ventilation to eliminate the spread of fumes to unaffected spaces.
7. Protect unpainted metal from contact with alkali chemical cleaners by covering
them either with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
C. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with a
liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply
liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
D. Surface Preparation For Brass Plate Cleaning:
1. Before cleaning, determine if your brass surface is solid or plated:

a. A magnet will stick to the steel beneath brass plating; it will not stick to solid
brass.
b. Solid brass can withstand much harsher treatment than brass plating can.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Before proceeding with steps to clean brass, examine the surface(s) to determine the
extent of the work required. Look for:
1. Broken, cracked, missing, distorted or loose parts.
2. Coating failures such as chips, losses, peeling, cracks, bubbling and wear. Cor-
rosion - caused by moisture, deicing salts, acids, soils, gypsum plasters, magne-
sium oxychloride cements, ashes, clinkers and sulfur components.
3.3 METAL CLEANING WITH WATER

A. Fill one or two buckets with about two gallons of water.
NOTE: Water washing alone will remove most common dirt and grime; however, at times
supplemental materials will be needed to remove the deposits.
1. For Bronze: Add BTA to wash water to make a 1 to 3% solution of BTA to water.
2. For Detergent Washing: Add 1 to 3 ounces of detergent per gallon of water.
B. Beginning at the top and gradually working down, scrub the metal surface lightly with the
fiber brush to remove any superficial deposits. Take care to avoid scratching or other-
wise damaging the protective coating.
C. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water.
1. For Cast Iron: Rinse with 2% aqueous solution of "Versene".
D. Dry with clean, lint-free toweling or rags.
E. For tenacious mineral deposits or exudations of core material, treat locally with gentle
abrasion using very fine bronze wool. Exercise great care to avoid damaging the coating
and patina.
3.4 BRASS PLATE CLEANING
C. Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. Brass-plate is a thin layer of brass bonded to
steel. Solid brass is more durable than brass-plate and, therefore, can withstand more
rigorous methods of cleaning.
D. Brass may be unfinished or lacquered. Architectural brass hardware and trim is gen-
erally maintained in a highly polished, "bright" finish.
1. Unfinished brass MUST be polished frequently in order to maintain its luster. All pol-
ishing,
however, removes some brass.
2. Lacquered brass will usually last about 10 years and does NOT require frequent pol-
ishing.
3. Lacquer protects the brass finish from deterioration, though some brilliance of its sur-
face characteristics is sacrificed. Removal and reapplication of the lacquer, however, will
not harm the brass surface.
NOTE: WHEN CLEANING, TRY TO RETAIN THE BRASS PATINA, AS THIS

PROTECTS THE BRASS FROM FURTHER CORROSION.
NOTE: BRASS PLATE IS ALMOST ALWAYS PROTECTED WITH A CLEAR COATING.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE STEEL WOOL OR METAL SCRAPERS ON BRASS PLATE.

A. For unlacquered brass plate:
1. Clean with mild detergent or ammonia and a soft cloth. DO NOT USE ABRASIVES.
Wear plastic gloves to prevent getting fingerprints on the surface.
2. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a clean, soft cloth. DO NOT BUFF BRASS-PLATE;
THE PLATING WILL COME OFF.
B. For lacquered brass plate:
1. Clean using ONLY a mild detergent and water.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE AMMONIA-BASED CLEANERS ON LACQUERED BRASS.

THEY WILL DETERIORATE THE COATING.
2. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a clean, soft cloth.
C. For brass plate that is heavily tarnished:
1. Use a mild commercial polish such as "Simichrome", "Wenol", "Flitz" (Flitz Interna-
tional, Ltd.), or approved equal.
NOTE: TEST POLISH FIRST IN A SMALL, INCONSPICUOUS AREA.
2. Wipe down cleaned and polished piece with lacquer thinner to remove all traces of
cleaning solutions and polish.
3.5 DIRT REMOVAL
A. Brush apply chemical cleaner to ornamental metal surface in the concentration recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
B. Agitate surface with either steel wool or synthetic cleaning pad. Follow direction of grain
in metal. Do not scratch or abrade surface.
C. Thoroughly sponge or cloth rinse surface with clean water to remove chemical cleaner
and loosened dirt.
D. Machine or hand polish metal where indicated with buffing wheel or soft cloth using pol-
ishing compound typically recommended as standard industry practice and as approved
by the RHPO.
E. Repeat process as required to produce desired effect.
F. Wipe surface completely dry with clean soft cloths. Do not touch cleaned ornamental
metal surfaces.
G. Immediately apply two coats of protective lacquer finish to surface.

PREPARATION OF HISTORIC WOOD AND METAL SURFACES FOR PAINTING
3.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Methods used for preparation of historic wood and metal surfaces for painting shall be the
gentlest possible to achieve the desired results. Historic substrate materials shall not be
damaged or marred in the process of surface preparations. Samples of the existing paint
finishes shall be collected and analyzed for the purpose of documentation or matching.
Material and application requirements for paints are covered in Section 09900 PAINTING,
GENERAL.
3.7 VENTILATION
A. Interior work zones having a volume of 280 cubic meters 10,000 cubic feet or less shall
be ventilated at a minimum of 2 air exchanges per hour. Ventilation in larger work zones
shall be maintained by means of mechanical exhaust. Solvent vapors shall be exhausted
outdoors, away from air intakes and workers. Return air inlets in the work zone shall be
temporarily sealed before start of work until the prepared surfaces have dried. Operators
and personnel in the vicinity of paint removal processes involving chemicals or mechani-
cal action (sanding or blasting) shall wear respirators.
3.8 PROTECTION OF AREAS NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. Items not to be painted which are in contact with or adjacent to painted surfaces shall be
removed or protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Items re-
moved prior to painting shall be replaced when painting is completed. Following comple-
tion of painting, workers skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Sur-
faces contaminated by preparation materials shall be restored to original condition.
3.9 CLEANING OF SURFACES
A. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of grease, dirt, dust and other foreign mat-
ter before application of paint or surface treatments. After cleaning, surfaces shall exhibit
a surface disfigurement rating of 7 or greater when evaluated in accordance with ASTM D
3274. Dirt and surface contaminants shall be cleaned by brush with solutions of water
and detergent or trisodium phosphate, then rinsed clean with water and let dry. Surfaces
on which mildew or other microbiological growth is present shall be cleaned with a deter-
gent solution containing household bleach. Oil and grease shall be removed with clean
cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning solvents shall be of
low toxicity with a flashpoint in excess of 38 degrees C. 100 degrees F. Cleaning shall be
programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on newly prepared or newly
painted surfaces.
3.10 EXISTING PAINT
A. Existing paint shall be tested for adhesion to substrate per ASTM D 3359, Test Method A
and shall obtain a rating of 4 or better in order to be considered sound. Existing paint
meeting this requirement may be considered a satisfactory base for repainting.

3.11 PAINT REMOVAL
A. Flaking, cracking, blistering, peeling or otherwise deteriorated paint shall be removed by

scraping with hand scrapers. After scraping, removal of large areas of paint or paint on
architectural details shall be accomplished using sanders, heat guns or heat plates, or
chemical paint removers. Paint shall be removed to bare substrate or first sound paint
layer. Open flame heat devices shall not be used. Mechanical paint removal shall not
damage or mar the substrate material.
B. Chemical Paint Removers
Chemical paint removers shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommenda-

tions. If chemical strippers are used, substrate shall be neutralized after stripping to a pH
of 5 to 8.5.
C. Lead Paint
In preparation of lead-based painted surfaces for repainting, procedures described in

Section 13281 LEAD HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES shall be followed.
After cleaning and removal of deteriorated paint, edges of remaining chipped paint shall be
feather-edged and sanded smooth. Damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes,
cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undam-
aged areas. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned per
Spec section ____. Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D
4214, the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8. New, proposed coatings shall be com-
patible with existing coatings. If existing surfaces are glossy, the gloss shall be reduced.
3.13 METAL SURFACES
A. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter. Programs for preparation of metal
shall be per SSPC PA Guide 5. Grease, oil, and other soluble contaminants shall be re-
moved by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP 1. Surfaces shall be free from soils and corro-
sion; e.g. grease, oil, solder flux, welding flux, weld spatter, sand, rust, scale, and other
contaminants that might interfere with the application of the new finish. Cleaning meth-
ods shall be the gentlest possible to achieve the desired result. Metals which are soft,
thin, or exhibit fine detail shall not be abrasively cleaned. Evidence of corrosion or con-
tamination on a previously cleaned surface shall be cause for recleaning prior to painting.
B. Ferrous Surfaces
Ferrous surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances
shall be cleaned mechanically with hand tools according to SSPC SP 2, power tools ac-
cording to SSPC SP 3 or by blast cleaning according to [SSPC SP 5/NACE 1], [SSPC SP
6/NACE 3], [SSPC SP 7/NACE 4], [SSPC SP 10/NACE 2]. Shop-coated ferrous surfaces
shall be protected from corrosion by treating and touching up corroded areas immediately
upon detection.

C. Nonferrous Metallic Surfaces
Galvanized, aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal sur-
faces shall be solvent-cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 1.
1. Aluminum
Aluminum surfaces shall be treated per ASTM D 1730 or ASTM D 1731. Steel wool,
steel brushes and uninhibited caustic etching solutions, such as sodium hydroxide,
shall not be used on aluminum.
2. Zinc
Zinc surfaces including zinc-coated substrates, shall be cleaned prior to painting as
follows: degrease, soak in a mild and inhibited alkaline cleaner, rinse with clean over-
flowing water, clean anodically in an acid (e.g. 0.25 to 0.75 percent sulfuric acid), and
rinse with clean overflowing water.
3.14 TIMING
Surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, and otherwise prepared for painting shall
be given a coat of the specified first coat as soon as practical after such pretreatment has
been completed, but prior to any deterioration of the prepared surface. Unless otherwise
directed, the first coat primer shall be applied within 48 hours of surface preparation.
3.15 SURFACES TO BE PREPARED FOR PAINTING
Surfaces shall be prepared as specified and as shown in the painting schedule.
A. During the work, remove from the site discarded cleaning and coating materials, rub-
bish, cans and rags at end of each work day.
B. Upon completion of coating work, remove all protective coverings and coatings, and
clean window glass and other coating-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings
by proper methods as recommended by coating manufacturer, using care not to dam-
age adjacent surfaces.
C. Cloths, cotton waste and other debris that might constitute a fire hazard shall be
placed in closed metal containers and removed at the end of each day. Containers
shall be removed from the site or destroyed in an approved manner. Preparation ma-
terials and other deposits on adjacent surfaces shall be removed and the entire job left
clean and ready for painting.

SECTION 05811 - ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes architectural joint systems for building interiors and exteriors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section

01352 including:
B. Shop Drawings: Provide placement drawings, including line diagrams and details, and
a tabular schedule of architectural joint systems.
A. Product Options: Drawings are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Architect's approval.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural joint

system and fire-barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire
resistance per UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a testing and inspecting agency
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for
sheet and plate.
1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be

placed in contact with cementitious materials.
B. Moisture Barriers:
ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811 - 1/5

1. PVC , minimum 30 mils thick.

2. Santoprene.
C. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, and other accessories as

required for complete installations.
2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide joint systems of design indicated.
1. Furnish in longest practicable lengths to minimize splicing. Install with hairline

mitered corners where joint changes direction.
2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces to provide
continuous joint systems.
B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics:
1. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Movement Capability: As scheduled.
3. Type of Movement: Thermal.
2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS

products specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products or a
1. Construction Specialties, Inc.
2. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
B. Floor-to-Floor Joint Systems:
1. Basis-of-Design Products: Construction Specialties Inc.; “GFPS-200” with “RFX-

2F” fire barrier.
2. Type: Metal center plate with gasket seal.
a. Exposed Metal: Aluminum .
1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish.
b. Seal Material: Santoprene .
1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .

3. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hours.
C. Wall-to-Ceiling and Ceiling-to-Ceiling Joint Systems:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Construction Specialties, Inc.; “FWS-200.”
2. Type: Metal frame withextruded thermoplastic seal .

b. Seal Material: Extruded flexible PVC .
2.4 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS

products specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products or a
1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.

2. Capital Services.
3. Construction Specialties, Inc.
4. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.
5. E-Poxy Engineered Materials, LLC.
6. Erie Metal Specialties.
7. R. J. Watson, Inc.
8. Schul International, Inc.
9. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
B. Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Horizontal Surfaces:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Construction Specialties, Inc.; “GFRW-200.”

2. Type: Metal frame with extruded gasket and recessed metal center plate.
b. Seal Material: Santoprene.
2.5 FINISHES
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout.
C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing
joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction.
D. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are
indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due
to ambient temperature at time of installation.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal
without buckling of frames.
4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
5. Support underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in
service.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3
inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals in frames to comply with

manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.

2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate so complete assemblies comply with

assembly performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire

resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.

B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.

SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior ornamental railings.

1. Steel and iron decorative railings.
1. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube railings
associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.
2. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal
stairs.
3. See Division 5 Section “Monumental Stairs and Railings” for railings associated
with monumental stairs.
4. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for
new cast iron historic railings.
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups.
ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 1/6

1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.

2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

01352 including:


work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
H. Preconstruction test reports.
A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes

requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not
modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail,
infill area, and anchorage system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Steel and Iron Decorative Railings:
a. Architectural Iron Designs, Inc.

b. Bavarian Iron Works Co.; TT Triebenbacher.
c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless
2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
2.4 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors .

A. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20

and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: [Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying
with MPI#26] [Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134].
E. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and
topcoat.
F. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less
than that required to support structural loads.
B. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use

fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's

"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded
joint.
D. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and

fittings.
E. Form changes in direction By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,

sleeves, and other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal

surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1.
F. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to

prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and
with requirements in SSPC-PA 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch
in 12 feet.
B. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
grout.

C. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post
for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with grout.
D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for
this purpose.
E. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry as indicated on Drawings.
F. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used.
1. Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage].
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
G. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
H. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.

05720 - NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This procedure includes guidance on replacing deteriorated handrails and railing

systems with new or original factory refurbished brass, steel or iron ornamental rails
to match the historic.
stairs.
4. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with exterior
ornamental pipe and tube railings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Drive,
West Conshohocken, PA 19428, (610) 832-9585 or FAX (610) 832-9555.
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), 1000 - 16th Street, NW,
Washington, DC 20036.
C. Steel Structures Painting Council, 4400 Fifth Avenue,

Pittsburgh, PA 15213.
D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

(NAAMM),
221 N. LaSalle Street, Chicago, IL 60601.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section.
A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads

indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on
the following:
B. For cold-formed structural steel: AISI "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members".
NEW CAST-IRON RAILING SYSTEMS TO MATCH HISTORIC 05720 - 1/10

C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and

install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for
structural performance.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by using
metals that are compatible with one another. In some instances the corrosion can be
prevented by inserting a plastic insulator between the dissimilar materials.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and
installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and
over-stressing of components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. LEED Submittals: Comply with LEED submittal requirements as specified in Section

01352 including:


D. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and
material from a single manufacturer.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer handrails and railing systems by qualified

professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located.
C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in

jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated for handrails and railings similar in material, design,

and extent to that indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-
service performance.
D. Restoration Specialist: Work must be performed by a firm having not less than 5
years successful experience in comparable restoration projects and employing
personnel skilled in the restoration processes and operations indicated.
A. Storage and Protection: Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location,
away from uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind.
Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air
circulation inside the covering.
A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other
construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay
of Work.
A. Mount handrails only on completed surfaces. Do not support handrails temporarily

by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Stan Chemical Company

401 Berlin Street
East Berlin, CT 06023
203/828-0571
2.2 MATERIALS
A. NOTE: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced
standards and that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the
finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated complying with the
following requirements:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade B, unless otherwise indicated or

required by structural loads.

C. For exterior installations and as required, provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized
coating per ASTM A 53.
D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
E. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout and Anchoring Cement:
1. Non-shrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this
procedure such as "Bonsal Construction Grout" (W. R Bonsal Co.), "Diamond-
Crete Grout" (Concrete Service Materials Co.), "Euco N-S Grout" (Euclid
Chemical Co.), or approved equal.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, hydraulic

controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to
create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation
that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a
sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.
C. Paint:
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in

galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by
weight, and complying with SSPC-Paint-20.
2. Zinc Chromate Primer
D. Fasteners:
1. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the
type, grade, and class required to produce connections that are suitable for
anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of
withstanding design loadings.
a. For steel railings and fittings use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B
633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
2. For copper alloy railings provide fasteners fabricated from same base metal as
railing components or from type 304.
3. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
a. Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials
joined.
b. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing
components and for their attachment to other work except where exposed
fasteners are unavoidable.
4. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless

E. Cast-In-Place and Post-installed Anchors in Concrete: Cast-in-place anchors and

expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to
sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements

indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall
thickness of hollow members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field

splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Form changes in direction of railing members by insertion of prefabricated elbow

fittings, by radius bends of radius as designated, and by bending, as required.
D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain profile of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
E. Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of

members by welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and
seams continuously to comply with the following:
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface match
those adjacent.
F. Non-welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of

members by means of railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical
fasteners and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to
produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where
this represents manufacturer's standard splicing method.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall

brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for connection of handrail and
railing members to other construction.
H. Provide inserts and the anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing
systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of

withstanding loadings imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate

anchorage devices with supporting structure.
I. For existing cast iron posts to be reset in concrete: Examine existing anchors to
determine if suitable for reuse. Do not reuse unless in good condition. Provide new
anchors where necessary of same configurations as existing.
J. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut
edges.
K. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise

indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
L. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
M. For handrails and railing systems that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from
condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means for evacuation of
entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members.
N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
O. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members by use of manufacturer's

standard prefabricated end fittings.
P. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of the railing and wall is 1/4
inch or less.
Q. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate filler of thickness and size indicated or required
to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads
through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.
Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and over-
stressing of substrate.
R. Finishes:
1. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
application and designations of finishes.
2. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are not acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved
samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of
approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
3. Buffed Finish: CDA M21 (Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth specular).
4. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: CDA M21 Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth

specular; Coating: clear organic, air dry, such as "Incralac" (Stan Chemical
Company), or approved equal.

a. Apply by air-spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's directions, with interim

drying, to a total thickness of 1.0 mil.
S. Galvanized Finish:
1. General: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with

ASTM A 123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made form rolled, pressed,
and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips.
2. For exterior steel railings and handrails formed from steel tubing with galvanized
finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous
components.
T. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply air-dried primer immediately following cleaning and

pretreatment, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils per applied coat, to
surfaces that will be exposed after assembly and installation and to concealed, non-
galvanized surfaces.
1. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of handrails and railing components,

except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint
Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.
2. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead-free,

"universal" primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated, and
for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as
masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.2 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installation of handrails and railings. Set handrails and railing accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from
rack. TAKE CARE SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE ADJACENT HISTORIC MATERIALS,
SUCH AS MARBLE, GRANITE, OR LIMESTONE.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that
have been coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field
connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
C. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with
rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches those adjacent.
E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of concrete, masonry, wood, or

dissimilar metals, which will be in contact with grout, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint or zinc chromate primer.
F. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment
at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by
structural loads. MATCH ORIGINAL LOCATION AND SPACING TO AVOID
GHOST MARKS.
G. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing handrails and railing to in-place construction. INSPECT AND
REUSE SOUND CONNECTIONS WHEN POSSIBLE.
H. Railing Connections:
1. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components by welding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent
contact or use manufacturer's standard fitting designed for this purpose.
I. Non-Welded Connections: Use manufacturer's standard mechanical or adhesive

joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding
to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed
lock screws using plastic filler cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing
systems.
J. Anchoring Posts:
1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between
post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
a. Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout: Exterior anchors, if in good condition, may be
reused
b. if suitable. To be set in new concrete stairs.

K. Interior posts may be set in existing anchor holes if suitable.
L. Cover interior anchorage joint with a flange of the same metal as post; attach to post
by welding after placement of anchoring material.
M. Leave exterior anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and
leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior
or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's
directions.
N. For steel railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
O. Anchoring Rail Ends:

1. Anchor rail ends to concrete and masonry with required flanges, connected to rail
ends and anchored into wall construction with post-installed anchors and bolts.
P. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with required flanges. Weld flanges to rail ends,
and bolt flanges to metal surfaces.
Q. Attachment of Handrails to Walls: INSPECT AND RE-USE SOUND CONNECTIONS

WHEN POSSIBLE. ALSO WHEN POSSIBLE, MATCH ORIGINAL LOCATION AND
SPACING TO AVOID GHOST MARKS.
1. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with
not less than 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall
surface.
R. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.
S. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction. Use type of
bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
T. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and
either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lab bolt, as applicable.
U. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.
V. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing
or concealed anchors using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support
structural loads.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during cleaning period
by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove
protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no

evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the

field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new
units.

SECTION 05710 - MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Monumental stair framing.
B. Ornamental railing system.
C. Cladding for monumental stair.
D. Handrails.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.
C. Section 05100 - Structural Steel.
D. Section 05730 - Ornamental Formed Metal.
E. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with
metal stairs.
F. See Division 5 Section “Pipe and Tube Railings” for steel pipe and tube
railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs and interior exit stair.
G. See Division 5 Section “New Cast Iron Railing Systems to Match Historic” for
H. See Division 5 Section “Ornamental Railings” for railings associated with

exterior ornamental pipe and tube railings.
I.
J. Section 09310 – Ceramic Tile: Tile infill in treads and landings.
K. Section 09912 - Interior Painting.
L. Section 16510 – Interior Lighting; for lighting underneath stairs.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA): Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Manual of Steel

Construction.
C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specification for Design of Cold
MONUMENTAL STAIRS AND RAILINGS 05710 -1/7

Formed Steel Structural Members.
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z97.1 - Safety Glazing

Materials used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and
Methods of Test.
E. AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2002.
F. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; 1992, Fifth Edition.
G. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A36 - Structural Steel.
2. A167 - Seamless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
3. A307 - Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded
Fasteners.
4. A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Commercial Quality.
5. A569 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot
Rolled, Commercial Quality.
6. A570 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.
7. B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire,
Shape and Tube.
8. C1048 - Heat Treated Flat Glass, Coated and Uncoated Glass.
H. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Quality Standards for Architectural

Woodwork.
I. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal

Finishes Manual.
A. Structural Design: Comply with AISC and ANSI requirements.
B. Stair: Design stair assembly to support the following loads:

1. Uniform Live Load: 100 pounds (45 kg) minimum per square foot of
projected plan area.
2. Concentrated Live Load: 300 pounds (136 kg) minimum applied
anywhere on tread.
3. Dead Load: Weight of stair, railing system, concrete fill, and finishes.
4. Use defection limits appropriate for types of applied finish materials.
C. Railing: Design railing assemblies to withstand the following loads:

1. Minimum uniform lateral loading of 50 pounds (23 kg) per linear foot
(8,8 kN/m).
2. Minimum concentrated lateral load of 200 pounds (91 kg) at any point
42 inches (1067 mm) above finished floor.
D. Live Load Deflection: Use span measured at horizontal projection of outside

stringer. Tread finishes may require higher deflection limits.

1. 1/180 of span maximum.
E. Cantilevered Stairs: Support stair at top and bottom landings only without
intermediate columns or hangers.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's Product Data substantiating compliance with

Contract Documents. Include manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for stairs and railings.

1. Include plans, elevations, and details.
2. Show connection and accessory items and locations for anchor and
bolt installation.
3. Include design loads, structural calculations, and material properties.
4. Provide Shop Drawings signed and sealed by structural engineer
licensed in the state and jurisdiction in which Project is located.
D. Samples: Submit the following Samples:

1. 12 inch by 12 inch (305 mm by 305 mm) size glass illustrating color,
thickness, and edge conditions.
2. 12 inch (305 mm) long section of handrail illustrating color, finish
,sheet and connection detail.
3. 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) section of each type of metal
indicating finish.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Provide cleaning and maintenance instructions

for each type of finish material.
A. Single Source Responsibility: Work of this section shall be designed,

fabricated, shipped and installed by a single source company which has
specialized in ornamental handrails and railings with ten years minimum
experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be performed by the fabricator or a

company acceptable to the fabricator.
C. Templates: Supply installation templates, required reinforcing, and recessed

anchorage devices in timely fashion to installers of related work that will
receive products of this section.

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for

installation.
B. Store in a weathertight location and protect from corrosion, distortion, and

other damage during delivery storage and handling.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate delivery and installation of stair on project schedule as specified

in section 01310.
B. Allow sufficient time for fabrication, delivery, and erection of stair after
building structure is in place and field dimensions are taken.
C. Allow sufficient time for closing in of building after delivery of stair and for
installation of finishes and related work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Couturier Iron Craft, Inc., 5050 West River

Drive, P. O. Box 308, Comstock Park, MI 49321-0308. ASD. Toll Free Tel:
(800) 670-6123. Tel: (616) 784-6780. Fax: (616)784-5077. Web:
www.couturierironcraft.com.or equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. Shapes, Plate, and Bar: ASTM A 36.
2. Sheet: ASTM A569 or ASTM A 570.
3. Pipe: Welded and seamless steel pipe. ASTM A 53.
4. Tubing: Cold formed. ASTM A 500; hot rolled, ASTM a 501.
5. Iron Castings: Malleable ASTM A 47.
B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526, G 90 coating.
C. Material: Stainless steel tubing.

1. Tubing Diameter: 1.9 inches (48 mm).
2. Thickness: 16 gage; 0.065 inches (1.7 mm).
3. Elbows and Tees: Flush design.
4. Dimensions and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Assembly: Welded.
6. Decorative Flanges for Embedded Posts:
a. Circular, collard cover plate, no screw holes, for setting in
concrete.
7. Wall Mounted Components: Components necessary to support railing
with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance from wall, and as follows:
a. Underslung support brackets: Supports at maximum 60 inches
(1524 mm).

b. Wall return without support: Terminates 1/4 inch (6 mm) from

side wall.
c. Fasteners: Concealed.
8. Picket Rail Components: Pickets of 5/8 inch (15 mm) stainless steel,
shape and lengths as indicated.
9. Finish: Stainless No. 4 satin.
2.3 STRUCTURAL GLASS RAILING SYSTEM
A. Railings: Tempered glass structural balusters mounted in aluminum bottom

rail, with metal top rail and accessories.
1. Mounting: As detailed on Drawings.
B. Glass: 1/2 inch (12 mm) tempered float glass.
C. Handrails: Metal tubing handrail fastened to glass balusters at heights

indicated.
1. Material: Satin finish stainless steel, 1.9 inches (48 mm) diameter.
2. End Caps: Match handrails.
3. Brackets: Custom cast wall brackets, matching handrails.
4. Dimensions and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Corrosion resistant metal primer.
B. Anchors and Bolts: ASTM A307.
C. Fasteners: Type best suited for application.
D. Welding Material: Comply with AWS D1.1.
E. Grout: Non-shrink, high strength.
F. Clear sealer: Clear, tarnish resistant, acrylic lacquer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer shall verify site dimensions prior to shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted, flush, and secure.
C. Fit and fabricate assembled sections in largest practical sizes, for handling
through building openings.
D. Grind exposed edges flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease
exposed edges to small uniform radius.
E. Stair Components:

1. Stringers: 2 stringers, 1 on each side of stair.

2. Treads: Steel pan for concrete fill specified in Section 03300; Ceramic
Tile specified in Section 09310.
3. Riser: Closed type; with metal mesh.
4. Soffit: Enclose underside of stair with finish as specified in Section
05500.
F. Railings and Handrails:

1. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A554, Type 304.
2. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes, and Moldings: ASTM A276, Type 304.
G. Structural Glass Railings:

1. Glass Base: Extruded aluminum, Couturier EB4.
a. At stairs and landings: Recess glass into stringers.
b. At floor openings: 4 inch (102 mm) high base.
c. At floor openings: Mount flush with floor.
2. Handrails, Balusters, and Cap Rail: Material size, profile and height
indicated on the Drawings.
3. Handrail Brackets: Manufacturer's standard metal bracket matching
rail.
H. Cladding:
1. General: Provide cladding with smooth, flat surfaces free from
damage or disfiguration, of premium quality workmanship.
2. Material: Use material thickness that will provide required appearance
as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Attachment: Provide sub-framing, retainers, and supports as required
for proper installation of cladding without exposed fasteners.
4. Locations: Clad exposed surfaces of stringers, railing base members
and fascia at floor openings.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Exposed Stainless Steel: NAMM No. 4 Satin finish.
B. Exposed Aluminum: Provide the following finish on exposed aluminum

surfaces.
1. Painted: Prime paint and finish as follows:
a. Shop applied finish.
C. Provide protection against galvanic action between dissimilar metals, and

between metal and concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are acceptable to suit stair assembly

tolerances.

B. Verify supports and anchors are correctly and securely positioned.
C. Start of installation indicates installer's acceptance of substrate and

conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install stair assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

approved Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor components rigidly and securely to building structure, plumb and

level, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects.
C. Fit exposed connections to form tight hairline joints.
D. Weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of size limitations.

1. Perform field welding of steel in accordance with AWS D 1.1. Field
bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding.
2. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas.
3. Touch up shop primer.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) for full height of stair.
B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3000 mm).
C. Maximum Angular Variation of the Tread from True Position: 3 degrees.
A. Remove manufacturer's protective coverings from exposed surfaces after

installation.
B. Clean surfaces using materials and methods as recommended by

manufacturer.
C. Protect finishes from damage during construction period with temporary

protective coverings acceptable to the manufacturer.
D. After installation of system is complete, advise General Contractor of

methods necessary for protection until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Decorative Grilles.
2. Decorative Railing Caps.
1. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for decorative metal railings.
2. Division 5 Section “Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates” for ornamental fences.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.
B. LEED Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate materials, finishes,
fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
D. Patterns, Models, or Plaster Castings: For each custom casting required.
E. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER ALLOYS
A. Extruded Shapes, Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural
bronze).
ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 1/4

B. Castings, Brass: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass).
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Copper-Alloy Items: Silicon bronze fasteners.
2. Dissimilar Metals: Stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Provide Phillips and tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners
A. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true
curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp,
well-defined lines and arris.
B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that
will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
C. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects
that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to
remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.
2.4 DECORATIVE MECHANICAL GRILLES

the following:
1. Architectural Grille; Division of Giumenta Corporation.

2. Beaux-Artes.
3. Reggio Register Company, Inc.
4. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
B. Fabricate decorative grilles from perforated brass sheet or plate of thickness, size, and
pattern indicated.
1. Drawings indicate perforated metal patterns required and are based on products
of one manufacturer. Perforated metal patterns produced by other manufacturers
may be considered, provided deviations are minor and do not change design
concept as judged solely by Architect.
2. Refer to Details 7 and 8 of Drawing Sheet A-7.03.

2.5 DECORATIVE RAILING CAP
A. Basis of Design: Alumina Railing Products, Inc, “TC06 2-5/8 inch bronze decorative
cap.”
1. Refer to Detail 15 on Drawing Sheet AS-0.03.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.7 COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES
A. Finish designations for copper alloys comply with the system established for
designating copper-alloy finish systems defined in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual
for Architectural and Metal Products."
B. Blackened, Bright Relieved, and Lacquered: M33-O60-M2x-O6x (directionally

textured, coarse satin; black, air drying coating; buffed; coating as specified below):
1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to
in-place construction.
B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from

established lines and levels.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where
indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return
items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete
refinishing, or provide new units as required.
E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation.
Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other
work.

G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.

SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe and tube railings for railings associated with new cast-in-place stairs
and interior exit stair.
stairs.
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.


C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1/6

1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: Indicating percentages by weight of

postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled
content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled
content.
work.
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.

b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON
of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content is not less than 25 percent.
B. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40),
unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
D. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
A. Fasteners: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633

or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated
steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc
coating.
B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors

capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete,
as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
D. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20

F. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
G. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
H. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
I. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: [Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying
with MPI#26] [Water based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134].

J. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and
topcoat.
K. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
L. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
M. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use

fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and

fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
E. Form changes in direction [by bending] [or] [by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings].
F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise

deforming exposed surfaces.
G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide

crush-resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes.

A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
E. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to

prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and
with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field,
and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates
recommended by coating manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established
lines and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch
in 12 feet.
B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.

C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into [preset metal pipe sleeves] [formed or
core-drilled holes] and grouting annular space.
D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.
E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.
F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets[, except where end flanges are used]. Use
type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt]
[predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage].
H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-
treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate
backing members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or
to concealed steel reinforcements.
5. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel
framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as
surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached
to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis

by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in
addition to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
METAL STAIRS 05511 - 1/6



D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 .
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal stairs.
B. LEED Submittals:
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of
each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to
work.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards

for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair
designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content
C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).
E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel,

Type B, structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads;
exposed.
A. Abrasive Nosings:
1. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish.
a. Granite State Casting Co.
b. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.
c. Wooster Products Inc.
B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
C. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a
minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces
slope to drain.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.
E. Weld connections to comply with the following:

4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded
joint .
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.4 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

the following:
1. Alfab, Inc.
2. American Stair, Inc.
3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous
framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements .
3. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts
designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
C. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations

shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements
but not less than 0.067 inch.

1. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled

with reinforced concrete during fabrication.
2.5 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube,
post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated
loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-
square posts.
2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components

at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all
around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for
Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.
C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow

fittings.
D. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without

buckling.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching
to other work.
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.
H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material,
to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish
thicknesses.
2.6 FINISHES
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning ."

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance
Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,
measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into
concrete unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.
F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for
concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt .
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.

2. Shelf angles.
3. Metal ladders.
4. Metal floor plate and supports.
5. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Prefabricated building columns.

2. Metal nosings and treads.
3. Paint products.
4. Grout.
B. LEED Submittals:

content.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1/7

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without
blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: As indicated.

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with
G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless

otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable
iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all
hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors .

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy
Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)

complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for

normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi.
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed
to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction.
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced
not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup
masonry and concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches apart.
2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 1-inch- diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung.
6. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.

2.9 METAL FLOOR PLATE
A. Fabricate from rolled-steel floor plate.
1. Thickness: As indicated.
B. Provide steel angle supports as indicated.
2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.11 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items
supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each
unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in
concrete.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements

indicated below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and
measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before
packing with grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as
surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Interior load-bearing wall framing.
2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
3. Roof framing.
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding

design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Design Loads: As follows:
a. Dead Loads: Weights of materials and construction.

b. Live Loads: Minimum 30 psf.
c. Roof Loads: 30 psf.
d. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
e. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without

deflections greater than the following:
a. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the
wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft..
b. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of
the wall height.
c. Roof Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:

content.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1/9

C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed
metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical
fasteners.
1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation. This includes but not limited to roof framing.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification data.
F. Product test reports.
G. Research/evaluation reports.
A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency
indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural

Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal

framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification
for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-
Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."
1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."
2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled

content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of
grade and coating weight as follows:
1. Grade: As required by structural performance .

2. Coating: G90 or equivalent .

2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.

2. Section Properties: Conform to AISI specifications and standards.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel
studs.
C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form

header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as
follows:

2. Flange Width: 2 inches.
2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as
steel studs.
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of

accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure
through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track;

unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free
vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks,

consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.
2.4 ROOF FRAMING
A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:


2. Flange Width: 2 inches , minimum.
B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths
indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists.

2. Flange Width: 2 inches, minimum.
2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M,

Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for
framing members, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according
to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and
carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C .
D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to

sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing
per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure,
a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-

tapping steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard

elsewhere.
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.
C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim
track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform
bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the
top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and
with connections securely fastened.
C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads
comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces
and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has
been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.
Independently frame both sides of joints.
F. Install insulation, specified inDivision 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior

framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings,
that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
standard punched openings.
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to
a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately
and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:
1. Anchor Spacing: 32 inches.
B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch
between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of
studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 12 inches.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls
or warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where
studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously
reinforce track to transfer loads.
F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to

supporting structure as indicated.
G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above
openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required
to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web
stiffeners, or gusset plates.
1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as
indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly
distribute loads.
2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor
tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same
as full-height wall studs.
H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to

support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar
work requiring attachment to framing.
1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud

manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case,
considering weight or load resulting from item supported.
I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches. Fasten at each stud
intersection.
1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of

punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for
framing members up to 6 inches deep.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness
indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs.
Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or
flanges.
3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten
to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at
ends of bracing and anchor to structure.
K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web

stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a
complete and stable wall-framing system.
3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely
anchor to supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to[ top and] bottom track, unless otherwise indicated.
Space studs as follows:
1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls
or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of

vertical loads while providing lateral support.
1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.

2. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.
3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary
building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but
not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within
12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet
straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of
width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and
secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch centers.
2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of

punched studs.

indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs.
Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or
flanges.
4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners,
clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a
complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system.
3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten
track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop
Drawings.
B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final
position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist
hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:
1. Joist Spacing: 12 inches.
D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting
joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section
located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist
reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist
intersection as follows:
1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to

joist webs.
indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten
flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.
G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom

flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure
pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to
provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated

and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION RSD/7590
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Composite floor deck.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. LEED Submittal:

content.
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to
other construction.
D. Product certificates.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural

Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units

identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing

and inspecting agency.
2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing
and inspecting agency.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 1/4

C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
D. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled

A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers’

plants shall reside within 500 miles of the project site.
2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised
pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and
Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the
minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33,
G90 zinc coating.
2. Profile Depth: 3 inches.
3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply
with requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or

pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-

steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and
finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and

commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions,
requirements in this Section, and as indicated.
B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for

strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc
welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding
work.
G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate

mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2
inches.
I. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to
supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures
to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open
ends of ribs and sides of deck.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.
3.3 REPAIRS
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both

surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and

SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes structural steel and grout.
1. Division 5 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for

additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code

of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract

Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated .

2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.
B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittal:
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator and testing agency.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1/6

G. Source quality-control reports.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M .
C. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.
D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.
E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-
finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55,
weldable].
1. Configuration: Hooked.
2. Finish: Plain .
D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 , straight.
1. Finish: Plain .
E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M .
1. Finish: Plain .
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: Comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I , zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting

2.4 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible.

Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" and AISC 360.
B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear

connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt
and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Slip critical.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances,

welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following
specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full
coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply
with the Contract Documents.
C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according

to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be

tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection
procedures, at testing agency's option:
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing

surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for
3.2 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of
bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom
surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids
remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Slip critical.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances,

welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of
temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to

RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according
to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not
be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply
with the Contract Documents.

SECTION 04904 - MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Removing efflorescence from masonry

2. Removing soluble salts from within brick and stone masonry. Two methods of
salt removal - or desalination - are described and include the application of a clay
poultice and the application of a sand:lime render.
B. Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are
specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."
C. Unit Prices: Clay masonry restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices
are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).
B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi (2750 to 5500 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4
L/s).
C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi (5500 to 8250 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
MASONRY EFFLUORESCENCE REMOVAL 04904 - 1/7

1. Each type of chemical cleaner.
E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of
surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in
detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for
each phase of the restoration work.
phase of restoration work, provide a written description, including evidence of
successful use on other comparable projects, and a testing program to
demonstrate their effectiveness for this Project.
F. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding

materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. Describe
in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used.
1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning
work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness
for this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm

that has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
cleaning work and 1 for repair work.
experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that clay
masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress.

masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results,
and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project
site inspection and assistance at no additional cost.


2. Masonry effluorescence removal: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for
each type of masonry material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced.
Erect sample panels into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to
demonstrate the quality of materials and workmanship.
3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) in area for each
type of clay masonry and surface condition.

deleterious effect.
prepared.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of masonry
cleaning.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Contractor will engage an independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of
replacement brick for testing.

F. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for masonry effluorescence removal from a

single source for each type of material required to ensure a match of continuous
quality.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in

C. Store materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

A. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above
and will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.

A. Order replacement materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion
of the Work.
B. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence:
1. Remove plant growth.

2. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry
materials.
3. Rake out existing mortar from joints indicated to be repointed.
4. Point existing mortar joints of masonry indicated to be restored.
5. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion
of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
6. Clean masonry surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Materials for removing effluorescence:
a. Clean, potable water
2. Materials for removing dissolved salts:
a. Clean natural fiber rags
b. Poulticing Materials:
1) Filler material for poultice: Use absorbent clay or diatomaceous
earth (attapulgite or sepiolite clay).
c. Distilled water
d. Sacrificial Render Materials:
1) Lime putty
2) Sand
e. Clean, potable water
B. Equipment:
1. Equipment for removing effluorescence:
a. Garden hose and nozzle
b. Stiff bristle brushes (nonmetallic)
c. Wood or plastic scrapers
2. Equipment for removing dissolved salts:
a. Plastic sheeting
b. Poultice Equipment:
1) Plasterer's float or broad trowel
2) Galvanized wire mesh
3) Galvanized staples
4) Pliers
5) Plastic sacks

c. Sacrificial Render Equipment:

1) Mesh screens
2) Plasterer's float or broad trowel
3) Hacksaw blade
3.1 PREPARATION

1. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored,
building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry
restoration work.
by such contact.
3. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning
solutions to unprotected surfaces.
B. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance
and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of
masonry restoration work.
1. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them
with a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof
masking tape. Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar
joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing
masonry.
3.2 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Revise below to suit building configuration and job conditions.
B. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Work from bottom to top of the
building for each scaffold drop.
C. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.
1. Use natural-fiber brushes only.
D. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
methods do not damage masonry.

a. Equip units with pressure gauges.
E. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an
angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
F. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature
between 140 and 160 deg F (60 and 71 deg C) at flow rates indicated.
G. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage
of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even
effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
3.3 REMOVING EFFLUORESCENCE
A. Before proceeding with steps to remove efflorescence, first decide the cause and
extent of the problem and make repairs as required:
B. Determine the location of the efflorescence. Examination may show where the water is
entering.
C. Examine the condition of the masonry:
D. Examine the wall for open gaps or cracks in joints and around openings that could
allow water to enter the building.
E. Carefully note the condition and profile of the mortar joints.
F. Repair cracks in masonry and/or repoint as necessary before proceeding with the
cleaning operations.
G. Examine wall sections and details of construction: Carefully examine roof and wall
junctures and flashing details for possible sources of moisture entry.
H. Examine laboratory test reports on the materials. The problem may stem from the
composition or misuse of the material.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Dry brush the surface with a stiff bristle (nonmetallic) brush, or wash it with clean, clear
water from a garden hose, supplemented by scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush if
necessary.
B. Remove sulfate crusts using a heavy wooden scraper.
C. If efflorescence is a persistent problem, it may be necessary to reduce the level of

soluble salts present within the masonry, outlined below.
3.5 REMOVING DISSOLVED SALTS:
A. Applying a Clay Poultice:

1. Saturate the wall for several days by spraying with mists of clean, clear water.

a. Mist the water evenly over the masonry surface at 18 gallons per hour from
fine spray heads mounted to a boom.
b. The length of time it takes to fully saturate the wall will depend on the type
of masonry, and its porosity (typically 72 hours).
c. Collect water run-off and drain safely away from the building during the
cleaning process.
2. When the wall is thoroughly saturated, mix filler material with enough distilled
water to form a soft, sticky paste. Mix by hand or use a small mechanical mixer.
Add the clay to the water, not water to clay.
3. Apply the poultice to the saturated wall in a single layer (no more than 1 inch
thick) using a plasterer's float or broad trowel.
4. To help bond the clay to the wall surface, press a light-gauge galvanized wire
mesh into the poultice and tack it carefully into joints with galvanized staples.
5. Protect the treated area from direct sun or rain with tarpaulins as needed.
6. Allow the poultice to remain in place about 1 month. As the poultice dries, the
clay will eventually lighten in color, crack, shrink and detach from the wall.
7. Remove the staples using pliers and roll up the clay and wire mesh.
8. Discard materials safely from the site. Thoroughly rinse the treated area with
clean, clear water and allow to dry.
9. Repeat the cycle of wetting and poulticing as needed to reduce the salts to an
acceptable level; Repointing may be required at the end of the desalination
treatment.
OR:
B. Applying a Sand:Lime Sacrificial Render:

1. Thoroughly saturate the wall with clean, clear water.
2. Mix 1 part slaked and screened lime putty with 4 parts fine sand.
3. Apply the sacrificial render at least 1/2 inch thick to both sides of the wall (if
possible) to a height of 2 inches above the salt crystallization/evaporation zone.
4. As the render surface begins to stiffen, roughen it with the fine-toothed edge of a
hacksaw blade. The salts from the wall will migrate into the render. As the salts
crystalize, the render will begin to crack and crumble.
5. Completely remove the dried render from the surface using a stiff bristle (non-
metallic) brush.
6. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water and allow to dry.
7. Repeat the entire application process as necessary to achieve the desired level
of cleanliness.
A. Upon completion of the masonry cleaning work, clean window glass and spattered
adjacent surface. Select 1 of 3 subparagraphs below.

SECTION 04903 – MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Removing paints and stains.

2. Repairing marble, including replacing damaged units.
3. Cleaning marble surfaces.
4. Repointing marble joints.
1. Division 4 Section "Stone Restoration and Cleaning."
C. Allowances: Quantity allowances for marble restoration and cleaning are specified in
D. Unit Prices: marble restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are
1.3 SUBMITTALS
with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Each type of mortar for pointing and marble rebuilding and repair in the form of
sample mortar strips, 6 inches (150 mm) long by 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, set in
aluminum or plastic channels.
MARBLE CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04903 - 1/11

E. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration and cleaning process, including
be used for each phase of the restoration and cleaning work.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced marble restoration and cleaning firm

experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that marble

marble cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results,

2. Marble Restoration: Prepare sample panels of 3 linear feet for each type of
3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 2 linear feet in length overlapping
restored marble for each type of surface condition.

deleterious effect.

4. Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas for each type of repointing

required; 1 for demonstrating methods and quality of workmanship expected in
removing mortar from joints and the other for demonstrating quality of materials
and workmanship expected in pointing mortar joints.
prepared.
6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of marble
D. Preconstruction Testing: Owner will engage an independent testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement brick
for testing.

F. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for marble restoration from a single source for
each type of material required to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture.

C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

A. Do not repoint mortar joints unless air temperature is between and 40 and 80 deg F (4
and 27 deg C) and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for marble repair
and mortar-joint pointing:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat mortar ingredients,
marble repair materials, and existing walls to produce temperatures between 40
and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).

2. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and
4 deg C), cover completed Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48
hours after repair and pointing.
3. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), provide
enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within
the enclosure for 48 hours after repair and pointing.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect restoration work when temperature and humidity

conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials.
Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above.
D. Clean marble surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and
will remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
E. Prevent grout or mortar used in repointing and repair work from staining face of
surrounding marble and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in
contact with exposed marble and other surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Oil paint on marble:
a. Materials
1. Baking soda or some other alkaline cleaner to be used to form the
poultice paste: Available from hardware store.
2. Liquid laundry bleach for making the paste
3. Mineral water
4. Plastic sheeting
5. Clean dry towels for blotting the area after treatment
b. Equipment
1. Glass or ceramic container for mixing the solution
2. Wooden utensil for stirring the ingredients
3. Wood or plastic spatula
4. Masking tape
2. Latex and acrylic paint on marble:
a. Manufacturers
1. ProSoCo, Inc.
P.O. Box 1578


800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
b. Materials
1. Heavy liquid methylene chloride paint stripper such as "509 Stripper"
(ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved equal.
c. Equipment
1. Wood or plastic spatulas and stiff fibre or jute brushes or removing the
sludge and curdled paint.
2. Stiff bristle brushes (non-metallic)
3. Dirt on marble:
a. Manufacturers:
1. BASF-Wyandotte Corporation
Chemical Specialties Division
1609 Biddle
Wyandotte, MI 48192
313/246-6100
2. ProSoCo, Inc.
P.O. Box 1578
800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
3. Eastern Marble Supply Company
P.O. Box 392
Scotch Plains, NJ 07076
908/789-6400
b. Materials
1. Liquid Marble Cleaner: A water-soluble non-acidic chemical cleaner
manufactured specifically for restorative type cleaning of polished and
honed marble surfaces. Cleaner shall contain no abrasives, grease,lye,
or other caustic or corrosive ingredients, such as "Sure Klean Liquid
Marble Cleaner" (ProSoCo, Inc.) or approved equal.
-OR-
Cleaning Detergent: A mildly alkaline phosphorous-free biodegradable
liquid soap.
-OR-
Household ammonia and distilled water
2. Cleaning Compound for Buffing a Honed Finish: An abrasive cleaning
compound, containing no caustic or harsh fillers, manufactured specifi-
cally for restorative type cleaning of honed marble surfaces such as
"Wyandotte Detergent" (BASF-Wyandotte Corporation) or approved
equal.
-OR-
Polishing Agent for Buffing a Polished Finish: A finely ground buffing
powder manufactured specifically for restorative type polishing of pol-
ished marble surfaces, such as "Marbalite #52" (Eastern Marble Supply
Company) or approved equal.

3. Clean, potable water
c. Equipment
1. Buffing pads for Polished Finish: Fiber brush pads manufactured spe-
cifically for restorative type polishing of polished marble surfaces
-OR-
Buffing Pads for Honed Finish: Synthetic pads manufactured specifi-
cally for restorative type cleaning of honed marble surfaces
2. Soft natural bristle brushes (DO NOT USE WIRE BRUSHES OR
STEEL WOOL)
3. Circular buffing machine (for floors)
-OR-
Hand-held buffing machine (for surfaces other than floors)
4. Mop and bucket (non-metallic)
5. Sponges
6. Clean, dry cloths
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
1. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce

mortar color indicated.
2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.
3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory
performance in marble mortars.
F. Water: Potable.
2.3 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Water for Cleaning: Potable.
B. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F (60 to 71 deg C).
C. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of

tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup (125 mL) of laundry detergent (Tide, All,

etc.), 5 quarts (5 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts (15 L) of

warm water for each 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required.
D. Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard nonacidic gel containing detergents

and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning marble surfaces. Cleaner
shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous waste
according to 40 CFR 261.
E. Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner

formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building
materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood.
2.4 MORTAR MIXES
A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry

condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known
measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer.
1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials

together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to
produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a
ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining
water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use
mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially
hardened material.
B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do

not adjust proportions without Architect's approval.
1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a

pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
C. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:
1. Pointing Mortar: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts colored-
or natural-mortar aggregate.
a. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar color required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION



building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from marble
restoration work.
by such contact.
2. Do not clean marble during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions
to unprotected surfaces.
course of marble restoration work.
3.2 OIL PAINT ON MARBLE:
A. EXAMINATION
1. Examine the marble CAREFULLY to determine the cause of staining before pro-
ceeding with any cleaning operation.
NOTE: DO NOT USE BLEACH ON DARK COLORED STONES AS THIS WILL

CAUSE THE STONE TO LIGHTEN.
1. Protect adjacent painted surfaces.
2. Rinse the area to be treated with mineral water.
3. Pour the liquid laundry bleach in a glass or ceramic bowl.
4. Thoroughly moisten the stained surface with this liquid. Be sure to dampen well
beyond the stain.
5. Mix the remaining liquid with the white absorbent material to form a paste the
consistency of oatmeal or cake icing. (Approximately one pound of paste is
needed for every square foot of surface area to be treated.)
6. Using a wooden or plastic spatula, apply the paste to the stained surface in lay-
ers no more than 1/4 inch thick. The poultice should extend well beyond the
stain to prevent forcing the stain into previously clean stone.
7. Check the coating for air pockets or voids.
8. After the poultice has been applied, cover it with damp cloths to keep the poultice
moist.
9. Leave the cloths in place overnight.
10. Remove the cloths and wet the poultice with mineral water.

11. Remove the poultice with a wooden or plastic spatula to avoid scratching the sur-
face.
12. Thoroughly rinse the treated area with mineral water, blot, and allow to dry com-
pletely.
13. If there is residual staining, repeat the procedure.
3.3 LATEX AND ACRYLIC PAINT ON MARBLE:
A. Examination
1. Examine the marble surface CAREFULLY to determine the cause of staining
before proceeding with any cleaning operation.
B. Application
1. Thoroughly rinse the stained area with clean, clear water.
2. Apply a thixotropic paste of methylene chloride paint stripper to the surface and
allow to dry; follow manufacturer's instructions.
3. Remove dried paste with a wooden spatula.
4. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water and allow to dry.
5. Repeat the process as necessary to sufficiently remove the stain.
3.4 DIRT ON MARBLE:
A. Preparation
1. Protection: Prevent chemical cleaning and stain removal solutions from coming
into contact with other surfaces which could be damaged by such contact.
a. Prior to cleaning, remove cellophane tape, masking tape, etc. from surface.
B. Application
NOTE: Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner which results in uniform
coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, interstices and which produces
an even effect without streaking or damage to marble surfaces. CLEAN TO ACHIEVE
A DESIRED (NOT NEW) APPEARANCE.
1. Cleaning Honed Marble:
a. Machine buff with a cleaning compound (see Materials, Section 2.02 B.
above):
1) Thoroughly wet honed marble surface with hot water.
2) Sprinkle cleaning compound onto surface.
3) Buff surfaces using a large circular buffing machine with a synthetic pad
for floors or a hand-held machine for other surfaces to lift dirt build-up.
4) Treat edges and corners of surfaces not accessible with the hand-held
machine.
5) Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean, clear water to remove loosened dirt
and standing water. Change rinse water frequently and repeat rinsing as
required to completely remove water and dirt residue from surface.
6) Repeat process as to achieve the desired appearance.
7) Dry surfaces with clean, dry cloths or dry mop floors after rinsing to pre-
vent streaking.
-OR-

b. Follow procedures in Section 3. below.
2. Cleaning Polished Marble:

a. Machine buff with a polishing agent (see Materials, Section 2.02 B. above):
1) Mix polishing agent with water to create a paste compound as recom-
mended by manufacturer.
2) Apply paste mixture to surface and buff using a hand-held machine with a
fiber brush buffing pad. Treat areas of approximately 9 sq. ft. at a time,
first running the pad horizontally and then vertically across surface.
3) Repeat process as necessary to achieve the desired appearance.
4) Final polish by first wetting with clean water followed by running a clean
buffing pad across the surface until dry.
-OR-
b. Follow procedures in Section 3. below.
3. Cleaning Either Honed or Polished Marble:

a. Apply a liquid marble cleaner to the surface (see Materials, Section 2.02 A.
above):
1) Apply cleaner to honed or polished marble surface using a stiff bristle
brush.
2) Allow cleaner to remain on surface for period recommended by chemical
cleaner manufacturer taking care not to allow cleaning material to dry.
3) Sponge rinse surface thoroughly using clean, clear water to completely
remove dirt and cleaner residue. Change rinse water frequently.
4) Repeat process as necessary to achieve the desired level of cleanliness.
5) Wipe the surface with a clean, dry cloth to prevent streaking.
-OR-
b. Apply a mild detergent solution to the surface (see Materials, Section 2.02 A.
above):
1) Mix mild detergent with warm water to create cleaning solution -OR- mix 1
ounce soft soap, 1 quart warm distilled water and 1 ounce household
ammonia.
2) Thoroughly wet the honed or polished marble surface with hot water.
3) Apply cleaning solution with a cloth, sponge or soft-fibered brush. Wash
in small overlapping areas.
4) Sponge rinse surface thoroughly using clean, clear water to completely
remove dirt and cleaner residue. Change rinse water frequently.
5) Wipe the surface dry with clean, soft cloths to prevent streaking.
3.5 REPOINTING MARBLE
A. Examination
1. Examine the marble surface CAREFULLY to determine the extent of loose and
missing joints before proceeding with any raking and repointing operation.
B. Rake out joints as follows:
1. Rake out loose mortar from joints to depths not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or not
less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar.

2. Remove mortar from marble surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals
with square backs and to expose marble for contact with pointing mortar. Brush,
vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of marble or widen joints. Replace damaged marble.
a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval
based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control
program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without
damaging marble. Quality-control program shall include provisions for
supervising performance and preventing damage due to worker fatigue.
C. Point joints as follows:
1. Rinse marble surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time
rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run
off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was
removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater
than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer
thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer.
3. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
4. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for at least 72 hours.
5. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing marble, allow mortar to
harden at least 14 days before beginning cleaning work.
3.6 FINAL CLEANING
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed marble surfaces of excess
mortar and foreign matter; use stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes and clean water, spray
applied at a low pressure.
B. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
C. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.

04902 CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. SUMMARY
1. This Section includes the following:
a. Removing plant growth.
b. Repairing stonework, including replacing damaged units.
c. Cleaning exposed stone surfaces.
d. Repointing mortar joints.
e. Stone consolidation treatment.
2. Related Sections include the following:
a. Division 4 Section "Clay Masonry Restoration and Cleaning."
b. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in restored stone
construction.
3. Allowances: Quantity allowances for stone restoration and cleaning are specified in
4. Unit Prices: Stone restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices are
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm
B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. LEED Submittals:
1. Credit MR 5.1: If manufacturer is located 500 miles or less from Project site, provide
product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured
materials. Include statement indicating cost for each regionally manufactured
material
2. If low VOC product is available which meets Credit EQ 4.2 AND required end result,
submit substitution request for Architect’s approval.
CAST STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 1/17

1. Each new exposed material to be used for replacing existing materials. Include in
each set of samples the full range of colors and textures to be expected in the
completed Work.
a. 12-by-12-inch minimum stone samples.
2. Each type of mortar for pointing and stone rebuilding and repair in the form of sample
mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a. Each type of repair anchor.
b. Each type of adhesive.
c. Each type of chemical cleaner.
3. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
4. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection
of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe
in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used
for each phase of the restoration work.
a. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any
b. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of
surrounding materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during
operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used.
c. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness for
this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced stone restoration and cleaning firm that
2. Field Supervision: Require restoration specialist firms to maintain an experienced
full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that stone restoration and
cleaning are in progress
3. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing
masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful
results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation
and Project site inspection and assistance at no additional cost

4. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to
a. Locate mockups on the building where directed by Architect.
b. Stonework Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of
stone material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample panels
into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the quality of
materials and workmanship.
c. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of stone
and surface condition.
1) Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible
deleterious effect.
2) Allow a waiting period of not less than 7 days after completion of sample
3) Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high
by 72 inches wide for each type of repointing required; one for demonstrating
methods and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints
and the other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship
expected in pointing mortar joints.
4) Stone Consolidation Treatment: Demonstrate materials and methods to be
used on a sample panel approximately 4 sq. ft. in area.
5) Insert other mockups as required.
6) Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when samples will
be prepared.
7) Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of stone
8) Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
5. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in
a. Preconstruction Stone Tests: Test stone according to ASTM C 97 for absorption
and bulk specific gravity, ASTM C 99 for modulus of rupture, and ASTM C 170 for
compressive strength.
b. Test each proposed type of replacement stone.
6. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for stone restoration from a single source for
each type of material required (stone, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of
quality, color, pattern, and texture.
A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship stone and accessories strapped together in suitable
packs or pallets or in crates or heavy-duty containers.


containers, labeled with type and name of product and manufacturer.
D. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required
characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
E. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature
requirements for storage.
A. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair stone unless air temperature is between 40 and
80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for stone repair and
mortar-joint pointing:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, stone repair
materials, and existing walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
a. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed
Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and
pointing.
b. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat
to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after
repair and pointing.

apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above.
1. Clean stone surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will
remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
D. Apply stone consolidation treatment only when surface and air temperatures are
between 50 and 90 deg F and rain is not expected within 24 hours.
surrounding stone and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in contact
with exposed stone and other surfaces.
1. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
of the Work.
B. Perform stone restoration work in the following sequence:


2. Repair existing stonework, including replacing existing stone with new stone
materials.
3. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of
water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
4. Clean stone surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning.
6. Point existing mortar joints of stone indicated to be restored.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS

1. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar:
a. Jahn Restoration Mortar; Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.
b. Custom System 45; Edison Chemical Systems, Inc.
2. Non-acidic Gel Cleaner:
a. Sure Klean 942 Masonry Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
3. Non-acidic Liquid Cleaner:
a. Bio-Cleanse; Dominion Restoration, Inc.
4. Mild Acidic Cleaner:
a. DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner; Dominion Restoration, Inc.
b. Sure Klean Light-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
5. Acidic Cleaner:
a. Diedrich 101-G Granite, Terra Cotta, and Brick Cleaner; Diedrich Technologies,
Inc.
b. Hydroclean Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra Cotta Cleaner (HT-626);
Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
c. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
d. Sure Klean Interior Stone Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
e. Sure Klean 1028 Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
f. Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
6. One-Part Limestone Cleaner:
a. Hydroclean Limestone and Marble Cleaner and Brightener (HT-907);
b. Sure Klean Limestone Restorer; ProSoCo, Inc.

7. Two-Part Limestone Cleaner:

a. Diedrich Limestone Cleaner Prerinse (707) and Neutralizer After-Rinse (707N);
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. Hydroclean Limestone and Marble Precleaner (HT-704) and Hydroclean
Limestone and Marble Cleaner and Brightener (HT-907); Hydrochemical
Techniques, Inc.
c. Sure Klean Limestone Prewash and Afterwash; ProSoCo, Inc.
8. Alkaline Paint Remover:
a. Diedrich 404/606/606X Paint Remover; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. Hydroclean Heavy Duty Paint Remover (HT-716); Hydrochemical Techniques,
Inc.
c. Enviro Strip #1; ProSoCo, Inc.
d. Enviro Strip #2; ProSoCo, Inc.
e. 1217 Poultice/Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
f. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
9. Solvent-Type Paint Remover:
a. Diedrich 505 Special Coatings Stripper; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. Diedrich 505X Dry Strip; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
c. Dominion Multi-Layer Paint & Graffiti Remover; Dominion Restoration, Inc.
d. Hydroclean Solvent Paint Remover (HT-300); Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
e. Non-Methylene Chloride Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
f. Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
g. Sure Klean 859 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
h. Sure Klean 940 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
10. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover:
a. Enviro Strip #3; ProSoCo, Inc.
b. Enviro Strip #4; ProSoCo, Inc.
11. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent:
a. Diedrich Acid Guard; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. Sure Klean Acid Stop; ProSoCo, Inc.
12. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive:
a. A-199-T/B-439-T; Bonstone Materials Corp.
b. Akemi; Wood and Stone Co.
13. Mortar-to-Stone Adhesive:
a. Sikadur Hi-Mod Epoxy, Sikastix 370; Sika Corporation.
14. Stone Consolidation Treatment:

a. Conservare OH Stone Strengthener; ProSoCo, Inc.

15. Stone Consolidation and Water-Repellent Treatment:
16. Conservare H Stone Strengthener; ProSoCo, Inc.
2.02 CAST STONE MATERIALS
A. Cast Stone: Provide cast building stone of variety, color, finish, size, and shape to
match existing stone.
B. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested
according to ASTM C 114.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not more
than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
3. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce mortar
color indicated.
a. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.
b. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.
c. If known, indicate source of sand and size and gradation.
5. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
performance in stone mortars.
6. Factory-Mixed Patching Mortar: Cement-based vapor-permeable mortar, custom-
manufactured for patching stone and formulated to match stone in color and texture.
7. Water: Potable.

1. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
B. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium

polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent (Tide, All, etc.), 5 quarts of 5
percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of
solution required.
C. Non-acidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard Non-acidic gel containing detergents

and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning stone surfaces. Cleaner
shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous waste
according to 40 CFR 261.

D. Non-acidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner

E. Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no

hydrochloric, hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; chlorine bleaches; or caustic soda.
F. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength acidic stone restoration cleaner

composed of hydrofluoric acid blended with other acids, including a trace of phosphoric
acid, and combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors.
G. One-Part Limestone Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard one-part acidic formulation for

cleaning limestone.
H. Two-Part Limestone Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard 2-part system consisting of an

alkaline cleaner for prewash and an acid neutralizer for afterwash.
I. Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for

removing paint coatings from masonry.
J. Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard thixotropic, water-rinsable

solvent formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.
K. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, thixotropic,

water-rinsable solvent formulation, containing no methanol or methylene chloride, for
L. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable

masking material for protecting glass, metal, and polished stone surfaces from the
damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.
A. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: 2-part polyester or epoxy-resin stone adhesive with a 15- to

45-minute cure at 70 deg F, in formulation (knife or flowing grade) recommended by
adhesive manufacturer for type of stone repair indicated, and matching stone color.
B. Mortar-to-Stone Adhesive: High-modulus, high-strength, moisture-insensitive epoxy

adhesive with a pot life of 30 minutes at 40 deg F.
C. Stone Consolidation Treatment: Ready-to-use product designed for the consolidation of

masonry materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and exposure to pollutants.
Treatment shall be composed of silicic-ethyl esters, a neutral catalyst, and solvents.
D. Stone Consolidation and Water-Repellent Treatment: Ready-to-use product designed

for the consolidation and water-repellent treatment of masonry materials that have
deteriorated due to weathering and exposure to pollutants. Treatment shall be
composed of silicic-ethyl esters, a neutral catalyst, a silane water repellent, and solvents.
E. Stone Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing anchors in
size and type. Fabricate anchors and dowels from Type 304 stainless steel.

2.06 MORTAR
A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry

B. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining water in small portions until
reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final
mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not
adjust proportions without Architect's approval.
1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-
cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
2. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:
a. Pointing Mortar for Stone: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts
colored- or natural-mortar aggregate.
b. Pointing Mortar for Stone: 1 part white portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts
colored- or natural-mortar aggregate
c. Rebuilding Mortar: 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts colored-
or natural-mortar aggregate.
d. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N,
unless otherwise indicated, with cementitious material limited to portland cement
and lime.
e. Patching Mortar for Stone: Provide mix composed of white and gray cement
combined with lime and selected aggregates to produce a color matching the
color of existing stone. Proportion mix with 2 parts cement, 2 parts lime, and 6
parts aggregate.
2.07 CHEMICAL CLEANING
A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions of concentration recommended

by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Unpolished Stone: Unless otherwise indicated, dilute with
water to produce a hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than
that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
1. Use only on unpolished granite, unpolished dolomite marbles, and siliceous
sandstone.
2. Acidic Cleaner for Polished Stone: Dilute with water to a concentration
demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage the polished
surface, but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.

a. Use only on polished granites and polished dolomite marbles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting
building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products.

building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from stone
restoration work.
motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be injured by
such contact.
2. Do not clean stone during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that
course of stone restoration work
5. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with chemical cleaners by covering them with
a liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Apply masking agent to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not
apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
3.02 STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, stone that has deteriorated, shifted, or
is damaged beyond repair.
B. Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area. Maintain
flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
C. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged stone and stone surrounding
removed units to prepare for resetting.
D. Replace removed stone with salvaged stone, where possible, or with new stone
matching existing stone, including size. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting
and set units in full bed of mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Tool joints after setting to match joints of surrounding stone.
F. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in
repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone.

3.03 STONE REPAIR
A. Carefully remove loose stone fragments in areas to be repaired. Reuse only pieces of
spalled stone that are in sound condition.
B. Remove soil, loose stone particles, mortar, and other debris or foreign material from the
surfaces to be bonded on both the fragment and the building stone from which fragment
was removed by cleaning with a stiff-fiber brush.
C. Apply adhesive to comply with adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. Coat

bonding surface of building stone with stone-to-stone adhesive, completely filling all
voids and covering all surfaces. Fit stone fragments onto building stone while adhesive
is still tacky and hold fragment securely in place until adhesive has cured.
1. After adhesive has fully cured, further anchor stone fragments with 1/4-inch diameter,
plain stainless-steel rods set into 1/4-inch diameter holes drilled at a 45-degree
downward angle through the face of the stone. Center and space anchor rods
between 3 and 5 inches apart and at least 2 inches from any edge. Insert rods at
least 2 inches into backing stone and 2 inches into fragment with end countersunk at
least 3/4 inch from the exposed face of the stone.
2. Clean residual adhesive from edges. Wet stone, fill chipped areas, and drill holes
with patching mortar. Avoid featheredging. Finish patched areas to match texture of
and be level with adjacent stone surfaces. Keep patching mortar damp for 72 hours.
3.04 STONE PATCHING
A. Cut out deteriorated stone and adjacent stone that has begun to deteriorate. Remove
additional stone so patch will not have feathered edges and will be at least 1/4 inch thick.
B. Remove loose particles, soil, debris, oil, and other contaminants from existing stone
units at locations indicated by cleaning with a stiff-fiber brush.
C. Brush-coat stone surfaces with mortar-to-stone adhesive complying with manufacturer's

-OR-
D. Brush-coat stone surfaces with a slurry coat of patching mortar complying with
E. Place patching mortar in layers no thicker than 2 inches. Roughen surface of each layer
to provide a key for the next layer.
F. Build patch up 1/4 inch above surrounding stone and carve surface to match adjoining
stone after mortar has hardened.
G. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until mortar has set.
H. Unacceptable patches are those with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone
at edges, and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture. Remove
patches and refill to provide patches free of these defects.

3.05 CLEANING STONE, GENERAL
A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each stone material and location.
C. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning
methods do not damage stonework.
1. Equip units with pressure gages.
D. For chemical cleaner spray application, use a low-pressure tank or chemical pump
suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped spray tip.
E. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle
of 25 to 50 degrees.
1. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining
temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
2. For steam application, use a steam generator capable of delivering live steam at
nozzle.
F. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of
all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even
effect without streaking or damaging stone surfaces
G. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from stone
surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and
allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil or debris from
open joints to whatever depth they occur.
1. Apply ammonium sulfamate or another acceptable root-killing material to plant roots
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply materials to plants
that are to remain.
H. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply
with the following:
1. Prolonged Spraying: Soak stone surfaces by applying water continuously and
uniformly to a limited area for the time indicated. Apply water at low pressures and
low volumes in multiple fine sprays using perforated hoses or multiple spray nozzles.
Erect a protective enclosure constructed of polyethylene sheeting to cover area
being sprayed.
I. Spray Applications: Spray apply water to stone surfaces to comply with requirements
indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure, volume, and equipment.
Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of stone

and apply water from side to side in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and
an even effect.
1. Steam Wash: Apply steam to stone surfaces at pressures not exceeding 80 psi.
Hold nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of stone and apply steam from side to side
or in direction of tooling in overlapping bands to produce uniform coverage and an
even effect.
J. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to stone surfaces to

comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray
application methods, at Contractor's option, unless otherwise indicated. Do not allow
chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended
by manufacturer.
K. Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi, unless
1. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same stone
surfaces more than twice. If additional cleaning is required, use a steam wash.
2. Bottom to top rinsing helps ensure a thorough and uniform rinse; rinse water leaving
bottom of wall while top is being rinsed will only be clear if entire wall is thoroughly
rinsed. Also, entire wall will be wet when rinsing is completed, resulting in more
uniform drying and less streaking.
3. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each
treated area at each stage or scaffold setting.
3.06 CLEANING STONEWORK
A. Detergent Cleaning: Clean stonework with a detergent solution applied as follows:

1. Wet stone with waterof a temperature recommended by the manufacturer applied by
low-pressure spray.
2. Scrub stonework with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is
thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove
soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that
adequate fresh detergent is used and that stone surface remains wet.
3. Rinse with cold water to remove detergent solution and soil:
a. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.
b. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup.
B. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean stone with a mild acidic cleaner applied as
follows:
1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply cleaner to stone. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below:
a. As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and soil.


4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce the cleaning effect
established by mockup. Do not apply more than twice.
C. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean stonework with a Non-acidic gel cleaner
applied as follows:
2. Apply Non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints and
crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly
covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being
cleaned.
3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below:
a. As established by mockup.
4. Remove bulk of Non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal.
D. One-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning: Clean limestone with one-part limestone

cleaner applied as follows:
2. Apply one-part limestone cleaner to stone by using a soft-fiber brush or low-pressure
spray equipment. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Immediately repeat application of one-part limestone cleaner as indicated above over
the same area.
4. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and
soil.
E. Two-Part Limestone Chemical Cleaning: Clean limestone with 2-part limestone cleaner
applied as follows:
2. Apply alkaline prewash cleaner to stone by brush or roller. Let cleaner remain on
surface for period recommended by cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. A specific time should be inserted in subparagraph above as determined by
preliminary testing. Time will vary depending on temperature and relative humidity.
soil.
5. Apply an afterwash acid neutralizer to stone, while surface is still wet, using low-
pressure spray equipment, a deep-nap roller, or a soft-fiber brush. Let neutralizer

remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise

indicated.
soil.
F. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from stonework as follows:
1. Apply paint remover to dry, painted stonework with brushes.
2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.
3. Rinse with cold water to remove chemicals and paint residue.
4. Apply an acidic cleaner to stonework, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure
spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Remove paint from stonework as
follows:
1. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted stonework with natural-fiber cleaning
brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush.
2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.
Agitate periodically with a stiff-fiber brush.
4. Apply rinse by low-pressure spray.
3.07 REPOINTING STONEWORK
A. Rake out joints as follows:

1. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not less
than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar.
2. Remove mortar from stonework surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals
with square backs and to expose stone for contact with pointing mortar. Brush,
vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of stone units or widen joints. Replace damaged stone units.
4. Cut out old mortar from vertical joints by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless
otherwise indicated. The use of a small-diameter (4”) blade power-operated grinder
to cut horizontal joints only is permitted based on submission by Contractor of a
satisfactory quality-control program and demonstrated ability of operators to use
tools without damaging stone. The quality-control program includes provisions for

B. Point joints as follows:

1. Rinse stonework-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time
rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off
and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to
depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until
a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become
thumbprint hard before applying the next layer.
3. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in 3
layers with first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth; third
layer, the remaining one-fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to become
thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing stone has rounded
edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take care not to spread mortar over
edges onto exposed stone surfaces or to featheredge mortar.
4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints,
unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing.
6. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing stone, allow mortar to harden at
least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.
3.08 STONE CONSOLIDATION TREATMENT
A. Apply treatment to clean, dry surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Remove areas of blind exfoliation and delamination before applying.
B. Apply in cycles (repeated applications) to small sections of stonework, not more than
100 sq. ft. in area. Each cycle shall consist of 3 successive saturating applications,
applied at 5- to 15-minute intervals, depending on drying conditions.
C. Apply by low-pressure spray to the point of rejection in each application. Apply from
bottom of section to top.
D. Apply 3 cycles, allowing treated surface to dry for 60 to 90 minutes between cycles.
E. Protect treated surfaces from rain for 48 hours after treatment.
F. Allow treated surfaces to dry for at least 21 days before repointing, patching, or applying
water repellents or sealants.
3.09 FINAL CLEANING
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stonework surfaces of excess


SECTION 04901 - CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
1. Removing plant growth.

2. Repairing clay masonry, including replacing damaged units.
3. Reanchoring veneers.
4. Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces.
5. Repointing mortar joints.
B. Allowances: Quantity allowances for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are
specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."
C. Unit Prices: Clay masonry restoration and cleaning to be provided under unit prices
are described in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi ; 4 to 6 gpm.
B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi; 4 to 6 gpm.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
with requirements.
1. Each type of mortar for pointing and masonry rebuilding and repair in the form of
sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic
channels.
2. Each type of repair anchor.
CLAY MASONRY CLEANING AND RESTORATION 04901 - 1/21

D. Restoration program for each phase of the restoration process, including protection of
surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in
detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for
each phase of the restoration work.
E. Cleaning program indicating cleaning process, including protection of surrounding

materials on building and Project site, and control of runoff during operations. Describe
in detail the materials, methods, and equipment to be used.
1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for cleaning
comparable projects, and a testing program to demonstrate their effectiveness
for this Project.
A. Restoration Specialist: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm

experienced full-time supervisor on the Project site during times that clay
masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress.
B. Terra Cotta Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in

manufacturing architectural terra cotta units of similar size and complexity as those
required for the Work.
C. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in producing

masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results,
D. Mockups: Prepare field samples for restoration methods and cleaning procedures to


2. Masonry Repair: Prepare sample panels of size indicated for each type of
masonry material indicated to be patched, rebuilt, or replaced. Erect sample
panels into an existing wall, unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate the
quality of materials and workmanship.
3. Cleaning: Prepare sample approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of clay
masonry and surface condition.

deleterious effect.
4. Repointing: Prepare 2 separate sample areas approximately 36 inches high by

72 inches wide for each type of repointing required; 1 for demonstrating methods
and quality of workmanship expected in removing mortar from joints and the
other for demonstrating quality of materials and workmanship expected in
pointing mortar joints.
prepared.
6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting the remainder of clay
masonry restoration and cleaning.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Owner will engage an independent testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing. Submit samples of each proposed type of replacement brick
for testing.
F. Preconstruction Testing: Engage an independent testing agency experienced in

1. Preconstruction Brick Tests: Test brick according to sampling and testing

methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water absorption,
5-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of absorption
(suction).
a. Test each proposed type of replacement brick.

b. Test each type of existing brick indicated for replacement. Carefully
remove existing bricks from locations designated by Architect.
G. Source of Materials: Obtain materials for masonry restoration from a single source for
each type of material required (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) to ensure a match of
quality, color, pattern, and texture.

A. Carefully pack, handle, and ship masonry units and accessories strapped together in

D. Store aggregates, covered and in a dry location, where grading and other required
characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
E. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum

A. Do not repoint mortar joints or repair masonry unless air temperature is between and
40 and 80 deg F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of Work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair
and mortar-joint pointing:
1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair
materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and
120 deg F.
2. When mean daily air temperature is between 25 and 40 deg F, cover completed
Work with weather-resistant, insulating blankets for 48 hours after repair and
pointing.
3. When mean daily air temperature is below 25 deg F, provide enclosure and heat
to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 48 hours after
repair and pointing.

apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above.
D. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will
remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
surrounding masonry and other surfaces. Immediately remove grout and mortar in
contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.
F. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

of the Work.
B. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence:

2. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry
materials.
5. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion
of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
6. Clean masonry surfaces. Remove paint before general cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Diedrich Chemicals Restoration Technologies, Inc.

300A East Oak Street
Oak Creek, WI 53154
414/764-0058 or 800/323-3565
2. ProSoCo, Inc.
P.O. Box 1578
800/255-4255 or 913/281-2700
3. Union Carbide Corporation

Old Ridgebury Road
Danbury, CT 06817
203/794-2000
4. Rohm & Haas

Independence Mall West
Philadelphia, PA 19105
215/592-3000
5. GAF Corporation
1361 Alps Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
201/628-4127

6. Ashland Chemical
4550 N. East Expressway
Doraville, GA 30340
404/448-7010
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Terra Cotta:
a. Gladding, McBean & Co.

b. Studio S. Pottery.
c. Superior Clay Co.
d. W. D. Virtue Co.
2. Nonacidic Gel Cleaner:
a. Sure Klean 942 Masonry Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
3. Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner:
a. Bio-Cleanse; Dominion Restoration, Inc.
4. Alkaline Prewash Cleaner:
a. Sure Klean 766 Prewash; ProSoCo, Inc.
5. Mild Acidic Cleaner:
a. DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner; Dominion Restoration, Inc.

b. Sure Klean Light-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
6. Acidic Cleaner:
a. Diedrich 101G Granite, Terra Cotta, and Brick Cleaner; Diedrich

Technologies, Inc.
b. Hydroclean Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra Cotta Cleaner (HT-626);
c. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
d. Sure Klean 1028 Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
e. Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc.
7. Alkaline Paint Remover:
a. Diedrich 404/606/606X Paint Remover; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. Hydroclean Heavy Duty Paint Remover (HT-716); Hydrochemical
Techniques, Inc.
c. Enviro Strip #1; ProSoCo, Inc.
d. Enviro Strip #2; ProSoCo, Inc.
e. 1217 Poultice/Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
f. Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.

8. Adhesive Residue Remover:
a. Commercially available emulsified, non-corrosive, non-caustic liquid

solvent cleaner specifically formulated for removal of asphalt, grease, oil
and similar stains from brick, stone and other masonry surfaces, such as
"Sure Klean Asphalt and Tar Remover" (ProSoCo, Inc.), or approved
equal.
9. Ferrous-Based Stain Remover:

a. Commercially available liquid stain removing compound made up of
blended organic acids in combination with special chelating and wetting
agents specifically formulated for treatment and removal of metallic oxides
from masonry, such as "Sure Klean Ferrous Stain Remover" (ProSoCo,
Inc.), or approved equal.
10. Non-ionic detergent:

a. "Zyfo" or "Tergitol" (Union Carbide, or Ashland Chemical)
b. "Triton" (Rohm & Haas)
c. "Igepal" (GAF Corporation), or approved equal.
11. Trisodium Phosphate:
a. Strong base-type powdered cleaning material sold under brand names.

b. Other chemical or common names include Sodium Orthophosphate;
Tribasic sodium phosphate; Trisodium orthophosphate; TSP*; Phosphate of
soda.
12. Solvent-Type Paint Remover:
a. Diedrich 505 Special Coatings Stripper; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. Diedrich 505X Dry Strip; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
c. Dominion Multi-Layer Paint & Graffiti Remover; Dominion Restoration, Inc.
d. Hydroclean Solvent Paint Remover (HT-300); Hydrochemical Techniques,
Inc.
e. Non-Methylene Chloride Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
f. Sure Klean 509 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
g. Sure Klean 859 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
h. Sure Klean 940 Paint Stripper; ProSoCo, Inc.
13. Solvents such as acetone, lacquer thinner, N-methy-2-pyrrolidone Acetone

(C3H6O):
a. A volatile fragrant flammable liquid ketone used chiefly as a solvent and in
organic synthesis.
b. Other chemical or common names include Dimethyl ketone; Propanone
14. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover:

a. Enviro Strip #3; ProSoCo, Inc.
b. Enviro Strip #4; ProSoCo, Inc.
15. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent:

a. Diedrich Acid Guard; Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. Sure Klean Acid Stop; ProSoCo, Inc.
16. Filler material such as attapulgite clay, kaolin, fuller's earth, talc, chalk, cotton
pads, acid-free paper. (Do not use chalk or iron-containing clay with an acid sol-
vent as their chemical reaction will cancel the effectiveness of the acid).
17. Masonry Repair Anchors, Expansion Type:
a. Mechanical Repair Anchors; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

b. #521RA Repair/Restoration Anchor; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
18. Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type:
a. Dur-O-Flex; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

b. #391 Spiro Remedial Tie; Heckman Building Products, Inc.
c. Helifix HRT60; Helifix Ltd.
d. Helifix HRT80; Helifix Ltd.
2.2 MASONRY MATERIALS
A. Face Brick and Accessories: Provide face brick and accessories, including specially
molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration
work.
1. Provide units with color, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brick
work and with physical properties not less than those determined from
preconstruction testing of selected existing units.
2. Provide units with color, surface texture, and physical properties to match
Architect's sample. Match existing units in size and shape.
B. Building Brick: Provide building brick complying with ASTM C 62, of same vertical
dimension as face brick, for masonry work concealed from view.
1. Grade SW where in contact with earth.

2. Grade SW, MW, or NW for concealed backup.
C. Terra Cotta: Provide new terra cotta units to match existing terra cotta units in
compressive strength, color, gloss, surface texture, thickness and composition of
surface glaze, composition of body, profile, and dimensions.
1. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114.

C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Colored-Mortar Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand selected to produce

2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges.
3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar as closely as possible.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
performance in masonry mortars.
F. Water: Potable.
B. Warm Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
C. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium

polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent (Tide, All, etc.), 5 quarts of 5
percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of
solution required.
D. Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard nonacidic gel containing detergents

and chelating agents and specifically formulated for cleaning masonry surfaces.
Cleaner shall have a pH between 6 and 9 and shall not be considered a hazardous
waste according to 40 CFR 261.
E. Non-acidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner

F. Alkaline Prewash Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard alkaline cleaner for prewash

applications used only where followed by an acidic cleaner of type indicated for
afterwash.
G. Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no

hydrochloric, hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; chlorine bleaches; or caustic soda.
H. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength acidic masonry restoration cleaner

composed of hydrofluoric acid blended with other acids, including a trace of phosphoric
acid, and combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors.
I. Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard alkaline paste formulation for


J. Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard thixotropic, water-rinsable

solvent formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry.
K. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor,

thixotropic, water-rinsable solvent formulation, containing no methanol or methylene
chloride, for removing paint coatings from masonry.
L. Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming,

strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal, and polished stone surfaces
from the damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners.
A. Masonry Repair Anchors, Expansion Type: Mechanical fasteners designed for

masonry veneer stabilization consisting of a 1/4-inch diameter, Type 304 stainless-
steel rod with brass expanding shells at each end and a water-shedding washer in the
middle. Expanding shells shall be designed to provide positive mechanical anchorage
to veneer on one end and backup masonry on other end.
B. Masonry Repair Anchors, Spiral Type: Type 304 stainless-steel spiral rods designed to
anchor to backing and veneer. Anchors are flexible in plane of veneer but rigid
perpendicular to it.
1. Provide adhesive installed anchors complete with manufacturer's standard epoxy

adhesive and injection tubes, screens, sleeves, or other devices required for
installation.
2. Provide driven in anchors designed to be installed in drilled holes and relying on
screw effect rather than adhesive to secure them to backup and veneer.
C. Brushes: Natural fiber bristle only. The use of wire brushes or steel wool is not
permitted.
D. Wood spatula
2.6 MORTAR MIXES
A. Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to
ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious and aggregate material in a dry

1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials

together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to
produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a
ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 1 to 2 hours. Add remaining
water in small portions until reaching mortar of the desired consistency. Use

mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially

hardened material.
C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do

not adjust proportions without Architect's approval.
1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a

pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
D. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:
1. Pointing Mortar for Brick: 1 part portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts
colored- or natural-mortar aggregate.
2. Rebuilding Mortar: Same as pointing mortar.
3. Rebuilding Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N,
unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material content limited to portland
cement and lime.
2.7 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS
A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions of concentration

B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Brick: Unless otherwise indicated, dilute with water to
produce a hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that
recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
C. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Terra Cotta: Dilute with water to a concentration
demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage terra cotta surface,
but not greater than that recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION


building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from masonry
restoration work.
by such contact.

2. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning

solutions to unprotected surfaces.
course of masonry restoration work.
3.2 BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, bricks that are damaged, spalled, or
deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit replacement
with full-size units without damaging surrounding masonry.
B. Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain
flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
C. Salvage as many whole, undamaged bricks as possible.
D. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from salvaged brick by cleaning with brushes
and water. Store brick for reuse.
E. Clean remaining brick at edges of removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose
particles in preparation for replacement.
F. Install new or salvaged brick to replace removed brick. Fit replacement units into
bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven
saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
G. Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet clay bricks that have
ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g per 30 sq. in. per min.
Use wetting methods that ensure units are nearly saturated but surface dry when laid.
Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing units.
1. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding

existing brickwork.
2. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar
joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing
masonry.
3.3 TERRA COTTA REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

A. Carefully remove by hand, at locations indicated, terra cotta units that are damaged,
spalled, or deteriorated. Cut out full units from joint to joint and in a manner to permit
replacement with full-size units without damaging surrounding masonry.
B. Support and protect remaining masonry that was supported by removed units.
C. Remove mortar, dust, and loose particles from existing masonry surrounding removed
units in preparation for replacement. Clean with stiff-fiber brushes or by flushing with
water and compressed air.
D. Set replacement units in a full bed of mortar with both horizontal and vertical joints of
same width as existing units. Replace existing anchors with new anchors that match
existing anchors in size and type.
1. Embed anchors in and fill voids behind units with grout to match existing
construction.
E. Point new mortar joints to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry,
and rake out mortar used for laying terra cotta units before mortar sets.
3.4 REANCHORING VENEERS
A. Install masonry repair anchors in horizontal mortar joints and according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Install at not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically
and 32 inches o.c. horizontally, unless otherwise indicated. Install at locations to avoid
penetrating flashing.
B. Recess anchors at least 5/8 inch from surface of mortar joint and fill recess with
pointing mortar.
3.5 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold
B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location.

2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that
cleaning methods do not damage masonry.
a. Equip units with pressure gauges.
3. For chemical cleaner spray application, use a low-pressure tank or chemical

pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped
spray tip.

4. For water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at
an angle of 25 to 50 degrees.
5. For high-pressure water spray application, use a fan-shaped spray tip that
disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees.
6. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining
temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
7. For steam application, use a steam generator capable of delivering live steam at
nozzle.
C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage
of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even
effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
D. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove plant, moss, and shrub growth from
masonry surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at
roots and allowing to dry as long as possible before removal. Remove loose soil and
debris from open masonry joints to whatever depth they occur.
1. Apply ammonium sulfamate or another acceptable root-killing material to plant

roots according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply materials to
plants that are to remain.
E. Water Application Methods: Where water application methods are indicated, comply
with the following:
1. Spray Applications: Spray apply water to masonry surfaces to comply with

requirements indicated for location, purpose, water temperature, pressure,
volume, and equipment. Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6
inches from surface of masonry and apply water from side to side in overlapping
bands to produce uniform coverage and an even effect.
2. Steam Wash: Apply steam to masonry surfaces at pressures not exceeding 80
psi. Hold nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of masonry and apply steam from
side to side or in direction of tooling in overlapping bands to produce uniform
coverage and an even effect.
F. Chemical Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces

to comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray
application methods, at Contractor's option, unless otherwise indicated. Do not allow
chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or
1. Spray Application: Apply chemical cleaners at pressures not exceeding 50 psi,

2. Reapplying Chemical Cleaners: Do not apply chemical cleaners to same
masonry surfaces more than twice. If additional cleaning is required, use a
steam wash.
G. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each
treated area at each stage or scaffold setting.
3.6 CLEANING BRICKWORK

A. Cold-Water Wash: Clean brick masonry with cold water applied as follows:
1. Low-pressure spray.
B. Warm-Water Wash: Clean brick masonry with warm water applied as follows:
C. Detergent Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a detergent solution applied as follows:
1. Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.

2. Wet masonry with warm water applied by low-pressure spray.
3. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is
thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to
remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure
that adequate fresh detergent is used and that masonry surface remains wet.
4. Rinse with cold water to remove detergent solution and soil.
5. Rinse with warm water to remove detergent solution and soil.
established by mockup.
D. Non-acidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a non-acidic liquid
cleaner applied as follows:
1. Wet masonry with water of a temperature recommended by the manufacturer

applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply cleaner to masonry. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated
below:
a. As determined by testing during the mockup.
E. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a mild acidic cleaner applied
as follows:

below:

F. Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with an acidic cleaner applied as
follows:

below:
G. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean brick masonry with a non-acidic gel cleaner
applied as follows:
1. Wet masonry with water of a temperature recommended by manufacturer applied

by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints
and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be
uniformly covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout
area being cleaned.
4. Remove bulk of non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for

disposal.
5. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and soil.
H. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paint Remover: Remove paint from masonry surfaces as
follows:
1. Apply paint remover to dry, painted masonry with brushes.

2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by

manufacturer.
4. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and paint residue.
5. Apply an acidic cleaner to masonry, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure
spray equipment or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on surface for period
I. Adhesive Removal:
1. Remove large accumulations by mechanical scraping with a wood spatula taking

care to avoid damage to masonry.
2. Brush apply solvent-based water rinse-able cleaner with a fine bristle brush to
area damaged by tape residue.
3. Allow to dwell for three to five minutes. Agitate with a stiff fiber bristle brush as
necessary.
4. Thoroughly rinse with low pressure water (400 psi).
5. Repeat application to remove persistent stains and deeply embedded residues.
J. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Remove paint from masonry
surfaces as follows:
1. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted masonry with natural-fiber

cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush.
2. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by
manufacturer. Agitate periodically with a stiff-fiber brush.
3.7 GRAFFITTI REMOVAL
A. Identify the substance used to create the graffiti.
B. Examine the surrounding area for signs of what may have been used to create the
graffiti (i.e. spray cans or other debris).
C. Begin with the least harsh method of removing paint.
1. Wash the area with a solution of trisodium phosphate (TSP) and water. Apply with
a non-metallic brush.
2. When the paint has softened, scrape off as much as possible with a wooden
scraper.
3. Wash the area again using a non-ionic detergent and water.
4. Thoroughly rinse the surface with clean, clear water.

D. If a stronger method is necessary:
1. Brush on a commercial paint remover (either a solvent such as lacquer thinner or

acetone, or a methylene chloride-based remover may be used) with a non-metallic
brush. Follow manufacturers instructions for application and dwell time.
2. When the paint has softened, scrape off as much as possible with a wooden
scraper.
3. Wash the area again using a detergent and soapy
water and rinse thoroughly with clean water.
E. For felt tip marks, use a poultice:
1. Pre-wet surface using denatured alcohol.

Saturate a soft cloth with a mixture of acetone, lacquer thinner and N-methy-2-
pyrrolidone. Test proportions to find the most effective mixture.
2. Gently rub the stain with the saturated cloth.
3. To remove remaining stain, prepare a poultice using the same solvent mixture as
used in C.2. above mixed with a filler material such as attapulgite clay, kalin or
fuller's earth (all clays), talc, chalk or whiting, shredded acid-free paper, or cotton
pads. Mix to form a thick paste.
4. Thoroughly wet the masonry surface to be treated with clean, clear water.
5. Apply the mixture to the stained area in a 1/4" to 3/4 " thick layer using a wood or
plastic spatula and allow to dry. Be sure to spread the poultice well beyond the
stained area. The liquid portion of the paste will migrate into the concrete where it
will dissolve some of the staining material. Then the liquid will gradually move back
beyond the concrete surface and into the poultice, where it will evaporate, leaving
the dissolved staining material in the poultice.
6. Keep poultice moist until stain has lifted. Exact length of time will vary and will re-
quire periodic inspection of the substrate.
7. Once it appears that the stain has lifted, allow the poultice to dry out. As the poul-
tice dries,
the solvent is re-absorbed by the poultice material bringing with it the stain.
8. When the poultice has dried, brush or scrape it off with a wooden scraper.
9. Using a stiff bristle brush, scrub the surface with scouring powder and clean water
to remove any residual staining.
10. Wash all residue using a non-ionic detergent.
11. Thoroughly rinse the area with clean, clear water and allow to dry.
12. Repeat the process as necessary to sufficiently remove the stain.
3.8 FERROUS STAIN REMOVAL
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Commence ferrous stain removal immediately after general cleaning of masonry.

2. Proceed from the top of the wall downward. Work shall not be considered complete
until the Contracting Officer's representative has so notified the Contractor in writ-
ing.
3. Filter the water with a 5 micron particulate filter placed in line with the water supply.
Replace the filter as needed during the work.

B. Application:
1. Prewet wall with clean, clear water immediately before applying ferrous-based stain
remover.
2. Apply ferrous-based stain remover with natural fiber bristle brush. Allow to dwell on
the surface for three to five minutes.
3. Rinse all traces of chemical and residue with pressurized cold water. Repeat proce-
dure if necessary. Rinse water pressure shall not exceed 300 psi, and shall be
sprayed through nozzles fitted with 15 to 20 wide nozzle tips. Nozzles shall be held
perpendicular to the surface at a working distance of 1.5 to 2.5 feet. All pressure
pumps shall be equipped with working pressure gauges.
4. Repeat procedure if necessary to remove all traces of ferrous stain.
3.7 CLEANING TERRA COTTA
A. Warm-Water Wash: Clean terra cotta with warm water applied as follows:
B. Steam Cleaning: Remove soil from terra cotta by applying live steam.
C. Non-acidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with non-acidic gel cleaner
applied as follows:
1. Wet terra cotta with cold water applied by low-pressure spray.

2. Wet terra cotta with warm water applied by low-pressure spray.
3. Apply non-acidic gel cleaner in a 1/8-inch thickness by brush, working into joints
and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be
uniformly covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout
area being cleaned.
a. As established by mockup.
5. Remove bulk of non-acidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for

disposal.
7. Rinse with warm water to remove chemicals and soil.
D. Non-acidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with a non-acidic liquid cleaner
applied as follows:
E. Mild Acidic Chemical Cleaning: Clean terra cotta with a mild acidic cleaner applied as
follows:

2. Apply cleaner to terra cotta. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated
below:
a. As recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer.
F. Two-Part Chemical Cleaning: At locations indicated, clean terra cotta with 2-part
system using chemical cleaners applied as follows:

2. Wet terra cotta with warm water applied by low-pressure spray.
3. Apply alkaline prewash cleaner to terra cotta by brush or roller. Let cleaner
remain on surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer,
4. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals
and soil.
5. Rinse with warm water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals
and soil.
6. Apply acidic cleaner to terra cotta, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure
spray equipment, a deep-nap roller, or a soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner remain on
surface for period recommended by chemical cleaner manufacturer, unless
7. Rinse with cold water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals
and soil.
3.8 REPOINTING MASONRY
A. Rake out joints as follows:
1. Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2-1/2 times their widths, but not
less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered
mortar.
2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals
with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar.
Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace damaged masonry
units.
a. Cut out old mortar by hand with a chisel and mallet, unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval
based on submission by Contractor of a satisfactory quality-control

program and demonstrated ability of operators to use tools without

damaging masonry. Quality-control program shall include provisions for
B. Point joints as follows:
1. Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles.
Time rinsing application so, at the time of pointing, excess water has evaporated
or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water.
2. Apply the first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was
removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater
than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly
and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying the next layer.
3. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in
3 layers with first and second layers each filling about two-fifths of joint depth;
third layer, the remaining one-fifth. Fully compact each layer and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have
rounded edges, slightly recess final layer from face. Take care not to spread
mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge mortar.
4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
6. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to
harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.
3.9 FINAL CLEANING
A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION LPA/7590
SECTION 04860 - STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of stone masonry:
1. Limestone Stairs Anchored to concrete backup.

2. Limestone Wall capping Anchored to unit masonry backup.
3. Bluestone wall veneer & capping Anchored to unit masonry backup.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1. For stone varieties proposed for use on Project, include test data indicating compliance
with physical properties specified.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MRc5
C. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated.

2. For each color of mortar required.
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
STONE MASONRY 04860 - 1 of 10

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIMESTONE
A. Limestone: Comply with ASTM C 568.
2.2 BLUESTONE
A. Bluestone: Comply with ASTM C 615.
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in stone masonry
mortar.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.

b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
E. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime or masonry
cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
from manufacturer's standard colors.
a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime.

2) Lafarge North America; Eaglebond.
3) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement.
b. Colored Masonry Cement:

1) Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment-in-Color.

2) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement.
3) Lafarge North America; [Florida Custom Color Masonry] [or] [Magnolia
Masonry Cement].
4) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.
F. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:
1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.
2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

the following:
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.

b. Bonsal.
c. Bostik Findley Inc.
d. C-Cure.
f. DAP Inc.
h. MAPEI Corp.
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
j. TEC Specialty Construction Brands; H. B. Fuller Company.
H. Water: Potable.
2.4 VENEER ANCHORS
A. Materials:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, [Type 304] [Type 316].
B. Wire Veneer Anchors: Wire ties formed from W1.7 or 0.148-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized
or stainless-steel wire.
C. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.030-inch- thick by 7/8-inch- wide hot-dip
galvanized or stainless]steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and
an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch.
D. Adjustable, Screw-Attached Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal
anchor section that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10, DW-10HS or DW-10-X.
d. Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III or RJ-711.
2. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both

tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.
3. Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate, with screw holes top and bottom and with raised rib-
stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting
wire tie.
4. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch-
diameter, hot-dip galvanized stainless-steel wire.
E. Seismic Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section
designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in stone masonry mortar joint.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [vailable products that may be

a. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; D/A 213S.

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10-X-Seismiclip.
c. Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wire-Bond Clip.
2. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both

tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch.
3. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with
screw holes top and bottom; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 6 inches
long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie.
4. Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap-in grooves for
inserting continuous wire.
5. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.25-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon or
stainless]-steel wire.
6. Continuous Wire: 0.188-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel wire.
2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing[, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated,] complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
1. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft.
weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216
inch thick elsewhere.
B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: [5-oz./sq. ft.] [7-oz./sq. ft.] copper sheet bonded with
asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed
in masonry.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing.

3) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper.

4) Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Copper Fabric Flashing.
5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing.
6) York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Copper Fabric Flashing.
2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,

adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal.

2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
3) Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Dur-O-Barrier-44.
4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-
Barrier Wall Flashing.
5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall
Flashing.
6) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash.
7) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
8) Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Poly-Barrier Self-Adhering Wall
Flashing.
9) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Cementitious Dampproofing: Cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that
are nonstaining to stone, compatible with joint sealants, and noncorrosive to veneer anchors
and attachments.
B. Weep Hole/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Round Plastic Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by thickness of stone
masonry.
C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
1. Provide one of the following configurations:
a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7
inches deep.
b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches wide, with dimpled surface
designed to catch mortar droppings.
c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.
d. Sheets or strips not less than 3/4 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity with
additional strips 4 inches high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of
cavity.

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the followin]:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break Mortar Break II.

b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.

c. Dur-O-Wal, a Dayton Superior Company; Polytite MortarStop.

d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
D. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with
ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying
with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
E. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch mesh with minimum 0.0625-inch-
diameter, galvanized-steel wire.
2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing

mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry
surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended
use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. Dominion Restoration Products.
c. EaCo Chem, Inc.
d. Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
e. Prosoco, Inc.
2.8 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride.

2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S

2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N .
C. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
1. For latex-modified portland cement setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for part
or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose
damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
F. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose
damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
G. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on
Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.
C. Shape stone for type of masonry (pattern) as follows:
1. Sawed-bed, range ashlar with uniform course heights and uniform lengths as indicated
on Drawings.
D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to
match approved samples and mockups.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning
stone installation.
B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing.
3.2 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces.
2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces.
B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for
intended use.

C. Arrange stones in range ashlar pattern with course heights as indicated, uniform lengths, and
uniform joint widths, with offset between vertical joints as indicated.
D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
E. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor
variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4
inch at narrowest points or more than 3/8 inch at widest points.
F. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 4
inches, and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
2. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of
metal drip edge.
3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top
of metal flashing termination.
4. Cut flexible flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
H. Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofing as follows:
1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above finish-grade
elevations.
2. Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below
grade.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control
joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet
or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY
A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in concrete.

B. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect
anchors to masonry joint reinforcement by inserting pintles into eyes of masonry joint
reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
C. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated. Connect
anchors to masonry joint reinforcement with vertical rods inserted through anchors and through
eyes of masonry joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
D. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-
1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
1. Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints and attach to seismic veneer
anchors as stone is set.
E. Space anchors to provide not less than 1 anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional
anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding
12 inches.
F. Space anchors not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches.
G. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
into mortar joints as stone is set.
H. Fill space between back of stone masonry and weather-resistant sheathing paper with mortar
as stone is set.
I. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch. Rake joints to uniform
depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Note No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."

3.6 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-
contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's).

2. Building (common) brick.
1. Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management” for disposal of masonry

construction waste.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles
for unit masonry.
3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured
reglets installed in masonry joints.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent

testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of
materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67
for compressive strength.
2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
4. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.
5. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 1019.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 1/15


01352 including:

2. Product Certificates for Credit MR 5.1: For products and materials required to
comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance
from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or
recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each
regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.
C. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored
mortar.
E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units
include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance
with requirements.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to
comply with compressive strength requirement.
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches
long by 48 inches high by full thickness.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or

coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit

masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather

construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements

contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage
of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements
for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119,
by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or
recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement
joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2800 psi .
2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide one of the following:
B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam
CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.
2.4 BRICK
A. Regional Materials: Provide brick that has been manufactured within 500 miles of
Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well
as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site.

B. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise
expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with
exposed surfaces finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would
result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C 62, Grade SW.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2100 psi.
2. Size: Match size of existing face brick.
3. Color: Match color of existing face brick.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that
have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500
miles of Project site.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only
pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from masonry cement and mortar
pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.

a. Colored Masonry Cement:
1) Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.

2) Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Richcolor Masonry Cement.
3) Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment-in-Color.
4) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement.

5) Lafarge North America Inc.; U.S. Cement Custom Color Masonry

Cement.
6) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement.
7) National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.
H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 sieve.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
J. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use
as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by
manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's colors.
K. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture

complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for
use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
L. Color: Pointing mortar to match existing façade mortar color after façade cleaning.
M. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet , with prefabricated corner and tee
units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type
with single pair of side rods.
D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer

Anchors: Single 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, carbon -steel continuous
wire.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least
halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of
wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches
wide.
1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that
allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry
face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane
of wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized
after fabrication .
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry
face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
3. Corrugated Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch wide with corrugations
having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch
made from 0.060-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication with
dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and sized to extend to
within 1 inch of masonry face.
F. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6
inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows
rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.

G. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24
inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M .
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"" and as follows:
1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees[ and
hemmed].
2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on
itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant
backer rod.
3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,

adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-
laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than
[0.030 inch] [0.040 inch].
2. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a

polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.
3. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene

terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings:[ As specified in Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from [neoprene] [urethane] [or] [PVC].
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from [styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,

complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805] [or] [PVC, complying with
ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406] and designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with

ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-

resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth
1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's
standard.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent.

2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent.
3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents.
4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent.
6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; [Mortar Break] [Mortar Break II].

b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop.
d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.
2. Provide one of the following configurations:

a. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity.
2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for

removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. ProSoCo, Inc.

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,

accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly
blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, [Proportion] [Property]
Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless
another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M .

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S .
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and
for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product[ or select and proportion pigments
with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored
cement products].
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a. Face brick.
b. Hollow brick.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates

and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match existing mortar.

2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the
following units:
a. Face brick.
b. Hollow brick.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions
of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 .
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a

continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting
of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures similar to existing façade.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30
sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are
damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2
inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch
in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
6. Match horizontal lines of existing building watertable.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern matching
existing building façade.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course
on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting
course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed
joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes
(other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover
of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum
of 6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces
structural steel or concrete to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and
structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of
mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36
inches o.c. horizontally.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with seismic masonry-
veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached and seismic anchors to concrete and masonry backup

with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design
only uses one fastener.

2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not
less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of
sheathing.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties
up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24
inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall
area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.
3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as
recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not
less than 2 inches to form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated
with loose-fill insulation.
D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified
weep/vent products to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to

support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed

masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar
and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during
construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be
placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches .
A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work
areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to
comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: [Level 1] [Level 2] special inspections according to the "International

Building Code."
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of

site-prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to

ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to

ASTM C 1019.
3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to

remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes.
2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes 20.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste and other masonry
waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

SECTION 03541 - GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Gypsum underlayment for use below interior floor coverings.

2. Underlayment primer.
3. Underlayment sealer.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:

C. Qualification data.
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of

underlayment products required for this Project.
B. Slump test and field sample results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Underlayment: Gypsum cementitious self-leveling product that can be applied in

minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Basis of Design: “USG LEVELROCK 2500 Green Floor Underlayment” by U. S.

Gypsum Company.
GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT 03541 - 1/4

a. Available Manufacturers: Provide Basis of Design product or equal;

subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
1) Maxxon Corporation.
2) Or equal allowed under UL Design L524. If alternates proposed,
contractor shall submit information documenting sound and fire
performance equivalent to the Basis of Design system, along with the
manufacturer’s specifications for installation.
2. Minimum density 115 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Manufactured with recaptured gypsum.
4. Minimum Post Industrial content 85%.
5. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2500 psi at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C472.
B. Sand Aggregate: Well-washed sand, 1/8 inch or less; as recommended by

underlayment manufacturer. Meets ASTM C33 standards.
C. Water: Potable, free from impurities, and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
D. Primer: “USG LEVELROCK” brand floor primer” or product of underlayment

manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application
indicated.
E. Sealer: “USG LEVELROCK” brand top seal or product of underlayment manufacturer

recommended in writing for conditions and application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer’s written

instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through
underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer’s written

instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents,
dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869.

Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum
moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with
underlayment according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
E. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate

and intercoat adhesion.
F. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION WITHOUT SOUND SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
B. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface with thickness as indicated on

the Drawings.
1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
C. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

contamination during application and curing processes.
D. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
A. Slump Test: Underlayment mix shall be tested for slump as it's being pumped using a 2
inch by 4 inch cylinder resulting in a patty size of 8 inches plus or minus 1 inch
diameter.
B. Field Samples: At least one set of 3 molded cube samples shall be taken from each
day's pour during the underlayment application. Test in accordance with modified
ASTM C 472.
3.4 ISOLATION STRIP STAPLE REMOVAL
A. Remove staples and trim isolation strips to height of finished floor.
3.5 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF FINISH FLOOR
A. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
B. Sealing: Seal all areas that receive glue down floor goods according to underlayment
manufacturer. Any floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned
and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Use sealer to seal underlayment
prior to installation of glue down floor goods. Where floor goods manufacturers require

special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these

recommendations.
C. Floor Goods Procedures: Prepare floor according to underlayment manufacturer’s

guidelines for installing finished floor goods.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction
period.

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION RDS/7590
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,

concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:

content.
2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing portland
cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain
portland cement replacements.
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
D. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement and formwork. Material test reports and
certificates.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."
B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete,"

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1/8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,

true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
1. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class [I] [II] zinc coated
after fabrication and bending.
2. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less
than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
E. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from

galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
F. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated,

Type 1, deformed steel.
G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture
bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual
of Standard Practice."
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I and II . Supplement with one of the
following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C F.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-

aggregate size.
1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding
those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
G. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and

designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1 inch
long.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397,
not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or
pressure-sensitive joint tape.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

polyethylene sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,

Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere
with bonding of floor covering.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding

cork.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag,
and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would
otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before
adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or
minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery at concrete
exposed to weather.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
6. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's
recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd..
D. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 115 lb/cu. ft. , plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as
determined by ASTM C 567.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
5. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's
recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd..

2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be
applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,
at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at

slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and

embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams
or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to

ACI 301.
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,

and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or
quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still
plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for
hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if

hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before
and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions
after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float
finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following

methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during
curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing
compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after
initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.

SECTION 02930 - EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plants.
2. Planting soils.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where
the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In
undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban
environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 1 of 7

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
B. Samples of mineral mulch.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures for maintenance of plants during a

calendar year.
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit WE1.1: For plant materials that are native and adaptive.
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor

on Project site when work is in progress.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, Contractor shall furnish soil analysis and a written
report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.

2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable
requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack
root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from
sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not
bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide
protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery
and handling.
C. Handle planting stock by root ball.
D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting.

E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If
planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate
aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep
roots moist.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in
materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of
adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion:
a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.

b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer.

Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and
continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than
maintenance period below.
1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 12 months from date of planting completion.
2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Six months from date of
planting completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form,
shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings
and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or
root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated
when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald,
injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which
shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;

moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2-inch sieve;
soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and
free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture,
with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
2.4 FERTILIZERS
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea
formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent
potassium, by weight.
B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium,

by weight.
2.5 PLANTING SOILS

1. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent
organic material content. Existing, in-place surface soil. Imported topsoil or
manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or
marshes. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots,
plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete
layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
2.6 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood.
2.7 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven

polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd..

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger
than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish
grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen,
muddy, or excessively wet.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-
degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom
leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away
from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil
to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter.

2. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate
vertical roots for bare-root stock.
3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the
bottom of the root ball.
B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil.
3.3 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING
A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.
B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not
break.
C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent
finish grades.
1. Use planting soil for backfill.

2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant,
carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from
sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting.
Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting
operation.
3. Balled and Potted and Container-Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container
without damaging root ball or plant.

4. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
3.4 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural
and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders;
remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural
character.
3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in
even rows with triangular spacing.
B. Use planting soil for backfill.
C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around
plants to hold water.
E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery
from transplanting shock.
3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure
seams with galvanized pins.
B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
3.7 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plantings by watering pruning, cultivating, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring

planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations
as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and
shrubs free of insects and disease.
B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors
and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or
replace damaged plantings.

SECTION 02920 - LAWNS AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Seeding.
2. Sodding.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand
with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface
soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top

surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
I. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as
urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Certification of grass seed.
1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod.
LAWNS AND GRASSES 02920 - 1 of 7

D. Topsoil Test Reports
E. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit WE1.1: For native or adaptive plant materials.
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor

on Project site when work is in progress.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, Contractor shall furnish soil analysis and a written
report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.

2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil
amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy,
viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide
additional recommendations for corrective action.
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and
indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for
Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in
TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24
hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is
planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following
periods:
1. Seeded Turf: Native Turf Mix: 120 days from date of planting completion.
a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or
if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
2. Native Sodded Turf: 60 days from date of planting completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed
Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or comparative

alternative
a. Ernst Conservation Seeds: Autumn Bent Grass Mix
1-800-873-3321
2.2 TURFGRASS SOD
A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified], including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and
insects], complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline
Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture,
strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.
B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows:
1 Autumn Bentgrass Sod.
2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium
carbonate equivalent and as follows:
1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of
75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve.
B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a

minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing
through No. 40 sieve.
C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur.
D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent
passing through No. 50 sieve.
G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.

H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water
absorption capacity by weight.
I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;

moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through [1-inch] sieve;
soluble salt content of [5 to 10] decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants
and free of substances toxic to plantings.
2.5 FERTILIZERS
A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of [4] percent nitrogen and
20 percent phosphoric acid.
B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available

phosphoric acid.
C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea
formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent
potassium, by weight.
D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble

nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium,

by weight.
2.6 PLANTING SOILS
A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic
material content. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources; do not obtain
from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil.
Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth. Have soil tested to determine the amount of soil
amendments and fertilizer quantities needed. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and
fertilizers to produce planting soil:
1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3.

2. Lime
3. Sulfur .
4. Agricultural Gypsum.
5. Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth :
6. Bonemeal :
7. Superphosphate:
8. Commercial Fertilizer

9. Slow-Release Fertilizer.
2.7 MULCHES
A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of
wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
2.8 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones
larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.

2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish
grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or
subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating,

grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:
1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers
according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till
soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.
a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening.
3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other
extraneous matter.
4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's
property.
C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly
fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove
ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be
planted in the immediate future.

D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry
before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
E. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded
or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
3.2 SEEDING
A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by
sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against
existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
B. Sow seed at a total rate of : See manufacturer specifications.
C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread
uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches] in loose
thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.
1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.
E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch] within 24
hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness
of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.
3.3 SODDING
A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch
or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to
subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade,
eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor
cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3.

2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as
recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent
slippage.
C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting,
water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2
inches below sod.
3.4 TURF MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and
performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and
replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials
and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height
appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than
1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.
C. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
3.5 SATISFACTORY TURF
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand
of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage
exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches .
2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-
colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and
surface irregularities.
B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue
maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Seating.
2. Bicycle racks.
3. Trash receptacles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Material Certificates: For site furnishings, signed by manufacturers.
C. Maintenance Data.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit: MRc4 and MRc5: Recycled Content and Local /Regional
Materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes.
B. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes.
C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-

coated or noncorrodible materials.
D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for
exterior applications.
E. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-

controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
SITE FURNISHINGS 02870 - 1 of 3

2.2 SEATING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Landscape Forms,

Plainwell #785915 .
B. Seat with Back
1. Color/Material: Wood Seat (FSC certified) for exterior use.
2. Size: 72”
3. Arms: Three, one on each end and one center arm.
2.3 BICYCLE RACKS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Victor Stanley ; BK-
6 or a comparable product.
B. Bicycle Rack Construction:
1. Frame: Poweder Coated Steet: VS Black
2. Style: Double-side parking
a. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than two bicycles.

3. Installation Method: Cast in concrete
2.4 TRASH RECEPTACLES & RECYCLE BIN
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Victor Stanley,

Steelsites Series – NSDC – 36 or a comparable product .
B. Steel Finish: [Powder Coated VS Black.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,
barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing plumb or at correct angle and aligned
and at correct height and spacing.
C. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and
placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts.
After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 02826 - ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Decorative wrought iron fences.
2. Swing gates.
1.2 Related Sections:
A. Division 5 “Ornamental Metal” for decorative railing caps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

01352 including:


C. Shop Drawings: For gates and fence. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
D. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for decorative steel fences, including finish, indicating
compliance with referenced standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL AND IRON
A. Wrought Iron:
B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES 02826 - 1/5

C. Bars (Pickets): Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M,
Grade 1010.
2.2 COATING MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with
coating specified to be applied over it.
B. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and
topcoat.
C. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
A. Concrete: Normal-weight concrete complying with requirements in Division 3 Section

"Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3-
inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size.
B. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for
exterior applications.
2.4 GROUNDING MATERIALS
A. Grounding Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for
No. 4 AWG and larger.
1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.

2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.
B. Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.
2.5 DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES; Trident Wrought Iron Fence
A. Decorative Steel Fences: Fences made from steel bars and shapes.

a. A & T Iron Works, Inc.
B. Posts: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Post Caps: Steel castings.
D. Rails: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Pickets: As indicated on Drawings.
1. Picket Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Infill: Forge-welded steel bar grating; as indicated on Drawings.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts and tamperproof nuts.
H. Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by welding pickets to rails.
I. Finish for Bar Grating Infill: Powder coating.
J. Finish for Steel Items Other than Bar Grating Infill: High-performance coating.
2.6 SWING GATES
A. Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square steel tubing as indicated
on Drawings.
B. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers
for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for
pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock
accessible from both sides of gate.
C. Steel Finish: Shop primed and painted with high-performance coating.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
1. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be

applied over it.
B. Powder Coating: 2-coat finish consisting of epoxy primer and TGIC polyester topcoat,
with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less than 8 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: Black, semigloss.
C. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to

prime-coated surfaces. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating
manufacturer.
1. Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening infill panels to posts.
C. Post Excavation: Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a
depth of not less than 24 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that
fence height exceeds 4 feet.
D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into existing stone wall.
1. Hold posts in position during setting with concrete.

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation
depth, but not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete.
4. Space posts uniformly at existing post locations.
3.2 EXISTING GATE INSTALLATION
A. Re-install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach
hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in
concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where
necessary.
3.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows:
1. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways:

Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet .
a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.
Bond metal gates to gate posts.
B. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until
the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG
conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.
C. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate
frame.
D. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is

minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection
methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

A. Grounding-Resistance Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests

and inspections.

SECTION 02781 - POROUS UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Porous paving consisting of concrete pavers set in aggregate setting beds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than aggregates.
B. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate materials, according to ASTM C 136.
C. Samples for unit pavers and aggregate fill.
D. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit SSc6.1
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS
A. Solid Concrete Pavers for Porous Paving: Solid interlocking paving units of shapes that provide
openings between units, complying with ASTM C 936, resistant to freezing and thawing when
tested according to ASTM C 67, and made from normal-weight aggregates.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide <Uni

Eco Stone Permeable Interlocking Pavers , Belgard Hardscapes, Andy Crouch
410., 721.1900 or a comparable product.
2. Thickness: 3-1/8 inches .

3. Face Size and Shape: 4 ½” x 9”.
4. Color: Slate Blend.
POROUS UNIT PAVING 02781 - 1 of 3

2.2 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with STM D 448 for
Size No. 57 For size No. 2
B. Graded Aggregate for Base Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8
C. Graded Aggregate for Leveling Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
D. Graded Aggregate for Porous Paver Fill: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
1. Provide stone of color to match Architect's sample.
E. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface

drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50
percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
1. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

2. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be
structurally unsound or visible in finished work.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment[ or a block splitter] to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
C. Tolerances:
1. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit
offset from flush.
2. Variation from Level or Indicated Slope: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1/4
inch in 10 feet or a maximum of 1/2 inch.
D. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
3.2 SETTING-BED INSTALLATION
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.
B. Place drainage geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12
inches.

C. Place aggregate Open graded base compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum
laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated.
D. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 2 to 2-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture
content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.
3.3 PAVER INSTALLATION
A. Set unit pavers on leveling course, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have
lugs or spacer bars to control spacing, place pavers hand tight against lugs or spacer bars. If
pavers do not have lugs or spacer bars, place pavers with a 1/16-inch- minimum and 1/8-inch-
maximum joint width.
B. Compact pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
C. Place graded aggregate fill immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Spread and
screed aggregate fill level with tops of pavers.
D. Remove and replace pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or
that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same
manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Brick pavers set in mortar setting beds.

2. Rough-stone pavers set in mortar setting beds.
3. Steel edge restraints.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.
B. Samples for unit pavers, joint materials and edge restraints.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit MRc4 and MRc5: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer
recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled
content.
A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting
beds.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements for Mortar and Grout: Heat materials to provide mortar and grout
temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Protect unit paver work against freezing for 24 hours
after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK PAVERS
A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX, Type I , Application PX.
Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.
UNIT PAVERS 02780 - 1 of 5

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Brick shall match the brick specified for the building façade and
walls. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the name of product and
samples as follows:
2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches

3. Face Size: [3-5/8 by 7-5/8 inches
B. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a temporary
protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products.
2.2 BLUE-STONE PAVERS
A. Rough-Stone Pavers: Rectangular paving stones, with split faces and edges, made from
granite complying with ASTM C 615.
1. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
a. Luckstone, Varigated Bluestone, or comparable product to match existing paving.

Thickness: 2 inches; Face Size: Varies, based on dimensions of existing blue stone pavers.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Edge Restraints: Painted steel edging 3/16 inch thick by 4 inches high with loops pressed
from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36 inches o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches long for
each loop.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Border Concepts, Inc.

b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc.
c. J. D. Russell Company (The).
d. Ryerson, J. T. & Son, Inc.
e. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation.
f. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
2. Color: Black
B. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
C. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
2.4 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
C. Sand: ASTM C 144.

D. Latex Additive: Water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type
specifically recommended by manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed,
and not containing a retarder.
E. Water: Potable.
2.5 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Polymer-Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded grout; in color to match grout of the building and
walls.

offering polymer-modified grouts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.

b. Bonsal, W. R. Company.
c. Bostik Findley Inc.
d. C-Cure.
f. DAP Inc.
g. Jamo Inc.
h. Laticrete International, Inc.
i. MAPEI Corp.
j. SGM.
k. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
l. TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company.
2. Product Type: Either dry mix, containing ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible
form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or two-component mix, containing liquid-
latex and prepackaged dry-grout mix.
B. Grout Colors: to match the grout color of the building and walls.
C. Water: Potable.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions.
Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement or cement and sand with water to a creamy
consistency.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Comply with written instructions of latex-
additive manufacturer to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive
pavers.
E. Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Mix portland cement, sand, and latex
additive to comply with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer.

F. Polymer-Modified Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit
adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
C. Joint Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24
inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install
joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
3.2 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not
exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed to
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Cut
back and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing pavers.
E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute
when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time
of laying.
F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers, apply
uniform 1/16-inch- thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver.
G. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.

H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 1/2-inch nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or
minus 1/16 inch.
I. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.
1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
2. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard.
J. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days, unless otherwise recommended
by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
K. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
1. Remove temporary protective coating from brick pavers as recommended by protective

coating manufacturer and as acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and
remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

SECTION 02764
CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant
samples in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of
material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product
manufacturer.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for sealants.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for

testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint
substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS 02764 - 1 of 5

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data
that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and
compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.
D. Product Testing: Contractor shall obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products
within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
3. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost.
4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and

application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field

experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing,

nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type NS.
1. Available Products:
a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone.

b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
c. Or Approved Equal
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter
and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and
width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill
remainder of joint opening under sealant.
D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density
required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
2.5 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-
sealant performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-
sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions,

G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations
indicated.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the
original work.

SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Paver sub base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit SSc7.1, MRc4 and MRc5: For products having recycled content,
documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer
recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled
content.
2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a
replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each
design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain
portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-

mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than
25 percent.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02751 - 1 of 6

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.
F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.
G. Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized) after
fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar
supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast
concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, white portland cement Type I/II
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from
a single source.
C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
2.3 CURING MATERIALS
A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
B. Water: Potable.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive

aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less
than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by
freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
2.5 WHEEL STOPS
A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled
HDPE, or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled rubber or plastic; UV
stabilized].
1. Color: Gray].
2. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length.
3. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel stop manufacturer for application to concrete
pavement.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: [0.45] [0.50]
<Insert ratio>.
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: 5-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate,

but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch
discharged and used in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms
can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel
reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of
their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.
D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and
consolidating concrete.
E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
F. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

G. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
3.6 FLOAT FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
texture.
1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture-retaining-cover curing.
1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.
4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.9 WHEEL STOPS
A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two galvanized-steel dowels located at
one-quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to
wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.
3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint
unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep
paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION AMT, LLC/7590
SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior non-pressure storm sewer piping and related components from
the property line to the building, with the following components.
1. Cleanouts.
2. Precast concrete manholes.
B. All materials, installation, and quality assurance for water lines and appurtenances installed in
the DC right-of-way/public space and on private property shall be in accordance with the
standards, specifications, and applicable permits of the District of Columbia Water and Sewer
Authority (DC WASA) and the District of Columbia Department of Transportation (DC DOT).
The DC WASA and DC DOT standards and specifications are not covered in this specification
section – refer to applicable DC WASA and DC DOT publications.
C. Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For manholes and catch basins. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and manhole frames and covers and catch basin frames and grates.
C. Field quality-control test reports. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON, CULVERT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe: ASTM A 716, for push-on joints.
B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.
C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.
D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

STORM DRAINAGE 02630 - 1 of 6
2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M,
Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings.

2. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 (DN 250) and Larger: AASHTO M 294M,
Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.
3. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings.
2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and Smaller: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785
Schedule 40.
2.5 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Ring-Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell
of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
2.6 CLEANOUTS
A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot
connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.
1. Top-Loading Classification(s): heavy duty.

2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40
PVC
2.7 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,
as required to prevent flotation.
3. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for
walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral
floor.
4. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated.

5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection.
8. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in
ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and
designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12-
to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is
less than 60 inches.
9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter
matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter
of manhole frame and cover.
11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch-
minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with
lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron,
2.8 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 aximum
water-cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
2.9 CATCH BASINS
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
floor.
2. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated.
3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.
B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural
loading. Include 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-
diameter flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.
1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure

sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where
specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
2. Install piping with 24-inch minimum cover.
3. Install piping below frost line.
4. Install ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
5. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials
and Methods." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's
B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-
gasket joints.
3. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use Schedule 40
PVC for cleanouts assembly. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
1. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in all areas.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches

deep. Set with tops flush with surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Set tops flush with finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's storm building drains specified
in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."
B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.
1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye
fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi.
A. General: Coordinate work with the DC WASA inspector and DCRA Plumbing Inspector for
required tests and inspections. At a minimum, Contractor shall perform the following tests for
on-site work.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Air Tests: Test storm drainage according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.
D. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
E. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.

SECTION 02620 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.

2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For geotextile filter fabrics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP;
corrugated, for coupled joints.
2.2 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Soil materials are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
2.3 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate

range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.
B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.
1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2.

2. Styles: Flat and sock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
SUBDRAINAGE 02620 - 1/5

3.2 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete
footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions
indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep and 12 inches wide.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile
filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with tape.
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation
subdrainage.
F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side
away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.
H. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter
fabric.
I. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping
edges at least 4 inches.
J. Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth
layers not exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish
elevations and slope away from building.
3.3 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted
but before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6
inches between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to
required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile
filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with tape.
E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab
subdrainage.

F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of
pipe to perform tests.
G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of
bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile
filter fabric.
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated,
with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material.
Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written
instructions and other requirements indicated.
1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36

inches unless otherwise indicated.
2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping level.
3. Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into
stormwater piping system, install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36
inches unless otherwise indicated.
4. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
5. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells
facing upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.
A. Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with
loose banded, coupled, or push-on joints.
B. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with
special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with
and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.
3.6 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 2 Section "Storm
Drainage."
B. Install horizontal backwater valves in header piping downstream from perforated

subdrainage piping.
C. Install horizontal backwater valves in piping in manholes where indicated.

A. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 2 Section "Storm

Drainage."
B. Cleanouts for Foundation and Retaining-Wall Subdrainage:
1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping

run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of
flow in piping.
2. In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping
branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers
in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of
cleanout flush with grade.
3. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch
fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a
cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches deep. Set top of cleanout 1
inch above grade.
4. Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
C. Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage:
1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate
cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so
cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
2. Use NPS 4 cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser
extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm

drainage system.
C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation and underslab subdrainage to

stormwater sump pumps. Comply with requirements for sump pumps specified in
Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps."
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to
ensure free flow before backfilling.
2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results
are satisfactory.

B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as
work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is
completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work
stops.

SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior non-pressure sanitary sewer piping and related components from
the property line to the building, with the following components.
1. Cleanouts.
2. Precast concrete manholes.
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.
2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.3 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Sleeve Materials:
1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
SANITARY SEWERAGE 02530 - 1 of 6
2. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
C. Ring-Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell
of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot
connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug.
1. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy duty.

2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: PVC Schedule 40 pipe and fittings.
2.5 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced
concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
1. Diameter: Minimum 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,
as required to prevent flotation.
floor.
4. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated.
5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.
7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole
walls, for each pipe connection.
8. Steps: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in
ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and
designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12-
to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is
less than 60 inches.
9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter
matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
10. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter
of manhole frame and cover.
11. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch-
minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with
lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER."
a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35
gray iron, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.

2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.

4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious
materials ratio.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include
channels and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: Minimum 2 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: Minimum 4 percent.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58
maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Pipe couplings and fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure

sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space
between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
B. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials:
1. Schedule 40 PVC sewer pipe and fittings.
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping
layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
2. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover.
3. Install piping below frost line.
4. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
F. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of
incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials
and Methods." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's
B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-
gasket joints.
2. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type, flexible couplings.
3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use Schedule 40
PVC pipe and fittings for cleanout assemblies. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of
flow in sewer pipe.
1. Use heavy-duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in all areas.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches

deep. Set with tops flush with surrounding grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains

specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
on-site work.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate report for each system inspection.

2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction and the following:
a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of

pipe, during 24-hour period.
b. Close openings in system and fill with water.
c. Purge air and refill with water.
d. Disconnect water supply.
e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.
f. Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing"
Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.

6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417.

b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924.
D. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
E. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.

SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for
domestic water building services, fire-services for buildings, and water mains.
C. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for
installation.
D. Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. DC WASA standards and specifications for work in the DC right-of-way/public space.

2. DC Plumbing Code.
3. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water
mains and backflow prevention.
4. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
5. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service
piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire-
service-main products.
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve
and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
E. NSF Compliance:
WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 - 1 of 5

1. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic
water.
A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Architect's written
permission.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main and work in the DC right-of-way/public space with the DC
WASA inspector.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern

or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for commonly used
joining materials.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.
A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least
equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.4 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Valve Boxes: per the DC WASA standards and specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following
applications.
B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure
rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.
D. Underground water-service piping 3” diameter and larger shall be the following:
1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints
2. Mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.
E. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping shall be the following:
1. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile-iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints
2. Mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for piping-system
common requirements.
A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in
water main.
B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company
and of size and in location indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.
D. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
E. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 4 feet.

F. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping

systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are

installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material.
Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.
G. Sleeves are specified in Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods and
15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
H. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
A. See Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities - Basic Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Make pipe joints according to the following:
1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.
3. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials,
with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 2 Section "Piped Utilities -
Basic Materials and Methods" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with mechanical restrained joints in

accordance with the DC WASA standards and specifications and the DC Plumbing Code.
B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches.
Include anchorages for the following piping systems:
1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.

2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.
3. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.
C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed
ferrous anchorage devices.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire-suppression piping.

on-site work.
B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks
have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to
stabilize system. Use only potable water.
C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between
increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase
again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts
(1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat
test until leakage is within allowed limits.
D. Prepare reports of testing activities.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty
water does not appear at points of outlet.
3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
AWWA C651 or do as follows:
a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm
of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine
solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3
hours.
c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine
remains in water coming from system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

SECTION 02371 - MICROPILES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for design and installation of a micropile foundation
system.
B. The work consists of furnishing all necessary engineering and design services,
supervision, labor, materials, and equipment to perform any work necessary to install
and test micropiles for the project, as shown on the design drawings. The micropile
contractor shall install a micropile system meeting the load capacities indicated on the
drawings.
C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 3 Section “Cast in Place Concrete” for material strength testing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificate of design: Signed and sealed statement from Contractor’s Engineer

indicating that design of micropiles is appropriate for the required load. Design shall be
based on a rational and standard approach as approved by the Deep Foundations
Institute and/or the International Association of Foundation Drilling.
B. Working Drawings: Signed and sealed drawings indicating materials and procedures
to be used in completion of the work. Drawings shall include at a minimum:
1. Detailed description of construction procedures proposed, including a schedule.
2. Pile numbering system, and layout directions.
3. Design load of micropiles.
4. Type and size of reinforcing steel to be provided.
5. Minimum total bond length.
6. Total micropile length.
7. Grouting volumes and maximum pressures.
8. Micropile top attachment
9. Micropile cutoff attachment
C. Shop drawings for structural steel, including all pile components, including the
following:
1. Corrosion protection system
2. Pile top attachment
3. Bond length details
4. Mill test reports for reinforcing steel
5. Representative coupon tests for steel pipe used as permanent casing
D. Design Mixtures: For grout used to fill piles, including

1. Cementitious materials.
MICROPILES 02371 - 1/6

2. Admixtures.
3. Procedures for mixing
4. Procedures for placing
5. Certified test reports verifying capacity of mix designs
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Micropile contractor shall be fully experienced in all

aspects of micropile design and construction, and shall furnish all necessary
equipment, materials, skilled labor, and supervision required to carry out the contract.
Contractor must have successfully completed at least five projects in the previous five
years of similar or greater scope. He must provide resumes of key personnel who will
be present on site for the duration of the work.
B. Referenced Standards
1. ASCE 20-96, “Standard Guidelines for the Design and Installation of Pile
Foundations.”
2. API RP 138-1, “Recommended Practice – Standard Procedure for Field Testing
Water Based Drilling Fluids.”
3. ASTM documents as referenced under materials section.
C. Allowable Tolerances
1. Centerline of piling shall not be more than 3” from indicated plan location.
2. Pile hole alignment shall be within 2% of design alignment.
3. Top elevation of pile shall be within 1” of design vertical elevation.
4. Centerline of core reinforcing shall be not more than ¾” from centerline of piling.
A. Steel Reinforcement and casings: Deliver, store, and handle steel to prevent bending,
damage, and/or corrosion.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil,
and other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Reinforcement Accessories: Bar couplers to be compatible with efficient load transfer

and overall reinforcement performance requirements.
C. Fabricate all reinforcement in accordance with CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice.”
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Steel Pipe Casings shall be supplied in accordance with ASTM A252 Grade 3, with
minimum yield strength as indicated in the design submittal and minimum 15%
elongation.

B. Plates and shapes for pile top attachment shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A572-
50.
2.3 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989 Grade 100 or 120.
a. GGBS used in grout mix must also be present in mix tested and submitted
under section 1.3D. Substitution of GGBS for Portland Cement may not
exceed 30% by weight.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 fine aggregate. Provide aggregates from a

single source, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding
those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
B. Use admixtures according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Centralizers – fabricated from plastic, steel or similar material not detrimental to the
reinforcing steel. Wood bar spacers shall not be utilized. Centralizers must permit free
flow of grout without misalignment of the reinforcing.
2.6 GROUT MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Micropile installation technique shall be consistant with geotechnical, logistical, and

environmental conditions of the project. Micropile Contractor shall select drilling and
grouting procedures to successfully perform the work. Selections shall be detailed on
working drawing submission made before commencement of sitework.

B. Drilling equipment and methods shall be suitable for drilling through conditions
anticipated on site with minimal disturbance to those conditions or any overlying or
adjacent structures or services. Boreholes must be provided open to the defined
nominal diameter for their full length prior to placing grout and reinforcement. If soils
encountered on site do not permit uncased installation, provide hole support as
required.
C. Hole support may consist of any of the following, subject to design and installation by
the Contractor:
1. Steel pipe casings, permanent or temporary
2. Grout injection through hollow stem auger
3. Hole stabilizing drilling fluid, certified to have no adverse effect on geotechnical
bond development and no potential effect on local groundwater.
D. Schedule project work to prevent damage to piles where grout has not achieved final
set.
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials
that would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Central reinforcing steel with physical centralizers shall be lowered into the stabilized
drill holes to desired depth with no difficulty. Partially inserted bars shall not be driven
or forced into the hole.
D. Bar centralizers shall be placed at 10’ maximum vertical spacing along the bars.
Uppermost centralizer shall be maximum 5’ from the top of the micropile. No micropile
reinforcing shall be installed with less than 3 centralizers, regardless of bar length.
A. Before placing concrete, verify hole integrity and reinforcement are as anticipated, and
hardware for pile top connection is on hand. Perform all inspections required prior to
placement of concrete. Flush hole with water and/or air to remove drill cuttings and
loose debris prior to concreting.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement
unless approved by on-site testing agency.
C. Contractor shall provide systems and equipment to measure grout quality, quantity,
and pumping pressure during grouting operations. Grout pump shall be equipped with
a pressure gauge capable of measuring a minimum of 150 psi. Grouting equipment
shall be sized to enable placement of a full pile in one continuous operation.
D. Inject grout from the lowest point of the drill hole by tremie until clean, pure grout flows
from the top of the pile. Grout may be pumped through tubes, augers, or drill rods. All
grouting operations must ensure complete continuity of the grout column. Grout
pressures shall be controlled to prevent excessive heave in cohesive soils or fracturing
of soil formations.

E. The use of compressed air to directly pressurize the fluid grout is not permitted.
F. Grout within piles shall be allowed to attain minimum design strength prior to loading.
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing
actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for
three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within
the temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture
designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid
nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3. Apply layer of repair overlayment at top of wall and infill, set cast stone seating
plinth directly on wet overlayment and fasten in place.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Installation records: Testing agency shall prepare records of all installed piles,
including the following minimum information:
1. Pile drilling duration and observations
2. Information on soil and rock encountered, including description of strata and
water.
3. Approximate final tip elevation.
4. Cut-off elevation.
5. Design Loads
6. Description of any unusual installation behavior or conditions
7. Any deviations from intended parameters or procedures.
8. Grout pressures attained
9. Grout quantities pumped
10. Pile materials and dimensions
C. As-built drawings showing location of piles, depth and inclination, and details of
composition shall be submitted within 14 calendar days of the project completion.
D. Inspections and testing after concreting

1. Verify pile top elevation and adjust all installed piles to planned elevations.
2. Testing of grout shall comply with provisions in section 03300, “Cast in Place
Concrete.”


SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Bait-station system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the EPA-Registered Label
for termiticide products.
B. Product certificates.
C. Bait-Station System Application Report: Include the following:
1. Location of areas and sites conducive to termite feeding and activity.

2. Plan drawing showing number and locations of bait stations.
3. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence indicating level of
termite activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial
Completion.
4. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
5. Quantities of nontoxic termite bait used.
6. Schedule of inspections for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by
manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices

according to the EPA-Registered Label.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water

saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with
TERMITE CONTROL 02361 - 1/3

requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.
B. Install bait-station system during construction to determine areas of termite activity and
after construction, including landscaping, is completed.
A. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months'

continuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of
termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services,
obligations, conditions, terms for agreement period, and terms for future renewal
options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BAIT-STATION SYSTEM
A. Provide bait stations based on the dimensions of building perimeter indicated on

Drawings, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for product,
manufacturer's written instructions, and the following:

a. BASF Corporation, Agricultural Products; Subterfuge.

b. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Sentricon System.
c. Ensystex, Inc.; Exterra System.
d. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; First Line.
e. Whitmire Micro-Gen Research Laboratories, Inc.; Advance TBS.
2. No fewer than one bait station per 20 linear feet .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
3.2 INSTALLING BAIT-STATION SYSTEM
A. Place bait stations according to the EPA-Registered Label for the product and
manufacturer's written instructions, in the following areas that are conducive to termite
feeding and activity:

1. Conducive sites and locations indicated on Drawings.

2. In and around infested trees and stumps.
3. In mulch beds.
4. Where wood directly contacts soil.
5. Areas of high soil moisture.
6. Near irrigation sprinkler heads.
7. Each area where roof drainage system, including downspouts and scuppers,
drains to soil.
8. Along driplines of roof overhangs without gutters.
9. Where condensate lines from mechanical equipment drip or drain to soil.
10. At plumbing penetrations through ground-supported slabs.
11. Other sites and locations as determined by licensed Installer.
B. Inspect and service bait stations from time of their application until Substantial
Completion unless extended by continuing service agreement, according to the EPA-
Registered Label for product and manufacturer's written instructions for termite
management system and bait products.
1. Service Frequency: Inspect bait stations not less than once every three
month(s).

SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and
exterior plants.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving.
6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
B. Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above proposed subgrade elevations and to

lines and dimensions indicated.
1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect.
2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 1 of 11
G. Fill: Compacted soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of
100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to
ASTM D 1586.
I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a
cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
M. Geotechnical Engineer: a licensed soils engineer contracted by the Contractor and approved by
the Owner.
N. DC DOT: District of Columbia Department of Transportation
O. DC WASA: District of Columbia Water and Sewer Authority
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil
material proposed for fill and backfill.
A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according

to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according
to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Sections.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Disconnect and abandon private utility laterals on site indicated to be abandoned.
C. Utility service shut-off, disconnection, capping and sealing, temporary service, removal,
alteration, and abandonment shall be coordinated with the utility provider and shall be
performed in accordance with the utility provider’s regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials, approved by the Geotechnical Engineer, when
sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GC, GM, SW, SP, SM, &
SC, or a combination of these groups; with a liquid limit not greater than 30 and a maximum
plasticity index less of 10 per ASTM D 4318; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any
dimension, debris, ashes, cinders, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious
matter. All offsite borrow materials or imported materials that may be borrow material, select fill,
or other approved material shall consist of soils meeting Unified Soil Classification System
(USCS) of SC or coarser.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups ML, CL, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to
ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Maximum liquid limit shall be 30
and maximum plasticity index shall be 10 per ASTM D 4318.
G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-
inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 GEOTEXTILES
A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater
than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533.
5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833.
6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
7. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and
4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1. Red: Electric.
2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water systems.
5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All work performed in the public space / right of way shall comply with DC DOT and DC WASA
standards.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,

debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing."
C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.
D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
3.3 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.4 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
3.5 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to proposed subgrade elevations regardless of the character

of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may
include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.

b. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
c. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade.
d. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If
applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms
to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles
are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material.
Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.
3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility
Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or
minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
3.8 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe
or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
3.9 SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If the Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation
and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired
equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or
saturated subgrades.
1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction

perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons.
3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by Getechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as
directed.
D. Provide subgrade testing per the remainder of this specification section.
E. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for unit prices.
F. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by
Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by the
Architect.
3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Install silt fence around soil stockpile.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.12 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Water, sewer, and storm sewer work within the public space / right of way shall comply with DC
WASA standards.
B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
D. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.
E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement
of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.14 SOIL FILL
A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698 unless otherwise noted:
1. Structural fills: under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and
recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material
at 95% AASHTO T-180 (ASTM D-1557).
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95
percent.
3.17 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-
foot straightedge.
3.18 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE
A. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage

trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support
subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed
in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping
sides and ends at least 6 inches.
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to
within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill
with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.
1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 698.
2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- thick compacted layers
to final subgrade.
3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE
A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-
on-grade as follows:
1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written

instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will contract a qualified, independent, Owner-approved

geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
minimum locations and frequencies:
1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for
every 1000 sq. ft. or less of paved area, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.
2. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1
test for every 200 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.
3. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100
feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
4. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each
150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
5. Additional tests may be required by the geotechnical engineer.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.21 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.
A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection
system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic
pressure and superimposed and construction loads.
1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C. LEED Submittals:

content.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey

adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact
elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and
record existing elevations.
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 02260 - 1/3

1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly

resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and
positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify
Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other
damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, ASTM A 690, or ASTM A 992.
C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328, ASTM A 572, or ASTM A 690; with continuous
interlocks.
D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and
strength required for application.
E. Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.
F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Piling: Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and
tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using
templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet
piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches.
Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a
horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment . Cut tops of sheet
piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation.
B. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other
permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing
original brace.
1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete
work unless otherwise approved by Architect.
2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced
frames.
3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until
permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic
pressures.

3.2 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS
A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed
sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in
stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements,
facilities, and utilities.
1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48

inches below overlaying construction and abandon remainder.

SECTION 02231 - TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by
execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during
construction, and indicated on Drawings,
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For each type of organic mulch in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of
materials by percentage of weight, protection-zone fencing
C. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to
remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly
treated and repaired when damaged.
E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by
construction during and after completing the Work.
F. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
construction activities.
A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by ISA, licensed arborist in jurisdiction

where Project is located, current member of ASCA, or registered Consulting Arborist as
designated by ASCA.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING 02231 - 1 of 5

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.
3. Foot traffic.
4. Erection of sheds or structures.
5. Impoundment of water.
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and
organic mulch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing
organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade
of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel,
and other objects more than [1 inch] <Insert dimension> in diameter; and free of weeds, roots,
and toxic and other nonsoil materials.
B. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood free from deleterious materials.
C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting[ one of] the following
requirements. Previously used materials may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Chain-Link Protection-Zone Fencing: Galvanized-steel fencing fabricated from minimum

2-inch opening, 0.148-inch- diameter wire chain-link fabric; with pipe posts, minimum 2-
3/8-inch- OD line posts, and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts; with 1-5/8-inch- OD
top rails and 0.177-inch- diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and
other accessories for a complete fence system.
2. Height of Fencing: 4 feet
3. Gates: Swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for
maintenance activities within protection zones.
D. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with attachment holes
prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and
sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from
construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while
mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding,
or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
C. Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside protection zones and other areas indicated with 4-inch
average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.
3.2 PROTECTION ZONES
A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a

manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected area except by entrance gates.
1. Chain-Link Fencing: Install to comply with ASTM F 567 and with manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without
concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or concrete to remain,
provide appropriate means of post support acceptable to Architect.
B. Protection-Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent locations in a

manner approved by Architect.
C. Repair or replace trees, indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
D. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and
remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the
site.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection
zones according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones, hand
excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling, auger boring, or pipe
jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities. Cut roots as required for root pruning.
C. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill.
3.4 ROOT PRUNING
A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as shown
on Drawings and as follows:
1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other
equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently covered
with soil.
3. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
4. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of
the required excavation.
C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of the required
excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
3.5 CROWN PRUNING
A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune branches
as shown on Drawings and as follows:
1. Prune trees to remain to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root
system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by
arborist.
2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the following:
3. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
4. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site.
3.6 REGRADING
A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
B. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope
grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.
C. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Where existing grade is 2 inches or less below elevation of
finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to
required finish elevations.
A. Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity of

trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection reports.
3.8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1. Have arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage repair of trees and
shrubs.
2. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.
3. Perform repairs within 24 hours.
4. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by Architect.

3.9 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.

SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Protecting existing trees to remain.

2. Removing existing trees and grass.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.
5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing site
utilities.
7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.
B. Related Division 2 Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.
2. Division 2 Section “Lawns and Grasses” and "Exterior Plants" for finish grading including
preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2
inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil
materials.
B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected
during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of
groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
C. DCRA: District of Columbia Department of Consumer & Regulatory Affairs
D. DC DOT: District of Columbia Department of Transportation
E. DOE: District of Columbia Department of the Environment
F. Geotechnical Engineer: a licensed soils engineer contracted by the Owner or Architect.
SITE CLEARING 02230 - 1 of 6

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property, shall be removed from the Project site, and shall
be disposed of at a legal off-site area.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall obtain (immediately prior to the start of construction) and maintain photographs
or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining
construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site
clearing.
B. Record drawings, according to Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and
accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical
conditions.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction (DC DOT).
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
3. Prepare and submit a Traffic Control Plan to the DCRA Permit Center for DC DOT
approval and acquire the associated permit to perform work in the public space / right-of-
way.
B. Adjoining Property: Do not disturb adjoining private property.
C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and provide to and
store on-site (unless otherwise agreed) in an Owner-approved location.
D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for location and surface marking of
subsurface utiltities within the Project area prior to site clearing.
E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in
Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
1. Obtain off-site borrow soil materials, approved by the geotechnical engineer, when
satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and sediment and erosion control
Drawings.
B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
D. Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with the DOE approved plan and DOE
regulations.
3.3 TREE PROTECTION
A. Refer to Section 02231 Tree Protection and Trimming. Comply with the following Tree
Protection specifications if this section is not included in the documents.
B. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing.
Remove fence when construction is complete.
1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.
3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

C. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.

2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected
and covered with soil.
3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with emulsified asphalt or
other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.
E. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of

proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined
by Architect.
3.4 UTILITIES
A. Contractor will arrange for shutting off utility service for existing structures before site clearing,
when required.
1. Disconnect and cap utilities before proceeding with site clearing.
B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Arrange with utility providers to shut off indicated utilities.

2. Owner will assist in shutting off utilities, if required, as requested by Contractor.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
E. Utility service shut-off, disconnection, capping and sealing, temporary service, removal,
alteration, and abandonment shall be coorinated with the utility provider and shall be performed
in accordance with the utility provider’s regulations.
F. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18
inches below exposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.
5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated in Division 2 Sections covering earthwork: For fill in areas to
remain grass or landscaped, place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose
depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,
and other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Install
silt fence around topsoil stockpile.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.
3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal.
4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to

facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of
existing slabs, paving, curbs, and gutters to remain before removing existing portions.
Saw-cut faces vertically.
2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.
3.8 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off of Owner's
property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities.

SECTION 02080 - PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers installation of exterior water, sanitary sewer, and storm lines from the
property line to the building.
C. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping joining materials.

2. Grout.
3. Piping system common requirements.
4. Equipment installation common requirements.
5. Concrete bases.
D. Contractor is responsible for all required testing and inspections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
2.2 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
B. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
C. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 02080 - 1 of 4

2.3 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-
free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
G. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
H. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure
seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe
3.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit.
3.4 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.

SECTION 01820 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and

training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times,
length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include
learning objective and outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer-produced

demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and
products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.
A. Demonstration and Training : Submit six copies within seven days of end of each
training module.
1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating

maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that
indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a
record of successful learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation
and maintenance procedures and training.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review
methods and procedures related to demonstration and training.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01820 - 1/4

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required

to minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
B. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and
maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training

modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by
individual Specification Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to
master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the
system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the

following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design
responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error

messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and
reassembly instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and

training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in
coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance
Data."
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training

modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner
for number of participants, instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and

maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1. Contractor will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design,

operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that

requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner , through Construction Manager, with at least

seven days' advance notice.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each

participant's mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test.

SECTION 01810 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without

regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.
1. Division 15 “Mechanical Systems Commissioning”.
2. Division 16 “ Electrical Systems Commissioning”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product
selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards,
and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items
that support the design process.
B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of

resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
C. CxA, CA: Commissioning Authority.
D. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a
project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals,
measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and
supporting information.
E. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 01810 - 1

1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Members Appointed by Contractor: Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of
the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process
through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to,
representatives of Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers,
suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
B. Members Appointed by Owner:
1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates
the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage
the CxA under a separate contract.
2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.
3. Architect and engineering design professionals.
1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use.
B. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning
team activities.
C. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA and
Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and
maintenance training plan.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall
schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with

entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.
2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.
3. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a monthly bases or as required by the CxA.
4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule.
5. Create construction checklists (Equipment Start-up / Prefunctional Checklist) and submit
to the CxA for review, and comment. Contractor is to document and sign Start-up and
Prefunctional checklists as each piece of equipment start-up is preformed.
6. Complete paper as well as electronic construction checklists as work is completed and
provide to the Commissioning Authority on a two week basis.
7. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures (functional testing) provided
by the Commissioning Authority.

8. Complete commissioning process test procedures.

9. Contractor is to review and clearly understand all LEED commissioning requirements.
1.7 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Organize and lead the commissioning team.
B. Provide commissioning plan.
C. Review OPR & BOD
D. Convene commissioning team meetings.
E. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.

Contractor to submit their start-up checklists, and manufactures start-up documents, and assist
in the creation of all test procedures.
F. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The
sampling rate may vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to,
equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests,
and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR. When a random sample does not meet the
requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the Issues Log.
G. Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.
H. Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.
I. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and random component startup.
J. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates, and include them in the Cx Report

PART 2 - EXECUTION Commissioning Plan
Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning
LEED NC 2.2, EA Fundamental Cx
Project:
GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION
WASHINGTON, DC
Prepared by:
ALLEN & SHARIFF CORPORATION
7061 Deepage Drive • Columbia, Maryland 21045
Phone: 410-381-7100 • Fax: 410-381-7110
Commissioning Authority
Warren Isaac, CxA, LEED®AP
443-545-1159
June 29, 2009

Preliminary Commissioning Plan
Table of Contents
1. Overview
1.1 Abbreviations and Definitions
1.2 Purpose of the Commissioning Plan
1.3 Commissioning Scope
1.4 Commissioned Systems
1.5 N/A
2. General Building Information
3. Construction / Cx Team Data
4. Roles and Responsibilities

4.1 Cx Team Members
4.2 General Management Plan
4.3 General Descriptions of Roles

5. Commissioning Process
5.1 Commissioning Scoping Meeting
5.2 Final Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase
5.3 Site Observation
5.4 Meetings
5.5 Management Protocols
5.6 Progress Reporting and Logs
5.7 N/A
5.8 Prefunctional Checklists, Tests and Startup
5.9 Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures
5.10 Execution of Functional Testing Procedures
5.11 N/A
5.12 N/A
5.13 N/A
7. Schedule
7.1 General Issues
7.2 Project Schedule
General
LEED Functional Commissioning Outline
1. Overview
1.1 Abbreviations and Definitions

The following are common abbreviations used in this document.
A/E- Architect and design engineers FT- Functional Performance Test
CA or Commissioning authority GC or CM General contractor
CxA
BAS- Controls contractor MC- Mechanical contractor
ATC
CM or Construction Manager Mfr- Manufacturer
GC
Cx- Commissioning PC- Prefunctional Checklist
Cx Plan- Commissioning Plan document Subs- Subcontractors to General
EC- Electrical contractor TAB- Test and Balance Contractor
1.2 Purpose of The Commissioning Plan

The purpose of the commissioning plan is to provide direction for the commissioning process, particularly
providing resolution for issues and providing details that cannot be, or were not, fully developed during
design, such as scheduling, participation of various parties of this particular project, actual lines of report-
ing and approvals, coordination, etc. This plan does not provide a detailed explanation of required testing
procedures. The detailed testing requirements and procedures will be developed from the equipment
manufacturers start-up procedures and recommendations and from the project specifications.

1.3 Commissioning Scope

Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively accord-
ing to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. The commissioning process for a LEED pro-
ject focuses on the performance of systems related to LEED prerequisites and credits.
Commissioning during the construction of this project is intended to achieve the following specific objec-
tives:
According to the Contract Documents:
Ensure that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly and receive adequate start-up and
operational checkout by installing contractors.
Verify the design meets LEED and Owner intent.
Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems.
1.4 Commissioned Systems

The following systems will be commissioned in this project. All general references to equipment in this
document refer only to equipment that is to be commissioned.
Preliminary List of Systems to be Commissioned
• Building Automation System (BAS)
• Building Exhaust Systems
• Hydronic Hot Water Heating System
• Chilled Water System
• D/X Systems
• Mis. Heating Units
• Fan Coil Units
• Energy Recovery System
• VAV Terminals
• Domestic Hot Water Systems

• Lighting Controls
1.5 N/A
2. General Building Information

Project: Georgetown Library
Building Type: Recreation Center

Number of stories: 4
Const. Period: 1 year
3. Construction/Cx Team Data (primary parties)

TO BE COMPLETED AT AWARD OF PROJECT
Team Member Company, Address &
Contact Information
Contact Names
District Of Columbia Public Li-

Owner brary
Project Manager
General Contractor
Site Contact
Allen & Shariff Corporation Fax: 410-381-7110

Commissioning Company 7061 Deepage Drive
Columbia, MD 21045
Commissioning Authority Warren Isaac Office: 443-656-1056
Cell: 410-340-5363
Email: wisaac@allenshariff.com

Martinez & Johnson Architecture

Architect & Planners
Project Manager
Project Architect
John J Christie & associates

MEP Designers & Engineers
Project Manager
Mechanical Contractor
Site Contact
Plumbing Contractor
Site Contact
Electrical Contractor
Site Contact
TAB Contractor
Site Contact
BAS/ATC Contractor

Site Contact
4. Roles and Responsibilities
4.1 Team Members

The members of the commissioning team consist of the Owner’s representative, CxA, assigned members
of the GC, A/E (particularly the mechanical engineer), the mechanical contractor, plumbing contractor,
and any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. If known, the Owner’s building engi-
neer is also a member of the commissioning team.
All contractor personnel on the commissioning team are to make themselves familiar with
LEED NC 2.2 Prerequisite 1 EA commissioning process.
4.2 General Management Plan

The CxA responsibilities are directly to the Owner. In general, the CxA coordinates the commissioning
activities and reports to the Owner through the Architect. The CxA’s responsibilities, along with all other
contractors’ commissioning responsibilities are detailed in the Cx plan portion of the specifications. All
members of the Cx Team are to work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the ob-
jectives of the Contract Documents. Refer to the management protocols section below.
4.3 General Descriptions of Roles

General descriptions of the commissioning roles are as follows:
CxA : Coordinates the Cx process, writes tests, oversees and documents performance tests
GC : Facilitates the Cx process, ensures that Subs perform their responsibilities and integrates Cx into
the construction process and schedule
Subs : Demonstrate proper system performance and provide all necessary equipment for testing
A/E : Perform construction observation, approve O&M manuals and assist in resolving problems
Mfr. : The equipment manufacturers and vendors provide documentation to facilitate the commissioning
work and perform contracted equipment startup
5. Commissioning Process
This section sequentially details the commissioning process by commissioning task or activity.
5.1 Commissioning Scoping Meeting

A commissioning scoping meeting is planned and conducted by the CxA. In attendance are the represen-
tatives of the Owner, GC, A/E and the mechanical, electrical, and plumbing contractors. At the meeting,
commissioning parties are introduced, the commissioning process is reviewed, and management and re-
porting lines are determined. The flow of documents, how much submittal data the CxA will receive, etc.
are also discussed. The Cx Plan is reviewed, process questions are addressed, lines of reporting and

communications determined and the work products list is discussed. Also covered are the general list of
each party’s responsibilities, which party is responsible to develop the startup plan for each piece of
equipment and the proposed commissioning schedule. The outcome of the meeting is to increased under-
standing by all parties of the commissioning process and their respective responsibilities. The meeting
provides the CxA additional information needed to finalize or modify the Cx Plan, including the commis-
sioning schedule. Prior to this meeting the CxA is given all drawings and specifications and the construc-
tion schedule by trade. The GC is responsible for taking meeting minutes and distribute them to each
team member.
5.2 Final Commissioning Plan--Construction Phase

The CxA finalizes the Cx Plan using the information gathered from the scoping meeting. The initial
commissioning schedule is also developed along with a detailed timeline. The timeline is fine-tuned as
construction progresses. In particular, 60 days prior to startup of the primary equipment, the CxA meets
with the GC and develops a detailed commissioning schedule. The CxA approves the commissioning
plan. Updates to the Cx Plan by the CxA, is an ongoing process throughout project construction.
5.3 Site Observation

The CxA make periodic visits to the site, as necessary and per the Cx contract, to witness equipment and
system installations.
5.4 Meetings
The CxA may attend selected planning and job-site meetings at their prerogative, in order to remain in-
formed on construction progress and to update parties involved in commissioning. The GC is to provide
the CxA with information regarding substitutions, change orders and any Architect’s Supplemental
Instructions (ASI) that may affect commissioning equipment, systems or the commissioning schedule.
The CA may review construction-meeting minutes, change orders or ASI's for the same purpose. Later
during construction, necessary meetings between various commissioning team parties will be scheduled
by the as required by the CxA, through the GC.
5.5 Management Protocols

The following protocols will be used on this project.
Issue Protocol
For requests for information (RFI) or The CxA goes first: __x_ direct to A/E, ___through the GC,
formal documentation requests:
For minor or verbal information and The CxA goes direct to the informed party.
clarifications:
For notifying contractors of deficien- The CxA documents deficiencies through the GC, but may dis-
cies: cuss deficiency issues with contractors prior to notifying the GC.
For scheduling functional tests or The CxA may provide input for some coordination of training
training: and testing, but does not do any scheduling.
For scheduling commissioning meet- The CxA selects the date and schedules through the:
ings: __x_GC.
___The CA schedules and notifies attendees directly.

For making a request for significant The CxA has no authority to issue change orders.
changes:
For making small changes in specified The CxA may not make changes to specified sequences without
sequences of operations: approval from the A/E.
Subcontractors disagreeing with re- Try and resolve with the CxA first. Then work through GC who
quests or interpretations by the CxA will work with CxA directly to resolve the situation.
shall:
______________________________ ____________________________________________________
___ _____
______________________________ ____________________________________________________
___ _____
5.6 Progress Reporting and Logs

At the beginning of construction, the GC provides the CxA with monthly progress reports. Thirty (30)
days prior to the startup of the first piece of major equipment, the frequency of progress reports is in-
creased to twice per month, until startup is completed. Thirty (30) days before Prefunctional or Functional
testing of equipment begins, weekly progress reports are required until testing and all non-conformance
issues are resolved. The CxA may adjust the reporting frequency as needed. The progress reports con-
tain, an update of the schedule with list of requested schedule changes and new items added to the sched-
ule, a list of new and outstanding deficiencies, a description of commissioning progress corresponding to
the plan, etc. The CxA keeps a log of all commissioning-related issues that require current or future at-
tention. The CxA regularly communicates with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them
apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling issues through memos, progress reports, etc.. The
CxA will keep all commissioning materials in an organized notebook.
5.7 Initial Submittals and Documentation
N/A
5.8 Prefunctional Checklists, Tests and Startup

Prefunctional checklists (PC) are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are installed and
operational and that Functional Performance Testing may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each
piece of equipment receives full prefunctional checkout by the Contractor. No sampling strategies are
used. In general, the prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to
formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.
Prefunctional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or sys-
tem for initial operation (e.g., oil levels OK, fan belt tension, labels affixed, gages in place, sensor calibra-
tion, etc.). However, some prefunctional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a compo-
nent, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump
motor of a chiller system). The word prefunctional refers to before functional testing. Prefunctional
checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist.

Contractors typically already perform some, if not many, of the prefunctional checklist items the commis-
sioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these
checklist items. This project requires that the procedures be documented in writing by the installing tech-
nician. The CxA does not witness much of the prefunctional check listing, except for testing of larger or
more critical pieces of equipment and some spot-checking. CONTRACTOR IS TO SUBMIT TO THE
CxA THEIR PREFUNCTIONAL STARTUP DOCUMENT FORMS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT
4 WEEKS PRIOR TO STARTING SYSTEMS.
5.8.1 Start-up Plan

The CxA assists the commissioning team members responsible for startup in developing detailed start-up
plans for all equipment. The parties responsible for each part of startup and initial checkout are noted on
the prefunctional checklists.
The following procedures will be used for this project: (the contractor is responsible for the plan devel-
opment):
The CxA adapts and enhances, if necessary, the representative prefunctional checklists (PC) and proce-
dures, and develops original lists, as necessary.
The CxA transmits them to the GC who designates which trade or contractor is responsible to fill out each
line item on the Prefunctional Checklist from the CxA. The GC then transmits the checklist to the re-
sponsible Subs.
The Sub designated to develop the Start-up Plan obtains manufacturer installation, start-up and checkout
data, including actual field checkout sheets used by the field technicians.
The Sub copies all pages with important instructional data and procedures (not covered in manufacturer
field checkout sheets) from the start-up and checkout manuals and adds a signature line in the column by
each procedure.
The copied pages, along with the prefunctional checklist provided by the GC (originally from the CxA)
and the manufacturer field checkout sheets become the “Start-up and Checkout Plan.”
For systems that may not have adequate manufacturer start-up and checkout procedures, particularly for
components being integrated with other equipment, the Sub should provide the added necessary detail and
documenting format to the CxA for approval, prior to execution.
The Sub transmits the full Start-up Plan to the CxA for review and approval.
The CxA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them and noting any pro-
cedures that need to be added, and conveys to the GC. The GC then transmits the full start-up plan to the
Subs for their review and use. (This usually means that the Prefunctional Checklist, alone, will go to more
than one Sub, while the full plan will go to the primary installing contractor.)
5.8.2 Execution of Checklists and Startup

Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and initial checkout with the GC and
CxA. The startup and initial checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. The CxA, and GC
if necessary, observes, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are
multiples. For components of equipment, (e.g., condensing units), the CxA observes a portion of the pre-
functional and start-up procedures. To document the process of startup and checkout, the site technician
performing the line item task initials and dates each paragraph of procedures in the “Startup Plan” and

checks off items on the prefunctional and manufacturer field checkout sheets, as they are completed.
Only individuals having direct knowledge of a line item being completed shall check or initial the forms.
The Subs and vendors execute the checklists and tests and submit a signed copy of the completed start-up
and prefunctional tests and checklists to the CxA. The CxA may review prefunctional checklists in pro-
gress, as necessary.
5.8.3 Sampling Strategy for CxA Observation of Prefunctional Checkout and Startup
At the discretion of the CxA a small percentage of equipment as determined by the CxA shall be wit-
nessed during prefunctional checkout and startup.
5.8.4 Deficiencies and Non-Conformance

The Subs clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were
not completed successfully at the bottom of the prefunctional test form. The information for the deficien-
cies are provided to the CxA within two days of test completion. The CxA works with the Contractors,
Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items, involving the GC and others as
necessary. The installing Subs or vendors correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete according to
the checklists and tests. The GC recommends approval of the startup and initial checkout of each system
to the CxA when complete. The CxA does not document approval for individual equipment or systems,
and does not negate ongoing design issues or punch list items.
5.8.5 TAB
The TAB contractor submits the outline of the TAB plan and approach to the CxA and the controls con-
tractor four weeks prior to starting the TAB. The CxA reviews the plan and approach for understanding
and coordination issues and may comment, but does not “approve.” The TAB submits weekly written
reports of discrepancies, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CxA and GC.
This facilitates quicker resolution of problems and will result in a more complete TAB before functional
testing begins. TAB work shall be coordinated with the Control and Mechanical Contractors to assure
systems can be properly balanced. Any system which is being scheduled by the GC to be balanced, but
can not be properly balanced for what ever reason at the requested time should be refused and reported to
the CxA. Project schedules are very important, but not at the expense of a properly balanced system.
5.8.6 Controls Checkout Plan

The controls contractor is to develop and submit a written step-by-step plan to the CxA, which describes
the process they intend to follow in verifying proper performance of the control system, and the forms on
which they will document the process. The controls contractor will also meet with the TAB contractor
prior to the start of TAB and review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system for
use in TAB. The controls contractor shall also provide a technician qualified to operate the controls to
assist the TAB contractor in performing TAB. The controls contractor shall verify proper operation and
document of each field installed control devise, connecting wiring and front-end system. Accuracy of sen-
sors and point to point testing shall be verified and documented prior to functional testing.
The controls contractor shall be an active participant for all Functional Testing.

5.9 Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures
5.9.1 Overview
Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation.
Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, compo-
nent failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems
are run through all of the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be re-
sponding as the sequences state. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in
a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is performed by
the installing contractor or vendor. The CxA only is to witness and document the testing. All hands on is
performed by the contractor or their subs. Contractor is to supply all test equipment necessary to perform
the functional testing as outlined by the CxA.
The CxA shall have the authority to postpone functional testing if he feels the systems have not been
properly prepared for Functional Testing. It is then the contractor’s responsibility to retest systems as re-
quired.
5.9.2 Scope of Testing (Additional)

All specific testing requirements are to be included in the bid documents per the original specifications.
5.9.3 Development Process

Before test procedures are written, the CxA obtains all requested documentation and a current list of
change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, control sequences and set
points. The CxA develops specific test procedures to verify proper operation of each piece of equipment
and system, using the testing requirements and the representative test procedure. The GC obtains clarifi-
cation, as needed, from contractors and the A/E regarding sequences and operation to develop these tests.
Prior to execution, the GC provides a copy of the primary equipment tests to the installing Sub who re-
views the tests for feasibility, safety, warranty and equipment protection. Functional testing and verifica-
tion may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or
by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities
or by stand-alone data loggers. The CxA shall determine which method is most appropriate.
5.9.4 Testing Plan Overview

To provide the contractors with a better idea of where functional testing lies in the schedule, what issues
are preventing the start of testing, which contractors are needed for each test and how much time might be
expected from them, Form for Commissioning Functional Testing Plan Overview, is used. This form is
filled out after most equipment has been started up and when functional testing dates are not too far off.
The form is provided to the Contractors to assist in moving more efficiently to functional testing. The
CxA must be updated with construction schedules.
5.10 Execution of Functional Testing Procedures

5.10.1 Overview and Process

The CxA schedules functional tests through the GC and affected Subs. For any given system, prior to
performing functional testing, the CxA waits until the prefunctional checklist has been submitted with the
necessary signatures, confirming that the system is ready for functional testing. The CxA oversees and
witnesses the functional testing as necessary, of equipment and systems according to the Cx Plan.
The Subs execute the tests. The control system is tested before it is used to verify performance of other
components or systems. The air balancing is completed before functional testing of air-related systems.
Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems and finally to interlocks and connections
between systems. Functional testing shall not take place prior to completed TAB work and report.
5.10.2 Deficiencies and Retesting

The CxA documents the results of the functional test. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified are
made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. The CxA records the results of the test on the proce-
dure or test form. Deficiencies or non-conformance issues are noted and reported to the GC through Is-
sues Log. Subs correct deficiencies, notify the GC and return their copy of the log certifying correction.
The GC schedules retesting. Decisions regarding deficiencies and corrections are made at as low a level
as possible, preferably between GC and Sub. For areas in dispute, final authority, besides the Owner’s,
resides with the CxA and A/E. In the event that any scheduled equipment or system functional perform-
ance tests are terminated more than once because the CxA or mechanical engineer discover deficient or
incomplete work, or due to the non-attendance of required contractor or supplier personnel, the contractor
or subcontractor responsible for the termination shall also be responsible for paying reasonable costs of
time and travel expenses for the representatives who were physically present for the purpose of witness-
ing the start-up or test.
5.10.3 Facility Staff Participation

The Owner’s facilities operating staff are encouraged to attend and participate in the testing process. The
contractor is to document a list of personnel present to witness functional testing. This form does not de-
scribe their involvement in formal training. The GC will notify the CxA of who will attend, and then no-
tify the facility staff when the commissioning events will occur.
5.10.4 Sampling
Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested
using a sampling strategy. The CxA shall determine this sampling per past sampling success.
6. N/A
7. Schedule

7.1 General Issues
The following sequential priorities are followed:

Equipment is not “temporarily” started (for heating or cooling), until pre-start checklist items and all
manufacturers pre-start procedures are completed and moisture, dust and other environmental and build-
ing integrity issues have been addressed.
Functional testing is not begun until prefunctional and start-up and TAB is completed, for a given system.
The controls system and equipment it controls are not functionally tested until all points have been cali-
brated and pre-functional testing completed.
TAB is not performed until the controls system has been sufficiently functionally tested and approved by
the CxA for TAB work.
TAB is not performed until the envelope is completely enclosed and ceiling complete, unless the return is
ducted.
7.2 Project Schedule
The initial commissioning schedule is summarized in Table 7-1. A more detailed schedule is contained in
Form C-10, Detailed Commissioning Schedule
Table 7-1. Initial Commissioning Schedule Summary
TO BE COORDINATED WITH GC AT START OF PROJECT

Estimated Start Date
Task / Activity Estimated End Date
Initial scoping meeting and final plan
Submittals obtained and reviewed
Begin construction site visits/inspections
Prefunctional forms developed and distributed
Startup and initial checkout plans
Startup and initial checkout executed
TAB
Air
Temperature Testing
Functional performance tests
O&M documentation review and verification
Training and training verification
Final commissioning report
Seasonal testing, (If Necessary)

LEED Fundamental Commissioning Outline:
General:
The systems outlined in the specifications, project documents, and commissioning plan are to be fully
verified as functional working systems through the effort of the commissioning team with the leadership
of the Cx authority. The Cx process shall begin with a review and comment of the design concept, and
continue through the final operational verifications.
The system design review by the CxA is indented as a cursory review of the overall systems design to
verify that it meets the LEED criteria outlined for this project. The owner project requirements (OPR),
and the MEP bases of design (BOD) shall be reviewed for their intent and compatibility. All design issues
or recommendations shall be forwarded to the design team for their review and action as deemed appro-
priate.
As the project enters the construction phase the Cx authority shall meet with the Cx team, which shall
consist of but is not limited to the following professionals and tradesmen.
The commissioning is led by the Commissioning Authority (CxA), whom is acting on the owners behalf,
and is the lead person of the Cx team.
Owners Representative (OR), which may in some cases be the CxA
Building Operational Personnel (BOP),
Design Engineers (EA), Architect (AE)
General Contractor (GC)
Mechanical Contractor (MC)
Electrical Contractor (EC)
TAB Contractor (TAB)
Building Automation System Contractor (BAS)
Other professionals or tradesmen that may be necessary for the particular portion or scope of the project.
The intent is to have qualified personnel as members of the Cx team who have the authority to execute the
commissioning plan and who are dedicated to the LEED process and the owner’s objectives relative to
sustainability and green building design.
The construction process is the phase of the project, which obviously receives the major-
ity of attention during commissioning. A brief description of the intended process is to follow.
Equipment outlined in the Cx process is used for commissioning process description only, and
may not represent the actual/installed MEP devises and equipment used on this project. The de-
scription is generic in nature and is intended to create an understanding of the general construc-
tion commissioning process for the referenced project.
A general description of the Cx activities from the design phase through the construction
and acceptance phases is outlined for a general understanding of the commissioning LEED NC
2.2 prerequisite and enhanced commissioning activities required for this project. It is to be un-
derstood that the commissioning process requires a total team effort to be successful.

Early Construction Phase:

During the early stages of construction, the CxA or commissioning team member(s) chosen by the
CxA, shall review the equipment submittals as they relate to the BOD and LEED requirements. The CxA
submittal review responsibilities are limited to LEED Cx requirements, with the final action/disposition
being the responsibility of the design team and/or owner.
The general contractor (GC) is to create a construction schedule during this phase of construction,
and issue the schedule to the entire commissioning team for review and comment. The schedule is to be
reevaluated by the GC and owner on a monthly (or more frequent) basis and submitted to the commis-
sioning team for review and Cx scheduling coordination purposes.
During the later part of this phase, the first of a series of commissioning meetings is to take place. The
first commissioning meeting shall be referred to as the commissioning “Kick Off “meeting. The kick off
meeting is to include a brief discussion of the commissioning plan, selection of the Cx team members and
review and discussion of the project schedule. The GC, through the direction of the CxA, shall have the
responsibility of scheduling all meetings throughout the entire construction and Cx process.
Construction Phase:
The construction phase is the project evolvement from early construction to the start of the acceptance
phase. During the construction phase, the CxA shall schedule commissioning meetings as necessary
through the GC. Meetings are to take place only in the event that the commissioning process is not being
followed properly, or if scheduling issues arise. A meeting shall be scheduled just prior to contractor
starting equipment designated as “Commissioned Equipment “(such as, HVAC , major electrical and
plumbing systems) for the first time. In lieu of non scheduled Cx meetings, most ongoing Cx related is-
sues may be addressed via phone conferences with the CxA. Meeting minutes generated from non-
commissioning meetings are to be submitted to the CxA within one week of the meeting. Minutes of
scheduled commissioning meetings shall be the responsibility of the CxA or someone appointed by the
CxA.
During construction, MEP systems testing is to be verified by designated member of the Cx team and
associated record documents shall be signed by both the contractor and the designated Cx team witness
and shall be submitted to the CxA within one week of testing. The test record shall be reviewed and in-
serted in the final commissioning report by the CxA. Test documents may also be required to be submit-
ted to the design engineer as specified.
Prior to startup of equipment, which is part of the construction phase, the contractor is to submit
manufacturer’s startup procedure documents to the CxA for review and comment. Further startup proce-
dures/requirements may be submitted from the CxA to the contractor in the form of prefunctional test
documents. This process is intended to ensure proper and safe system startup in preparation for successful
functional testing, which will take place during the acceptance phase of the project. It is of the greatest
importance that the contractor complete all startup document checklists for EACH piece of equipment and
submit them to the CxA within one week of successful equipment startup.
Once the equipment has been successfully started, and startup documents submitted to the CxA, the
control contractor is to perform the point to point checkout of the BAS system. The control contractor is
then to assist the TAB contractor in total system balance as outlined in the construction documents. Prior
to the BAS and the TAB contractor verification process, they are to submit their verification procedures
narrative to the CxA for review and comment. At the completion of the TAB system verification, the
TAB contractor is to also submit a copy of the balance report to the CxA for review. The CxA shall wit-
ness portions of the equipment startup and BAS/TAB verification processes’ on an unannounced basis,
and submit any issues that arise in writing to the architect for distribution.

At this juncture of the project, the building should be 98% complete and close to readiness for occupancy.
The commissioning process should now to move to the acceptance phase.
Construction Acceptance Phase:

As we enter the acceptance phase of the project the building should be basically ready for occupancy.
Normal building utilities services are to be completely functional, and the contractor’s and architect’s
punch lists should be close to completion. The contractors shall have submitted all required documents
and verified readiness for systems functional testing. (Note: CxA is to receive all required startup docu-
ments at least three weeks prior to functional testing to allow adequate time for the creation of the func-
tional testing documents)
The CxA shall then create the functional test procedures for all systems outlined in the commission-
ing plan and specifications. Functional testing shall include all normal, emergency, and failure modes of
operation. Functional testing shall verify all control point to point operations and the TAB results on a
random sampling basis. The CxA shall only witness and document the functional testing. The appointed
commissioning team contractor technician or factory representative, shall perform the actual testing of the
systems. This may require multiple commissioning team members, such as, contractor technicians from
the mechanical, electrical, BAS, TAB, GC, ect., as needed for each system to be tested. Some systems
under functional testing may require only a portion of the systems to be tested, such as, multiple small
systems like VAV’s or small split D/X equipment. These systems shall be tested on a representative sam-
pling basis of total systems of the same type. These systems shall be tested at the discretion of the CxA
until a satisfactory quantity of systems is successfully demonstrated.
It is recommended that building maintenance personnel be present during functional testing to aid in their
knowledge of operation of the systems. Systems, which cannot be satisfactorily functionally tested due to
weather conditions, are to be rescheduled at a date and time that is more advantages for testing. All Cx
team members are required to perform such seasonal testing as part of this Cx project.
CxA shall prepare and submit final Cx report documenting the Cx process up to this point.

SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation

and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Product maintenance manuals.
5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.
A. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-

indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with

applicable item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation
and maintenance directory.
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
2. Two paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.

Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect, through
Construction Manager, will return two copies.
B. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and
training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning

Agent's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of
receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Agent's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1/7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE

MANUALS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate

section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of
equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in
the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.
6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7. Name and contact information for Architect.
8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent.
9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that
designed the systems contained in the manuals.
10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents

alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble
instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single
binder.
E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.

Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for
minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based
upon file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and
equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group
documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite
bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks
reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file
tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled
volumes.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets
inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name,and subject matter
of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the
manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and
major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-
referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with
text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text

pages and use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in
labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate
locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,
descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,
include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,
and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error

messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating
personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems

and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on
Contract Documents.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required
for identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and
finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures,
repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name
and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,
address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the

following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source

information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as

described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.
For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title
in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance

documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of
equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail
essential maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list
of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance
documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with

name and telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating

procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for
types of emergencies indicated.
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data

indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into
the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and

maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem,
and piece of equipment not part of a system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,

include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to
identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more
than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from
the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to
information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate

the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control
sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in
record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and

maintenance manuals.
F. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting
operation and maintenance documentation.

SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record

documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
1. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements.”
2. Division 1 Section “Submittal Requirements.”
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for project record

documents of the Work in those Sections.
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit six set(s) of marked-up record prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including

addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1/4

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation
varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained
record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar
entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record
prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would

be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately.
Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of
marked-up record prints.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same
location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include
identification on cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate
electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name
each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data
file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where

installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract
modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information

necessary to provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes
in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for

miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of
the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued
use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for
project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record
documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and

Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction.
Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record
documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from
deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and
Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.


SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
1. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for submitting final LEED
documentation including LEED online templates.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
4. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing
Owner's personnel.
5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of

Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete
with request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of
items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating
certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance
manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or
settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location
designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number
where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1/5

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On

receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with
inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the
Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,
either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final

completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items
to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The
certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or
otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of
request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or
notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for
Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction.[ Use CSI Form 14.1A.]
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories
for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. Six paper copies, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through
Construction Manager, will return three copies.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated

portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of
Substantial Completion is indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents
of the Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf

binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive
8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and
the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal
package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to
each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer

or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are
potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable,
use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to

comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,
and other foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-
obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged
transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch
surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,
including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,

and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar
droppings, and other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may
impede operation or reduce longevity.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by
hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury
vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection

and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. IAQ Management Plan: Complete filter change and air testing as required by approved
IAQ Management Plan.

SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1. See Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for LEED prerequisites and credits
including SS Credit 3, MR Credit 1 and MR Credit 2.
2. See Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of
demolished materials.
3. See Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and
below-grade improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Historic Preservation Definitions: As indicated on Drawing Sheet A-0.03.
B. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
C. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to
Owner.
D. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for
reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
E. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that
are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective

demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity,
interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary
partitions and means of egress.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1/5

A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition

work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved

certification program.
C. LEED Requirements for Building Reuse:

1. Credit MR 1.1: Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor) and
envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and
nonstructural roofing material) not indicated to be demolished; do not demolish
such existing construction beyond indicated limits.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
E. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
F. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition

area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by

Owner as far as practical.
1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a. Loose furniture.
b. Interior doors.
c. Molding and trim.
d. Cornice remnants.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before

proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered

in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials have been removed by Owner under a separate contract.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous
materials under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect
them against damage during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine

extent of selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to
be removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with

intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether

removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any
portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs .
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic
Documentation."
G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect

them against damage during selective demolition operations.
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off

indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be
selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that
bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of
services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug
and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-
removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,
walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1
Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled
movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by
new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as
not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project

rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements
beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.
1. Building Structure and Shell: 75 percent.
2. Nonshell Elements: 50 percent.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner .
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for
new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage

and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and
cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations
are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,

reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing

execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
1. Division 1 “LEED Requirements.”
2. Division 1 “Construction Waste Management.”
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from
indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
4. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching
penetrations in fire-rated construction.
A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location

and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to

accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1. Submit receipts showing amount (by weight or volume – one method through out
project) of materials disposed or recycled.
C. Certified Surveys: Submit three copies signed by professional engineer.
D. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record
survey data.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1/9

A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
land-surveying services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and
patching of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify

Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect
before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting
and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could
change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed
construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction

practices and procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with
requirements of Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements."
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and
functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities,mechanical
and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping;
underground electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component

of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and
systems are to be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to [local utility] [Owner] that is

necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines,
services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction.
Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work
are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the

need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions
outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect

according to requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and

Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies
are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.
B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted
surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to
obtain required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work
progresses.
5. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines
and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with
control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required
lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and
tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction
Manager.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent
benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on

Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and

other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
D. Final Property Survey: Engage a professional engineer to prepare a final property

survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a
certification, signed by professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and
levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded

by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct
alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing

products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible
results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial
Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging

operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of
occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise
levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of
attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount

components at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
J. Comply with IAQ Management Plan.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and
patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete
without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project
that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or

interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage
elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures
with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions
to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit
to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are
complete.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize
evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and
appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste

materials and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or
three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness
necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to
written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only
cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as

necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with Construction Waste
Management Plan.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary

through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 1

Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates

and finishes.
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces,

touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be
repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

SECTION 01635 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting

comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
2. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for LEED requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by
Contractor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.1A] [facsimile of form provided
in the Project Manual].
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation

cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Confirmation that substituted product meets applicable LEED
requirements.
c. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications
needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner
and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
substitution.
d. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635 - 1/4

e. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and

fabrication and installation procedures.
f. Samples, where applicable or requested.
g. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
h. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
i. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
j. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from [ICC-ES] <Insert applicable code organization>.
k. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction
cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of
purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
l. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract
Sum.
m. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution
request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for
n. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed
substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within fourteen days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of
acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of
request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,
whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery
of need for change, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for preparation
and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will

produce indicated results.
b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if

received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed .
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,

energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities
may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar
considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products

for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.
1. Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
2. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements.”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the
terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's
published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another
project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through
submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific

manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design
product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the
significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable

product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1/5

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of
approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 14 days of
receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal

Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent
damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly
protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of

units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent
condensation.

4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for
period of installation and concealment.
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and
limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer

for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to
provide specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information

and properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications,
prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout

Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of
installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other
items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard
options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in
conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the

Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide

the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or
substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or
source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies
with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's
convenience will not be considered.
3. Products:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed,
or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with
requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an
unnamed product.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'

names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies
with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's
convenience [will] [will not] be considered[, unless otherwise indicated].
b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available
manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a
product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements.
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a

product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the
specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles,
dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of
an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's

sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that
complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for

comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following
conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to
record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those
named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product meets applicable LEED credit requirements.
4. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
5. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
6. Samples, if requested.

SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from
partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site
clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction
waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition
or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in

preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse

in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent

incorporation into the Work.
A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight

of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and
salvage of
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 1/7

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 21 days of date established for the
Notice to Proceed .
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,
submit report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Hauler name and destination of diverted materials.
3. Generation point of waste.
4. Total quantity of waste by volume or weight. Use one method consistently
throughout project.
5. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual by volume or weight.
6. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual iby volume or weight.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) by volume or weight.
8. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of
total waste.
B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit

calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of
total waste generated by the Work.
C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated

to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to

individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of

recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them.
Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
G. LEED Submittal: LEED letter template for Credit MR 2.1, signed by Contractor,
tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted,
and statement that requirements for the credit have been met.
H. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator .
I. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician

responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was
recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include
name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED Accredited Professional,

certified by USGBC.
B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved

certification program.
C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and

requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction
work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and
construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of
measure throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and

construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and
assumptions for estimates.
C. Waste Location: Indicate specific area on-site for collection of commingled or

segregated recyclable material.
D. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged,
recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation,
total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling
and transportation procedures.
1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in
this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before
incorporation into the Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals
and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of
recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of.
Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator
facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for
separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and
designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,

storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste
management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be

responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management
work plan.
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of
submittal return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and
disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to

ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent
occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating
materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling
dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:

3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make items functional for use indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.
C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area [off-site] [designated by Owner].

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives
received for recycling waste materials shall [accrue to Owner] [accrue to Contractor]
[be shared equally by Owner and Contractor].
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and
unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated

materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver
or processor.
3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.
B. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.
C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other
metals.
1. Pulverize concrete to maximum [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.
D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with
other metals.
1. Pulverize masonry to maximum [3/4-inch] [1-inch] [1-1/2-inch] [4-inch] size.
2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
E. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length.
Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood
materials.
F. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.

2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
G. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts.
Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.
H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals
from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.
I. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate
supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
J. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store
in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets
from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into
component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees [on-site] [at landfill facility].
C. Wood Materials:
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a
dry location.
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile
chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,

remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or
incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be
disposed of accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's

property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for
burning materials until fires are extinguished.
D. Disposal: Transport waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on

Owner's property.
E. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7 SAMPLE FORMS

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility

interruptions.
2. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for SS Prerequisite 1, EQ Credit 3.1

and EQ Credit 3.2.
3. Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management.”
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction
operations.
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction
operations.
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas
for construction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA

Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more
stringent.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 1/8

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S.

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines] [and] ICC/ANSI A117.1.
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless
of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes,

temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner,

Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to
accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 1 Sections. Keep office
clean and orderly.
C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required
by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type

heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended
use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system
for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each
return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC
system as required in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required
by progress of the Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section

"Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service
can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and
maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use
of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select
equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements
being installed.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by

construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting
installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will
not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and

minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by
Owner.
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic
conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for

use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field
office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use
when away from field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible
according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion
inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and

utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction
personnel.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not
permitted.
1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on

Drawings.
2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform
public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Construction Waste Management."
G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered
"tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
H. Temporary Elevator Use: Use of elevators is not permitted.
I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to to

maintain means of egress.
J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time
of Substantial Completion.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and

conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other

undesirable effects.
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil

erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed
areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and
sedimentation-control Drawings.
C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent
flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the
drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations.
Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize

attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform
extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests
and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner.
Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
F. Site Enclosure Fence: Furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will
prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: [As required to enclose entire Project site or portion

determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations] [As
indicated on Drawings].
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to
authorized personnel.[ Furnish one set of keys to Owner.]
G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Lock entrances at end of each work day.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning
signs and lighting.
I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations,
and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete,

insulate temporary enclosures.
J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of

types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.
Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish
procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post
warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a
warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not
to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work.

Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials

are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials
from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged
contact with concrete.
C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before
full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to
infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items

with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material.
4. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry
before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the

building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain
as follows:
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in

conditions.
2. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured
moisture level within 48 hours.
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste

and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security
and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service
has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no
later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary
facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification
signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Historic Preservation Terms and Definitions: As indicated on Drawing Sheet A-0.03.
C. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,

applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
D. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
E. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including
"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
F. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities

having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
G. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.
H. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,
curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
I. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
J. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of
Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description
of the land on which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and
effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent
referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
REFERENCES 01420 - 1/11

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract

Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be

familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction

activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities
indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in
the following list.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
ABAA Air Barrier Association of America
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ACI American Concrete Institute
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The)
AHA American Hardboard Association

(Now part of CPA)
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
AI Asphalt Institute

AIA American Institute of Architects (The)
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America

(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA Architectural Precast Association
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association
APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems
(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

(See ASCE)
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME ASME International

(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM ASTM International

(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCMA)
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Protection Association

(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
AWS American Welding Society

AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Industry Association (The)
BIFMA BIFMA International

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association
International)
CDA Copper Development Association
CEA Consumer Electronics Association
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council
CPA Composite Panel Association
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSI Cast Stone Institute
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The)
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ESD ESD Association

(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO

(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)

FSA Fluid Sealing Association
FSC Forest Stewardship Council
GA Gypsum Association
GANA Glass Association of North America
GRI (Part of GSI)
GS Green Seal
GSI Geosynthetic Institute
HI Hydronics Institute
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
ISO International Organization for Standardization

Available from ANSI
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
ITS Intertek Testing Service NA

(Now ETL SEMCO)
ITU International Telecommunication Union
LMA Laminating Materials Association

(Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America
MIA Marble Institute of America
MPI Master Painters Institute
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry

Inc.
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE NACE International

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association
NFPA NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA National Glass Association

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF NSF International

(National Sanitation Foundation International)
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association

(Now WDMA)
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute
PLANET Professional Landcare Network

(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America)
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute
SAE SAE International
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute

SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

(See ASCE)
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIA Security Industry Association
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

(Now IGMA)
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray
Polyurethane Foam Division)
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI Steel Tank Institute
SWI Steel Window Institute
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.

(Now TCNA)
TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc.
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
TMS The Masonry Society
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc.

TPI Turfgrass Producers International
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association)
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
ICC International Code Council
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject
to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

EPA Environmental Protection Agency
GSA General Services Administration
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PBS Public Buildings Service

(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science
USDA Department of Agriculture
USPS Postal Service
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and
Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of
the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board
CFR Code of Federal Regulations

Available from Government Printing Office
FED-STD Federal Standard

(See FS)
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards

Available from Access Board


SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Related Documents: Solicitation, Part 1, E.1 “Inspections and Tests.”
C. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services
required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having
jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
D. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 “LEED Requirements” for LEED requirements including EQ Credit 3.1/
2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and

during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and
substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during

and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the
Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include
contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or
a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1/7

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.

Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require
that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized
individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or
trades.
I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and
extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or
quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before
proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum
within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values
are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having

jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having
jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems.
1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed
in the designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the
Architect.
2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the
wind-force-resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications
in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
authority.

1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and
testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and

inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
product.
3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar
documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on
performance of the Work.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified

to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities

shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations.
Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for
the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with

the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 329 ; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is
acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction

testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and
construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, ; do not
reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through
Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections
and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or
deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility.

Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies
with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's
services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials,
inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were

Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract
Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and

Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required
tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities
or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ
tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,

and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as
requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of
personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
testing agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
Project site.
F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-

assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of
removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures
to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of
irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its
services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to
Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,

repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams
that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document
requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution
Requirements."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.


SECTION 01352 - LEED REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain
USGBC LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Silver
certification based on LEED-NC, Version 2.2.
1. Divisions 1 through 16 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of
each of these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to
LEED.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that

wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited
certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for
Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified
for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design.
C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested
within a 10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made
from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.
D. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as

well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or
material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that
percentage (by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.
E. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of

500 miles from Project site. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components
into the building product that is installed at Project site.
F. Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured materials

made from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of
500 miles from Project site.
G. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be

determined by weight.
1. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households
or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of
the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.
LEED REQUIREMENTS 01352 - 1/7

2. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream

during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as
rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed
within the same process that generated it.
H. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered
or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing
process (pre-consumer), or after consumer use (post-consumer).
1. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with
other constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further
production of the same product are not recycled materials.
2. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as
constituents in another manufacturing process are pre-consumer recycled
materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used
for Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for
the following categories of items:
1. Furniture.
2. Plumbing.
3. Mechanical.
4. Electrical.
5. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment.
6. Wood-based construction materials.
B. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date

established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be
met:
1. Credit MR 2.1: List of materials to be diverted from disposal and whether the
materials will be sorted on-site or comingled. Provide calculations by weight or
volume; calculationmethod consistent throughout project.
2. Credit MR 4.1: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost,
post-consumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each
3. Credit MR 5.1: List of proposed regionally manufactured materials.
a. Identify each regionally manufactured material, including its source and

cost.
b. Identify each regionally extracted and manufactured material, including its
source and cost.
4. Credit EQ 3.1 [and EQ3.2]: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.
C. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans
as well as reports on completed LEED online templates.
D. LEED Documentation Submittals: Submit the following and complete related LEED
online templates. Provide manufacturer’s documentation.

1. Credit MR 4.1: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by

weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having
recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having
recycled content.
2. Credit MR 5.1: Product data for regional materials indicating location and
distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or
recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each
regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.
regionally manufactured material and for each regionally extracted and
manufactured material.
a. Include statement indicating distance from manufacturer to Project for each

regionally manufactured material.
b. Include statement indicating location of and distance from Project to point
of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally
extracted and manufactured materials.
4. Credit EQ 3.1:
a. Product data for temporary filtration media.
b. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.
c. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times
during the construction period, along with a brief description of the
SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the indoor-
air-quality management measures, such as protection of ducts and on-site
stored or installed absorptive materials. Photos should show full range of
SMACNA guidelines followed throughout construction.
5. Credit EQ 3.2:
a. Report from testing and inspecting agency indicating results of indoor-air-
quality testing and documentation showing compliance with indoor-air-
quality testing procedures and requirements.
VOC content in g/L calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168.
8. Credit EQ 4.3: List of each carpet and carpet cushion installed in building
interior. Confirm product complies with CRI Green Label Plus testing program.
Product data for carpet. Indicated VOC content of each product used. Indicate
VOC content in g/L calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #116.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. Credit MR 4.1: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-
consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes
a minimum of 10 percent of cost of materials used for Project.

1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by

dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of
the item and multiplying by cost of the item.
2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing
weight of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item
and multiplying by cost of the item.
3. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and
specialty items such as elevators and equipment in the calculation.
2.2 REGIONAL MATERIALS
A. Credit MR 5.1: Provide a minimum of 10 percent of building materials (by cost) that
are regional materials.
2.3 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use
adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168:
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
19. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond
melamine covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular
weight polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any
surface): 250 g/L.
20. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
21. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
22. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
23. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
24. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.
25. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.
26. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.
27. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.

28. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.

30. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
31. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
32. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
35. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
36. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use
paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1113, Green Seal Standard GS-11 and GS-
3 and the following chemical restrictions:
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
10. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
11. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
12. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
13. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350
g/L.
19. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
20. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L.
21. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.
22. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.
23. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0
percent by weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings).
24. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein,
acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-
ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-
dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate,
ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury,
methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene,
toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride.
C. Credit EQ4.3:

1. Carpet and cushion systems shall comply with testing and product requirements
of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus Program.
2. Carpet adhesive must meet VOC limit of 50 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING-AGENT REMOVAL
A. Credit EA 4: Remove clean-agent fire-extinguishing agents that contain HCFCs or

halons and replace with agent that does not contain HCFCs or halons. See Division 13
Section "Clean-Agent Extinguishing Systems" for additional requirements.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A. Credit EQ 3.1: Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied
Buildings under Construction."
1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems
during construction period as specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities
and Controls," install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at
each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.
2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.
B. Credit EQ 3.2:
1. Air-Quality Testing:
a. Conduct baseline indoor-air-quality testing, after construction ends and

prior to occupancy, using testing protocols consistent with the EPA's
"Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor
Air," and as additionally detailed in the USGBC's "LEED-NC : Reference
Guide."
b. Demonstrate that the contaminant maximum concentrations listed below
are not exceeded:
1) Formaldehyde: 50 ppb.
2) Particulates (PM10): 50 micrograms/cu. m.
3) Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): 500 micrograms/cu. m.
4) 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 6.5 micrograms/cu. m.
5) Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor
levels.
c. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are
exceeded, conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the
specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved.
Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When retesting
noncomplying building areas, take samples from same locations as in the
first test.
d. Air-sample testing shall be conducted as follows:

1) All measurements shall be conducted prior to occupancy but during

normal occupied hours, and with building ventilation system starting
at the normal daily start time and operated at the minimum outside air
flow rate for the occupied mode throughout the duration of the air
testing.
2) Building shall have all interior finishes installed including, but not
limited to, millwork, doors, paint, carpet, and acoustic tiles. Nonfixed
furnishings such as workstations and partitions are encouraged, but
not required, to be in place for the testing.
3) Number of sampling locations will vary depending on the size of
building and number of ventilation systems. For each portion of
building served by a separate ventilation system, the number of
sampling points shall not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft. or for
each contiguous floor area, whichever is larger, and shall include
areas with the least ventilation and greatest presumed source
strength.
4) Air samples shall be collected between 3 and 6 feet from the floor to
represent the breathing zone of occupants, and over a minimum four-
hour period.

SECTION 01351
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for and reasona-
bly incidental to complete the special procedures for historic treatment work as shown
on the drawings or specified, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Storage and protection of existing historic materials.
2. Temporary protection of historic materials during construction.
3. Protection during application of chemicals.
4. Protection during use of heat-generating equipment.
5. Historic treatment procedures.

1. Section 01732 Selective Demolition
2. Section 04904 Marble Cleaning and Restoration
3. Section 04901 Clay Masonry Cleaning and Restoration
4. Section 05700 Ornamental Metal Cleaning and Restoration
5. Section 06400 Interior Woodwork Refinishing
6. Section 08210 Wood Door Refinishing
7. Section 08620 Wood Window Repair
8. Section 08700 Door Hardware Cleaning and Restoration
9. Section 08815 Glazing Repair
10. Section 09200 Ornamental Plaster Trim and Casting Replacement
11. Section 09210 Plaster Cleaning and Repair
C. Qualifications of Restorations Artisans and Craftsman Subcontractors are specified in

Section 01352.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Historic Treatment Program: Submit a written plan for each phase or process including
protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials,
methods, and equipment to be used in each phase of work.
B. If alternative methods and materials to those indicated are proposed for any phase of
work, provide a written description including evidence of successful use on other, com-
parable projects, and program of testing to demonstrate effectiveness for use on this
Project.
C. For historic treatment specialists and supervisory personnel. Include list of completed
projects with the scope of work and budget for each.
D. Using photographs, show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site im-
provements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
historic treatment operations. Submit before work begins.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES FOR HISTORIC TREATMENT 01351 - 1 of 5

E. Record Documents shall include modifications to the manufacturer’s written instructions

and procedures, as documents as the Work progresses.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: Refer to Section 01352.

B. Historic Treatment Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site
to record procedures established as a result of the review and distribute to affected
parties.
1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS:
A. Removed and Salvaged Historic Materials:

1. Transport items to Owner’s storage area designated by Owner.
3. Do not dispose of items removed from existing construction without prior written
consent of Owner.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Historic materials:

a. Clean and repair historic items to functional condition adequate for intended re-
use.
b. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
c. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
d. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for
new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellane-
ous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during historic
treatment. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable protected
storage location during historic treatment and cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations after historic treatment operations are complete.
E. When removed from their existing location, store historic materials within a weather-
tight enclosure where they are protected from wetting by rain, snow, or ground water,
and temperature variations. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
1. Identify removed items with an inconspicuous mark indicating their original loca-
tion.
1.05 PROJECT-SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Exterior Cleaning and Repairing:

1. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable.
a. Do not attempt repairs during rainy or foggy weather. Do not apply primer, paint,
putty, or epoxy when the relative humidity is above 80%. Do not remove exterior
elements of structures when rain is forecast or in progress.
b. Do not perform exterior wet work when the air temperature is below 40o F.
c. Do not begin cleaning, patching, or repairing when there is any likelihood of frost
or freezing.
d. Do not begin cleaning when either the air or the surface temperature is below
45o F unless approved means are provided for maintaining a 45p F temperature
of the air and materials during, and for 48 hours subsequent to, cleaning.
2. Perform cleaning and rinsing of the exterior only during daylight hours.

B. Properties immediately adjacent to historic treatment area may be occupied during the
Work. Conduct historic treatment so that operations will not be disrupted. Provide not
less than 72 hours’ notice to adjacent property owner of act ivies that will affect their
operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION, GENERAL:
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for precautions and effects of products
and procedures on adjacent building materials, components, and vegetation.
B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its pro-
gress.
C. Temporary Protection of Historic Materials during Construction.

1. Protect existing materials during installation of temporary protections and con-
struction. Do not deface or remove existing materials.
2. Attachment of temporary protection to existing construction shall be approved by
the Architect prior to installation.
D. Prior to the start of work or any cleaning operations, test existing drains and other wa-
ter removal systems to ensure that drains and systems are functioning properly. Notify
Architect immediately of drains or systems that are stopped or blocked. Do not begin
Work of this Section until the drains are in working order.
1. Provide a method to prevent solids including stone or mortar residue from enter-
ing the drains or drain lines. Cleanout drains and drain lines that become
blocked or filled by sand or any other solids because of work performed under
this Contract.
2. Protect storm drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing
only clean water to pass.
3.02 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS – GENERAL:
A. Refer to Sections 04904, 05700, and 06400 for additional information.
B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, build-
ing site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from appli-
cations of chemical cleaners and paint removers.
C. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners se-
lected fro Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces.
Use covering materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply
masking agents to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not apply liquid
masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly re-
move masking to prevent adhesive staining.

D. Do not clean surfaces during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to
E. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and dispose of off Owner’s property.
F. Dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that pre-
vents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping,
and water penetration into building interiors.
3.03 PROTECTION DURING USE OF HEAT-GENEATING EQUIPMENT:
A. Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating
equipment, including welding, cutting, soldering, brazing, paint removal with heat, and
other operations where open flames or implements utilizing heat are used:
1. Obtain Owner’s approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding equipment.
(a) Notification shall be given for each occurrence and location of work with heat-
generating equipment.
2. As far as practical, use heat-generating equipment in shop areas or outside the

building
3. Before work with heat-generating equipment commences, furnish personnel to

serve as a fire watch (or watches) for location (s) where work is to be performed.
4. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas

where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present to thought to be pre-
sent. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.
5. Remove and keep the area free of combustibles, including, rubbish, paper,
waste, etc., within area of operations.
(a) If combustible materials cannot be removed, provide fireproof blankets to

cover such materials.
6. Where possible, furnish and use baffles of metal or gypsum board to prevent the
spraying of sparks or hot slag into surrounding combustible material.
7. Prevent the extension of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows,
doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings roofs, and other openings.
8. Inspect each location of the day’s work not sooner than 30 minutes after comple-
tion of operations to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper
housekeeping is maintained.
3.04 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES:
A. The principal aim of preservation work is to halt the process of deterioration and stabi-
lize the item’s condition, unless otherwise indicated. Repair is required where specifi-
cally indicated. The following procedures shall be followed:

1. Retain as much existing material as possible; repair and consolidate rather

than replace.
2. Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and sup-
port existing materials or structure.
3. Use reversible processes wherever possible.
4. Use traditional replacement materials and techniques. New work shall be dis-
tinguishable to the trained eye, on closed inspection, from old work.
5. Record the work before the procedure with pre-construction photos and during
the work with periodic construction photos.
B. Prohibit smoking by personnel performing work on or near historic structures.
C. Obtain Architect’s review and written approval in the form of a Constructive Change Di-
rective or Supplemental Instruction before making changes or additions to construction
or removing historic materials.
D. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether

due to environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or
thawing; or due to structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.
E. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.
F. Where missing features are indicated to be repaired or replaced, provide features

whose designs are based on accurate duplications rather than on conjectural designs,
subject to the approval of Architect and Preservation Specialist.
G. Where Work requires existing features to be removed, cleaned, and reused, perform
these operations without damage to the materials itself, to adjacent materials, or to the
substrate.
H. Identify new or replacement materials and features with inconspicuous, permanent

marks to distinguish them from original materials. Record the legend of identification
marks and the locations of these marks on Record Drawings.
I. When cleaning, match samples of existing materials that have been cleaned and iden-
tified for acceptable cleaning levels. Avoid over-cleaning to prevent damage to exist-
ing materials during cleaning.

SECTION 01350 – QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS AND CRAFTSMEN

SUBCONTRACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED:
A. The Georgetown Neighborhood Library is a contributing building to the Georgetown

Historic District. The interior and exterior features and materials are significant charac-
ter defining elements and are to be protected in place during construction and not dis-
turbed until restored by qualified restoration artists and craftsmen. The destruction or
removal of said material by any tradesman or subcontractor, whether intended or inad-
vertent, could jeopardize approvals and certifications required of State and Federal
preservation review agencies. It shall be the sole responsibility of the General Contrac-
tor to protect the historic building at all times.
B. The subcontractors who will be responsible for the execution of the restoration of the
historic materials and surfaces on the interior and exterior of the Georgetown
Neighborhood Library, including but not limited to the following, shall meet the levels of
experience and abilities noted herein:
1. Historic Decorative Plaster
2. Historic Stone
3. Historic Marble
4. Historic Glass
5. Historic Wood
6. Historic Metal
7. Historic Clay Masonry
C. In order to successfully propose the scope of work for the historic materials on the pro-
ject, subcontracting companies must demonstrate a proven capability to execute work
that qualifies under the Secretary of the Interior’s Guideline for the Rehabilitation of
Historic Structures.
D. Acceptable evidence of such qualifications will include, at a minimum, all of the follow-
ing:
1. A proven understanding of the Secretary’s Guidelines with a minimum of ten
years experience with projects of similar size and scope as that of the Takoma
Park Library, provide in writing.
2. Presentation of three (3) similar projects that have been certified by the National
Park Service as having met the Standards, provide in writing.
3. Names and resumes of the project foreman and crewmembers to be assigned to
the project listing projects successfully completed and contact names and phone
numbers for the Owners of the projects. The foreman and crewmembers pro-
posed for the project shall not be changed without written acceptance and agree-
ment of the Owner to the change.
4. Upon direction of the Architect and prior to the approval of the proposed subcon-
tractor, the proposed subcontractor will execute a mockup of finished work with
his proposed crew for Architect’s approval.
5. With each bid the subcontractor shall provide a written description of his onsite
procedures and methods demonstration an understanding of both the require-
ments of the Project Specifications and the sensitivities involved in working
around and with delicate historic material to be conserved and restored.
QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS
AND CRAFTSMEN SUBCONTRACTORS 01350 - 1 of 2
E. List of Pre-approved Subcontractors:

1. The attached list of subcontractors has demonstrated the required skills and lev-
els of experience for a project such as the Georgetown Neighborhood Library
and may be considered to be pre-qualified for the project.
C.A. Lindman Hayles & Howe

10401 Guilford Road 3500 Parkdale Ave.
Jessup, MD 20794 Building One West, Ground Floor
p. 301.470.4700 Baltimore, MD 21211
f. 301.470.4708 p. 410.462.0986, f. 410.462.0989
Worcester Eisenbrandt Atlantic Refinishing & Restoration, Inc.

2100 Gable Avenue 2320 Old Washington Road
Baltimore, MD 21230 Waldorf, MD 20601
p. 410.644.6580 p. 301.843.8331
f. 410.644.5895 f. 301.870.8156
Crenshaw Lighting
2430 Floyd Hwy North
Floyd, VA
p. 540.745.3900
f. 540.745.3911
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
QUALIFICATIONS OF RESTORATION ARTISANS

AND CRAFTSMEN SUBCONTRACTORS 01350 - 2 of 2
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
other submittals.
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting

schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Division 1 Section “LEED Requirements” for submitting LEED plans, online
templates and other LEED items.
3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,
record Specifications, and record Product Data.
4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation
and maintenance manuals.
5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings
of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that
do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals
may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order

by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional
time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the
Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing
submittals required by those corrections.
1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract
Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1/9

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance

of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the
Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect and Construction Manager reserve the right to withhold action on

a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related
submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on [Architect's] [Construction Manager's]
receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of
failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,
including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. [Architect]
[Construction Manager] will advise Contractor when a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper
copy submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by
Architect and Construction Manager.
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f. Name of subcontractor.
g. Name of supplier.
h. Name of manufacturer.
i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by

a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal
point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m. Other necessary identification.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.
F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in
the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified

number of copies to Architect and Construction Manager.
H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect and Construction
Manager will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use [AIA Document G810] [CSI Form 12.1A] [facsimile of
sample form included in Project Manual].
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record
relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by
Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial

submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent
of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from
Architect'sand Construction Manager's action stamp.
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,

suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary
for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation
from Architect'sand Construction Manager's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Action Submittals: Submit six paper copies of each submittal, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies.
2. Informational Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal, unless
otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies.
3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and
certifications where indicated.
5. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard

published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product
Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on
accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. Six paper copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, through Construction Manager, will return Three copies.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do

not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard
printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include

the following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42
inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. Six opaque copies of each submittal. Architect and Construction Manager
will retain three copies; remainder will be returned.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories

together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for

quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction
associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition
at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of

units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit six full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will
return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,

prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in
manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and

Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be
returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project record
sample.
1) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent

in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three
sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written

summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Submit product schedule in the following format:

a. Six paper copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three copies.
F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
G. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed

for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment
fabricated to a special design.
1. Submit subcontract list in the following format:

a. Number of Copies: Six paper copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return three
copies.
H. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "LEED

Requirements."
1. Submit LEED submittals in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.

b. Three paper copies of LEED submittals, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Project Management and Coordination."
J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and

experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names

and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and

personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of
Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American
Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where
required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead

certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in
effect for Project.
S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
Contract Documents.
U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data."
X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not
limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and
calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and
a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of
software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications

by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract
Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and
design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,

submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,

and other required submittals, submit six paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed
by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically
assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria
in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect and Construction Manager.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in

Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include
Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number,
name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal
has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract
Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION
A. General: Architect and Construction Manager will not review submittals that do not
bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal,
make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it.
Architect and Construction Manager will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:
1. “NO EXCEPTION TAKEN”: Proceed with fabrication, purchase, or both of items

include in submittal.
2. “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”: Proceed with fabrication, purchase, or both of
items include in submittal subject to revisions included in Architect’s review
comments.
3. “REVISE & RESUBMIT”: A portion of the submittal is unacceptable. Correct and
resubmit the part of submittal in question. Do NOT proceed until submittal is
approved.
4. “REJECTED”: Do NOT order materials and Do NOT use in construction.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each

submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements.
Architect and Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will
be returned without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.

SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic

documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.
A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points
marked for location and direction of each [photograph] [video recording]. Indicate
elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding
photographic documentation.
B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within [three] <Insert number> days of taking
photographs.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of [8] megapixels.

2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in
file metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
c. Date photograph was taken.
d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
C. Construction Photographs: Submit [two] <Insert number> prints of each photographic

view within [seven] <Insert number> days of taking photographs.
1. Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-

grade photographic paper, [mounted on linen or card stock to allow a 1-inch-
wide margin and] [enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are]
punched for standard three-ring binder.
2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped
impression with the following information:
a. Name of Project.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1/4

b. Name and contact information for photographer.

c. Name of Architect[ and Construction Manager].
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.
f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a

professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services

requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including
temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs.
1.5 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of [8] <Insert
sensor size> megapixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in
focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not
be accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital
camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing
software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same
manner as those submitted to Architect[ and Construction Manager].
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before [commencement of excavation]

[commencement of demolition] [starting construction], take photographs of Project
site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction,
from different vantage points, as directed by [Architect] [Construction Manager].
1. Flag [excavation areas] [construction limits] before taking construction

photographs.
2. Take [20] <Insert number> photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to
property before starting the Work.
3. Take [20] <Insert number> photographs of existing buildings either on or
adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of
construction.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take [20] <Insert number> photographs

[monthly, coinciding] [weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide]
<Insert time interval> with the cutoff date associated with each Application for
Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last
photographs were taken.
F. Indoor Air Quality Management Photographs: Take a set of eight photos minimum at
three different times during construction that document the Indoor Air Quality
Management goals and Materials & Resource and Indoor Environmental Quality
Credits.
G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take [20] <Insert number> color

photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record
Documents. [Architect] [Construction Manager] will inform photographer of desired
vantage points.
H. Additional Photographs: Architect[ or Construction Manager] may request

photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will
be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum[ or in the
allowance for construction photographs].
1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not
a. Special events planned at Project site.

b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or
losses.

c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site.

These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.
d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.

SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the

progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Daily construction reports.
3. Field condition reports.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for preparing a combined

Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a
construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a

construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships.
Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path
of the Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the
network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains
no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time [belongs to Owner] [is not for the exclusive use or benefit of
either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project
resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones
and Contract completion date].
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1/8

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. [Six] <Insert number> paper copies.
B. Start-up Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire
construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire

schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and

labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule
(initial or updated) and date on label.
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports.
Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description,
original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,
late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start
date, or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted
in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start
date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from
[commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] until most recent
Application for Payment.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at [weekly] [monthly] intervals.
F. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
G. LEED Construction Progress Reports: Summary of progress in achieving Waste

Management goals, Materials & Resource credits, Indoor Environmental Quality credits
and other LEED submittals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values,[list of

subcontracts,] submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other
required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from
entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and
schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for [commencement of the Work]
[the Notice of Award] [the Notice to Proceed] to date of [Substantial Completion] [final
completion].
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that

shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each
principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than [20] <Insert

number> days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following
long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as
separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not
limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. <Insert list of major items or pieces of equipment>.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in

Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal
review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than [15] <Insert number> days for
startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's[ and Construction
Manager's] administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial
Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than [30] <Insert number>
days for punch list and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract

Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is
affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each
contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work
performed by Owner.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of
the Work.
6. Other Constraints: <Insert additional constraints not indicated elsewhere>.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,

including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final
completion[.][, and the following interim milestones:]
1. <Insert additional milestones not indicated elsewhere>.
E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to

occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the
following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered RFIs.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] <Insert
number> or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a
separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain
compliance with the schedule.
G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program

that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
1. Utilize [Microsoft Project] [Primavera] [Prolog] [scheduling component of

project Web site software specified in Division 1 Section " Project
Management and Coordination"] <Insert name of specific software>, for
[Windows XP] [Windows Vista] [Macintosh OS X] operating system.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-

chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within [30] <Insert number> days of
date established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the
Notice of Award].
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first

workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete,

indicate an estimated completion percentage in [10] <Insert number> percent
increments within time bar.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B. Start-up Network Diagram: Submit diagram within [14] <Insert number> days of date
established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of
Award]. Outline significant construction activities for the first [90] <Insert number>
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a
cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a[ cost- and

resource-loaded,] time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be

accepted for use no later than [60] <Insert number> days after date established
for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of
Award].
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract
shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable
completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for
reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment
request dates.
3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate
nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to
correlate with Contract Time.
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the
Work. Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify
probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and

relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time
frames for the following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.
c. Purchase of materials.
d. Delivery.
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i. Testing and commissioning.

j. Punch list and final completion.

k. Activities occurring following final completion.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-
scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as
often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the
Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network;
locate paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off

the critical path.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with
its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to
demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list
indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated
reports showing the following:
1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.

2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated

reports showing the following:
1. Identification of activities that have changed.

2. Changes in early and late start dates.
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence
of rain or snow.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field

conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit
with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing
conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At [monthly] <Insert time> intervals,

update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule
[one week] <Insert time> before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the
report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,
but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and
activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction

Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other
parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and
post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have

completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
performance of construction activities.

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination drawings.
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).
3. Project meetings.
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the

division of work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination
activities not in this Section.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating
general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of
benchmarks and control points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking

information from each other during construction.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each
other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results

where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance
and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports,
and list of attendees at meetings.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1/7

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of

their Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required

administrative procedures with other construction activitiesand activities of other
contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
1.4 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI
in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated
above, acceptable to Architect.
D. Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager

will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working
days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Construction
Manager after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal
according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in
writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and
immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and
notify Architect and Construction Manager within seven days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log monthly. Software log with not less than the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's and Construction Manager's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences
at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and
Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited
attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant
discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to
everyone concerned, including Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect,
within five days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a

preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner
and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning

Authority, Construction Manager, and Architect, Contractor and its
superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties
shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for RFIs.
f. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Sustainable design requirements.
k. Preparation of record documents.
l. Use of the premises and existing building.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Working hours.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
p. Procedures Indoor Air Quality Management Procedures including moisture
and mold control.
q. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
r. Construction waste management and recycling.
s. Parking availability.
t. Office, work, and storage areas.
u. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
v. First aid.
w. Security.

x. Progress cleaning.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute
meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site

before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with
other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the
meeting. Advise Architect, Construction Manager , and Owner's Commissioning
Authority, of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for
the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the
following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan and other required LEED plans.
c. LEED requirements.
d. Options.
e. Related RFIs.
f. Related Change Orders.
g. Purchases, including LEED-compliant materials.
h. Deliveries.
i. Submittals.
j. Review of mockups.
k. Possible conflicts.
l. Compatibility problems.
m. Time schedules.
n. Weather limitations.
o. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
p. Warranty requirements.
q. Compatibility of materials.
r. Acceptability of substrates.
s. Temporary facilities and controls.
t. Space and access limitations.
u. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
v. Testing and inspecting requirements.
w. Installation procedures.
x. Coordination with other work.
y. Required performance results.
z. Protection of adjacent work.
aa. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,

including required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other
parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully

concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Construction Manager will conduct progress meetings at weekly

intervals.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning

Authority , Construction Manager, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at
these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or
behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will
be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Progress cleaning.
10) Quality and work standards.
11) Status of correction of deficient items.
12) Field observations.
13) Status of RFIs.
14) Status of proposal requests.
15) Pending changes.
16) Status of Change Orders.
17) Pending claims and disputes.
18) Documentation of information for payment requests, including LEED
documentation progress.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each
meeting.

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to

prepare and process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of

Contractor's construction schedule.[ Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule
may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values.]
1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative
forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's
construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect[ through Construction Manager] at
earliest possible date but no later than [seven] <Insert number> days before the
date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases
requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values
correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish
line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each
Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of
values:
a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703 .
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the
Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal
subcontract amounts in excess of [five] <Insert percentage> percent of Contract
Sum.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1/4

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for
LEED documentation and other project closeout requirements in an
amount totaling [five] <Insert percentage> percent of the Contract Sum
and subcontract amount.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials,
for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part
of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each
allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit
cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract
Documents to determine quantities.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the
schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change
Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
10. LEED submittals: Update progress on LEED submittals including LEED plans
and online templates.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and
payments as certified by Architect[ and Construction Manager] and paid for by
Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered
by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the

<Insert day> of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is
one month, ending on the [last day of the month] <Insert specific day of the
month>.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use [AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703]
[AIA Document G702/CMa and AIA Document G703] [EJCDC Document C-620]
<Insert name and designation of other standard form> as form for Applications for
Payment.

E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for
Payment. Sample copies are included in the Project Manual.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a

person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. [Architect]
[Construction Manager] will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
before last day of construction period covered by application.
G. Transmittal: Submit [three] <Insert number> signed and notarized original copies of
each Application for Payment to [Architect] [Construction Manager] by a method
ensuring receipt[ within 24 hours]. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information about application.
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous
application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner
acceptable to Owner.
I. LEED Submittals: With each Application for Payment, provide LEED submittals
progress update.
J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent
completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete
and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and
supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not
limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Evidence of completion of LEED submittals including online templates.
3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
5. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and
Claims."
6. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
7. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
8. Evidence that claims have been settled.
9. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar
data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
10. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for

submitting and handling Change Orders.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is[ an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the
duration of the Work as] a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or
services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by
appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required
by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
[applicable taxes, ]overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that
requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit
prices are specified in those Sections.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that

involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's
expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification

Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described
under each unit price.
UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1/2

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. <Insert unit-price number> - <Insert unit-price item>:
1. Description: <Insert unit-price item description> according to Division <Insert

Division number> Section "<Insert Section title>."
2. Unit of Measurement: <Insert unit of measurement>.
3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment
requirements of Division 1 Section " Allowances."
UNIT PRICES 01270 - 2/2

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and

processing Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue[ through Construction Manager] supplemental instructions

authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time, on [AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental
Instructions."] [form included in the Project Manual.]
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: [Architect] [Construction Manager] will issue a

detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to
the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include
supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by [Architect] [Construction Manager] are not

instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within [time specified in Proposal Request] [or] [20 days, when not
otherwise specified,] <Insert number of days> after receipt of Proposal
Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,

with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,
furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts
of trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total
float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Indicate LEED credits that may be affected by the change.
f. Quotation Form: Use [CSI Form 13.6B "Proposal Worksheet Summary"
and 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail"] [forms provided by Owner.
Sample copies are included in the Project Manual] [forms acceptable
to Architect].
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1/3

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to

the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to
[Architect] [Construction Manager].
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate
the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.Indicate LEED credits that may be affected by
the change.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
7. Proposal Request Form: Use [CSI Form 13.6A "Change Order Request
(Proposal)" with attachments CSI Form 13.6B "Proposal Worksheet
Summary" and 13.6C "Proposal Worksheet Detail"] [form provided by
Owner. Sample copy is included in Project Manual] [form acceptable to
Architect].
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Allowances" for administrative

procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum
to reflect actual costs of allowances.
B. Unit Price Adjustment: Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative
procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum
to reflect measured scope of unit price work.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, [Architect] [Construction Manager] will

issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on
[AIA Document G701] [form included in Project Manual].
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. [Construction] [Work] Change Directive: [Architect] [Construction Manager] may issue

a [Construction] [Work] Change Directive on [AIA Document G714]
[EJCDC Document C-940] [form included in Project Manual]. [Construction] [Work]

Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for
subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. [Construction] [Work] Change Directive contains a complete description of

change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine
change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work

required by the [Construction] [Work] Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
B. Types of allowances include the following:
1. Lump-sum allowances.
2. Unit-cost allowances.
3. Quantity allowances.
4. Contingency allowances.
5. Testing and inspecting allowances.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.
2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of
allowances for testing and inspecting.
1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date
when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an
allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final
selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the

form specified for Change Orders.
B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the
site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for
installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
D. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other
portions of the Work.
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1/4

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as
required to coordinate installation.
1.5 [LUMP-SUM] [UNIT-COST] [AND] [QUANTITY] ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered
by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include [taxes,]freight,
and delivery to Project site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project
site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and
materials [ordered by Owner] [selected by Architect] under allowance shall be
included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.
C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to

manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and
accepted.
1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by

Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.
1.6 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and
only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B. Contractor's[ overhead, profit, and] related costs for products and equipment ordered
by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not
part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation[, taxes], insurance,
equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to

Owner by Change Order.
1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES
A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies,
actual tests and inspections, and reporting results.
B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or
costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for
incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum.

C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the
allowance.
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting
allowance to Owner by Change Order.
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order

proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,
multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable,
include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal
product imperfections, and similar margins.
1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution
of overhead costs and other margins claimed.
3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change
Orders related to unit-cost allowances.
4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by
independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the
allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order
amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change

Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has
changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract
Documents.
2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or
lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or

defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials
and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and
interfaced with related work.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance No. <Insert number>: [Lump-Sum] [Unit-Cost] [Quantity] [Contingency]

[Testing and Inspecting] Allowance: Include the sum of <Insert dollar or quantity
amount of allowance>: Include <Insert allowance description> as specified in
Division <Insert Division number> Section "<Insert Section title>"[ and as shown on
Drawings].
1. This allowance includes [material cost] [receiving, handling, and installation]

[and] [Contractor overhead and profit].
2. Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with corresponding unit price
requirements of Division 1 Section "Unit Prices."

SECTION 01125 - SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a summary of each contract, including responsibilities for coordination

and temporary facilities and controls.
B. Specific requirements for work of each contract are also indicated in individual
Specification Sections and on Drawings.
C. Related Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents,
restrictions on use of the project site and work restrictions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, the condition at which roofing is

insulated and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures
equivalent in weather protection to permanent construction.
1.3 PROJECT COORDINATOR
A. Project Manager shall be responsible for coordination between the General

Construction Contract and <Insert name of other contract>.
B. [Mechanical/electrical] <Insert name> coordinator, who shall be under the direction

of the Project coordinator, shall be responsible for coordination between the [Plumbing
Contract] [HVAC Contract] [Electrical Contract] [and] <Insert name of other
contract>.
1. [HVAC Contractor] [Electrical Contractor] [Plumbing Contractor] <Insert

other entity> shall act as mechanical/electrical coordinator.
[Mechanical/electrical coordinator shall be licensed to practice as a
professional engineer in location of Project.]
1.4 COORDINATION ACTIVITIES
A. Coordination activities of Project Manager include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Provide overall coordination of the Work.

2. Coordinate shared access to workspaces.
SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 1/5

3. Coordinate product selections for compatibility.

4. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls.
5. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary
utilities, including those necessary to make connections for temporary services.
6. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each
Contract and separate contracts.
7. Prepare coordination drawings in collaboration with each contractor to coordinate
work by more than one contract.
8. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work including a combined
Contractors' construction schedule for entire Project.
9. Provide quality-assurance and quality-control services specified in Division 1
10. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and
coordinate schedule of tests and inspections.
11. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility
structures affected by construction.
12. Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points, and establish permanent benchmarks on Project site.
13. Provide field surveys of in-progress construction and site work[ and final
property survey].
14. Coordinate cutting and patching.
15. Coordinate protection of the Work.
16. Coordinate firestopping.
17. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items.
18. Coordinate preparation of Project record documents if information from more
than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to
form one combined record.
19. Print and submit record documents if installations by more than one contractor
are indicated on the same contract drawing or shop drawing.
20. Collect record Specification Sections from contractors, collate Sections into
numeric order, and submit complete set.
21. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information
from more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other
contractors to form one combined record.
B. Responsibilities of Project Manager for temporary facilities and controls include, but are
1. Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction
activities.
2. Provide telephone service for common-use facilities.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTS
A. Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the
work, requirements indicated on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine
which contract includes a specific element of Project.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, the work described in this Section for each contract
shall be complete systems and assemblies, including products, components,
accessories, and installation required by the Contract Documents.
2. Trenches and other excavation for the work of each contract shall be the work of
[the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
3. Blocking, backing panels, sleeves, and metal fabrication supports for the work of
each contract shall be the work of [the General Construction Contract] [each
contract for its own work].
4. Furnishing of access panels for the work of each contract shall be the work of
each contract for its own work. Installation of access panels shall be the work of
[the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
5. Equipment pads for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General
Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
6. Painting for the work of each contract shall be the work of [the General
Construction Contract].
7. Cutting and Patching: [Each contract shall perform its own cutting; patching
shall be under the General Construction Contract].
8. Through-penetration firestopping for the work of each contract shall be provided
by [the General Construction Contract] [each contract for its own work].
9. Contractors' Preliminary Construction Schedule: Within [ten] 10 working days
after preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule submittal has
been received from Project Manager, submit a matching preliminary horizontal
bar-chart schedule showing construction operations sequenced and coordinated
with overall construction.
B. Substitutions: Each contractor shall cooperate with other contractors involved to

coordinate approved substitutions with remainder of the work.
1. Project Manager shall coordinate substitutions.
C. Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary

facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Division 1 Section "Temporary
Facilities and Controls," each contractor is responsible for the following:
1. Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility

necessary for its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges
associated with each facility, except as otherwise provided for in this Section.
2. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task
lighting, and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities.
3. Its own field office, complete with necessary furniture, utilities, and telephone
service.
4. Its own storage and fabrication sheds.
5. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities.
6. Staging and scaffolding for its own construction activities.
7. General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities, up to 2 tons.
8. Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own
hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials.
9. Progress cleaning of work areas affected by its operations on a daily basis.
10. Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment.
11. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively
for its own construction activities.

D. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is

responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation, including utility-use
charges, temporary meters, and temporary connections.
E. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is

responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation after permanent enclosure
of building is complete and Owner will pay utility-use charges.
F. Use Charges: Comply with the following:
1. Sewer Service: Include the cost for sewer service use by all parties engaged in
construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract.
2. Water Service: Include the cost for water service, whether metered or otherwise,
for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in
the General Construction Contract.
3. Electric Power Service: Include the cost for electric power service, whether
metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction
activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract.
1.6 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A. Work in the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Remaining work not identified as work under other contracts.

2. <Insert descriptions of the Work>.
B. Temporary facilities and controls in the General Construction Contract include, but are
1. Temporary facilities and controls that are not otherwise specifically assigned to
the <Insert name of other contracts>.
2. <Insert temporary facilities and controls>.
1.7 <INSERT NAME OF CONTRACT>
A. Work in the <Insert name> Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. <Insert descriptions of the Work>.
B. Temporary facilities and controls in the <Insert name> Contract include, but are not
1. <Insert requirements for temporary facilities and controls>.


SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Work phases.
3. Work under other contracts.
4. Use of premises.
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Specification formats and conventions.
B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities

for the Work.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: <Insert Project identifier such as Project name and

number.>
1. Project Location: <Insert Project location (street address, city, and state).>
B. Owner: <Insert name and address of Owner.>
1. Owner's Representative: <Insert name and address of Owner's

representative.>
C. Architect: <Insert name and address of Architect.>
D. The Work consists of the following:
1. The Work includes <Insert a brief listing of major products and systems
included in Project>.
2. Project is designed to comply with a Certification Level according to the U.S.
Green Building Council's Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED)
Rating System, as specified in Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements."
E. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.3 WORK PHASES
A. The Work shall be conducted in <Insert number> phases in the following order, with
each phase substantially complete before beginning the next phase:
SUMMARY 01100 - 1/5

1. Phase <Insert designation>: <Briefly describe work of this phase> Work of

this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within
<Insert number of days> after [the Notice to Proceed] [commencement of
construction of this phase].
2. Phase <Insert designation>: The remaining Work shall be substantially
complete and ready for occupancy at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence,
commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's
personnel for all phases of the Work.
1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be
carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
B. Preceding Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the
following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be
substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.
1. <Insert name of the Contract>: A separate contract [has been] [will be]
awarded to <Insert name of separate Contractor> [to] [for] <Insert a brief
description of work performed under separate contract>.
C. Concurrent Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the
following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted
simultaneously with work under this Contract.
D. Future Work: Owner [has awarded] [will award] separate contract(s) for the following
additional work to be performed at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of
that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this
Contract.
1.5 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations,
including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises
is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on
portions of Project.
SUMMARY 01100 - 2/5

B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.
C. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to [work in areas] [areas within the Contract
limits] indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the
Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to <Insert description of areas where

work is permitted>.
a. Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40

feet beyond building perimeter; 10 feet beyond surface walkways, patios,
surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches in diameter; 15 feet
beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25
feet beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious
paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that
require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the
constructed area.
2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site[ and use by the
public].
3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways[ parking garage,] [ loading areas,]
and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's
employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
D. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition

throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
Protect building and its occupants during construction period.
1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and [existing] [adjacent] building
during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction
operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as
not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or

used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or
used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction
period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during
construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the
SUMMARY 01100 - 3/5

Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or

used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or
used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before
Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of
the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute
acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific

portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before
Owner occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed.
On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical
systems serving occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial
service for occupied portions of building.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections
using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all

Sections in the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as
appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense
requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be
interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
SUMMARY 01100 - 4/5

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be
performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may
be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be
fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the
context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
END OF SECTION 01100END OF SECTION 01100
SUMMARY 01100 - 5/5

WASHINGTON, DC
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
(228)
SHT. # SHEET NAME:
COVER SHEET
A-0.00 ABBREVIATIONS, LEGENDS, SPOT ELEVATIONS
A-0.01 DRAWING LIST
A-0.02 DEMOLITION AND PRESERVATION NOTES
A-0.03 HISTORIC PRESERVATION NOTES AND GLOSSARY
A-0.04 HISTORIC PRESERVATION NOTES
CIVIL DRAWINGS (16)

C1.00 EXISTING CONDITIONS
C1.10 DEMOLITION PLAN
C2.00 SITE IMPROVEMENTS PLAN
C3.00 UTILITY PLAN

C3.10 UTILITY PROFILES
C3.20 UTILITY DETAILS 1
C4.00 GRADING AND STORMWATER PLAN

C4.10 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT DETAILS 1
C4.20 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT DETAILS 2
C5.00 ESC PLAN PHASE 1

C5.10 ESC PLAN PHASE 2
C5.20 ESC DETAILS
C5.30 ESC NOTES
LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS (14)

L1.01 SITE REFERENCE PLAN
L1.02 SITE PLAN
L1.03 SITE PLAN
L1.04 LAYOUT PLAN
L1.05 LAYOUT PLAN
L2.01 PLANTING PLAN

L2.02 PLANTING PLAN
L3.01 HARDSCAPE DETAILS

L3.02 HARDSCAPE DETAILS - LOWER TERRACE
L3.06 SITE FURNISHING DETAILS
L3.07 PLANTING DETAILS
1 7/10/2009
EGRESS DRAWINGS (2)
AE-0.00 CODE ANALYSIS, EGRESS CALCULATIONS AND TABLES
AE-1.00 EGRESS PLANS
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS (112)

AS-0.00 SITE VICINITY PLAN
AS-0.01 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN
AS-0.02 SITE DETAILS
AS-0.03 SITE DETAILS
AD-1.00 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

AD-1.01 FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
AD-1.02 MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
AD-1.03 SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
AD-1.04 ROOF LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
AD-2.00 DEMOLITION NORTH AND SOUTH ELEVATIONS

AD-2.01 DEMOLITION EAST AND WEST ELEVATIONS
A-1.00 LOWER LEVEL PLAN

A-1.01 FIRST LEVEL PLAN
A-1.02 SECOND LEVEL PLAN
A-1.03 THIRD LEVEL PLAN
A-1.04 ROOF PLAN
A-1.09 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A-1.10 LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-1.11 FIRST LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-1.12 SECOND LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-1.13 THIRD LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN
A-1.20 ENLARGED PLAN LOWER LEVEL

A-1.21 ENLARGED PLAN LOWER LEVEL
A-1.22 ENLARGED PLAN FIRST LEVEL
A-1.23 ENLARGED PLAN SECOND LEVEL
A-1.24 ENLARGED THIRD LEVEL PLAN
A-1.40 PLAN DETAILS

A-1.41 PLAN DETAILS
A-142 PLAN DETAILS
A-2.00 NORTH ELEVATION

A-2.01 SOUTH ELEVATION
A-2.02 EAST ELEVATION
A-2.03 WEST ELEVATION
A-3.00 BUILDING SECTION LONGITUDINAL LOOKING NORTH

A-3.01 BUILDING SECTION TRANSVERSE LOOKING WEST
A-3.02 BUILDING SECTION TRANSVERSE LOOKING WEST
A-3.03 BUILDING SECTION LONGITUDINAL LOOKING SOUTH
A-3.10 WALL SECTIONS

2 7/10/2009
A-3.20 WALL SECTION DETAILS

A-4.00 ROOF DETAILS

A-4.01 ROOF DETAILS
A-4.03 CUPOLA DETAILS
A-4.04 DORMER ELEVATION & MOULDING DETAILS
A-5.00 PARTITION SCHEDULE
A-5.10 DOOR SCHEDULE, DOOR FRAMES AND TYPES

A-5.11 DOOR HEAD, JAMB, AND SILL DETAILS
A-5.12 DOOR HEAD, JAMB, AND SILL DETAILS
A-5.20 WINDOW SCHEDULE AND DETAILS

A-5.21 WINDOW DETAILS
A-5.30 CASEWORK PLAN LOWER LEVEL

A-5.31 CASEWORK FIRST FLOOR PLAN
A-5.32 CASEWORK SECOND FLOOR PLAN
A-5.33 CASEWORK THIRD FLOOR PLAN
A-5.34 CASEWORK ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATIONS
A-5.45 CASEWORK AND SHELVING SCHEDULE
A-5.46 METAL SHELVING ELEVATIONS
A-5.47 METAL SHELVING ELEVATIONS
A-5.50 MATERIAL SCHEDULE

A-5.51 FINISH AND PAINT SCHEDULES
A-5.52 FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES
A-5.60 FINISH FLOOR PLAN - LOWER LEVEL

A-5.61 FINISH FLOOR PLAN - FIRST LEVEL
A-5.62 FINISH FLOOR PLAN - SECOND LEVEL
A-5.63 FINISH FLOOR PLAN - THIRD LEVEL
A-5.70 LOWER LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN

A-5.71 FIRST LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN
A-5.72 SECOND LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN
A-5.73 THIRD LEVEL FURNITURE PLAN
A-5.74 FURNITURE
3 7/10/2009
A-5.75 FURNITURE
A-6.00 LOWER LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

A-6.03 FIRST LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-6.06 SECOND LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-6.07 SECOND LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-6.08 THIRD LEVEL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-6.10 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORY SCHEDULE AND TYPICAL DETAILS

A-6.11 TOILET ROOMS, ENLARGED PLANS, AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-6.12 TILE DETAILS
A-7.00 ARCH ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS

A-7.01 COLUMN DETAILS
A-7.02 WAINSCOT AND PANELING ELEVATIONS AND PROFILES
A-7.03 CABINET DETAILS
A-7.04 MOULDINGS
A-7.05 CORNICE DETAILS
A-8.00 STAIR S1 SECTION AND PLANS

A-8.01 STAIR S2 SECTION AND PLANS
A-8.02 STAIR S3 SECTION AND PLANS, STAIR DETAILS
A-8.03 STAIR DETAILS
A-8.04 RAMP DETAIL
A-9.00 ELEVATOR SECTION AND PLANS

A-9.01 ELEVATOR INTERIOR ELEVATION AND DETAILS
STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS (21)

S1.0 GENERAL NOTES
S2.0D LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

S2.1D FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
S2.1MD MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
S2.2D SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
S2.0 LOWER LEVEL FRAMING PLAN

S2.1 FIRST LEVEL FRAMING PLAN
S2.2 SECOND LEVEL FRAMING PLAN
S2.3 THIRD LEVEL FRAMING PLAN
S2.4 ROOF FRAMING PLAN
S3.1 TYPICAL DETAILS

S4.1 SECTIONS AND DETAILS

4 7/10/2009
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS (23)
M-0.01 SYMBOL LIST AND ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL NOTES
DM-1.01 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

DM-1.02 FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
DM-1.03 MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
DM-1.04 SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
M-1.01 LOWER LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN

M-1.02 FIRST LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN
M-1.03 SECOND LEVEL MECHANICAL PLAN
M-1.04 THIRD LEVEL AND ATTIC MECHANICAL PLAN
M-1.05 ROOF MECHANICAL PLAN
M-2.01 SCHEDULES MECHANICAL

M-2.04 CONTORL DIAGRAM MECHANICAL
M-2.05 CONTORL DIAGRAM MECHANICAL
M-3.01 DETAILS MECHANICAL

M-3.02 DETAILS MECHANICAL
M-4.01 PLAN AND SECTION MECHANICAL
MP-1.01 LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL

MP-1.02 FIRST LEVEL PLAN MECHANICAL
MP-1.03 SECOND LEVEL PLAN MECHANICAL
MP-1.04 THIRD LEVEL & ATTIC PLAN MECHANICAL
MP-1.05 RISER DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS (17)

E00 GENERAL NOTES, FIRE ALARM NOTES, SYMBOLS LIST, ABBREVIATIONS & LIGHTING
E01 SITE EXTERIOR LIGHTING
E1 LOWER LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING
E2 FIRST LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING
E3 SECOND LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING
E4 THIRD LEVEL PLAN LIGHTING
E5 LOWER LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM
E6 FIRST LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM
E7 SECOND LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM
E8 THIRD LEVEL PLAN POWER & FIRE ALARM
E9 POWER & FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAMS
E10 PANEL SCHEDULES
E11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
ED1.00 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN

ED1.01 FIRST LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN
ED1.02 MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN
ED1.03 SECOND LEVEL DEMOLTION PLAN
5 7/10/2009
PLUMBING DRAWINGS (17)
P-0.01 SYMBOL AND ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES AND SCHE.
PD1.01 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

PD1.02 FIRST LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
PD1.03 MEZZANINE LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
PD1.04 SECOND LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN
P-1.01 LOWER LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING

P-1.02 FIRST LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING
P-1.03 SECOND LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING
P-1.04 THIRD LEVEL PLAN PLUMBING
P-1.05 ROOF PLAN PLUMBING
P-2.01 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS - PLUMBING
P-3.01 SANITARY / STORM RISER DIAGRAMS

P-3.02 WATER / FIRE RISER DIAGRAMS
P-3.03 GAS RISER DIAGRAMS
P-4.01 DETAILS
TA DRAWINGS (20)
TA001 A/V PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES ABBREVIATIONS, ABD DETAILS
TA100 A/V LOWER LEVEL PLAN

TA101 A/V FIRST LEVEL PLAN
TA102 A/V SECOND LEVEL PLAN
TA103 A/V THIRD LEVEL PLAN
TA104 A/V LOWER LEVEL RCP
TA105 A/V FIRST LEVEL RCP
TA106 A/V SECOND LEVEL RCP
TA107 A/V THIRD LEVEL RCP
TA201 A/V ELEVATION
TA501 A/V DETAILS
TA601 A/V LINE DIAGRAMS
TA701 A/V PLATES AND PANELS

TA801 A/V RACK DETAILS
TN DRAWINGS (16)
TN001 TELECOM PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES, ABBREVIATION, AND DETAILS
TN100 TELECOM LOWER LEVEL PLAN

TN101 TELECOM FIRST LEVEL PLAN
TN102 TELECOM SECOND LEVEL PLAN
TN103 TELECOM THIRD LEVEL PLAN
TY DRAWINGS (10)
TY001 SECURITY PLATE/BOX SCHEDULE, NOTES, ABBREVIATION, AND DETAILS
6 7/10/2009
TY100 SECURITY LOWER LEVEL PLAN
TY101 SECURITY FIRST LEVEL PLAN
TY102 SECURITY SECOND LEVEL PLAN
TY103 SECURITY THIRD LEVEL PLAN
TY104 SECURITY LOWER LEVEL RCP
TY105 SECURITY FIRST LEVEL RCP
TY106 SECURITY SECOND LEVEL RCP
TY107 SECURITY THIRD LEVEL RCP
TY 501 A/V DETAILS
7 7/10/2009
SECTION 16995 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to define Division 16 responsibilities in the commissioning

process.
B. Refer to Section 01810 and 15995 for additional commissioning requirements.
C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 16 to ensure that all systems are operating
in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements
and coordination are detailed in Division 1. Division 16 shall be familiar with all parts of
Division 1 and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract
Documents.
D. With respect to commissioning, the Electrical contractors shall:
1. Include cost for the commissioning requirements, as it pertains to this section, in the
quoted price.
2. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.
3. Schedule work so that required installations are completed, and systems verification
checks and functional performance tests can be carried out on schedule.
4. Inspect, check and confirm in writing the proper installation and performance of all
electrical services provided.
5. Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional
performance testing as required by the CA.
6. Review specification Division 1 and 15 to fully understand their responsibilities as they
pertain to the commissioning processes.
1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Electrical Contractor: The commissioning responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor

are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
Construction and Acceptance Phases

1. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price.
2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data,
commissioning documentation, testing assistance, O&M data, training, etc.
3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings to facilitate the Cx
process. Commissioning shall be discussed monthly, as a regular agenda item during the
normal construction meetings, and minutes submitted to CxA.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 16995-1

4. Contractors shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the CxA of
commissioned equipment.
5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to

the CxA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures.
a. Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating,
troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted
tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all
responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In
addition, the installation, start-up, and checkout materials that are actually shipped
inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the
factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the CxA.
b. The CxA may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning
process.
c. This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.
6. Provide a copy of the O&M manual submittals of commissioned equipment, through

normal channels, to the CxA for review and approval.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and
control of commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, control drawings or
equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures.
Submit manufacturer’s detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and
procedures and other requested equipment documentation to CxA for review.
9. During the start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical-related
portions of the prefunctional checklists provided by the CxA for all commissioned
equipment.
10. Perform and clearly document all completed start-up and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CxA.
11. Address current A/E punch list and Action List items before functional testing.
12. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist in the functional
performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed-upon
schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and
problem solving.
13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as

interpreted by the CxA and A/E and retest the equipment.
14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.

15. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD as-
builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of
commissioning.
16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.
17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain

the validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period
1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built
drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Division 1, & 15 for a listing of all sections where commissioning requirements are
found.
B. Refer to Division 1, 15, & Cx Plan for systems to be commissioned and for functional testing
requirements.
1.04 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS
A. The following systems and equipment (including all integral controls) will be commissioned in
this project. All general references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to be
commissioned.
Electrical Systems and Equipment:
Assist with electrical commissioning of mechanical equipment and systems identified as to be

commissioned. Refer to 15995
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Division 16 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this
Division.
B. Refer to specification Division 1, & 15 for additional Division 16 requirements.
3.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 16 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in this

Section , & Division 1 & 15

3.02 START-UP PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT
A. The electrical contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in the
Responsibilities list in this section and in Division 1. Division 16 has start-up responsibility and
is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design
objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do
not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the CxA or Owner.
3.03 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Refer to Division 1, 15, & CX Plan for a list of systems to be commissioned
B. Contractor is to supply all testing equipment, tools and labor to perform functional testing
3.04 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS
A. Refer to this section for specific details on non-conformance issues relating to prefunctional
checklists and tests.
B. Refer to Division 1 and 15 for issues relating to functional performance tests.
3.05 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A. Division 16 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in
Division 16 and deliver to the CM/GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this
section. This does not replace O&M manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these
Specifications
B. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.
C. Review and Approvals: Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals
shall be made by the A/E. Refer to Division 1.
3.06 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan
described in Division 1, 15, & Cx Plan and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and
prefunctional checklists.
END OF SECTION

Final Construction Dcpl2009r0019 Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Construction Dcpl2009r0019 Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEORGETOWN NEIGHBORHOOD LIBRARY RENOVATION MJA/7590

Washington, DC 100% FINAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

DOCUMENT 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING AND CONTRACTING INFORMATION

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 1/7

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

02230 Site Clearing AMT

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 2/7

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

05720 New Cast-Iron Railings to Match Historic MJA

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 3/7

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

08592 Historic Treatment of Wood Windows MJA

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 4/7

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories MJA

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 5/7

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

15452 Plumbing Pumps – ADDED JJC

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 6/7

DIVISION SECTION TITLE

16670 Lightning Protection System JJC

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - 7/7

SECTION 16740 - COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA.

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Project Management, Scheduling and Quality Assurance

1. Installation of Structured Telecommunication Cable Plant

D. Related Work - Not Covered - in this Section or is “by Others”:

1. Coring, Sleeves, Stub-Ups and Poke-Through Installation

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 1 / 16

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

D. Cable System Design Option

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 2 / 16

A. General: Submittals shall be according to Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.

D. Design Drawings: In addition to the requirements of Section for “Submittal Procedures”

E. Project Management Organization Chart:

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Labeling Requirements: Raceways, boxes and fittings shall be Underwriters' Laboratories,

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 3 / 16

requirements that comply with general conditions of specifications and contract

C. Project Manager/Project Designer Qualifications: A qualified individual(s) with current

1. The National Electric Code

A. Warranty will be in effect at Substantial Completion.

1.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION / STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

1. Passing Transmission test results on the Riser cabling.

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 4 / 16

1. James Reigle AIA, LEED A.P.

2.1 COMMUNICATION CABINETS, RACKS, AND FRAMES

A. Main Equipment Room – Main Distribution Frame (MDF)

1. Heavy-Duty, Open 4-post Free Standing Server Racks

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 5 / 16

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER PATCH PANELS

A. MDF Room 309

2.3 CABLE SUPPORT AND FIRESTOPPING

COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA 16740 - 6 / 16